Irig 106 2009

Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Table of Contents, April 2009
DOCUMENT 106-09

TELEMETRY GROUP

TELEMETRY STANDARDS
(PART 1)

ABERDEEN TEST CENTER
DUGWAY PROVING GROUND
ELECTRONIC PROVING GROUND
HIGH ENERGY LASER SYSTEMS TEST FACILITY
KWAJALEIN/REAGAN TEST SITE
NATIONAL TRAINING CENTER
WHITE SANDS MISSILE RANGE
YUMA PROVING GROUND

NAVAL AIR WARFARE CENTER AIRCRAFT DIVISION
NAVAL AIR WARFARE CENTER WEAPONS DIVISION
NAVAL UNDERSEA WARFARE CENTER DIVISION, KEYPORT
NAVAL UNDERSEA WARFARE CENTER DIVISION NEWPORT
PACIFIC MISSILE RANGE FACILITY

30TH SPACE WING
45TH SPACE WING
AIR ARMAMENT CENTER
AIR FORCE FLIGHT TEST CENTER
ARNOLD ENGINEERING DEVELOPMENT CENTER
BARRY M. GOLDWATER RANGE

NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION

DISTRIBUTION A: APPROVED FOR PUBLIC RELEASE
DISTRIBUTION IS UNLIMITED

This page intentionally left blank.

DOCUMENT 106-09

TELEMETRY STANDARDS
(PART 1)

APRIL 2009

Prepared by

TELEMETRY GROUP

Published by

Secretariat
Range Commanders Council
U.S. Army White Sands Missile Range,
New Mexico 88002-5110



TELEMETRY STANDARDS (PART 1)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHANGES IN THIS EDITION (SUMMARY) v

PREFACE vii

CHAPTERS
CHAPTER 1: Introduction, Part I
CHAPTER 2: Transmitter and Receiver Systems
CHAPTER 3: Frequency Division Multiplexing Telemetry Standards
CHAPTER 4: Pulse Code Modulation Standards
CHAPTER 5: Digitized Audio Telemetry Standard
CHAPTER 6: Digital Cassette Helical Scan Recorder/Reproducer, Multiplexer/Demultiplexer,
Tape Cassette, and Recorder Control and Command Mnemonics Standards
CHAPTER 7: Reserved for New Topic: Ground Based Digital Recording Standard (Solid
State and Disk Systems)
CHAPTER 8: Digital Data Bus Acquisition Formatting Standard
CHAPTER 9: * Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard
CHAPTER 10: * Digital On-board Recorder Standard

APPENDIXES

APPENDIX A: Frequency Considerations for Telemetry
APPENDIX B: Use Criteria for Frequency Division Multiplexing
APPENDIX C: PCM Standards (Additional Information and Recommendations)
APPENDIX D: Magnetic Tape Recorder and Reproducer Information and Use Criteria
APPENDIX E: Deleted (Available Transducer Documentation)
APPENDIX F: Continuously Variable Slope Delta Modulation
APPENDIX G: ADARIO Data Block Field Definitions
APPENDIX H: Application of the Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard
APPENDIX I: Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard Cover Sheet
APPENDIX J: Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard Format Example
APPENDIX K: Pulse Amplitude Modulation Standards
APPENDIX L: Asynchronous Recorder Multiplexer Output Re-constructor (ARMOR)
APPENDIX M: Properties of the Differential Encoder Specified in IRIG Standard 106 for
OQPSK Modulations
APPENDIX N: * Telemetry Transmitter Command and Control Protocol
APPENDIX O: * Floating Point Formats
APPENDIX P: ** Derived Parameter Specification

Top
* Changed ** New

iii


iv

CHANGES IN THIS EDITION

This document is an updated version of and replaces Range Commanders Council (RCC)
Document 106-07 (Part 1: Telemetry Standards (September 2007). The RCC Telemetry Group
(TG) made an extensive effort to produce a well-coordinated and useful document. The
following is a summary of these efforts.

a. Task TG-81: Update Chapter 10, Data Archive Naming Convention

Task Objective/Product. Define a standard for the Chapter 10 file directory/name for
a Removable Memory Module (RMM), a hard disk, or a tape. Establish an archival
block size format for all digital media.

Comment. A related task, TG-83 resulted in a users handbook for the 2007 edition of
Chapter 10. The document name is IRIG 106-07 Chapter 10 Programming
Handbook, and it can be downloaded from RCC document folder RCC 123-09 (IRIG
106-07 Chapter 10 Programming Handbook).

b. Task TG-93 (Part 1): Update Chapter 9: Telemetry Attributes Transfer
Standard (TMATS)

Task Objective/Product. To enhance the content of the TMATS to keep current data
standards in the IRIG 106. The product will be an updated IRIG 106.

Comment. Numerous Chapter 10 related changes were made to Chapter 9. The
Packet Format Attributes Group was removed and the Message Data Attributes
Group was added. Various other minor changes were made. The TMATS provides a
common definition and format to facilitate the transfer of information between the
user and the test range and between ranges.

c. Task TG-93 (Part 2): Update Appendix O: Floating Point Formats

Task Objective/Product. To provide an updated summary and details of floating
point formats.

Comment. Included in the changes, Appendix O now includes a detailed description
of the DEC_64 Bit G Double Precision Floating Point format.

d. Task TG-93 (Part 3): Appendix P (NEW): Derived Parameter Specification

Task Objective/Product. Appendix P defines Derived Parameters and identifies the
components of Derived Algorithm Grammar (operators, numeric constants,
measurements, and mathematical functions). Appendix P also provides an overview
of grammar syntax as well as usage examples of grammar and TMATS.

v

Comment. Derived parameters are measurements that do not appear in any data
stream; instead, they are calculated from telemetry measurements in a data stream,
numeric constants, and/or other derived measurements.

e. Task TG-96: Update Appendix N: Telemetry Transmitter Command And
Control Protocol

Task Objective/Product. To update Appendix N of the IRIG 106 to correct errors and
implement improvements.

Comment. Appendix N provides standards for commands, queries, and status
information when communicating with telemetry transmitters configured with
communication ports.

vi

vii
PREFACE

The Telemetry Group (TG) of the Range Commanders Council (RCC) has prepared this
document to foster the compatibility of telemetry transmitting, receiving, and signal processing
equipment at the member ranges under the cognizance of the RCC. The Range Commanders
highly recommend that telemetry equipment operated by the ranges and telemetry equipment
used in programs that require range support conform to these standards.

These standards do not necessarily define the existing capability of any test range, but
constitute a guide for the orderly implementation of telemetry systems for both ranges and range
users. The scope of capabilities attainable with the utilization of these standards requires the
careful consideration of tradeoffs. Guidance concerning these tradeoffs is provided in the text.
The standards provide the necessary criteria on which to base equipment design and
modification. The ultimate purpose is to ensure efficient spectrum utilization, interference-free
operation, interoperability between ranges, and compatibility of range user equipment with the
ranges.

This standard, published in two parts, is complemented by a companion series, RCC
Document 118, Test Methods for Telemetry Systems and Subsystems, and RCC Document 119,
Telemetry Applications Handbook.

The policy of the Telemetry Group is to update the telemetry standards and test methods
documents as required to be consistent with advances in technology.

Please direct any questions to:

Secretariat, Range Commanders Council
ATTN: CSTE-DTC-WS-RCC
100 Headquarters Avenue
White Sands Missile Range, New Mexico 88002-5110
Telephone: (505) 678-1107, DSN 258-1107
E-mail: mailto:wsmrrcc@conus.army.mil

****** NOTHING FOLLOWS ******
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Chapter 1, April 2009
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
PART I

Part I of the Telemetry Standards addresses the here-to-date conventional methods,
techniques, and practices affiliated with aeronautical telemetry applicable to the member
RCC ranges. Part I is composed of ten chapters, with each devoted to a different element of
the telemetry system or process.

Reference documents are identified at the point of reference. Commonly used terms are
defined in standard reference glossaries and dictionaries. Definitions of terms with special
applications are included when the term first appears, generally in the front sections of individual
chapters. Radio frequency terms are defined in the Manual of Regulations and Procedures for
Federal Radio Frequency Management. Copies of that manual may be obtained from:

Executive Secretary, Interdepartmental Radio Advisory Committee (IRAC)
U.S. Department of Commerce, National Telecommunications and Information
Administration (NTIA)
Room 1605, HCHB Building
14
th
and Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20230

Page 1 of 1

CHAPTER 2

TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER SYSTEMS
Paragraph Subject Page

2.1 Radio Frequency Standards for Telemetry ..................................................... 2-1
2.2 Definitions ...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 UHF Bands ..................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4 UHF Telemetry Transmitter Systems ............................................................. 2-4
2.5 UHF Telemetry Receiver Systems ............................................................... 2-15

REFERENCES

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 2-1. FQPSK-JR baseband signal generator. ............................................................ 2-6
Figure 2-2. Basic SOQPSK. ............................................................................................... 2-8
Figure 2-3. SOQPSK transmitter. ..................................................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-4. Conceptual CPM modulator. ......................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-5. Continuous single sideband phase noise power spectral density. .................. 2-13

LIST OF TABLES

Table 2-1. Telemetry Frequency Allocations .................................................................... 2-2
Table 2-2. FQPSK-JR Shaping Filter Definition .............................................................. 2-7
Table 2-3. FQPSK-B and FQPSK-JR Phase Map ............................................................. 2-8
Table 2-4. SOQPSK-TG Parameters .............................................................................. 2-10
Table 2-5. SOQPSK PRE-Coding Table for IRIG-106 Compatibility ........................... 2-11
Table 2-6. Dibit to Impulse Area Mapping ..................................................................... 2-12
Table 2-7. Standard Receiver Intermediate Frequency (IF) Bandwidths ........................ 2-16

.

ii


CHAPTER 2
TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER SYSTEMS
2.1 Radio Frequency Standards for Telemetry
These standards provide the criteria to determine equipment and frequency use
requirements and are intended to ensure efficient and interference-free use of the radio frequency
spectrum. These standards also provide a common framework for sharing data and providing
support for test operations between ranges. The radio frequency spectrum is a limited natural
resource; therefore, efficient use of available spectrum is mandatory. In addition, susceptibility
to interference must be minimized. Systems not conforming to these standards require
justification upon application for frequency allocation, and the use of such systems is highly
discouraged. The standards contained herein are derived from the National Telecommunications
and Information Administration's (NTIA) Manual of Regulations and Procedures for Federal
Radio Frequency Management; see http://www.ntia.doc.gov/osmhome/redbook/redbook.html.

2.2 Definitions
Allocation (of a Frequency Band). Entry of a frequency band into the Table of
Frequency Allocations
1
for use by one or more radio communication services or the radio
astronomy service under specified conditions.

Assignment (of a Radio Frequency (RF) or Radio Frequency Channel (RFC)).
Authorization given by an administration, for a radio station to use a radio frequency or radio
frequency channel under specified conditions.

Authorization. Permission to use a RF or RFC channel under specified conditions.

Occupied Bandwidth. The width of a frequency band such that below the lower and
above the upper frequency limits, the mean powers emitted are each equal to a specified
percentage of the total mean power of a given emission. Unless otherwise specified by the
International Telecommunication Union (ITU) for the appropriate class of emission, the
specified percentage shall be 0.5 percent. The occupied bandwidth is also called the 99-percent
power bandwidth in this document.

Primary Service. A service that has full rights in a band of frequencies and can claim
protection from harmful interference from other services.

1
The definitions of the radio services that can be operated within certain frequency bands contained in the radio
regulations as agreed to by the member nations of the International Telecommunications Union. This table is
maintained in the United States by the Federal Communications Commission and the NTIA.

2-1

Secondary Service. Service that can be obtained on a noninterference operation basis
with primary service users. Stations of a secondary service shall not cause harmful interference
to stations of a primary service and cannot claim protection from interference from stations of a
primary service; however, they can claim protection from harmful interference from other
secondary stations to which frequencies were assigned at a later date.

2.3 UHF Bands
The bands used for telemetry are described unofficially as the lower-L band from 1435 to
1535 MHz, the lower S-band from 2200 to 2290 MHz, and the upper S-band from 2310 to 2395
MHz (see Table 2-1). The 1755 to 1850 MHz band (unofficially called upper L-band) can also
be used for telemetry at many test ranges although it is not listed in the NTIA Table of
Allocations explicitly as a telemetry band. The mobile service is a primary service in the 1755 to
1850 MHz band and telemetry is a part of the mobile service. Since the 1755-1850 MHz band is
not considered a standard telemetry band per this document, potential users must coordinate, in
advance, with the individual range(s) and ensure use of this band can be supported at the subject
range and that it will meet their technical requirements. While these band designations are
common in telemetry parlance, they may have no specific meaning to anyone else. Telemetry
assignments are made for testing
2
manned and unmanned aircraft, for missiles, for space, land,
and sea test vehicles, and for rocket sleds and systems carried on such sleds. Telemetry
assignments are also made for testing major components of the systems shown above.

TABLE 2-1. TELEMETRY FREQUENCY ALLOCATIONS
FREQUENCY RANGE
(MHz)
UNOFFICIAL
DESIGNATION

COMMENTS
1435-1525 Lower L-band Telemetry primary service (part of
mobile service) in USA
1525-1535 Lower L-band Mobile satellite service (MSS) primary
service, telemetry secondary service in
USA
2200-2290 Lower S-band Telemetry co-primary service in USA
2310-2360 Upper S-band Wireless Communications Service
(WCS) and broadcasting-satellite
(sound) service (BSS) primary services,
telemetry secondary service in USA
2360-2390 Upper S-band Telemetry primary service in USA

2
A telemetry system as defined here is not critical to the operational (tactical) function of the system.
2-2

2.3.1 Allocation of the lower-L Band (1435 to 1535 MHz). This band is allocated in the
United States of America and its possessions for government and nongovernmental aeronautical
telemetry use on a shared basis. The Aerospace and Flight Test Radio Coordinating Council
(AFTRCC) coordinates the non-governmental use of this band. The frequencies in this range
will be assigned for aeronautical telemetry and associated remote-control operations
3
for testing
of manned or unmanned aircraft, missiles, rocket sleds, and other vehicles or their major
components. Authorized usage includes telemetry associated with launching and reentry into the
earth's atmosphere as well as any incidental orbiting prior to reentry of manned or unmanned
vehicles undergoing flight tests. The following frequencies are shared with flight telemetering
mobile stations: 1444.5, 1453.5, 1501.5, 1515.5, 1524.5, and 1525.5 MHz.

2.3.1.1 1435 to 1525 MHz. This frequency range is allocated for the exclusive use of
aeronautical telemetry in the United States of America.

2.3.1.2 1525 to 1530 MHz. The 1525 to 1530 MHz band was reallocated at the 1992 World
Administrative Radio Conference (WARC-92). The mobile-satellite service is now a primary
service in this band. The mobile service, which includes aeronautical telemetry, is now a
secondary service in this band.

2.3.1.3 1530 to 1535 MHz. The maritime mobile-satellite service is a primary service in the
frequency band from 1530 to 1535 MHz
4
. The mobile service (including aeronautical telemetry)
is a secondary service in this band.

2.3.2 Allocation of the lower-S Band (2200 to 2300 MHz). No provision is made in this
band for the flight-testing of manned aircraft.

2.3.2.1 2200 to 2290 MHz. These frequencies are shared equally by the United States
Government's fixed, mobile, space research, space operation, and the Earth exploration-satellite
services. These frequencies include telemetry associated with launch vehicles, missiles, upper
atmosphere research rockets, and space vehicles regardless of their trajectories.

2.3.2.2 2290 to 2300 MHz. Allocations in this range are for the space research service (deep
space only) on a shared basis with the fixed and mobile (except aeronautical mobile) services.

2.3.3 Allocation of the Upper S Band (2310 to 2390 MHz). This band is allocated to the
fixed, mobile, radiolocation, and broadcasting-satellite services in the United States of America.
Government and nongovernmental telemetry users share this band in a manner similar to that of
the L band. Telemetry assignments are made for flight-testing of manned or unmanned aircraft,
missiles, space vehicles, or their major components.

2.3.3.1 2310 to 2360 MHz. These frequencies have been reallocated and were auctioned by
the Federal Communications Commission in April 1997. The Wireless Communications Service
is the primary service in the frequencies 2305-2320 MHz and 2345-2360 MHz. The
broadcasting-satellite (sound) service is the primary service in the 2320-2345 MHz band. In the

3
The word used for remote control operations in this band is telecommand.
4
Reallocated as of 1 January 1990.
2-3

band 2320-2345 MHz, the mobile and radiolocation services are allocated on a primary basis
until a broadcasting-satellite (sound) service has been brought into use in such a manner as to
affect or be affected by the mobile and radiolocation services in those service areas

2.3.3.2 2360 to 2390 MHz. The Mobile Service (including aeronautical telemetry) is a
primary service in this band. The status of 2390-2395 MHz is in the process of being finalized.
The latest version has these frequencies being made available for telemetry applications.

2.4 UHF Telemetry Transmitter Systems
Telemetry requirements for air, space, and ground systems are accommodated in the
appropriate UHF bands 1435 to 1535, 2200 to 2300, and 2310 to 2390 MHz as described in
paragraph 2.3.

2.4.1 Center Frequency Tolerance. Unless otherwise dictated by a particular application,
the frequency tolerance for a telemetry transmitter shall be 0.002 percent of the transmitter's
assigned center frequency. Transmitter designs shall control transient frequency errors
associated with startup and power interruptions. During the first second after turn-on, the
transmitter output frequency shall be within the occupied bandwidth of the modulated signal at
any time when the transmitter output power exceeds -25 dBm. Between 1 and 5 seconds after
initial turn-on, the transmitter frequency shall remain within twice the specified limits for the
assigned radio frequency. After 5 seconds, the standard frequency tolerance is applicable for any
and all operations where the transmitter power output is -25 dBm or greater (or produces a field
strength greater than 320 V/meter at a distance of 30 meters from the transmitting antenna in
any direction). Specific uses may dictate tolerances more stringent than those stated.

2.4.2 Output Power. Emitted power levels shall always be limited to the minimum required
for the application. The output power shall not exceed 25 watts
5
. The effective isotropic
radiated power (EIRP) shall not exceed 25 watts
5
.

2.4.3 Modulation. The traditional modulation methods for aeronautical telemetry are
frequency modulation and phase modulation. Pulse code modulation (PCM)/frequency
modulation (FM) has been the most popular telemetry modulation since around 1970. The
PCM/FM method could also be called filtered continuous phase frequency shift keying
(CPFSK). The RF signal is typically generated by filtering the baseband non-return-to-zero-
level (NRZ-L) signal and then frequency modulating a voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO). The
optimum peak deviation is 0.35 times the bit rate and a good choice for a premodulation filter is
a multi-pole linear phase filter with bandwidth equal to 0.7 times the bit rate. Frequency and
phase modulation have a variety of desirable features but may not provide the required
bandwidth efficiency, especially for higher bit rates. When better bandwidth efficiency is
required, the standard methods for digital signal transmission are the Feher patented quadrature
phase shift keying (FQPSK-B and FQPSK-JR), the shaped offset quadrature phase shift keying
(SOQPSK-TG), and the Advanced Range Telemetry (ARTM) continuous phase modulation
(CPM). Each of these methods offer constant, or nearly constant, envelope characteristics and

5
An exemption from this EIRP limit will be considered; however, systems with EIRP levels greater than 25 watts
will be considered nonstandard systems and will require additional coordination with affected test ranges.
2-4

are compatible with non-linear amplifiers with minimal spectral regrowth and minimal
degradation of detection efficiency. The first three methods (FQPSK-B, FQPSK-JR, and
SOQPSK-TG) are interoperable and require the use of the differential encoder described in
paragraph 2.4.3.1.1 below. Additional information on this differential encoder is contained in
Appendix M. All of these bandwidth-efficient modulation methods require the data to be
randomized. Additional characteristics of these modulation methods are discussed in the
following paragraphs and in section 7 of Appendix A.

2.4.3.1 Characteristics of FQPSK-B. FQPSK-B is described in the Digcom Inc. publication,
FQPSK-B, Revision A1, Digcom-Feher Patented Technology Transfer Document, January 15,
1999. This document can be obtained under a license from:

Digcom Inc.
44685 Country Club Drive
El Macero, CA 95618
Telephone: 530-753-0738
FAX: 530-753-1788

2.4.3.1.1 Differential Encoding. Differential encoding shall be provided for FQPSK-B,
FQPSK-JR, and SOQPSK-TG and shall be consistent with the following definitions:

The NRZ-L data bit sequence {b
n
} is sampled periodically by the transmitter at time
instants:

,.... 2 , 1 , 0 = = n nT t
b

where T
b
is the NRZ-L bit period. Using the bit index values n as references to the
beginning of symbol periods, the differential encoder alternately assembles I channel and Q
channel symbols to form the following sequences:

,... , ,
and
,... , ,
7 5 3
6 4 2
Q Q Q
I I I

according to the following rules:

( )
( ) ( )
2) - (2 0 n
1) - (2 0 n
2 1 2 1 2
1 2 2 2
> =
> =
+ +
n n n
n n n
I b Q
Q b I

where denotes the exclusive-or operator, and the bar above a variable indicates the
not or inversion operator. Q channel symbols are offset (delayed) relative to I channel symbols
by one bit period.
2-5

2.4.3.1.2 Characteristics Of FQPSK-JR. FQPSK-JR is a cross-correlated, constant envelope,
spectrum shaped variant of FQPSK. It assumes a quadrature modulator architecture and
synchronous digital synthesis of the I and Q channel modulating signals as outlined in
Figure2-1.
S
e
r
i
a
l
/
P
a
r
a
l
l
e
l
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
t
i
a
l

E
n
c
o
d
e
r
W
a
v
e
l
e
t

A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
Clock x
b(nT
b
)
r
b
clock
I
n
t
e
r
p
o
l
a
t
e
"-JR"
"-JR"
LPF
LPF
DAC
DAC
Clock x
To
Modulator
I
Digital Analog
Q

Figure 2-1. FQPSK-JR baseband signal generator.

2-6

FQPSK-JR utilizes the time domain wavelet functions defined in United States patent
4,567,602, with two exceptions. The transition functions,

2
2
1 1
sin 1
cos 1
) (
2
2
= =

=
A K
T
t
K
T
t
K
t G
s
s
(2-3)
used in the cited patent are replaced with the following transition functions:

2
2
sin 1
cos 1
) (
2 2
2 2
=

=
A
T
t
A
T
t
A
t G
s
s
(2-4)

where T
s
= 2/r
b
is the symbol period. The digital JR spectrum-shaping filter used for
each channel is a linear phase, finite impulse response (FIR) filter. The filter is defined in terms
of its impulse response sequence h(n) in Table 2-2 and assumes a fixed wavelet sample rate of
= 6 samples per symbol. The JR
equiv
column is the aggregate response of the cascaded JR
a
and
JR
b
filters actually used.

TABLE 2-2. FQPSK-JR SHAPING FILTER DEFINITION
FILTER
WEIGHT
JR
equiv
JR
a
JR
b

h(0) -0.046875 2
-2
-(2
-3
+ 2
-4
)
h(1) 0.109375 h(0) (2
-1
+ 2
-3
)
h(2) 0.265625 h(0) h(1)
h(3) h(2) - h(0)
h(4) h(1) - -
h(5) h(0) - -

2-7

Digital interpolation is used to increase sample rate, moving all alias images created
by digital to analog conversion sufficiently far away from the fundamental signal frequency
range that out-of-channel noise floors can be well controlled. The FQPSK-JR reference
implementations currently utilize 4-stage Cascade-Integrator-Comb (CIC) interpolators with
unity memory lag factor (see reference [1]). Interpolation ratio is adjusted as a function of bit
rate such that fixed cutoff frequency post-D/A anti-alias filters can be used to cover the entire
range of required data rates.
6

2.4.3.1.3 Carrier Suppression. The remnant carrier level shall be no greater than 30 dBc.
Additional information of carrier suppression can be seen at section 7 of Appendix A.

2.4.3.1.4 Quadrature Modulator Phase Map. Table 2-3 lists the mapping from the input to the
modulator (after differential encoding and FQPSK-B or FQPSK-JR wavelet assembly) to the
carrier phase of the modulator output. The amplitudes in Table 2-3 are a, where a is a
normalized amplitude.

TABLE 2-3. FQPSK-B AND FQPSK-JR PHASE MAP
I CHANNEL Q CHANNEL RESULTANT CARRIER PHASE
a a 45 degrees
-a a 135 degrees
-a -a 225 degrees
a -a 315 degrees

2.4.3.2 Characteristics of SOQPSK-TG. SOQPSK is a family of constant envelope CPM
waveforms defined by Mr. T. Hill (see references [2], [3], [4], and [5]). It is most
simply described as a non-linear frequency modulation modeled as shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2. Basic SOQPSK.

6
The FQPSK-JR definition does not include a specific interpolation method and a post-D/A filter design. However,
it is known that benchmark performance will be difficult to achieve if the combined effects of interpolation and anti-
alias filter produce more than .04 dB excess attenuation at 0.0833 times the input sample rate and more than 1.6 dB
of additional attenuation at 0.166 times the sample rate where the input sample rate is referred to the input of the
interpolator assuming 6 samples per second.
2-8

The SOQPSK waveform family is uniquely defined in terms of impulse excitation of a frequency
impulse shaping filter function g(t):

5) - (2 ) ( ) ( ) ( t w t n t g =

where

) (
) (
6) - (2
) (
) ( sin
) ( 4 1
) ( cos
) (
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
s
s
T
Bt
t
T
Bt
t
t
t
t
t A
t n
=
=
+ >
+ <
2 1
2 1 1
2
1
1
, 0
7) - (2 , cos 1
2
1
, 1
w(t)
T T
T
t
T T
T
t
T
T
T
T
t
T
T
t
s
s
s
s

n(t) is a modified spectral raised cosine filter of amplitude A, rolloff factor and having
an additional time scaling factor B. The function w(t) is a time domain windowing function that
limits the duration of g(t). The amplitude scale factor A is chosen such that

( )
( )
8) - (2
2
) (
2 1
2 1
+
+
=
s
s
T T T
T T T
dt t g

Given a time series binary data sequence

( ) 9) - (2 .... , , , , ...,
2 1 0 1 2
a a a a a a

=
r

wherein the bits are represented by normalized antipodal amplitudes {+1,-1}, the ternary
impulse series is formed with the following mapping rule. See also references [4] and [5].

( )
( )
10) - (2
2
1
2 1
1

+

=
i i i
i
a a a

2-9

which forms a data sequence alphabet of three values {+1,0,-1}. It is important to
note that this modulation definition does not establish an absolute relationship between the
digital in-band inter-switch trunk signaling (dibits) of the binary data alphabet and transmitted
phase as with conventional quadriphase OQPSK implementations. In order to achieve
interoperability with coherent FQPSK-B demodulators, some form of precoding must be applied
to the data stream prior to, or in conjunction with, conversion to the ternary excitation alphabet.
The differential encoder defined in paragraph 2.4.3.1.1 fulfills this need. However, to guarantee
full interoperability with the other waveform options, the polarity relationship between frequency
impulses and resulting frequency or phase change must be controlled. Thus, SOQPSK
modulators proposed for this application shall guarantee that an impulse of value of (+1) will
result in an advancement of the transmitted phase relative to that of the nominal carrier
frequency (i.e., the instantaneous frequency is above the nominal carrier).

For purposes of this standard, only one specific variant of SOQPSK and SOQPSK-
TG is acceptable. This variant is defined by the parameter values given in Table 2-4.

TABLE 2-4. SOQPSK-TG PARAMETERS
SOQPSK TYPE

B T
1
T
2

SOQPSK-TG 0.70 1.25 1.5 0.50

2.4.3.2.1 Differential Encoding of SOQPSK-TG. As discussed above, interoperability with
FQPSK-B equipment requires a particular pre-coding protocol or a functional equivalent thereof.
A representative model is shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3. SOQPSK transmitter.
PRE-CODER
FREQUENCY
IMPULSE
FILTER g(t)
FREQUENCY
MODULATOR
{a (nT
b
)}
Impulse Series
(nT
b
)
S(t)
DIFFERENTIAL
ENCODER
I
k
Q
k+1

The differential encoder block will be implemented in accordance with the definition
of Section 2.4.3.1.1. Given the symbol sequences I
k
and Q
k
, and the proviso that a normalized
impulse sign of +1 will increase frequency, the pre-coder will provide interoperability with the
FQPSK signals defined herein if code symbols are mapped to frequency impulses in accordance
with Table 2-5 (below) where is the phase change.
2-10

TABLE 2-5. SOQPSK PRE-CODING TABLE FOR IRIG-106 COMPATIBILITY
MAP
K
FROM I
K
MAP
K+1
FROM Q
K+1

I
k
Q
k-1
I
k-2

k
Q
k+1
I
k
Q
k-1

k+1

-1 X
*
-1 0 0 -1 X
*
-1 0 0
+1 X
*
+1 0 0 +1 X
*
+1 0 0
-1 -1 +1 -/2 -1 -1 -1 +1 +/2 +1
-1 +1 +1 +/2 +1 -1 +1 +1 -/2 -1
+1 -1 -1 +/2 +1 +1 -1 -1 -/2 -1
+1 +1 -1 -/2 -1 +1 +1 -1 +/2 +1
* Note: Does not matter if X is a +1 or a -1

2.4.3.3 Characteristics of Advanced Range Telemetry (ARTM) CPM. ARTM CPM is a
quaternary signaling scheme in which the instantaneous frequency of the modulated signal is a
function of the source data stream. The frequency pulses are shaped for spectral containment
purposes. The modulation index alternates at the symbol rate between two values to improve the
likelihood that the transmitted data is faithfully recovered. Although the following description is
in terms of carrier frequency, other representations and generation methods exist that are
equivalent. A block diagram of a conceptual ARTM CPM modulator is illustrated in Figure 2-4.
Source bits are presented to the modulator and are mapped into impulses that are applied to a
filter with an impulse response g(t). The resulting waveform f(t) is proportional to the
instantaneous frequency of the desired modulator output. This signal can be used to frequency
modulate a carrier to produce an RF signal representation.

Frequency
Filter g(t)
Frequency
Modulator
Data to
Impulse
Mapping
a(iT/2)
(t)
s(t,)
0001101101...
f(t,)
Multi-h
CPM
+1
-1
t
+3
-3
11
10
01
00
t

Figure 2-4. Conceptual CPM modulator.
2-11

Variables and function definitions in Figure 2-4 above are as follows:

a(iT/2) = ith bit of binary source data, either a 0 or 1

The frequency pulse shape for ARTM CPM is a three symbol long raised cosine
pulse defined by
=
T
t
T
t g
3
2
cos 1
6
1
) (

for 0 t 3T (2-11)
T = Symbol period equal to 2/(bit rate in bits/second)

(iT) = ith impulse with area equal to either a +3,+1,-1 or 3 determined by
Table 2-6 below. Note that an impulse is generated for each dibit pair (at the
symbol rate).
f(t,) = frequency filter output equal to (2-12)
+
=

i
i
iT t g iT h ) ( ) (
h = modulation index; h alternates between h
1
and h
2
where h
1
= 4/16, h
2
= 5/16

TABLE 2-6. DIBIT TO IMPULSE AREA MAPPING
INPUT DIBIT [a(i) a(i+1)] IMPULSE AREA
1 1 +3
1 0 +1
0 1 -1
0 0 -3

For more information on the ARTM CPM waveform, please refer to Appendix A of this
document and to the publication at reference [6].

2.4.3.4 Data Randomization. The data input to the transmitter shall be randomized using either
an encryptor that provides randomization or an Interrange Instrumentation Group (IRIG) 15-bit
randomizer as described in Chapter 6 and Appendix D. The purpose of the randomizer is to
prevent degenerative data patterns from degrading data quality.

2.4.3.5 Bit Rate. The bit rate range for FQPSK-B, FQPSK-JR, and SOQPSK-TG shall be
between 1 Mb/s and 20 Mb/s. The bit rate range for ARTM CPM shall be between 5 Mb/s and
20 Mb/s.

2.4.3.6 Transmitter Phase Noise. The sum of all discrete spurious spectral components (single
sideband) shall be less than -36 dBc. The continuous single sideband phase noise power spectral
density (PSD) shall be below the curve shown in Figure 2-5 below. The maximum frequency for
the curve in Figure 2-5 is one-fourth of the bit rate. For bit rates greater than 4 Mb/s, the phase
noise PSD shall be less than 100 dBc/Hz between 1 MHz and one-fourth of the bit rate.
2-12

Single Sideband Phase Noise L(f) - Upper Limit
-30
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-30
-60
-80
-90
-100 -100
-110
-100
-90
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
10 100 1000 10000 100000 1000000
Frequency Offset From Carrier - Hertz
L
(
f
)

-

d
B
c
/
H
z
FQPSK or SOQPSK CPM

Figure 2-5. Continuous single sideband phase noise power spectral density.

2.4.3.7 Modulation Polarity. An increasing voltage at the input of a frequency modulation (FM)
transmitter shall cause an increase in output carrier frequency. An increase in voltage at the
input of a phase modulation (PM) transmitter shall cause an advancement in the phase of the
output carrier. An increase in voltage at the input of an amplitude modulation (AM) transmitter
shall cause an increase in the output voltage of the output carrier.

2.4.4 Spurious Emission and Interference Limits. Spurious
7
emissions from the transmitter
case, through input and power leads, and at the transmitter radio frequency (RF) output and
antenna-radiated spurious emissions are to be within required limits shown in MIL-STD-461,
Electromagnetic Emission and Susceptibility Requirements for the Control of Electromagnetic
Interference. Other applicable standards and specifications may be used in place of
MIL-STD-461 if necessary.

2.4.4.1 Transmitter-Antenna System Emissions. Emissions from the antenna are of primary
importance. For example, a tuned antenna may or may not attenuate spurious frequency
products produced by the transmitter, and an antenna or multi-transmitter system may generate
spurious outputs when a pure signal is fed to its input. The transmitting pattern of such spurious
frequencies is generally different from the pattern at the desired frequency. Spurious outputs in
the transmitter output line shall be limited to -25 dBm. Antenna-radiated spurious outputs shall
be no greater than 320 V/meter at 30 meters in any direction.

7
Any unwanted signal or emission is spurious whether or not it is related to the transmitter frequency (harmonic).
2-13

WARNING: Spurious levels of -25 dBm may severely degrade performance of sensitive
receivers whose antennas are located in close proximity to the telemetry transmitting antenna.
Therefore, lower spurious levels may be required in certain frequency ranges, such as near GPS
frequencies.
2.4.4.2 Conducted and Radiated Interference. Interference (and the RF output itself) radiated from
the transmitter or fed back into the transmitter power, signal, or control leads could interfere with the
normal operation of the transmitter or the antenna system to which the transmitter is connected. All
signals conducted by the transmitter's leads (other than the RF output cable) in the range of 150 kHz
to 50 MHz, and all radiated fields in the range of 150 kHz to 10 GHz (or other frequency ranges as
specified) must be within the limits of the applicable standards or specifications.

2.4.5 Operational Flexibility. Each transmitter shall be capable of operating at all frequencies
within its allocated band without design modification
8
.

2.4.6 Modulated Transmitter Bandwidth.
9
Telemetry applications covered by this standard shall use
99-percent power bandwidth to define occupied bandwidth and -25 dBm bandwidth as the primary
measure of spectral efficiency. The -25 dBm bandwidth is the minimum bandwidth that contains all
spectral components that are -25 dBm or larger. A power level of -25 dBm is exactly equivalent to an
attenuation of the transmitter power by 55 + 10log(P) dB where P is the transmitter power expressed in
watts. The spectra are assumed symmetrical about the transmitters center frequency unless specified
otherwise. All spectral components larger than (55 + 10log(P)) dBc at the transmitter output must be
within the spectral mask calculated using the following equation:

( )
m
R
f f f f R K f M c c + = ; log 100 log 90 (2-13)
where
M(f) = power relative to P (i.e., units of dBc) at frequency f (MHz)
K = -20 for analog signals
K = -28 for binary signals
K = -61 for FQPSK-B, FQPSK-JR, SOQPSK-TG
K = -73 for ARTM CPM
f
c
= transmitter center frequency (MHz)
R = bit rate (Mb/s) for digital signals or
(MHz) for analog FM signals (
max
f f + )

m = number of states in modulating signal;
m = 2 for binary signals
m = 4 for quaternary signals and analog signals
f = peak deviation
f
max
= maximum modulation frequency

8
The intent is that fixed frequency transmitters can be used at different frequencies by changing crystals or other
components. All applicable performance requirements will be met after component change.
9
These bandwidths are measured using a spectruma analyzer with the following settings: 30-kHz resolution
bandwidth, 300-Hz video bandwidth, and no max hold detector or averaging.
2-14

Note that the mask in this standard is different than the masks contained in earlier versions of
the Telemetry Standards. Equation (2-13) does not apply to spectral components separated from the
center frequency by less than R/m. The 25 dBm bandwidth is not required to be narrower than
1 MHz. Binary signals include all modulation signals with two states while quaternary signals include
all modulation signals with four states (quadrature phase shift keying and FQPSK-B are two examples
of four-state signals). Appendix A, paragraph 6.0, contains additional discussion and examples of this
spectral mask.

2.4.7 Valid Center Frequencies Near Telemetry Band Edges. The telemetry bands, as
specified, start and stop at discrete frequencies. Telemetry transmitters transmitting PCM/FM or
SOQPSK-TG/FQPSK-B/FQPSK-JR or ARTM CPM, even with optimal filtering, do not have
discrete start and stop frequencies. In order to determine a valid carrier frequency, the
transmitter power, modulation scheme, and data rate must be known. The distance, in frequency,
from the point in which the spectral masks, as described in paragraph 2.4.6, intersect the absolute
value of -25 dBm equals the amount in which the transmitter carrier frequency must be from the
band edge frequency. Paragraph 12.0 of Appendix A contains additional discussion and
examples of center frequency determination when operating near telemetry band edges.

2.5 UHF Telemetry Receiver Systems
As a minimum, UHF receiver systems shall have the following characteristics:

2.5.1 Spurious Emissions. The RF energy radiated from the receiver itself or fed back into the
power supply, and/or the RF input, output, and control leads in the range from 150 kHz to 10 GHz
shall be within the limits specified in MIL-STD 461. The receiver shall be tested in accordance with
MIL-STD 461 or RCC Document 118, volume II, Test Methods for Telemetry RF Subsystems.
Other applicable standards and specifications may be used in place of MIL-STD-461, if necessary.

2.5.2 Frequency Tolerance. The accuracy of all local oscillators within the receiver shall be such
that the conversion accuracy at each stage and overall is within 0.001 percent of the indicated tuned
frequency under all operating conditions for which the receiver is specified.

2.5.3 Receiver Phase Noise. The sum of all discrete spurious spectral components (single
sideband) shall be less than -39 dBc. The continuous single sideband phase noise power spectral
density (PSD) shall be 3 dB below the curve shown in Figure 2-5. The maximum frequency for
the curve in Figure 2-5 is one-fourth of the bit rate. For bit rates greater than 4 Mb/s, the phase
noise PSD shall be less than 103 dBc/Hz between 1 MHz and one-fourth of the bit rate.

2.5.4 Spurious Responses. Rejection of any frequency other than the one to which the receiver
is tuned shall be a minimum of 60 dB referenced to the desired signal over the range 150 kHz to
10 GHz.

2.5.5 Operational Flexibility. All ground-based receivers shall be capable of operating over the
entire band for which they are designed. External down-converters may be either intended for
the entire band or a small portion but capable of retuning anywhere in the band without
modification.
2-15

2.5.6 Intermediate Frequency (IF) Bandwidths. The standard receiver IF bandwidths are
shown in Table 2-7. These bandwidths are separate from and should not be confused with
post-detection low-pass filtering that receivers provide.
10
The ratio of the receivers -60 dB
bandwidth to the -3 dB bandwidth shall be less than 3 for new receiver designs.

TABLE 2-7. STANDARD RECEIVER INTERMEDIATE FREQUENCY (IF)
BANDWIDTHS
300 kHz 1.5 MHz 6 MHz
1000 kHz 4.0 MHz 20 MHz
1

1. For data receivers, the IF bandwidth should typically be selected so
that 90 to 99 percent of the transmitted spectrum is within the receiver
3-dB bandwidth. In most cases, the optimum IF bandwidth will be
narrower than the 99-percent power bandwidth.

2. Bandwidths are expressed at the points where response is 3 dB below the
response at the design center frequency, assuming that passband ripple is
minimal, which may not be the case. The 3-dB bandwidth is chosen because
it closely matches the noise bandwidth of a "brick-wall" filter of the same
bandwidth. The "optimum" bandwidth for a specific application may be
other than that stated here. Ideal IF filter response is symmetrical about its
center frequency; in practice, this may not be the case.

3. Not all bandwidths are available on all receivers or at all test ranges.
Additional receiver bandwidths may be available at some test ranges
especially if the range has receivers with digital IF filtering

10
In most instances, the output low-pass filter should not be used to clean up the receiver output prior to use with
demultiplexing equipment.
2-16

2-17
REFERENCES
[1] Hogenauer, E., An Economical Class of Digital Filters for Decimation and Interpolation,
IEEE Transactions on Acoustics, Speech, and Signal Processing, Vol. ASSP-29, No. 2,
April 1981.

[2] Hill T., An Enhanced, Constant Envelope, Interoperable Shaped Offset QPSK(SOQPSK)
Waveform for Improved Spectral Efficiency, Proceedings of the International
Telemetering Conference, San Diego, California, October 2000.

[3] Younes B., Brase J., Patel C., Wesdock J., An Assessment of Shaped Offset QPSK for Use
in NASA Space Network and Ground Network Systems, Meetings of Consultative
Committee for Space Data Systems, Toulouse, France, October, 2000.

[4] Geoghegan, M., Implementation and Performance Results for Trellis Detection of
SOQPSK, Proceedings of the International Telemetering Conference, Las Vegas,
Nevada, October 2001.

[5] Simon, M., Bandwidth-Efficient Digital Modulation with Application to Deep Space
Communications, Monograph number 3, DESCANSO Monograph Series, JPL
Publication 00-17, Jet Propulsion Laboratory, California Institute of Technology, 2001.
This publication is available free via the Internet at DESCANSO: Deep Space
Communications and Navigation Systems

[6] Geoghegan, M. Description and Performance Results for the multi-h CPM Tier II
Waveform, Proceedings of the International Telemetering Conference, San Diego, CA,
October 2000.

**** END CHAPTER 2 ****


CHAPTER 3

FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING TELEMETRY STANDARDS


3.1 General............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 FM Subcarrier Characteristics ......................................................................... 3-1
3.3 FM Subcarrier Channel Characteristics........................................................... 3-1
3.4 Tape Speed Control and Flutter Compensation............................................... 3-5

LIST OF TABLES

Table 3-1a. Proportional-Bandwidth Fm Subcarrier Channels 7.5% Channels .............. 3-2
Table 3-1b. Proportional-Bandwidth Fm Subcarrier Channels 15% Channels ............... 3-3
Table 3-1c. Proportional-Bandwidth Fm Subcarrier Channels 30% Channels ............... 3-4
Table 3-2. Constant-Bandwidth Fm Subcarrier Channels ................................................ 3-6
Table 3-3. Reference Signal Usage................................................................................... 3-7

ii

CHAPTER 3
FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING TELEMETRY STANDARDS

3.1 General
In frequency division multiplexing, each data channel makes use of a separate subcarrier
that occupies a defined position and bandwidth in the modulation baseband of the RF carrier.
Two types of frequency modulation (FM) subcarrier formats may be used. The data bandwidth
of one format type is proportional to the subcarrier center frequency, while the data bandwidth of
the other type is constant, regardless of subcarrier frequency.

3.2 FM Subcarrier Characteristics
In these systems, one or more subcarrier signals, each at a different frequency, are
employed to frequency modulate (FM) or phase modulate (PM) a transmitter in accordance with
the RF conditions specified in Chapter 2. The following subparagraphs set forth the standards
for utilization of FM frequency division multiplexing.

3.2.1 Each of the subcarriers conveys measurement data in FM form. The number of data
channels may be increased by modulating one or more of the subcarriers with a time-division
multiplex format such as pulse-code modulation (PCM).

3.2.2 The selecting and grouping of subcarrier channels depend upon the data bandwidth
requirements of the application at hand and upon the necessity to ensure adequate guard bands
between channels. Combinations of both proportional-bandwidth channels and constant-
bandwidth channels may be used.

3.3 FM Subcarrier Channel Characteristics

The following subparagraphs describe the characteristics of proportional-bandwidth and
constant-bandwidth FM subcarrier channels.

3.3.1 Proportional-Bandwidth FM Subcarrier Channel Characteristics. Table 31A,
Table 31B, and Table 31C list the standard proportional-bandwidth FM subcarrier channels.
The channels identified with letters permit 15 or 30 percent subcarrier deviation rather than
7.5 percent deviation but use the same frequencies as the 12 highest channels. The channels
shall be used within the limits of maximum subcarrier deviation. See Appendix B for expected
performance tradeoffs at selected combinations of deviation and modulating frequency.
3-1

TABLE 3-1A. PROPORTIONAL-BANDWIDTH FM SUBCARRIER CHANNELS
7.5% CHANNELS
Channel
Center
Frequencies
(Hz)
Lower
Deviation
Limit
(Hz)
Upper
Deviation
Limit
(Hz)
Nominal
Frequency
Response
(Hz)
Nominal
Rise Time
(ms)
Maximum
Frequency
Response
(Hz)
Minimum
Rise Time
(ms)
1 400 370 430 6 58 30 11.7
2 560 518 602 8 44 42 8.33
3 730 675 785 11 32 55 6.40
4 960 888 1032 14 25 72 4.86
5 1300 1202 1398 20 18 98 3.60
6 1700 1572 1828 25 14 128 2.74
7 2300 2127 2473 35 10 173 2.03
8 3000 2775 3225 45 7.8 225 1.56
9 3900 3607 4193 59 6.0 293 1.20
10 5400 4995 5805 81 4.3 405 .864
11 7350 6799 7901 110 3.2 551 .635
12 10 500 9712 11 288 160 2.2 788 .444
13 14 500 13 412 15 588 220 1.6 1088 .322
14 22 000 20 350 23 650 330 1.1 1650 .212
15 30 000 27 750 32 250 450 .78 2250 .156
16 40 000 37 000 43 000 600 .58 3000 .117
17 52 500 48 562 56 438 788 . 44 3938 .089
18 70 000 64 750 75 250 1050 .33 5250 .06
19 93 000 86 025 99 975 1395 .25 6975 .050
20 124 000 114 700 133 300 1860 .19 9300 .038
21 165 000 152 625 177 375 2475 .14 12 375 .029
22 225 000 208 125 241 875 3375 .10 16 875 .021
23 300 000 277 500 322 500 4500 .08 22 500 .016
24 400 000 370 000 430 000 6000 .06 30 000 .012
25 560 000 518 000 602 000 8400 .04 42 000 .008

See notes at end of Table 3-1C.
3-2

TABLE 3-1B. PROPORTIONAL-BANDWIDTH FM SUBCARRIER CHANNELS
15% CHANNELS
Channel
Center
Frequencies

(Hz)
Lower
Deviation
Limit
(Hz)
Upper
Deviation
Limit
(Hz)
Nominal
Frequency
Response
(Hz)
Nominal
Rise Time

(ms)
Maximum
Frequency
Response
(Hz)
Minimum
Rise Time

(ms)
A 22 000 18 700 25 300 660 .53 3300 .106
B 30 000 25 500 34 500 900 .39 4500 .078
C 40 000 34 000 46 000 1200 .29 6000 .058
D 52 500 44 625 60 375 1575 .22 7875 .044
E 70 000 59 500 80 500 2100 .17 10 500 .033
F 93 000 79 050 106 950 2790 .13 13 950 .025
G 124 000 105 400 142 600 3720 .09 18 600 .018
H 165 000 140 250 189 750 4950 .07 24 750 .014
I 225 000 191 250 258 750 6750 .05 33 750 .010
J 300 000 255 000 345 000 9000 .04 45 000 .008
K 400 000 340 000 460 000 12 000 .03 60 000 .006
L 560 000 476 000 644 000 16 800 .02 84 000 .004

See notes at end of Table 3-1C.
3-3

TABLE 3-1C. PROPORTIONAL-BANDWIDTH FM SUBCARRIER CHANNELS
30% CHANNELS
Channel
Center
Frequencies

(Hz)
Lower
Deviation
Limit
(Hz)
Upper
Deviation
Limit
(Hz)
Nominal
Frequency
Response
(Hz)
Nominal
Rise Time

(ms)
Maximum
Frequency
Response
(Hz)
Minimum
Rise Time

(ms)
AA 22 00 15 400 28 600 1320 .265 6600 .053
BB 30 000 21 000 39 000 1800 .194 9000 .038
CC 40 000 28 000 52 000 2400 .146 12 000 .029
DD 52 500 36 750 68 250 3150 .111 15 750 .022
EE 70 000 49 000 91 000 4200 .083 21 000 .016
FF 93 000 65 100 120 900 5580 .063 27 900 .012
GG 124 000 86 800 161 200 7440 .047 37 200 .009
HH 165 000 115 500 214 500 9900 .035 49 500 .007
II 225 000 157 500 292 500 13 500 .026 67 500 .005
JJ 300 000 210 000 390 000 18 000 .019 90 000 .004
KK 400 000 280 000 520 000 24 000 .015 120 000 .003
LL 560 000 392 000 728 000 33 600 .010 168 000 .002
Notes:

1. Round off to nearest Hz.

2. The indicated maximum data frequency response and minimum rise time is based on the
maximum theoretical response that can be obtained in a bandwidth between the upper and lower
frequency limits specified for the channels. See Appendix B, paragraph 3.0 for determining
possible accuracy versus response tradeoffs.
3. Channels A through L may be used by omitting adjacent lettered and numbered channels.
Channels 13 and A may be used together with some increase in adjacent channel interference.

4. Channels AA through LL may be used by omitting every four adjacent double lettered and lettered
channels and every three adjacent numbered channels. Channels AA through LL may be used by
omitting every three adjacent double lettered and lettered channels and every two adjacent numbered
channels with some increase in adjacent channel interference.

3-4
3-5
3.3.2 Constant-Bandwidth FM Subcarrier Channel Characteristics. Table 3-2 lists the standard
constant-bandwidth FM subcarrier channels. The letters A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H identify the
channels for use with maximum subcarrier deviations of 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, and
256 kHz, along with maximum frequency responses of 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256 kHz.
The channels shall be used within the limits of maximum subcarrier deviation. See Appendix B
for expected performance tradeoffs at selected combinations of deviation and modulating
frequencies.

3.4 Tape Speed Control and Flutter Compensation
Tape speed control and flutter compensation for FM/FM formats may be accomplished as
indicated in Appendix D, subparagraph 17.4 (Tape Speed and Flutter Compensation). The standard
reference frequency used shall be in accordance with the criteria in Table 3-3 when the reference
signal is mixed with data.

TABLE 3-2. CONSTANT-BANDWIDTH FM SUBCARRIER CHANNELS
Frequency Criteria \ Channels: A B C D E F G H
Deviation Limits (kHz) 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256
Nominal Frequency Response (kHz) 0.4 0.8 1.6 3.2 6.4 12.8 25.6 51.2
Maximum Frequency Response (kHz) 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256
Center Frequency (kHz)
8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024
16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048
24 48 96 192 384 768 1536 3072
32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048
40 80 160 320 640 1280 2560
48 96 192 384 768 1536 3072
56 112 224 448 896 1792 3584
64 128 256 512 1024 2048
72 144 288 576 1152 2304
80 160 320 640 1280 2560
88 176 352 704 1408 2816
96 192 384 768 1536 3072
104 208 416 832 1664 3328
112 224 448 896 1792 3584
120 240 480 960 1920 3840
128 256 512 1024 2048
136 272 544 1088 2176
144 288 576 1152 2304
152 304 608 1216 2432
160 320 640 1280 2560
168 336 672 1344 2688

Notes:

The constant-bandwidth channel designation shall be the
channel center frequency in kilohertz and the channel
letter indicating deviation limit; for example, 16A,
indicating f
c
= 16 kHz, deviation limit of 2 kHz.

The indicated maximum frequency is based upon the
maximum theoretical response that can be obtained in a
bandwidth between deviation limits specified for the
channel. See discussion in Appendix B for determining
practical accuracy versus frequency response trade offs.

Prior to using a channel outside the shaded area, the user
should verify the availability of range assets to support
the demodulation of the channel selected. Very limited
support is available above 2 MHz.
176 352 704 1408 2816
3
-
6


TABLE 3-3. REFERENCE SIGNAL USAGE

Reference Frequencies for Tape Speed
and Flutter Compensation

Reference Frequency
(kHz 0.01%)

960
(1)

480
(1)

240
(1)

200

100

50

25

12.5

6.25

3.125

Note:
(1)
These frequencies are for flutter compensation only and not for capstan servo
speed control. In addition, the 240 kHz reference signal may be used as a detranslation
frequency in a constant-bandwidth format.

If the reference signal is recorded on a separate tape track, any of the listed reference
frequencies may be used provided the requirements for compensation rate of change are
satisfied.

If the reference signal is mixed with the data signal, consideration must be given to
possible problems with intermodulation sum and difference frequencies. Also, sufficient
guard band must be allowed between the reference frequency and any adjacent data
subcarrier.

**** END CHAPTER 3 ****

3-7

CHAPTER 4

PULSE CODE MODULATION STANDARDS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.1 General .............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Class Distinctions and Bit-Oriented Characteristics ......................................... 4-1
4.3 Fixed Formats.................................................................................................... 4-2
4.4 Format Change (Class II) .................................................................................. 4-6
4.5 Asynchronous Embedded Format (Class II) ..................................................... 4-7
4.6 Tagged Data Format (Class II) .......................................................................... 4-7
4.7 Time Words ....................................................................................................... 4-8
4.8 Asynchronous Data Merge (Class II) .............................................................. 4-10

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 4-1. PCM code definitions. ....................................................................................... 4-3
Figure 4-2. PCM frame structure. ........................................................................................ 4-5
Figure 4-3. 16 bit standardized time word format................................................................ 4-9
Figure 4-4. Time word insertion into 12 bit PCM word size. .............................................. 4-9
Figure 4-5. Asynchronous word structure.......................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-6 Overhead truth table. ....................................................................................... 4-11

ii


CHAPTER 4
PULSE CODE MODULATION STANDARDS
4.1 General
Pulse code modulation (PCM) data are transmitted as a serial bit stream of binary-coded
time-division multiplexed words. When PCM is transmitted, premodulation filtering shall be
used to confine the radiated RF spectrum in accordance with Appendix A. These standards
define pulse train structure and system design characteristics for the implementation of PCM
telemetry formats. Additional information and recommendations are provided in Appendix C
and in RCC Document 119, Telemetry Applications Handbook.

4.2 Class Distinctions and Bit-Oriented Characteristics
The PCM formats are divided into two classes for reference. Serial bit stream
characteristics are described below prior to frame and word oriented definitions.

4.2.1 Class I and Class II Distinctions. Two classes of PCM formats are covered in this chapter:
the basic, simpler types are class I, and the more complex applications are class II. The use of any
class II technique requires concurrence of the range involved. All formats with characteristics
described in these standards are class I except those identified as class II. The following are
examples of class II characteristics:

a. bit rates greater than 10 megabits per second (see subparagraph 4.2.2.3)
b. word lengths in excess of 32 bits (subparagraph 4.3.1.1)
c. fragmented words (subparagraph 4.3.1.2)
d. more than 8192 bits or 1024 words per minor frame (subparagraph 4.3.2.1.1)
e. uneven spacing, not within the definition of subcommutation (subparagraph 4.3.2.3)
or supercommutation (subparagraph 4.3.2.4)
f. format changes (paragraph 4.4)
g. asynchronous embedded formats (paragraph 4.5)
h. tagged data formats (paragraph 4.6)
i. formats with data content other than unsigned straight binary, discretes, or
complement arithmetic representation for negative numbers such as floating point
variables, binary-coded decimal, and gain-and-value
j. asynchronous data transmission (paragraph 4.8)
k. merger of multiple format types (such as those specified in Chapter 8)
4-1

The use of fixed frame formats has been a common practice but does
not fit all requirements. A verification of range capabilities should be
made prior to incorporation of class II features into a telemetry system.

4.2.2 Bit-Oriented Definitions and Requirements. Definitions and requirements relating to
serial PCM bit streams are described next.

4.2.2.1 Binary Bit Representation. The following code conventions for representing serial
binary ones and zeros are the only permissible representations. Graphic and written descriptions
of these conventions are shown in Figure 4-1. Only one convention shall be used within a single
PCM bit stream. If Randomized NRZ-L (RNRZ-L) is transmitted, it shall use the 15-bit
regeneration pattern as described in Appendix D.

NRZ-L Bi-L
NRZ-M Bi-M
NRZ-S Bi-S

4.2.2.2 Serial Bit Stream Transitions. The transmitted or recorded bit stream shall be
continuous and shall contain sufficient transitions to ensure bit acquisition and continued bit
synchronization, taking into account the binary representation chosen. (See recommendation in
paragraph 1.3, Appendix C.)

4.2.2.3 Bit Rate. The RF and recording limits, defined in Chapters 2 and 6, should be
considered when determining maximum bit rates. The minimum bit rate shall be 10 bps. Bit
rates greater than 10 Mbps are class II.

4.2.2.4 Bit Rate Accuracy and Stability. During any period of desired data, the bit rate shall
not differ from the specified nominal bit rate by more than 0.1 percent of the nominal rate.

4.2.2.5 Bit Jitter. The bit jitter shall not exceed 0.l of a bit interval referenced to the expected
transition time with no jitter. The expected transition time shall be based on the measured
average bit period as determined during the immediately preceding 1000 bits.

4.3 Fixed Formats
Characteristics of fixed formats are described below. Fixed formats do not have
changes during transmission with regard to frame structure, word length or location,
commutation sequence, sample interval, or measurement list.

4.3.1 Word-Oriented Definitions and Requirements. The following definitions and
requirements are addressed to word characteristics.

4.3.1.1 Word Length (Class I and II). Individual words may vary in length from 4 bits to not
more than 32 bits in class I and not more than 64 bits in class II.

4-2

4
-
3
Figure 4-1. PCM code definitions.
Code

Logic Waveform
Levels
Code Waveforms Code Definitions

1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
Non Return to Zero - Level
NRZ-L
ONE is represented by one level

ZERO is represented by the other level
Non Return to Zero - Mark
NRZ-M
ONE is represented by a change in level

ZERO is represented by NO change in level
Non Return to Zero - Space
NRZ-S
ONE is represented by NO change in level

ZERO is represented by a change in level
Bi-Phase - Level
(1)

Bi-L
ONE is represented by a ONE level with
transition to the ZERO level

ZERO is represented by a ZERO level with transition to
the ONE level
Bi-Phase - Mark
(1)

Bi-M
ONE is represented by NO level change at the beginning
of the bit period

ZERO is represented by a level change at the beginning of
the bit period
Bi-Phase - Space
(1)

Bi-S
ONE is represented by a level change at the beginning of
the bit period

ZERO is represented by a NO level change at the
beginning of the bit period
Notes: (1) The Bi codes may be derived from the corresponding NRZ codes by inverting the level for the last half of each bit interval.

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0


4.3.1.2 Fragmented Words (Class II). A fragmented word is defined as a word divided into
no more than eight segments and placed in various locations within a minor frame. The
locations need not be adjacent. All word segments used to form a data word should be
constrained to the boundaries of a single minor frame. Fragmented synchronization words are
not allowed.

4.3.1.3 Bit Numbering. To provide consistent notation, the most significant bit in a word
shall be numbered "one." Less significant bits shall be numbered sequentially within the word.

4.3.1.4 Word Numbering. To provide consistent notation, the first word after the minor
frame synchronization pattern shall be numbered "one" (see Figure 4-2). Each subsequent word
shall be numbered sequentially within the minor frame. Numbering within a subframe (see
subparagraph 4.3.2.3.1) shall be "one" for the word in the same minor frame as the initial counter
value for subframe synchronization and sequentially thereafter. Notations of W and S shall
mean the W word position in the minor frame and S word position in the subframe.

4.3.2 Frame Structure. The PCM data shall be formatted into fixed length frames as
defined in these sections regarding frame structure and in Figure 4-2. Frames shall contain a
fixed number of equal duration bit intervals.

4.3.2.1 Minor Frame. The minor frame is defined as the data structure in time sequence from
the beginning of a minor frame synchronization pattern to the beginning of the next minor frame
synchronization pattern.

4.3.2.1.1 Minor Frame Length (Class I and II). The minor frame length is the number of bit
intervals from the beginning of the frame synchronization pattern to the beginning of the next
synchronization pattern. The maximum length of a minor frame shall exceed neither 8192 bits
nor 1024 words in class I and shall not exceed 16 384 bits in class II.

4.3.2.1.2 Minor Frame Composition. The minor frame shall contain the minor frame
synchronization pattern, data words, and subframe synchronization words, if used. Words of
different length may be multiplexed in a single minor frame. The length of a word in any
identified word position within a minor frame shall be constant. Other words such as frame
format identifiers may be needed within class II formats (see paragraph 4.4).

4.3.2.1.3 Minor Frame Synchronization. The minor frame synchronization information shall
consist of a fixed digital word not longer than 33 consecutive bits and not shorter than 16 bits.
The minor frame synchronization pattern is always considered as one word, regardless of its
length. Recommended synchronization patterns are given in Table C-1, Appendix C.

4.3.2.1.4 Transmitted Frame Counter. The frame counter provides a natural binary count
corresponding to the minor frame number in which the frame count word appears. It is
recommended that such a counter be included in all minor frames whether class I or class II and
is especially desirable in class II formats to assist with data processing. The frame counter
should be of nominal format word length and reset to start up-counting again after reaching
4-4

maximum value. In formats where subcommutation is present, the subframe ID counter may
serve as the frame counter.

Figure 4-2. PCM frame structure.

MINOR FRAME SYNC 1 2 (W,1) N-1

MAJOR FRAME

(W,S)

MINOR FRAME SYNC 1 2 (W,Z) N-1

MINOR FRAME LENGTH N WORDS OR B BITS
MAX LENGTH
CLASS I - 8 192 BITS OR 1024 WORDS
CLASS II - 16 384 BITS

S
U
B
F
R
A
M
E

O
F

W
O
R
D
S

BY DEFINITION A MAJOR FRAME CONTAINS N*Z WORDS OR B*Z BITS
Z = THE NUMBER OF WORDS IN LONGEST SUBFRAME (MAX. 256).
N = THE NUMBER OF WORDS IN MINOR FRAME.
B = THE NUMBER OF BITS IN MINOR FRAME.

MINOR FRAME SYNC IS CONSIDERED ONE WORD, REGARDLESS OF LENGTH.
W IS WORD POSITION IN THE MINOR FRAME.
S IS WORD POSITION IN THE SUBFRAME.

4-5

4.3.2.2 Major Frame. A major frame contains the number of minor frames required to
include one sample of every parameter in the format.

4.3.2.2.1 Major Frame Length. Major frame length is defined as minor frame length (N words
or B bits) multiplied by the number of minor frames (Z) in the major frame. The maximum
number of minor frames per major frame shall not exceed 256.

4.3.2.2.2 Minor Frame Numbering. To provide consistent notation, the first minor frame in a
major frame shall be numbered "one." Each subsequent minor frame shall be numbered
sequentially within the major frame.

4.3.2.3 Subcommutation. Subcommutation is defined as a sampling of parameters at
submultiple rates (1/D) of the minor frame rate where the depth of a subframe, D, is an integer in
the range of 2 to Z.

4.3.2.3.1 Subframe. Subframe is defined as one cycle of the parameters from a subcommutated
minor frame word position. The depth, D, of a subframe is the number of minor frames in one
cycle before repetition.

4.3.2.3.2 Subframe Synchronization Method. The standard method for subframe
synchronization is to use a "subframe ID counter," a binary counter which counts sequentially up
or down at the minor frame rate. Typically, only one subframe ID counter is used in a PCM
format; however, more than one counter may be used if needed. This paragraph assumes the use
of one subframe ID counter. The subframe ID counter shall be located in a fixed position in each
and every minor frame. The counter should start with the minimum counter value when
counting up or the maximum counter value when counting down. The counter should also be
left or right justified in a word position. The start of a major frame shall coincide with the initial
count for the deepest subframe.

4.3.2.4 Supercommutation. Supercommutation ("supercom") is defined as time-division-
multiplex sampling at a rate that is a multiple of the minor frame rate. Supercommutation (on a
minor frame) provides multiple samples of the same parameter in each minor frame. "Supercom
on a subframe" is defined as time-division-multiplex sampling at a rate that is a multiple of the
subframe rate and provides multiple samples of the same parameter within a subframe. For class
I, supercommutated samples shall be evenly spaced. For class II, supercommutated samples
should be as evenly spaced as practical.

4.4 Format Change (Class II)
Format change is defined as change with regard to frame structure, word length or
location, commutation sequence, sample interval, or change in measurement list. Format
changes shall occur only on minor frame boundaries. Bit synchronization shall be maintained
and fill bits used instead of intentional dead periods. Format changes are inherently disruptive to
test data processing; fixed format methods are preferred. Format change methods shall conform
to the characteristics described in the following sections.

4-6

4.4.1 Frame Format Identification. A frame format identifier (FFI) is a word that shall
uniquely identify a single format. In formats where change is required, the frame format
identifier shall be placed in every minor frame. The format identifier shall be the same length as
(or multiples of) the most common word length in the format and shall occur in a fixed position
in the minor frame. The FFI shall identify the format applicable to the current minor frame.
Frame synchronization pattern, FFI location, bit rate, and binary bit representation code shall not
be changed. The FFI shall be constructed such that a single bit error cannot produce another
valid FFI. The number of unique formats indicated shall not exceed 16.

4.4.2 Format Change Implementation Methods. The following subparagraphs describe
format change implementation methods.

4.4.2.1 Measurement List Change. This method of format change consists of a modification in
data content only and not format structure.

4.4.2.2 Format Structure Change. Defined as a format change where there is a departure in
frame structure and not just data content.

4.5 Asynchronous Embedded Format (Class II)
Defined as a secondary data stream asynchronously embedded into a host major frame
in a manner that does not allow predicting the location of embedded synchronization information
based only on host format timing. The embedded frame segments shall be inserted as an integral
number of words in every host minor frame. In this combined format, specific word positions in
the host minor frame shall be dedicated to the embedded asynchronous format. No more than
two asynchronous embedded formats are permitted.

4.6 Tagged Data Format (Class II)
Defined as a fixed frame length format having no applicable subframe or major frame
definitions and characterized as a stream of data words, or blocks of words, with associated
identifiers (tags). These formats consist of frame synchronization patterns, identifiers, data
words, and fill words as required.

4.6.1 Alternating Tag and Data. This tagged data format consists of frames containing tag
words alternating in time sequence with data words or blocks of words identified by the tags.

4.6.2 Bus Data, Military Standard (MIL-STD) 1553.
1
The preferred method of telemetering
MIL-STD 1553 information is for the information to be restructured to conform to Class I
methods. If not restructured, telemetered MIL-STD 1553 data shall conform to the Chapter 8
standard.

4.6.3 Bus Data, ARINC 429.
2
The preferred method of telemetering ARINC 429 information
is for the information to be restructured to conform to Class I methods. If not restructured,

1
Defined in MIL-HDBK-1553A(2), 1995, Multiplex Applications Handbook.
2
Defined in ARINC Specification 429P1, 429P2, and 429P3.
4-7

telemetered ARINC 429 data shall be consistent with the Aeronautical Radio Inc. specification
of ARINC 429 bus data.

4.7 Time Words
The following paragraphs describe the formatting of time words within a PCM stream. A
16-bit standardized time word format and a method to insert time words into PCM word sizes
other than 16-bits are described.

4.7.1 In 16-bit standardized time word format, there shall be three words dedicated to
providing timing information. These words are designated high order time, low order time, and
microsecond time. High and low order time words shall be binary or binary coded decimal
(BCD) weighted, and microsecond words shall be binary weighted. Time word construction
examples are shown in Figure 4-3 and Figure 4-4.

4.7.2 The microsecond time word shall have a resolution of 1 microsecond; that is, the least
significant bit, bit 16, has a value of 0.000001 second. This word shall increment until it attains
a value of 10 milliseconds at which time it will reset to zero. Thus the maximum value of the
counter is 9999 (decimal).

4.7.3 The low order time word shall have a resolution of 10 milliseconds; that is, the least
significant bit, bit 16, of the low order time word shall have a value of 0.01 second.

4.7.4 The high order time word shall have a resolution of 655.36 seconds when binary
weighted; that is, the least significant bit, bit 16, has a value of 655.36 seconds. When BCD
weighted, the least significant bit, bit 16, of the high order time word shall have a value of one
minute. For BCD, the days field shall contain the three least significant characters of the BCD
Julian date.

4.7.5 It is recommended that high, low, and microsecond time words precede the first data
word in the minor frame. The time word order shall be high order time word, followed by low
order time word, followed by microsecond time word. Microsecond time words may be used to
tag individual data words, but care shall be taken that high order and low order time words be
inserted at a rate necessary to resolve time ambiguities.

4.7.6 Time word insertion into PCM word sizes other than 16 bits shall be as follows: high
order, low order, and microsecond time words shall be inserted into PCM words with time word
bits occupying contiguous bit locations in the PCM word. The time word shall occupy
contiguous PCM data words until the time word is contained in the PCM stream. If the time
word size is not an integer multiple of the PCM word size and there are unused bits in the PCM
word, the remaining unused bits in the last PCM word that contains the time word shall be fill
bits with value 0. Figure 4-4 illustrates the insertion of time words into a PCM stream with word
size of 12 bits.

4-8

HIGH ORDER TIME
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 DAY 10 HR 1 HR 10 MIN 1 MIN
655.36 SEC
LOW ORDER TIME

(BCD Weighting)
(Binary Weighting)
0

10 SEC 1 SEC 0.1 SEC 0.01 SEC
0.01 SEC
MICROSECOND TIME
(BCD Weighting)
(Binary Weighting)
0 0

(Binary Weighting)
1 MICROSECOND
Figure 4-3. 16 bit standardized time word format.

HIGH ORDER TIME

PCM WORD N

PCM WORD N+1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 24

ALL ZERO FILLER

1 DAY 10 HR 1 HR 10 MIN 1 MIN
655.36 SEC

LOW ORDER TIME

PCM WORD N+2

PCM WORD N+3

(BCD)
(Binary)
0

ALL ZERO FILLER
10 SEC 1 SEC 0.1 SEC 0.01 SEC
0.01 SEC
MICROSECOND TIME

PCM WORD N+4

PCM WORD N+5

(BCD)
(Binary)
0 0

ALL ZERO FILLER
(Binary
Weighting) 1 MICROSECOND
Figure 4-4. Time word insertion into 12 bit PCM word size.
4-9

4.8 Asynchronous Data Merge (Class II)
Asynchronous data is defined as an external sequential data stream (consisting of data
bits, associated overhead, and optional parity, all at an autonomous update rate) which is a
candidate for insertion into a primary or host PCM format. Common examples are RS-232
serial and IEEE-488 parallel messages. Each source of such data shall use fixed word positions
in the host format. This section does not apply to secondary PCM formats which are to be
embedded as described in paragraph 4.5. Merger shall comply with subparagraph 4.2.2 and the
following conventions.

4.8.1 PCM Data Word Format. Figure 4-5 illustrates the host PCM format word containing a
merged asynchronous data word and associated overhead which is referred to as an
asynchronous word structure. The data may be inserted in any length PCM word that will
accommodate the required bits. Asynchronous data shall not be placed in fragmented words.
Multiple host PCM format words, if used, shall be contiguous.

4.8.2 Insertion Process. The asynchronous word structure shall contain the information from
the asynchronous message partitioned into two fields, data and overhead, as shown in figure 4-5.
The asynchronous message is inserted into the asynchronous word structure with the following
bit orientations. The most significant data bit (MSB) through least significant data bit (LSB) and
parity (if used) of the message are denoted as D1 (MSB) through Di and will be inserted into
structure bits B1 (MSB) through Bi. The next two structure bits, B(i+1) and B(i+2) are reserved
for the stale and overflow flags generated by the host encoder. All remaining overhead (message
and host encoder generated) D(i+3) through Dn (LSB), will be inserted into structure bits B(i+3)
through Bn (LSB).

4.8.2.1 Transmission Overhead. All transmission overhead not required for data reconstruction
shall be removed.

4.8.2.2 Parity Bit. Transmission of a parity bit is optional. If it is transmitted, it shall be at the
end of the data field (see Figure 4-5) adjacent to the LSB of the data.

4.8.2.3 Data Bits. The data bits shall be inserted into the PCM word with the most significant bit of
the asynchronous data aligned with the most significant bit of the PCM word.

4-10

4-11
Figure 4-5. Asynchronous word structure.
(MSB) (LSB)
B1 B2 Bi B(i+1) B(i+2) B(i+3) Bn
D1 D2 Di D(i+1) D(i+2) D(i+3) Dn

DATA (MSB) - DATA (LSB)
PLUS OPTIONAL PARITY;
D1 = DATA (MSB)
Di = DATA (LSB) FOR
NO PARITY
Di = PARITY WHEN
USED

STALE OVER
FLOW
ALL REMAINING
OVERHEAD
Dn = (LSB)

DATA FIELD OVERHEAD FIELD

4.8.2.4 Stale Data Bit. A stale data bit flag shall be generated each time a new data value is
inserted into the PCM stream. The flag shall be transmitted with the associated data. The flag
bit shall be placed in the next less significant bit location following the LSB of the data. If new
data is not ready for transmission by the time the PCM word must be sent again, either the old
data or alternating one/zero fill shall be sent and the flag set. Stale data shall be indicated by a
binary one (see Figure 4-6).

STALE BIT OVERFLOW BIT

0 0 FRESH DATA
0 1 DATA OVERFLOW
1 0 STALE DATA
1 1 USER DEFINED
Figure 4-6 Overhead truth table.

4.8.2.5 Overflow Bit. An overflow bit flag shall be generated to indicate an abnormal condition in
which data may be lost. The overflow bit shall be placed in the next less significant data bit location
following the stale bit flag. An overflow bit at a binary one indicates that a data discontinuity exists
between the current data word and the previous data word (see Figure 4-6 above).

4.8.2.6 Insertion Rate. The asynchronous word structure shall be inserted into the host PCM
word at a rate to avoid data loss in the PCM stream.

**** END OF CHAPTER 4 ****

CHAPTER 5

DIGITIZED AUDIO TELEMETRY STANDARD

Paragraph Subject .......................................................................................................... Page

5.1 General............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Definitions ....................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Signal Source ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.4 Encoding/Decoding Technique........................................................................ 5-1
5.5 CVSD Encoder Output Bit Rate (CVSD Bit Rate).......................................... 5-2
5.6 CVSD Word Structure..................................................................................... 5-2
5.7 CVSD Word Sample Rate ............................................................................... 5-3
5.8 CVSD Bit Rate Determination ........................................................................ 5-3

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 5-1. Insertion of CVSD encoded audio into a PCM stream. ................................... 5-2


ii

CHAPTER 5

DIGITIZED AUDIO TELEMETRY STANDARD
5.1 General
This chapter defines continuous variable slope delta (CVSD) modulation as the standard
for digitizing audio and addresses the method of inserting CVSD encoded audio into a PCM
stream. Additional information and recommendations are provided in Appendix F, Continuous
Variable Slope Delta Modulation. Appendix F was extracted from the applicable sections of
MIL-STD-188-113.

5.2 Definitions
For the purpose of this standard, the following definitions apply.

5.2.1 Band-Limited Audio. An audio signal (typically consisting of voice, tones, and sounds)
that is limited to a subset of the audio spectrum. For most aircraft audio applications, the
spectrum between 100 and 2300 hertz is adequate.

5.2.2 Continuous Variable Slope Delta Modulation. The CVSD modulation is a method of
digitizing a band-limited audio signal. The CVSD modulator is, in essence, a 1-bit analog-to-
digital converter. The output of this 1-bit encoder is a serial bit stream, where each bit represents
an incremental increase or decrease in signal amplitude and is determined as a function of recent
sample history.

5.3 Signal Source
The signal to be encoded shall be a band-limited audio signal. The source of this signal
may be varied. Some examples are microphones, communication systems, and tones from
warning systems. This standard applies to audio signals only.

5.4 Encoding/Decoding Technique
The technique to encode and decode the band-limited audio signal is CVSD modulation.
This technique is to be implemented in accordance with Appendix F.

A CVSD converter consists of an encoder-decoder pair. The decoder is connected in a
feedback path. The encoder receives a band-limited audio signal and compares it to the analog
output of the decoder. The result of the comparison is a serial string of "ones" and "zeros." Each
bit indicates that the band-limited audio sample's amplitude is above or below the decoded
signal. When a run of three identical bits is encountered, the slope of the generated analog
approximation is increased in its respective direction until the identical string of bits is broken.
The CVSD decoder performs the inverse operation of the encoder and regenerates the audio
signal.

5-1

A qualitative test of CVSD with a tactical aircraft intercom system
(ICS) yielded the following results: (1) intelligible, robotic
sounding audio at 12 kilobits/second; (2) good quality audio at 16
kilobits/second; and (3) audio quality did not significantly improve
as the bit rate was increased above 32 kilobits/second.

5.5 CVSD Encoder Output Bit Rate (CVSD Bit Rate)
The CVSD bit rate for encoding the band-limited audio signal is a function of the desired
audio quality and the PCM format characteristics. The minimum and maximum CVSD bit rates
will not be specified.

Appendix F contains performance criteria for the CVSD encoder and decoder when
operated at 16 or 32 kilobits/second.

5.6 CVSD Word Structure
The digitized audio signal from the CVSD encoder's serial output shall be inserted into
the PCM stream as shown in Figure 5-1. The most significant bit (MSB) shall be the most stale
sample (first in). The least significant bit (LSB) shall be the most recent sample (last in).

MOST STALE
SAMPLE

CVSD SERIAL OUTPUT STREAM

MOST RECENT
SAMPLE

S-2 S-1 S S+1 S+(n-1) S+n S+(n+1)

PCM DATA WORD S S+1 S+(n-1) PCM DATA WORD
MSB LSB

Figure 5-1. Insertion of CVSD encoded audio into a PCM stream.
5-2

5.7 CVSD Word Sample Rate
The CVSD word sample rate is dependent on the minimum desired CVSD bit rate, the
PCM word length, and the PCM word sample rate. Once the CVSD word sample rate is
determined, the actual CVSD bit rate can be calculated. The decoder must be run at the same
CVSD bit rate as the encoder.

Because of the nature of CVSD encoding, over and under sampling of the
CVSD output will have unpredictable results.

To simplify the reconstruction of the audio signal and minimize
all encoding/decoding delays, it is STRONGLY recommended that
the digitized audio words be inserted in the PCM stream at evenly spaced
intervals.

5.8 CVSD Bit Rate Determination
The following discussion provides a procedure for determining the CVSD bit rate based on
the desired minimum CVSD bit rate and information given in the host PCM format. Note that this
procedure assumes the CVSD words are inserted in a class I PCM format with constant word
widths and are not subcommutated. The CVSD bit rate can be obtained by multiplying the minor
frame rate by the number of times the CVSD words appear in the minor frame by the word width
used for the CVSD words in the minor frame. This relationship is expressed in equation (5-1).

CVSD BIT RATE = MINOR FRAME RATE #CVSD WORDS PER MINOR FRAME WORD WIDTH (5-1)

Knowing the details on the host PCM format, equation (5-1) contains two unknowns:
CVSD BIT RATE and #CVSD WORDS PER MINOR FRAME. One of these unknowns must
be chosen by the user, then the other one can be calculated. The recommended procedure is to
choose the desired (target value) CVSD bit rate and solve equation (5-1) for #CVSD WORDS
PER MINOR FRAME. This relationship is expressed in equation (5-2).

#CVSD WORDS PER MINOR FRAME
calculated
= DESIRED CVSD BIT RATE (5-2)
MINOR FRAME RATE WORD WIDTH

Next, round up (if required) the result of equation (5-2) to the nearest integer.
To satisfy the evenly spaced recommendation, round up (if required) to the nearest integer that
divides evenly into the number of PCM words per minor frame.

Finally, for either case, substitute the result of equation (5-2) back into equation (5-1) to
determine the actual CVSD bit rate. To illustrate this procedure, consider the following
numerical example for determining the CVSD bit rate. An existing PCM format has the
characteristics:
5-3

5-4
Bit rate = 192 000 bits/second
Word width = 12 bits/word
Minor frame rate = 100 frames/second
Words/ minor frame = 160 words/minor frame

To insert a serial CVSD bit stream with a desired (target value), CVSD bit rate of 16 000
bits/second will require the following procedure. Based on the information given, use equation
(5-2) to calculate the #CVSD WORDS PER MINOR FRAME.

DESIRED CVSD BIT RATE
MINOR FRAME RATE WORD WIDTH
=
CALCULATED

16 000 ( )
100 ( ) 12 ( )
=
CALCULATED
bits
frames bits word
sec
sec

CALCULATED
= 13.3 (words/frame)

Rounding up the #CVSD WORDS PER MINOR FRAME to the nearest integer
yields 14. In this example, there are 160 PCM words in the minor frame. If the user needs to
satisfy the evenly spaced criteria, then by inspection, the #CVSD WORDS PER MINOR
FRAME will be rounded up to 16. For comparison, both cases will be substituted into equation
(5-1) to yield the actual CVSD bit rate.

CASE 1: (unevenly spaced CVSD samples, NOT RECOMMENDED)

#CVSD WORDS PER MINOR FRAME 14 ( =
CALCULATED
words frame)

CVSD BIT RATE = MINOR FRAME RATE #CVSD WORDS / MINOR FRAME WORD WIDTH

CVSD BIT RATE 100 ( 14 ( 12 ( =
ACTUAL
frames words frame bits word sec) ) )

CVSD BIT RATE 16 800 ( =
ACTUAL
bits sec)

CASE 2: (evenly spaced samples, RECOMMENDED)

#CVSD WORDS PER MINOR FRAME 16 ( =
CALCULATED
words frame)

CVSD BIT RATE = MINOR FRAME RATE #CVSD WORDS PER MINOR FRAME WORD WIDTH

CVSD BIT RATE 100 ( 16 ( 12 (
ACTUAL
= frames words frame bits word sec) ) )

) (bits/sec 00 2 19 RATE BIT CVSD =
ACTUAL


CHAPTER 6

DIGITAL CASSETTE HELICAL SCAN RECORDER/REPRODUCER,
MULTIPLEXER/DEMULTIPLEXER, TAPE CASSETTE, AND RECORDER
CONTROL AND COMMAND MNEMONICS STANDARDS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES ......................................................................................................................... i

LIST OF TABLES .......................................................................................................................... ii

ACRONYMS ........................................................................................................................... iii

Paragraph Subject ....................................................................................................... Page

6.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Definitions ....................................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 19-mm Digital Cassette Helical Scan Recording Standards ............................ 6-8
6.4 Multiplex/Demultiplex (MUX/DEMUX) Standard for Multiple Data
Channel Recording on 19-MM Digital Cassette Helical Scan
Recorder/Reproducer Systems ....................................................................... 6-10
6.5 Submultiplex/Demultiplex Standards for Multiple Data Channels on a
Primary Digital Multiplex/Demultiplex Channel .......................................... 6-14
6.6 1/2 Inch Digital Cassette (S-VHS) Helical Scan Recording Standards ......... 6-18
6.7 Multiplex/Demultiplex (MUX/DEMUX) Standards for Multiple Data
Channel Recording on Inch Digital Cassette (S-VHS) Helical Scan
Recorder/Reproducer Systems. ...................................................................... 6-35
6.8 Recorder Command and Control Mnemonics (CCM) ................................... 6-41

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 6-1. Head and head segment mechanical parameters. ............................................. 6-8
Figure 6-2. Location and dimensions of recorded tracks. .................................................. 6-9
Figure 6-3. ADARIO block format. ................................................................................. 6-11
Figure 6-4. ADARIO data format. .................................................................................... 6-13
Figure 6-5. Submux data format. ...................................................................................... 6-17
Figure 6-6. Helical track dimensions, B format. .............................................................. 6-19
Figure 6-7. Helical track dimensions, E format. ............................................................... 6-20
Figure 6-8. Recorded tracks on tape, B format. ................................................................ 6-23
Figure 6-9. Tape cartridge layout. .................................................................................... 6-24
Figure 6-10. Helical track format. ...................................................................................... 6-27
Figure 6-11. Typical VLDS data path electronics block diagram. ..................................... 6-29
Figure 6-12. Interleave buffer architectures. ...................................................................... 6-30
Figure 6-13. The steps of the build process. ....................................................................... 6-36

LIST OF TABLES
Table 6-1. Record Location and Dimensions .................................................................... 6-9
Table 6-2. Tape Length and Nominal Play Record/ Reproduce Time at 240
Megabits/Second User Data Rate .................................................................. 6-10
Table 6-3. ADARIO Format (FMT) Defined Field Restrictions .................................... 6-12
Table 6-4. Physical Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-21
Table 6-5. Track and Data Sync: Word 0-Word 4 ......................................................... 6-27
Table 6-6. Track and Data Sync: Word 5 ....................................................................... 6-28
Table 6-7. ECC - Interleave Buffer Addressing (32 mbps) ............................................ 6-31
Table 6-8. ECC - Interleave Buffer Addressing (64 mbps) ............................................ 6-31
Table 6-9. Tape - Interleave Buffer Addressing (32 mbps) ............................................ 6-32
Table 6-10. Tape - Interleave Buffer Addressing (64 mbps) ............................................ 6-33
Table 6-11. Miscellaneous Bit Definitions ....................................................................... 6-34
Table 6-12. Scanlist Build Steps ....................................................................................... 6-37
Table 6-13. Sample Armor Frame ..................................................................................... 6-38
Table 6-14. Time Code Word Format ............................................................................... 6-39
Table 6-15. Command Summary ...................................................................................... 6-43
Table 6-16. Command Error Codes .................................................................................. 6-44
Table 6-17. Use of Status Bits ........................................................................................... 6-52
Table 6-18. Recorder States .............................................................................................. 6-59
Table 6-19. Command Validity Matrix ............................................................................. 6-64
Table 6-20. Required Commands ...................................................................................... 6-65
ii

ACRONYMS
ADARIO Analog/Digital/ Adaptable/Recorder Input/Output
AFVP Format Verification Program
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ARMOR asynchronous real-time multiplexer and output reconstructor
BCD Binary-coded decimal
BER Bit error rate
BOD beginning of data
BOF beginning of file
BOM beginning of media
BRC The block rate clock
CCM Command and Control Mnemonics
CWDS Code word digital sum OR word digital sum
DSV Digital sum variation
ECC Error correcting code
ECC error correction coding
ECL Emitter-Coupled Logic
EOD end of data
EOF end of file
EOM end of media
ftpmm flux transitions per millimeter
GF Galois field
LBOT logical beginning of tape
LEOT logical end of tape
Mbps megabits per second
MML Magnetic Media Laboratory
MSB most significant bit
MUX/DEMUX Multiplex/Demultiplex
PAR parallel
PBN Principal block number
PBOT physical beginning of tape
PCM Pulse-code modulation
PEOT physical end of tape
RS Reed-Solomon
SI Systeme International d Unites
submux submultiplex
TTL TransistorTransistor Logic
UBE upper band edge
VLDS very large data store

iii

iv


CHAPTER 6
DIGITAL CASSETTE HELICAL SCAN RECORDER/REPRODUCER,
MULTIPLEXER/DEMULTIPLEXER, TAPE CASSETTE, AND RECORDER
CONTROL AND COMMAND MNEMONICS STANDARDS
6.1 Introduction
These standards define terminology for digital cassette helical scan (19-mm and inch)
recording systems, along with the associated multiplexer/demultiplexer systems, digital tape
cassettes, and recorder control and command mnemonics. Standards consistent with
compatibility in interchange transactions are delineated. While the standards may serve as a
guide in the procurement of magnetic tape recording equipment, they are not intended to be
employed as substitutes for purchase specifications. The American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) and the International Standards Organization have prepared other related standards (see
paragraph 1.0, appendix D).

United States (U.S.) engineering units are the original dimensions in these standards.
Conversions for U.S. engineering units (similar to British Imperial Units) to Systeme
International d Unites (SI) units have been done according to ANSI Z210.1-1976 (and
International Standards Organization 370) Method A, except as noted.

Standard test methods for digital cassette helical scan recorder/reproducers and
multiplexer/demultiplexer systems are contained in RCC Document 118, Volume III, Test
Methods for Recorder/Reproducer Systems and Magnetic Tape.

The standards for longitudinal fixed-head recorder and reproducer systems
have been removed from this chapter and are now contained in Appendix
D, paragraphs 12.0 through 21.2. Standards for longitudinal
instrumentation magnetic tape previously contained in Chapter 7 can now
be found in Appendix D, paragraphs 22.0 through 27.11.

6-1

6.2 Definitions
5/6 modulation code: A method of encoding whereby a 5-bit data group is converted to a 6-bit
code frame in accordance with a conversion table. Such coding is performed to control the
frequency content of the data stream.

Basic dimension: A dimension specified on a drawing as basic is a theoretical value used to
describe the exact size, shape, or location of a feature. It is used as the basis from which
permissible variations are established by tolerances on other dimensions.

Bias signal, high frequency: A high-frequency sinusoidal signal linearly added to the analog
data signal in direct recording to linearize the magnetic recording characteristic.

Bi-phase: A method of representing "one" or "zero" levels in PCM systems where a level
change is forced to occur in every bit period. In bi-phase recording, the bi-phase level (split-
phase) method is employed.

Bit error: In PCM systems, a bit error has occurred when the expected bit value is not present;
for example, a zero is present when a one is expected, or a one is present when a zero is
expected.

Bit error rate (BER): Number of bits in error in a predetermined number of bits transmitted or
recorded, for example, 1 in 106 or a BER of 106.

Bit packing density, linear: Number of bits recorded per inch or per millimeter of tape length.
For serial PCM recording, the number of bits per unit length of a single track.

Bit slip: The increase or decrease in detected bit rate by one or more bits with respect to the
actual bit rate.

Code frame: An ordered and contiguous set of bits (symbol) that results as a unit from the
process of modulation coding.

Code word digital sum (CWDS): Denotes the digital sum variation of one modulation code
frame (symbol).

Crossplay: Reproducing a previously recorded tape on a recorder and reproducer system other
than that used to record the tape.

Crosstalk: Undesired signal energy appearing in a reproducer channel as a result of coupling
from other channels.

Data azimuth (dynamic): The departure from the head segment gap azimuth angles (static)
because of the dynamic interface between the heads and the moving tape.

6-2

Data scatter: The distance between two parallel lines (as defined under gap scatter) in the plane
of the tape, which contains all data transitions recorded simultaneously with the same head at the
same instant of time.

Data spacing: For interlaced head systems, the distance on tape between simultaneous events
recorded on odd and even heads.

Digital sum variation (DSV): Indicates the integral value that is counted from the beginning of
the modulation coded waveform, taking a high level as 1 and a low level as -1.

Direct Recording (ac Bias Recording): A magnetic recording technique employing a high-
frequency bias signal that is linearly added to the data signal. The composite signal is then used
as the driving signal to the record-head segment. The bias signal, whose frequency is well above
the highest frequency that can be reproduced by the system, transforms the recording of the data
signal so that it is a more nearly linear process.

Double-density recording: Direct, FM, or PCM recording on magnetic tape at bandwidths
equal to those used in wide-band instrumentation recording, but at one-half the wide-band tape
speeds specified in IRIG standard 106-80 and earlier telemetry standards. Special record and
reproduce heads and high output tapes (see Chapter 7) are required for double-density recording.

Dropout: An instantaneous decrease in reproduced signal amplitude of a specified amplitude
and duration.

ECC code word: The group of symbols resulting from ECC encoding including the data
symbols and the check symbols appended.

Edge margin: The distance between the outside edge of the highest number track and the tape
edge (see Appendix D, D-7Aa).

Edge margin minimum: The minimum value of edge margin.

Error correcting code (ECC): A mathematical procedure yielding bits used for the detection
and correction of errors.

FM recording: Recording on magnetic tape using frequency-modulated record electronics to
obtain response from dc to an upper specified frequency. The FM systems forfeit upper
bandwidth response of direct record systems to obtain low frequency and dc response not
available with direct recording.

Flux transition: A 180-degree change in the flux pattern of a magnetic medium brought about
by a reversal of poles within the medium.

Flux transition density: Number of flux transitions per inch or per millimeter of track length.

6-3

Flutter: Undesired changes in the frequency of signals during the reproduction of a magnetic
tape produced by speed variations of the magnetic tape during recording or reproducing.

Gap azimuth: The angular deviation, in degrees of arc, of the recorded flux transitions on a
track from the line normal to the track centerline.

Gap length (physical): The dimension between leading and trailing edges of a record or
reproduce head-segment gap measured along a line perpendicular to the leading and trailing
edges of the gap.

Gap scatter (record head): The distance between two parallel lines is defined in the following
subparagraphs.

a. The two lines pass through the geometric centers of the trailing edges of the two
outermost head segment gaps within a record head. The geometric centers of the other
head segment gap trailing edges lie between the two parallel lines.
b. The two parallel lines lie in the plane of the tape and are perpendicular to the head
reference plane (see Appendix D, Figure D-7b)
Gap scatter (reproduce head): Defined the same as for record-head gap scatter except that the
reference points for reproduce heads are the geometric centers of the center lines of the head
segment gaps (Appendix D, Figure D-7c).

Guard band: The unrecorded space between two adjacent recorded tracks on the magnetic tape.

Head (record or reproduce): A group of individual head segments mounted in a stack.

Head designation: For interlaced heads, the first head of a record or reproduce pair over which
the tape passes in the forward direction containing odd-numbered head segments and referred to
as the odd head. The second head containing even-numbered head segments is the even head.
For non-interlaced heads (in-line heads), both odd- and even-numbered head segments are
contained within a single head.

Heads, in-line: A single record head and a single reproduce head are employed. Odd and even
record-head segment gaps are in-line in the record head. Odd and even reproduce-head segment
gaps are in-line in the reproduce head.

Head reference plane: The plane, which may be imaginary, is parallel to the reference edge of
the tape and perpendicular to the plane of the tape. For purposes of this definition, the tape shall
be considered as perfect (see Appendix D, Figure D-7b, and Figure D-7c).

Head segment, record or reproduce: A single transducer that records or reproduces one track
(see Appendix D, Figure D-7b).

Head segment gap azimuth (record or reproduce heads): The angle formed in the plane of
the tape between a line perpendicular to the head reference plane and a line parallel to the trailing
6-4

edge of the record-head segment gap or parallel to the centerline of the reproduce-head segment
gap.

Head segment gap azimuth scatter: The angular deviations of the head segment gap azimuth
angles within a head.

Head segment numbering: Numbering of a head segment corresponds to the track number on
the magnetic tape on which that head segment normally operates. For interlaced heads, the odd
head of a pair contains all odd-numbered segments, while the even head will contain all
even-numbered segments (see Appendix D, Figure D-7c). In-line heads will contain odd and
even segments in the same head stack.

Head spacing: For interlaced head systems, the distance between odd and even heads.

Head tilt: The angle between the plane tangent to the front surface of the head at the center line
of the head segment gaps and a line perpendicular to the head reference plane (see Appendix D,
Figure D-7b).

Heads, interlaced: Two record heads and two reproduce heads are employed. Head segments
for alternate tracks are in alternate heads.

Helical track: A diagonally positioned area on the tape along which a series of magnetic
transitions is recorded.

High-density digital recording: Recording of digital data on a magnetic medium resulting in a
flux transition density in excess of 590 transitions per millimeter (15 000 transitions per inch) per
track.

Individual track data azimuth difference: Angular deviation of the data azimuth of an
individual odd or even recorded track from the data azimuth of other odd or even tracks. The
difficulty in making direct optical angular measurements requires this error to be expressed as a
loss of signal amplitude experienced when the tape is reproduced with an ideal reproducing head,
whose gap is aligned to coincide with the data azimuth of all tracks in one head as compared to
the azimuth which produces maximum signal for an individual track (see Appendix D, and
Figure D-7b).

Interleaving: The systematic reordering of data so that originally adjacent ECC code word
symbols are separated, thus reducing the effect of burst errors on the error correcting capability.

Non-return-to-zero level: A binary method of representation for PCM signals where one is
represented by one level and zero is defined as the other level in a bi-level system.

Physical recording density: The number of recorded flux transitions per unit length of track,
for example, flux transitions per millimeter (ftpmm).

6-5

Principal block: Denotes a group of helical tracks recorded on the tape in one complete rotation
of the scanner.

Principal block number (PBN): A unique number assigned to and recorded in each principal
block.

Record level set frequency: Frequency of a sinusoidal signal used to establish the standard
record level in direct- record systems. Normally, 10 percent of the upper band edge (UBE)
frequency.

Reference tape edge: When viewing a magnetic tape from the oxide surface side with the
earlier recorded portion to the observer's right, the reference edge is the top edge of the tape (see
Appendix D, Figure D-7a).

Reference track location: Location of the centerline of track number 1 from the reference edge
of tape.

Scanner: The rotating assembly housing the helical heads around which the tape is applied
thereby accomplishing the recording of helical tracks on the tape.

Standard record level: For a magnetic tape recorder meeting IRIG standards and operating in
the direct record mode, the input signal level produces 1 percent third harmonic distortion of the
record level set frequency.

Tape skew: Motion of a magnetic tape past a head such that a line perpendicular to the tape
reference edge has an angular displacement (static or dynamic) from the head gap centerlines.

Tape speed, absolute: The tape speed during recording and reproducing. The peripheral
velocity of the capstan minus any tape slip, regardless of tape tension and environment.

Tape speed, effective: The tape speed modified by the effects on tape of operating conditions
such as tension, tape materials, thickness, temperature, and humidity. The effective tape speed
should be equal to the selected speed of the recorder, for example, 1524 mm/s (60 ips),
3048 mm/s (120 ips), regardless of operating conditions.

Tape speed errors: Errors are the departures of the effective speed from the selected tape
speed.

Track angle: The angular deviation, in degrees of arc, of the centerline of the recorded helical
track from the tape reference edge.

Track location: Location of the nth track centerline from the reference track centerline.

Track numbering: The reference track is designated as track number 1. Tracks are numbered
consecutively from the reference track downward when viewing the oxide surface of the tape
6-6

with the earlier recorded portion of the tape to the observer's right (see Appendix D, and
Figure D-7a).

Track spacing: Distance between adjacent track centerlines on a magnetic tape (see
Appendix D, and Figure D-7a).

Track width: The physical width of the common interface of the record-head segment at the
gaps. This definition does not include the effects of fringing fields, which will tend to increase
the recorded track width by a small amount.

Volume label: A group of bits used to provide an identifying code for a tape cartridge

6-7

6.3 19-mm Digital Cassette Helical Scan Recording Standards
These standards are for single-channel high-bit rate helical scan digital recorders using
19 mm tape cassettes. Bit rates of less than 10 megabits per second to 256 megabits per second
or greater may be recorded and reproduced by equipment conforming to these standards.
Interchange parties must, however, determine the availability at a particular site of the equipment
required to meet particular data recording requirements. Compatibility between the recording
device and the expected playback equipment must also be considered. Figure 6-1 displays the
head and head segment mechanical parameters for a single-channel high-bit rate helical scan
digital recorder.

6.3.1 Track Format. The format recorded and reproduced by these systems shall be as specified in
American National Standard For Information Systems 19 mm Type ID-1 Recorded Instrumentation
Digital Tape Format, ANSI INCITS 175-1999.
1
Helical tracks employ azimuth recording wherein
the head gap angle with respect to the recorded track center line is 90 + 15 for one scan and
90 15 for the adjacent scan. Figure 6-2 and Table 6-1 show details of the helical tracks and
auxiliary longitudinal tracks for control, timing, and annotation in the ID-1 format.

Figure 6-1. Head and head segment mechanical parameters.

1
Formerly ANSI -1990. Available from American National Standards Institute (webstore.ansi.org).
6-8

TABLE 6-1. RECORD LOCATION AND DIMENSIONS
Dimensions Nominals
A TIME-CODE TRACK LOWER EDGE 0.2 mm
B TIME-CODE TRACK UPPER EDGE 0.7 mm
C CONTROL TRACK LOWER EDGE 1.0 mm
D CONTROL TRACK UPPER EDGE 1.5 mm
E DATA-AREA LOWER EDGE 1.8 mm
F DATA-AREA WIDTH 16 mm
G ANNOTATION TRACK LOWER EDGE 18.1 mm
H ANNOTATION TRACK UPPER EDGE 18.8 mm
I HELICAL TRACK WIDTH 0.045 mm
J TRACK PITCH, BASIC 0.045 mm
N HELICAL TRACK TOTAL LENGTH 170 mm
P ANNOTATION/TIME-CODE HEAD LOCATION 118.7 mm
R SECTOR RECORDING TOLERANCE 0.1 mm
T CONTROL TRACK SYNC TOLERANCE 0.1 mm
P TRACK ANGLE, ARC-SINE (16/170) 5.4005
W TAPE WIDTH 19.01 mm

Figure 6-2. Location and dimensions of recorded tracks.

6-9

6.3.2 Magnetic Tape and Cassettes. The magnetic tape shall meet the requirements of
Magnetic Media Laboratory (MML) Document 94-1, Specification for Rotary Instrumentation
Magnetic Recording Tape, 19-millimeter (0.75 inch) Wide, 68 KA/M (850 Oersteds)
2
. A tape
base thickness of 16 um is normally employed. The recorder/reproducers shall be capable of
using 19 mm cassettes that conform to the physical dimensions of medium and large cassettes as
defined in SMPTE 226M
3
and as shown in Table 6-2. Table 6-2 shows tape capacities and
indicates the amount of time available for recording, assuming a data input rate of 240 megabits
per second.

6.3.3 Recorder/Reproducer Input and Output. Data input and clock are required. The data
input shall be in an 8-bit parallel, byte serial format, and the clock signal will be at the required
byte rate. Data output will also be in 8-bit parallel format.

TABLE 6-2. TAPE LENGTH AND NOMINAL PLAY RECORD/ REPRODUCE
TIME AT 240 MEGABITS/SECOND USER DATA RATE
Cassette
Tape Thickness
(micrometers)
Tape Length
(meters)
Play Time
(minutes)
Medium 16 587 24
Large 16 1311 55
CASSETTE DIMENSIONS NOMINAL
Cassette Length Width Thickness
Medium 254 mm 150 mm 33 mm
Large 366 mm 206 mm 33 mm

6.4 Multiplex/Demultiplex (MUX/DEMUX) Standard for Multiple Data Channel
Recording on 19-MM Digital Cassette Helical Scan Recorder/Reproducer Systems
For recording and reproducing multiple channels on 19-mm Digital Cassette Helical Scan
Recorders, the ADARIO multiplex/demultiplex format is recommended. The ADARIO
(Analog/Digital/ Adaptable/Recorder Input/Output) format was developed for the Department of

2
MML Document 94-1 is available from the Naval Air Warfare Center Aircraft Division, Patuxent
River, W
Maryland 20670.
3
SMPTE 226M is available from the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers, 595 West
Hartdale Avenue, White Plains, New York 10607.

6-10

Defense, Fort Meade, Maryland. The format is government-owned and may, therefore, be used
in equipment provided for government activities. Some of the ADARIO features are:

a. Requires less than 3 percent overhead to be added to user data.
b. Accommodates multiple channel record/playback with each channel completely
autonomous in sample rate and sample width.
c. Stores all the necessary parameters for channel data reconstruction for real-time
playback, time-scaled playback, or computer processing.
d. Preserves phase coherence between data channels.
e. Provides channel source and timing information.
f. Accommodates 2
24
(over 16 million) blocks of data, each block having 2048 24-bit
words (see Figure 6-3).

Figure 6-3. ADARIO block format.

The ADARIO format imposes minimum restrictions on the channel signals and aggregate data
parameters. Specific implementations that use the ADARIO format may impose additional restrictions.
ADARIO format, defined field restrictions are listed in Table 6-3 below:

6-11

TABLE 6-3. ADARIO FORMAT (FMT) DEFINED FIELD RESTRICTIONS
Field Restrictions
Session length Unlimited
Sequence numbered
Blk. 2
24
(100 G byte max.)
Master clock
MC 2
19
*250 Hz (131 MHz max.)
Block rate BMD, MC/BMD (8 blk./sec min.) MC/2048 (64K blk./sec. max.)
Aggregate rate MC *24 (3145 Mbps max.)
Channel quantity
Q, Ch#, 2
4
(16 channels max.)
Bits per sample FMT, 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,10,12,14,16,18,20,22,24 bits per sample
Input clock rate
MC, Rate 2
19

*250 Hz (131 MHz max.)
Input bit rate 2035 *24 block rate (3125 Mbps max.)
Analog bandwidth MC/2.5 (52.4 MHz max.)
Analog attenuation
Atten, 2
5
(15 dB, +16 dB)
Analog coupling DCAC (dc or ac)
Time correlation
1/MC (7.6 ns max. resolution) TD/MC 2
16
(65, 536*MC max. range)
Channel card types
CHT, 2
6
(64 max.)

Channel input digital data can be in any format, serial or parallel, in any coding, and at
any levels, TTL, ECL, that can be accommodated by the channel type card used. Channel input
analog signals can contain any form of modulation, at any nominal level, with any dynamic
within the limitations (see Figure 6-4).

6-12

Figure 6-4. ADARIO data format.
6-13

6.5 Submultiplex/Demultiplex Standards for Multiple Data Channels on a Primary
Digital Multiplex/Demultiplex Channel
For combining multiple low to medium rate telemetry channels on a single primary
digital channel such as the ADARIO input channel, the submultiplex (submux) format is
recommended. The format was developed for test range applications where high quantity of
channels must be collected in conjunction with high data rate primary channels. The submux
format provides a standard for extending the ADARIO primary channel or any other primary
digital channel for conveying data from up to 31 subchannels in digital aggregate data form.
Each channel is totally autonomous and can be enabled or disabled at any time. Some of the
features of the submux format are:

a. Accommodates analog, digital clocked and asynchronous, time and annotation text,
and other application specific telemetry channels.
b. Requires less than 0.3 percent of overhead per channel.
c. Stores all necessary parameters for channel signal reconstruction in real or scaled
time.
d. Preserves phase coherence between all channels for all rates (dc to maximum) and all
types of channels.
e. Accommodates variable and fixed rate primary channel of up to 256 Mbps.

6.5.1 Format Structure. General structure of the submux format is based on a constant block
rate and variable block data length for each channel data block. The aggregate data stream is the
sequential collection of each enabled channel data block with a three-word header. Each channel
data block is the sequential collection of data samples or events within the block time period. A
reserved channel (channel ID=31) provides frame synchronization and block timing and is
always the first channel in the frame sequence. Individual channels can be enabled or disabled at
any time within the rate limitations of the primary channel. Primary channel redundant
parameter fields such as date, time, and annotation are placed in optional defined channel types,
thereby, minimizing overhead caused by redundancy. All data and headers are bit packed into
16-bit words. All fields, unless specifically stated, are binary coded. Physical implementation of
the format may have design restrictions as to types and quantities of channels and maximum
allowable field limits.

6.5.2 Implied Parameters and Limits. Maximum aggregate rate (256 Mbps), block rate, first
sample time delay measurement, and internal sample period are based on a 16-MHz clock rate
divided by 2
N
, where N can be set from 0 to 7 defining the derived clock. Block rate is based on
the derived clock divided by 20 160 which sets the limit on the total aggregate word count of all
channels in a block period. The maximum block rate (793.65 blocks per second) in conjunction
with the 16-bit bit count field, limits the maximum subchannel input rate to 52 Mbps. The
16-MHz clock limits the time delay resolution to 62.5 nanoseconds.

The maximum number of channels is limited by the 5-bit field and the reserved block
sync channel to 31 channels numbered from 0 to 30. Channel ID of 31 is the reserved block sync
channel that conveys timing information. To accommodate fixed rate primary channel, fill can
be inserted after the last channel data block, prior to the next block sync channel (at the end of
the frame), and must consist of all binary ones (FFFF hex word value).
6-14

Channel priority is fixed in channel number sequence with channel ID of 31 (block sync)
first, followed by channel ID 0, if enabled, to channel ID 30, followed by fill (if required) to
maintain fixed channel rate. Any channel can be one of eight channel types. Type 0 channels
convey timing data in the 3-word header and have implied data length of 0. Type other than zero
contains the bit count field that defines the length of valid data in the data block. The actual
word length of the data block is the integer of {(bit count + 15)/16}. Channel type also defines
the content of the fields in the header.

6.5.3 Defined Parameters. Each channel data block has a 3-word (16-bit) header that contains
the channel ID number, channel type, and other defined and undefined fields based on the
channel type code. Undefined fields are reserved for future use and should be zero filled. Each
channel header also contains up to 4 status bits that indicate the condition in the current data
block or the condition of the last aggregate frame.

Channel ID 31 is a special form of channel type 0. The first two words are used for
synchronization and are F8C7 BF1E hex value. The block rate clock (BRC) defines the main
clock binary divider and is used for time scaled signal reconstruction. Each increment time
period doubles. Fill indicates if the primary channel requires fill for fixed data rate.

Channel ID can be any unique number from 0 to 30 and designates the physical
subchannel used for acquiring the data. Channel type defines the type of data this channel
conveys and is currently defined for 0 to 5.

A type 0 time tag channel typically processes IRIG time code data and is used to time
tag the frame. The Days Hours Minutes Seconds Fractional Seconds fields are the content of
IRIG time code input or channel derived and in the same BCD form as the IRIG G time code.

Type nonzero headers contain FMT field that defines the format of the sample in bits per
sample, 4-bit status field that indicates any errors or warnings pertaining to the current data
block, bit count field that defines the length of valid data in the data block, and time delay field
that (when external clock is used) indicates the delay from block time to the first sample in the
BRC defined clock periods. When the internal clock is used, as indicated by type or most
significant bit (MSB) of time delay, the sample period field defines the period of the internal
sample clock in the BRC defined clock periods. The internal sample clock is always an integer
divisor of the block period and the first sample is coincident with the block time. In type 1
blocks, this field is used for sequential block count.

When the internal clock is used with digital serial channel, the data and clock lines are
sampled at the designated rate and result in eight data and eight clock samples per data block
word. Otherwise, all incoming digital data are sampled at the incoming clock and results in a
sample in the data block, with the first sample being left justified in the first word with format
designated number of bits starting with the MSB of the sample. Samples are bit sequentially
packed regardless of word boundaries. The last sample in the block period is fully packed into
the current data block with the remaining portion of the word, if any, being left undefined.

6-15

6.5.4 Aggregate Format on the Primary Data Channel. Figure 6-5 shows the defined types of
channel data from which the aggregate is composed. The primary data will always consist of the
frame sync block followed by one or more unique channel blocks, followed by fill if required.
The frame sync block will be generated at block rate. Aggregate data may be clocked by the
primary channel or by the submux at constant or burst rate depending on the primary channel
characteristics. Data format field definitions appear in Appendix G, Submux Data Format Field
Definitions.

6.5.5 Submux/Demux FILL Requirement. The submux produces aggregate data at the user
aggregate data rate. In other words, the rate and amount of data produced on the aggregate
output is directly proportional to the user specified clock and data format bits and is averaged
over the frame period. This variable aggregate data rate is acceptable to variable rate primary
channels or buffered variable rate recorders.

Fixed rate primary channels and fixed rate recorders require data at some fixed rate. The
fixed rate is usually set to be the maximum expected user aggregate rate. When the user
aggregate rate is less than the maximum, then some sort of filler is necessary to maintain the
constant output rate. The format-specified fill word provides this filler and is automatically
generated when the primary channel or fixed rate recorder provides clocks after the last word of
the last enabled channel is clocked out within the frame period. Fill is always terminated by the
Frame of Block Sync channel, indicating the presence of the next frame data.

The quantity of fill words is totally dependent on the fixed primary channel rate and the
average user aggregate rate within one frame period. Minimum is zero words when user rates
are at the maximum and equal to the fixed rate (minus the overhead). When user rates are at the
minimum, maximum amount of fill will be generated for maintaining constant output rate.

6-16

16 BITS
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
GENERAL
FORM
HW1 CHN ID CHT FMT ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4
HW2
HW3 I/E TIME DELAY OR SAMPLE PERIOD
FRAME
SYNC
HW1 CHN ID = 1F CHT = 0 SYNC 1 = F8C7 HEX (FULL WORD)
HW2 SYNC 2 = BF1E HEX
HW3 BRC FILL AOE PCR ST3 ST4
TIME
TAG
HW1 CHN ID = 0 TO 30 CHT = 0 MSB DAYS (BCD)
HW2 DAYS HOURS (BCD) MINUTES (BCD)
HW3 SECONDS (BCD) FRACTIONAL SECONDS
A
N
N
O
T
A
T
I
O
N

T
E
X
T

HW1 CHN ID = 0 TO 30 CHT = 1 FMT = 7 NC
OV
R
PE OE
HW2 BIT COUNT
HW3 BLOCK COUNT
DW1 MSB 1
ST
CHARACTER MSB 2
ND
CHARACTER
:
DWn

MSB LAST CHARACTER UNDEFINED IF NOT LAST
DIGITAL
SERIAL
EXTERNAL
CLOCK
HW1 CHN ID = 0 TO 30 CHT = 2 FMT = 0 NSIB OVR ST3 ST4
HW2 BIT COUNT = L
HW3
I/E=
0
TIME DELAY
DW1 DS
1
DS
2
DS
3
DS
4
DS
5
DS
6
DS
7
DS
8
DS
9
DS
10
DS
11
DS
12
DS
13
DS
14
DS
15
DS
16
:
DWn

DS
L-1 DS
L
UNDEFINED IF NOT LAST
DIGITAL
SERIAL
INTERNAL
CLOCK
HW1 CHN ID = 0 TO 30 CHT = 2 FMT = 0 0 0 ST3 ST4
HW2 BIT COUNT = L
HW3
I/E=
1
SAMPLE PERIOD
DW1 DS
1
DS
2
DS
3
DS
4
DS
5
DS
6
DS
7
DS
8
CS
1
CS
2
CS
3
CS
4
CS
5
CS
6
CS
7
CS
8
:
DWn

DS
L-
DS
L-
DS
L-
DS
L-
DS
L-
DS
L-
DS
L-
DS
L
CS
L-
CS
L
CS
L-
CS
L-
CS
L-
CS
L-
CS
L-
CS
L
DIGITAL
PARALLEL
EXTERNAL
CLOCK
HW1 CHN ID = 0 TO 30 CHT = 3 FMT = 0-15 (shown=6) NSIB OVR ST3 ST4
HW2 BIT COUNT = L
HW3
I/E=
0
TIME DELAY
DW1 MSB 1
ST
SAMPLE MSB 2
ND
SAMPLE 3
RD
SAMPLE
:
DWn

MSB LAST SAMPLE LSB=BIT L UNDEFINED IF NOT LAST
ANALOG
WIDE
BAND
HW1 CHN ID = 0 TO 30 CHT = 4 FMT = 0-15 (shown=7) AOR ST2 ST3 ST4
HW2 BIT COUNT = L
HW3
I/E=
1
SAMPLE PERIOD
DW1 MSB 1
ST
SAMPLE MSB 2
ND
SAMPLE
:
DWn

MSB LAST SAMPLE UNDEFINED IF NOT LAST
ANALOG
STEREO
L & R
HW1 CHN ID = 0 TO 30 CHT = 5 FMT = 0-15 (shown=7)
LAO
R
RAO
R
ST3 ST4
HW2 BIT COUNT = L
HW3
I/E=
1
ENL ENR SAMPLE PERIOD
DW1 MSB 1
ST
SAMPLE L MSB 1
ST
SAMPLE R
:
DWn

MSB LAST SAMPLE UNDEFINED IF NOT LAST
FILL FW FILL WORD FFFF HEX

Figure 6-5. Submux data format.
6-17

6.6 1/2 Inch Digital Cassette (S-VHS) Helical Scan Recording Standards
These standards are for helical scan digital magnetic tape recorder/reproducers using the
very large data store (VLDS) format. This standard is intended for applications where compact
size is needed and bit rates do not exceed 32 or 64 megabits per second (Mbps). The VLDS is a
12.65 mm (1/2 inch) S-VHS (850 Oersteds nominal) media based tape format. This standard
describes the salient features of the LDS format. To ensure crossplay compatibility between
recorders of different manufacturers, refer to Metrum-Datatape document number and title
16829019, M64/32HE Magnetic Tape Recorder/Reproducer Tape Format Specification.

Metrum-Datatape is now Sypris Data Systems and this specification may
be updated in the near future to reflect this change in name. An Adobe pdf
copy of this specification can be obtained by calling (303) 773-4701.
Many of the specifications listed in this chapter have been adapted from
this document.

6.6.1 Magnetic Tape and Cassettes. The magnetic tape shall meet the requirements of
Magnetic Media Laboratory (MML) Document 93-1, Specification for Rotary Instrumentation
Magnetic Recording Tape, 12.65 millimeter (0.5 inch), 68 KA/M (850 Oersteds)
4
. The tape
cartridge shall conform to ANSI Standard V98.33M-1983, Specification for Physical
Characteristics and Dimensions
5
. To ensure crossplay compatibility, the T-160 (327 meters,
min.) is recommended.

6.6.2 Format Types. There are four standard formats. Two B formats provide 32 Mbps
standard density or 64 Mbps high density for most applications where severe environmental
conditions are not encountered. There are also two E formats provide 16 Mbps standard density
or 32 Mbps high density for harsh environments involving extremes of vibration and
temperature. A tape made on a standard density system may be reproduced on a high density
system. Relative to the B formats, the E formats use a 100 percent larger track pitch, an 81
percent larger track width, and a larger guard band providing a very large margin for accurately
tracking and recovering data under extreme conditions. The E formats provide only about one-
half the data storage capacity of the B format but can be played back on a B format system.

4
MML Document 93-1 is available from the Naval Air Warfare Center Aircraft Division, Patuxent
River, Maryland 20670.
5
ANSI V98.33M-1983 is available from the American National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway,
New York, New York 10018.
6-18

6.6.2.1 B Format. These formats originate from helical scanner implementations using four
helical heads organized in pairs at 180 separation. The heads are both read and write
functionally and are supported by two parallel sets of read/write electronics referred to as data
channels. Helical track dimensions are given in Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6. Helical track dimensions, B format.

6.6.2.2 E Format. These formats originate from helical scanner implementations using two
helical heads with wider track widths at 180 separation on the scanner. The heads are both read
and write functionally. One set of read/write or write only electronics is required. Helical track
dimensions are given in Figure 6-7.
6-19

Figure 6-7. Helical track dimensions, E format.

6.6.3 Data Storage. Data are recorded onto 12.65 mm (1/2 in.) wide magnetic tape using both
rotating and fixed heads (see Figure 6-9). The rotating heads record data in adjacent track
patterns at an inclined angle to the normal tape motion. The fixed heads record data on tracks
parallel to the tape motion. The fixed head tracks are used for control and servo purposes and do
not directly record user data.

6.6.4 Physical Relationships. Maintaining high accuracy of the ratio between scanner
rotational speed and tape speed (1.5492 mm (0.0610 in.) of tape motion per scanner rotation) is
critical to maintaining the format geometry. Head and tape speed will vary accordingly with
changes in the other two speed parameters. The three speed parameters vary linearly with
desired user data rates. Parameters used with a user data rate of 32 Mbps (B) or 16 Mbps (E) are
as follows in Table 6-4:

6-20

TABLE 6-4. PHYSICAL PARAMETERS
user bits/helical track
2
17
=131 072 bits (16 kilobytes)
scanner diameter
62.000 mm + 0.008/-0.000 mm (2.44
in. + 0.0003 in.)
scanner rotation speed 3662.1 rpm
tape speed 94.55 mm/sec (3.72 in./sec.)
head/tape speed 11 794.30 mm/sec (464.34 in./sec.)
helix angle (head rotational
plane to ref. edge of tape)
5
56' 7.4" basic dimension

head gap length refer to Metrum Document 16829019
6

tape tension (inlet side of
scanner)
0.35N 0.02N

6.6.5 Helical Track Organization. Each group of four helical tracks resulting from one
complete revolution of the scanner (two helical tracks for the E formats) is termed a principal
block on the tape. A principal block is the smallest increment of data that may be written to or
read from the tape. Each principal block is assigned a unique number, which is recorded as part
of the helical track. Helical tracks containing user data begin with the number 1 and are
sequentially incremented on the tape up to the capacity of the cartridge. Whenever new data are
appended on a previously recorded cartridge, the new data are precisely located to begin with the
next helical track location after the previous end of data point with no interruption or
discontinuity in track spacing.

6.6.6 Recorded Information. The following subparagraphs contain additional information.

6.6.6.1 Add overhead bytes generated by error correction encoding algorithms.

6.6.6.2 Provide preamble and postamble patterns for isolation of the information at the
beginning and end of the helical tracks.

6.6.6.3 Provide clock synchronization patterns to facilitate clock recovery at the beginning of
each helical track.

6.6.6.4 Add patterns throughout the helical track to maintain synchronization and counteract
bit slips during data extraction.

6.6.6.5 Provide redundantly recorded principal block numbers for organizing data on the
cartridge.

6.6.6.6 Include a user specifiable volume label for identifying the entire cartridge.

6
See reference on how to obtain the Metrum-Datatape document at paragraph 6.6 above.
6-21

6.6.6.7 Add miscellaneous data used to convey information about the organization of data on
the cartridge and within the helical tracks.

6.6.7 Recording Geometry and Physical Dimensions. Included in the following
subparagraph are the recording geometry and the physical dimensions.

6.6.7.1 Tape Reference Edge. The tape reference edge for dimensions specified in this section
shall be the lower edge as shown in Figure 6-8. The magnetic coating, with the direction of tape
travel as shown in Figure 6-6, shall be the side facing the observer.

6.6.7.2 Helical Tracks. Contained in the succeeding subparagraphs are the helical tracks
attributes.

6.6.7.2.1 Track Widths. The width of a written track shall be 0.032 mm 0.002 (0.0013 in.
0.000079) for the B formats and 0.058 mm 0.002 (0.0023 in. 0.000079) for the E formats.

6.6.7.2.2 Track Pitch. The distance between the center lines of any two adjacent tracks,
measured perpendicular to the track length, shall be 0.0404 mm (0.0016 in.) for the B formats
and 0.0808 mm (0.0032 in.) for the E formats.

6.6.7.2.3 Track Straightness. Either edge of the recorded track shall be contained within two
parallel straight lines 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) apart. The center lines of any four consecutive
tracks shall be contained within the pattern of four tolerance zones. Each tolerance zone is
defined by two parallel lines, which are inclined at an angle of 5 58' 58.4" basic with respect to
the tape edge. The center lines of the tolerance zones shall be spaced 0.0404 mm (0.0016 in.)
apart for the B format and 0.0808 mm (0.0032) apart for the E format. The width of the first
tolerance zone shall be 0.007 mm (0.00028 in.). The width of tolerance zones two, three, and
four shall be 0.011 mm (0.0004 in.). These tolerance zones are established to contain track
angle, straightness, and pitch errors.

6-22

6-23
Figure 6-8. Recorded tracks on tape, B format.


6.6.7.2.4 Gap Azimuths. The azimuth of the head gaps used for the helical track recording shall
be inclined at angles of 6 15' to the perpendicular to the helical track record (see Figure 6-8
and Figure 6-9). For the E formats and for the first and third tracks of every principal block of
the B formats, the recorded azimuth is oriented in the clockwise direction with respect to the line
perpendicular to the track direction when viewed from the magnetic coating side of the tape. For
the B formats, the second and fourth tracks of each principal block are oriented in the
counterclockwise direction.

Figure 6-9. Tape cartridge layout.

6.6.7.2.5 Track Guard Bands. The nominal unrecorded guard band between any two adjacent
helical tracks shall be 0.008368 mm (0.0003 in.) for the B formats and 0.022737 mm (0.0009 in.)
for the E formats.

6.6.7.2.6 Track Angle. The track angle shall be 5 58' 58.4".

6.6.7.2.7 Track Length. The track length shall be 96.619 mm (3.80 in.).

6.6.7.2.8 Physical Recording Density. The maximum physical density of the recording shall be
1930 or 3776 flux transistors per millimeter (ftpmm) respectively for the 32 and 64 Mbps
systems.

6.6.7.3 Longitudinal Tracks. The characteristics of the longitudinal tracks are described in the
subsequent subparagraphs.

6.6.7.3.1 Servo Track. The servo track is located along the reference edge of the tape as shown
in Figure 6-7. The azimuth angle of the servo track head gap shall be perpendicular to the
recorded track. The recording of the servo track is composed of a recorded pulse (nominally
0.0185 mm (0.0007 in.)) for each principal block on the tape. The recording shall achieve full
magnetic saturation for at least half the pulse. The time duration of the pulse is determined by
the tape speed to yield this physical dimension. During the interval between pulses, no magnetic
recording occurs on the track. The pulse is timed to begin coincident with the midpoint of the
principal block (the data channel switches from first to second head). The physical offset from
the longitudinal head to the helical heads is shown in Figure 6-7, Figure 6-8, and Figure 6-9 as
dimension X.

6.6.7.3.2 Filemark Track. The filemark track is located near the top of the tape as shown in
Figure 6-7. The azimuth angle of the filemark track head gap shall be perpendicular to the
recorded track. The recording of the filemark track is composed of a series of pulses located in
6-24

conjunction with the principal block to be marked. Each filemark is composed of three
redundant pulses (nominal 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.)). The three pulses are typically spaced
0.029 mm (0.0011 in.) apart with a maximum span of 0.09 mm (0.0035 in.) from the beginning
of the first to the beginning of the third. This triplet of pulses is for redundancy against tape
flaws and on detection are treated as one filemark regardless of whether 1, 2, or 3 pulses are
detected. The filemark pulses are associated with a specific principal block by initiating the first
pulse between 4 to 5.5 msec after the midpoint of the principal block. (Data channel switches
from first to second head.)

6.6.8 Tape Cartridge Format. The physical format of the recording along the length of the
tape is shown in Figure 6-10. Immediately following the physical beginning of tape (PBOT) is
an unused portion of tape, followed by the cassette format zone, which precedes the logical
beginning of tape (LBOT). Principal blocks of user data shall be recorded between LBOT and
the logical end of tape (LEOT), which precedes the physical end of tape (PEOT).

6.6.8.1 Load Point. The load point is defined as the first point after PBOT accessible by the
recording system with the tape fully engaged to the scanner.

6.6.8.2 Format Zone. The format zone begins at the load point, precedes the LBOT, and
consists of a minimum of 450 principal blocks recorded on the tape. It provides a run up area for
the servo systems and principal block identification allowing precise location of the LBOT
where user data begin. The zone must be prerecorded to prepare the cartridge to accept user
data. This process involves locating at the load point and beginning recording as soon as tape
speed servo lock is achieved. The principal blocks recorded are numbered beginning with a
negative number and counting up until principal block 0 is recorded. Principal block 0 shall be
the last recorded block in the format zone. Principal blocks recorded in the format zone do not
contain user data or error correction coding (ECC) overhead bytes, but do contain the remaining
miscellaneous information described in paragraph 6.6.6 and in the helical track data format
descriptions. The volume label for the cartridge is irreversibly determined at the time the format
zone is recorded.

6.6.8.3 Logical Beginning of Tape. The logical beginning of tape denotes the end of the
format zone and the point at which principal blocks containing reproducible data begin. The first
principal block containing useful information shall be assigned the number one.

6.6.8.3 Data Zone. Beginning with principal block 1 at LBOT and continuing through to
LEOT, the data zone shall be the principal blocks that record user data as well as the added
miscellaneous information to allow full reproduction and management of the data on the tape
cartridge.

6.6.8.5 Logical End of Tape. The logical end of tape is a physical principal block count. The
principal block count for the standard ST-160 tape cartridge is 210 333.

6.6.9 Helical Track Format. The format for writing data into a single helical track is shown
in Figure 6-11. The term "bits" refers to actual on tape bit cells. Each helical track begins with a
preamble area consisting of 6216 bits of an alternating pattern of three 0 bits and three 1 bits for
6-25

the 32 Mbps system or 9240 bits for the 64 Mbps system. This 6-bit pattern is repeated 1036 or
1540 times. The preamble is followed by a track synchronization area. This area provides for
obtaining registration to the track data patterns. It is composed of four zones of 732 bits each
with an alternating 0- and 1-bit pattern that facilitates clock recovery. Each of these four zones is
followed by a 36-bit sync pattern. These sync patterns are described more fully in
paragraph 6.6.9.1. The track synchronization area ends with 24 bits of an alternating pattern of
three 0 bits and three 1 bits. The central area is where actual user data are recorded in 138 data
blocks for the 32 Mbps system or 276 data blocks for the 64 Mbps system. Each data block
contains 205 5/6 modulation code frames of interleave data for a total of 1230 bits.

This data is followed by a 36-bit sync pattern. Sync patterns and interleave data are
more fully described next. Each helical track ends with a postamble pattern of three 0 bits and
three 1 bits. This is the same pattern as the preamble. Compiling all bits yields an overall track
total of 186 468 tape bits for the 32 Mbps system and 364 824 tape bits for the 64 Mbps system.
Since each contains 131 072 or 262 144 user bits, overheads are 29.7 and 28.1 percent.

6.6.9.1 Sync Patterns. Each helical track contains 142 or 280 sync patterns as shown in
Figure 6-10. Four of these are contained in the track sync area with the remaining 138 or 276
distributed at the end of each data block. These sync patterns provide registration to the bit
sequence and allow management of bit slips. The track and data sync consists of 36 bits in the
form of six 6-bit words. The first five words are the same for all sync words (Table 6-5).

6-26

Figure 6-10. Helical track format.

TABLE 6-5. TRACK AND DATA SYNC: WORD 0-WORD 4
WORD0
2A
h

WORD1
2A
h

WORD2
0C
h

WORD3
0F
h

WORD4
2l
h

6-27

WORD5 defines which sync word is being issued in the following manner (Table 6-6).

TABLE 6-6. TRACK AND DATA SYNC: WORD 5
Sync Loc. Word
Track Sync 1
39
h

Track Sync 2
35
h

Track Sync 3
2D
h

Track Sync 4
1D
h

Data Sync 1
2B
h

Data Sync 2
2E
h

Data Sync 3
2B
h

Data Sync 4
2E
h

Data Sync 5
2B
h

Data Sync 6
2E
h

: :
Data Sync 279
2B
h

Data Sync 280
2E
h

6.6.9.2 Data Blocks. Each helical track contains 138 or 276 data blocks, which record the user
data as well as miscellaneous information used in locating and managing data on the tape
cartridge (see Figure 6-10). The construction of these data blocks is performed by each
channels data path electronics. Figure 6-11 illustrates a typical block diagram of a channel data
path as described in the following subparagraphs.

6.6.9.2.1 Error Correction Encoding. An interleaved Reed-Solomon (RS) code is used for error
detection and correction. An outer ECC is applied to written data first which is an RS (130, 128)
for purposes of error detection only. An inner ECC is subsequently applied which is an RS (69,
65) for error detection and correction. The resulting encoded data is stored in a multiple page
interleave buffer memory array containing 128 rows by (269) or (869) columns of encoded
user data. For the outer ECC, incoming data is arranged in groups of 128 bytes each. The outer
ECC encoder appends 2 check bytes to each 128 byte block. For the inner ECC, the 130 byte
group resulting from the outer ECC is divided into two 65 byte blocks. The first 65 byte block
(ECC code words 1, 3, 5, ...) contains all user data while the second 65 byte block (ECC code
words 2, 4, 6, ...) contains 63 bytes of user data with the last 2 bytes being the check bytes
generated by the outer ECC. The inner ECC encoder appends 4 check bytes to each 65 byte
block.

6-28

Figure 6-11. Typical VLDS data path electronics block diagram.

6-29

Operations in the RS encoder are performed using numbers in a finite field (also called a
Galois field (GF)). The field used contains 256 8-bit elements and is denoted GF (256). The
representation of GF (256) used is generated by the binary degree eight primitive polynomials.

p(x) = x
8
+

x
4
+ x
3
+ x
2
+ 1 outer ECC
p(x) = x
8
+ x
5
+ x
3
+ x + 1 inner ECC

The ECC generator polynomials are:

G(x) = (x+a
24
) (x+a
25
) outer ECC
G(x) = (x+1) (x+a) (x+a
2
) (x+a
3
) inner ECC

where "a" denotes the primitive element of the field.

6.6.9.2.2 Interleave Buffer. Encoding data from the two levels of ECC are stored in an
interleave buffer memory. The architectures for this memory are shown in Figure 6-12. This
buffer allows interleaving of the encoder data. Interleaving spreads adjacent ECC code word
bytes within a helical track for the 32 Mbps system to minimize the effect of burst error events.
For the 64 Mbps system, interleaving spreads adjacent ECC code word bytes within two helical
tracks (two helical tracks per channel per principal block) to further minimize burst error effects.
Data to and from the ECC are accessed along horizontal rows in the memory matrix. Data to and
from tape are accessed along vertical columns in the memory. Each column in the matrix
consists of 128 bytes that will constitute one block in the helical track format (see Figure 6-11).

Figure 6-12. Interleave buffer architectures.
6-30

6.6.9.2.2.1 Exchange of Data with ECC. Addressing of the interleave buffer for exchange of
data with the ECC for the 32 Mbps systems is as follows in Table 6-7.

TABLE 6-7. ECC - INTERLEAVE BUFFER ADDRESSING (32 Mbps)
ECC Code Word Address Range (hex)
1 0080 to 00C4
2 0000 to 0044
3 0180 to 01C4
4 0100 to 0144
5 0380 to 03C4
6 0200 to 0244
: :
253 7E80 to 7EC4
254 7E00 to 7E44
255 7F80 to 7FC4
256 7F00 to 7F44

Addressing of the interleave buffer for exchange of data with the ECC for the 64 Mbps
systems is as follows in Table 6-8.

TABLE 6-8. ECC - INTERLEAVE BUFFER ADDRESSING (64 Mbps)
ECC Code Word Address Range (hex)
1 00000 to 00044
2 00400 to 00444
3 00800 to 00844
: :
128 1FC00 to 1FC44
129 00080 to 000C4
130 00480 to 004C4
: :
256 1FC80 to 1FCC4
257 00100 to 00144
258 00500 to 00544
: :
512 1FD80 to 1FDC4
513 00200 to 00244
514 00600 to 00644
: :
1024 1FF80 to 1FFC4
Note: Each code word is 69 bytes long. The address increments by hex 001 for each byte in a code
word. The first data byte sent to/from the ECC for each helical track is stored in
location 000.

6-31

6.6.9.2.2.2 Exchange of Data To and From Tape. Addressing of the interleave buffer for
exchange of data to and from tape for the 32 Mbps system is as follows in Table 6-9.

TABLE 6-9. TAPE - INTERLEAVE BUFFER ADDRESSING (32 Mbps)
Data Block Address Range (Channel 1) Address Range (Channel 2)
1 0000 to 7F00 0022 to 7F22
2 0080 to 7F80 00A2 to 7FA2
3 0001 to 7F01 0023 to 7F23
4 0081 to 7F81 00A3 to 7FA3
5 0002 to 7F02 0024 to 7F24
6 0082 to 7F82 00A4 to 7FA4
: : :
67 0021 to 7F21 0043 to 7F43
68 00A1 to 7FA1 00C3 to 7FC3
69 0022 to 7F22 0044 to 7F44
70 00A2 to 7FA2 00C4 to 7FC4
71 0023 to 7F23 0000 to 7F00
: : :
135 0043 to 7F43 0020 to 7F20
136 00C3 to 7FC3 00A0 to 7FA0
137 0044 to 7F44 0021 to 7F21
138 00C4 to 7FC4 00A1 to 7FA1
Note: Each data block is 128 bytes long. The address increments by hex 0100 for each byte in
a data block. The first byte sent to/from tape for each channel 1 helical track is stored in
location 0000. The first byte sent to/from tape for each channel 2 helical track is stored in
location 0022.

Addressing of the interleave buffer for exchange of data to/from the 64 Mbps system
is as follows in Table 6-10.

6.6.9.2.3 8 to 5 Conversion. Data being moved from the interleave buffer to tape is read from
the memory in 8-bit bytes and is immediately converted to 5-bit groups in preparation for
modulation coding. During reproduction, this conversion occurs in reverse fashion. The
algorithm for conversion is detailed in Metrum Specification 16829019.
7

7
See reference on how to obtain the Metrum-Datatape document at paragraph 6.6 above.
6-32

TABLE 6-10. TAPE - INTERLEAVE BUFFER ADDRESSING (64 Mbps)
Data Block Address Range (hex)
1 00000 to 1FC00
2 00080 to 1FC80
3 00100 to 1FD00
4 00180 to 1FD80
: :
8 00380 to 1FF80
9 00001 to 1FC01
10 00081 to 1FC81
: :
275 00122 to 1FD22
276 001A2 to 1FDA2
1 00222 to 1FE22
2 002A2 to 1FEA2
3 00322 to 1FF22
: :
8 01A3 to 1FDA3
9 00223 to 1FE23
10 002A3 to 1FEA3
: :
275 00344 to 1FF44
276 003A4 to 1FFA4
Note: Each data block is 128 bytes long. The address increments by hex 0400 for each byte in
a data block. The first byte sent to or from tape for both channels is stored in location 00000.
The interleave buffer extends across both helical tracks in a principal block for each channel,
thus the data block number n refers to the data block in the first helical track of the principal
block and the data block number n denotes the data block number in the second helical
track of the principal block.

6.6.9.2.4 Miscellaneous Information Inclusion. Each data block in the helical track includes
one additional bit added to the data set prior to modulation coding. Each data block removed
from the interleaved buffer memory consists of 128 bytes of ECC encoded user data totaling
1024 bits. Conversion from 8-bit bytes to 5-bit groups results in 204 groups plus 4 bits. A
miscellaneous information bit is added to each data block as the 1025th bit to complete 205 full
5-bit groups. Miscellaneous information is currently defined only in the first helical track of
each principal block. The remaining three helical tracks (1 in the E format) contain no defined
miscellaneous bits and are reserved for future expansion. Any reserved miscellaneous
information bits shall be recorded as 0 bits. The defined purposes of miscellaneous information
bits in the first helical track of each principal block are presented in Table 6-11.
6-33

TABLE 6-11. MISCELLANEOUS BIT DEFINITIONS
Data Block Miscellaneous Bit Definition
1 to 20 inclusive First copy of 20-bit principal block number: 2s complement binary; least
significant bit in data block 1; most significant bit in data block 20.
21 to 40
inclusive
Second copy of 20-bit principal block number: 2s complement binary;
least significant bit in data block 21; most significant bit in data block 40.
41 to 60
inclusive
Third copy of 20-bit principal block number: 2s complement binary; least
significant bit in data block 41; most significant bit in data block 60.
61 to 76
inclusive
Volume label: 16-bit binary; least significant bit in data block 61; most
significant bit in data block 76.
77 to 80
inclusive
Revision number: 4-bit code; value at time of writing is 0001 (1
h
).
81 to 84
inclusive
4-bit tape information code as follows:
81 bit = 0 denotes all helical data was input as user digital data.
81 bit = 1 denotes input data stream to each channel. The ECC was 15 bytes of
user digital data beginning with first byte plus 1 inserted byte from a
different source in a repeating fashion. This bit must be uniformly set for
the entire cartridge including the format zone. It is used to support mixing
of digitized analog data into the digital stream and separation on
reproduction.
82 bit = 0 denotes cartridge size is ST-120 for purposes of determining LEOT.
This bit must be set for the entire cartridge including the format zone.
82 bit = 1 denotes cartridge size is ST-160 for purposes of determining LEOT.
This bit must be set uniformly for the entire cartridge including the format
zone.
83 bit = Reserved for additional tape information coding.
84 bit = Reserved for additional tape information coding.
85 to 138 or 276
inclusive
Reserved for future expansion.

6.6.9.2.5 Modulation Code. Data is encoded using a 5/6 modulation code that has a spectral
null at dc. The coding algorithm employed has a code word digital sum (CWDS) maximum
of 2 with a maximum run length of 6 bits. The 205 5-bit groups resulting from the 8 to 5
conversion (including the inserted miscellaneous bit) undergo this coding to form the final
5/6 code frames that are physically recorded in the data blocks of the helical track format. The
algorithm for coding is detailed in Metrum Specification 16829019.

6-34

6.7 Multiplex/Demultiplex (MUX/DEMUX) Standards for Multiple Data Channel
Recording on Inch Digital Cassette (S-VHS) Helical Scan Recorder/Reproducer Systems
For recording and reproducing multiple channels on 1/2 inch digital cassette (S-VHS)
helical scan recorders, the asynchronous real-time multiplexer and output reconstructor
(ARMOR) multiplex/demultiplex format is recommended. The ARMOR data format is an
encoding scheme that may be used to multiplex multiple asynchronous telemetry data channels
into a single composite channel for digital recording, transmission, and subsequent
demultiplexing into the original constituent channels.

6.7.1 General. Data types supported by the ARMOR format are PCM, analog, decoded IRIG
time, and 8-bit parallel. MIL-STD-1553B
8
data is encoded into an IRIG 106 Chapter 8 serial
PCM stream prior to multiplexing into the ARMOR format. Voice channels are encoded in the
same way as all other analog channels. The composite channel is formatted into fixed bit-length,
variable word-length frames. A constant aggregate bit rate and a fixed frame bit-length are
established for each multiplex by an algorithm that is dependent on the number, type, and rate of
the input channels. The aggregate bit rate and frame bit length result in a fixed frame rate for
each multiplex. The ARMOR encoding scheme captures the phase of each input channel relative
to the start of each composite frame. The demultiplexing process may then use the captured
phase information to align the reconstruction of the constituent channels relative to a reproduced
constant frame rate.

6.7.2 Setup Block Format. In addition to defining the organization of the frames containing the
multiplexed data, the ARMOR format incorporates the definition of a setup block that contains
the parameters necessary to demultiplex the associated data frames. The setup block is included
in the composite stream at the start of each recording to preserve with the data the information
necessary to decode the data. Appendix L defines the setup block format and content.

6.7.3 Multiplexer Format. The definition of the ARMOR multiplex format has two parts. The
frame structure definition describes the organization of the composite data frame, which changes
from one multiplex to the next. The channel coding definition describes the encoded data word
format for each data type, which is the same for all multiplexers.

6.7.3.1 Frame Structure. The sequence of steps used to establish the multiplexed frame structure,
shown in Figure 6-13 below, is explained in Table 6-12. The process involves putting the sync,
PCM, parallel (PAR), time code, and analog channels into a frame. The filler blocks may consist
of either constant (hex FF) bytes or analog samples, depending upon the constituent input
channel mix. The PCM Sample Start Bit Point and the Parallel Sample Start Bit Point are based
on calculations of the master oscillator, pacer, and the bit rate of the slowest PCM and word rate
of the slowest parallel channels respectively. The pacer is a clock pulse that is programmed to a
multiple of the fastest analog channel sample rate. These calculations assure that the first word
of the slowest PCM channel or the first word of the slowest parallel channel is not placed too
early in the composite frame. If necessary to satisfy these Start Bit Point calculations, filler in
the form of analog channel words or hex FF (if no analog words are available) is used to force
the first PCM or PAR word later in the composite frame. Compatibility with specific legacy

8
MIL-STD 1553B (1996), Digital Time Division Command/Response Multiplex Data Bus.
6-35

versions of the format requires the use of the appropriate equations, which are embodied in a
software program, refer to Calculex Part No. 199034-0002.
9

Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 m 1 2 m
1 2 3 4
Sync Filler
PCM Channel
Blocks
Filler
PAR Channel
Blocks
Filler
Figure 6-13. The steps of the build process.

9
Part Number 199034-0002, available from CALCULEX, Inc., P.O. Box 339, Las Cruces, NM 88004
(505) 525-0131 or by email to info@calculex.com.
6-36

TABLE 6-12. SCANLIST BUILD STEPS
(Reference scanlist in Figure 6-13)
Step #1 Sync The sync is made up of four bytes of 8 bits totaling 32 bits:
FE 6B 28 40.
Step #2 Time Code If time code exists, it is placed after the sync in three words of
bit length 24, 24, and 16. Multiple time codes are placed in
ascending hardware sequence, as identified in the setup block.
Step #3 Filler (PCM Start
Bit)
If required, either filler or analog channels are placed next,
depending on the calculation of the PCM Sample Start Bit
Point. If no analog (or voice) channels are included in the
multiplex, hex value FF filler is inserted in the frame as
required to satisfy the PCM Sample Start Bit Point calculation.
When analog channels are part of the multiplex, analog words
are used in place of hex FF filler to minimize the formatting
overhead.
Step #4 PCM Channels The PCM channels are placed next in ascending order of speed
with the slowest channel first. Multiple channels at the same
speed are placed in ascending hardware sequence, as identified
in the setup block.
Step #5 Filler (PAR Start
Bit)
If required, either filler or analog channels are placed next,
depending on the calculation of the PAR Sample Start Bit
Point. If no analog (or voice) channels are included in the
multiplex, hex FF filler is inserted in the frame as required to
satisfy the PAR Sample Start Bit Point calculation. When
analog channels are part of the multiplex, any remaining
analog words that were not inserted in the frame at step 3 are
used in place of hex FF filler to minimize the formatting
overhead channel.
Step #6 PAR Channels The PAR channels are placed next in ascending order of speed
with the slowest channel first. Multiple channels at the same
speed are placed in ascending hardware sequence, as identified
in the setup block.
Step #7 Filler (Analog
Channels)
All remaining analog words that have not been used for filler
in steps 3 and 5 are placed next, followed by any additional
filler required to satisfy the pacer divisor calculation.

6-37

6.7.3.2 Pacer Divisor Calculation. The number of analog samples per ARMOR frame for each
analog channel must be evenly divisible into the number of bits per ARMOR frame. The initial
bits per ARMOR frame are calculated to minimize the aggregate bit rate of the composite. Filler
is then added to satisfy the divisibility rule to set the pacer clock speed. This step is referred to
as the pacer divisor calculation since the pacer itself is derived from the same master oscillator as
the aggregate bit rate clock.

6.7.3.3 ARMOR Channel Coding. Each input data channel is encoded into 8-, 12-, 16-, or 24-
bit words, depending on the type of channel. The bit length of an ARMOR frame is always an
integer multiple of eight, so 12-bit words must occur an even (multiple of two) number of times
within each frame. The data within a frame is serially concatenated most significant bit first.
Table 6-13, which is an example of an ARMOR frame with two analog, one parallel, four PCM,
and one time code channel, is referenced in the following descriptions.

TABLE 6-13. SAMPLE ARMOR FRAME
Frame Item Description Words/Frame Bits/Word
Sync Pattern XFE6B2840 1 32
Time Code Ch#1 Encoded Time 2 24
Time Code Ch #1 Encoded Time 1 16
Filler XFF 7 8
PCM Ch#1 Encoded User Data 130 16
Analog Ch #1 Encoded User Data 100 12

6.7.3.4 Sync Pattern. All ARMOR frames begin with the fixed 32-bit sync pattern of
hexadecimal FE6B2840.

6.7.3.5 Time Code Channels. When time code channels are present in an ARMOR multiplex,
their data words always immediately follow the sync pattern or another time code channel. Time
is encoded as 64 bits in two 24-bit words and one 16-bit word. Table 6-14 defines the individual
bits of the time code words. The encoded time is the time at the start of the ARMOR frame.
6-38

TABLE 6-14. TIME CODE WORD FORMAT
BIT WORD 1 WORD 2 WORD 3

22 D8 S6
21 D7 S5
20 D6 S4
19 D5 S3
18 D4 S2
17 D3 S1
16 D2 S0
15 D1 SE 0
14 D0 NT 0
13 0 0 HN13
12 H5 0 HN12
11 H4 MS11 HN11
10 H3 MS10 HN10
9 H2 MS9 HN9
8 H1 MS8 HN8
7 H0 MS7 HN7
6 M6 MS6 HN6
5 M5 MS5 HN5
4 M4 MS4 HN4
3 M3 MS3 HN3
2 M2 MS2 HN2
1 M1 MS1 HN1
0 M0 MS0 HN0
LEGEND

D = Day of year.
H = Hour of day.
M = Minutes past the hour.
S = Seconds past the minute.
MS = Milliseconds past the
second.
HN = Hundreds of nanoseconds
past the millisecond.
SE = Sync error (time code
decoding error).
NT = No time code (input signal
detect fail).
0 = Always 0.

6.7.3.6 PCM Channels. User PCM data is encoded into 16-bit words. The number of 16-bit
words (per channel) in each frame is approximately two percent greater than the number required
to store the user data during the frame time period. These overhead words are included to
compensate for minor variations in user data clock rates. In order to record the number of
allocated frame bits that actually contain user data, the first two 16-bit words are redundant
copies of a bit count. In Table 6-13, PCM Channel #1 has 130 words: two count words and 128
data words. The bit count in either one of the redundant count words records the number of bits
in the 128 data words that are actually user PCM data (most significant bit first). All remaining
6-39

bits are filler. The first user data bit in the most significant bit location of the third channel word
(the first data word following the redundant count words) was the first bit to be received after the
start of the ARMOR frame.

6.7.3.7 Analog Channels. Analog data is digitized into either 8-bit or 12-bit samples using
offset binary notation (a sample of X00 or X000 is the largest negative value). No overhead
words or bits are included with analog channel data because input sampling is synchronous to the
start of the ARMOR frame. The first sample of each channel was captured at frame start time
with all remaining samples evenly spaced throughout the frame time. Note that the location of
the analog channel words within the composite ARMOR frame has no correlation with the time
between the start and end of the frame when the analog samples were captured (digitized). The
first sample of the 100 Analog Channel #1 words and the first sample of the 20 Analog Channel
#2 words in Table 6-13 were both captured (digitized) at the same instant in time, which was the
frame start time. Voice is a special case of an analog channel in that it is always 8-bit samples.

6.7.3.8 Parallel Channels. The encoding of parallel input channels is very similar to PCM
encoding. Approximately two percent more than the minimum number of words necessary to
store the user data during one ARMOR frame period are allocated to each parallel channel. The
first two 16-bit words of each channel are redundant count words that record the actual number
of allocated data words that contain user data. The remaining allocated words contain filler.
Table 6-4 has two entries for Parallel Channel #1. The first entry shows the two (redundant) 16-
bit count words and the second entry shows the number of allocated 8-bit data words for the
channel. The number of 8-bit data words that contain user data is determined by examining
either of the two count words. The first data word for each parallel channel was the first word
received after the start of the ARMOR frame.

6.7.4 ARMOR Format Compatibility. Compatibility with the ARMOR format can be divided
into two distinct cases. In the first case, the user is playing back a legacy tape (made with legacy
multiplexer hardware and software) on non-legacy demultiplexer hardware and software. In the
second case, the user is creating a tape on non-legacy multiplexer hardware and software for
future playback by legacy demultiplexer hardware and software.

In the first case, the legacy tape contains a setup block (see paragraph 6.7.2) at the start
of the recording. The setup block contains the information necessary for the user to demultiplex
the data records on the tape. The bit rate field in the setup block header section specifies the rate
at which the legacy recording was generated. The saved scanlist field in the setup block trailer
section specifies the exact sequence and size of the sync, data, and filler words in the recording.

In the second case, the user must first generate an ARMOR setup block at the start of
the recording. Subsequent data records must then be formatted in accordance with the
specification in the setup block. Setup block creation is described in Appendix L.

6.7.5 ARMOR Format Validation. The CALCULEX, Inc. ARMOR Format Verification
Program (AFVP) may be used to determine if an independently generated multiplex is
compatible with existing legacy hardware. The AFVP reads the setup block from the data set
under test and validates the data set frame structure (see paragraph 6.7.2). Please refer to IRIG
6-40

Document118, Test Methods For Telemetry Systems And Subsystems, Volume III, Test
Methods For Recorder/Reproducer Systems And Magnetic Tape. The AFVP may be obtained
from CALCULEX.
10

6.8 Recorder Command and Control Mnemonics (CCM)
This section describes a set of standard commands and replies that can control tape, disk,
and solid-state recorders. Not all commands may be applicable to all types of recorders or
recorder implementations. Manufacturers who claim compliance with this Standard shall
identify (in an Interface Control Document, for each recorder model) the specific command and
reply subset that is implemented. An important aspect of the CCM standard is the required
command-response protocol. For each command issued to a recorder, there shall be exactly one
response from the recorder, and the response shall begin immediately upon conclusion of the
command input. There shall be no delay between the receipt of the command at the recorder and
the transmission of the reply by the recorder. Commands that initiate recorder functions
requiring time to complete shall be replied to immediately, and the host shall poll the recorder
status to determine when the function is complete. There shall be no unsolicited status output
from the recorder, with one exception. This exception is a boot message upon leaving the
POWER ON state, notifying the host that the recorder is ready to accept commands. The boot
command shall contain a single asterisk as the last character. Thereafter, the recorder will only
output in response to a command input. (A hardware reset or a software .RESET shall return the
recorder to the POWER ON state.)

6.8.1 Command Summary. All commands must comply with the following syntax rules. The
syntax rules are summarized as available commands in Table 6-15.

a. All recorder commands are simple ASCII character strings delimited by spaces.
b. All commands begin with an ASCII period (.) and, with the single exception of the
.TMATS command, end with the first occurrence of a carriage return and line-feed
terminator sequence.
c. Parameters are separated from the commands and from each other with ASCII space
characters.
d. With one exception, command words and parameters may not include spaces. The
one exception is the [text string] parameter for the .EVENT command.
e. Multiple consecutive terminators and extraneous space characters are ignored.
f. Each command is followed with either a text response, carriage return line feed, and
an ASCII asterisk (*) response terminator or the asterisk response terminator only,
indicating the recorder is ready for the next command.

g. All numeric parameters, with one exception, are decimal numbers. The one
exception is the [mask] parameter for the .CRITICAL command, which is
hexadecimal.

10
Part Number 198007-0001 may be obtained from CALCULEX, Inc. P.O. Box 339, Las Cruces, NM
88004 (505) 525-0131 or by email request to info@calculex.com.

6-41

h. Three commands, .FIND, .REPLAY, and .SHUTTLE, have numeric parameters that
required units of measure. The [mode] parameter is used to specify the unit of
measure (time, feet, or blocks.) If the [mode] parameter is omitted, the recorder shall
use the most recently entered [mode].
i. A [time] parameter value has five parts: days, hours, minutes, seconds, and
milliseconds. Any part not entered defaults to zero except days, which defaults to
dont care (current day). A period (.) identifies the start of the millisecond part, a
hyphen (-) separates the day from the hours, and colon characters (:) separate the
hours, minutes, and seconds. The following are valid times: 123- (day only),
17 (hours only), 17:30 (hours and minutes), 17:30:05 (hours, minutes, seconds),
17:0:05 (hours, minutes, seconds), 17:30:05.232 (hours, minutes, seconds,
milliseconds), 123-17 (day, hours), 123-17:30 (day, hours, minutes), etc.
j. All commands begin with an ASCII period (.) and, with the single exception of the
.TMATS command, end with a carriage return and line-feed terminator sequence.

6-42

TABLE 6-15. COMMAND SUMMARY
Command Parameters
*
Description
.ASSIGN [destination-ID] [source-ID]
Assign replay (output) channels to source (input)
channels
.BBLIST {type} Returns list of secured or unsecured bad blocks
.BBREAD {block identifier} Returns contents of specified block
.BBSECURE {block identifier} Marks an unsecured bad block as secure
.BIT Runs all of the built-in-tests
.CRITICAL [n [mask] ]
Specify and view masks that determine which of
the .HEALTH status bits are critical warnings
.DATE [start-date]
Specify setting or displaying date from recording
device
.DECLASSIFY Secure erases the recording media
.DISMOUNT Unloads the recording media
.DUB [location] Same as .PLAY but with internal clock
.ERASE Erases the recording media
.EVENT [text string] Display event table or add event to event table
.FILES Displays information about each recorded file
.FIND [value [mode] ] Display current locations or find new play point
.HEALTH [feature] Display detailed status of the recorder system
.HELP Displays table of "dot" commands
.IRIG106
Returns supported version number of IRIG-106
Recorder Command and Control Mnemonics
.LOOP Starts record and play in read-after-write mode
.MEDIA Displays media usage summary
.MOUNT Powers and enables the recording media
.PAUSE Pause current replay
.PLAY [location][speed]
Reproduce recorded data of assigned output
channels starting at [location] and at [speed]
.PUBLISH [keyword] [parameter]
Configure, start and stop live data over the recorder
Ethernet interface
.RECORD [filename] Starts a recording at the current end of data
.REPLAY [endpoint [mode] ] Same as .SHUTTLE but with internal clock
.RESET Perform software initiated system reset
.RESUME Resume replay from pause condition
.SETUP [n]
Displays or selects 1 of 16 (015) pre-
programmed data recording formats
.SHUTTLE [endpoint [mode] ]
Play data repeatedly from current location to the
specified endpoint location using external clock
.STATUS Displays the current system status
.STOP [mode] Stops the current recording, playback, or both
.TIME [start-time] Displays or sets the internal system time
.TMATS {mode} [n] Write, Read, Save, or Get TMATS file
* Parameters in braces {} are required. Parameters in brackets [] are optional. When optional
parameters are nested ([xxx [yy] ]), the outer parameter (xxx) must be specified in order to also
specify the inner parameter (yy).
6-43

6.8.2 Command Error Codes. Issuing invalid commands (bad syntax) or illegal commands
(not accepted in the current system state) result in error code responses (with an ASCII E
identifier) prior to the asterisk response terminator when a command cannot be completed.
Table 6-16 shows possible error codes and the conditions under which they occur.

TABLE 6-16. COMMAND ERROR CODES
Error Description Conditions
00 INVALID COMMAND
Command does not exist
01 INVALID PARAMETER
Parameter is out of range, or wrong alpha-numeric type
02 INVALID MODE
Command cannot be executed in the current state
03 NO MEDIA
Recording media is dismounted or not installed
04
MEDIA FULL Command cannot be executed because there is no free
space available on the recording media
05
COMMAND FAILED Command failed to execute for any reason other than
those listed above

Example:

.RECORD
E 03
*

6.8.3 Command Parameters and Responses. Each of the commands, command parameters,
and recorder responses to the commands are described in the following sections.

6.8.3.1 .ASSIGN. The .ASSIGN [destination-ID] [source-ID] command shall be used for
assigning replay (output) channels to source (input) channels. The source-IDs are composed
from the channel type of the source as defined in Chapter 9 parameter CDT a - character
and the sequence number of that type of channel (e.g., PCMIN-3 for the 3
rd
PCM input
channel). The destination-IDs are composed similarly but with an OUT tag in the Channel
Type, instead of an IN tag. Use keyword NONE in place of source-ID if a replay channel is
to be unassigned. The command with the [destination-ID] parameter only should return the
actually assigned source-ID; without any parameters it should return the full list of assignments.

Examples:

.ASSIGN PCMOUT-2 PCMIN-7
*

.ASSIGN PCMOUT-1 NONE
*

.ASSIGN PCMOUT-2
PCMIN-7
*
6-44

.ASSIGN
PCMOUT-1 NONE
PCMOUT-2 PCMIN-7
*
6.8.3.2 .BBLIST {type}: A .BBLIST command shall be utilized to return the unsecured bad
block identifiers (any ASCII text, one identifier per line) from the media. A BBLIST command
is only valid following a Declassify command. The type shall be provided indicating which type
of bad block list is to be returned. If type = unsecured .BBLIST shall return a list of unsecured
bad blocks. If type = secured .BBLIST shall return a list of secured bad blocks.

Example:

.BBLIST UNSECURED
1234
5678
:
fff
*
6.8.3.3 .BBREAD {block identifier}: A Bad Block Read command shall be utilized to return
the raw data from the specified bad block in ASCII hexadecimal format. The block identifier
shall be provided for the bad block to be read.

Example:

.BBREAD 5678
00040000
9E030000
:
2CE42CE4
*
6.8.3.4 .BBSECURE {block identifier}: A .BBSECURE command shall be utilized to mark
an unsecured bad block as being secured. A block that has been identified as secured shall never
be used for any subsequent data recording. Secured bad blocks shall be removed from unsecured
bad block identifier list. The block identifier shall be provided for the block to be secured.

Example:

.BBSECURE 5678
*
6.8.3.5 .BIT. The .BIT command runs the built-in test (BIT) on the recorder. The prompt is
returned immediately after the test is started. The .BIT command is only valid in the IDLE,
ERROR, and FAIL states. During the BIT, the user must periodically check the status until the
test is complete. While in BIT mode, the percent completion is shown with the .STATUS
command. The result of the .BIT command is go/no-go status indicated by the end state. If the
6-45

system returns to the IDLE state, the BIT was successful. If the system goes to the FAIL state,
the BIT failed and further system-specific diagnostics are required. The ASCII S in the
response is the identifier of a .STATUS response.

Example:

.BIT
*
.STATUS
S 02 0 0 21%
*
.STATUS
S 02 0 0 74%
*
.STATUS
S 01 0 0
*

6.8.3.6 .CRITICAL [n [mask] ]. The .CRITICAL command is used to view and specify the
critical warning masks used with the .HEALTH command. An encoded 32-bit status word is
displayed with the .HEALTH command for each feature as defined in .HEALTH command in
the recorder. The .CRITICAL command allows the user to specify which status word bits
constitute critical warnings. If a bit in the .CRITICAL mask word for a feature is set, then the
corresponding .HEALTH status word bit for that feature signals a critical warning. The critical
warning is turning the FAULT contact output indicator ON for a Chapter 10 compatible
recorder.

Parameters in braces {} are required. Parameters in brackets [] are
optional. When optional parameters are nested ([xxx [yy] ]), the outer
parameter (xxx) must be specified in order to also specify the inner
parameter (yy).

The .CRITICAL command without any parameters returns the mask word for each
feature in ascending feature order. The .CRITICAL command with a single parameter (the
feature number) returns the list of descriptive warning strings and status word bit associations for
the specified feature. The .CRITICAL command with both the feature number parameter and the
8-character ASCII hexadecimal mask value parameter specifies a new mask value for the feature.
All mask values in the command responses are hexadecimal.

The critical warning is turning the FAULT contact output indicator ON for
a Chapter 10 compatible recorder.

6-46

Example #1: The command with no parameters returns the mask for each feature.

.CRITICAL
0 FFFFFFFF RECORDER
1 FFFFFFFF TIMEIN
2 000000FF ANAIN-1
3 0000006F PCMIN-1
4 0000000F PCMIN-2
:
:
15 00000010 1553IN-8
*

Example #2: The command with the feature number parameter only, no mask value,
returns all of the possible warning text strings for the specified feature
and shows which .HEALTH status word bit is associated with the
particular warning.

.CRITICAL 4
4 00000004 PCMIN-2 Clock Error
4 00000008 PCMIN-2 Data Error
4 00000010 PCMIN-2 No Minor Frame Lock
4 00000020 PCMIN-2 No Major Frame Lock
*

Example #3: Entering both the feature number parameter and the mask value
parameter resets the mask for the specified feature.

.CRITICAL 4 0000003C
4 0000003C PCMIN-2
*

6.8.3.7 .DATE. The .DATE [start-date] command displays or sets the internal systems date.
The optional start-date parameter is formatted as shown in the example below. Without a
parameter, this command displays the current system date. The timestamps recorded with user
data are derived from this clock. The date shall be set in year-month-day format according to
ISO 8601.

Example:

.DATE
DATE 2002-12-31
*

6.8.3.8 .DECLASSIFY. The .DECLASSIFY command erases all recorded data using an
approved declassification procedure.

This command will permanently erase all recorded data. Data cannot be
recovered once this command has been executed!

6-47

The prompt is returned immediately after the operation is started. During declassify,
the user must periodically check the status until the operation is complete. While in
DECLASSIFY state, the percent completion is shown with the .STATUS command.

Example:

.DECLASSIFY
*
.STATUS
S 04 0 0 23%
*
.STATUS
S
*
04 0 0 84%
.STATUS
S 01 0 0
*

6.8.3.9 .DISMOUNT. The .DISMOUNT command disables and, if necessary, removes power
from the active recording media. The media may be removed only after this command is issued.

Example #1:

.DISMOUNT
*

Example #2: If a failure occurs, an error message is displayed before the prompt.

.DISMOUNT
E 03
*

6.8.3.10 .DUB [location]. The .DUB command is identical to the .PLAY command, except
that it specifies the use of the internal playback clock to retrieve the recorded data.

6.8.3.11 .ERASE. The .ERASE command erases all data and resets the record point to the
beginning of media (BOM).

This command will permanently erase all recorded data. Data cannot be
recovered once this command has been executed!

6-48

The prompt is returned immediately after the operation is started. During erase, the
user must periodically check the status until the operation is complete. While in ERASE state,
the percent completion is shown with the .STATUS command.

Example:

.ERASE
*
.STATUS
S 03 0 0 23%
*
.STATUS
S 03 0 0 84%
*
.STATUS
S 01 0 0
*

6.8.3.12 .EVENT [text string]. The .EVENT command adds an entry to the recorder event file
or displays all of the current event file entries. If a non-blank text string is included with the
command, a new event entry is appended to the event file with the text string in the message
field of the event entry. The text string may be any length, but only the first 48 bytes, starting
with the first non-blank character but including all subsequent blanks, are saved in the event file
entry. If no text string is provided with the message, the current event file entries are displayed
as a list of character strings showing the event sequence number, the absolute event time based
on the recorder system time, the current media address (block number) at the time the event entry
is created, and the optional text string.

Example:

.EVENT -
*
.EVENT This text was supplied with the .EVENT command
*
.EVENT x
*
.EVENT
1 001-00:13:58.109 101231 -
2 001-00:14:11.106 433213 This text was supplied with
the .EVENT command
3 001-17:44:06.677 2427654 x
*

6.8.3.13 .FILES. The .FILES command displays a list of character strings showing information
about each recording session (file). Each string in the list contains the file number, file name,
starting block number, file size in bytes, start day, and start time of the file. For those systems
that also store the end day and time of each file, the end day and time may be added to the end of
each file string. File names may not contain space or asterisk characters. If user names are not
assigned to individual recordings, the default file names shall be file1, file2, etc. Each file
6-49

string shall be formatted as shown in the following example (with optional end day and end
time).

Example:

.FILES (File name unused byte positions omitted)

1 TPD-10 10000 272760832 001-00:13:58.109 001-
00:14:03.826
2 TPD-11 92884 425984000 001-00:14:11.106 001-
00:14:28.602
3 file3 350790 305430528 123-17:44:06.677 123-
17:44:13.415
*

6.8.3.14 .FIND [value [mode]]. The .FIND command is used to report the current record and
play point or to set the play point to the desired location within the recorded data. The desired
location can be expressed in a number of different formats or modes: time, blocks, and feet.
When the command is entered without any parameters, the recorder returns the current record
point and current play points, using the current default mode. The default mode is declared each
time a mode parameter is supplied with the .FIND command, the .REPLAY command, or the
.SHUTTLE command. Thereafter, the mode parameter may be omitted and the recorder will use
the default mode. The mode keywords are TIME, BLOCKS, and FEET.

The location specified in the value parameter of the .FIND command can be numeric
or one of six keywords: BOM (beginning of media), BOD (beginning of data), EOD (end of
data), EOM (end of media), BOF (beginning of file), and EOF (end of file.) These keywords
may be used with or without a mode parameter. Numeric location values, whether accompanied
by the mode keyword or not, must be valid for the specified or default mode. Blocks and feet are
entered as decimal integer numbers. Time is entered as specified in paragraph 6.8.1 item i.

Example #1: Display the current record point and play point. The default mode is
blocks.

.FIND
F 1022312 BOD
*

Example #2: Find a specific time in the recorded data.

.FIND 15:33:12 TIME
*
.STATUS
S 08 0 0 41%
*
.STATUS
S 08 0 0 84%
*
6-50

.STATUS
S 01 0 0
*
.FIND
F 102-16:18:27.000 102-15:33:12.000
*

6.8.3.15 .HEALTH [feature]. The .HEALTH command provides a standard mechanism for
status information to be conveyed to the user. The feature parameter is defined as 0 for recorder
status, and for each data source it is the decimal reference of the Channel ID specified by the
TK1 parameter for the corresponding data source by the TMATS setup. Entering the
command without the optional parameter displays a list of encoded status word for each feature.
Entering a decimal feature number parameter with the command decodes the status word for a
single feature and displays a list of messages pertaining to the feature, one for each set bit in the
status word; see Table 6-17 for recommended usage of the status bits. This standard requires
that the syntax of the responses to the .HEALTH command conform to the following rules:

a. If no data sources are implemented, the response to a .HEALTH command is the
recorder status only.
b. In addition to the feature number the command should return a description of the
corresponding channel type, composed from the channel type of the source as
defined in Chapter 9 parameter CDT a - character and the sequence number
of that type of channel (e.g., PCMIN-3 for the 3
rd
PCM input channel).
c. The description of a feature may not contain an asterisk character.
d. The feature list response (no feature number parameter supplied with the
command) is a sequence of text strings, each containing the decimal feature
number, the 8-character ASCII hexadecimal representation of the 32-bit status
word for the feature, a text feature description, and a carriage return and line feed
terminator. The value of the 32-bit status word for a healthy feature shall be all
zeros. If a feature is disabled, the 8-character ASCII hexadecimal string shall be
replaced with eight ASCII hyphen - characters.
e. The individual feature response (feature number parameter supplied with the
command) is a sequence of descriptive text strings, one for each set bit in the
feature status word. Each string is terminated with a carriage return and line feed.
f. The critical bits should be cleared when they are reported by a .HEALTH
command.

The .CRITICAL command is used to specify and view the mask word for each feature
that determines if a set .HEALTH status word bit adds to the total non-critical or critical warning
counts displayed with the .STATUS command.

6-51

TABLE 6-17. USE OF STATUS BITS
Feature Bit Mask (Hex) Description
Recorder 0 01 BIT Failure
1 02 Setup Failure
2 04 Operation Failure
3 08 Media Busy Unable to Accept Command
4 10 No Media
5 20 Media I/O Failure
6 40 Media Almost Full
7 80 Media Full
31-8 Vendor-Specific Health Status Bits
Time Code 0 01 BIT Failure
1 02 Setup Failure
2 04 No External Signal
3 08 Bad External Signal
4 10 Synchronize Failure
5 20 Reserved for future Chapter 10 status bit
PCM 0 01 BIT Failure
1 02 Setup Failure
2 04 Bad Clock Failure
3 08 Bad Data Failure
4 10 Minor Frame Sync Failure
5 20 Major Frame Sync Failure
6 40 Bit Sync Lock Failure
7 80 Watch Word Failure
1553 0 01 BIT Failure
1 02 Setup Failure
2 04 Response Timeout Error
3 08 Format Error
4 10 Sync Type or Invalid Word Error
5 20 Word Count Error
7 80 Watch Word Failure
6-52

Table 6-17 Use Of Status Bits (Continued)
Feature Bit Mask (Hex) Description
Video 0 01 BIT Failure
1 02 Setup Failure
2 04 No Video Signal Error
3 08 Bad Video Signal Error
4 10 No Audio Signal Error
5 20 Bad Audio Signal Error
Analog 0 01 BIT Failure
1 02 Setup Failure
2 04 No Analog Signal Error
3 08 Bad Analog Signal Error
Image or Message 0 01 BIT Failure
1 02 Setup Failure
2 04 Bad Signal Error
3 08 Data Content Error
Other Types 0 01 BIT Failure
1 02 Setup Failure
2 04 Bad Signal Error
3 08 Data Content Error

6-53

Example #1:

.HEALTH
0 00000000 SYSTEM
1 00000000 TIMEIN
2 00000000 ANAIN-1
3 -------- PCMIN-1
4 00000034 PCMIN-2
:
15 00000000 1553IN-8

Example #2:

*.HEALTH 4
4 00000004 PCMIN-2 Clock Error
4 00000010 PCMIN-2 No Minor Frame Lock
4 00000020 PCMIN-2 No Major Frame Lock
*

6.8.3.16 .HELP. The .HELP command displays a list showing a summary of the serial "dot"
commands and parameters supported by the system.

Example:

.HELP
.ASSIGN
.BBLIST
.BBREAD block identifier
.BBSECURE block identifier
.BIT
.CRITICAL [n [mask]]
.DATE
.DECLASSIFY
.DISMOUNT
.DUB [location]
.ERASE
.EVENT [message]
.FILES
.FIND [value [mode]]
.HEALTH [feature]
.HELP
.IRIG106
.LOOP
.MEDIA
.MOUNT
.PAUSE
.PUBLISH
.RECORD [filename]
.REPLAY [endpoint [mode]]
Example is continued on next page
6-54

.RESET
.RESUME
.SETUP [n]
.SHUTTLE [endpoint [mode]]
.STATUS
.STOP [mode]
.TIME [start-time]
.TMATS {mode} [n]
*
6.8.3.17 .IRIG106. The .IRIG106 command returns the release version number of the IRIG-
106 Chapter 6 Recorder Command and Control Mnemonics that the recorder is supporting.
Because this command was introduced in IRIG-106-07, recorders supporting earlier releases
should answer this command with E00 error message (invalid command).

Example: The recorder CCM compatible with IRIG106-07.

.IRIG106
7
*
6.8.3.18 .LOOP. The .LOOP command is used to put the recorder into read-after-write mode,
recording and simultaneously playing back the recorded data. The replayed data is read back
from the recording media. If the recorder is already recording when the .LOOP command is
issued, the command starts the playback at the current record point without affecting the
recording.

Example:

.STATUS
S 01 0 0
*
.LOOP
*
.STATUS
S 07 0 0 35%
*

6.8.3.19 .MEDIA. The .MEDIA command displays the media usage summary. It shows the
number of bytes per block, the number of blocks used, and the number of blocks remaining,
respectively.

Example:

.MEDIA
MEDIA 32768 1065349 6756127
*

6-55

6.8.3.20 .MOUNT. The .MOUNT command applies power and enables the device for
recording. For systems with multiple memory canisters or media cartridges, the effect of the
.MOUNT command on each canister or media cartridge is defined in advance with vendor-
specific commands.

Example:

.MOUNT
*

6.8.3.21 .PAUSE. The .PAUSE command stops the replay operation. If parallel recording is
being performed, it continues. If no play position is moved in between, the .RESUME command
can be used to continue replay. The .PAUSE can also be used to stop only the replay while the
recording continues (in this case, a new replay should be started with a new .PLAY command).

6.8.3.22 .PLAY [location] [speed]. The .PLAY command starts a playback of the data at either
the current play point or at the location specified in the optional parameter with the command.
The current play point is defined to be the media location immediately following the most
recently played data. If no .PLAY command has been issued since recorder power-on, the
current play point is the beginning of data. The location parameter has two forms, which are
[block_number] and [filename [block_offset]]. If the first character of the location parameter is
numeric, the entire parameter must be numeric, specifying the block number address at which to
start the playback. When the first character of the location parameter is alphabetic, the parameter
is the filename to playback. It may have a second, optional parameter specifying the numeric 0-
origin block offset into the named file. To begin playing at a location other than a block number
or file, use the .FIND command allows positioning of the play point to the desired location. The
optional [speed] parameter specifies the replay speed, if other than real time replay speed is
required. The syntax of the speed specification is: *N or /N (e.g., *5 for 5 times faster, /8 for 8
times slower replay).

Example: Replay from the current position 4 times faster than real-time speed.

.PLAY file1 250
*
.PLAY *4
*

6.8.3.23 .PUBLISH keyword [parameter]. The .PUBLISH command shall be utilized for
configuring, starting, and stopping UDP uni-, multi-, or broadcast of live data in IRIG106
Chapter 10 section 10.6 packet format over any IP interface to the recorder. The following
keywords are allowed:

.PUBLISH START IPaddress PortAddress Channel-ID-List
(Start the streaming of the specified channel IDs to the destination address)
.PUBLISH STOP Channel ID-List
(Stop streaming of the specified channel IDs)

6-56

The IPaddress PortAddress parameter defines the destination IP address and the
port number of the UDP broadcast.

The Channel-ID-List parameter can be:
- The keyword ALL means all available Channel ID
- The decimal representation of one single Channel ID IAW IRIG106
Chapter 10 Section 10.6.1.1.b
- A range of Channel ID groups connected together by - character, it select
all channels within the specified range
- More than one Channel Id or Channel ID group separated by white space
(e.g. ) characters

The .PUBLISH command without any parameter returns the streaming Channel IDs
and their destinations.

Examples:

.PUBLISH START 192.145.255.255 1234 ALL
*

.PUBLISH START ::FFFF:C091:FFFF 1234 ALL
*

.PUBLISH
192.145.255.255 1234 ALL
*

.PUBLISH STOP ALL
*

.PUBLISH START 192.145.255.255 1234 1-12 18
*

.PUBLISH START 192.146.255.255 2345 13-17
*

.PUBLISH
192.145.255.255 1234 1-12 18
192.146.255.255 2345 13-17
*

6-57

6.8.3.24 .RECORD [filename]. The .RECORD command starts a new recording. The optional
file name parameter is an ASCII string with up to eleven characters, beginning with an
alphabetic character, and with no spaces or asterisks. If the file name parameter is omitted, the
filename will be of the form filen, where n is the file number. The recording will continue
until the recording media is full or until the .STOP command is issued.

Example:

.RECORD
*

6.8.3.25 .REPLAY [endpoint [mode]]. The .REPLAY command is identical to the .SHUTTLE
command, except that it specifies that the internal clock is to be used to retrieve the data.

6.8.3.26 .RESET. The .RESET command performs a software initiated reset of the recorder,
returning the recorder to the power-on state.

Example:

.RESET
*

6.8.3.27 .RESUME. The .RESUME command can be used to continue the replay from the
location where it was stopped by the .PAUSE operation with the replay speed specified at the
last .PLAY command. If the play position was moved with the .FIND command since the
.PAUSE command was used, the replay cannot be continued by the .RESUME command - a new
.PLAY command should be issued.

6.8.3.28 .SETUP [n]. The .SETUP command chooses one of 16 pre-defined setups stored in
the recorder. The optional parameter is a one or two digit decimal setup number from 0 to 15.
The current setup may be displayed by omitting the setup number parameter.

Example #1: Including the setup number changes the setting.

.SETUP 5
SETUP 5
*

Example #2:

.SETUP
SETUP 10
*

6-58

6.8.3.29 .SHUTTLE [endpoint [mode]]. The .SHUTTLE command initiates a repeated
playback from the current play point to the end point specified in the command, using an
external clock to retrieve the data. The syntax of the endpoint parameter is identical to that of
the .FIND command.

Example:

.SHUTTLE 1430 FEET
*

6.8.3.30 .STATUS. The .STATUS command displays the current state of the recorder and two
counts. The first is the total number of non-critical warning bits currently set and the second is
the total number of critical warning bits currently set. If the recorder is in any state other than
FAIL, IDLE, BUSY, or ERROR, the command also displays a progress percentage, the meaning
of which is dependent on the specific state. Whenever the recorder is transitioning between
states and the transition is not instantaneous, the .STATUS command will return the BUSY state.
The ERROR state is entered when the currently executing command does not complete
successfully. For example, when a .FIND command is unable to locate the specified position on
the media, the recorder transitions to the ERROR state. Table 6-18 shows the various states by
numerical code and describes the meaning of the progress percentage for each state. An ASCII
S character identifies a .STATUS command response.

TABLE 6-18. RECORDER STATES
State Code State Name Progress Description
00 FAIL ---
01 IDLE ---
02 BIT Percent complete
03 ERASE Percent complete
04 DECLASSIFY Percent complete
05 RECORD Percent media recorded
06 PLAY Percent recording played
07 RECORD & PLAY Percent media recorded
08 FIND Percent complete
09 BUSY ---
10 ERROR ---

6-59

Example #1:

.STATUS
S 03 0 0 84%
*

Example #2: States that do not have a progress indication omit that field in the
response.

.STATUS
S 01 0 0
*

6.8.3.31 .STOP [mode]. The .STOP command stops a recording, playback, or both. The
optional mode parameter may be either the word RECORD or the word PLAY. If the optional
mode parameter is not specified, both recording and playing (or either of the two modes if the
other is not active) will be stopped. Using the parameter enables either recording or playing to
be stopped without affecting the other, when both are active.

Example #1:

.STOP
*

Example #2: The current state can be displayed with the status command.

.STATUS
S
*
07 0 0 26%
.STOP PLAY
*
.STATUS
S 05 0 0 26%
*

Example #3: The .STOP command returns an error if the recorder is not in the
appropriate state.

.STATUS
S 01 0 0
*
.STOP
E 02
*

6-60

6.8.3.32 .TIME [start-time]. The .TIME command displays or sets the internal systems time.
The optional start-time parameter is formatted as shown in the example below. Without a
parameter, this command displays the current system time.

Example #1:

.TIME
TIME 001-23:59:59.123
*

Example #2: To set the time, enter a value expressed in days, hours, minutes, seconds
and milliseconds.

.TIME 123-13:01:35
TIME 123-13:01:35.000
*

Examples #3-5: Trailing values and punctuation may be omitted (zero is default).

Example #3:

.TIME 123-
TIME 123-00:00:00.000
*

Example #4:

.TIME 15:31
TIME 000-15:31:00.000
*

Example #5:

.TIME 15:31:20
TIME 000-15:31:20.000
*

6.8.3.33 .TMATS {mode} [n]. The .TMATS command provides a vendor-independent
mechanism for loading a setup file into the recorder and retrieving a setup file from the recorder.
The required mode parameter must be one of the following four words: WRITE, READ, SAVE,
or GET. Writing or reading a TMATS file transfers the file between the external host and the
recorders internal volatile memory buffer. Saving or getting a TMATS file transfers the file
between the recorders internal volatile memory buffer and the recorders internal non-volatile
setup file storage area. To store a new setup file in the recorder, the .TMATS WRITE command
is first used to transfer the file to the recorder, followed by a .TMATS SAVE [n] command to
store the file in non-volatile memory. The numeric setup file number parameter is not valid with
the .TMATS WRITE command. When saving the file to non-volatile memory, the optional
setup file number parameter may be entered to designate a specific setup number (see the
6-61

.SETUP command.) If the setup file number parameter is not specified with the .TMATS SAVE
command, the file number defaults to setup 0. The .TMATS GET [n] command performs the
inverse of the .TMATS SAVE command, retrieving the specified or default (0) file from non-
volatile to volatile memory within the recorder. The .TMATS READ command transfers the file
currently in the recorders volatile setup file buffer to the host.

Termination of the .TMATS WRITE command string is unique. All other command
strings terminate with the first occurrence of a carriage return and line feed sequence. The
.TMATS WRITE command string does not terminate until the occurrence of a carriage return
and line feed pair followed by the word END and another carriage return and line feed pair.

Example #1: The .TMATS WRITE command includes the TMATS file followed by
the word END.

.TMATS WRITE
G\DSI\N=18;
G\DSI-1:TimeInChan1;
G\DSI-2:VoiceInChan1;
G\DSI-3:1553Chan01;
:
:
P-8\IDC8-1:0;
P-8\ISF2-1:ID;
P-8\IDC5-1:M;
END
*

Example #2: The .TMATS READ command returns the file currently in the volatile
buffer.

.TMATS READ
G\DSI\N=18;
G\DSI-1:TimeInChan1;
G\DSI-2:VoiceInChan1;
G\DSI-3:1553Chan01;
:
:
P-8\IDC8-1:0;
P-8\ISF2-1:ID;
P-8\IDC5-1:M;
*

Example #3: The .TMATS SAVE command stores the file in the volatile buffer to
the designated non-volatile file memory in the recorder.

.TMATS SAVE 3
*

6-62

Example #4: The .TMATS GET command retrieves the designated file from non-
volatile file memory in the recorder and puts it in a buffer that can be
read by the user.

.TMATS GET 3
*

6.8.5 Command Validity Matrix. Table 6-19 identifies the recorder states in which each of
the serial commands is valid. The legend at the bottom of the table explains the matrix entry
codes. Two codes, 3 and 4, identify states in which the associated command may or may not be
valid due to system-specific implementation. Recorder users should assume that a command is
not supported in a system-specific state (code 3 or 4) unless the specific recorders Interface
Control Document assures that support is provided.

6.8.6 Required Command Subset. Table 6-20 identifies the minimum subset of commands
that must be implemented for each recorder type to be compliant with this standard.
6-63

TABLE 6-19. COMMAND VALIDITY MATRIX

STATE

COMMAND

B
U
I
L
T
-
I
N

T
E
S
T

B
U
S
Y

D
E
C
L
A
S
S
I
F
Y

E
R
A
S
E

E
R
R
O
R

F
A
I
L

F
I
N
D

I
D
L
E

P
L
A
Y

P
O
W
E
R

O
N

R
E
C
O
R
D

R
E
C
O
R
D

&

P
L
A
Y

.ASSIGN X X X X
.BBLIST 6
.BBREAD 6
.BBSECURE 6
.BIT X X X
.CRITICAL 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.DATE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.DECLASSIFY X X
.DISMOUNT 2 2
.DUB X X X
.ERASE X X
.EVENT 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
.FILES X X X X X X X X
.FIND X X X
.HEALTH X X X X X X X X X X
.HELP X X X X X X X X X X
.IRIG106 X X X X X X X X X X X
.LOOP X X X
.MEDIA X X X X X X X X
.MOUNT 2 2
.PAUSE X X 4
.PLAY X X 4
.PUBLISH 5 5 5 5 5
.RECORD X 4 X 4
.REPLAY X X X
.RESET X X X X X X X X X X X
.RESUME X X 4
.SETUP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.SHUTTLE X X X
.STATUS X X X X X X X X X X X
.STOP X X X X
.TIME 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
.TMATS X X
Legend
X= Always valid.
1 = Query function always valid. Changing masks, setup, or time only valid in IDLE or ERROR.
2 = MOUNT and DISMOUNT only valid if not mounted or dismounted, respectively.
3 = Query always valid. Declaring always valid in record, but not recording is system-specific.
4 = Simultaneous recording and playing is system-specific.
5 = Simultaneous recording, playing and publishing is system-specific.
6 = Only valid after declassify command execution has completed
6-64

6-65

TABLE 6-20. REQUIRED COMMANDS
Command
Recorder Type
Tape Solid State Disk
.ASSIGN O O O
.BBLIST O O O
.BBREAD O O O
.BBSECURE O O O
.BIT M M M
.CRITICAL M M M
.DATE M M M
.DECLASSIFY O M O
.DISMOUNT M M M
.DUB O O O
.ERASE M M M
.EVENT O O O
.FILES O M M
.FIND O O O
.HEALTH M M M
.HELP M M M
.IRIG106 M M M
.LOOP O O O
.MEDIA M M M
.MOUNT M M M
.PAUSE O O O
.PLAY O O O
.PUBLISH O O O
.RECORD M M M
.REPLAY O O O
.RESET M M M
.RESUME O O O
.SETUP M M M
.SHUTTLE O O O
.STATUS M M M
.STOP M M M
.TIME M M M
.TMATS M M M
Legend
M = Mandatory O = Optional

CHAPTER 7
RESERVED FOR NEW TOPIC:
GROUND BASED DIGITAL RECORDING STANDARD
(SOLID STATE AND DISK SYSTEMS)


CHAPTER 8

DIGITAL DATA BUS ACQUISITION FORMATTING STANDARD

TABLE OF CONTENTS


8.1 General............................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Word Structure................................................................................................. 8-1
8.3 Time Words ..................................................................................................... 8-3
8.4 Composite Output ............................................................................................ 8-4
8.5 Single Bus Track Spread Recording Format ................................................... 8-5
8.6 MIL-STD-1553................................................................................................ 8-8
8.7 ARINC 429.................................................................................................... 8-12

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 8-1. Word construction............................................................................................ 8-2
Figure 8-2. Composite frame structure............................................................................... 8-5
Figure 8-3. Multiple tape track spread format (4-track spread example)........................... 8-7
Figure 8-4. System block diagram...................................................................................... 8-9
Figure 8-5. MIL-STD-1553 formatted word construction. .............................................. 8-11
Figure 8-6. ARINC 429 formatted word construction. .................................................... 8-14
Figure 8-7. ARINC bit to formatted word bit mapping.................................................... 8-15
ii

CHAPTER 8

DIGITAL DATA BUS ACQUISITION FORMATTING STANDARD

8.1 General
This standard describes output data formats for the acquisition of all the traffic flowing
on various digital data buses. The formats permit the capture of data from multiple data buses
within a single system. Other constraints such as Radio Frequency (RF) bandwidth and tape
recording time will dictate the actual number of buses processed by a single system. Standards
for both composite telemetry Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) and tape recorder PCM formats are
presented.

Although specifically designed to satisfy the requirements of 100 percent MIL-STD-1553
bus and Aeronautical Radio Incorporated (ARINC) 429 channel acquisition, the formatting
provisions of this standard may be used in other applications when the data source and content
are similar enough to permit easy adaptation. Users should contact the appropriate range to
ensure any adaptations are compatible with that range.

In addition to the total data capture technique and format presented in this chapter;
Selected Measurement methods are available to acquire less than 100 percent of bus data.
Selected Measurement methods result in PCM formats conforming to Chapter 4 of this standard
and fall outside the scope of this chapter.

This chapter presents the general requirements for data formatting followed by individual
sections addressing specifics pertaining to MIL-STD-1553 and ARINC 429 respectively.

8.2 Word Structure
The following subparagraphs describe the general word structure to be used for the
formatted output. Specific word structures and definitions are provided as part of each
bus/channel subsection.

8.2.1 Field Definition. The formatted data shall be a 24-bit word constructed as shown in
Figure 8-1, part (a).

8.2.2 Most Significant Bit. The most significant bit (bit 1) of each formatted word may
optionally be an odd parity bit generated for the resulting formatted word or an additional bit
appended to the Bus/Group Identification Label as described in paragraph 8.2.3.

8.2.3 Bus/Group Identification Label. Each word shall also carry a Bus or Group Identification
Label as shown in Figure 8-1, part (b). For this application, a bus refers to a MIL-STD-1553 bus
(or dual redundant bus pair) and a group refers to a collection of up to four ARINC 429
channels. The Bus/Group Identification Label may optionally be three or four bits in length
dependent on the exercise of the option to use or not use a parity bit. If not used, the parity bit,
8-1
or bit one (1), is appended to the Bus/Group Identification Label to increase the bus count from a
maximum of eight (3 bits) to a maximum of 16 (4 bits).

8.2.4 Content Identification Label. Each incoming bus word, auxiliary/user input, or time
word shall be appropriately labeled with a 4-bit Content Identification Label (see Figure 8-1
part (c)). Content Identification Labels are specific to each bus type and are detailed in later
sections.

8.2.5 Information Content Field. Data extracted from the data bus shall maintain bit order
integrity and be inserted into the Information Content field as specified for each bus type.
Transposing or reordering of the bits is not permitted.

BIT POSITION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 21 22 23 24
P BUS / CONTENT
A GROUP IDENT I N F O R M A T I O N
R IDENT LABEL CONTENT
I LABEL
T
Y
OR
BUS IDENT
LABEL a. Field Definition
BIT BIT
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

0 0 0 0 BUS / GROUP 1 1 0 0 0 BUS /GROUP 9
b. Bus/Group Identification Label Definition; Bits (1) 2, 3, & 4
BIT BIT
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 TIME - HIGH ORDER
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 TIME - LOW ORDER
1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 TIME - MICROSECOND
1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 APPLICATION SPECIFIC
1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 USER DEFINED
1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 USER DEFINED
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 FILL WORD
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BUFFER OVERFLOW
c. Content Identification Label Definition; Bits 5, 6, 7, & 8
The function
of these codes
is dependent
on the bus
type being
monitored
Figure 8-1. Word construction.

8-2
8.2.6 Fill Words. Fill words, required to maintain continuous PCM output, shall have the
following sequence as the Information Content pattern:

1010 1010 1010 1010 (AAAA hexadecimal)

8.2.7 Content Identification Label. The Content Identification Label indicating buffer
overflow (0000) and appropriate Bus/Group Identification Label tag shall be appended to the
first word placed into the buffer after the buffer becomes available for data storage. This word
should be an "extra" word, not the next available piece of data. Bits nine (9) through 24 are
available for system level diagnostics and are not specified here. Tagging in this manner marks
the point of data discontinuity and preserves the integrity of the next piece of data.

8.2.8 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC). CRC is a very powerful technique for obtaining data
quality. An optional CRC word may be appended as the last positional word of each PCM frame
(see Figure 8-2). The CRC word shall be composed of Parity and/or Bus/Group Identification
Label, Content Identification Label, and 16 bits of a Frame Check Sequence (FCS). The FCS
shall fill the Information Content field (bits 9 24). The following CRC-16 polynomial shall be
used to generate the FCS. None of the 24 bits making up the entire CRC word shall be used in
the calculation of the 16-bit FCS.

CRC-16 polynomial: X
16
+ X
15
+ X
2
+ 1

Exercise care when assigning bus identification and content identification
label codes to the CRC word. Although a positional word in the frame,
legacy-processing algorithms may falsely identify the information if one of
the bus data labels (1111 1000) is used as the content identification label.

8.3 Time Words
The following describes the structure and use of time words within the formatted output.

The time words dedicated to providing timing information are defined Chapter 4 of this
standard. These time words are designated as high order time, low order time, and microsecond
time. The MIL-STD-1553 bus data acquisition applications use an optional fourth time word,
designated as response time. The response time word has the same structure as the microsecond
time word. Time word structure shall follow the 16-bit per word format shown in Chapter 4,
Figure 4-3, and be placed into the Information Content field (bits nine (9) through 24) in bit
order.

8-3
8.4 Composite Output
8.4.1 Characteristics of a Singular Composite Output Signal. The following subparagraphs
describe the characteristics for a singular composite output signal.

a. The composite, continuous output shall conform to the requirements for Class 2
pulse-code modulation as stated in Chapter 4 of this standard.

b. The data shall be transmitted most significant bit (bit 1) first.

c. The bit rate is dependent on several factors including bus loading and auxiliary inputs
and shall be set to a fixed rate sufficient to preclude any loss of data.

d. The order of bus words must remain unaltered except in the case of a buffer overflow.

e. The frame length shall be fixed using fill words as required and shall be > 128 words
and < 512 words including the frame synchronization word.

f. The frame synchronization word shall be fixed and 24 consecutive bits in length. The
pattern, also shown in Appendix C, table C-1, appendix C, is:

1111 1010 1111 0011 0010 0000 (FAF320 hexadecimal).

g. A frame structure employing frame time is recommended but optional. If frame time
is used, the frame structure shall consist of the frame synchronization word, followed
by the high order time word, followed by the low order time word, followed by the
microsecond time word, followed by the data words from all sources making up the
composite signal up to the frame length specified in subparagraph 8.4.1e above (also
see Figure 8-2). If frame time is not used, the frame synchronization word shall be
followed immediately by the data words. If a Cyclic Redundancy Check word is not
used, the last word in the frame is data word N.

h. The following describes the recommended techniques for recording the composite
output signal.

1) Longitudinal recording shall conform to the PCM recording provisions
Appendix D of this standard.
2) Recording using parallel HDDR or rotary head recorders offers the advantage
of inputting a single high bit rate signal to the recording system. The input
PCM signal shall conform to the appropriate sections of this standard.
3) If recording using digital recorders or other noncontinuous recording
processes with buffered inputs, the fill words, inserted to provide a continuous
output stream, may be eliminated.
8-4

Additional care must be exercised in data processing and reduction if the last
word in a composite stream is a MIL-STD-1553 command word. The
associated message time tag will not appear until after the synchronization
and time words in the next frame.

FRAME SYNC
PATTERN
FRAME
HIGH TIME
FRAME
LOW TIME
FRAME
MICRO TIME
DATA
WORD 1

DATA
WORD N-2
DATA
WORD N-1
DATA
WORD N
CRC
(OPTIONAL)

END OF FRAME

Figure 8-2. Composite frame structure.

8.5 Single Bus Track Spread Recording Format
8.5.1 Single Bus Recording Technique Characteristics. The following subparagraphs describe
the characteristics of a single bus recording technique using a multiple tape track spread output
format.

a. The target tape recorder/reproducer for a track spread format is a longitudinal
fixed-head machine described in Appendix D of this standard and not one employing
parallel high density digital recording (HDDR) or rotary head recording
characteristics.

b. The code generated for longitudinal tape recording shall be RNRZ-L or Bi-L as
described in Chapter 4 and Appendix D of this standard.

Bit rates less than 200 000 bits per second are not recommended when using
RNRZ-L.

8-5
c. To extend recording time while still acquiring 100 percent of bus data, a multiple
track spread recording technique is presented as follows:

1) When necessary to use more than one tape recording track (to extend record
time), separate PCM streams shall be created and delayed by 24/TK bits with
respect to each other, where TK represents the number of tape tracks used for a
given bus.

2) When multiple track-spread recording is required, the track spread shall be on a
bus basis such as bus number 1 spread over four tracks, and bus number 2 spread
over two tracks. The maximum number of tracks per bus shall be limited to four.

Consideration should be given to spread track assignment. All tracks
associated with a given bus should be recorded on the same head stack.

3) Each stream shall have a frame synchronization pattern 24 bits in length,
conforming to subparagraph 8.4.1f.

4) The word structure shall be identical to that described in paragraph 8.2.

5) The frame length shall be fixed and shall be the same for each track used for a
given bus. The frame length shall conform to the requirements of
paragraph 8.4.1e.

6) The data shall be formatted such that it is transmitted (recorded) most significant
bit (bit 1) first.

7) The use of a Cyclic Redundancy Check word as described in paragraph 8.2.8 is
optional. If used in the track spread application, a CRC word must be generated
and appended to each of the PCM frames for that bus.

8-6
8) A structure employing frame time is recommended but optional. The following
describes a four-track spread example using frame time.

TK1. The PCM stream designated TK1 shall be constructed as the
frame synchronization word, followed by the high order frame time
word, followed by data words (see Figure 8-3).

frame synchronization word, followed by the low order frame time
word, followed by data words.

frame synchronization word, followed by the microsecond frame
time word, followed by data words.

frame synchronization word, followed by the first data word,
followed by other data words.

Note: Schemes using one, two, or three tracks for a given bus shall follow like
construction; that is, sequencing through the data track by track. If frame time is
not used, data words shall immediately follow the frame synchronization patterns.

Additional care must be exercised in data processing and reduction if the last
word in the final track spread stream is a MIL-STD-1553 command word.
The associated message time tag will not appear until after the
synchronization and time words in the next frame.

TK1 FRAME SYNC
PATTERN
FRAME
HIGH TIME
DATA
WORD 2
DATA
WORD 6

TK2 FRAME SYNC
PATTERN
FRAME
LOW TIME
DATA
WORD 3
DATA
WORD 7

<> 24/TK bit times
TK3 FRAME SYNC
PATTERN
FRAME
MICRO TIME
DATA
WORD 4
DATA
WORD 8

<> 24/TK bit times
TK4 FRAME SYNC
PATTERN
DATA
WORD 1
DATA
WORD 5
DATA
WORD 9

<> 24/TK bit times

Figure 8-3. Multiple tape track spread format (4-track spread example).

8-7
8.6 MIL-STD-1553
The following subparagraphs describe specific formatting requirements for the
100 percent acquisition of MIL-STD-1553 bus information.

8.6.1 Definitions.

a. Bus Monitor. The terminal assigned the task of receiving bus traffic and extracting
all information to be used at a later time.
b. Data Bus. All hardware including twisted shielded pair cables, isolation resistors,
and transformers required to provide a single data path between the bus controller
and all associated remote terminals.
c. Dual Redundant Data Bus. The use of two data buses to provide multiple paths
between the subsystems.
d. Bus Loading. The percentage of time the data bus is active.
e. Maximum Burst Length. The maximum length of a continuous burst of messages
with minimum length message gaps.
f. Bus Error. A condition that violates the definition of MIL-STD-1553 word
structure. Conditions such as synchronization, Manchester, parity, noncontiguous
data word, and bit count/word errors are all considered word type errors. System
protocol errors such as incorrect word count/message and illegal mode codes, are not
considered bus errors.

8.6.2 Source Signal. The source of data is a signal conforming to MIL-STD-1553. Format
provisions are made for a dual redundant data bus system. The interface device performing the
data acquisition shall be configured as a bus monitor. Figure 8-4 depicts in block diagram form
the concept of 100 percent MIL-STD-1553 bus data acquisition.

8-8

XMTR

RCVR

TIME V T P
E T A R
USER H
.
A P
.
O
USER I
: 1
P E
: 1
C
C E E O
1A U R S U
1B L R E S T
A E P I P
1553 R C R N U
DATA O O G T
BUSES U R D
N
.
D U
.
U
16A I
: 16
E C
: 16
N
16B T R E
R
I
T

Figure 8-4. System block diagram.

In the design of the interface to the MIL-STD-1553 bus, it may be necessary
to include buffers to prevent loss of data and to conserve bandwidth. The
buffer size is influenced by bus loading, maximum burst length, output bit
rate, tape recording speed, time tagging, and auxiliary inputs.

8.6.3 Word Structure. The specific word structure provisions to be used for MIL-STD-1553
bus formatted output are described below.

a. The formatted data shall be a 24-bit word constructed as shown in Figure 8-1 part (a)
and Figure 8-5 part (a).
b. The information extracted from the MIL-STD-1553 bus shall have the
synchronization pattern and parity bit removed.
c. Each incoming MIL-STD-1553 word (Command, Status or Data), auxiliary input or
time word shall be appropriately labeled with a 4-bit Content Identification Label as
described in Figure 8-1, part (c), and Figure 8-5, part (c).
d. Data extracted from the MIL-STD-1553 bus shall maintain bit order integrity in the
information field for a command, status, data, and error word. Bit position four (4) in
8-9
the MIL-STD-1553 bus word shall be placed into bit position nine (9) in the
formatted data word. The remaining bits of the MIL-STD-1553 bus word shall be
placed in successive bit positions in the formatted data word. Transposing or
reordering of the bits is not permitted.
e. For bus errors as defined in paragraph 8.6.1f (Error A - 1100 or Error B - 1000), the
synchronization pattern and the parity bit are removed as stated in
subparagraph 8.6.3.b. The Information Content bits, nine through 24, of the
formatted word shall contain the resulting 16-bit pattern extracted from the bus.
8-10

BIT POSITION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 21 22 23 24

P BUS CONTENT
A IDENT IDENT I N F O R M A T I O N
R LABEL LABEL CONTENT
I
T
Y
OR
BUS IDENT
LABEL

a. Field Definition
BIT BIT
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

0 0 0 0 BUS 1 1 0 0 0 BUS 9
0 0 0 1 BUS 2 1 0 0 1 BUS 10
0 0 1 0 BUS 3 1 0 1 0 BUS 11
0 0 1 1 BUS 4 1 0 1 1 BUS 12
0 1 0 0 BUS 5 1 1 0 0 BUS 13
0 1 0 1 BUS 6 1 1 0 1 BUS 14
0 1 1 0 BUS 7 1 1 1 0 BUS 15
0 1 1 1 BUS 8 1 1 1 1 BUS 16

b. MIL-STD-1553 Bus/Group Identification Label Definition; Bits (1) 2, 3, & 4
BIT BIT
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8

1 1 1 1 COMMAND A 0 1 1 1 TIME - HIGH ORDER
1 1 1 0 STATUS A 0 1 1 0 TIME - LOW ORDER
1 1 0 1 DATA A 0 1 0 1 TIME - MICROSECOND
1 1 0 0 ERROR A 0 1 0 0 TIME - RESPONSE
1 0 1 1 COMMAND B 0 0 1 1 USER DEFINED
1 0 1 0 STATUS B 0 0 1 0 USER DEFINED
1 0 0 1 DATA B 0 0 0 1 FILL WORD
1 0 0 0 ERROR B 0 0 0 0 BUFFER OVERFLOW

NOTE:
A = primary channel of the dual redundant bus; B = secondary

c. MIL-STD-1553 Content Identification Label Definition; Bits 5, 6, 7, & 8

Figure 8-5. MIL-STD-1553 formatted word construction.

8-11

8.6.4 Time Words.

8.6.4.1 Time Tagging. If time tagging of the occurrence of MIL-STD-1553 messages is
necessary to satisfy user requirements, the first command word of the message shall be time
tagged. The time words shall immediately follow the first command word in the following
order: high order time, low order time, and microsecond time.

8.6.4.2 Response Time Word. The optional response time word shall have one (1) microsecond
resolution and shall indicate the response time of the data bus. The response time word shall
immediately precede the status word associated with it.

If the response time function is not used, Content Identification Label 0100
may be assigned to user defined inputs.

8.7 ARINC 429
The following subparagraphs describe specific formatting requirements for the 100
percent acquisition of ARINC 429 channel information.

8.7.1 Definitions

a. Monitor. The receiver or sink assigned the task of receiving bus traffic and extracting
all information to be used at a later time.
b. Data Bus. All hardware including twisted shielded pair cables, required to provide a
single data path between the transmitter or source and the associated receivers or
sinks.
c. Channel Error. Conditions detected which violate the definition of ARINC 429 word
structure as specified in ARINC specification 429P1, 429P2, and 429P3. Conditions
such as parity and bit count/word errors are all considered among word type errors.
System protocol errors are not considered bus errors.

8-12
8.7.2 Source Signal. The source of data is a signal conforming to ARINC 429. Format
provisions are made for up to 64 channels. The interface device performing the data acquisition
shall be configured as a monitor. In principle, Figure 8-4 depicts in block diagram form the
concept of 100 percent bus data acquisition.

8.7.3 Word Structure. The following descriptions contain specific word structure provisions
to be used for the ARINC 429 formatted output.

a. The formatted data shall be a 24-bit word constructed as shown in Figure 8-1 part (a)
and Figure 8-6 part (a).
b. Each incoming ARINC 429 word, auxiliary input, or time word shall be appropriately
labeled with a 4-bit Content Identification Label as described in Figure 8-1 part (c)
and Figure 8-6 part (c).
c. The format provides for addressing of up to 64 channels. Each Bus/Group
Identification Label (designated GROUP X) may be associated with up to 4
independent ARINC 429 channels through the use of a High and Low Syllable
technique described in paragraph 8.7.3d below and shown in Figure 8-6.
d. Data extracted from the ARINC 429 channel shall maintain bit order integrity in the
Information Content field. Each ARINC 429 word is 32 bits in length. To
accommodate this word length within the described format, each ARINC word is
divided into two segments, each 16 bits in length. These segments will be referred to
as ARINC High Syllable and ARINC Low Syllable. Figure 8-7 describes the
mapping of the 32 bit ARINC 429 word into the Information Content bits (9 24) of
the ARINC High and Low Syllable words. Transposing or reordering of the bits is
not permitted.
e. For channel errors defined in paragraph 8.7.1c, the following procedure shall be
followed. An error word shall be generated using the appropriate Bus/Group
Identification Label and 0100 as the Content Identification Label. Bits 9-12 shall
contain the Content Identification Label code associated with the appropriate ARINC
High Syllable channel, bits 13 16 shall contain the Content Identification Label for
the ARINC Low Syllable associated with that channel, and bits 17 24 are available
for system level diagnostics and are not specified here. The next occurrence of that
Bus/Group Identification Label coupled with those ARINC High and Low Syllable
Content Identification Labels shall contain the respective data extracted from the
channel that was deemed to be in error. The Information Content bits, nine (9)
through 24, of the formatted word shall contain the resulting 16-bit pattern syllables
as extracted from the channel.
8-13

ARINC 429 FORMATTED WORD CONSTRUCTION
BIT POSITION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 21 22 23 24

P GROUP CONTENT
A IDENT IDENT I N F O R M A T I O N
R LABEL LABEL CONTENT
I
T
Y
OR

GROUP
IDENT
LABEL
a. Field Definition
BIT BIT
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

0 0 0 0 GROUP 1 1 0 0 0 GROUP 9
0 0 0 1 GROUP 2 1 0 0 1 GROUP 10
0 0 1 0 GROUP 3 1 0 1 0 GROUP 11
0 0 1 1 GROUP 4 1 0 1 1 GROUP 12
0 1 0 0 GROUP 5 1 1 0 0 GROUP 13
0 1 0 1 GROUP 6 1 1 0 1 GROUP 14
0 1 1 0 GROUP 7 1 1 1 0 GROUP 15
0 1 1 1 GROUP 8 1 1 1 1 GROUP 16

b. ARINC 429 Bus/Group Identification Label Definition; Bits (1) 2, 3, & 4
BIT BIT
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8

1 1 1 1 High Syllable #4 0 1 1 1 TIME - HIGH ORDER
1 1 1 0 Low Syllable # 0 1 1 0 TIME - LOW ORDER
1 1 0 1 High Syllable #3 0 1 0 1 TIME - MICROSECOND
1 1 0 0 Low Syllable # 0 1 0 0 ERROR
1 0 1 1 High Syllable #2 0 0 1 1 USER DEFINED
1 0 1 0 Low Syllable # 0 0 1 0 USER DEFINED
1 0 0 1 High Syllable #1 0 0 0 1 FILL WORD
1 0 0 0 Low Syllable # 0 0 0 0 BUFFER OVERFLOW

c. ARINC 429 Content Identification Label Definition; Bits 5, 6, 7, & 8

Figure 8-6. ARINC 429 formatted word construction.
8-14
8-15

ARINC BIT TO FORMATTED WORD BIT MAPPING

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

a. Information Content field bits

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

b. ARINC High Syllable bit mapping

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

c. ARINC Low Syllable bit mapping

Figure 8-7. ARINC bit to formatted word bit mapping.

8.7.4 Time Words. If time tagging of the occurrence of ARINC 429 messages is necessary to
satisfy user requirements, the time words shall immediately follow the ARINC Low Syllable
word in the following order:

a. High order time
b. Low order time
c. Microsecond time.


CHAPTER 9

TELEMETRY ATTRIBUTES TRANSFER STANDARD (TMATS)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES ........................................................................................................................ ii
LIST OF TABLES.......................................................................................................................... ii
9.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 SCOPE............................................................................................................................ 9-1
9.3 PURPOSE....................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.4 MEDIA AND DATA STRUCTURE............................................................................ 9-2
9.4.1 Physical Format ............................................................................................. 9-2
9.4.2 Logical Format............................................................................................... 9-2
9.4.3 XML (eXtensible Markup Language) Format ............................................... 9-3
9.5 TELEMETRY ATTRIBUTES ..................................................................................... 9-3
9.5.1 Contents ......................................................................................................... 9-4
9.5.2 General Information (G). ............................................................................... 9-8
9.5.3 Transmission Attributes (T)......................................................................... 9-11
9.5.4 Recorder-Reproducer Attributes (R)............................................................ 9-17
9.5.5 Multiplex/Modulation (Mux/Mod) Attributes (M). ..................................... 9-43
9.5.6 Digital Data Attributes................................................................................. 9-48
9.5.7 PAM Attributes (A). .................................................................................... 9-92
9.5.8 Data Conversion Attributes (C) ................................................................... 9-96
9.5.9 Airborne Hardware Attributes (H)............................................................. 9-108
9.5.10 Vendor Specific Attributes (V). ................................................................. 9-109
9.6 DATA DISPLAY STANDARD: DATA DISPLAY MARKUP LANGUAGE
(DDML)....................................................................................................................... 9-109
9.6.1 DDML Purpose and Objectives................................................................. 9-110
9.6.2 DDML Layered Structure.......................................................................... 9-110
9.6.3 DDML Global Element Glossary .............................................................. 9-111

CHANGES TO THIS EDITION OF CHAPTER 9

Updates to this Appendix are in blue font. The blue font indicates
either a completely new item or an update to a previously existing
item.


ii
LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 9-1. Group relationships. ....................................................................................... 9-7
Figure 9-2. General Information Group (G). .................................................................... 9-8
Figure 9-3. Transmission Attributes Group (T).............................................................. 9-12
Figure 9-4. Recorder-Reproducer Attributes Group (R). ............................................... 9-18
Figure 9-5. Multiplex/Modulation Attributes Group (M)............................................... 9-44
Figure 9-6. PCM Format Attributes Group (P). ............................................................. 9-49
Figure 9-7. PCM Measurement Description Group (D). ................................................ 9-64
Figure 9-8. Bus Data Attributes Group (B). ................................................................... 9-77
Figure 9-9. Message Data Attributes Group (S)............................................................. 9-86
Figure 9-10. PAM Attributes Group (A). ......................................................................... 9-92
Figure 9-11. Data Conversion Attributes Group (C). ....................................................... 9-97
Figure 9-12. Layered Structure of DDML...................................................................... 9-110

LIST OF TABLES

Table 9-1. General Information Group (G) .................................................................... 9-9
Table 9-2. Transmission Attributes Group (T) ............................................................. 9-13
Table 9-3. Recorder-Reproducer Attributes Group (R) ............................................... 9-23
Table 9-4. Multiplex/Modulation Group (M) ............................................................... 9-45
Table 9-5. PCM Format Attributes Group (P) .............................................................. 9-52
Table 9-6. PCM Measurement Description Group (D)................................................. 9-66
Table 9-7. Bus Data Attributes Group (B) .................................................................... 9-79
Table 9-8. Message Data Attributes Group (S)............................................................. 9-88
Table 9-9. PAM Attributes Group (A) .......................................................................... 9-93
Table 9-10. Data Conversion Attributes Group (C) ........................................................ 9-99
Table 9-11. DDML Global Element Glossary .............................................................. 9-112


CHAPTER 9
TELEMETRY ATTRIBUTES TRANSFER STANDARD (TMATS)
9.1 General
Telemetry attributes are those parameters required by the receiving/processing system to
acquire, process, and display the telemetry data received from the test item/source. The
Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard (TMATS) provides a common definition and format to
facilitate the transfer of information between the user and the test range and between ranges.
The telemetry attributes defined in this chapter provide the information required to set up the
telemetry receiving and processing equipment. The format, while not necessarily compatible
with any receiving/processing system, will allow test ranges or other receiving systems to
develop a computer conversion program to extract the information and to set up data required for
their unique equipment configuration. Nonstandard parameter variations are not included in the
attribute tables later in the chapter, but may be included by exception in the comments section of
each attribute group.

The intent of this chapter is to cover, primarily, attributes and terminology included in or
consistent with the other chapters within this telemetry standards document (IRIG Standard 106,
Part I). For example, PCM format attributes should comply with the PCM standards as given in
Chapter 4. Other attributes are sometimes included for service and utility, but should not be
construed as endorsements apart from the other chapters.

9.2 Scope
The TMATS provides the definition of the telemetry attributes and specifies the media
and data format necessary to permit the transfer of the information required to set up the
telemetry receiving/processing functions at a test range. The standard does not conform to, nor
does it define, existing or planned capabilities of any given test range. The parameters included
in this document are defined by specific reference. Other nonstandard parameter
values/definitions may be included in the comments section of each group.

9.3 Purpose
The TMATS provides a common format for the transfer of information between the user
and a test range or between ranges (see Appendix H). This format will minimize the "station
unique" activities that are necessary to support any test item. In addition, TMATS is intended to
relieve the labor intensive process required to reformat the information by providing the
information on computer compatible media, thereby reducing errors and requiring less
preparation time for test support.

9-1

9.4 Media and Data Structure
A variety of physical and electronic media is available for use in exchanging attribute
information. The most important factor in selecting a medium is that the parties involved agree
to using that specific medium. If any data compression (such as Backup/Restore or Zip/Unzip)
will be used, both parties should agree to its use.

A cover sheet describing the system that produced the attribute medium should
accompany the attribute information. A recommended format for the cover sheet is given in
Appendix I.

9.4.1 Physical Format. Attributes for each mission configuration are to be supplied in a single
physical file with contents as 7-bit ASCII coded characters. Line feed (LF) and carriage return
(CR) may be used to improve readability of the information. Nonprintable characters will be
discarded by the destination agency prior to translating the attributes into telemetry system
configuration information.

For disks, multiple mission configurations may be provided on a single disk; however,
each configuration must be in a separate file identified in the disk directory. File names should
use the file extensions .TXT to indicate a text file, or .TMT or .TMA to indicate a TMATS
file. A stick-on label and the accompanying cover sheet identify the file names corresponding to
the mission configuration used for each mission.

On magnetic tape, physical records may be any size up to 2048 bytes. A single end-of-
file (EOF) mark indicates the end of a mission configuration. Additional mission configurations
can be included in sequential files on a single tape. A double EOF is used to indicate the end of
the last mission configuration on the tape. A stick-on label and an accompanying cover sheet
identifying the missions for each configuration are required.

9.4.2 Logical Format. Each attribute appears in the file as a unique code name and as a data
item. The code name appears first, delimited by a colon. The data item follows, delimited by a
semicolon. Thus, an attribute is formatted as A:B; - where A is the code name and B is the data
item, in accordance with the tables in paragraph 9.5. Numeric values for data items may be
either integer or decimal. Scientific notation ( d.ddddddE ee) is allowed only for the specific
data items defined for its use in the tables in paragraph 9.5. For alphanumeric data items,
including keywords, either upper or lower case is allowed; all defined keyword values are shown
as upper case and enclosed in quotes in the tables in paragraph 9.5. Semicolons are not allowed
in any data item (including comment items). Any number of attributes may be supplied within a
physical record; however, the number of attributes supplied is subject to the 2048 byte maximum
length limitation of a single physical record (see subparagraph 9.4.1 above). Attributes may
appear in any order.

The two basic types of attribute code names are single-entry and multiple-entry. Single-
entry attributes are those for which there is only one data item. Multiple-entry attributes appear
once in the definition tables in paragraph 9.5 but have multiple items; these items are assigned a
number. The number appears in the code name preceded by a hyphen. For example, data source
9-2

identifiers might have the following entries:

G\DSI-1:Aircraft;
G\DSI-2:Missile;
G\DSI-3:Target;

The code name COMMENT may be used to interject comments to improve readability.
The comment data items, such as G\COM, are intended to convey further details within the
TMATS file itself. Comments must follow the attribute logical format, as shown below:

COMMENT: This is an example of a comment;

Refer to paragraph 9.5 for detailed definitions of code names and attributes and
Appendix J for an example application of this standard.

9.4.3 XML (eXtensible Markup Language) Format. In addition to the code name format
described in paragraph 9.4.2, TMATS attributes can also be expressed in XML. The TMATS
XML format is implemented as a standard XML schema (open the file Tmats.xml).

The TMATS XML schema is identical in content to the telemetry attributes described in
paragraph 9.5 below, with the following exceptions:

a. The schema contains only the Word/Frame location type in the "D" group and no
subframe definitions in the "P" group.
b. There is a C group for each data link instead of only one C group in the TMATS file.
c. The schema has no counter ("\N") attributes; they are not needed in XML.
d. Keyword attribute values are expanded for readability in the schema.
e. Date and time formats are different; the schema uses the XML standard date and time
formats (not the ones in paragraph 9.5).
f. Text entries in the XML schema may contain semicolons; the code name format uses
the semicolon as a delimiter.
g. The XML schema implies order, while the code name format allows the attributes to
be given in any order.

In addition to the TMATS XML schema, there is a separate XML schema which
describes commonly used types of data displays. The schema is called Data Display Markup
Language (DDML). Refer to paragraph 9.6 for a description of this standard format for data
display definitions.

9.5 Telemetry Attributes
The description of the mission configuration includes all potential sources of data; these
sources are RF links, pre- or post-detected tapes, and onboard recorded tapes and storage media.
Each of these data sources has unique characteristics that must be defined. Each source is given
a unique identity and its characteristics are specifically defined in associated attribute fields. In
multiplexed systems, each data stream is uniquely identified by a data link name, which is
related to the data source name.
9-3

Only the information that is essential to define the attributes of a
system is required. Non-applicable information does not need to be
included in the file. However, all attribute information given is to
be provided in the specified format.

The attributes defined in this section proceed from the general level to the detailed level.
The groups, defined in terms of data to be entered, are:

a. General Information: Establishes the top-level program definition and identifies the
data sources.
b. Transmission Attributes: Define an RF link. There will be one group for each RF
link identified in the General Information Group.
c. Recorder-Reproducer Attributes: Identify a tape or storage data source.
d. Multiplex/Modulation Attributes: Describe the FM/FM, FM/PM, or PM/PM
multiplex characteristics. Each multiplexed waveform must have a unique set of
attributes. For the analog measurement, the tie to the engineering units conversion is
made in this group.
e. Digital Data Attributes: Are divided into four groups: the PCM Format Attributes,
the PCM Measurement Description, the Bus Data Attributes, and the Packet Format
Attributes.
f. PCM Format Attributes: Define the PCM data format characteristics, including
subframes and embedded formats. Each PCM format will have a separate format
attributes group.
g. PCM Measurement Descriptions: Define each PCM measurement within the overall
PCM format.
h. Bus Data Attributes: Specify the PCM encoded MIL-STD-1553 or ARINC 429 bus
format characteristics, or the direct recorder track/channel MIL-STD-1553 or ARINC
429 bus format characteristics.
i. Message Data Attributes: Specify the message based data streams.
j. PAM Attributes: Contain the definition of the PAM system. It includes the PAM
format characteristics and measurement attributes. The tie to the engineering unit
conversion is made for the measurands contained in the PAM format.
k. Data Conversion Attributes: Contain the data conversion information for all
measurements in this telemetry system. The calibration data and conversion
definition of raw telemetry data to engineering units is included. The tie to the
measurands of the telemetry systems defined in the previous groups is via the
measurement name.
l. Airborne Hardware Attributes: Define the configuration of airborne instrumentation
hardware in use on the test item.
m. Vendor Specific Attributes: Provide information that is specific to a vendor.

9.5.1 Contents. The following subparagraphs discuss the organization of the attributes and
their relationships with the various groups.
9-4

9.5.1.1 Organization. Attribute information is organized according to a hierarchical structure in
which related items are grouped and given a common heading. The number of levels varies
within the overall structure and is a function of the logical association of the attributes. At the
highest level, the telemetry attributes are defined for the following groups:

Identifier Title
G General Information
T Transmission Attributes
R Recorder-Reproducer Attributes
M Multiplexing/Modulation Attributes
P PCM Format Attributes
D PCM Measurement Description
B Bus Data Attributes
S Message Data Attributes
A PAM Attributes
C Data Conversion Attributes
H Airborne Hardware Attributes
V Vendor Specific Attributes

Within the structure, a lower case letter, for example, n, p, or r, indicates a multiple entry
item with the index being the lower case letter. The range of these counters is from one to the
number indicated in another data entry, usually with the appendage \N.

Within the tables, the code name, definition, and maximum field size are given for each
individual attribute. The maximum field size is intended to be a guideline indicating the
intended use of the attribute, and does not imply support of the maximum capacity by all ranges.
For example, the fact that the Number of Data Sources attribute is two characters long does not
mean that 99 data sources are supported. Each range should be consulted as to their specific
capabilities.

Code names denoted with a *R-CH10* shall indicate the minimum
required IRIG 106 Chapter 10 TMATS Setup Record attributes. Code
names denoted with a *RO-CH10* shall indicate the minimum required
IRIG 106 Chapter 10 TMATS Setup Record attributes for portions of
IRIG 106 Chapter 10 which are optional and/or supported data channel
dependent.

9-5

9-6
9.5.1.2 Group Relationships. The interrelationships between the various groups are shown
pictorially in Figure 9-1.

a. Data Source ID is unique within a General Information Group (G). It
ties the Transmission Group (T) or the Recorder-Reproducer Group
(R) or both to the G group and to the Multiplex/Modulation Group
(M).
b. The tie from the M group to a PCM Group (P), or a PAM Group (A)
is the Data Link Name.
c. The tie from the P group to an embedded P group is another Data Link
Name.
d. The tie from the M group to the Data Conversion Group (C) for an
analog measurement is the Measurement Name.
e. The tie from the P group to the PCM Measurement Description
Group (D) or Bus Group (B) is the Data Link Name.
f. The tie from the R group to the B group is from the Channel Data
Link Name or Sub-Channel Name (R) to the Data Link Name (B).
g. The tie from the R group to the Message Data Group (S) is from the
Channel Data Link Name, Sub-Channel Name, or Network Name (R)
to the Data Link Name (S).
h. The tie from either the A, D, B or S group to the Data Conversion
Group is the Measurement Name.


TMATS
Medium

GROUP
FILE #1 FILE #2

G1

G2

G

DATA
SOURCE ID

DATA
SOURCE
ID

DATA
SOURCE ID
DATA
SOURCE ID

R1

T1 R2 T2 T or R
`
DATA SOURCE ID
CHANNEL
DATA LINK
NAME
DATA
SOURCE ID
CHANNEL
DATA LINK
NAME
DATA
SOURCE ID

M1

[OR] M2 [OR] M3 M

SUB-
CHANNEL
NAME
DATA
LINK
NAME
SUB-
CHANNEL
NAME
DATA
LINK
NAME
DATA
LINK (FM)
9
-
7
P1 (PCM) [OR]
P2 (PCM)
(HOST)
NAME
P3 (PCM)
(EMBEDDED)
P or A
DATA NETWORK

LINK NAME NAME

DATA
LINK NAME
DATA
LINK NAME

B1
B2 S1
(MESSAGE)

(BUS)
(BUS)

D1 D2 D, B, or S

...

MEAS.
NAME
MEAS.
NAME
MEAS.
NAME
MEAS.
NAME
MEAS.
NAME
MEAS.
NAME
MEAS.
NAME
MEAS.
NAME
MEAS.
NAME
MEAS.
NAME
MEAS.
NAME
MEAS.
NAME
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C
Figure 9-1. Group relationships.


9.5.2 General Information (G). The General Information Group provides overall program
information. Figure 9-2 below gives the overall information that is included in this group.
Table 9-1 identifies and defines the data required including the dates associated with the detailed
information. Since the identification of the data sources is an integral part of the remaining
groups, each source must be uniquely identified.

General Information Group (G)
CODE
NAME
REFERENCE
PAGE
PROGRAM NAME (G\PN) (9-9)
TEST ITEM (G\TA) (9-9)
*INFORMATION
TMATS FILE NAME (G\FN)
IRIG 106 REVISION LEVEL (G\106)
ORIGINATION DATE (G\OD)
REVISION NUMBER (G\RN)
REVISION DATE (G\RD)
UPDATE NUMBER (G\UN)
UPDATE DATE (G\UD)
TEST NUMBER (G\TN)
NUMBER OF POINTS OF CONTACT (G\POC\N)
*POINT OF CONTACT (9-10)
NAME (G\POC1-n)
AGENCY (G\POC2-n)
ADDRESS (G\POC3-n)
TELEPHONE (G\POC4-n)
*DATA SOURCE IDENTIFICATION (9-10)
NUMBER OF DATA SOURCES (G\DSI\N)
DATA SOURCE ID (G\DSI-n)
DATA SOURCE TYPE (G\DST-n)
*TEST INFORMATION (9-10)
TEST DURATION (G\TI1)
PRE-TEST REQUIREMENT (G\TI2)
POST-TEST REQUIREMENT (G\TI3)
SECURITY CLASSIFICATION (G\SC) (9-11)
* COMMENTS
COMMENTS (G\COM) (9-11)
*Heading Only - No Data Entry
Figure 9-2. General Information Group (G).
9-8

TABLE 9-1. GENERAL INFORMATION GROUP (G)
PARAMETER
MAXIMUM
FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
PROGRAM NAME 16 G\PN NAME OF PROGRAM
TEST ITEM 64 G\TA TEST ITEM DESCRIPTION IN TERMS OF
NAME, MODEL, PLATFORM, OR
IDENTIFICATION CODE, AS APPROPRIATE
INFORMATION
TMATS FILE
NAME
256 G\FN

NAME OF THIS TMATS FILE
IRIG 106
REVISION LEVEL
2 G\106
*R-CH10*
VERSION OF IRIG 106 STANDARD USED TO
GENERATE THIS TMATS FILE
ORIGINATION
DATE
10 G\OD DATE OF ORIGINATION OF THIS MISSION
CONFIGURATION.
DD - DAY MM - MONTH
YYYY YEAR (MM-DD-YYYY)
REVISION
NUMBER
4 G\RN REVISION NUMBER ASSOCIATED WITH
THIS MISSION CONFIGURATION
REVISION DATE 10 G\RD DATE OF REVISION.
DD - DAY MM - MONTH
UPDATE
NUMBER
2 G\UN UPDATE NUMBER OF CURRENT CHANGE
WHICH HAS NOT BEEN INCORPORATED
AS A REVISION
UPDATE DATE 10 G\UD DATE OF UPDATE.
DD - DAY MM - MONTH
TEST NUMBER 16 G\TN TEST IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER OF
POINTS OF
CONTACT
1 G\POC\N NUMBER OF POINTS OF CONTACT TO BE
GIVEN

9-9

Table 9-1 (Continued). General Information Group (G) Page 2 x 3
PARAMETER
MAXIMUM
FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
POINT OF
CONTACT:
NAME
AGENCY
ADDRESS
TELEPHONE

24
48
48
20

G\POC1-n
G\POC2-n
G\POC3-n
G\POC4-n
LIST EACH OF THE RESPONSIBLE
AGENCIES AND THEIR POINT OF
CONTACT.
DATA SOURCE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER OF
DATA SOURCES
2 G\DSI\N
*R-CH10*
SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF DATA
SOURCES: FOR RF TELEMETRY
SYSTEMS, GIVE THE NUMBER OF
CARRIERS; FOR TAPE OR STORAGE
RECORDED DATA, IDENTIFY THE
NUMBER OF TAPE OR STORAGE
SOURCES.
DATA
SOURCE
ID
32 G\DSI-n
*R-CH10*
PROVIDE A DESCRIPTIVE NAME FOR
THIS SOURCE. EACH SOURCE
IDENTIFIER MUST BE UNIQUE.
DATA
SOURCE
TYPE
3 G\DST-n
*R-CH10*
SPECIFY THE TYPE OF SOURCE:
RF - RF TAPE - TAP
STORAGE - STO
DISTRIBUTED SOURCE DSS
DIRECT SOURCE DRS
REPRODUCER REP
OTHER - OTH
NOTE: PROVIDE THE ABOVE TWO ITEMS FOR EACH DATA SOURCE.
TEST INFORMATION
TEST
DURATION
4 G\TI1 APPROXIMATE DURATION OF TEST IN
HOURS.
PRE-TEST
REQUIREMENT
1 G\TI2 INDICATE WHETHER A PRE-TEST
REQUIREMENT IS APPLICABLE (Y OR
N). PROVIDE DETAILS IN COMMENTS
RECORD.
POST-TEST
REQUIREMENT
1 G\TI3 SPECIFY WHETHER A POST-TEST
REQUIREMENT IS APPLICABLE
(Y OR N). PROVIDE DETAILS IN
COMMENTS RECORD.
9-10

Table 9-1 (Continued). General Information Group (G) Page 3 x 3
PARAMETER
MAXIMUM
FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
SECURITY
CLASSIFICATION
1 G\SC PROVIDE THE CLASSIFICATION OF
THE PROJECT DATA. PROVIDE A
DESCRIPTION OF THE
CLASSIFICATION GUIDE AND ANY
INFORMATION CONCERNING
DECLASSIFICATION AND/OR
DOWNGRADING IN COMMENTS
RECORD.
UNCLASSIFIED - U
CONFIDENTIAL - C
SECRET - S
TOP SECRET - T
OTHER - O
COMMENTS
COMMENTS 1600 G\COM PROVIDE THE ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION REQUESTED OR ANY
OTHER INFORMATION DESIRED.

9.5.3 Transmission Attributes (T). The Transmission Attributes are presented graphically in
Figure 9-3 and specified in Table 9-2. The information contained within this group is used to set
up the RF receiver through the detection and recovery of the baseband composite waveform.
The format contains the information needed to configure the antenna and receiver subsystems.

Additional equipment inserted in a specific range configuration such as microwave or
other relay is intended to be transparent to the user and is not described under Transmission
Attributes.

Because the information is mutually exclusive, only the appropriate frequency
modulation (FM) or phase modulation (PM) system data set is required for a link.
9-11

Transmission Attributes Group (T)
CODE
NAME
REFERENCE
PAGE
DATA
SOURCE ID
(T-x\ID) (9-13)
*SOURCE RF ATTRIBUTES
TRANSMITTER ID (T-x\TID)
FREQUENCY (T-x\RF1)
RF BANDWIDTH (T-x\RF2)
DATA BANDWIDTH (T-x\RF3)
MODULATION TYPE (T-x\RF4)
TOTAL CARRIER MODULATION (T-x\RF5)
POWER (RADIATED) (T-x\RF6)
NUMBER OF SUBCARRIERS (T-x\SCO\N) (9-13)
SUBCARRIER NUMBER (T-x\SCO1-n) (9-14)
MODULATION INDEX (T-x\SCO2-n)
MODULATOR NON-LINEARITY (T-x\RF7)
*PREMODULATION FILTER (9-14)
BANDWIDTH (T-x\PMF1)
SLOPE (T-x\PMF2)
TYPE (T-x\PMF3)
*TRANSMIT ANTENNA (9-14)
TRANSMIT ANTENNA TYPE (T-x\AN1)
TRANSMIT POLARIZATION (T-x\AN2)
ANTENNA LOCATION (T-x\AN3)
*ANTENNA PATTERNS (9-15)
DOCUMENT (T-x\AP)
*POINT OF CONTACT
NAME (T-x\AP\POC1)
AGENCY (T-x\AP\POC2)
ADDRESS (T-x\AP\POC3)
TELEPHONE (T-x\AP\POC4)
*GROUND STATION ATTRIBUTES (9-15)
IF BANDWIDTH (T-x\GST1)
BASEBAND COMPOSITE BANDWIDTH (T-x\GST2)
*GAIN CONTROL (9-15)
AGC TIME CONSTANT (T-x\GST3)
OR
MGC GAIN SET POINT (T-x\GST4)
AFC/APC (T-x\GST5)
TRACKING BANDWIDTH (T-x\GST6)
POLARIZATION RECEPTION (T-x\GST7) (9-16)
*FM SYSTEMS (9-16)
OR DISCRIMINATOR BANDWIDTH (T-x\FM1)
DISCRIMINATOR LINEARITY (T-x\FM2)
*PM SYSTEMS (9-16)
PHASE LOCK LOOP BANDWIDTH (T-x\PLL)
*COMMENTS
COMMENTS (T-x\COM) (9-16)
* Heading Only No Data Entry
Figure 9-3. Transmission Attributes Group (T).
9-12

TABLE 9-2. TRANSMISSION ATTRIBUTES GROUP (T)
PARAMETER
MAXIMUM
FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
DATA SOURCE ID 32 T-x\ID DATA SOURCE ID CONSISTENT WITH
GENERAL INFORMATION GROUP
SOURCE RF ATTRIBUTES
TRANSMITTER ID 12 T-x\TID TRANSMITTER IDENTIFICATION
FREQUENCY 6 T-x\RF1 CARRIER FREQUENCY, IN MHz. IF
PROGRAMMABLE, ENTER P, AND
DEFINE IN COMMENTS RECORD.
RF BANDWIDTH 6 T-x\RF2 TOTAL RF BANDWIDTH (-60 dB) OF
MODULATED SIGNAL, IN MHz
DATA BANDWIDTH 6 T-x\RF3 COMPOSITE BASEBAND DATA
BANDWIDTH (3 dB), IN kHz.
MODULATION
TYPE
12 T-x\RF4 DEFINE THE MODULATION TYPE: FM
PM BPSK DPSK QPSK
FQPSK-B FQPSK-JR SOQPSK-TG
MULTI-H CPM OTHR
TOTAL CARRIER
MODULATION
6 T-x\RF5 FOR FM SYSTEM, DEFINE TOTAL
CARRIER DEVIATION, PEAK-TO-PEAK,
IN kHz. FOR PM SYSTEM, DEFINE
TOTAL PHASE MODULATION, PEAK-
TO-PEAK, IN RADIANS.
POWER
(RADIATED)
4 T-x\RF6 TOTAL TRANSMITTED POWER WHEN
MODULATED, IN WATTS
NUMBER OF
SUBCARRIERS
2 T-x\
SCO\N
NUMBER OF SUBCARRIERS IN THE
COMPOSITE BASEBAND WAVEFORM, n.
IF NONE, ENTER NO.
9-13

Table 9-2 (Continued). Transmission Attributes Group (T) Page 2 x 4
PARAMETER
MAXIMUM
FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
SUBCARRIER
NUMBER
5 T-x\
SCO1-n
GIVE THE IRIG CHANNEL NUMBER FOR
THE SUBCARRIER. IF NONSTANDARD
SUBCARRIER, ENTER NO, AND
ENTER FREQUENCY IN THE
COMMENTS SECTION WHERE n IS AN
IDENTIFICATION TAG FOR THE
SUBCARRIER.
MODULATION
INDEX
4 T-x\
SCO2-n
SPECIFY THE MODULATION INDEX
FOR EACH SUBCARRIER IN THE
COMPOSITE WAVEFORM, AS
APPROPRIATE.
MODULATOR
NONLINEARITY
4 T-x\RF7 MODULATOR NONLINEARITY, IN
PERCENT
PREMODULATION FILTER
BANDWIDTH 6 T-x\PMF1 PRE-MODULATION COMPOSITE FILTER
BANDWIDTH, 3 dB CUT-OFF
FREQUENCY, IN kHz
SLOPE 2 T-x\PMF2 PRE-MODULATION FILTER
ASYMPTOTIC ROLL-OFF SLOPE,
dB/OCTAVE
TYPE 2 T-x\PMF3 SPECIFY THE FILTER TYPE:
CONSTANT AMPLITUDE - CA
CONSTANT DELAY - CD
OTHER - OT
TRANSMIT ANTENNA
TRANSMIT
ANTENNA TYPE

16 T-x\AN1 TRANSMIT ANTENNA TYPE
TRANSMIT
POLARIZATION
4 T-x\AN2 TRANSMIT ANTENNA POLARIZATION.
RHCP LHCP LINEAR - LIN
ANTENNA
LOCATION
16 T-x\AN3 DESCRIBE THE ANTENNA LOCATION.
9-14

PARAMETER
MAXIMUM
FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
ANTENNA PATTERNS
DOCUMENT 16 T-x\AP IDENTIFY DOCUMENT HAVING
ANTENNA PATTERNS.
POINT OF CONTACT:

NAME

AGENCY

ADDRESS

TELEPHONE

24

48

48

20

T-x\
AP\POC1
T-x\
AP\POC2
T-x\
AP\POC3
T-x\
AP\POC4
IDENTIFY THE POINT OF CONTACT
FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
GROUND STATION ATTRIBUTES
IF BANDWIDTH 6 T-x\GST1 DEFINE THE IF BANDWIDTH (3 dB) IN
MHz.
BASEBAND
COMPOSITE
BANDWIDTH
6 T-x\GST2 DEFINE THE CUTOFF FREQUENCY
(3 dB), OF THE OUTPUT FILTER, IN kHz.
GAIN CONTROL
AGC TIME
CONSTANT
4 T-x\GST3 SPECIFY THE AGC TIME CONSTANT
DESIRED IN MILLISECONDS.
MGC GAIN
SET POINT
6 T-x\GST4 PROVIDE THE MANUAL GAIN
CONTROL SET POINT IN TERMS OF
RECEIVED SIGNAL STRENGTH, dBm.
AFC/APC 3 T-x\GST5 SPECIFY AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY
CONTROL (AFC) OR AUTOMATIC
PHASE CONTROL (APC) OR NONE
(NON).
TRACKING
BANDWIDTH
4 T-x\GST6 SPECIFY TRACKING LOOP BAND-
WIDTH, IN Hz.
9-15

PARAMETER
MAXIMUM
FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
POLARIZATION
RECEPTION
5 T-x\GST7 SPECIFY POLARIZATION TO BE USED:
RHCP - RHCP
LHCP - LHCP
BOTH - BOTH
BOTH WITH DIVERSITY COMBINING:
PRE-DETECTION-B&DPR
POST-DETECTION-B&DPO
DIVERSITY COMBINING (ONLY):
PRE-DETECTION-PRE-D
POST-DETECTION-POS-D
OTHER - OTHER, SPECIFY IN
COMMENTS.
FM SYSTEMS
DISCRIMINATOR
BANDWIDTH
4 T-x\FM1 SPECIFY THE DISCRIMINATOR
BANDWIDTH REQUIRED, IN MHz.
DISCRIMINATOR
LINEARITY
4 T-x\FM2 SPECIFY THE REQUIRED LINEARITY
OVER THE BANDWIDTH SPECIFIED.
PM SYSTEMS
PHASE LOCK LOOP
BANDWIDTH
4 T-x\PLL SPECIFY THE PHASE LOCKED LOOP
BANDWIDTH.
COMMENTS
COMMENTS 1600 T-x\COM PROVIDE THE ADDITIONAL

9-16

9.5.4 Recorder-Reproducer Attributes (R). This group describes the attributes required when
the data source is a magnetic tape as specified in Appendix D or a data storage device as
specified in Chapter 10. In the case of the tape data link identification, each data source must be
identified. In some cases, the data source identification may be identical, particularly when the
same information has been received from different receiver sites, on different polarizations, or on
different carriers for redundancy purposes. Some of the information requested will be available
only from the recording site or the dubbing location.

Figure 9-4 indicates the information required. Various categories of information have
been included. In the data section of the attributes, it will be necessary to repeat the items until
all of the data sources have been defined, including the multiple tracks, which contain ground
station data of interest. Table 9-3 defines the information required. Any nonstandard tape
recordings will require explanation in the comments and may require supplemental definition.

Recorder Reproducer filtering and post process data filtering and overwrite will use
TMATS attributes to describe the requirements. Recorder Reproducer channel types that
support filtering and overwrite will define these attributes. PCM channels will use R, P and D
attributes and bus channels will use R and B attributes to define filtering and overwrite
definitions.
9-17

Recorder-Reproducer Attributes Group (R)
CODE NAME
REFERENCE
PAGE
DATA
SOURCE ID
(R-x\ID) (9-23)
RECORDER-REPRODUCER ID (R-x\RID) (9-23)
RECORDER-REPRODUCER DESCRIPTION (R-x\R1)
*RECORDER-REPRODUCER MEDIA CHARACTERISTICS (9-23)
RECORDER-REPRODUCER MEDIA TYPE (R-x\TC1)

RECORDER-REPRODUCER MEDIA
MANUFACTURER
(R-x\TC2)
RECORDER-REPRODUCER MEDIA CODE (R-x\TC3)
RECORDER-REPRODUCER MEDIA LOCATION (R-x\RML)
EXTERNAL RMM BUS SPEED (R-x\ERBS)
TAPE WIDTH (R-x\TC4)
TAPE HOUSING (R-x\TC5)
TYPE OF TRACKS (R-x\TT)
NUMBER OF TRACKS/CHANNELS (R-x\N)
RECORD SPEED (R-x\TC6)
DATA PACKING DENSITY (R-x\TC7)
TAPE REWOUND (R-x\TC8)
NUMBER OF SOURCE BITS (R-x\NSB)
*RECORDER-REPRODUCER INFORMATION (9-24)
RECORDER-REPRODUCER MANUFACTURER (R-x\RI1)
RECORDER-REPRODUCER MODEL (R-x\RI2)
ORIGINAL RECORDING (R-x\RI3)
ORIGINAL RECORDING DATE AND TIME (R-x\RI4)

*CREATING ORGANIZATION
POINT OF CONTACT
(9-25)
NAME (R-x\POC1)
AGENCY (R-x\POC2)
ADDRESS (R-x\POC3)
TELEPHONE (R-x\POC4)
DATE AND TIME OF COPY (R-x\RI5)

*COPYING ORGANIZATION
POINT OF CONTACT
(9-25)
NAME (R-x\DPOC1)
AGENCY (R-x\DPOC2)
ADDRESS (R-x\DPOC3)
TELEPHONE (R-x\DPOC4)
POST PROCESS MODIFIED RECORDING (R-x\RI6)
POST PROCESS MODIFICATION TYPE (R-x\RI7)
DATE AND TIME OF MODIFICATION (R-x\RI8)

*MODIFYING ORGANIZATION
POINT OF CONTACT

NAME (R-x\MPOC1)
AGENCY (R-x\MPOC2)
ADDRESS (R-x\MPOC3)
TELEPHONE (R-x\MPOC4)
CONTINUOUS RECORDING ENABLED (R-x\CRE)
RECORDER-REPRODUCER SETUP SOURCE (R-x\RSS)
RECORDER SERIAL NUMBER (R-x\RI9)

Figure 9-4. Recorder-Reproducer Attributes Group (R). Page 1 x 5

9-18

RECORDER FIRMWARE REVISION (R-x\RI10)
NUMBER OF MODULES (R-x\RIM\N)
MODULE ID (R-x\RIMI-n)
MODULE SERIAL NUMBER (R-x\RIMS-n)
MODULE FIRMWARE REVISION (R-x\RIMF-n)
NUMBER OF RMMS (R-x\RMM\N)
RMM IDENTIFIER (R-x\RMMID-n)
RMM SERIAL NUMBER (R-x\RMMS-n)
RMM FIRMWARE REVISION (R-x\RMMF-n)
*RECORDING EVENT DEFINITIONS (9-27)
RECORDING EVENTS ENABLED (R-x\EV\E)
NUMBER OF RECORDING EVENTS (R-x\EV\N)
RECORDER INTERNAL EVENTS
ENABLED
(R-x\EV\IEE)
*RECORDING EVENT (9-27)
EVENT ID (R-x\EV\ID-n)
EVENT DESCRIPTION (R-x\EV\D-n)
EVENT TYPE (R-x\EV\T-n)
EVENT PRIORITY (R-x\EV\P-n) (9-28)
EVENT CAPTURE MODE (R-x\EV\CM-n)
EVENT INITIAL CAPTURE (R-x\EV\IC-n)
RECORDING EVENT LIMIT COUNT (R-x\EV\LC-n)
EVENT TRIGGER MEASUREMENT
SOURCE
(R-x\EV\MS-n)
EVENT TRIGGER MEASUREMENT
NAME
(R-x\EV\MN-n)
*RECORDING INDEX (9-29)
RECORDING INDEX ENABLED (R-x\IDX\E)
RECORDING INDEX TYPE (R-x\IDX\IT)
* TIME INDEX TYPE ATTRIBUTE (9-29)
INDEX TIME VALUE (R-x\IDX\ITV)
OR
* COUNT INDEX TYPE ATTRIBUTE
INDEX COUNT VALUE (R-x\IDX\ICV)
*MIL-STD-1553 RECORDER CONTROL (9-29)

MESSAGE MONITOR RECORD CONTROL
ENABLED
(R-x\MRC\E)
CHANNEL ID NUMBER (R-x\MRC\ID)
MESSAGE RECORD CONTROL TYPE (R-x\MRC\RCT)
STOP-PAUSE COMMAND WORD (R-x\MRC\SPM)
START-RESUME COMMAND WORD (R-x\MRC\SRM)
*DATA
TRACK NUMBER/ CHANNEL ID (R-x\TK1-n)
RECORDING TECHNIQUE (R-x\TK2-n)
DATA SOURCE ID (R-x\DSI-n) (9-30)
DATA DIRECTION (R-x\TK3-n) (9-30)

Figure 9-4. Recorder-Reproducer Attributes Group (R). (Page 2 x 5)
9-19

RECORDER PHYSICAL CHANNEL NUMBER (R-x\TK4-n)
CHANNEL ENABLE (R-x\CHE-n)
CHANNEL DATA TYPE (R-x\CDT-n)
CHANNEL DATA LINK NAME (R-x\CDLN-n)
*DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
*PCM DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES (9-31)
PCM DATA TYPE FORMAT (R-x\PDTF-n)
DATA PACKING OPTION (R-x\PDP-n)
INPUT CLOCK EDGE (R-x\ICE-n)
INPUT SIGNAL TYPE (R-x\IST-n)
INPUT THRESHOLD (R-x\ITH-n)
INPUT TERMINATION (R-x\ITM-n)
OR PCM VIDEO TYPE FORMAT (R-x\PTF-n)

PCM RECORDER-REPRODUCER
MINOR FRAME FILTERING ENABLED
(R-x\MFF\E-n)

PCM POST PROCESS OVERWRITE AND
FILTERING ENABLED
(R-x\POF\E-n)

PCM POST PROCESS OVERWRITE AND
FILTERING TYPE
(R-x\POF\T-n)

*MIL-STD-1553 BUS DATA TYPE
ATTRIBUTES
(9-33)

MIL-STD-1553 BUS DATA TYPE
FORMAT
(R-x\BTF-n)
OR
MIL-STD-1553 RECORDER
REPRODUCER FILTERING ENABLED
(R-x\MRF\E-n)

MIL-STD-1553 POST PROCESS
OVERWRITE AND FILTERING
ENABLED
(R-x\MOF\T-n)

MIL-STD-1553 MESSAGE FILTERING
DEFINITION TYPE
(R-x\MFD\FDT-n)

NUMBER OF MESSAGE FILTERING
DEFINITIONS
(R-x\MFD\N-n)
MESSAGE TYPE
(R-x\MFD\MT-n-
m)

REMOTE TERMINAL ADDRESS
(R-x\MFD\TRA-n-
m)

TRANSMIT/RECEIVE MODE
(R-x\MFD\TRM-n-
m)

SUBTERMINAL ADDRESS
(R-x\MFD\STA-n-
m)

DATA WORD COUNT/MODE CODE
(R-x\MFD\DWC-n-
m)

RT/RT REMOTE TERMINAL ADDRESS
(R-x\MFD\RTRA-
n-m)

RT/RT SUBTERMINAL ADDRESS
(R-x\MFD\RSTA-
n-m)

RT/RT DATA WORD COUNT
(R-x\MFD\RDWC-
n-m)

*ANALOG DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES (9-34)
ANALOG DATA TYPE FORMAT (R-x\ATF-n)
NUMBER OF ANALOG CHANNELS/PKT (R-x\ACH\N-n)
DATA PACKING OPTION (R-x\ADP-n)
SAMPLE RATE (R-x\ASR-n)
MEASUREMENT NAME (R-x\AMN-n-m) (9-35)

9-20

DATA LENGTH (R-x\ADL-n-m)
BIT MASK (R-x\AMSK-n-m)
MEASUREMENT TRANSFER ORDER (R-x\AMTO-n-m)
SAMPLE FACTOR (R-x\ASF-n-m)
SAMPLE FILTER 3DB BANDWIDTH (R-x\ASBW-n-m)
AC/DC COUPLING (R-x\ACP-n-m)
RECORDER INPUT IMPEDANCE (R-x\AII-n-m)
INPUT CHANNEL GAIN (R-x\AGI-n-m)
INPUT FULL SCALE RANGE (R-x\AFSI-n-m)
INPUT OFFSET VOLTAGE (R-x\AOVI-n-m)
INPUT TYPE (R-x\AIT-n-m)
AUDIO (R-x\AV-n-m)
OR AUDIO FORMAT (R-x\AVF-n-m)
*DISCRETE DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES (9-36)
DISCRETE DATA TYPE FORMAT (R-x\DTF-n)
DISCRETE MODE (R-x\DMOD-n)
SAMPLE RATE (R-x\DSR-n)

NUMBER OF DISCRETE
MEASUREMENTS
(R-x\NDM\N-n)
MEASUREMENT NAME (R-x\DMN-n-m)
BIT MASK (R-x\DMSK-n-m)
OR MEASUREMENT TRANSFER ORDER (R-x\DMTO-n-m)

*ARINC 429 BUS DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
(9-37)
ARINC 429 BUS DATA TYPE FORMAT (R-x\ABTF-n)

NUMBER OF ARINC 429 SUB-
CHANNELS
(R-x\NAS\N-n)
ARINC 429 SUB-CHANNEL NUMBER (R-x\ASN-n-m)
OR ARINC 429 SUB-CHANNEL NAME (R-x\ANM-n-m)

*VIDEO DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
(9-37)
VIDEO DATA TYPE FORMAT (R-x\VTF-n)
MPEG-2 CHANNEL XON2 FORMAT (R-x\VXF-n)
VIDEO SIGNAL TYPE (R-x\VST-n)
VIDEO SIGNAL FORMAT TYPE (R-x\VSF-n)
VIDEO CONSTANT BIT RATE (R-x\CBR-n)
VIDEO VARIABLE PEAK BIT RATE (R-x\VBR-n)
OR VIDEO ENCODING DELAY (R-x\VED-n)
OVERLAY ENABLED (R-x\VCO\OE-n)
OVERLAY X POSITION (R-x\VCO\X-n)
OVERLAY Y POSITION (R-x\VCO\Y-n)
OVERLAY EVENT TOGGLE ENABLED (R-x\VCO\OET-n)
OVERLAY FORMAT (R-x\VCO\OLF-n)
OVERLAY BACKGROUND (R-x\VCO\OBG-n)

ANALOG AUDIO CHANNEL INPUT
LEFT
(R-x\ASI\ASL-n)

ANALOG AUDIO CHANNEL INPUT
RIGHT
(R-x\ASI\ASR-n)
VIDEO DATA ALIGNMENT (R-x\VDA-n)

9-21

*TIME DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES (9-39)
TIME DATA TYPE FORMAT (R-x\TTF-n)
TIME FORMAT (R-x\TFMT-n)
OR TIME SOURCE (R-x\TSRC-n)
*IMAGE DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES (9-40)
IMAGE DATA TYPE FORMAT (R-x\ITF-n)
OR STILL IMAGE TYPE (R-x\SIT-n)
*UART DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES (9-40)
UART DATA TYPE FORMAT (R-x\UTF-n)
NUMBER OF UART SUB-CHANNELS (R-x\NUS\N-n)
UART SUB-CHANNEL NUMBER (R-x\USCN-n-m)
OR UART SUB-CHANNEL NAME (R-x\UCNM-n-m)
UART SUB-CHANNEL BAUD RATE (R-x\UCR-n-m)
UART SUB-CHANNEL BITS PER WORD (R-x\UCB-n-m)
UART SUB-CHANNEL PARITY (R-x\UCP-n-m)
UART SUB-CHANNEL STOP BIT (R-x\UCS-n-m)
UART SUB-CHANNEL INTERFACE (R-x\UCIN-n-m)
UART SUB-CHANNEL BLOCK SIZE (R-x\UCBS-n-m)

UART SUB-CHANNEL SYNC WORD
LENGTH
(R-x\UCSL-n-m)

UART SUB-CHANNEL BLOCK SYNC
VALUE
(R-x\UCSV-n-m)
UART SUB-CHANNEL BLOCK RATE (R-x\UCBR-n-m)
*MESSAGE DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES (9-41)
MESSAGE DATA TYPE FORMAT (R-x\MTF-n)

NUMBER OF MESSAGE SUB-
CHANNELS
(R-x\NMS\N-n)
MESSAGE SUB-CHANNEL NUMBER (R-x\MSCN-n-m)
OR MESSAGE SUB-CHANNEL NAME (R-x\MCNM-n-m)
*IEEE-1394 DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES (9-42)
OR IEEE-1394 DATA TYPE FORMAT (R-x\IETF-n)

*PARALLEL DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES (9-42)
OR PARALLEL DATA TYPE FORMAT (R-x\PLTF-n)
*ETHERNET DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES (9-42)
ETHERNET DATA TYPE FORMAT (R-x\ENTF-n)
NUMBER OF ETHERNET NETWORKS (R-x\NNET\N-n)
ETHERNET NETWORK NUMBER (R-x\ENBR-n-m)
ETHERNET NETWORK NAME (R-x\ENAM-n-m)
*REFERENCE TRACK (9-42)
NUMBER OF REFERENCE TRACKS (R-x\RT\N)
TRACK NUMBER (R-x\RT1-n)
REFERENCE FREQUENCY (R-x\RT2-n)
*COMMENTS
COMMENTS (R-x\COM) (9-43)

Figure 9-4. Recorder-Reproducer Attributes Group (R). (Page 5 x 5)
9-22

TABLE 9-3. RECORDER-REPRODUCER ATTRIBUTES GROUP (R)
MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
DATA SOURCE ID 32 R-x\ID
*R-CH10*
DATA SOURCE ID CONSISTENT WITH
GENERAL INFORMATION GROUP
RECORDER-
REPRODUCER ID
32 R-x\RID
*R-CH10*
RECORDER-REPRODUCER
IDENTIFICATION
RECORDER-
REPRODUCER
DESCRIPTION
32 R-x\R1 RECORDER-REPRODUCER DESCRIPTION
RECORDER-REPRODUCER MEDIA CHARACTERISTICS
RECORDER-
REPRODUCER
MEDIA TYPE
4 R-x\TC1 SPECIFY THE RECORDER-REPRODUCER
MEDIA TYPE:
ANALOG - ANAL
CASSETTE - CASS
HDDR - HDDR
PARALLEL - PARA
SOLID STATE RECORDER - SSR
MAGNETIC DISK - MD
NONE N, DATA PUBLISHING ONLY
OTHER - OTHR, DEFINE IN COMMENTS
RECORD.
RECORDER-
REPRODUCER
MEDIA
MANUFACTURER
8 R-x\TC2 NAME OF MANUFACTURER OF THE
RECORDER-REPRODUCER MEDIA
RECORDER-
REPRODUCER
MEDIA CODE
8 R-x\TC3 SPECIFY MANUFACTURERS RECORDER-
REPRODUCER MEDIA DESIGNATION
CODE.
RECORDER
REPRODUCER
MEDIA LOCATION
1 R-x\RRML
*R-CH10*
INDICATES THE LOCATION OF THE
RECORDER-REPRODUCER MEDIA.
I = INTERNAL, E = EXTERNAL,
B = BOTH INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL RMM
BUS SPEED
5 R-x\ERBS
*R-CH10*
INDICATES THE SPEED OF AN EXTERNAL
RMM IEEE-1394B BUS.
AUTO
S100
S200
S400
S800
S1600
S3200
9-23

Table 9-3 (Continued). Recorder-Reproducer Attributes Group (R) Page 2 x 21
MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
TAPE WIDTH 4 R-x\TC4 PHYSICAL DIMENSION OF TAPE WIDTH,
IN INCHES
TAPE HOUSING 5 R-x\TC5 STATE THE REEL SIZE, INCHES:
10.5 14.0 15.0 16.0 OTHER
STATE THE CASSETTE SIZE, MM:
12.65 19.0 OTHER
TYPE OF TRACKS 2 R-x\TT STATE THE TYPE OF TRACKS ON THE
TAPE: LONGITUDINAL - LO
ROTARY - RO
NUMBER OF
TRACKS/
CHANNELS
5 R-x\N
*R-CH10*
STATE THE NUMBER OF TRACKS ON THE
TAPE OR THE NUMBER OF CHANNELS ON
THE STORAGE MEDIA.
RECORD SPEED 4 R-x\TC6 STATE RECORD SPEED (inches/second).
DATA PACKING
DENSITY
2 R-x\TC7 STATE RECORDING SYSTEM
BANDWIDTH:
INTERMEDIATE BAND - IM
WIDE BAND - WB
DOUBLE DENSITY - DD
OTHER - OT
TAPE REWOUND 1 R-x\TC8 YES - Y NO - N
NUMBER OF
SOURCE BITS
2 R-x\NSB
*R-CH10*
NUMBER OF MOST SIGNIFICANT BITS OF
THE CHANNEL ID USED FOR
MULTIPLEXER SOURCE ID. DEFAULT IS
ZERO (ONE SOURCE).
RECORDER-REPRODUCER INFORMATION
RECORDER-
REPRODUCER
8
MANUFACTURER
R-x\RI1 NAME OF RECORDER-REPRODUCER
DEVICE MANUFACTURER
RECORDER-
REPRODUCER
MODEL
8 R-x\RI2 MANUFACTURERS MODEL NUMBER OF
RECORDER-REPRODUCER DEVICE USED
TO CREATE THE RECORDING
ORIGINAL
RECORDING
1 R-x\RI3
*R-CH10*
INDICATES IF THIS IS AN ORIGINAL
RECORDING FROM THE SOURCE
YES - Y NO - N
9-24

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
ORIGINAL
RECORDING DATE
AND TIME
19 R-x\RI4 DATE AND TIME ORIGINAL RECORDING
WAS CREATED:
DD - DAY MM - MONTH
YYYY - YEAR HH - HOUR
MI MINUTE SS - SECOND
(MM-DD-YYYY-HH-MI-SS)
CREATING
ORGANIZATION
POC:
NAME
AGENCY
ADDRESS
TELEPHONE

24
48
48
20

R-x\POC1
R-x\POC2
R-x\POC3
R-x\POC4
POINT OF CONTACT AT THE FACILITY
CREATING THE TAPE OR STORAGE
MEDIA: NAME, AGENCY, ADDRESS, AND
TELEPHONE
DATE AND TIME OF
COPY
19 R-x\RI5
*RO-CH10*
DATE AND TIME THE COPY WAS MADE:
DD DAY MM MONTH
YYYY YEAR HH HOUR
MI MINUTE SS - SECOND
COPYING
ORGANIZATION
POC:
NAME
AGENCY
ADDRESS
TELEPHONE

24
48
48
20

R-x\DPOC1
R-x\DPOC2
R-x\DPOC3
R-x\DPOC4

POINT OF CONTACT AT THE COPYING
AGENCY: NAME, ADDRESS, AND
TELEPHONE
POST PROCESS
MODIFIED
RECORDING
1 R-x\RI6
*R-CH10*
INDICATES MODIFIED RECORDING
YES - Y, NO - N
POST PROCESS
MODIFICATION
TYPE
2 R-x\RI7
*R-CH10*
INDICATES THE TYPE OF POST PROCESS
MODIFICATION TO THE RECORDING
1 = TIME SUBSET
2 = CHANNEL SUBSET
3 = TIME - CHANNEL SUBSET
4 = CHANNEL SUPERSET
5 = TIME SUBSET - CHANNEL SUPERSET
6 = FILTER
7 = OVERWRITE
9-25

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
DATE AND TIME OF
MODIFICATION
19 R-x\RI8
*RO-CH10*
DATE AND TIME THE COPY WAS MADE:
DD DAY
MM MONTH
YYYY YEAR
HH HOUR
MI MINUTE
SS SECOND
MODIFYING
ORGANIZATION
POC:
NAME
AGENCY
ADDRESS
TELEPHONE

24
48
48
20

R-x\MPOC1
R-x\MPOC2
R-x\MPOC3
R-x\MPOC4

POINT OF CONTACT AT THE
MODIFYING AGENCY: NAME,
ADDRESS, AND TELEPHONE
CONTINUOUS
RECORDING
ENABLED
1 R-x\CRE
*R-CH10*
INDICATES IF CONTINUOUS RECORDING
IS ENABLED.
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
RECORDER
REPRODUCER
SETUP SOURCE
2 R-x\RSS
*R-CH10*
INDICATES THE RECORDER-
REPRODUCER SETUP SOURCE.
R = SETUP FILE ON RMM ONLY
C = COMMAND SETUP FILE ONLY
RP = RMM PRIMARY COMMAND
SECONDARY
CP = COMMAND PRIMARY RMM
SECONDARY
RECORDER SERIAL
NUMBER
64 R-x\RI9

SERIAL NUMBER OF THE RECORDER
RECORDER
FIRMWARE
REVISION
256 R-x\RI10

FIRMWARE REVISION NUMBER FOR
THE RECORDER
NUMBER OF
MODULES
3
R-x\RIM\N

NUMBER OF MODULES IN THE
RECORDER
MODULE ID 64 R-x\RIMI-n IDENTIFY THIS MODULE
9-26

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
MODULE SERIAL
NUMBER
64 R-x\RIMS-n

SERIAL NUMBER OF THIS MODULE
MODULE
FIRMWARE
REVISION
256 R-x\RIMF-n

FIRMWARE REVISION NUMBER FOR
THIS MODULE
NUMBER OF RMMS
2
R-x\RMM\N
NUMBER OF REMOVABLE MEMORY
MODULES (RMM)
RMM IDENTIFIER 64 R-x\RMMID-n IDENTIFY THIS RMM
RMM SERIAL
NUMBER
64 R-x\RMMS-n

SERIAL NUMBER OF THE RMM
RMM FIRMWARE
REVISION
256
R-x\RMMF-n

FIRMWARE REVISION NUMBER OF
THE RMM
RECORDING EVENT DEFINITIONS
RECORDING
EVENTS ENABLED
1 R-x\EV\E
*RO-CH10*
INDICATES IF EVENTS ARE ENABLED.
EVENTS MUST BE ENABLED TO
GENERATE EVENT PACKETS.
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
NUMBER OF
RECORDING
EVENTS
3 R-x\EV\N
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF INDIVIDUAL
RECORDING EVENT TYPES
RECORDER
INTERNAL EVENTS
ENABLED
1 R-x\EV\IEE
*RO-CH10*
INDICATES IF RECORDER INTERNAL
EVENTS ARE ENABLED.
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
RECORDING EVENT
EVENT ID 32 R-x\EV\ID-n
*RO-CH10*
IDENTIFY THE NAME OF THE
INDIVIDUAL RECORDING EVENT
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
256 R-x\EV\D-n
*RO-CH10*
IDENTIFY THE DESCRIPTION OF THE
EVENT
9-27

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
EVENT TYPE 1 R-x\EV\T-n
*RO-CH10*
INDICATE THE RECORDING EVENT TYPE
EXTERNAL E
MEASUREMENT DISCRETE D
MEASUREMENT LIMIT L
RECORDER R
OTHER O
EVENT PRIORITY 1 R-x\EV\P-n
*RO-CH10*
INDICATE THE RECORDING EVENT
PRIORITY
PRIORITY 1 1
PRIORITY 2 2
PRIORITY 3 3
PRIORITY 4 4
PRIORITY 5 5
EVENT CAPTURE
MODE
1 R-x\EV\CM-n
*RO-CH10*
INDICATE THE RECORDING EVENT
CAPTURE MODE
MODE 1 1
MODE 2 2
MODE 3 3
MODE 4 4
MODE 5 5
MODE 6 6
EVENT INITIAL
CAPTURE
1 R-x\EV\IC-n
*RO-CH10*
INDICATES IF INITIAL CAPTURE OF
EVENT IS ENABLED.
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
RECORDING EVENT
LIMIT COUNT
8 R-x\EV\LC-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE LIMIT COUNT FOR THE
INDIVIDUAL RECORDING EVENT
EVENT TRIGGER
MEASUREMENT
SOURCE
32 R-x\EV\MS-n
*RO-CH10*
IDENTIFY THE DATA LINK NAME
CONSISTENT WITH THE MUX/MOD
GROUP WHICH CONTAINS THE EVENT
TRIGGER MEASUREMENT IF EVENT TYPE
IS D OR L
EVENT TRIGGER
MEASUREMENT
NAME
32 R-x\EV\MN-n
*RO-CH10*
IDENTIFY THE EVENT TRIGGER
MEASURAND NAME IF THE EVENT TYPE
IS D OR L
9-28

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
RECORDING INDEX
RECORDING INDEX
ENABLED
1 R-x\IDX\E
*RO-CH10*
INDICATES IF INDEX IS ENABLED.
INDEX MUST BE ENABLED TO
GENERATE INDEX PACKETS.
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
RECORDING INDEX
TYPE
1 R-x\IDX\IT
*RO-CH10*
TIME T
COUNT C
TIME INDEX TYPE ATTRIBUTE
INDEX TIME VALUE 8 R-\IDX\ITV
*RO-CH10*
IDENTIFY THE NUMBER OF
MICROSECONDS FOR EACH INDEX
ENTRY GENERATION
COUNT INDEX TYPE ATTRIBUTE
INDEX COUNT
VALUE
4 R-\IDX\ICV
*RO-CH10*
IDENTIFY THE NUMBER OF PACKETS
FOR EACH INDEX ENTRY GENERATION
MIL-STD-1553 RECORDER CONTROL
MESSAGE MONITOR
RECORD CONTROL
ENABLED
1 R-x\MRC\E
INDICATES IF MESSAGE MONITOR
RECORD CONTROL IS ENABLED.
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
CHANNEL ID
NUMBER
5 R-x\MRC\ID
SPECIFY THE MIL-STD-1553 CHANNEL ID
THAT CONTAINS THE RECORD CONTROL
MESSAGE
MESSAGE RECORD
CONTROL TYPE
2 R-x\MRC\RCT
SPECIFY THE MIL-STD-1553 MESSAGE
MONITOR RECORD CONTROL TYPE
0 = STOP-START
1 = PAUSE-RESUME
STOP-PAUSE
COMMAND WORD
4 R-x\MRC\SPM
SPECIFY THE COMMAND WORD OF THE
MIL-STD-1553 MESSAGE TO BE USED FOR
STOP-PAUSE IN HEXADECIMAL FORMAT
9-29

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
START-RESUME
COMMAND WORD
4 R-x\MRC\SRM
SPECIFY THE COMMAND WORD OF THE
MIL-STD-1553 MESSAGE TO BE USED FOR
START-RESUME IN HEXADECIMAL
FORMAT
DATA
NOTE: Define information contained on each track of the tape or each channel of the storage media.
5 TRACK NUMBER/
CHANNEL ID
R-x\TK1-n
*R-CH10*
SPECIFY THE TRACK NUMBER OR
THE CHANNEL ID THAT CONTAINS
THE DATA TO BE SPECIFIED.
RECORDING
TECHNIQUE
6 R-x\TK2-n SPECIFY THE RECORDING TECHNIQUE
USED FOR THIS TRACK:
FM/FM - FM/FM
HDDR - HDDR
PRE-DETECTION - PRE-D
DIRECT - DIRECT
FM-WIDE BAND GRP I - FMWBI
FM-WIDE BAND GRP II - FMWBII
FM-INTERMEDIATE BAND - FM-IM
FM-NARROW BAND - FM-NB
DOUBLE DENSITY - DOUDEN
ROTARY (SINGLE TRACK) - RO-K
ROTARY (MULTIPLEXED) - RO-MUX
SOLID STATE - SSR
OTHER - OTHER
DATA SOURCE ID 32 R-x\DSI-n
*R-CH10*
SPECIFY THE DATA SOURCE
IDENTIFICATION. FOR A SITE RECORDED
MULTIPLEXED TRACK, PROVIDE A DATA
SOURCE IDENTIFICATION.
DATA DIRECTION 3 R-x\TK3-n FORWARD - FWD
REVERSE - REV
RECORDER
PHYSICAL
CHANNEL NUMBER
2

R-x\TK4-n
*R-CH10*
SPECIFY THE RECORDER PHYSICAL
CHANNEL FOR THE CHANNEL ID (TK1).
9-30

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
CHANNEL ENABLE 1 R-x\CHE-n
*R-CH10*
INDICATES IF SOURCE IS ENABLED.
SOURCE MUST BE ENABLED TO
GENERATE DATA PACKETS.
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
CHANNEL DATA
TYPE
6 R-x\CDT-n
*R-CH10*
SPECIFY THE TYPE OF SOURCE IF STO
WAS SPECIFIED IN G GROUP DATA
SOURCE TYPE:
PCM INPUT PCMIN
ANALOG INPUT ANAIN
DISCRETE INPUT DISIN
IRIG TIME INPUT TIMEIN
VIDEO INPUT VIDIN,
UART INPUT UARTIN
1553 INPUT 1553IN,
ARINC 429 INPUT 429IN
MESSAGE DATA INPUT MSGIN
IMAGE DATA INPUT IMGIN
IEEE-1394 INPUT 1394IN
PARALLEL INPUT PARIN
ETHERNET INPUT ETHIN
CHANNEL DATA
LINK
NAME
32

R-x\CDLN-n
*R-CH10*
GROUP FOR THE CHANNEL.
DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
PCM DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
PCM DATA TYPE
FORMAT
1 R-x\PDTF-n
*RO-CH10*
PCM DATA TYPE FORMAT:
FORMAT 0 (RESERVED) 0
FORMAT 1 (IRIG 106 CH 4/8) 1
DATA PACKING
OPTION
3 R-x\PDP-n
*RO-CH10*
HOW DATA IS PLACED IN THE PACKETS:
UNPACKED UN
PACKED WITH FRAME SYNC PFS
THROUGHPUT MODE TM
INPUT CLOCK EDGE

3

R-x\ICE-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFIES THE INPUT CLOCK EDGE
RELATIVE TO THE DATA IN DEGREES:
0 DEGREES 0
180 DEGREES 180
9-31

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
INPUT SIGNAL TYPE 5 R-x\IST-n
*RO-CH10*
TYPE OF INPUT SIGNAL:
SINGLE ENDED SE
DIFFERENTIAL DIFF
RS-422 STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL
RS422
SINGLE ENDED WITH TTL TTL
INPUT THRESHOLD 5 R-x\ITH-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFIES THE INPUT THRESHOLD
LEVEL FOR SELECTABLE ELECTRICAL
INTERFACE. THE VALUE IS THE
THRESHOLD LEVEL IN VOLTS.
INPUT
TERMINATION
6 R-x\ITM-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFIES THE INPUT TERMINATION IF
SELECTABLE: LOW-Z or HIGH-Z.
PCM VIDEO TYPE
FORMAT
5 R-x\PTF-n
*RO-CH10*
COMPRESSION TECHNIQUE FOR VIDEO
RECORDED AS STANDARD CHAPTER 4
PCM. THE COMPRESSED DATA IS
ENCAPSULATED IN ISO STANDARD
TRANSPORT STREAM (TS) FRAMES. IF
TYPE FORMAT IS OTHER, THEN A
VENDOR SPEC IS REQUIRED TO
IDENTIFY THE DATA COMPRESSION
TECHNIQUE. SPECIFY NONE IF DATA IS
NOT VIDEO DATA.
NONE
MPEG1
MPEG2
H261
WAVE
OTHER
PCM RECORDER
REPRODUCER
MINOR FRAME
FILTERING
ENABLED
1 R-x\MFF\E-n
*RO-CH10*
INDICATES IF RECORDER REPRODUCER
MINOR FRAME FILTERING IS ENABLED
FOR THE PCM CHANNEL:
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
(NOT APPLICABLE FOR THROUGHPUT
MODE PCM CHANNELS)
PCM POST PROCESS
OVERWRITE AND
FILTERING
ENABLED
1 R-x\POF\E-n
*RO-CH10*
INDICATES IF POST PROCESS
OVERWRITE AND FILTERING IS
ENABLED FOR THE PCM CHANNEL:
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
9-32

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
PCM POST PROCESS
OVERWRITE AND
FILTERING TYPE
2 R-x\POF\T-n
*RO-CH10*
INDICATES THE TYPE OF POST PROCESS
OVERWRITE AND FILTERING FOR THE
PCM CHANNEL:
MF = MINOR FRAME
SM = SELECTED MEASUREMENT
B = BOTH
MIL-STD-1553 BUS DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
MIL-STD-1553 BUS
DATA TYPE
FORMAT
1

R-x\BTF-n
*RO-CH10*
MIL-STD-1553 BUS DATA TYPE FORMAT:
FORMAT 1 (MIL-STD-1553B DATA) 1
FORMAT 2 (16PP194 BUS) 2
MIL-STD-1553
RECORDER
REPRODUCER
FILTERING
ENABLED
1
R-x\MRF\E-n
*RO-CH10*
INDICATES IF RECORDER REPRODUCER
FILTERING IS ENABLED FOR THE MIL-
STD-1553 CHANNEL:
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
MIL-STD-1553 POST
PROCESS
OVERWRITE AND
FILTERING
ENABLED
1
R-x\MOF\T-n
*RO-CH10*
INDICATES IF POST PROCESS
OVERWRITE AND FILTERING IS
ENABLED FOR THE MIL-STD-1553
CHANNEL:
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
MIL-STD-1553
MESSAGE
FILTERING
DEFINITION TYPE
2
R-x\MFD\
FDT-n
SPECIFY THE MESSAGE FILTERING
DEFINITION TYPE.
IN = INCLUSIVE FILTERING
EX = EXCLUSIVE FILTERING
NUMBER OF
MESSAGE
FILTERING
DEFINITIONS
2 R-x\MFD\N-n
SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF MESSAGE
FILTERING DEFINITIONS.
MESSAGE TYPE 4
R-x\MFD\
MT-n-m
SPECIFY THE MESSAGE TYPE
RT/RT RTRT
RT/BC RTBC
BC/RT BCRT
MODE CODE MC
9-33

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
REMOTE TERMINAL
ADDRESS
5
R-x\MFD\
TRA-n-m
SPECIFY THE FIVE BIT REMOTE
TERMINAL ADDRESS FOR THIS
MESSAGE. USE X TO INDICATE A
DONT CARE VALUE.
TRANSMIT/
RECEIVE MODE
1
R-x\MFD\
TRM-n-m
INDICATE IF THIS COMMAND WORD IS A
TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE COMMAND. FOR
RT/RT, SPECIFY TRANSMIT.
TRANSMIT 1
RECEIVE 0
SUBTERMINAL
ADDRESS
5
R-x\MFD\
STA-n-m
SPECIFY THE FIVE BIT SUBTERMINAL
ADDRESS FOR THIS MESSAGE. USE X
TO INDICATE A DONT CARE VALUE.
DATA WORD
COUNT/MODE CODE
5
R-x\MFD\
DWC-n-m
ENTER THE NUMBER OF DATA WORDS
AS A BINARY STRING, USING X TO
INDICATE A DONT CARE VALUE. IF
THE SUBTERMINAL ADDRESS INDICATES
A MODE CODE, ENTER THE MODE CODE
VALUE AS A BINARY STRING.
RT/RT REMOTE
TERMINAL
ADDRESS
5
R-x\MFD\
RTRA-n-m
TERMINAL ADDRESS FOR THIS RT/RT
MESSAGE.
RT/RT
SUBTERMINAL
ADDRESS
5
R-x\MFD\
RSTA-n-m
ADDRESS FOR THIS RT/RT MESSAGE. USE
X TO INDICATE A DONT CARE
VALUE.
RT/RT DATA WORD
COUNT
5
R-x\MFD\
RDWC-n-m
ENTER THE NUMBER OF DATA WORDS
AS A BINARY STRING, USING X TO
INDICATE A DONT CARE VALUE.
EXCLUDE STATUS AND TIME WORDS
(AN RT/RT MESSAGE CANNOT CONTAIN
A MODE CODE).
ANALOG DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
ANALOG DATA
TYPE FORMAT
1

R-x\ATF-n
*RO-CH10*
ANALOG DATA TYPE FORMAT:
FORMAT 1 (ANALOG DATA) 1
9-34

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
NUMBER OF
ANALOG
CHANNELS/PKT
3 R-x\ACH\N-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF ANALOG
CHANNELS PER PACKET.
DATA PACKING
OPTION
3 R-x\ADP-n
*RO-CH10*
HOW DATA IS PLACED IN THE PACKETS:
PACKED YES
UNPACKED NO
SAMPLE RATE 7 R-x\ASR-n
*RO-CH10*
SAMPLE RATE OF THE FASTEST
CHANNEL (S) IN SAMPLES PER SECOND
MEASUREMENT
NAME
32 R-x\AMN-n-m
*RO-CH10*
IDENTIFY THE MEASUREMENT NAME
GROUP FOR AN ANALOG CHANNEL.
DATA LENGTH 2 R-x\ADL-n-m
*RO-CH10*
NUMBER OF BITS PER DATA WORD
BIT MASK 64 R-x\AMSK-n-m
*RO-CH10*
BINARY STRING OF 1s AND 0s TO
IDENTIFY THE BITS IN A WORD
LOCATION THAT ARE ASSIGNED TO THIS
MEASUREMENT. IF THE FULL
WORD IS USED FOR THIS
MEASUREMENT, ENTER - FW.
LEFT-MOST BIT CORRESPONDS TO FIRST
BIT TRANSMITTED
MEASUREMENT
TRANSFER ORDER
1 R-x\AMTO-n-m
*RO-CH10*
MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT FIRST - M
LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT FIRST - L
DEFAULT - D
SAMPLE FACTOR

2 R-x\ASF-n-m
*RO-CH10*
1/(2^N) TIMES THE FASTEST SAMPLE
RATE (DEFINED ABOVE) GIVES THE
SAMPLE RATE FOR THIS CHANNEL.
SPECIFY THE VALUE N IN THIS FIELD.
SAMPLE FILTER 3db
BANDWIDTH
9 R-x\ASBW-n-m
*RO-CH10*
SAMPLE FILTER IN UNITS OF HZ
(000,000,000)
AC/DC COUPLING 1 R-x\ACP-n-m
*RO-CH10*
ANALOG SIGNAL COUPLING
AC A
DC D
9-35

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
RECORDER INPUT
IMPEDANCE
6 R-x\AII-n-m
*RO-CH10*
ANALOG SIGNAL INPUT IMPEDANCE TO
THE RECORDER. UNITS OF OHMS
(000,000)
INPUT CHANNEL
GAIN
6 R-x\AGI-n-m
*RO-CH10*
SIGNAL GAIN OF ANALOG SIGNAL. MILLI
UNITS (10X = 010000)
INPUT FULL SCALE
RANGE
6 R-x\AFSI-n-m
*RO-CH10*
FULL SCALE RANGE OF INPUT SIGNAL.
UNITS OF MILLI-VOLTS
(20Vpp = 020000)
(Vpp = 2XVp)
INPUT OFFSET
VOLTAGE
6 R-x\AOVI-n-m
*RO-CH10*
OFFSET VOLTAGE OF INPUT SIGNAL.
UNITS OF MILLI-VOLTS (10V=010000)
INPUT TYPE 1 R-x\AIT-n-m
*RO-CH10*
TYPE OF INPUT SIGNAL.
SINGLE ENDED S
DIFFERENTIAL D
AUDIO 1 R-x\AV-n-m
*RO-CH10*
INDICATE IF INPUT SIGNAL IS AUDIO.
AUDIO PRESENT Y
AUDIO NOT PRESENT N
AUDIO FORMAT

4

R-x\AVF-n-m
*RO-CH10*
FORMAT OF AUDIO IF PRESENT.
RAW RAW
WAV WAV
LPCM LPCM
AC3 AC3
PreD PRED
PstD PSTD
OTHER O
DISCRETE DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
DISCRETE DATA
TYPE FORMAT
1

R-x\DTF-n
*RO-CH10*
DISCRETE DATA TYPE FORMAT:
FORMAT 1 (DISCRETE DATA) 1
DISCRETE MODE 4 R-x\DMOD-n
*RO-CH10*
INDICATE THE MODE WHEREBY
DISCRETE EVENTS ARE PLACED IN THE
PACKETS:
EV EVENT MODE
SAMP SAMPLE MODE
9-36

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
SAMPLE RATE 7 R-x\DSR-n
*RO-CH10*
SAMPLE RATE IN SAMPLES PER SECOND
NUMBER OF
DISCRETE
MEASUREMENTS
3 R-x\NDM\N-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF DISCRETE
MEASUREMENTS
MEASUREMENT
NAME
32 R-x\DMN-n-m
*RO-CH10*
IDENTIFY THE MEASUREMENT NAME
FOR ONE OR MORE DISCRETE BITS
BIT MASK 64 R-x\DMSK-n-m
*RO-CH10*
LOCATION THAT ARE ASSIGNED TO THIS
MEASUREMENT. IF THE FULL WORD IS
USED FOR THIS MEASUREMENT,
ENTER FW. LEFT-MOST BIT
CORRESPONDS TO FIRST BIT
TRANSMITTED
MEASUREMENT
TRANSFER ORDER
1 R-x\DMTO-n-m
*RO-CH10*
MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT FIRST M
DEFAULT - D
ARINC 429 BUS DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
ARINC 429 BUS
DATA TYPE
FORMAT
1

R-x\ABTF-n
*RO-CH10*
ARINC 429 BUS DATA TYPE FORMAT:
FORMAT 0 (ARINC 429 DATA) 0
NUMBER OF ARINC
429 SUB-CHANNELS
5 R-x\NAS\N-n
*RO-CH10*
NUMBER OF ARINC 429 BUS SUB-
CHANNELS
ARINC 429 SUB-
CHANNEL NUMBER
5 R-x\ASN-n-m
*RO-CH10*
ARINC 429 BUS SUB-CHANNEL ID
ARINC 429 SUB-
CHANNEL NAME
32 R-x\ANM-n-m
*RO-CH10*
ARINC 429 BUS SUB-CHANNEL NAME
VIDEO DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
VIDEO DATA TYPE
FORMAT
1 R-x\VTF-n
*RO-CH10*
VIDEO DATA TYPE FORMAT:
FORMAT 0 (MPEG-2/H.264) 0
FORMAT 1 (MPEG-2 ISO 13818) 1
FORMAT 2 (MPEG-4 ISO 14496) 2
9-37

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
MPEG-2 CHANNEL
XON2 FORMAT
1 R-x\VXF-n
*RO-CH10*
TYPE OF VIDEO CARRIED FOR XON2
FORMATS (MPEG-2 VIDEO CHANNELS)
2ON2 (MPEG-2) 0
264ON2 (H.264) 1
VIDEO SIGNAL TYPE 1 R-x\VST-n
*RO-CH10*
THE VIDEO SIGNAL INPUT TYPE
AUTO DETECT 0
COMPOSITE 1
YUV 2
S-VIDEO 3
DVI 4
RGB 5
SDI 6
VGA 7
VIDEO SIGNAL
FORMAT TYPE
2 R-x\VSF-n
*RO-CH10*
THE VIDEO SIGNAL INPUT TYPE
AUTO DETECT 0
NTSC 1
PAL 2
ATSC 3
DVB 4
ISDB 5
SECAM 6
VIDEO CONSTANT
BIT RATE
10 R-x\CBR-n
*RO-CH10*
CONTAINS AGGREGATE STREAM BIT
RATE IN BITS PER SECOND. SCIENTIFIC
NOTATION MAY BE USED.
VIDEO VARIABLE
PEAK BIT RATE
10

R-x\VBR-n
*RO-CH10*
CONTAINS PEAK STREAM BIT RATE IN
BITS PER SECOND. SCIENTIFIC
VIDEO ENCODING
DELAY
8 R-x\VED-n
*RO-CH10*
DELAY INTRODUCED BY VIDEO
ENCODING HARDWARE IN
MILLISECONDS
OVERLAY ENABLED 1 R-x\VCO\OE-n
INDICATES IF OVERLAY IS ENABLED.
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
OVERLAY X
POSITION
5 R-x\VCO\X-n
SPECIFY THE X PIXEL POSITION OF THE
OVERLAY IN THE VIDEO CHANNEL.
ZERO INDICATES THE LEFTMOST
POSITION OF THE VIDEO IMAGE.
9-38

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
OVERLAY Y
POSITION
5 R-x\VCO\Y-n
SPECIFY THE Y LINE POSITION OF THE
OVERLAY IN THE VIDEO CHANNEL.
ZERO INDICATES THE UPPERMOST
POSITION OF THE VIDEO IMAGE.
OVERLAY EVENT
TOGGLE ENABLED
1 R-x\VCO\OET-n
INDICATES IF OVERLAY EVENT TOGGLE
IS ENABLED.
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
OVERLAY FORMAT 1 R-x\VCO\OLF-n
INDICATES FORMAT OF THE TIME
OVERLAY.
DT DAY AND TIME (DDD:HH:MM:SS)
TO TIME ONLY (HH:MM:SS)
TM TIME AND MILLISECONDS
(HH:MM:SS:SSS)
DTM DAY, TIME AND MILLISECONDS
(DDD:HH:MM:SS:SSS)
OVERLAY
BACKGROUND
3 R-x\VCO\OBG-n
INDICATES BACKGROUND OF THE TIME
OVERLAY.
BOT - BLACK ON TRANSPARENT
WOT - WHITE ON TRANSPARENT
BOW - BLACK ON WHITE
WOB - WHITE ON BLACK
ANALOG AUDIO
CHANNEL INPUT
LEFT
5 R-x\ASI\ASL-n
INDICATES THE ANALOG CHANNEL
SOURCE OF THE LEFT AUDIO CHANNEL
ID FOR THE VIDEO CHANNEL.
ANALOG AUDIO
CHANNEL INPUT
RIGHT
5 R-x\ASI\ASR-n
INDICATES THE ANALOG CHANNEL
SOURCE OF THE RIGHT AUDIO CHANNEL
ID FOR THE VIDEO CHANNEL.
VIDEO DATA
ALIGNMENT
1
R-x\VDA-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFIES THE DATA ALIGNMENT OF
THE VIDEO DATA WITHIN THE PACKET.
LITTLE ENDIAN - L
BIG ENDIAN - B
TIME DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
TIME DATA TYPE
FORMAT
1

R-x\TTF-n
*R-CH10*
TIME DATA TYPE FORMAT:
FORMAT 1 (TIME DATA) 1
9-39

MAX
FIELD PARAMETER
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
TIME FORMAT 1 R-x\TFMT-n
*R-CH10*

INDICATE THE FORMAT FOR THE TIME:
IRIG-A A
IRIG-B B
IRIG-G G
INTERNAL I
NATIVE GPS TIME N
UTC TIME FROM GPS U
NONE X
TIME SOURCE 1 R-x\TSRC-n
*R-CH10*
INDICATE THE TIME SOURCE:
INTERNAL I
EXTERNAL E
INTERNAL FROM RMM R
NONE X
IMAGE DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
IMAGE DATA TYPE
FORMAT
1

R-x\ITF-n
*RO-CH10*
IMAGE DATA TYPE FORMAT:
FORMAT 0 (IMAGE) 0
FORMAT 1 (STILL IMAGERY) 1
STILL IMAGE TYPE 2 R-x\SIT-n
*RO-CH10*
TYPE OF STILL IMAGERY FORMAT
NITF 0
JPEG 1
JPEG2 2
PNG 3
UART DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
UART DATA TYPE
FORMAT
1 R-x\UTF-n
*RO-CH10*
UART DATA TYPE FORMAT:
FORMAT 0 0
FORMAT 1 1
NUMBER OF UART
SUB-CHANNELS
5 R-x\NUS\N-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF UART SUB-
CHANNELS INCLUDED WITHIN THIS
CHANNEL.
UART SUB-
CHANNEL NUMBER
5 R-x\USCN-n-m
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE UART SUB-CHANNEL
NUMBER.
UART SUB-
CHANNEL NAME
32 R-x\UCNM-n-m
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE UART SUB-CHANNEL
NAME.
9-40

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
UART SUB-
CHANNEL BAUD
RATE
12 R-x\UCR-n-m
*R0-CH10*
BAUD RATE IN BITS PER SECOND
(00000000.000)
UART SUB-
CHANNEL BITS
PER WORD
1 R-x\UCB-n-m
*R0-CH10*
BITS PER WORD (7, 8 or 9)
UART SUB-
CHANNEL PARITY
1 R-x\UCP-n-m
*R0-CH10*
PARITY.
O-ODD E-EVEN N-NONE
UART SUB-
CHANNEL STOP
BIT
1 R-x\UCS-n-m
*R0-CH10*
STOP BIT SIZE.
0 1.0
1 1.5
2 2.0
UART SUB-
CHANNEL
INTERFACE
1 R-x\UCIN-n-m UART INTERFACE
0 OTHER 3 RS-485
1 RS-232 4 - TTL
2 RS-422
UART SUB-
CHANNEL BLOCK
SIZE
6 R-x\UCBS-n-m BLOCK (FRAME) SIZE IN WORDS
XXX,XXX WORDS
UART SUB-
CHANNEL SYNC
WORD LENGTH
1 R-x\UCSL-n-m SYNC WORD LENGTH IN WORDS
(0 9 WORDS MAXIMUM)
UART SUB-
CHANNEL BLOCK
SYNC VALUE
81 R-x\UCSV-n-m BLOCK SYNC WORD VALUE IN
BINARY. SPECIFY ALL BITS.

UART SUB-
CHANNEL BLOCK
RATE
12 R-x\UCBR-n-m BLOCK RATE IN HZ
(00000000.000)
MESSAGE DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
MESSAGE DATA
TYPE FORMAT
1 R-x\MTF-n
*RO-CH10*
MESSAGE DATA TYPE FORMAT:
FORMAT 0 (MESSAGE DATA) 0
9-41

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
NUMBER OF
MESSAGE SUB-
CHANNELS
5 R-x\NMS\N-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF MESSAGE SUB-
CHANNELS INCLUDED WITHIN THIS
CHANNEL
MESSAGE SUB-
CHANNEL NUMBER
5 R-x\MSCN-n-m
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE MESSAGE SUB-CHANNEL
NUMBER.
MESSAGE SUB-
CHANNEL NAME
32 R-x\MCNM-n-m
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE MESSAGE SUB-CHANNEL
NAME.
IEEE-1394 DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
IEEE-1394 DATA
TYPE FORMAT
1 R-x\IETF-n
*RO-CH10*
IEEE-1394 DATA TYPE FORMAT:
FORMAT 0 (IEEE-1394 TRANS) 0
FORMAT 1 (IEEE-1394 PHY) 1
PARALLEL DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
PARALLEL DATA
TYPE FORMAT
1 R-x\PLTF-n
*RO-CH10*
PARALLEL DATA TYPE FORMAT:
FORMAT 0 (PARALLEL) 0
ETHERNET DATA TYPE ATTRIBUTES
ETHERNET DATA
TYPE FORMAT
1 R-x\ENTF-n
*RO-CH10*
ETHERNET DATA TYPE FORMAT:
FORMAT 0 (ETHERNET DATA) 0
NUMBER OF
ETHERNET
NETWORKS
5 R-x\NNET\N-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF ETHERNET
NETWORKS INCLUDED WITHIN THIS
CHANNEL
ETHERNET
NETWORK NUMBER
5 R-x\ENBR-n-m
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE ETHERNET NETWORK
NUMBER
ETHERNET
NETWORK NAME
32 R-x\ENAM-n-m
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE ETHERNET NETWORK
NAME
REFERENCE TRACK
NUMBER OF
REFERENCE
TRACKS
1 R-x\RT\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF REFERENCE
TRACKS
TRACK
NUMBER
2 R-x\RT1-n STATE THE TRACK LOCATION OF THE
REFERENCE SIGNAL
9-42

MAX
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
REFERENCE
FREQUENCY
6 R-x\RT2-n
FREQUENCY OF REFERENCE SIGNAL, IN
kHz
NOTE: THERE WILL BE ONE TAPE/STORAGE SOURCE ATTRIBUTES GROUP FOR EACH TAPE
OR STORAGE SOURCE.
COMMENTS
COMMENTS 3200 R-x\COM
*RO-CH10*
PROVIDE THE ADDITIONAL
OTHER INFORMATION DESIRED

9.5.5 Multiplex/Modulation (Mux/Mod) Attributes (M). The composite baseband waveform is
received from the receiver or tape reproducer electronics and is passed to the demultiplexer/
demodulator for further processing. Figure 9-5 summarizes the information that is required to
continue processing the data. The composite baseband waveform may consist of any number of
signals, which are modulated directly onto the RF carrier including a baseband data signal, and
one or more subcarriers.

The baseband data signal may be PCM, pulse amplitude modulation (PAM), or analog
data. The PCM and PAM data streams must be defined in terms of a data link name. This data
link name is unique for each system that contains different data, has a different format, or has a
different data rate. The analog measurand is typically converted into engineering units
appropriate for the measurand. The measurement name provides the connection to the Data
Conversion Attributes Group (C).

Subcarriers, both standard and nonstandard, may be part of the baseband composite
waveform. These, in turn, may be modulated with PCM, PAM, or analog data. As with the
baseband data signal, these data channels must be defined. Table 9-4 specifies the required
information for the data signal attributes.

9-43

CODE
Multiplex/Modulation Attributes Group (M)
NAME
REFERENCE
PAGE
DATA
SOURCE ID

(M-x\ID) (9-45)

*COMPOSITE SIGNAL STRUCTURE

(9-45)

SIGNAL STRUCTURE TYPE

(M-x\BB1)

MODULATION SENSE

(M-x\BB2)

COMPOSITE LPF BANDWIDTH

(M-x\BB3)

*BASEBAND SIGNAL

(9-45)

BASEBAND SIGNAL TYPE

(M-x\BSG1)

*LOW PASS FILTER

BANDWIDTH

(M-x\BSF1)

TYPE

(M-x\BSF2)

*BASEBAND DATA LINK TYPE

(9-46)

*PCM OR PAM

OR DATA LINK NAME

(M-x\BB\DLN)

*ANALOG

MEASUREMENT NAME

(M-x\BB\MN)

*SUBCARRIERS

(9-46)

NUMBER OF SUBCARRIERS

(M-x\SCO\N)

*IRIG SUBCARRIERS

NUMBER OF SCOs

(M-x\SI\N)

SCO NUMBER

(M-x\SI1-n)

SCO #n DATA TYPE

(M-x\SI2-n)

MODULATION SENSE

(M-x\SI3-n)

*LOW PASS FILTER

(9-46)

BANDWIDTH

(M-x\SIF1-n)

TYPE

(M-x\SIF2-n)

*DATA LINK TYPE

(9-47)

*PCM OR PAM

OR DATA LINK NAME

(M-x\SI\DLN-n)

*ANALOG

MEASUREMENT
NAME

(M-x\SI\MN-n)

OTHER

(M-x\SO) (9-47)

REFERENCE CHANNEL

(M-x\RC)

*COMMENTS

COMMENTS

(M-x\COM) (9-47)
*Heading Only No Data Entry
Figure 9-5. Multiplex/Modulation Attributes Group (M).
9-44

TABLE 9-4. MULTIPLEX/MODULATION GROUP (M)
MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
DATA SOURCE
ID
32 M-x\ID DATA SOURCE IDENTIFICATION
COMPOSITE SIGNAL STRUCTURE
SIGNAL 7
STRUCTURE
TYPE
M-x\BB1 SPECIFY THE COMPOSITE BASEBAND
SIGNAL STRUCTURE:
PCM HYBRID:
PAM ANA/SCO
ANALOG PAM/SCO
SCOs PCM/SCO
OTHER
MODULATION
SENSE
3 M-x\BB2 SPECIFY THE MODULATION SENSE:
POS INDICATES THAT AN INCREASING
VOLTAGE RESULTS IN AN
INCREASE IN FREQUENCY.
NEG INDICATES THAT A DECREASING
VOLTAGE RESULTS IN AN
INCREASE IN FREQUENCY
COMPOSITE LPF
BANDWIDTH
6 M-x\BB3 GIVE THE LOW PASS BANDWIDTH OF
THE COMPOSITE WAVEFORM (3 dB
CUTOFF FREQUENCY), IN kHz.
BASEBAND SIGNAL
BASEBAND 3
SIGNAL TYPE
M-x\BSG1 TYPE OF BASEBAND DATA:
PCM ANA (ANALOG)
PAM OTH (OTHER)
NON (NONE)
LOW PASS FILTER
BANDWIDTH 6 M-x\BSF1 SPECIFY LOW PASS FILTER BANDWIDTH
(3 dB CUTOFF FREQUENCY), IN kHz.
TYPE 2 M-x\BSF2 SPECIFY THE FILTER TYPE:
CONSTANT DELAY - CD
OTHER - OT, DEFINE IN THE
COMMENTS RECORD.
9-45

Table 9-4 (Continued). Multiplex/Modulation Group (M) Page 2 x 3
MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
BASEBAND DATA LINK TYPE
PCM OR PAM
DATA LINK 32
NAME
M-
x\BB\DLN
SPECIFY THE DATA LINK NAME FOR
PCM OR PAM DATA FORMAT.
ANALOG
MEASUREMENT 32
NAME
M-x\BB\MN GIVE THE MEASURAND NAME.
SUBCARRIERS
NUMBER OF 2
SUBCARRIERS
M-x\SCO\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF SUBCARRIERS
ON THIS DATA LINK.
IRIG SUBCARRIERS
NUMBER OF
SCOs
2 M-x\SI\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF IRIG
SUBCARRIERS.
SCO NUMBER 5 M-x\SI1-n GIVE THE IRIG CHANNEL NUMBER FOR
THE SUBCARRIER.
SCO #n
DATA TYPE
3 M-x\SI2-n SPECIFY THE TYPE OF DATA ON THE
SUBCARRIER:
PCM - PCM PAM - PAM
ANALOG - ANA OTHER - OTH
MODULATION
SENSE
3 M-x\SI3-n SPECIFY THE MODULATION SENSE:
POS - INDICATES THAT AN
INCREASING VOLTAGE
RESULTS IN AN INCREASE
IN FREQUENCY
NEG - INDICATES THAT A
DECREASING VOLTAGE
RESULTS IN AN INCREASE
IN FREQUENCY.
9-46

Table 9-4 (Continued). Multiplex/Modulation Group (M) Page 3 x 3
MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
LOW PASS FILTER
BANDWIDTH 6 M-x\SIF1-n SPECIFY THE LOW PASS FILTER CUTOFF
FREQUENCY (3 dB), IN kHz.
TYPE 2 M-x\SIF2-n SPECIFY THE FILTER TYPE:
CONSTANT DELAY - CD
OTHER - OT, DEFINE IN THE
COMMENTS RECORD.
DATA LINK TYPE
PCM OR PAM
DATA LINK 32
NAME
M-x\SI\DLN-n SPECIFY THE DATA LINK NAME FOR PCM
AND PAM DATA FORMATS.
ANALOG
MEASUREMENT 32
NAME
M-x\SI\MN-n GIVE THE MEASURAND NAME.

NOTE: REPEAT THE ABOVE FOR EACH IRIG SUBCARRIER ON THIS CARRIER.
OTHER 1 M-x\SO ARE THERE NONSTANDARD
SUBCARRIERS? YES - Y NO -N
DEFINE IN THE COMMENTS RECORD.
REFERENCE
CHANNEL
6 M-x\RC FREQUENCY OF REFERENCE CHANNEL IN
kHz, IF APPLICABLE
COMMENTS
COMMENTS 3200 M-x\COM PROVIDE THE ADDITIONAL
9-47

9.5.6 Digital Data Attributes. The digital data attributes are separated into four groups
containing PCM-related attribute information. The PCM Format Attributes Group (P) is
described in subparagraph 9.5.6.1 below. The PCM Measurement Description Attributes,
contained in (D), are described in subparagraph 9.5.6.2. Subparagraph 9.5.6.3 depicts the MIL-
STD-1553 or ARINC 429 Bus Data Attributes (B). Subparagraph 9.5.6.4 describes the Message
Data Attributes (S).

9.5.6.1 PCM Format Attributes (P). The PCM Format Attributes Group contains the
information required to decommutate the PCM data stream. Operations of both class I and II are
included. Limited information is incorporated for class II operations. Figure 9-6 presents the
flow and summary of the information required. In general, only standard methods of
synchronization have been included except for cases where considerable application is already in
place. Inclusion should not be taken to mean that the nonstandard approaches are better or
desired. Table 9-5 contains the PCM Format Attributes. The group defines and specifies the
frame format and the information necessary to set up the PCM decommutation. Refer to
Chapter 4 for the definition of terms (such as major and minor frames and subframes) and word
numbering conventions.
9-48

CODE REFERENCE
PCM Format Attributes Group (P)
NAME PAGE

DATA LINK NAME (P-d\DLN) (9-52)
*INPUT DATA (9-52)
PCM CODE (P-d\D1)
BIT RATE (P-d\D2)
ENCRYPTED (P-d\D3)
POLARITY (P-d\D4)
AUTO-POLARITY CORRECTION (P-d\D5)
DATA DIRECTION (P-d\D6)
DATA RANDOMIZED (P-d\D7)
RANDOMIZER LENGTH (P-d\D8)
*FORMAT (9-53)
TYPE FORMAT (P-d\TF)
COMMON WORD LENGTH (P-d\F1)
WORD TRANSFER ORDER (P-d\F2)
PARITY (P-d\F3)
PARITY TRANSFER ORDER (P-d\F4)
*MINOR FRAME (9-53)

NUMBER OF MINOR FRAMES IN MAJOR
FRAME
(P-d\MF\N)
NUMBER OF WORDS IN A MINOR FRAME (P-d\MF1)
NUMBER OF BITS IN A MINOR FRAME (P-d\MF2)
SYNC TYPE (P-d\MF3)
*SYNCHRONIZATION PATTERN (9-54)
LENGTH (P-d\MF4)
PATTERN (P-d\MF5)
*SYNCHRONIZATION CRITERIA (9-54)
IN SYNC CRITERIA (P-d\SYNC1)
SYNC PATTERN CRITERIA (P-d\SYNC2)
*OUT OF SYNCHRONIZATION CRITERIA (9-54)
NUMBER OF DISAGREES (P-d\SYNC3)
SYNC PATTERN CRITERIA (P-d\SYNC4)
*MINOR FRAME FORMAT DEFINITION (9-55)
WORD NUMBER (P-d\MFW1-n)
NUMBER OF BITS IN WORD (P-d\MFW2-n)
*SUBFRAME SYNCHRONIZATION (9-55)
NUMBER OF SUBFRAME ID COUNTERS (P-d\ISF\N)
SUBFRAME ID COUNTER NAME (P-d\ISF1-n)
SUBFRAME SYNC TYPE (P-d\ISF2-n)
*ID COUNTER (9-55)
SUBFRAME ID COUNTER LOCATION (P-d\IDC1-n)
ID COUNTER WORD LENGTH (P-d\IDC2-n)

ID COUNTER MSB STARTING BIT
LOCATION
(P-d\IDC3-n) (9-56)

ID COUNTER LENGTH
(P-d\IDC4-n)

ID COUNTER TRANSFER ORDER
(P-d\IDC5-n)
Figure 9-6. PCM Format Attributes Group (P). (Page 1 of 3)
9-49

ID COUNTER INITIAL VALUE (P-d\IDC6-n)

INITIAL COUNT SUBFRAME NUMBER
(P-d\IDC7-n)

ID COUNTER END VALUE
(P-d\IDC8-n)

END COUNT SUBFRAME NUMBER
(P-d\IDC9-n)

COUNT DIRECTION
(P-d\IDC10-n)
* SUBFRAME DEFINITION (9-56)
NUMBER OF SUBFRAMES (P-d\SF\N-n)
SUBFRAME NAME (P-d\SF1-n-m)
SUPERCOM (P-d\SF2-n-m)
LOCATION DEFINITION (P-d\SF3-n-m)
SUBFRAME LOCATION (P-d\SF4-n-m-w)
INTERVAL (P-d\SF5-n-m)
SUBFRAME DEPTH (P-d\SF6-n-m)
* FILTERING
MINOR FRAME FILTERING DEFINITION TYPE (P-d\MFF\FDT)

NUMBER OF MINOR FRAME FILTERING
DEFINITIONS
(P-d\MFF\N)
FILTERED MINOR FRAME NUMBER
(P-d\MFF\MFN-
n)

*ASYNCHRONOUS EMBEDDED FORMAT (9-58)

NUMBER OF ASYNCHRONOUS EMBEDDED
FORMATS
(P-d\AEF\N)
DATA LINK NAME (P-d\AEF\DLN-n) (9-58)
SUPERCOM (P-d\AEF1-n) (9-58)
LOCATION DEFINITION (P-d\AEF2-n)
LOCATION (P-d\AEF3-n-w)
INTERVAL (P-d\AEF4-n) (9-59)
WORD LENGTH (P-d\AEF5-n-w)
MASK (P-d\AEF6-n-w)
*FORMAT CHANGE (9-59)
*FRAME FORMAT IDENTIFIER
LOCATION (P-d\FFI1)
MASK (P-d\FFI2)
*MEASUREMENT LIST CHANGE (9-60)
OR NUMBER OF MEASUREMENT LISTS (P-d\MLC\N)
FFI PATTERN (P-d\MLC1-n)
MEASUREMENT LIST NAME (P-d\MLC2-n)
*FORMAT STRUCTURE CHANGE (9-60)
NUMBER OF FORMATS (P-d\FSC\N)
FFI PATTERN (P-d\FSC1-n)
DATA LINK ID (P-d\FSC2-n)
*ALTERNATE TAG AND DATA (9-60)
NUMBER OF TAGS (P-d\ALT\N)
NUMBER OF BITS IN TAG (P-d\ALT1)
NUMBER OF BITS IN DATA WORD (P-d\ALT2)
FIRST TAG LOCATION (P-d\ALT3)
SEQUENCE (P-d\ALT4)
9-50

*ASYNCHRONOUS DATA MERGE FORMAT (9-61)

NUMBER OF ASYNCHRONOUS DATA MERGE
FORMATS
(P-d\ADM\N)

DATA MERGE NAME (P-d\ADM\DMN-n) (9-61)
SUPERCOM (P-d\ADM1-n)
LOCATION DEFINITION (P-d\ADM2-n)
LOCATION (P-d\ADM3-n-w)
INTERVAL (P-d\ADM4-n)
DATA LENGTH (P-d\ADM5-n)
MSB LOCATION (P-d\ADM6-n)
PARITY (P-d\ADM7-n)
*COMMENTS
COMMENTS (P-d\COM) (9-62)
9-51

TABLE 9-5. PCM FORMAT ATTRIBUTES GROUP (P)
MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
PARAMETER CODE NAME DEFINITION
DATA LINK
NAME
32 P-d\DLN
*RO-CH10*
GROUP.
INPUT DATA
PCM CODE 6 P-d\D1
*RO-CH10*
DEFINE THE DATA FORMAT CODE:
NRZ-L BIO-L RNRZ-L
NRZ-M BIO-M OTHER
NRZ-S BIO-S
BIT RATE 9 P-d\D2
*RO-CH10*
DATA RATE IN BITS PER SECOND.
SCIENTIFIC NOTATION MAY BE
USED.
ENCRYPTED 1 P-d\D3 DATA IS ENCRYPTED E
DATA IS UNENCRYPTED U
IF THE DATA IS ENCRYPTED,
PROVIDE DETAILS IN COMMENTS
RECORD.
POLARITY 1 P-d\D4
*RO-CH10*
DATA POLARITY:
NORMAL N INVERTED I
AUTO-
POLARITY
CORRECTION
1 P-d\D5 IS AUTOMATIC POLARITY
CORRECTION TO BE USED?
YES Y NO N
DATA
DIRECTION
1 P-d\D6 TIME SEQUENCE OF DATA:
NORMAL N REVERSED R
DATA
RANDOMIZED
1 P-d\D7
*RO-CH10*
YES Y NO N
RANDOMIZER
LENGTH
3 P-d\D8
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE RANDOMIZER LENGTH:
STANDARD (15 BITS) STD
OTHER OTH, DEFINE IN
COMMENTS RECORD
NOT APPLICABLE N/A
9-52

Table 9-5 (Continued). PCM Format Attributes Group (P) Page 2 x 11
MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
FORMAT
TYPE FORMAT 4 P-d\TF
*RO-CH10*
TYPE OF PCM FORMAT:
CLASS I - ONE CLASS II TWO
1553 BUS - 1553 BUS BUS
ALTERNATE TAG AND DATA-ALTD
OTHER - OTHR, DESCRIBE IN
COMMENTS.
COMMON
WORD LENGTH
2
P-d\F1
*RO-CH10*
NUMBER OF BITS IN COMMON WORD
LENGTH
WORD
TRANSFER
ORDER
1 P-d\F2
*RO-CH10*
DEFINE THE DEFAULT FOR THE
FIRST BIT TRANSFERRED IN
NORMAL TIME SEQUENCE:
MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT - M
LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT - L
PARITY 2 P-d\F3
*RO-CH10*
NORMAL WORD PARITY
EVEN - EV ODD - OD
NONE - NO
PARITY
TRANSFER
ORDER
1 P-d\F4 PARITY BIT LOCATION
LEADS WORD - L
TRAILS WORD - T
MINOR FRAME
NUMBER OF
MINOR FRAMES
IN MAJOR
FRAME
3 P-d\MF\N
*RO-CH10*
NUMBER OF MINOR FRAMES IN A
MAJOR FRAME
NUMBER OF
WORDS IN A
MINOR FRAME
4 P-d\MF1
*RO-CH10*

SPECIFIES THE NUMBER OF WORDS
IN A MINOR FRAME, AS DEFINED IN
CHAPTER 4, PARAGRAPH 4.3. (THE
MINOR FRAME SYNCHRONIZATION
PATTERN IS ALWAYS CONSIDERED
AS ONE WORD, REGARDLESS OF ITS
LENGTH.)
9-53

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
NUMBER OF BITS
IN A MINOR
FRAME
5 P-d\MF2
*RO-CH10*
NUMBER OF BITS IN A MINOR FRAME
INCLUDING MINOR FRAME
SYNCHRONIZATION PATTERN
SYNC TYPE 3
P-d\MF3
DEFINE MINOR FRAME
SYNCHRONIZATION TYPE:
FIXED PATTERN - FPT
OTHER - OTH
SYNCHRONIZATION PATTERN
LENGTH 2 P-d\MF4
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE MINOR FRAME
SYNCHRONIZATION PATTERN LENGTH
IN NUMBER OF BITS.
PATTERN 33 P-d\MF5
*RO-CH10*
DEFINE MINOR FRAME
SYNCHRONIZATION PATTERN IN BITS
(1s and 0s) WITH THE LEFT MOST BIT
AS THE FIRST BIT TRANSMITTED
SYNCHRONIZATION CRITERIA
IN SYNC 2
CRITERIA
P-d\SYNC1 THIS SPECIFIES THE DESIRED CRITERIA
FOR DECLARING THE SYSTEM TO BE IN
SYNC:
FIRST GOOD SYNC 0
CHECK - NUMBER OF AGREES
(1 OR GREATER)
NOT SPECIFIED - NS
SYNC PATTERN
CRITERIA
2 P-d\SYNC2 NUMBER OF BITS THAT MAY BE IN
ERROR IN THE SYNCHRONIZATION
PATTERN
OUT OF SYNCHRONIZATION CRITERIA
NUMBER OF 2
DISAGREES
P-d\SYNC3 SPECIFIES THE DESIRED CRITERIA FOR
DECLARING THE SYSTEM OUT OF SYNC:
NUMBER OF DISAGREES, (1 OR
GREATER)
NOT SPECIFIED - NS
SYNC PATTERN
CRITERIA
2 P-d\SYNC4 NUMBER OF BITS THAT MAY BE IN
ERROR IN THE SYNCHRONIZATION
PATTERN
9-54

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
MINOR FRAME FORMAT DEFINITION
P-d\MFW1-n WORD NUMBER 4
*RO-CH10*
WORD POSITION #n IN A MINOR
FRAME, OR FOR CLASS II SYSTEMS,
THE POSITION IN THE DEFINED
FRAME. WORD POSITION 1 FOLLOWS
THE SYNCHRONIZATION PATTERN.
NUMBER OF
BITS
IN WORD
2 P-d\MFW2-n
*RO-CH10*
THE NUMBER OF BITS IN WORD
POSITION #n. IF DEFAULT VALUE, DO
NOT INCLUDE.
NOTE: THE ABOVE PAIR SET MUST BE DEFINED FOR ALL WORDS THAT HAVE A LENGTH
OTHER THAN THE COMMON WORD LENGTH. THEREFORE, ALL WORD POSITIONS NOT
INCLUDED IN THE ABOVE WILL HAVE THE COMMON WORD LENGTH AS A DEFAULT
VALUE.
SUBFRAME SYNCHRONIZATION
NUMBER OF
SUBFRAME
ID COUNTERS
2 P-d\ISF\N
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF SUBFRAME
ID COUNTERS DEFINED WITHIN THE
MINOR FRAME.
SUBFRAME ID
COUNTER NAME
32 P-d\ISF1-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE SUBFRAME ID COUNTER
NAME.
SUBFRAME
SYNC
TYPE
2 P-d\ISF2-n
*RO-CH10*
DEFINE THE SUBFRAME
SYNCHRONIZATION TYPE:
ID COUNTER - ID
OTHER - OT DEFINE IN
COMMENTS.
ID COUNTER
SUBFRAME ID
COUNTER
LOCATION
4 P-d\IDC1-n
*RO-CH10*
IF ID COUNTER IS DESIGNATED AS THE
SUBFRAME SYNC TYPE, GIVE THE
MINOR FRAME WORD POSITION OF
THE COUNTER.
ID COUNTER
WORD LENGTH
2 P-d\IDC2-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE MINOR FRAME WORD
LENGTH OF THE WORD CONTAINING
THE ID COUNTER, NUMBER OF BITS.
9-55

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
ID COUNTER
MSB STARTING
BIT LOCATION
2 P-d\IDC3-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE BIT LOCATION OF THE ID
COUNTER MSB WITHIN THE WORD.
ID COUNTER
LENGTH
2 P-d\IDC4-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE SUBFRAME ID COUNTER
LENGTH, NUMBER OF BITS.
ID COUNTER
TRANSFER
ORDER
1 P-d\IDC5-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY WHETHER THE MOST OR
LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT IS
TRANSFERRED FIRST:
MOST SIGNIFICANT - M
LEAST SIGNIFICANT - L
DEFAULT - D (AS SPECIFIED IN
TABLE 9-5, WORD TRANSFER ORDER)
ID COUNTER
INITIAL VALUE
3 P-d\IDC6-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE INITIAL VALUE OF THE
ID COUNTER.
INITIAL COUNT
SUBFRAME
NUMBER
3 P-d\IDC7-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE MINOR FRAME NUMBER
ASSOCIATED WITH THE INITIAL
COUNT VALUE.
ID COUNTER
END VALUE
3 P-d\IDC8-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE END VALUE OF THE ID
COUNTER.
END COUNT
SUBFRAME
NUMBER
3 P-d\IDC9-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE MINOR FRAME NUMBER
ASSOCIATED WITH THE END COUNT
VALUE.
COUNT
DIRECTION
3 P-d\IDC10-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE DIRECTION OF THE
COUNT INCREMENT:
INCREASING - INC
DECREASING - DEC
SUBFRAME DEFINITION
NUMBER OF 4
SUBFRAMES
P-d\SF\N-n SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF SUBFRAMES
ASSOCIATED WITH THE SUBFRAME ID
COUNTER NAMED ABOVE.
SUBFRAME
NAME
32 P-d\SF1-n-m SPECIFY THE SUBFRAME NAME.

9-56

MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
SUPERCOM 2 P-d\SF2-n-m IF NOT SUPERCOMMUTATED,
ENTER - NO. OTHERWISE, ENTER
THE NUMBER OF WORD POSITIONS.
LOCATION
DEFINITION
2 P-d\SF3-n-m IF SUPERCOMMUTATED, SPECIFY
HOW THE WORD LOCATIONS ARE
DEFINED:
FIRST WORD AND INTERVAL - FI
EVERY LOCATION - EL
NOT APPLICABLE - NA
SUBFRAME
LOCATION
4 P-d\SF4-n-m-w SPECIFY THE FIRST WORD WITHIN
THE MINOR FRAME THAT CONTAINS
THE SUBFRAME IDENTIFIED. FOR
THE CASE WHEN EVERY WORD
LOCATION IS DEFINED, REPEAT THIS
ENTRY FOR EACH WORD POSITION
APPLICABLE. FOR THE FIRST WORD
AND INTERVAL, INCLUDE THE NEXT
ENTRY TO DEFINE THE INTERVAL.
INTERVAL 4 P-d\SF5-n-m SPECIFY THE INTERVAL TO BE USED
TO DEFINE THE WORD LOCATIONS.
SUBFRAME
DEPTH
3 P-d\SF6-n-m SPECIFY THE SUBFRAME DEPTH. IF
NO ENTRY, THEN THE SUBFRAME ID
COUNTER DEPTH WILL BE USED AS
THE DEFAULT VALUE.
NOTE: REPEAT THE ABOVE FOR EACH SUBFRAME IN THE MINOR FRAME FORMAT.
FILTERING
MINOR FRAME
FILTERING
DEFINITION
TYPE
P-d\MFF\FDT
2
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE PCM MINOR FRAME
FILTERING DEFINITION TYPE.
IN = INCLUSIVE FILTERING
EX = EXCLUSIVE FILTERING
NUMBER OF
MINOR FRAME
FILTERING
DEFINITIONS
3
P-d\MFF\N
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF PCM
MINOR FRAME FILTERING
DEFINITIONS.
9-57

MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
FILTERED
MINOR FRAME
NUMBER
3
P-d\MFF\MFN-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE PCM MINOR FRAME
NUMBER TO BE FILTERED
NOTE: FOR PCM FORMATS WITH MULTIPLE SUBFRAME ID COUNTERS, ALL
MINOR FRAME NUMBERS DEFINED FOR FILTERING ARE ASSOCIATED WITH THE
FIRST SUBFRAME ID COUNTER.
ASYNCHRONOUS EMBEDDED FORMAT
NUMBER OF
ASYNCHRONOUS
EMBEDDED
FORMATS
1 P-d\AEF\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF
ASYNCHRONOUS EMBEDDED
FORMATS: ONE - 1 TWO 2
NONE - 0
DATA LINK
NAME
32 P-d\AEF\DLN-n PROVIDE THE DATA LINK NAME FOR
THIS ASYNCHRONOUS EMBEDDED
FORMAT. REPEAT NAME AND THE
FOLLOWING ENTRIES FOR THE
SECOND FORMAT, AS APPROPRIATE.
(A SEPARATE DATA LINK DEFINITION
MUST BE PROVIDED FOR EACH
ASYNCHRONOUS EMBEDDED
FORMAT.)
SUPERCOM 3 P-d\AEF1-n IF THE ASYNCHRONOUS FORMAT IS
NOT SUPERCOMMUTATED,
ENTER - NO. OTHERWISE, ENTER
THE NUMBER OF HOST MINOR
FRAME WORDS THAT ARE USED.
LOCATION
DEFINITION
2 P-d\AEF2-n IF SUPERCOMMUTATED, SPECIFY
DEFINED:
EVERY LOCATION - EL
CONTIGUOUS WORDS - CW
NOT APPLICABLE - NA
9-58

MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
LOCATION 4 P-d\AEF3-n-w SPECIFY THE FIRST WORD WITHIN
THE ASYNCHRONOUS EMBEDDED
FORMAT IDENTIFIED. FOR THE
METHOD WHEN EVERY WORD
LOCATION IS DEFINED, REPEAT
THIS ENTRY FOR EACH WORD
POSITION APPLICABLE. FOR THE
FIRST WORD AND INTERVAL
METHOD, INCLUDE THE NEXT
ENTRY TO DEFINE THE INTERVAL.
INTERVAL 4 P-d\AEF4-n SPECIFY THE INTERVAL TO BE USED
TO DEFINE THE ASYNCHRONOUS
EMBEDDED FORMAT LOCATIONS.
WORD LENGTH 2 P-d\AEF5-n-w SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF
EMBEDDED BITS IN THIS HOST
WORD LOCATION.
MASK 64 P-d\AEF6-n-w IF THE ASYNCHRONOUS PORTION
OF THE WORD IS SHORTER THAN
THE WORD LENGTH, THEN PROVIDE
THE BINARY MASK REQUIRED TO
INDICATE WHICH BITS ARE USED (1s
USED, 0s NOT USED). LEFT-MOST
BIT CORRESPONDS TO FIRST BIT
TRANSMITTED.
FORMAT CHANGE
FRAME FORMAT IDENTIFIER
LOCATION 4 P-d\FFI1 SPECIFY THE POSITION IN THE
MINOR FRAME THAT CONTAINS THE
FRAME FORMAT IDENTIFICATION
(FFI) WORD. IF MORE THAN ONE
WORD LOCATION, PROVIDE THE
DETAILS IN THE COMMENTS
RECORD.
9-59

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
MASK 64 P-d\FFI2 IF THE FFI IS SHORTER THAN THE
WORD LENGTH, THEN PROVIDE THE
BINARY MASK REQUIRED TO
INDICATE WHICH BITS ARE USED.
LEFTMOST BIT CORRESPONDS TO
FIRST BIT TRANSMITTED.
MEASUREMENT LIST CHANGE
NUMBER OF
MEASUREMENT
LISTS
2 P-d\MLC\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF
MEASUREMENT LISTS THAT ARE
REQUIRED TO BE SELECTED. IF
NONE, ENTER NO. OTHERWISE,
ENTER THE NUMBER, n.
FFI PATTERN 16 P-d\MLC1-n SPECIFY THE FFI PATTERN THAT
CORRESPONDS TO THE
MEASUREMENT LIST (1s and 0s). THIS
ENTRY AND THE NEXT ARE AN
ORDERED PAIR.
MEASUREMENT
LIST NAME
32 P-d\MLC2-n SPECIFY THE MEASUREMENT LIST
NAME.
FORMAT STRUCTURE CHANGE
NUMBER OF 2
FORMATS
P-d\FSC\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF FORMATS
TO BE DEFINED.
FFI PATTERN 16 P-d\FSC1-n SPECIFY THE FFI PATTERN THAT
CORRESPONDS TO THE FORMAT THAT IS
DEFINED. THIS ENTRY AND THE NEXT
ARE AN ORDERED PAIR.
DATA LINK ID 32 P-d\FSC2-n IDENTIFY THE FORMAT THAT
CORRESPONDS TO THIS FFI CODE.
ALTERNATE TAG AND DATA
P-d\ALT\N NUMBER OF
TAGS
3 SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF PARAMETERS
INCLUDED WITHIN THIS CATEGORY,
THAT IS, THE NUMBER OF TAGS.
9-60

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
NUMBER OF BITS
IN TAG
2 P-d\ALT1 SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF BITS THAT
ARE IN THIS TAG.
NUMBER OF BITS
IN DATA WORD
2 P-d\ALT2 SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF BITS THAT
ARE IN THE COMMON DATA WORD.
FIRST TAG
LOCATION
2 P-d\ALT3 IDENTIFY THE LOCATION OF THE
START OF THE FIRST TAG LOCATION IN
TERMS OF BITS, WITH THE FIRST BIT
POSITION AFTER THE SYNCHRONIZATION
PATTERN BEING NUMBER 1.
SEQUENCE 1 P-d\ALT4 IF THE TAG/DATA WORD SEQUENCE IS
TAG, THEN DATA ENTER N FOR
NORMAL. IF THE DATA PRECEDES THE
TAG, ENTER R FOR REVERSED.
ASYNCHRONOUS DATA MERGE FORMAT
NUMBER OF
ASYNCHRONOUS
DATA MERGE
FORMATS
1 P-d\ADM\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF
ASYNCHRONOUS DATA MERGE
FORMATS.
DATA MERGE
NAME
32 P-d\ADM\DMN-n PROVIDE THE DATA MERGE NAME
FOR THIS ASYNCHRONOUS DATA
MERGE FORMAT. THIS CAN BE USED
TO IDENTIFY THE SOURCE OF THE
DATA MERGE FORMAT, AS
APPROPRIATE. (USE THE COMMENTS
FIELD TO DESCRIBE THIS DATA
SOURCE FOR THE ASYNCHRONOUS
DATA MERGE FORMAT.)
SUPERCOM 3 P-d\ADM1-n IF THE ASYNCHRONOUS DATA
MERGE FORMAT IS NOT SUPER-
COMMUTATED, ENTER - NO.
OTHERWISE, ENTER THE NUMBER OF
HOST MINOR FRAME WORDS THAT
ARE USED.
9-61

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
LOCATION
DEFINITION
2 P-d\ADM2-n IF SUPERCOMMUTATED, SPECIFY
DEFINED:
EVERY LOCATION - EL
CONTIGUOUS WORDS - CW
NOT APPLICABLE - NA
LOCATION 4 P-d\ADM3-n-w SPECIFY THE FIRST WORD WITHIN
THE ASYNCHRONOUS DATA MERGE
FORMAT IDENTIFIED. FOR THE
METHOD WHEN EVERY WORD
LOCATION IS DEFINED, REPEAT THIS
ENTRY FOR EACH WORD POSITION
APPLICABLE. FOR THE FIRST WORD
AND INTERVAL METHOD, INCLUDE
THE NEXT ENTRY TO DEFINE THE
INTERVAL.
INTERVAL 4 P-d\ADM4-n SPECIFY THE INTERVAL TO BE USED
TO DEFINE THE ASYNCHRONOUS
DATA MERGE FORMAT LOCATIONS.
DATA LENGTH 2 P-d\ADM5-n SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF DATA BITS
USED IN THIS DATA MERGE FORMAT.
MSB LOCATION 2 P-d\ADM6-n PROVIDE THE MOST SIGNIFICANT
BIT (MSB) POSITION WITHIN THE
HOST MINOR FRAME LOCATION.
PARITY 2 P-d\ADM7-n IF USED, SPECIFY THE PARITY
INFORMATION:
EVEN - EV ODD - OD
NONE - NO
COMMENTS
COMMENTS 6400 P-d\COM PROVIDE THE ADDITIONAL

9-62

9.5.6.2 PCM Measurement Description Group (D). Figure 9-7 and Table 9-6 contain the PCM
Measurement Descriptions. The descriptions define each measurand or data item of interest
within the frame format specified in the PCM attributes. Table 9-6 includes the measurement
name, which links the measurement to the Data Conversion Attributes Group.

Note: Beginning with 106-09, it is recommended that the Word and
Frame location type be used instead of the other six traditional location
types. Additionally, when using Word and Frame, it is recommended to
avoid the use of subframes (as defined in the Subframe Definitions
section of the PCM Format Attributes Group) and locate measurements by
word number and frame number within the major frame. Word and Frame
is the only location type contained in the TMATS XML schema. The
other location types are still supported at present, but may be removed
from 106 Chapter 9 in future releases. Subframe definitions are not
included in the TMATS XML schema; they may also be removed from
106 Chapter 9 in future releases.

9-63

CODE
PCM Measurement Description Group (D)
NAME
REFERENCE
PAGE
DATA LINK
NAME

(D-x\DLN) (9-66)

NUMBER OF MEASUREMENT LISTS (D-x\ML\N)

MEASUREMENT LIST NAME (D-x\MLN-y)
NUMBER OF SELECTED MEASUREMENT FILTERING
AND OVERWRITE DEFINITIONS
(D-x\SMF\N-y)

SELECTED MEASUREMENT NAME (D-x\SMF\SMN-y-n)

NUMBER OF MEASURANDS (D-x\MN\N-y)

MEASUREMENT NAME (D-x\MN-y-n) (9-66)

PARITY (D-x\MN1-y-n)

PARITY TRANSFER ORDER (D-x\MN2-y-n)

MEASUREMENT TRANSFER ORDER (D-x\MN3-y-n)

MEASUREMENT FILTER-OVERWRITE TAG (D-x\MFOT-y-n)

*MEASUREMENT LOCATION (9-67)

MEASUREMENT LOCATION TYPE (D-x\LT-y-n)

*MINOR FRAME (9-67)

MINOR FRAME LOCATION (D-x\MF-y-n)

BIT MASK (D-x\MFM-y-n)

*MINOR FRAME SUPERCOMMUTATED (9-68)

OR
NUMBER OF MINOR FRAME
LOCATIONS
(D-x\MFS\N-y-n)

LOCATION DEFINITION (D-x\MFS1-y-n)

*INTERVAL (9-68)

OR
LOCATION IN MINOR FRAME (D-x\MFS2-y-n)

BIT MASK (D-x\MFS3-y-n) (9-68)

INTERVAL (D-x\MFS4-y-n)

*EVERY LOCATION (9-69)

MINOR FRAME LOCATION (D-x\MFSW-y-n-e)

BIT MASK (D-x\MFSM-y-n-e)

*MINOR FRAME FRAGMENTED (9-69)

OR
NUMBER OF FRAGMENTS (D-x\FMF\N-y-n)

MEASUREMENT WORD LENGTH (D-x\FMF1-y-n)

LOCATION DEFINITION (D-x\FMF2-y-n) (9-69)

*INTERVAL

OR
LOCATION IN MINOR FRAME (D-x\FMF3-y-n)

BIT MASK (D-x\FMF4-y-n)

INTERVAL (D-x\FMF5-y-n)

*EVERY LOCATION (9-70)

MINOR FRAME LOCATION (D-x\FMF6-y-n-e)

BIT MASK (D-x\FMF7-y-n-e)

FRAGMENT TRANSFER ORDER (D-x\FMF8-y-n-e)

FRAGMENT POSITION (D-x\FMF9-y-n-e) (9-70)

* SUBFRAME

OR
SUBFRAME NAME (D-x\SF1-y-n)

LOCATION IN SUBFRAME (D-x\SF2-y-n)

Figure 9-7. PCM Measurement Description Group (D). (Page 1 of 2)
BIT MASK (D-x\SFM-y-n)
9-64

*SUBFRAME SUPERCOMMUTATED (9-71)

OR
SUBFRAME NAME (D-x\SFS1-y-n)

NUMBER OF SUBFRAME LOCATIONS (D-x\SFS\N-y-n)

LOCATION DEFINITION (D-x\SFS2-y-n)

*INTERVAL

(9-71)

OR
LOCATION IN SUBFRAME
(D-x\SFS3-y-n)

BIT MASK
(D-x\SFS4-y-n)
(9-71)

INTERVAL
(D-x\SFS5-y-n)

*EVERY LOCATION

(9-71)

SUBFRAME LOCATION
(D-x\SFS6-y-n-e)

BIT MASK
(D-x\SFS7-y-n-e)

*SUBFRAME FRAGMENTED

(9-72)

OR NUMBER OF FRAGMENTS
(D-x\FSF\N-y-n)

MEASUREMENT WORD LENGTH
(D-x\FSF1-y-n)

NUMBER OF SUBFRAMES
(D-x\FSF2\N-y-n)

SUBFRAME NAME
(D-x\FSF3-y-n-m)

LOCATION DEFINITION
(D-x\FSF4-y-n-m)

*INTERVAL

(9-72)

OR
LOCATION IN SUBFRAME
(D-x\FSF5-y-n-m)

BIT MASK
(D-x\FSF6-y-n-m)

INTERVAL
(D-x\FSF7-y-n-m)

*EVERY LOCATION

(9-73)

SUBFRAME LOCATION
(D-x\FSF8-y-n-m-e)

BIT MASK
(D-x\FSF9-y-n-m-e)

FRAGMENT TRANSFER ORDER (D-x\FSF10-y-n-m-e)

FRAGMENT POSITION (D-x\FSF11-y-n-m-e) (9-73)
*WORD AND FRAME

NUMBER OF MEASUREMENT
LOCATIONS
(D-x\MML\N-y-n)

NUMBER OF FRAGMENTS (D-x\MNF\N-y-n-m)

MEASUREMENT WORD LENGTH (D-x\MWL-y-n-m)

WORD POSITION (D-x\WP-y-n-m-e)

WORD INTERVAL (D-x\WI-y-n-m-e)

END WORD POSITION (D-x\EWP-y-n-m-e)

FRAME POSITION (D-x\FP-y-n-m-e) (9-74)

FRAME INTERVAL (D-x\FI-y-n-m-e)

END FRAME POSITION (D-x\EFP-y-n-m-e)

BIT MASK (D-x\WFM-y-n-m-e)

FRAGMENT TRANSFER ORDER (D-x\WFT-y-n-m-e)

FRAGMENT POSITION (D-x\WFP-y-n-m-e)

*COMMENTS

COMMENTS (D-x\COM) (9-76)
Figure 9-7. PCM Measurement Description Group (D). (Page 2 of 2)
9-65

TABLE 9-6. PCM MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION GROUP (D)
MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
DATA LINK NAME 32 D-x\DLN PROVIDE THE DATA LINK NAME.
NUMBER OF
MEASUREMENT
LISTS
2 D-x\ML\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF
MEASUREMENT LISTS TO BE
PROVIDED.
MEASUREMENT
LIST NAME
32 D-x\MLN-y PROVIDE THE MEASUREMENT LIST
NAME ASSOCIATED WITH THE
FOLLOWING ATTRIBUTES. THE
FOLLOWING INFORMATION WILL
HAVE TO BE REPEATED FOR EACH
MEASUREMENT LIST IDENTIFIED IN
THE PCM FORMAT ATTRIBUTES
GROUP.
NUMBER OF
SELECTED
MEASUREMENT
FILTERING AND
OVERWRITE
DEFINITIONS
2
D-x\SMF\N-y
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF PCM
SELECTED MEASUREMENT
FILTERING AND OVERWRITE
DEFINITIONS.
SELECTED
MEASUREMENT
NAME
32
D-\SMF\SMN
-y-n
*RO-CH10*
SPECIFY THE PCM SELECTED
MEASUREMENT NAME TO BE
FILTERED AND OVERWRITTEN
NUMBER OF
MEASURANDS
7 D-x\MN\N-y SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF
MEASURANDS INCLUDED WITHIN
THIS MEASUREMENT LIST.
MEASUREMENT
NAME
32 D-x\MN-y-n MEASURAND NAME.
PARITY 2 D-x\MN1-y-n SPECIFY PARITY:
EVEN-EV; ODD - OD; NONE - NO
MINOR FRAME DEFAULT - DE
(AS SPECIFIED IN TABLE 9-5, PARITY)
9-66

Table 9-6 (Continued). PCM Measurement Description Group (D) Page 2 x 11
MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
PARITY TRANSFER
ORDER
1 D-x\MN2-y-n PARITY BIT LOCATION:
LEADS WORD - L
TRAILS WORD - T
MINOR FRAME DEFAULT - D
(AS SPECIFIED IN TABLE 9-5,
PARITY TRANSFER ORDER)
MEASUREMENT
TRANSFER ORDER
1 D-x\MN3-y-n MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT FIRST M
TABLE 9-5, WORD TRANSFER
ORDER)
MEASUREMENT
FILTER
OVERWRITE TAG
1 D-x\MFOT-y-n
*RO-CH10*
INDICATES IF THE MEASUREMENT
IS TAGGED FOR EITHER FILTERING
OR OVERWRITING
O - OVERWRITE
F - FILTER
N NO FILTERING (DEFAULT)
MEASUREMENT LOCATION
MEASUREMENT
LOCATION TYPE
4 D-x\LT-y-n SPECIFY THE NATURE OF THE
LOCATION OF THIS MEASURAND.
MINOR FRAME - MF
MINOR FRAME SUPERCOMMUTATED
MFSC
MINOR FRAME FRAGMENTED
MFFR
SUBFRAME SF
SUBFRAME SUPERCOMMUTATED
SFSC
SUBFRAME FRAGMENTED SFFR
WORD AND FRAME WDFR
MINOR FRAME
MINOR FRAME
LOCATION
4 D-x\MF-y-n THE MINOR FRAME WORD POSITION
OF THE MEASUREMENT.
9-67

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
BIT MASK 64 D-x\MFM-y-n BINARY STRING OF 1s AND 0s TO
LOCATION THAT ARE ASSIGNED TO
THIS MEASUREMENT. IF THE FULL
WORD IS USED FOR THIS
LEFT-MOST BIT CORRESPONDS TO
MINOR FRAME SUPERCOMMUTATED
NUMBER OF MINOR
FRAME LOCATIONS
4 D-x\MFS\N-y-
n
NUMBER OF WORD POSITIONS THAT
THE SUPERCOMMUTATED CHANNEL
OCCUPIES, N.
LOCATION
DEFINITION
1 D-x\MFS1-y-n TO SPECIFY: INTERVAL, ENTER - I
EVERY WORD LOCATION, ENTER - E
INTERVAL
LOCATION IN
MINOR FRAME
4 D-x\MFS2-y-n SPECIFY THE FIRST WORD LOCATION
IN THE MINOR FRAME.
BIT MASK 64 D-x\MFS3-y-n BINARY STRING OF 1s AND 0s TO
THIS SUPERCOMMUTATED
USED FOR THIS MEASUREMENT, ENTER
- FW. LEFT-MOST BIT CORRESPONDS
TO FIRST BIT TRANSMITTED.
INTERVAL 3 D-x\MFS4-y-n SPECIFY THE INTERVAL COUNT THAT
IS THE OFFSET FROM THE FIRST WORD
LOCATION AND EACH SUBSEQUENT
LOCATION.
9-68

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
EVERY LOCATION
D-x\MFSW-y-n-e MINOR FRAME
LOCATION
4 ENTER THE MINOR FRAME WORD
POSITION OF THE MEASUREMENT.
BIT MASK 64 D-x\MFSM-y-n-e BINARY STRING OF 1s AND 0s TO
THIS SUPERCOMMUTATED
USED FOR THE MEASUREMENT, ENTER
- FW. LEFT-MOST BIT CORRESPONDS
TO FIRST BIT TRANSMITTED.
NOTE: ENTER THE MINOR FRAME LOCATION AND BIT MASK FOR EACH OF THE WORD
POSITIONS THAT THE SUPERCOMMUTATED CHANNEL OCCUPIES, (N) LOCATIONS.
MINOR FRAME FRAGMENTED
NUMBER OF
FRAGMENTS
1 D-x\FMF\N-y-
n
NUMBER OF MINOR FRAME WORD
POSITIONS THAT THE FRAGMENTED
CHANNEL OCCUPIES, N.
MEASUREMENT
WORD LENGTH
3 D-x\FMF1-y-n TOTAL LENGTH OF THE
RECONSTRUCTED BINARY DATA
WORD
LOCATION
DEFINITION
1 D-x\FMF2-y-n TO SPECIFY:
INTERVAL, ENTER - I
EVERY WORD LOCATION, ENTER-E
INTERVAL
LOCATION IN
MINOR FRAME
4 D-x\FMF3-y-n SPECIFY THE FIRST WORD POSITION
THAT THE FRAGMENTED WORD
OCCUPIES IN THE MINOR FRAME.
9-69

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
BIT MASK 64 D-x\FMF4-y-n BINARY STRING OF 1s AND 0s TO
POSITION THAT ARE ASSIGNED TO
THIS FRAGMENTED CHANNEL. IF THE
FULL WORD IS USED FOR THIS
MEASUREMENT, ENTER FW.
INTERVAL 4 D-x\FMF5-y-n SPECIFY THE INTERVAL THAT IS THE
OFFSET FROM THE FIRST WORD
LOCATION.
EVERY LOCATION
MINOR FRAME
LOCATION
4 D-x\FMF6-y-n-e ENTER THE MINOR FRAME WORD
BIT MASK 64 D-x\FMF7-y-n-e BINARY STRING OF 1s AND 0s TO
POSITION THAT ARE ASSIGNED TO
THIS FRAGMENTED MEASUREMENT.
IF THE FULL WORD IS USED FOR THIS
FRAGMENT
TRANSFER ORDER
1 D-x\FMF8-y-n-e MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT FIRST - M
FRAGMENT
POSITION
1 D-x\FMF9-y-n-e A NUMBER FROM 1 TO N
SPECIFYING THE POSITION OF THIS
FRAGMENT WITHIN THE
WORD. 1 CORRESPONDS TO THE MOST
SIGNIFICANT FRAGMENT. EACH
FRAGMENT POSITION FROM 1 TO N
MUST BE SPECIFIED ONLY ONCE.
NOTE: ENTER THE MINOR FRAME LOCATION AND BIT MASK FOR EACH OF THE WORD
POSITIONS THAT THE FRAGMENTED CHANNEL OCCUPIES, (N) LOCATIONS.
SUBFRAME
SUBFRAME NAME 32 D-x\SF1-y-n ENTER THE SUBFRAME NAME.
9-70

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
LOCATION IN
SUBFRAME
3 D-x\SF2-y-n SPECIFY THE WORD NUMBER IN THE
SUBFRAME.
BIT MASK 64 D-x\SFM-y-n BINARY STRING OF 1s AND 0s TO
THIS MEASUREMENT. IF THE FULL
WORD IS USED FOR THE
MEASUREMENT, ENTER - FW. LEFT-
MOST BIT CORRESPONDS TO FIRST BIT
TRANSMITTED.
SUBFRAME SUPERCOMMUTATED
SUBFRAME NAME 32 D-x\SFS1-y-n ENTER THE SUBFRAME NAME.
NUMBER OF
SUBFRAME
LOCATIONS
3 D-x\SFS\N-y-n NUMBER OF SUBFRAME WORD
POSITIONS THAT THE
SUPERCOMMUTATED CHANNEL
OCCUPIES.
LOCATION
DEFINITION
1 D-x\SFS2-y-n TO SPECIFY:
INTERVAL, ENTER - I
INTERVAL
LOCATION IN
SUBFRAME
3 D-x\SFS3-y-n SPECIFY THE FIRST WORD POSITION
THAT THE SUPERCOMMUTATED WORD
OCCUPIES IN THE SUBFRAME.
BIT MASK 64 D-x\SFS4-y-n BINARY STRING OF 1s AND 0s TO
IDENTIFY THE BIT LOCATIONS IN A
WORD POSITION THAT ARE ASSIGNED
TO THIS SUPER-COMMUTATED
CHANNEL. IF THE FULL WORD IS
ENTER - FW.
INTERVAL 3 D-x\SFS5-y-n SPECIFY THE INTERVAL THAT IS THE
LOCATION.
EVERY LOCATION
SUBFRAME 3
LOCATION
D-x\SFS6-y-n-
e
ENTER THE SUBFRAME WORD
9-71

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
BIT MASK 64 D-x\SFS7-y-n-e BINARY STRING OF 1s AND 0s TO
WORD POSITION THAT ARE ASSIGNED
TO THIS SUPER-COMMUTATED
MEASUREMENT. IF THE FULL WORD
IS USED FOR THIS MEASUREMENT,
ENTER FW.
NOTE: ENTER THE SUBFRAME LOCATION AND BIT MASK FOR EACH OF THE WORD
POSITIONS THAT THE SUPERCOMMUTATED CHANNEL OCCUPIES, (N) LOCATIONS.
SUBFRAME FRAGMENTED
NUMBER OF
FRAGMENTS
1 D-x\FSF\N-y-n NUMBER OF SUBFRAME WORD
POSITIONS THAT THE FRAGMENTED
CHANNEL OCCUPIES, N.
MEASUREMENTWO
RD LENGTH
3 D-x\FSF1-y-n TOTAL LENGTH OF THE
WORD
NUMBER OF
SUBFRAMES
1 D-x\FSF2\N-y-n NUMBER OF SUBFRAMES
CONTAINING THE FRAGMENTS
SUBFRAME NAME 32 D-x\FSF3-y-n-m ENTER THE SUBFRAME NAME.
LOCATION
DEFINITION
1
D-x\FSF4-y-n-m
TO SPECIFY:
INTERVAL, ENTER - I
INTERVAL
LOCATION IN 3
SUBFRAME
D-x\FSF5-y-n-m
SPECIFY THE FIRST WORD POSITION
THAT THE FRAGMENTED WORD
OCCUPIES IN THE SUBFRAME.
BIT MASK 64
D-x\FSF6-y-n-m
WORD POSITION THAT ARE
ASSIGNED TO THIS FRAGMENTED
CHANNEL. IF THE FULL WORD IS
ENTER - FW.
9-72

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
INTERVAL 3
D-x\FSF7-y-n-m
SPECIFY THE INTERVAL THAT IS THE
LOCATION.
EVERY LOCATION
SUBFRAME 3
LOCATION
D-x\FSF8-y-n-m-e
ENTER THE SUBFRAME WORD
BIT MASK 64
D-x\FSF9-y-n-m-e
WORD POSITION THAT IS ASSIGNED
TO THIS FRAGMENTED
MEASUREMENT. IF THE FULL WORD
IS USED FOR THIS MEASUREMENT,
ENTER FW.
FRAGMENT
TRANSFER ORDER
1
D-x\FSF10-y-n-m-e
MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT FIRST - M
FRAGMENT
POSITION
1
D-x\FSF11-y-n-m-e
A NUMBER FROM 1 TO N SPECIFYING
THE POSITION OF THIS FRAGMENT
WITHIN THE RECONSTRUCTED
BINARY DATA WORD.
1 CORRESPONDS TO THE MOST
NOTE: ENTER THE SUBFRAME LOCATION AND BIT MASK FOR EACH OF THE WORD
POSITIONS THAT THE FRAGMENTED CHANNEL OCCUPIES, (N) LOCATIONS.
NOTE: REPEAT THE ABOVE ENTRIES, AS APPROPRIATE FOR EACH SUBFRAME THAT
CONTAINS THE COMPONENTS OF THE FRAGMENTED WORD.
WORD AND FRAME
NUMBER OF
MEASUREMENT
LOCATIONS
4 D-x\MML\N-y-n SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF LOCATION
DEFINITIONS TO FOLLOW FOR THIS
MEASUREMENT.
9-73

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
NUMBER OF
FRAGMENTS
1 D-x\MNF\N-y-n-m NUMBER OF WORD POSITIONS THAT
EACH FRAGMENTED MEASUREMENT
LOCATION OCCUPIES, N.
ENTER 1 IF THIS MEASUREMENT IS
NOT FRAGMENTED.
MEASUREMENT
WORD LENGTH
3 D-x\MWL-y-n-m TOTAL LENGTH OF THE RECON-
STRUCTED BINARY DATA WORD
WORD POSITION 4 D-x\WP-y-n-m-e SPECIFY THE MINOR FRAME WORD
POSITION OF THIS MEASUREMENT
LOCATION OR FRAGMENT.
WORD INTERVAL 4 D-x\WI-y-n-m-e SPECIFY THE INTERVAL THAT IS THE
POSITION AND EACH SUBSEQUENT
WORD POSITION. AN INTERVAL OF
ZERO INDICATES THAT THERE IS
ONLY ONE WORD POSITION BEING
DEFINED.
END WORD
POSITION
4 D-x\EWP-y-n-m-e SPECIFY THE LAST MINOR FRAME
WORD POSITION OF THIS
MEASUREMENT LOCATION OR
FRAGMENT. IF NOT PRESENT,
DEFAULT IS THE END OF THE MINOR
FRAME, ACCORDING TO THE WORD
INTERVAL. IF WORD INTERVAL IS
ZERO, END WORD POSITION IS NOT
USED.
FRAME POSITION 3
D-x\FP-y-n-m-e
SPECIFY THE FRAME LOCATION OF
THIS MEASUREMENT LOCATION OR
FRAGMENT.
FRAME INTERVAL 3
D-x\FI-y-n-m-e
SPECIFY THE INTERVAL THAT IS THE
OFFSET FROM THE FIRST FRAME
FRAME LOCATION. AN INTERVAL OF
ZERO INDICATES THAT THERE IS
ONLY ONE FRAME LOCATION BEING
DEFINED.
9-74

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
END FRAME
POSITION
3 D-x\EFP-y-n-m-e SPECIFY THE LAST FRAME LOCATION
OF THIS MEASUREMENT LOCATION
OR FRAGMENT. IF NOT PRESENT,
DEFAULT IS THE END OF THE MAJOR
FRAME, ACCORDING TO THE FRAME
INTERVAL. IF FRAME INTERVAL IS
ZERO, END FRAME POSITION IS NOT
USED.
BIT MASK 64 D-x\WFM-y-n-m-e BINARY STRING OF 1S AND 0S TO
IDENTIFY THE BIT LOCATIONS USED
IN EACH MEASUREMENT LOCATION
OR FRAGMENT. IF THE FULL WORD
IS USED, ENTER FW. LEFT-MOST BIT
CORRESPONDS TO FIRST BIT
TRANSMITTED.
FRAGMENT
TRANSFER ORDER
1 D-x\WFT-y-n-m-e MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT FIRST M
LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT FIRST L
DEFAULT D (AS SPECIFIED IN
FRAGMENT
POSITION
1 D-x\WFP-y-n-m-e A NUMBER FROM 1 TO N SPECIFYING
THE POSITION OF THIS FRAGMENT
WITHIN THE RECONSTRUCTED
BINARY DATA WORD.
1 CORRESPONDS TO THE MOST
NOTE: MEASUREMENT WORD LENGTH, FRAGMENT TRANSFER ORDER, AND FRAGMENT
POSITION ATTRIBUTES DO NOT APPLY WHEN THE NUMBER OF FRAGMENTS
ATTRIBUTE FOR A MEASUREMENT IS 1.
9-75

MAXIMUM
PARAMETER FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
DEFINITION
COMMENTS
COMMENTS 3200 D-x\COM PROVIDE THE ADDITIONAL
NOTE: THIS GROUP WILL CONTAIN A REPETITION OF THE ABOVE INFORMATION UNTIL EACH
MEASUREMENT HAS BEEN DEFINED. ANY WORD POSITION NOT INCLUDED WILL BE TREATED AS
A SPARE CHANNEL OR A DONT CARE CHANNEL. INFORMATION WILL NOT BE PROCESSED FOR
THESE SPARE CHANNELS. NOTE THAT MEASUREMENT LIST CHANGES AND FORMAT CHANGES
THAT ARE A PART OF CLASS II SYSTEMS ARE INCLUDED IN THE ABOVE, SINCE THE KEY TO THE
MEASUREMENT DEFINITION IS THE DATA LINK NAME (FORMAT) AND THE MEASUREMENT LIST.

9.5.6.3 Bus Data Attributes (B). Figure 9-8 and Table 9-7 describe bus-originated data formats.
The Bus Data Attributes Group defines the attributes of a MIL-STD-1553 data acquisition
system that is compliant with IRIG 106, Chapter 8 or an ARINC 429 data acquisition system that
is consistent with the Aeronautical Radio Inc. specification of ARINC 429 bus data. The
primary components of this group are the recording description and message content definition.
The former defines the method by which the data were recorded on the tape such as track spread
versus composite. The latter consists of the message identification information and the
measurement description set. The message identification information defines the contents of the
control word that identifies each bus message. The measurement description set describes the
measurement attributes and contains the measurement name that links the measurand to the Data
Conversion Attributes Group (C).

Mode codes are described in the message identification information. If the Subterminal
Address (STA) field contains 00000 or 11111, the information in the Data Word Count/Mode
Code field is a mode code and identifies the function of the mode code. If the mode code has
associated data words, they are described in this section of the attributes. If the bus message is a
remote terminal to remote terminal transfer, both the transmit command and the receive
command are used to identify the message.
9-76

CODE
Bus Data Attributes Group (B)
NAME
REFERENCE
PAGE
DATA LINK
NAME
(B-x\DLN) (9-79)
TEST ITEM (B-x\TA)
BUS PARITY (B-x\BP)
NUMBER OF BUSES (B-x\NBS\N)
BUS NUMBER (B-x\BID-i)
BUS NAME (B-x\BNA-i)
BUS TYPE (B-x\BT-i)

* USER DEFINED WORDS
USER DEFINED WORD 1 MEASUREMENT (B-x\UMN1-i)
PARITY (B-x\U1P-i)
PARITY TRANSFER ORDER (B-x\U1PT-i)
BIT MASK (B-x\U1M-i)
TRANSFER ORDER (B-x\U1T-i)
PARITY (B-x\U2P-i)
PARITY (B-x\U3P-i)
*RECORDING DESCRIPTION (9-81)
NUMBER OF TRACKS (B-x\TK\N-i)
TRACK SEQUENCE (B-x\TS-i-k)
*MESSAGE CONTENT DEFINITION (9-82)
NUMBER OF MESSAGES (B-x\NMS\N-i)
MESSAGE NUMBER (B-x\MID-i-n)
MESSAGE NAME (B-x\MNA-i-n)
REMOTE TERMINAL NAME (B-x\TRN-i-n)
REMOTE TERMINAL ADDRESS (B-x\TRA-i-n)
SUBTERMINAL NAME (B-x\STN-i-n)
SUBTERMINAL ADDRESS (B-x\STA-i-n)
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE MODE (B-x\TRM-i-n)
DATA WORD COUNT/MODE CODE (B-x\DWC-i-n)
SPECIAL PROCESSING (B-x\SPR-i-n)
MESSAGE FILTER-OVERWRITE TAG
(B-x\BMG\FOT-i-
n)

*ARINC 429 MESSAGE DEFINITION (9-83)
ARINC 429 LABEL (B-x\LBL-i-n)

Figure 9-8. Bus Data Attributes Group (B). (Page 1 of 2)
ARINC 429 SDI CODE (B-x\SDI-i-n)
9-77

*RT/RT RECEIVE COMMAND LIST (9-83)
REMOTE TERMINAL NAME (B-x\RTRN-i-n-m)
REMOTE TERMINAL ADDRESS (B-x\RTRA-i-n-m)
SUBTERMINAL NAME (B-x\RSTN-i-n-m)
SUBTERMINAL ADDRESS (B-x\RSTA-i-n-m)
DATA WORD COUNT (B-x\RDWC-i-n-m)
*MODE CODE (9-84)
MODE CODE DESCRIPTION (B-x\MCD-i-n)

MODE CODE DATA WORD
DESCRIPTION
(B-x\MCW-i-n)
*MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION SET (9-84)
NUMBER OF MEASURANDS (B-x\MN\N-i-n)
MEASUREMENT NAME (B-x\MN-i-n-p)
MEASUREMENT TYPE (B-x\MT-i-n-p)
PARITY (B-x\MN1-i-n-p)
PARITY TRANSFER ORDER (B-x\MN2-i-n-p)

MEASUREMENT FILTER-
OVERWRITE TAG
(B-x\BME\FOT-i-
n-p)

*MEASUREMENT LOCATION (9-85)

NUMBER OF MEASUREMENT
LOCATIONS
(B-x\NML\N-i-n-p)
MESSAGE WORD NUMBER (B-x\MWN-i-n-p-e)
BIT MASK (B-x\MBM-i-n-p-e) (9-85)
TRANSFER ORDER (B-x\MTO-i-n-p-e)
FRAGMENT POSITION (B-x\MFP-i-n-p-e)
*COMMENTS
COMMENTS

(B-x\COM) (9-85)
Figure 9-8. (Continued) Bus Data Attributes Group (B). (Page 2 of 2)
9-78

TABLE 9-7. BUS DATA ATTRIBUTES GROUP (B)
MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
DATA LINK
NAME
32 B-x\DLN IDENTIFY THE DATA LINK NAME
CONSISTENT WITH THE
MULTIPLEX/MODULATION GROUP. THE
PCM FORMAT OF THE DATA STREAM
SHALL BE DEFINED IN THE PCM FORMAT
ATTRIBUTES GROUP.
TEST ITEM 16 B-x\TA TEST ITEM DESCRIPTION IN TERMS OF
IDENTIFICATION CODE THAT CONTAINS
THE DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM.
BUS PARITY 2 B-x\BP SPECIFY WHETHER THE MSB OF THE 1553
WORDS IS A PARITY BIT. IF PARITY IS
USED, IT MUST BE ODD PARITY, AS
SPECIFIED IN CHAPTER 8, PARAGRAPH
8.2.2

ODD OD NONE NO
NUMBER OF
BUSES
2 B-x\NBS\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF BUSES
INCLUDED WITHIN THIS DATA LINK. IF
PARITY IS USED, THE MAXIMUM IS 8
BUSES, AND IF PARITY IS NOT USED, THE
MAXIMUM IS 16 BUSES, AS SPECIFIED IN
CHAPTER 8, PARAGRAPH 8.2.3
BUS NUMBER 4 B-x\BID-i ENTER THE BUS NUMBER AS A BINARY
STRING.
BUS NAME 32 B-x\BNA-i SPECIFY THE BUS NAME.
BUS TYPE 8 B-x\BT-i SPECIFY THE BUS TYPE:
1553 BUS 1553
ARINC 429 BUS A429
USER DEFINED WORDS
B-x\UMN1-i
USER DEFINED
WORD 1
MEASUREMENT
32
SPECIFY THE MEASUREMENT NAME
ASSOCIATED WITH THE CONTENT ID
LABEL (BITS 5-8) VALUE OF 0010
9-79

Table 9-7 (Continued). Bus Data Attributes Group (B) Page 2 x 7
MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
PARITY 2 B-x\U1P-i SPECIFY PARITY.
EVEN - EV ODD - OD
NONE - NO
PARITY
TRANSFER
ORDER
1 B-x\U1PT-i PARITY BIT LOCATION
LEADS WORD - L
TRAILS WORD - T
BIT MASK 16 B-x\U1M-i BINARY STRING OF 1s AND 0s TO
IDENTIFY THE BIT LOCATIONS THAT ARE
ASSIGNED TO THIS MEASUREMENT IN
THE WORD IDENTIFIED ABOVE. IF THE
MEASUREMENT, ENTER FW. LEFT-MOST
TRANSMITTED.
TRANSFER
ORDER
3 B-x\U1T-i MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT FIRST - MSB
LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT FIRST - LSB
DEFAULT DEF (AS SPECIFIED IN
USER DEFINED
WORD 2
MEASUREMENT
32
B-x\UMN2-i
SPECIFY THE MEASUREMENT NAME
LABEL (BITS 5-8) VALUE OF 0011
EVEN - EV ODD - OD
NONE - NO
PARITY
TRANSFER
ORDER
LEADS WORD - L
TRAILS WORD - T
TRANSMITTED.
9-80

MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
TRANSFER
ORDER
USER DEFINED
WORD 3
MEASUREMENT
32
B-x\UMN3-i SPECIFY THE MEASUREMENT NAME
LABEL (BITS 5-8) VALUE OF 0100. (VALID
ONLY FOR 1553, WHEN RESPONSE TIME IS
NOT USED.)
EVEN - EV ODD - OD
NONE - NO
PARITY
TRANSFER
ORDER
LEADS WORD - L
TRAILS WORD - T
TRANSMITTED.
TRANSFER
ORDER
RECORDING DESCRIPTION
NUMBER OF 2
TRACKS
B-x\TK\N-i ENTER THE NUMBER OF TAPE TRACKS
USED TO RECORD DATA. ANY ENTRY
GREATER THAN ONE INDICATES THAT
THE DATA HAS BEEN SPREAD ACROSS
MULTIPLE TRACKS.
9-81

MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
TRACK
SEQUENCE
3 B-x\TS-i-k IN THESE ENTRIES, GIVE THE SEQUENCE
ORDER OF TAPE TRACKS THAT SHOULD
BE USED TO RECOVER THE DATA STREAM
IN THE CORRECT ORDER. (THE ORDER
GIVEN SHOULD CORRESPOND TO THE
ACTUAL SKEW OF THE DATA ON THE
TAPE.)
MESSAGE CONTENT DEFINITION
NUMBER OF
MESSAGES
8 B-x\NMS\N-i THE NUMBER OF MESSAGES TO BE
DEFINED.
MESSAGE
NUMBER
8 B-x\MID-i-n THE MESSAGE NUMBER THAT CONTAINS
THE FOLLOWING DATA.
MESSAGE
NAME
32 B-x\MNA-i-n SPECIFY THE MESSAGE NAME.
REMOTE
TERMINAL
NAME
32 B-x\TRN-i-n ENTER THE NAME OF THE REMOTE
TERMINAL THAT IS SENDING OR
RECEIVING THIS MESSAGE. FOR RT/RT,
SPECIFY THE SENDING REMOTE
TERMINAL NAME.
REMOTE
TERMINAL
ADDRESS
5 B-x\TRA-i-n SPECIFY THE FIVE BIT REMOTE
TERMINAL ADDRESS FOR THIS MESSAGE.
SUBTERMINAL
NAME
32 B-x\STN-i-n ENTER THE NAME OF THE SUBTERMINAL
THAT IS SENDING OR RECEIVING THIS
MESSAGE.
SUBTERMINAL
ADDRESS
5 B-x\STA-i-n

ADDRESS FOR THIS MESSAGE. USE X TO
INDICATE A DONT CARE VALUE.
TRANSMIT/
RECEIVE
MODE
1 B-x\TRM-i-n INDICATE IF THIS COMMAND WORD IS A
TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE COMMAND. FOR
RT/RT, SPECIFY TRANSMIT.
TRANSMIT - 1
RECEIVE - 0
9-82

MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
DATA WORD
COUNT/MODE
CODE
5 B-x\DWC-i-n ENTER THE NUMBER OF DATA WORDS AS
A BINARY STRING, USING X TO
INDICATE A DONT CARE VALUE. IF
THE SUBTERMINAL ADDRESS INDICATES
A MODE CODE, ENTER THE MODE CODE
VALUE AS A BINARY STRING.
SPECIAL
PROCESSING
200 B-x\SPR-i-n PROVIDE ANY SPECIAL PROCESSING
REQUIREMENTS PERTAINING TO THIS
MESSAGE.
MESSAGE
FILTER
OVERWRITE
TAG
1 B-x\BMG\
FOT-i-n
INDICATES IF THE MESSAGE IS TAGGED
FOR FILTERING OR OVERWRITING
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
ARINC 429 MESSAGE DEFINITION
ARINC 429
LABEL
B-x\LBL-i-n
8
SPECIFY THE EIGHT-BIT ARINC 429 LABEL
FOR THIS MESSAGE.
ARINC 429 SDI
CODE
3 B-x\SDI-i-n SPECIFY THE TWO-BIT ARINC 429 SDI
CODE FOR THIS MESSAGE:
ALL SDI ALL
SDI CODE 0 0
SDI CODE 1 1
SDI CODE 2 2
SDI CODE 3 3
RT/RT RECEIVE COMMAND LIST
REMOTE
TERMINAL
NAME
32
B-x\RTRN-i-n-m
ENTER THE NAME OF THE REMOTE
TERMINAL THAT IS RECEIVING THIS
RT/RT MESSAGE.
REMOTE
TERMINAL
ADDRESS
5
B-x\RTRA-i-n-m
TERMINAL ADDRESS FOR THIS RT/RT
MESSAGE.
SUBTERMINAL
NAME
32
B-x\RSTN-i-n-m
ENTER THE NAME OF THE SUB-TERMINAL
THAT IS RECEIVING THIS RT/RT MESSAGE.
9-83

MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
SUBTERMINAL
ADDRESS
5 B-x\RSTA-i-n-
m

ADDRESS FOR THIS RT/RT MESSAGE. USE
X TO INDICATE A DONT CARE VALUE.
DATA WORD
COUNT
5 B-x\RDWC-i-n-
m
ENTER THE NUMBER OF DATA WORDS AS
A BINARY STRING, USING X TO INDICATE
A DONT CARE VALUE. EXCLUDE
STATUS AND TIME WORDS. (AN RT/RT
MESSAGE CANNOT CONTAIN A MODE
CODE.)
MODE CODE
MODE CODE
DESCRIPTION
200 B-x\MCD-i-n DESCRIBE THE FUNCTION OR ACTION
ASSOCIATED WITH THIS MODE CODE.
MODE CODE
DATA WORD
DESCRIPTION
200 B-x\MCW-i-n IF THE MODE CODE HAS AN ASSOCIATED
DATA WORD FOLLOWING THE MODE
CODE COMMAND, PROVIDE A COMPLETE
DESCRIPTION OF THE DATA WORD.
MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION SET
NUMBER OF
MEASURANDS
7 B-x\MN\N-i-n SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF MEASURANDS.
MEASUREMENT
NAME
32 B-x\MN-i-n-p MEASURAND NAME
MEASUREMENT
TYPE
1 B-x\MT-i-n-p

CONTENT IDENTIFICATION:
DATA WORD D
COMMAND WORD C
STATUS WORD S
TIME WORD T
PARITY 2 B-x\MN1-i-n-p SPECIFY PARITY.
EVEN - EV ODD - OD
NONE - NO
PARITY
TRANSFER
ORDER
1 B-x\MN2-i-n-p PARITY BIT LOCATION
LEADS WORD - L
TRAILS WORD - T
9-84

9-85
PARAMETER
MAXIMUM
FIELD
SIZE
CODE NAME DEFINITION
MEASUREMENT
FILTER
OVERWRITE TAG
1 B-x\BME\FOT-i-
n-p
INDICATES IF THE MEASUREMENT IS TAGGED
FOR FILTERING OR OVERWRITING
T = TRUE, F = FALSE
NUMBER OF
MEASUREMENT
LOCATIONS
2 B-x\NML\N-i-n-p IF THIS MEASUREMENT IS CONTAINED IN
ONE WORD, ENTER 1. IF THIS
MEASUREMENT IS FRAGMENTED, ENTER
THE NUMBER OF FRAGMENTS.
MESSAGE
WORD
NUMBER
3 B-x\MWN-i-n-p-e ENTER THE DATA WORD NUMBER WITHIN
A MESSAGE THAT CONTAINS THE
MEASUREMENT OR THE FRAGMENTED
MEASURAND.
BIT MASK 64 B-x\MBM-i-n-p-e BINARY STRING OF 1s AND 0s TO IDENTIFY
THE BIT LOCATIONS THAT ARE ASSIGNED
TO THIS MEASURE-MENT IN THE WORD
IDENTIFIED ABOVE. IF THE FULL WORD IS
USED FOR THIS MEASUREMENT, ENTER
FW. LEFT-MOST BIT CORRESPONDS TO
TRANSFER
ORDER
3 B-x\MTO-i-n-p-
e
MOST SIGNIFICANT BIT FIRST - MSB
LEAST SIGNIFICANT BIT FIRST- LSB
FRAGMENT
POSITION
1 B-x\MFP-i-n-p-e A NUMBER FROM 1 TO N SPECIFYING THE
POSITION OF THIS FRAGMENT WITHIN
THE RECONSTRUCTED BINARY DATA
WORD. 1 CORRESPONDS TO THE MOST
FRAGMENT POSITION FROM 1 TO N MUST
BE SPECIFIED ONLY ONCE.
NOTE: REPEAT THE ABOVE TO DESCRIBE EACH FRAGMENT OF A FRAGMENTED WORD. THE
TRANSFER ORDER INDICATES WHETHER TO TRANSPOSE THE ORDER OF THE BIT SEQUENCE OR
NOT (LSB INDICATES TO TRANSPOSE THE BIT SEQUENCE).
COMMENTS
COMMENTS 3200 B-x\COM PROVIDE THE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
REQUESTED OR OTHER INFORMATION DESIRED.

9.5.6.4 Message Data Attributes (S). The Message Data Attributes are presented graphically in
Figure 9-9 and specified in Table 9-8. The information contained within this group is used to
describe the characteristics and measurement locations within data streams as described by the
UART, Message, Ethernet, and IEEE-1394 Chapter 10 channel data types.

CODE
Message Data Attributes Group (S)
NAME
REFERENCE
PAGE
DATA LINK
NAME
(S-d\DLN) (9-88)
TEST ITEM (S-d\TA) (9-88)
NUMBER OF STREAMS (S-d\NS\N)
STREAM NAME (S-d\SNA-i)
MESSAGE DATA TYPE (S-d\MDT-i)
MESSAGE DATA LAYOUT (S-d\MDL-i)
MESSAGE ELEMENT SIZE (S-d\MES-i)
MESSAGE ID LOCATION (S-d\MIDL-i)
MESSAGE LENGTH (S-d\MLEN-i)
MESSAGE DELIMITER (S-d\MDEL-i)
MESSAGE DELIMITER LENGTH (S-d\MDLEN-i)
FIELD DELIMITER (S-d\FDEL-i)
DATA ORIENTATION (S-d\DO-i)
*MESSAGE CONTENT DEFINITION (9-89)
NUMBER OF MESSAGES (S-d\NMS\N-i)
MESSAGE ID (S-d\MID-i-n)
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION (S-d\MNA-i-n)
NUMBER OF FIELDS (S-d\NFLDS\N-i-n)
FIELD NUMBER (S-d\FNUM-i-n-m)
FIELD START (S-d\FPOS-i-n-m)
FIELD LENGTH (S-d\FLEN-i-n-m)
*MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION SET (9-89)
NUMBER OF MEASURANDS (S-d\MN\N-i-n)
MEASUREMENT NAME (S-d\MN-i-n-p)
PARITY (S-d\MN1-i-n-p)
PARITY TRANSFER ORDER (S-d\MN2-i-n-p)
DATA TYPE (S-d\MBFM-i-n-p)
FLOATING POINT FORMAT (S-d\MFPF-i-n-p)
DATA ORIENTATION (S-d\MDO-i-n-p)

Figure 9-9. Message Data Attributes Group (S)
(Page 1 of 2)
9-86

*MEASUREMENT LOCATION
(9-91)

NUMBER OF
MEASUREMENT
LOCATIONS
(S-d\NML\N-i-n-p)

MESSAGE FIELD
NUMBER
(S-d\MFN-i-n-p-e)
BIT MASK (S-d\MBM-i-n-p-e)
TRANSFER ORDER (S-d\MTO-i-n-p-e)
FRAGMENT POSITION (S-d\MFP-i-n-p-e)
*COMMENTS (9-92)
COMMENTS (S-d\COM)
Figure 9-9. Message Data Attributes Group (S)
(Page 2 of 2)
9-87

TABLE 9-8. MESSAGE DATA ATTRIBUTES GROUP (S)
MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
DATA LINK
NAME
32 S-d\DLN IDENTIFY THE DATA LINK NAME
CONSISTENT WITH THE RECORDER-
REPRODUCER GROUP.
TEST ITEM 16 S-d\TA TEST ITEM DESCRIPTION IN TERMS OF
IDENTIFICATION CODE THAT CONTAINS
THE DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM.
NUMBER OF
STREAMS
2 S-d\NS\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF MESSAGE DATA
STREAMS INCLUDED WITHIN THIS DATA
LINK.
STREAM NAME 32 S-d\SNA-i SPECIFY THE MESSAGE DATA STREAM
NAME. (SUBCHANNEL NAME OR SAME AS
DATA LINK NAME IF NO SUBCHANNEL.)
MESSAGE DATA
TYPE
8 S-d\MDT-i DATA TYPE ASCII OR BINARY.
MESSAGE DATA
LAYOUT
11 S-d\MDL-i DATA LAYOUT
DELIMITED (ASCII DATA TYPE ONLY)
FIXED (ASCII OR BINARY DATA TYPES)
MESSAGE
ELEMENT SIZE
2 S-d\MES-i ELEMENT SIZE IN NUMBER OF BITS.
MESSAGE ID
LOCATION
4 S-d\MIDL-i MESSAGE ID FIELD NUMBER.
MESSAGE
LENGTH
8 S-d\MLEN-i MESSAGE LENGTH IN NUMBER OF
MESSAGE ELEMENTS. (FIXED DATA
LAYOUT ONLY)
MESSAGE
DELIMITER
6 S-d\MDEL-i MESSAGE DELIMITER CRLF OR CR OR
LF OR HEX VALUE (DELIMITED LAYOUT
ONLY).
MESSAGE
DELIMITER
LENGTH
2 S-d\MDLEN-i MESSAGE DELIMITER LENGTH IN
NUMBER OF MESSAGE ELEMENTS
(DELIMITED LAYOUT ONLY).
FIELD
DELIMITER
10 S-d\FDEL-i FIELD DELIMITER , OR |, OR BLANK
OR TAB, OR HEX VALUE (DELIMITED
LAYOUT ONLY)
9-88

Table 9-8 (Continued). Message Data Attributes Group (S) Page 2 x 5
MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
NOTE: A FIELD IS A SET OF ELEMENTS DETERMINED BY THE NUMBER OF ELEMENTS OR
ELEMENTS BETWEEN FIELD DELIMITERS. A MESSAGE CONSISTS OF ONE OR MORE FIELDS,
WHICH CAN BE FIXED OR VARIABLE LENGTH.
DATA
ORIENTATION
1 S-d\DO-i DATA ORIENTATION.
LITTLE ENDIAN - L
BIG ENDIAN - B
(BINARY DATA TYPE ONLY)
MESSAGE CONTENT DEFINITION
NUMBER OF
MESSAGES
8 S-d\NMS\N-i THE NUMBER OF MESSAGES TO BE
DEFINED.
MESSAGE ID 32 S-d\MID-i-n MESSAGE ID VALUE. ASCII VALUE
IN QUOTES OR HEX VALUE.
MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION
64 S-d\MNA-i-n MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
NUMBER OF
FIELDS
4 S-d\NFLDS\N-i-n NUMBER OF FIELDS IN THE
MESSAGE.
FIELD NUMBER 4 S-d\FNUM-i-n-m SPECIFY THE FIELD NUMBER.
FIELD START 5 S-d\FPOS-i-n-m ENTER THE ELEMENT POSITION OF
THE FIELD (ONLY FOR FIXED
COLUMN MESSAGE DATA
LAYOUT)
FIELD LENGTH 5 S-d\FLEN-i-n-m ENTER THE FIELD LENGTH (ONLY
FOR FIXED MESSAGE DATA
LAYOUT). IF MESSAGE DATA TYPE
IS ASCII, ASCII STRING IN FIELD IS
CONVERTED TO SPECIFIED DATA
TYPE, i.e., FLOAT. IF MESSAGE
DATA TYPE IS BINARY, FIELD IS
CAST AS SPECIFIED DATA TYPE,
i.e., UNSIGNED, SIGNED, FLOAT,
ASCII, etc.
MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION SET
NUMBER OF
MEASURANDS
4 S-d\MN\N-i-n SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF
MEASURANDS.
MEASUREMENT
NAME
32 S-d\MN-i-n-p MEASURAND NAME.
PARITY 2 S-d\MN1-i-n-p NORMAL WORD PARITY:
EVEN-EV;
ODD - OD;
NONE - NO
9-89

MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
PARITY TRANSFER
ORDER
1 S-d\MN2-i-n-p PARITY BIT LOCATION:
LEADS WORD - L
TRAILS WORD - T
DATA TYPE 8 S-d\MBFM-i-n-p DATA TYPE.
ASCII
FLOAT
SIGNED
UNSIGNED
HEX (ASCII characters 0-9, A-F)
OCTAL (ASCII characters 0-7)
BINARY (ASCII characters 0 and 1)
IF MESSAGE DATA TYPE IS BINARY
THEN ONLY ASCII, SIGNED,
UNSIGNED, AND FLOAT ARE VALID

NOTE: FOR BINARY MESSAGES THE DATA TYPE DESCRIBES THE FORMAT OF THE RAW
INPUT DATA AS IT APPEARS IN THE STREAM. IF FLOAT IS SPECIFIED IN A BINARY
MESSAGE, THE FLOATING POINT FORMAT ATTRIBUTE DESCRIBES THE SPECIFIC
FLOATING POINT DATA TYPE. FOR ASCII MESSAGES, FLOAT, SIGNED, AND UNSIGNED
DEFINE HOW TO INTERPRET THE ASCII DATA FOR CONVERSION TO AN OUTPUT DATA
TYPE FOR NUMERIC PROCESSING.
FLOATING POINT
FORMAT
8 S-d\MFPF-i-n-p IF DATA TYPE IS FLOAT, SPECIFY
WHICH FLOATING POINT FORMAT
WILL BE USED.
IEEE 754 SINGLE PRECISION -
IEEE_32
IEEE 754 DOUBLE PRECISION
IEEE_64
MIL STD 1750A SINGLE PRECISION
1750A_32
MIL STD 1750A DOUBLE PRECISION
1750A_48
DEC SINGLE PRECISION DEC_32
DEC DOUBLE PRECISION DEC_64
DEC G DOUBLE PRECISION
DEC_64G

9-90

MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
CODE NAME PARAMETER DEFINITION
IBM SINGLE PRECISION IBM_32
IBM DOUBLE PRECISION IBM_64
TI SINGLE PRECISION TI_32
TI EXTENDED PRECISION TI_40
OTHER FORMATS ARE NOT
EXCLUDED. SEE APPENDIX O FOR
MORE INFORMATION. (ONLY FOR
BINARY MESSAGE DATA TYPE)
DATA
ORIENTATION
1 S-d\MDO-i-n-p DATA ORIENTATION.
LITTLE ENDIAN - L
BIG ENDIAN - B
(ONLY FOR BINARY MESSAGE
DATA TYPE)
NUMBER OF
MEASUREMENT
LOCATIONS
2 S-d\NML\N-i-n-p IF THIS MEASUREMENT IS
CONTAINED IN ONE FIELD, ENTER
1. IF THIS MEASUREMENT IS
FRAGMENTED, ENTER THE
NUMBER OF FRAGMENTS.
MESSAGE FIELD
NUMBER
4 S-d\MFN-i-n-p-e ENTER THE FIELD NUMBER WITHIN
A MESSAGE THAT CONTAINS THE
MEASUREMENT OR THE
FRAGMENTED MEASURAND.
BIT MASK 64 S-d\MBM-i-n-p-e BINARY STRING OF 1s AND 0s TO
IDENTIFY THE BIT LOCATIONS
THAT ARE ASSIGNED TO THIS
MEASURE-MENT IN THE FIELD
IDENTIFIED ABOVE. IF THE ENTIRE
FIELD IS USED FOR THIS
MEASUREMENT, ENTER FW.
TRANSFER ORDER 3 S-d\MTO-i-n-p-e SPECIFY IF THE START BIT IS
MOST SIGNIFICANT - MSB
LEAST SIGNIFICANT - LSB
FRAGMENT
POSITION
1 S-d\MFP-i-n-p-e A NUMBER FROM 1 TO N
SPECIFYING THE POSITION OF THIS
FRAGMENT WITHIN THE
RECONSTRUCTED BINARY FIELD. 1
CORRESPONDS TO THE MOST
9-91

NOTE: REPEAT THE ABOVE TO DESCRIBE EACH FRAGMENT OF A FRAGMENTED FIELD.
THE TRANSFER ORDER INDICATES WHETHER TO TRANSPOSE THE ORDER OF THE BIT
SEQUENCE OR NOT (LSB INDICATES TO TRANSPOSE THE BIT SEQUENCE).
COMMENTS
COMMENTS 3200 S-d\COM PROVIDE THE ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION REQUESTED OR
ANY OTHER INFORMATION
DESIRED.

9.5.7 PAM Attributes (A). This group provides the information necessary to define the
channelization and measurand definition for a PAM waveform. As with the PCM signal, the tie
to the calibration data is with the measurement name. Figure 9-10 below summarizes the types
of inputs required. Table 9-9 specifies the details required. The information that defines the
measurand for each channel is required for the channels of interest.

CODE
PAM Attributes Group (A)
NAME
REFERENCE
PAGE
DATA LINK
NAME
(A-x\DLN) (9-93)
INPUT CODE (A-x\A1)
POLARITY (A-x\A2)
SYNC PATTERN TYPE (A-x\A3)
SYNC PATTERN (OTHER) (A-x\A4)
CHANNEL RATE (A-x\A5)
CHANNELS PER FRAME (A-x\A\N)
NUMBER OF MEASURANDS (A-x\A\MN\N)
*REFERENCE CHANNELS (9-94)
0% SCALE CHANNEL NUMBER (A-x\RC1)
50% SCALE CHANNEL NUMBER (A-x\RC2)
FULL SCALE CHANNEL NUMBER (A-x\RC3)
*SUBFRAME DEFINITION (9-94)
NUMBER OF SUBFRAMES (A-x\SF\N)
SUBFRAME n LOCATION (A-x\SF1-n)
SUBFRAME n SYNCHRONIZATION (A-x\SF2-n)
SUBFRAME n SYNCHRONIZATION PATTERN (A-x\SF3-n)
*CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT (9-95)
MEASUREMENT NAME (A-x\MN1-n)
SUBCOM (A-x\MN2-n)
SUPERCOM (A-x\MN3-n)
*LOCATION (9-95)
CHANNEL NUMBER (A-x\LCW-n-s)
SUBFRAME CHANNEL NUMBER (A-x\LCN-n-s-r)
*COMMENTS
COMMENTS (A-x\COM) (9-95)
Figure 9-10. PAM Attributes Group (A).
9-92

TABLE 9-9. PAM ATTRIBUTES GROUP (A)
MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
DATA LINK
NAME
32 A-x\DLN IDENTIFY THE DATA LINK NAME.
INPUT CODE 2 A-x\A1 DEFINE THE INPUT CODE:
50% DUTY CYCLE - RZ
100% DUTY CYCLE (NRZ) - NR
POLARITY 1 A-x\A2 NORMAL - N INVERTED - I
SYNC
PATTERN
TYPE
3 A-x\A3 SPECIFY THE SYNCHRONIZATION
PATTERN
IRIG 106 - STD
OTHER - OTH
SYNC
PATTERN
(OTHER)
5 A-x\A4 DEFINE THE OTHER (NONSTANDARD)
SYNCHRONIZATION PATTERN IN TERMS
OF:
0 ZERO SCALE
H HALF SCALE
F FULL SCALE
X DONT CARE
CHANNEL
RATE
6 A-x\A5 SPECIFY THE CHANNEL RATE IN
CHANNELS PER SECOND.
CHANNELS
PER FRAME
3 A-x\A\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF CHANNELS
PER FRAME INCLUDING THE SYNC
PATTERN AND CALIBRATION
CHANNELS. MAXIMUM ALLOWED IS 128.
NUMBER OF
MEASURANDS
4 A-x\A\MN\N INDICATE THE NUMBER OF
MEASURANDS ASSOCIATED WITH THIS
DATA LINK (SOURCE).
9-93

Table 9-9 (Continued). PAM Attributes Group (A) Page 2 x 3
MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
REFERENCE CHANNELS
0% SCALE
CHANNEL
NUMBER
3 A-x\RC1 CHANNEL NUMBER OF 0% SCALE
REFERENCE. IF NOT USED, ENTER NON
(NONE).
50% SCALE
CHANNEL
NUMBER
3 A-x\RC2 CHANNEL NUMBER OF 50% SCALE
(NONE).
FULL SCALE
CHANNEL
NUMBER
3 A-x\RC3 CHANNEL NUMBER OF FULL SCALE
(NONE).
SUBFRAME DEFINITION
NUMBER OF
SUBFRAMES
1 A-x\SF\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF
SUBMULTIPLEXED CHANNELS IN THE
FRAME.
SUBFRAME n
LOCATION
3 A-x\SF1-n CHANNEL NUMBER OF THE SUBFRAME.
(REPEAT THIS ENTRY AND THE
FOLLOWING TWO ENTRIES FOR EACH
SUBFRAME AS A SET.)
SUBFRAME n
SYNCHRONIZA-
TION
3 A-x\SF2-n SPECIFY THE SYNCHRONIZATION
PATTERN FOR THE SUBFRAME:
IRIG 106 - STD
OTHER - OTH
SUBFRAME n
SYNCHRONIZA-
TION PATTERN
5 A-x\SF3-n DEFINE THE OTHER (NONSTANDARD)
SYNCHRONIZATION PATTERN IN TERMS
OF:
0 ZERO SCALE
H HALF SCALE
F FULL SCALE
X DONT CARE
OTH OTHER
9-94

Table 9-9 (Continued). PAM Attributes Group (A) Page 3 x 3
MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
MEASUREMENT
NAME
32 A-x\MN1-n GIVE THE MEASUREMENT NAME.
SUBCOM 1 A-x\MN2-n IS THIS A SUBCOMMUTATED CHANNEL?
Y OR N
SUPERCOM 1 A-x\MN3-n IS THIS A SUPERCOMMUTATED
CHANNEL? IF YES, ENTER THE NUMBER
OF POSITIONS IT OCCUPIES n.
IF NO, ENTER - N
A SUPERCOMMUTATED
SUBCOMMUTATED PARAMETER IS
ALLOWABLE AND WILL HAVE ENTRIES
IN THIS AND THE PREVIOUS RECORD.
LOCATION
CHANNEL
NUMBER
3 A-x\LCW-n-s NUMBER OF THE CHANNEL THAT
CONTAINS THIS MEASURAND. IF THIS IS
A SUBCOMMUTATED CHANNEL, ENTER
THE CHANNEL THAT CONTAINS THE
SUBCOMMUTATED CHANNEL.
SUBFRAME
CHANNEL
NUMBER
3 A-x\LCN-n-s-r CHANNEL NUMBER IN THE SUBFRAME,
IF APPROPRIATE.
COMMENTS
COMMENTS 3200 A-x\COM PROVIDE THE ADDITIONAL
9-95

9.5.8 Data Conversion Attributes (C). The Data Conversion Attributes Group includes a
definition of the method by which the raw telemetry data is to be converted to meaningful
information. The sensor calibration is contained in the group for each type of sensor that uses a
standard calibration curve or for each sensor or parameter that has a unique calibration
requirement. The calibration information can be entered in several different formats. Provision
is made to permit a test organization to convert data set entries to coefficients of an appropriate
curve fit and record the derived coefficients. Figure 9-11 shows the structure of the data
conversion attributes. Table 9-10 contains the detailed information required.

For reference purposes, the following telemetry unit definitions apply:
NOTE

PCM natural binary range as indicated by binary format entry
PAM 0 to full scale (100)
FM (Analog) lower band edge (100) to upper band edge (+100).

9-96

CODE
NAME
REFERENCE
PAGE
Data Conversion Attributes Group (C) MEASUREMENT
NAME (C-d\DCN) (9-99)
*TRANSDUCER INFORMATION (9-99)
TYPE (C-d\TRD1)
MODEL NUMBER (C-d\TRD2)
SERIAL NUMBER (C-d\TRD3)
SECURITY CLASSIFICATION (C-d\TRD4)
ORIGINATION DATE (C-d\TRD5)
REVISION NUMBER (C-d\TRD6)
ORIENTATION (C-d\TRD7)
*POINT OF CONTACT (9-99)
NAME (C-d\POC1)
AGENCY (C-d\POC2)
ADDRESS (C-d\POC3)
TELEPHONE (C-d\POC4)
*MEASURAND (9-100)
DESCRIPTION (C-d\MN1)
MEASUREMENT ALIAS (C-d\MNA)
EXCITATION VOLTAGE (C-d\MN2)
ENGINEERING UNITS (C-d\MN3)
LINK TYPE (C-d\MN4)
*TELEMETRY VALUE DEFINITION (9-100)
BINARY FORMAT (C-d\BFM)
*FLOATING POINT
FLOATING POINT FORMAT (C-d\FPF)
*BIT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF BITS (C-d\BWT\N)
BIT NUMBER (C-d\BWTB-n)
BIT WEIGHT VALUE (C-d\BWTV-n)
*INFLIGHT CALIBRATION (9-101)
NUMBER OF POINTS (C-d\MC\N)
STIMULUS (C-d\MC1-n)
TELEMETRY VALUE (C-d\MC2-n)
DATA VALUE (C-d\MC3-n)
*AMBIENT VALUE (9-102)
NUMBER OF AMBIENT CONDITIONS (C-d\MA\N)
STIMULUS (C-d\MA1-n)
TELEMETRY VALUE (C-d\MA2-n)
DATA VALUE (C-d\MA3-n)
*OTHER INFORMATION (9-102)
HIGH MEASUREMENT VALUE (C-d\MOT1)
LOW MEASUREMENT VALUE (C-d\MOT2)
HIGH ALERT LIMIT VALUE (C-d\MOT3)
LOW ALERT LIMIT VALUE (C-d\MOT4)
HIGH WARNING LIMIT VALUE (C-d\MOT5)
LOW WARNING LIMIT VALUE (C-d\MOT6)
SAMPLE RATE (C-d\SR)

Figure 9-11. Data Conversion Attributes Group (C). (Page 1 of 2)
9-97

*DATA CONVERSION (9-103)
DATE AND TIME RELEASED (C-d\CRT)
CONVERSION TYPE (C-d\DCT)
*ENGINEERING UNITS CONVERSION (9-104)
*PAIR SETS (9-104)
OR NUMBER OF SETS (C-d\PS\N)
APPLICATION (C-d\PS1)
ORDER OF FIT (C-d\PS2)
TELEMETRY VALUE (C-d\PS3-n)
ENGINEERING UNITS VALUE (C-d\PS4-n)
*COEFFICIENTS (9-104)
OR ORDER OF CURVE FIT (C-d\CO\N)
DERIVED FROM PAIR SET (C-d\CO1) (9-104)
COEFFICIENT (0) (C-d\CO)
N-TH COEFFICIENT (C-d\CO-n)
*COEFFICIENTS (NEGATIVE POWERS OF X)
OR ORDER (C-d\NPC\N)
DERIVED FROM PAIR SET (C-d\NPC1)
COEFFICIENT (0) (C-d\NPC)
N-TH COEFFICIENT (C-d\NPC-n)
*OTHER (9-105)
OR
DEFINITION OF OTHER DATA
CONVERSION
(C-d\OTH)
*DERIVED PARAMETER (9-106)
OR ALGORITHM TYPE (C-d\DPAT)
ALGORITHM (C-d\DPA)
TRIGGER MEASURAND (C-d\DPTM)
NUMBER OF OCCURRENCES (C-d\DPNO)
NUMBER OF INPUT MEASURANDS (C-d\DP\N)
MEASURAND #N (C-d\DP-n)
NUMBER OF INPUT CONSTANTS (C-d\DPC\N)
CONSTANT #N (C-d\DPC-n)
*DISCRETE (9-107)
OR NUMBER OF EVENTS (C-d\DIC\N)
NUMBER OF INDICATORS (C-d\DICI\N)
CONVERSION DATA (C-d\DICC-n)
PARAMETER EVENT DEFINITION (C-d\DICP-n)
* PCM TIME (9-107)
OR PCM TIME WORD FORMAT (C-d\PTM)
* 1553 TIME (9-107)
OR 1553 TIME WORD FORMAT (C-d\BTM)
*DIGITAL VOICE (9-108)
ENCODING METHOD (C-d\VOI\E)
OR DESCRIPTION (C-d\VOI\D)
*DIGITAL VIDEO (9-108)
ENCODING METHOD (C-d\VID\E)
OR DESCRIPTION (C-d\VID\D)
*COMMENTS
COMMENTS (C-d\COM) (9-108)

Figure 9-11. Data Conversion Attributes Group (C). (Page 2 of 2)
9-98

TABLE 9-10. DATA CONVERSION ATTRIBUTES GROUP (C)
MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
MEASUREMENT
NAME
32 C-d\DCN GIVE THE MEASUREMENT NAME.
TRANSDUCER INFORMATION
TYPE 32 C-d\TRD1 TYPE OF SENSOR, IF APPROPRIATE
MODEL NUMBER 32 C-d\TRD2 IF APPROPRIATE
SERIAL NUMBER 32 C-d\TRD3 IF APPLICABLE
SECURITY
CLASSIFICATION
2 C-d\TRD4 ENTER THE SECURITY CLASSIFICATION OF
THIS MEASURAND.
UNCLASSIFIED - U
CONFIDENTIAL - C
SECRET - S
TOP SECRET - T
OTHER - O
APPEND THE FOLLOWING:
IF RECEIVED TELEMETRY SIGNAL
(COUNTS) IS CLASSIFIED, ADD R.
IF EXPRESSED IN ENGINEERING UNITS, THE
MEASURAND VALUE IS CLASSIFIED, ADD
E. IF BOTH ARE CLASSIFIED, ADD B.
ORIGINATION
DATE
10 C-d\TRD5 DATE OF ORIGINATION OF THIS DATA FILE.
DD DAY MM MONTH
REVISION
NUMBER
4 C-d\TRD6 SPECIFY THE REVISION NUMBER OF THE
DATA PROVIDED.
ORIENTATION 32 C-d\TRD7 DESCRIBE THE PHYSICAL ORIENTATION OF
THE SENSOR.
POINT OF
CONTACT:
NAME
AGENCY
ADDRESS
TELEPHONE

24
48
48
20

C-d\POC1
C-d\POC2
C-d\POC3
C-d\POC4
POINT OF CONTACT WITH THE
ORGANIZATION THAT PROVIDED THE
CALIBRATION DATA
9-99

Table 9-10 (Continued). Data Conversion Attributes Group (C) Page 2 x 10
MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
MEASURAND
DESCRIPTION 64 C-d\MN1 DESCRIBE THE PARAMETER BEING
MEASURED.
MEASUREMEN
T ALIAS
32 C-d\MNA ALTERNATE MEASURAND NAME
EXCITATION
VOLTAGE
10 C-d\MN2 SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE, IN VOLTS
ENGINEERING
UNITS
16 C-d\MN3 DEFINE THE ENGINEERING UNITS
APPLICABLE TO THE OUTPUT DATA.
LINK TYPE 3 C-d\MN4 DEFINE THE SOURCE DATA LINK TYPE:
FM (ANALOG) - ANA PCM - PCM
PAM - PAM OTHER - OTH
TELEMETRY VALUE DEFINITION
BINARY 3
FORMAT
C-d\BFM

FORMAT OF THE BINARY INFORMATION:
INTEGER - INT
UNSIGNED BINARY - UNS
SIGN AND MAGNITUDE BINARY (+=0) SIG
SIGN AND MAGNITUDE BINARY (+=1) SIM
ONES COMPLEMENT - ONE
TWOS COMPLEMENT - TWO
OFFSET BINARY - OFF
FLOATING POINT - FPT
BINARY CODED DECIMAL -BCD
BIT WEIGHT BWT
OTHER - OTH, DEFINE IN COMMENTS.
FLOATING POINT
FLOATING
POINT FORMAT
8 C-d\FPF

IF BINARY FORMAT IS FPT, SPECIFY WHICH
FLOATING POINT FORMAT WILL BE USED.

IEEE 754 SINGLE PRECISION - IEEE_32
IEEE 754 DOUBLE PRECISION IEEE_64
MIL STD 1750A SINGLE PRECISION 1750A_32
9-100

MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
MIL STD 1750A DOUBLE PRECISION 1750A_48
DEC SINGLE PRECISION DEC_32
DEC DOUBLE PRECISION DEC_64
DEC G DOUBLE PRECISION DEC_64G
IBM SINGLE PRECISION IBM_32
IBM DOUBLE PRECISION IBM_64
TI SINGLE PRECISION TI_32
TI EXTENDED PRECISION TI_40

OTHER FORMATS ARE NOT EXCLUDED.
SEE APPENDIX O FOR MORE INFORMATION.
BIT WEIGHT
NUMBER OF
BITS
2 C-d\BWT\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF BITS THAT WILL
HAVE A WEIGHTED VALUE ASSIGNED
BIT NUMBER 2 C-d\BWTB-n BIT NUMBER, AS DEFINED IN CHAPTER 4,
PARAGRAPH 4.3.1.3 (MSB IS BIT 1)
BIT WEIGHT
VALUE
32 C-d\BWTV-n

NUMERICAL VALUE INDICATED BY EACH
BIT. SCIENTIFIC NOTATION MAY BE USED.
TO SPECIFY THE SIGN BIT, ENTER S.
INFLIGHT CALIBRATION
NUMBER OF
POINTS
1 C-d\MC\N IS INFLIGHT CALIBRATION REQUIRED?
N FOR NO OR A NUMBER BETWEEN 1 AND 5,
IF IT IS REQUIRED. A MAXIMUM OF FIVE
CALIBRATION POINTS MAY BE INCLUDED.
STIMULUS 32 C-d\MC1-n
PROVIDE THE STIMULUS FOR THIS
CALIBRATION POINT.
TELEMETRY
VALUE
16 C-d\MC2-n TELEMETRY UNITS VALUE
DATA VALUE 32 C-d\MC3-n ENGINEERING UNITS VALUE,
SCIENTIFIC NOTATION MAY BE USED.
NOTE: THE ABOVE SET OF THREE ENTRIES MUST BE REPEATED FOR EACH INFLIGHT
CALIBRATION POINT.
9-101

MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
AMBIENT VALUE
NUMBER OF
AMBIENT
CONDITIONS
1 C-d\MA\N NUMBER OF STATIC OR SIMULATED
CONDITIONS
STIMULUS 32 C-d\MA1-n DESCRIPTION OF THE STATIC ENVIRON-
MENT IN WHICH A NONTEST STIMULUS OR
SIMULATOR IS THE DATA SOURCE
TELEMETRY
VALUE
16 C-d\MA2-n TELEMETRY UNITS VALUE FOR THE STATIC
STIMULUS
DATA VALUE 32 C-d\MA3-n ENGINEERING UNITS VALUE FOR THE
STATIC OR SIMULATED CONDITION.
OTHER INFORMATION
HIGH 32
MEASUREMENT
VALUE
C-d\MOT1 HIGHEST ENGINEERING UNIT VALUE
DEFINED BY THE CALIBRATION DATA,
LOW
MEASUREMENT
VALUE
32 C-d\MOT2 LOWEST ENGINEERING UNIT VALUE
DEFINED IN THE CALIBRATION DATA,
HIGH ALERT
LIMIT VALUE
32 C-d\MOT3 HIGHEST ENGINEERING UNIT VALUE
EXPECTED OR SAFE OPERATING VALUE OF
THE PARAMETER (RED), SCIENTIFIC
LOW ALERT
LIMIT VALUE
THE PARAMETER (RED), SCIENTIFIC
HIGH
WARNING
LIMIT VALUE
32 C-d\MOT5 HIGHEST ENGINEERING UNIT VALUE
THE PARAMETER (YELLOW), SCIENTIFIC
9-102

MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
LOW WARNING
LIMIT VALUE
THE PARAMETER (YELLOW), SCIENTIFIC
SAMPLE RATE 6 C-d\SR ENTER THE SAMPLE RATE IN TERMS OF
SAMPLES/SECOND.
DATA CONVERSION
DATE AND
TIME
RELEASED
19 C-d\CRT DATE AND TIME CALIBRATION WAS
RELEASED:
DD DAY MM MONTH
YYYY YEAR HH HOUR
MI MINUTE SS SECOND
CONVERSION
TYPE
3 C-d\DCT

DEFINE THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE
DATA CONVERSION:
NONE - NON
ENGINEERING UNITS:
PAIR SETS - PRS
COEFFICIENTS - COE
COEFFICIENTS (NEGATIVE POWERS OF X)NPC
DERIVED - DER
DISCRETE - DIS
PCM TIME - PTM
1553 TIME - BTM
DIGITAL VOICE - VOI
DIGITAL VIDEO - VID
SPECIAL PROCESSING - SP (ENTER IN
COMMENTS RECORD.)
OTHER - OTH
9-103

MAXIMUM
FIELD SIZE
ENGINEERING UNITS CONVERSION
PAIR SETS
NUMBER OF
SETS
2 C-d\PS\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF PAIR SETS
PROVIDED, n.
APPLICATION 1 C-d\PS1 ARE THE PAIR SETS TO BE USED TO DEFINE A
POLYNOMINAL CURVE FIT? Y (YES) OR N
(NO). IF THE ANSWER IS NO, THEN THE PAIR
SETS ARE TO BE USED AS A TABLE LOOKUP
WITH LINEAR INTERPOLATION BETWEEN
THE DEFINED POINTS.
ORDER OF FIT 2 C-d\PS2 SPECIFY THE ORDER OF THE CURVE FIT TO
BE PERFORMED, m. AT LEAST 2 PAIR SETS
MUST BE PROVIDED, AND A MAXIMUM OF 32
PAIR SETS MAY BE INCLUDED. TWELVE OR
MORE PAIR SETS ARE RECOMMENDED FOR A
FIFTH ORDER FIT.
TELEMETRY
VALUE
16 C-d\PS3-n TELEMETRY UNITS VALUE
ENGINEERING
UNITS VALUE
32 C-d\PS4-n ENGINEERING UNITS VALUE,
NOTE: REPEAT THE ABOVE FOR THE n PAIR SETS.
COEFFICIENTS
ORDER OF
CURVE FIT
2 C-d\CO\N SPECIFY THE ORDER OF THE POLYNOMINAL
CURVE FIT, n.
DERIVED FROM
PAIR SET
1 C-d\CO1 WERE THE COEFFICIENTS DERIVED FROM
THE PAIR SET CALIBRATION DATA
PROVIDED (Y OR N)? IF YES, PROVIDE A
POINT OF CONTACT IN THE COMMENTS
RECORD.
COEFFICIENT
(0)
32 C-d\CO VALUE OF THE ZERO ORDER TERM (OFFSET),
9-104

MAXIMUM
FIELD
SIZE
CODE
NAME
PARAMETER DEFINITION
N-TH
COEFFICIENT
32 C-d\CO-n VALUE OF THE COEFFICIENT OF THE N-TH
POWER OF X (FIRST ORDER COEFFICIENT IS
THE EQUIVALENT OF BIT WEIGHT).
NOTE: REPEAT UNTIL ALL N+1 COEFFICIENTS ARE DEFINED.
COEFFICIENTS (NEGATIVE POWERS OF X)
ORDER 2 C-d\NPC\N SPECIFY THE ORDER OF NEGATIVE POWER
COEFFICIENTS, n.
DERIVED FROM
PAIR SET
1 C-d\NPC1 WERE THE COEFFICIENTS DERIVED FROM
THE PAIR SET CALIBRATION DATA
PROVIDED (Y OR N)? IF YES, PROVIDE A
POINT OF CONTACT IN THE COMMENTS
RECORD.
COEFFICIENT
(0)
32 C-d\NPC VALUE OF THE ZERO ORDER TERM (OFFSET),
N-TH
COEFFICIENT
32 C-d\NPC-n VALUE OF THE COEFFICIENT OF THE
NEGATIVE N-TH POWER OF X . SCIENTIFIC
NOTE: REPEAT UNTIL ALL N+1 COEFFICIENTS ARE DEFINED. THIS SECTION DESCRIBES
THE CONVERSION EQUATION Y=C0 + C1*(1/X) + C2*(1/X^2) + + Cn*(1/X^n), WHERE C0, C1,
C2,,Cn ARE THE COEFFICIENTS, X IS THE TELEMETRY VALUE, AND Y IS THE RESULTING
EU VALUE.
OTHER
DEFINITION OF
OTHER DATA
CONVERSION
1000 C-d\OTH DEFINE OTHER DATA CONVERSION
TECHNIQUE OR SPECIAL PROCESSING
REQUIREMENT.
9-105

MAXIMUM
FIELD
SIZE
DERIVED PARAMETER
ALGORITHM
TYPE
1 C-d\DPAT SPECIFY WHETHER THE ALGORITHM WILL
BE GIVEN (IN C-d\DPA) AS:
NAME OF ALGORITHM N
ALGORITHM A
SEE APPENDIX P FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
ALGORITHM 240 C-d\DPA DEFINE THE ALGORITHM TO BE USED IN
DERIVING THE PARAMETER. SEE APPENDIX P
FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
TRIGGER
MEASURAND
32 C-d\DPTM SPECIFY THE NAME OF THE INPUT
MEASURAND THAT TRIGGERS THE
CALCULATION OF THE DERIVED
PARAMETER
NUMBER OF
OCCURRENCES
2 C-d\DPNO SPECIFY HOW MANY TIMES THE TRIGGER
MEASURAND MUST OCCUR BEFORE THE
CALCULATION IS DONE. DEFAULT IS 1.
NUMBER OF
INPUT
MEASURANDS
2 C-d\DP\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF INPUT
MEASURANDS USED TO DERIVE THIS
PARAMETER.
MEASURAND
#N
32 C-d\DP-n SPECIFY THE NAME OF THE N-TH INPUT
MEASURAND.
NOTE: CONTINUE UNTIL ALL N MEASURANDS ARE DEFINED.
NUMBER OF
INPUT
2
CONSTANTS
C-d\DPC\N SPECIFY THE NUMBER OF INPUT CONSTANTS
USED TO DERIVE THIS PARAMETER.
CONSTANT #N 32 C-d\DPC-n SPECIFY THE VALUE FOR THE N-TH
CONSTANT. SCIENTIFIC NOTATION MAY BE
USED.
NOTE: CONTINUE UNTIL ALL N CONSTANTS ARE DEFINED.
9-106

MAXIMUM
FIELD
SIZE
DISCRETE
NUMBER OF
EVENTS
2 C-d\DIC\N HOW MANY EVENTS ARE ASSOCIATED WITH
THIS DISCRETE FIELD, n?
NUMBER OF
INDICATORS
2 C-d\DICI\N NUMBER OF INDICATORS:
FOR A PCM SYSTEM, PROVIDE THE NUMBER
OF BITS USED FOR THIS DISCRETE SET. FOR
A PAM OR ANALOG CHANNEL, PROVIDE THE
NUMBER OF LEVELS USED TO DEFINE THIS
DISCRETE SET.
CONVERSION
DATA
16 C-d\DICC-n TELEMETRY VALUE, COUNTS FOR PCM,
PERCENT OF FULL SCALE FOR PAM OR
ANALOG.
PARAMETER
EVENT
DEFINITION
240 C-d\DICP-n DEFINE THE EVENT FOR THE BIT OR BIT
FIELD IN A WORD THAT CORRESPONDS TO A
DISCRETE EVENT OR THE PERCENT FULL
SCALE VALUE SUCH AS SWITCH ON OR OFF.
NOTE: CONTINUE TO DEFINE THE EVENTS FOR EACH BIT PATTERN OR VALUE OF THE
DISCRETE MEASURAND.
PCM TIME
PCM TIME
WORD FORMAT
1

C-d\PTM SPECIFY THE PCM TIME WORD FORMAT
USED, AS DEFINED IN CHAPTER 4 (PARA-
GRAPH 4.7).
HIGH ORDER TIME - H
LOW ORDER TIME - L
MICROSECOND TIME - M
1553 TIME
1553 TIME
WORD FORMAT
1

C-d\BTM SPECIFY THE 1553 TIME WORD FORMAT
USED, AS DEFINED IN CHAPTER 4
(PARAGRAPH 4.7) AND CHAPTER 8
(PARAGRAPH 8.3)
HIGH ORDER TIME - H
LOW ORDER TIME - L
MICROSECOND TIME - M
RESPONSE TIME - R
9-107

MAXIMUM
FIELD
SIZE
DIGITAL VOICE
ENCODING
METHOD
4 C-d\VOI\E SPECIFY THE VOICE ENCODING METHOD
USED: CVSD - CVSD OTHER - OTHR
DESCRIPTION 640 C-d\VOI\D SPECIFY THE DECODING ALGORITHM TO
BE USED.
DIGITAL VIDEO
ENCODING
METHOD
64 C-d\VID\E SPECIFY THE VIDEO ENCODING METHOD
USED.
DESCRIPTION 640 C-d\VID\D SPECIFY THE DECODING ALGORITHM TO
BE USED.
COMMENTS
COMMENTS 3200 C-d\COM PROVIDE THE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
REQUESTED OR ANY OTHER
INFORMATION DESIRED.

9.5.9 Airborne Hardware Attributes (H). The Airborne Hardware Attributes Group defines the
specific configuration of airborne instrumentation hardware in use on the item under test. This
group allows the same TMATS file to describe the airborne hardware as well as the telemetry
attributes.

Specific information on the structure and definition of airborne hardware attributes is not
included in this standard. There are far too many hardware systems to try to define them all in
one group. The main purpose of identifying this group is to reserve the H designation for those
instrumentation organizations that choose to use the TMATS standard in this way.

The only H group attributes defined in this standard are the following:

a. Test Item (code name H\TA) - specifies the item under test and ties the H group to the
G group.
b. Airborne System Type (code name H\ST-n) - identifies the airborne systems being
described in the current file and determines how the rest of the attributes in
the H group will be interpreted.

9-108

For anyone wishing to define an H group, it is strongly recommended that
the conventions laid out in this standard be followed. The resultant
document should maintain the look and feel of this standard for
consistency.

9.5.10 Vendor Specific Attributes (V). The Vendor Specific Attributes Group provides
information that is specific to a vendor. This group allows the TMATS file to include
information about a particular vendors equipment in use during a test. Detailed information
about specific vendors equipment is not included in this standard.

The only V-group attributes defined in this standard are the following:

a. Data Source ID (code name V-x\ID) - specifies the Data Source ID consistent with
the General Information Group and ties the V-group to the G group.
b. Vendor Name (code name V-x\VN) - a three-character acronym that identifies the
specific vendor and determines how the rest of the attributes in the V group are
interpreted.

All other code names for vendor specific attributes will have the form:

V-x\acr\attribute-string

Where:

acr - is the three-character acronym identifying a specific vendor.
attribute-string - is any attribute that applies to this vendor.

For anyone wishing to define a V group, it is strongly recommended that
the conventions laid out in this standard be followed. The resultant
document should maintain the look and feel of this standard for
consistency.

9.6 Data Display Standard: Data Display Markup Language (DDML)
The standard format, DDML, has been developed to describe commonly used data
displays. This DDML standard exists only as an XML schema; it does not exist in the TMATS
code name format described in paragraph 9.5. The DDML schema can be found at
(ddml31.xsd). The following paragraphs explain the purpose, objectives, and structure of
DDML, and define the global elements in the schema.

9-109

9.6.1 DDML Purpose and Objectives. The purpose of DDML is to serve as the neutral
interchange language between data display languages supported by different vendors. Built on
the eXtensible Markup Language (XML), DDML has been designed with the following
objectives in mind:

a. To include a standard terminology for describing data display components.
b. To be robust and highly expressive in order to accommodate any data display
language.
c. To be highly unified and not a loose grouping of vendor formats.

9.6.2 DDML Layered Structure. DDML is built off of a layered structure as shown on the left
of Figure 9-12 below. This structure is parallel to a typical software layered architecture
composed of graphics resources, visualization and user interfaces, information management, and
persistence modules as shown on the right side of Figure 9-12.

DDML Layers
Typical Software Layer
(e.g., Model-View
Architecture)

Graphics Resources
(Positions, Color, etc.)

Graphics Resources
(Controls, Color, etc.)

Dynamics
User Interfaces
(Rendering, Display, etc.)

Data Variables and
Derived Data

Information Management
(Objects, Variables, etc.)

Data Sources

Persistence
(Load, Save, etc.)

Figure 9-12. Layered Structure of DDML.

9-110

Parallel to the typical software modules, DDML is also composed of layers as shown in
Figure 9-12 and as described below:

a. Graphics Resources. This layer is similar to graphics resources of a typical
software tool. In DDML this layer includes the visual components of a data display
system such as sliders, plots, and strip charts as well as low-level graphic elements
such as lines, rectangles, etc. Basic graphical shapes are modeled using a World
Wide Web Consortium (W3C) recommended format called Scalable Vector
Graphics (SVG).
b. Dynamics. The dynamics layer handles the behavior of an object. It manages the
rules and the variable instances attached to an object.
c. Data Variables. Data variables are the links between the objects and the data sources.
Data variables can be atomic or derived. Derived variables may use other derived or
atomic variables in a mathematical expression.
d. Data Sources. The last layer of the DDML architecture is the Data Sources layer.
This layer handles various data sources such as text files, Open Database
Connectivity (ODBC), network ports, and ports on data acquisition cards.

At each layer, the parameters used to describe each DDML element are divided into two
groups: DDML sub-elements and custom parameters. DDML sub-elements make up the most
common and most necessary pieces of information needed to represent each element. They are
stored as named sub-elements in DDML. Custom parameters are used to store any vendor-
specific information that is not explicitly defined as a DDML sub-element. These parameters are
stored as DDML 'param' elements.

9.6.3 DDML Global Element Glossary. The DDML element names and descriptions can be
seen at Table 9-11.
9-111

TABLE 9-11. DDML GLOBAL ELEMENT GLOSSARY
Element Name Description
mathml:apply Defined in the mathml schema and used as a sub-element of variable in
DDML, defines a variable as a function of other variables.
axis A sub-element of a display object, represents an axis of any chart-type
display object. It has a sub-element axisType that can be one of two
values: VALUE or TIME. Other sub-elements allow the setting of
min and max values, colors, grid line properties, etc.
barchart A display object that shows one or more variables as vertical or
horizontal bars whose lengths correspond to the values.
button A display object that consists of an image or icon that, when clicked,
can assign a value to a variable.
color A commonly-used sub-element of many DDML elements, it simply
specifies the color of its parent object. All colors in DDML are stored
as base-10 integers that are encoded as 0xRRGGBB.
comparisonOperator Used in rules, defines the comparison between two values. Can be
either GT (greater-than), LT (less-than), GTE (greater-than-or-equal),
LTE (less-than-or-equal), EQ (equal), or NEQ (not equal).
custom_parameters A sub-element of a display object, serves as the parent element of a
group of param elements that specify all of the custom (vendor-
specific) parameters for a particular display object.
data_source A pool-level data source that is available for use by any of the
variables in the variable pool.
data_source_pool Contains data_source child elements representing all of the data
sources used by the various objects in the DDML file. Information
about all data sources (files, db connections, etc.) is kept in the data
source pool.
ddml Root element of a DDML file describing a collection of data displays.
dial A display object that consists of a circular or arc value axis and some
sort of marker or needle that points to the current value along this axis.
Example: a gauge or a compass.
display_objects A sub-element of a model, serves as a container for all of the display
objects in that model.
9-112

Table 9-11 (Continued). DDML Global Element Glossary Page 2 x 4
dynamics A set of variable uses and rules used to define the dynamic behavior of
a display object. The dynamicType sub-element describes the
dynamic behavior while the variable_use and rules child elements
define how variable values affect that behavior. A dynamicType of
'builtin' is used for display objects that have implicit dynamic behavior,
such as charts and sliders. Other possible values of dynamicType
include: visibility, text, subdrawing, scale, scaleY, scaleX, rotate,
relativeMoveY, relativeMoveX, pathMove, lineWidth, lineStyle,
foregroundColor, fillUp, fillRight, fillLeft, fillDown, fillEffect,
curveType, blink, backgroundColor, arcDirection, absoluteMoveX,
absoluteMoveY, fillColor, edgeColor.
else Part of a rule, specifies what to do if the criteria specified in the if
element are false. The else element can be the parent of one or more
additional rules, or can just specify a value or variable reference.
frequencyplot A display object that is a chart in the frequency domain.
frequencyresponse A display object that is a graph consisting of two value axes
(frequency and magnitude) plotted against a single frequency axis.
grid A table. The grid element is used to group several display objects
(including other grids) together in a tabular layout. Each display sub-
objects location in the grid is specified with its gridRow and
gridColumn elements.
hud A display object that resembles a typical aircraft heads-up display that
consists of three vertical axes (typically used for velocity, pitch, and
altitude) and one horizontal axis (typically for heading). The center
vertical axis rotates according to a fifth variable (typically roll). The
variable_uses in the dynamics section are applied in this order: center
vertical axis rotation (roll), center vertical axis (pitch), horizontal axis
(heading), right vertical axis (altitude), left vertical axis (velocity).
if Part of a rule, specifies a comparison between the current variable and
some value.
map An area of a model that displays longitude/latitude map info. The
coordinates of all child objects of a map are in decimal
latitude/longitude values. For distance attributes (e.g. a circles
radius), degrees latitude are used as the measurement unit.
model A container for data displays. Typically interpreted as a single screen
or page of display objects. The model object defines its own
coordinate system with the minX, minY, maxX, maxY, xDirection and
yDirection sub-elements. All sub-objects of a model are specified in
coordinates that conform to the system defined by the model.
9-113

object A generic display object. An 'object' can be any display object not
specified in the DDML definition, or can be used as the top-level
element in a group of sub-objects.
param Used to specify any parameter of a DDML element that is not
explicitly specified elsewhere in the schema. These are commonly
referred to as "custom parameters" and are mostly used for vendor-
specific information.
piechart A circular display object that shows the values of multiple variables as
a percentage slice of their sum.
project A collection of models.
radialchart A display object that represents variable values as distances outward
from a central point. A radial chart consists of two axes: a linear value
axis and a circular axis. The circular axis can be either a time axis or a
value axis. The type of the circular axis is controlled by its axisType
sub-element, which can have a value of either 'TIME' or 'VALUE'. If
the value is 'VALUE', then a series of xyPair objects will specify how
the variables are paired. In each of these xyPairs, the X-value
corresponds to the value in the circular axis direction, and the Y-value
corresponds to the value in the radial axis direction.
rule Specifies a change in a property (e.g., color, visibility) when a variable
reaches a certain value or range of values. The ranges of values and
resulting property values are specified with if, then, and else child
elements.
rules The parent element of a group of rule elements
slider A display object that consists of some kind of indicator or icon that
slides along a single value axis. A slider can be vertical or horizontal.
Example: A 'gauge' in Range View or a 'fader' in Data Views.
stripchart A display object that is essentially a line graph that plots values vs.
time along a scrolling "paper" grid. A stripchart can be vertical or
horizontal, and can scroll in any of the four directions (up, down, left,
right). This is controlled by the scrollDirection sub-element. The
scrollDirection element refers to the direction that the paper or
background scrolls. For example, in a DataViews horizontal strip
chart, the paper scrolls to the left while new values are plotted at the
right edge of the graph. Thus, the scrollDirection is 'left'.
9-114

9-115

svg:svg Stands for Scalable Vector Graphics. SVG is a World Wide Web
Consortium (W3C) Recommendation and is defined in its own
schema. In DDML, the <svg> element is used as a sub-element of
<object> to define a display object in terms of the basic shapes that it
is composed of.
textual A display object used for representing text and labels, including both
static and dynamic text (such as annunciators). If the text is dynamic,
the valuePosition sub-element specifies where the dynamic value is in
relation to the static label. Use valuePosition='center' if there is no
label. The valueFormat sub-element is a C printf-style format string
that specifies the format of the dynamic value. For example
valueFormat="%4.2f" indicates that the value should be output as a
floating-point value with a maximum width of 4 and with 2 decimal
places.
then Part of a rule, the then element specifies the value to set the attribute to
if the criteria specified in the if element is true. The then element can
specify either the desired value, or a reference to a variable containing
the desired value.
variable A pool-level data variable that is available for use by any of the display
objects in the DDML file.
variable_pool Contains variable child elements representing all of the variables used
by the various display objects in the DDML file.
variable_use A child of the dynamics element, variable_use is used to specify which
variable from the variable pool is used. The pool_ref attribute must
refer to the id attribute of a variable element from the variable_pool.
xychart A display object that is a line or xy scatter plot of variables in the
y axis vs. other variables in the x axis. The x,y variable pairs are
specified with the xyPair sub-elements.
xyPair A sub-element of certain display objects, it describes how a charts
variable_use items are paired. Each xVar and yVar sub-element must
refer to the id of a variable_use element in the display objects
dynamics section.

RCC Document 106-09, Telemetry Standard, Chapter 10, April 2009
CHAPTER 10
DIGITAL RECORDING STANDARD
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHANGES TO THIS EDITION OF CHAPTER 10..................................................................... iv
LIST OF FIGURES ........................................................................................................................ v
LIST OF TABLES....................................................................................................................... viii
ACRONYMS................................................................................................................................. ix
10.1 General.......................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 Interface Levels............................................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Definitions/Acronyms .................................................................................................. 10-4
10.3 Operational Requirements.......................................................................................... 10-7
10.3.1 Recorder Compliancy Requirements .............................................................. 10-7
10.3.2 Required Configuration .................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.4 Internal System Management ......................................................................... 10-9
10.3.5 Data Download ............................................................................................... 10-9
10.3.6 IEEE-1394b Interface to Recorder Media ...................................................... 10-9
10.3.7 Required File Tables Entries........................................................................... 10-9
10.3.8 Recorder Configuration File ......................................................................... 10-10
10.4 Data Download and Electrical Interface.................................................................. 10-13
10.4.1 Fibre Channel (FC) Recorder Download Interface....................................... 10-14
10.4.2 IEEE-1394B Recorder Interface................................................................... 10-16
10.4.3 Ethernet Recorder Interface .......................................................................... 10-17
10.5 Interface File Structure Definitions ......................................................................... 10-17
10.5.1 Data Organization......................................................................................... 10-18
10.5.2 Directory Definition...................................................................................... 10-19
10.5.3 Data Definitions............................................................................................ 10-23
10.6 Data Format Definition ............................................................................................. 10-24
10.6.1 Common Packet Elements ............................................................................ 10-24
10.6.2 PCM Data Packets ........................................................................................ 10-35
10.6.3 Time Data Packets ........................................................................................ 10-43
10.6.4 MIL-STD-1553. ............................................................................................ 10-46
10.6.5 Analog Data Packets..................................................................................... 10-56
10.6.6 Discrete Data Packets ................................................................................... 10-63
10.6.7 Computer Generated Data Packets ............................................................... 10-66
10.6.8 ARINC-429 Data Packets............................................................................. 10-80
10.6.9 Message Data Packets................................................................................... 10-82

10.6.10 Video Packets................................................................................................ 10-85
10.6.11 Image Packets ............................................................................................... 10-98
10.6.12 UART Data Packets. ................................................................................... 10-102
10.6.13 IEEE-1394 Data Packets............................................................................. 10-105
10.6.14 Parallel Data Packets................................................................................... 10-112
10.6.15 Ethernet Data Packets ................................................................................. 10-114
10.7 Recorder Control and Status .................................................................................. 10-117
10.7.1 Recorder Control......................................................................................... 10-117
10.7.2 Communication Ports.................................................................................. 10-118
10.7.3 RS-232/422 Port.......................................................................................... 10-118
10.7.4 Commands .................................................................................................. 10-118
10.7.5 Status Requests ........................................................................................... 10-118
10.7.6 Serial Status ................................................................................................ 10-118
10.7.7 Default Interface ......................................................................................... 10-118
10.7.8 Serial Commands ........................................................................................ 10-118
10.7.9 Serial Commands ........................................................................................ 10-119
10.7.10 Required Discrete Control Functions.......................................................... 10-120
10.7.11 Voltage........................................................................................................ 10-121
10.7.12 Status Query................................................................................................ 10-121
10.7.13 Erase Command.......................................................................................... 10-121
10.7.14 Declassify Command.................................................................................. 10-121
10.7.15 Command Enable........................................................................................ 10-121
10.8 Declassification......................................................................................................... 10-122
10.8.1 Approach..................................................................................................... 10-122
10.8.2 Algorithm.................................................................................................... 10-122
10.9 IEEE 1394B Interface to Recorder Media............................................................. 10-124
10.9.1 Media Time Synchronization...................................................................... 10-124
10.9.2 Physical and Signaling................................................................................ 10-125
10.9.3 Removable Media Communication ............................................................ 10-125
10.9.4 Transport of Serial Commands ................................................................... 10-125
10.9.5 Mandated IEEE-1394b Interface Connector............................................... 10-125
10.9.6 Real Time Clock ......................................................................................... 10-126
10.9.7 Mandatory Commands for Processor Devices............................................ 10-126
10.9.8 Time Setting Requirements......................................................................... 10-127
10.9.9 Set Time...................................................................................................... 10-127
10.9.10 Date Setting Requirements ......................................................................... 10-127
10.9.11 Checking Battery Status.............................................................................. 10-128
10.9.12 Declassification Supporting Commands..................................................... 10-128
10.9.13 Vendor Specific Devices............................................................................. 10-136
10.9.14 Mandatory ORB Formats for the Processor Device ................................... 10-136
10.10 Ground Based Recorders ........................................................................................ 10-142
10.10.1 Interface. ..................................................................................................... 10-143
10.10.2 Data Format ................................................................................................ 10-143
ii

10.10.3 Recording Media......................................................................................... 10-143
10.10.4 Remote Command and Control .................................................................. 10-144
10.10.5 Data Replay and Reproduction................................................................... 10-144
10.11 Data Interoperability............................................................................................... 10-144
10.11.1 Original Recording Files............................................................................. 10-144
10.11.2 Modified Recording Files ........................................................................... 10-145
10.11.3 Original Recording and Modified Recording File Extension..................... 10-146
10.11.4 File Naming ................................................................................................ 10-146
10.11.5 Data Transfer File ....................................................................................... 10-148
10.11.6 Recording Directory File ............................................................................ 10-149

CHANGES
Numerous updates to Chapter 10 have been made. Highlighting the
changes using different font colors, highlights or other means was
not practical and would make reading the document difficult.
Therefore, a summary of changes is provided below.
iii

CHANGES TO THIS EDITION OF CHAPTER 10
Paragraph Description
10.2 Definitions/Acronyms Added definitions for Memory Clear,
Memory Declassification, Memory
Sanitization, and Setup Record.

10.3.9.1.2 UDP Transfer Header

Updated Figure 10-3 and Version description.
10.4.3 Ethernet Recorder Interface Defined a protocol (TELNET) for ground
based recorder Ethernet interface.

10.6.1.1 Packet Header Updated the Data Type Version field to
include IRI G 106-09.

10.6.4.3 MIL-STD-1553 Bus Data
Packets, Format 2
Clarified 16PP194 transaction and word
format.

10.6.7.2 Computer Generated Data
Packets Format 1
Various changes to support XML TMATS
format; Added a note for the Setup Record
Configuration Change (SRCC) bit usage.

10.6.x Intra-Packet Time Stamp (in
many 10.6.x)
Corrected the bit in the Packet Flags for the
absolute time.

10.6.10.1 Video Packets, Format 0 Added Byte Alignment (BA) bit. Clarified
Figure 10-75.

10.7.1.2 Optional TELNET Control Added 10.7.1.2

10.8 Declassification Added a paragraph on declassification
(associated documents, definition and the
responsibility).

10.9.7 Mandatory Commands for
Processor Devices
Updated Table 1-22 Mandatory Processor
Commands.

10.9.12 Declassification Supporting
Commands
Added the description of each command.

10.9.14.2 ORB Format Added more description for the Send and
Receive commands.

10.11.2.1 Modified Recording File
Annotation
More explanation on b on R-x\RI3 and
R-x\RI6.

iv

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 10-1. Functional layout of standard....................................................................... 10-3
Figure 10-2. UDP Transfer Header for non-segmented data.......................................... 10-11
Figure 10-3. UDP Transfer Header for segmented data. ................................................ 10-12
Figure 10-4. General UDP Network Broadcast (full packet). ........................................ 10-13
Figure 10-5. General UDP Network Broadcast (segmented packet).............................. 10-13
Figure 10-6. Directory structure. .................................................................................... 10-19
Figure 10-7. Directory block. ......................................................................................... 10-19
Figure 10-8. Data recording structure............................................................................. 10-25
Figure 10-9. General packet format................................................................................ 10-26
Figure 10-10. A 32-bit packet format layout. ................................................................... 10-27
Figure 10-11. Packet trailer for 32-bit data checksum. .................................................... 10-28
Figure 10-12. Packet trailer for 8-bit data checksum. ...................................................... 10-28
Figure 10-13. General PCM data packet, format 1........................................................... 10-36
Figure 10-14. PCM packet channel specific data format. ................................................ 10-36
Figure 10-15. PCM Data unpacked mode sample packet.............................................. 10-40
Figure 10-16. PCM Data packed mode sample packet.................................................. 10-41
Figure 10-17. PCM Data Throughput Mode sample packet.......................................... 10-41
Figure 10-18. 32-bit Alignment Mode example, 16-bit data words (32-bit
word addressing). ....................................................................................... 10-42
Figure 10-19. 32-bit Alignment Mode example, 16-bit data words (16-bit
word addressing). ....................................................................................... 10-42
Figure 10-20. PCM Intra-packet header. .......................................................................... 10-43
Figure 10-21. General time data packet, format 1. ........................................................... 10-44
Figure 10-22. Time Packet channel specific data format. ................................................ 10-44
Figure 10-23. Time data - packet format, day format....................................................... 10-45
Figure 10-24. Time data - packet format, day, month, and year format........................... 10-45
Figure 10-25. MIL-STD-1553 Packet channel specific data format. ............................... 10-46
Figure 10-26. MIL-STD-1553 data packet, format 1. ...................................................... 10-47
Figure 10-27. MIL-STD-1553 intra-packet data header................................................... 10-47
Figure 10-28. Block status word format. .......................................................................... 10-48
Figure 10-29. Gap Times word format. ............................................................................ 10-49
Figure 10-30. MIL-STD-1553 data packet, format 1. ...................................................... 10-50
Figure 10-31. 16PP194 message transaction. ................................................................... 10-51
Figure 10-32. MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 packet channel specific data format. ................ 10-51
Figure 10-33. MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 data packet. ...................................................... 10-52
Figure 10-34. MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 intra-packet data header format. ...................... 10-52
Figure 10-35. MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 data packet. ...................................................... 10-54
Figure 10-36. MIL-STD-1553 26-bit 16PP194 word format. .......................................... 10-55
Figure 10-37. 16PP194 Word Format. ............................................................................ 10-56
Figure 10-38. Generic analog data packet, format 1. ....................................................... 10-57
Figure 10-39. Analog packet channel specific data word................................................. 10-57
Figure 10-40. Analog data packet - unpacked mode, msb padding.................................. 10-61
Figure 10-41. Analog data packet - unpacked mode, lsb padding.................................... 10-62
Figure 10-42. Analog data packet - packed mode packet................................................. 10-63
v

Figure 10-43. General discrete data packet, format 1....................................................... 10-63
Figure 10-44. Discrete packet channel data word format................................................. 10-64
Figure 10-45. Discrete data format. .................................................................................. 10-64
Figure 10-46. Discrete event intra-packet header............................................................. 10-65
Figure 10-47. Discrete data packet format. ...................................................................... 10-66
Figure 10-48. General computer generated data packet format. ...................................... 10-66
Figure 10-49. Computer generated format 0 channel specific data word format. ............ 10-67
Figure 10-50. Computer generated format 1 channel specific data word format. ............ 10-67
Figure 10-51. Computer generated format 2 channel specific data word......................... 10-69
Figure 10-52. Events recording period. ............................................................................ 10-70
Figure 10-53. Recording event intra-packet header. ........................................................ 10-72
Figure 10-54. General recording event packet format...................................................... 10-73
Figure 10-55. Recording event entry layout. .................................................................... 10-73
Figure 10-56. Format showing root index packet............................................................. 10-75
Figure 10-57. Channel specific data word format. ........................................................... 10-76
Figure 10-58. Recording index intra-packet header. ........................................................ 10-77
Figure 10-59. General recording root index packet.......................................................... 10-78
Figure 10-60. Recording root index entry layout. ............................................................ 10-78
Figure 10-61. General recording node index packet. ....................................................... 10-79
Figure 10-62. Recording node index entry layout. ........................................................... 10-79
Figure 10-63. ARINC-429 data packet format. ................................................................ 10-80
Figure 10-64. ARINC-429 packet channel specific data word format. ............................ 10-81
Figure 10-65. Intra-packet data header format. ................................................................ 10-81
Figure 10-66. Message data packet format....................................................................... 10-82
Figure 10-67. Complete message channel specific data word format. ............................. 10-83
Figure 10-68. Segmented message channel specific data word format............................ 10-83
Figure 10-69. Message data intra-packet header. ............................................................. 10-84
Figure 10-70. Intra-packet data header format. ................................................................ 10-84
Figure 10-71. General MPEG-2/H.264 video packet, format 0. ...................................... 10-85
Figure 10-72. Video packet channel specific data word format. ...................................... 10-86
Figure 10-73. Intra-packet header..................................................................................... 10-88
Figure 10-74. Format 0 MPEG-2/H.264 video frame sync and word format,
16-bit little-endian aligned. ........................................................................ 10-89
16-bit big-endian (native) aligned.............................................................. 10-89
Figure 10-76. Format 0 MPEG-2/H.264 Video Data Packet
(Example is 16-bit Aligned)....................................................................... 10-89
Figure 10-77. General MPEG-2 video packet, format 1. ................................................. 10-90
Figure 10-78. MPEG-2 channel specific data word format.............................................. 10-91
Figure 10-80. General AVC/H.264 video packet, format 2. ............................................ 10-94
Figure 10-81. AVC/H.264 channel specific data word format......................................... 10-95
Figure 10-83. Image packet, format 0. ............................................................................. 10-98
Figure 10-84. Image packet channel specific data word format....................................... 10-98
Figure 10-85. Image data intra-packet header, format 0. ................................................. 10-99
vi

Figure 10-86. Still Imagery packet, format 1. ................................................................ 10-100
Figure 10-87. Still Imagery packet channel specific data word format.......................... 10-101
Figure 10-88. Still Imagery intra-packet header............................................................. 10-102
Figure 10-89. UART data packet format. ....................................................................... 10-103
Figure 10-90. UART packet channel specific data word format.................................... 10-103
Figure 10-91. UART data intra-packet header. .............................................................. 10-104
Figure 10-92. Intra-packet data header format. .............................................................. 10-104
Figure 10-93. IEEE-1394 data packet, format 0............................................................. 10-105
Figure 10-94. IEEE-1394 channel specific data word.................................................... 10-105
Figure 10-95. IEEE-1394 intra-packet header................................................................ 10-106
Figure 10-96. IEEE-1394 event data word format. ........................................................ 10-108
Figure 10-97. IEEE-1394 data packet, format 1............................................................. 10-109
Figure 10-98. IEEE-1394 channel specific data word format 1. .................................... 10-109
Figure 10-99. IEEE-1394 format 1 intra-packet header. ................................................ 10-110
Figure 10-100. Intra-packet data header - message ID word............................................ 10-110
Figure 10-101. Parallel data packet, format 0................................................................... 10-112
Figure 10-102. Parallel packet channel specific data word format. ................................. 10-112
Figure 10-103. Parallel data, up to 8-bit wide words. ...................................................... 10-113
Figure 10-104. Parallel data, 9-16 bit wide words............................................................ 10-113
Figure 10-105. Parallel data, (Example: 28-bit wide words)............................................ 10-113
Figure 10-106. DCRsi Scan, 9-auxiliary data byte +4356 bytes. ..................................... 10-114
Figure 10-107. Ethernet Data packet format 1. ................................................................ 10-115
Figure 10-108. Ethernet Data packet format 1 channel specific data word...................... 10-116
Figure 10-109. Ethernet Data format 1 intra-packet header. ............................................ 10-116
Figure 10-110. Intra-packet frame ID word. .................................................................... 10-117
Figure 10-111. Required discrete control functions. ........................................................ 10-120
Figure 10-112. Discrete control and indicator functional diagram................................... 10-120
Figure 10-113. Removable media..................................................................................... 10-125
Figure 10-114. RMM .HEALTH command response. ..................................................... 10-127
Figure 10-115. Updating the Bad Block Table................................................................. 10-129
Figure 10-116. Login ORB format. .................................................................................. 10-137
Figure 10-117. Login response format. ............................................................................ 10-138
Figure 10-118. Send command ORB format. ................................................................... 10-139
Figure 10-119. Send data buffer format. .......................................................................... 10-140
Figure 10-120. Receive command block ORB format (8 quadlets). ................................ 10-141
Figure 10-121. Receive data buffer format ASCII format. .............................................. 10-142
Figure 10-122. Receive data buffer binary format. .......................................................... 10-142

vii

LIST OF TABLES
Table 10-1. Required and Recommended SCSI Commands, Features,
and Parameters........................................................................................... 10-15
Table 10-2. Directory Block Format ............................................................................. 10-20
Table 10-3. File Entry Format ....................................................................................... 10-21
Table 10-4. Prohibited Characters (Hexadecimal Representation) .............................. 10-23
Table 10-5. File Name Examples.................................................................................. 10-24
Table 10-6. Packet Requirements.................................................................................. 10-29
Table 10-7. Data Type Names and Descriptions........................................................... 10-32
Table 10-8. Units of Measure........................................................................................ 10-46
Table 10-9. Command Summary ................................................................................ 10-119
Table 10-10. Recorder LED States................................................................................ 10-122
Table 10-11. Mandatory Processor Commands ............................................................ 10-126
Table 10-12. RMM States ............................................................................................. 10-135
Table 10-13. Command Error Codes ............................................................................ 10-136

viii

ACRONYMS
ANSI American National Standards Institute
API Application Programming Interface
ARINC Aeronautical Radio, Incorporated
CCM Command and Control Mnemonic
CD Collision Detection
CDB Command Descriptor Block
CSDW Channel Specific Data Word
CSMA Carrier-Sense Multiple Access
CSR Control and Status Register
DCRsi Digital Cartridge Recording System (a recording method and digital data
interface)
DITS Digital Information Transfer System
DoD Department of Defense
ECL Emitter-coupled Logic
FCP Fibre Channel Protocol
FCPL Channel Private Loop
FC-PLDA Fibre Channel Private Loop SCSI Direct Attach
GCC GNU Compiler Collection
GPS Global Positioning System
HSDB High Speed Data Bus
I/O Input/Output
IC Intelligence Community
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IOCTL I/O control code
IP Internet Protocol
IRIG Inter-range Instrumentation Group
iSCSI Internet Small Computer Systems Interface
iSNS Internet Storage Name Service
ISO International Organization for Standards
IT Information Technology
ITU International Telecommunications Union
IU Information Unit
KLV Key-Length-Value
LBA Logical Block Address
LSB Least Significant Bit
LUN Logical Unit Number
MAC Media Access Control
MAS Military Agency for Standardization
MBR Master Boot Record
MISB Motion Imagery Standards Board
MISP Motion Imagery Standards Profile
MPEG Moving Picture Experts Group
MUX Multiplexer
ix

x
NADSI NATO Advanced Data Storage Interface
NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NSG National System for Geospatial Intelligence
NSG National System for Geospatial Intelligence
NSIF NATO Secondary Imagery Format
NSIF NATO Secondary Imagery Format
ORB Operation Request Block
OS Operating System
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PDU Protocol Data Unit
PS Program Streams
RCC Range Commanders Council
RFC Request For Comment
RIU Remote Interface Unit
RMM Removable Memory Module
RS Recommended Standard
RTC Relative Time Counter
SAM SCSI Architecture Model
SBC SCSI Block Commands
SBP Serial Bus Protocol
SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface
SD Standard Definition
SLP Service Location Protocol
SPC SCSI Primary Commands
SPT SCSI Pass Through
SRB SCSI Request Block
STANAG Standardization Agreement
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TM Telemetry
TMATS Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard
TS Transport Stream
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter
UDP User Datagram Protocol
WMUX Weapons MUX


CHAPTER 10
DIGITAL RECORDING STANDARD
10.1 General
A large number of unique and proprietary data structures have been developed for
specific data recording applications which required unique decoding software programs. The
activities of writing unique decoding software, checking the software for accuracy, and decoding
the data tapes are extremely time consuming and costly. In the late 1990s, the test ranges started
to see the implementation of non-tape-based, high-data-rate recorders, the most predominate of
which were solid-state memory devices. Then, as high-data-rate digital recorders were fielded
and as solid state technology began to emerge, the Telemetry Group (TG) saw the need and
formed an ad hoc committee for a computer-compatible digital data acquisition and recording
standard.
There is a need for a digital data acquisition and recording standard (see the functional
layout at Figure 10-1) that supports a broad range of requirements, including:
a. Data download and interface.
b. One or more multiplexed data streams.
c. One or more single data streams.
d. Data format definitions.
e. Recorder control.
f. Media declassification.
g. Data interoperability.

Specifically, this digital recording standard shall be compatible with the multiplexing of
both synchronous and asynchronous digital inputs such as pulse code modulation (PCM) and
MIL-STD-1553 data bus, time, analog, video, Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (ARINC) 429, discrete,
and RS-232/422 communication data. This digital recording standard will allow use of a
common set of playback/data reduction software to take advantage of emerging random access
recording media.

Within this standard, where text and/or figures are used to provide
descriptions, meaning, and/or explanations, the text shall take precedence
over figures.

10-1

10.1.1 Interface Levels. The purpose of this chapter is to establish a common interface
standard for the implementation of digital data acquisition and recording systems by the
organizations participating in the Range Commanders Council (RCC). This standard does not
imply hardware architecture such as the coupling of data acquisition, multiplexing, and media
storage. The required interface levels are contained in this standard (see a through e below). In
addition, declassification requirements are discussed in paragraph 10.8, ground based recording
is discussed in paragraph 10.10, and data interoperability requirements are discussed in
paragraph 10.11.
a. Data Download and Electrical Interface, which is the physical interface for data
access, is defined in paragraph 10.4.
b. Interface File Structure, which defines data access structure, is described in
paragraph 10.5.
c. Data Format Definition, which defines data types and packetization requirements,
is defined in paragraph 10.6.
d. Recorder Control and Status, which defines command and control mnemonics,
status, and their interfaces, is described in paragraph 10.7.
e. IEEE 1394B Interface to Recorder Removable Media is defined in paragraph
10.9.
f. Ground Recorder Interface, which defines unique interoperability requirements of
a ground recorder, is described in paragraph 10.10.
g. Data Interoperability, which defines requirements for the annotation,
modification, and exchange of recorded data, is described in paragraph 10.11.

10-2

Removable & COTS Recording Media
IRIG 106 Chapter 10 Digital Recorder Standard
Ref Section 10.11
Original Data Recordings
Modified Data Recordings
Download Naming &
Recording Transfers
Ref Section 10.9
RMM Download &
Electrical Interface
IEEE-1394B
Ref Section 10.4
Recorder Download &
Electrical Interface
IEEE-1394B
Fibre
Channel
RS-232
RS-422
Ref Section 10.7
Recorder Control & Status
Electrical
Discrete
Ref Section 10.5
Interface File Structure
Ref Section 10.3
Operational Requirments
10Mhz RTC
Intra-Data Time
CGDP
Channel 0
Ref Section 10.6
Data Format &
Packetization Definition
Data
Channel n
Time
Channel n
Ref Section 10.10
Ground Recording & Remote Data Access
Ethernet/iSCSI/TELNET COTS Media & Interface
Ref Section 10.8
Media Declassification

Figure 10-1. Functional layout of standard.
10-3

10.2 Definitions/Acronyms
The following are definitions and acronyms which are used in this standard and are
provided as a means of removing ambiguities within the standard.
Absolute Time: Is a hypothetical time that either runs at the same rate for all the observers in
the universe or the rate of time each observer can be scaled to by multiplying the observers rate
by a constant.
AET: Audio Encoding Type
ARINC: Aeronautical Radio, Inc
ATA: Advanced Technology Attachment
Basic Character Set (BCS): Based on ISO/IEC 10646-1, the Universal Multiple-Octet Coded
Character Set (UCS). The North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) Imagery Interoperability
Architecture (NIIA) limits characters to a subset rather than allowing all characters. The subset
will be single octets, known as the Basic Character Set (BCS).
Block: The smallest unit of addressable memory that can be written to, read from, and/or erased.
Bad Block: A block determined to be unreliable for storing user data.
Bad Block Table: A table of bad block entries for a memory board. The data stored in the entry
identifies the chip and block number of the bad block. The table entry also contains a flag field.
The flag field is used to determine the circumstance in which the bad block was detected. It also
provides a flag indicating whether the corresponding bad block has previously been Secure
Erased.
Byte: A contiguous set of 8 bits that are acted on as a unit.
Channel ID: A unique value assigned to each channel in a system. Each channel must have a
unique Channel ID (data channels and playback channels).
Channel Specific Data Word: A required word for each data type channel that has data
specific information.
Commercial Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Media: Any recording media (such as hard disks, solid
state drives, RAID, and JBOD) that is ready-made and available for sale to the general public. In
the context of this standard, all COTS Media shall conform to paragraph 10.3.10 with the
exception of Ground Based Recorders COTS Media.
COTS Media Interface: Any recording COTS Media interface (such as PATA, SATA, SCSI,
IEEE-1394, USB, Ethernet) that is ready-made and available for sale to the general public.
Data Streaming: Streaming of current value data whether it is being recorded or not, and
playback streaming of recorded data from a file. Data Streaming sends the data to one or more
destinations simultaneously (e.g., recording media, recorder data interfaces).
DCRsi: Reference AMPEX Data Systems Corp.
Ground Based Recorder: Records IRIG-106 Chapter 10 data and may optionally reproduce the
recorded data. It supports the same data format and remote command and control operations as
an On-Board Recorder. Instead of an RMM, a ground recorder will generally use COTS media
and/or data streaming to a network. Ground Based Recorder requirements to be in 100 percent
10-4

compliancy with this standard are defined in paragraph 10.3.
IEEE-1588 Time: Time as specified by IEEE Std 1588-2002, 1588 IEEE Standard for a
Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked Measurement and Control Systems.
FC-PI: Fibre Channel-Physical Interfaces.
FC-FS: Fibre Channel-Framing and Signaling.
Intra-Packet Data Header: A header containing time, status, and/or data information for the
tagging of data inside a packet.
IAW: In Accordance With.
JBOD: Just a bunch of disks.
Long Word: A contiguous set of 32 bits that are acted on as a unit.
lsb: The least significant bit of a series of bits.
LSB: The least significant byte of a series of bytes.
LSW: The least significant word of a series of words.
LSLW: The least significant long word of a series of long words.
Mandatory: Defines a Mandatory requirement of this standard for full compliancy. Mandatory
requirements as defined in this standard are based on the use of shall and are defined in
paragraph 10.1.
MAS: Military Agency for Standardization
Magic Number: An identifier for the directory block. This identifier is a value chosen to
support discovery of lost directory entries and directory reconstruction after a fault.
Memory Board: Printed circuit board containing flash memory devices used to store user data.
Memory Clear: Rendering stored information unrecoverable unless special utility software or
techniques are used.
Memory Declassification: Administrative decision or procedure to remove or reduce the
security classification of the subject media.
Memory Sanitization: The removal of information from information system media such that
data recovery using known techniques or analysis is prevented. Sanitizing includes the removal
of data from the media and verification of the action. Properly sanitized media may be
subsequently declassified upon observing the organization's respective verification and review
procedures.
MISM: Motion Imagery Standards Matrix.
msb: The most significant bit of a series of bits.
MSB: The most significant byte of a series of bytes.
MSW: The most significant word of a series of words.
MSLW: The most significant long word of a series of long words.
10-5

Multiplexer: The entity that includes all the inputs, control interfaces, and functionality
required to properly record data.
NADSI: NATO Advanced Data Storage Interface.
NATO: North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NIIA: NATO Imagery Interoperability Architecture.
Non-volatile: Memory media that retains data when power is removed.
On-Board Recorder: An On-Board Recorder is the basis and original justification for the
IRIG-106 Chapter 10 Standard. On-Board Recorder requirements to be in 100 per cent
compliancy with this standard are defined in paragraph 10.3.
Optional: Defines an optional requirement of this standard but is not required for full
compliancy. Optional requirements as defined in this standard are based on the use of optional
and are defined in paragraph 10.1. When optional requirements are implemented they shall be
IAW with this standard.
Packet: Encapsulates a block of observational and ancillary application data to be recorded.
Packet Generation: The placing of observational and ancillary data into a packet.
Packet Generation Time: The time period from when the first bit of observational and
ancillary data was placed into a packet until it is no longer being placed into the packet and the
packet is closed.
Packet Header: Identifies the source and characteristics of the data packet and encapsulation
environment.
Packet Secondary Header: Contains the Packet Header time.
Page: Storage unit within the flash device. A page is the smallest storage unit that can be
written.
PATA: Parallel ATA.
PCM: Pulse code modulation
Quad Word: A contiguous set of 64 bits acted on as a unit.
RAID: Redundant Arrays of Independent Drives/ Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive Disks.
RMM: Removable Memory Module.
RR: RT to RT Transfer.
Recorder: Is used where a function or requirement shall apply to both an On-Board Recorder
and a ground based recorder.
Recording: Is defined as the time interval from first packet generated (which by mandatory
requirements is a Computer Generated Data Packet Format 1) and committed to the recorder
media to the last packet generated and committed to the recorder media. Packet Generation
Time and Stream Commit Time, as defined within the standard, apply.
Relative Time Counter (RTC): A free-running binary counter common to all data channels.
The counter shall be derived from an internal crystal oscillator and shall remain free-running
10-6

during each recording. The applicable data bit to which the 48-bit value applies will be defined
in each data type section.
Removable Memory Module (RMM): The element of the On-Board Recorder that contains
the stored data.
SATA: Serial ATA.
SCSI: Small Computer Systems Interface.
Setup Record: TMATS IAW IRIG-106 Chapter 9 annotated in the Computer Generated Data
Format 0 packet.
STANAG: Standardization Agreement, NATO.
Stream: All packets from all enabled channels (including Computer Generated Data) that are
generated until the end of a recording.
Stream Commit Time: The time span in which all Generated Packets must be committed to a
stream.
TMATS: Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard as defined in IRIG 106 Chapter 9.
UCS: Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set.
USB: Universal Serial Bus.
Word: A contiguous set of 16 bits acted on as a unit.
10.3 Operational Requirements
10.3.1 Recorder Compliancy Requirements. The following table represents the mandatory
recorder requirements to meet 100 per cent compliancy with this standard. Meeting these
compliancy requirements guarantees interoperability of recorders, recorder media and recorded
data. Optional functions and/or capabilities are not shown but when implemented in a recorder
shall be in accordance with the definitions in this standard in order to meet 100 per cent
compliancy of this standard.
10-7

10.3.1.1 On-Board Recorder Mandatory Compliancy Requirements.

Applicable
Compliancy
Paragraph
Function/Capability
RECORDER ELECTRICAL INTERFACES
10.3, 10.4 Fibre Channel and/or IEEE-1394B Data Download Port
10.3, 10.7 Discrete Lines and/or RS-232 and 422 Full Duplex Communication
10.3 External Power Port
RECORDER DOWNLOAD INTERFACE PROTOCOLS
10.4, 10.9 Fibre Channel SCSI and/or IEEE-1394B SCSI/SBP-2
RECORDER CONTROL/STATUS INTERFACE PROTOCOLS
10.7 Discrete Control/Status and/or RS-232 and 422 Control/Status
RMM ELECTRICAL INTERFACE AND POWER
10.3, 10.9 IEEE-1394B Bilingual Socket
COTS MEDIA ELECTRICAL INTERFACES
10.3 COTS Media Interface
RMM INTERFACE PROTOCOLS
10.9 IEEE-1394B SCSI/SBP-2
COTS MEDIA INTERFACE PROTOCOLS
RECORDER MEDIA /RMM/COTS MEDIA INTERFACE FILE STRUCTURE
10.5 Directory, File Structures and Data Organization
10.3.7 Directory and File Table Entries
PACKETIZATION AND DATA FORMAT
10.6 Packet Structures, Generation, Media Commitment and Time Stamping
10.6 Data Type Formats
DATA INTEROPRABILITY
10.11 Original Recording Files

10.3.1.2 Ground Based Recorder Mandatory Compliancy Requirements.

Applicable
Compliancy
Paragraph
Function/Capability
RECORDER ELECTRICAL INTERFACES
10.10 Ethernet
RECORDER REMOTE INTERFACE PROTOCOLS
10.10, 10.4 iSCSI and/or TELNET
COTS MEDIA ELECTRICAL INTERFACES
COTS MEDIA INTERFACE PROTOCOLS
REMOTE DATA ACCESS INTERFACE FILE STRUCTURE
10.5 Directory, File Structures, and Data Organization
10.3.6 Directory and File Table Entries
PACKETIZATION AND DATA FORMAT
10.6 Packet Structures, Generation, Media Commitment, and Time Stamping
10.6 Data Type Formats
DATA INTEROPRABILITY
10.11 Original Recording Files

10-8

10.3.2 Required Configuration. An On-Board Recorder, as a minimum, shall provide the
following functionality:
a. Data Download port.
b. Recorder Control/Maintenance port.
c. External power port.

The required data download port interface shall be IAW paragraph 10.4. This
combination will allow data extraction and transfer from any recorder to any paragraph 10.4
compliant intermediate storage unit. The required control port interface shall be IAW
paragraph 10.7.

10.3.3 Exclusions to Standard. The physical size, configuration, and form factor for the
On-Board Recorder and the RMM are not controlled by this standard. Due to the variation in
capacity/rate/cost requirements of the users, this standard does not specify the technology to be
used in the RMM or the On-Board Recorder.
10.3.4 Internal System Management. Any processing performed on the stored data by the
On-Board Recorder (e.g., for the purposes of internal system management, error detection and
correction (EDAC), physical frame formatting, etc.) shall be removed from the stored data when
the stored data is downloaded or transferred from storage media.
10.3.5 Data Download. On-Board Recorders may have an RMM capability or the On-Board
Recorder can be removed from the acquisition platform and taken to a ground station for data
download. Reference paragraph 10.4.1 for recorder download and electrical interface,
paragraph 10.9 for RMM interface, and paragraph 10.11 for data transfer and file management.
10.3.6 IEEE-1394b Interface to Recorder Media. Serial Interface to On-Board Recorder
media shall be accomplished utilizing IEEE-1394b interface. A nine-pin IEEE-1394b interface
shall be provided on the media to allow direct download of data to host computer or storage
device.
10.3.7 Required File Tables Entries. Within paragraph 10.5, Table 10-3 FileSize, File
Create Date, File Create Time, and File Close Time are either optional or can be empty
(filled with 0x2D) if data is unavailable. Table 10-3 has been adopted from STANAG 4575 but
in the case of IRIG-106 Chapter 10 unless the Time Type is 0xFF (Time Data Packet) and the
Time Data Packet source is 0xF (None) date and time will always be available.
10.3.7.1 File Table Entry Conditions. If Table 10-2 Shutdown value is 0xFF and the Time
Type is 0xFF and the Time Data Packet source is not 0xF FileSize, File Create Date, File
Create Time and File Close Time entries shall be filled in their entirety.

If Table 10-2 Shutdown value is 0x00 and the Time Type is 0xFF and the Time
Data Packet source is not 0xF FileSize, File Create Date, File Create Time and File Close
Time entries shall be filled in their entirety.

10-9

10.3.8 Recorder Configuration File. A recorder setup configuration file can reside on the
recorder or optionally reside in the RMM. Recorder setup configuration must be IAW IRIG-106
Chapter 9. Recorder setup configurations shall be programmed IAW with paragraph 10.7 of this
standard. Optionally the recorder can be configured from a Chapter 10 configuration file
residing in the RMM. The RMM recorder configuration file will have priority over setup records
residing in the recorder.
10.3.8.1 Recorder Configuration File Location. When a setup record transfer to a recorder is
made via the RMM Computer Generated Data, Format 1 Setup Record packet(s) will be used.
The RMM shall contain a Directory and one Directory Block File Entry IAW
paragraph 10.5.2.

a. All Directory Block Format fields shall be IAW table 10-2. The field n File
Entries value shall be 1.
b. All Directory Entry Format fields shall be IAW table 10-3. The field Time
Type value shall be 0x01, System Time. The field Name value shall be:
recorder_configuration_file_SAVE_n
This will notify the recorder to use the Recorder Configuration Transfer File for the next
recording and store the setup information contained within the file to non-volatile memory in the
recorder pre-defined setup location n, where n is a value of 0-15. This shall be the equivalent of
sending .TMATS SAVE [n] and .SETUP [n] commands.
10.3.8.2 Recorder Configuration File Structure. The Recorder Configuration File structure
will only contain Computer Generated Data, Format 1 Setup Record packets. More than one
packet is allowed only if the required recorder configuration information exceeds the packet size
limits in paragraph 10.6.1, thus forcing more than one Computer Generated Data, Format 1 Setup
Record packet. The standard method of using the sequence counter will be utilized until all the
configuration information has been packetized.

10.3.8.3 Configuration of Recorder from RMM: A setup record may reside in the RMM and
be utilized for configuration of the recorder. A Computer Generated Data, Format 1 Setup
Record packet(s) will be used. The RMM shall contain a Directory and at least one Directory
Block File Entry IAW paragraph 10.5.2.
a. All Directory Block Format fields shall be IAW table 10-2. The field n File
Entries value shall be 1.
b. All Directory Entry Format fields shall be IAW table 10-3. The field Time
Type value shall be 0x01, System Time. The field Name value shall be
recorder_configuration_file_SETUP_RMM
This will notify the recorder to configure from the RMM. The recorder configuration file
shall NOT be able to be erased by the recorder .ERASE command or discrete command.
10-10

10.3.9 Recorder Data Streaming Transport. Data Streaming Transport may be accomplished
across the paragraph 10.4 Recorder Download and Electrical Interfaces using the definitions in
paragraph 10.3 and commands in IRIG-106 Chapter 6. For Ground Based Recorders, this will be
accomplished across the required Remote Data Access Ethernet Interface.
10.3.9.1 Ethernet. Ethernet is an optional interface for On-Board Recorders; however, it is a
required interface for Ground-Based Recorders (10.10). IAW paragraph 10.4. This Ethernet
interface can optionally be used for Data Streaming using User Datagram Protocol (UDP). This
will be accomplished with the IRIG-106 Chapter 6 PUBLISH command and the following
structure added to UDP packets with paragraph 10.6 (Data Format) packets.
10.3.9.1.1 Ethernet Packet Payload Byte Order. The byte ordering within the UDP packet
payload shall be IAW paragraph 10.5.3.2. This UDP packet payload shall include the UDP
Transfer Header and the IRIG-106 Chapter 10 data.
10.3.9.1.2 UDP Transfer Header. Network broadcasting limitations of paragraph 10.6 packets
(up to 128M bytes or 512K bytes) across Ethernet will require use of an added packet
transmission UDP Transfer Header. This is required as partial packets or partial out of order
packets may be broadcast and will be missing information required for data reconstruction at the
subscriber.

The following structure (Figure 10-2) shall be used for UDP Transfer Headers in
UDP packets containing one or more full IRIG-106 Chapter 10 data packets:

MSW LSW
WORD 1 WORD 0
msb lsb
81 8 7 4 3 0
UDP Message Sequence Number Type of
message
Version
Figure 10-2. UDP Transfer Header for non-segmented data.

The following structure (Figure 10-3) shall be used for UDP Transfer Headers in
UDP packets containing a segmented IRIG-106 Chapter 10 data packet:
10-11

MSW LSW
WORD 1 WORD 0
msb lsb
31 8 7 4 3 0
UDP Message Sequence Number Type of
message
Version

WORD 3 WORD 2
msb lsb
31 24 23 16 15 0
Reserved Channel Sequence
Number
Channel ID

WORD 5 WORD 4
msb lsb
31 0
Segment Offset
Figure 10-3. UDP Transfer Header for segmented data.

- Version. (4 bits)
0000: Reserved
0001: Version 1
0010-1111: Reserved
- Type of Message. (4 bits)
0000: Full packets.
0001: Segmented.
0010-1111: Reserved.
- UDP Message Sequence Number. (24 bits). Binary value incrementing by one
for each UDP message even if segment of IRIG-106 Chapter 10 packet.
- Channel ID. (16 bits). Segmented Packets Only, Channel ID of the data in the
IRIG-106 Chapter 10 packet.
- Channel Sequence Number. (8 bits). Segmented Packets Only, Channel
Sequence Number of the data in the IRIG-106 Chapter 10 packet.
- Reserved. (8 bits). Reserved.
- Segment Offset. (32 bits). Segmented Packets Only, Position of the data in the
IRIG-106 Chapter 10 packet.
10-12

10.3.9.1.3 UDP IRIG-106 Chapter 10 Packet Transfer. When more than one complete
Chapter 10 packet is contained within a UDP packet, there shall be an integral number of
Chapter 10 packets. Chapter 10 packets shall be sent in the same sequence as recording segment
of a packet and shall be ordered (segment offset incrementing). Figures 10-4 and 10-5 present
the sequence of the general UDP network broadcast of full or segmented packets.
- When using IPv4, total length of message shall be less
than 32768 42 (IP + UDP header) = 32726.
- When using IPv6, the use of jumbograms removes the need of segmented IRIG-
106 Chapter 10 packets so a jumbogram shall always contain an integer number
of IRIG-106 Chapter 10 packets.
- Stream Commit Time applies to recorders using Ethernet Data Streaming
Transport.

UDP HEADER
UDP TRANSFER HEADER
IRIG-106 CHAPTER 10 PACKET 1
:
IRIG-106 CHAPTER 10 PACKET n
Figure 10-4. General UDP Network Broadcast (full packet).

UDP HEADER
UDP TRANSFER HEADER
IRIG-106 CHAPTER 10 PACKET Segment
Figure 10-5. General UDP Network Broadcast (segmented packet).

10.3.10 COTS Media. In conjunction with an On-Board Recorder and/or a multiplexer
when a RMM or internal On-Board Recorder media is not used, COTS media can be used for
recording media. The COTS Media shall be accessible at a minimum from the On-Board
Recorder data download port IAW paragraph 10.4 and optionally by at least one COTS Media
Interface. When accessing COTS Media the Interface File Structure Definition defined in
paragraph 10.5 shall be presented at the On-Board Recorder or COTS Media Interface.

10.4 Data Download and Electrical Interface
At a minimum, the required recorder download port interface (see paragraph
10.3.2) shall be Fibre Channel or IEEE1394B and optionally Ethernet (paragraph 10.4.3). The
physical, signaling, and command protocols contained in paragraphs 10.4.1 and 10.4.2 are a
subset of, and adapted from the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) Military Agency for
Standardization (MAS) Standardization Agreement (STANAG) NATO Advanced Data Storage
Interface (NADSI) Number 4575 (STANAG 4575).
10-13

10.4.1 Fibre Channel (FC) Recorder Download Interface.
10.4.1.1 Physical and Signaling. The interface shall comply with FC-PH (Physical Interfaces)
and FC-FS (Framing and Signaling) in paragraph 10.9, with configuration options as specified.

a. Physical Media. Fibre Channel copper interface will be utilized.
b. Signaling Rate. The transmission signaling rate shall be 1.0625 Gbaud.

10.4.1.2 Command Protocol. The interface shall conform to the requirements of the Fibre
Channel Private Loop SCSI Direct Attach (FC-PLDA, ANSI NCITS TR19-1998)
interoperability, except as defined herein. Table 17 of FC-PLDA specifies a control protocol
using a subset of commands, features, and parameters defined for the Small Computer System
Interface (SCSI-3).00 Table 17 of FC-PLDA also defines the command feature and parameter
usage categories of Required, Allowed, Invokable, and Prohibited between the SCSI
Initiator and Target. These definitions assume that the Target is a magnetic disk drive or
equivalent device.

The control protocol must support a number of data storage media types. Only the
minimum set of SCSI commands needed to download mission data from a memory cartridge are
defined as Required. FC-PLDA SCSI commands, features, and parameters not defined as
Required for this standard, are redefined as Allowed so that they may be implemented as
appropriate. In addition, it is recognized that numerous applications will be required to write to
the Removable Memory Module (RMM) as well. Commands required to format and/or write to
a RMM are defined as Recommended. These commands are not required for any
Standardization Agreement (STANAG) 4575 RMM implementation. However, if the functions
are incorporated into an application, the Recommended commands shall be used to preclude a
proliferation of unique commands. All other Required FC-PLDA SCSI commands, features,
and parameters not defined as Required or Recommended for STANAG 4575, are redefined
as Allowed such that they may be implemented as appropriate. Table 10-1 provides the five
Required STANAG 4575 SCSI commands and two Recommended commands and their
features and parameter usage definitions. The NATO Advanced Data Storage Interface
(NADSI) compliant recorders may respond to the Inquiry command with a 00h SCSI Version
code and the ground/shipboard NADSI host must be prepared to accept this response and restrict
SCSI commands issued to the STANAG 4575 mandatory set.

The RMM shall provide Fibre Channel Responder functionality and the NATO ground
station shall provide Fibre Channel Originator functionality. The RMM shall also provide SCSI
Target functionality and the NATO ground station shall provide SCSI Initiator functionality.
When an RMM is powered up directly through the NADS Interface, the RMM shall
automatically initialize into a mode where the NADSI port is active and is the priority data and
control interface.
10-14

TABLE 10-1. REQUIRED AND RECOMMENDED SCSI COMMANDS,
FEATURES, AND PARAMETERS
FEATURE (COMMAND) INITIATOR TARGET* NOTES
INQUIRY
Standard INQUIRY data (bytes 0-35)
EVPD = 1
Enable Vital Product Data page codes:
0x00 (supported vital product pages)
0x80 (unit serial number page)
0x81 (implemented operations definition pg)
0x82 (BCS implemented operations def pg)
0x83 (device identification page)
I
I
I

I
I
I
I
I
R
R
R

R
R
A
A
R

READ (10)
DPO = 0
DPO = 1
FUA = 0
FUA = 1
RelAdr = 0
RelAdr = 1
I
I
I
I
I
R
P
R
A
A
A
A
R
P

1
1
2
2

3
READ CAPACITY
RelAdr = 0
RelAdr = 1
PMI = 0
PMI = 1
I
R
P
I
I
R
R
P
R
A

3
TEST UNIT READY I R

REQUEST SENSE I R

WRITE (10)
DPO = 0
DPO = 1
FUA = 0
FUA = 1
RelAdr = 0
RelAdr = 1
C
I
I
I
I
C
P
C
A
A
A
A
C
P
4
1
1
2
2

3
FORMAT UNIT
FMT DATA = 0
CMPLST = 0
DEFECT LIST FMT = 0
INTERLEAVE = 0
C
I
I
I
I
C
A
A
A
A
4, 5

10-15

TABLE 10-1. REQUIRED AND RECOMMENDED SCSI COMMANDS,
FEATURES, AND PARAMETERS
NOTES:
1. The Disable Page Out (DPO) bit is associated with a device data caching policy.
2. The Force Unit Access (FUA) bit is associated with whether the device may or may not return
the requested Read data from its local cache.
3. Relative Offset is prohibited, since this requires the use of linking, which is prohibited.
4. All RMMs not supporting Recommended or Allowed commands shall respond to these
commands with an appropriate error response and shall not cease operations.
5. The FORMAT command shall implement an initialization of the target device such that the
entire user memory space shall be writable. After performing this command, the content of the
memory may be indeterminate.
*LEGEND
P = Prohibited: The feature shall not be used between NADSI compliant devices.
R = Required: The feature or parameter value shall be implemented by NADSI compliant
devices.
C = Recommended: The feature is recommended and shall be used for applications requiring the
functionality of these commands. The initiator determines if a recommended feature/parameter is
supported via a required discovery process or a minimal response by the recipient.
A = Allowed: The feature or parameter may be used between NADSI compliant devices. The
initiator determines if an Allowed feature/parameter is supported via a required discovery process
or a minimal response by the recipient.
I = Invokable: The feature or parameter may be used between NADSI compliant devices. The
recipient shall support Invokable features or provide a response that it is not implemented as
defined by the appropriate standard.

10.4.2 IEEE-1394B Recorder Interface. The IEEE-1394B recorder download interface shall use
the same mechanisms as paragraph 10.9 where applicable.
10.4.2.1 Physical and Signaling. The interface shall allow control of Vendor Specific
Recorder devices. The command protocol shall be IAW 10.4.1.2 and Table 10-1.
10.4.2.2 Recorder Communication. The fundamental method of communicating shall be in
accordance to the IEEE 1394B protocol. Packets sent and received shall be asynchronous
transmissions. IEEE-1394B packets shall encapsulate Serial Bus Protocol (SBP-2) formatted
packets for the transport of commands and data. Recorder devices are to use SCSI command
set(s) and therefore SCSI commands and status shall be encapsulated in SBP-2 Operation
Request Blocks (ORB).

SBP-2 provides for the transport of 6, 10, and 12-byte SCSI Command
Descriptor Blocks within a command ORB.

10-16

10.4.3 Ethernet Recorder Interface. The On-Board Recorder Ethernet interface shall use iSCSI
protocol. This will allow common SCSI protocols across Fibre Channel, IEEE-1394B (SPB-2)
and Ethernet (iSCSI) recorder download interfaces. The iSCSI protocol will be implemented as
the Host Ground System acting as an initiator and the recorder acting as the target.
Ground Based Recorder Ethernet interface shall use the TELNET protocol. As a
minimum requirement, the TELNET interface will implement Internet Engineering Task Force
(IETF) RFC 854 (TELNET Protocol Specification), RFC 855 (TELNET Option Specification),
and RFC 1184 (Line Mode Option). The protocol will support IRIG106 Chapter 6 Command
and Control Mnemonics (Reference 10.7.8) over a TCP/IP connection on port # 10610. The
TELNET interface must respond with a * when a connection is made.
10.4.3.1 Target LUN Assignments. The following iSCSI target LUN assignments shall be
used:
a. LUN 0 or 32 shall be used for recorder data download via paragraph 10.5
interface.
b. LUN 1 or 33 shall be used for recorder IRIG-106 Chapter 6 Command and
Control Mnemonics (Reference 10.7).
10.4.3.2 Naming and Addressing. The Host Ground System (initiator) and Recorder (target)
devices on the network must be named with a unique identifier and assigned an address for
access. The iSCSI initiators and target nodes can either use an iSCSI qualified name (IQN) or an
enterprise unique identifier (EUI). Both types of identifiers confer names that are permanent and
globally unique.

Each node has an address consisting of the IP address, the TCP port number, and
either the IQN or EUI name. The IP address can be assigned by using the same methods
commonly employed on networks, such as Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) or manual
configuration.
10.4.3.3 Physical and Signaling. The interface shall allow control of Vendor Unique Recorder
devices. The command protocol shall be IAW 10.4.1.2 and Table 10-1.
10.4.3.4 Recorder Communication. The fundamental method of communicating shall be in
accordance to the iSCSI protocol. Packets sent and received shall be asynchronous
transmissions.
10.5 Interface File Structure Definitions
The definitions in this paragraph are a subset of, and were adapted from Section 3 of
STANAG 4575, File Structure Definition. This file structure was selected to facilitate host
computing platform independence and commonality. By incorporating an independent file
structure, backward and forward compatibility is ensured for the life of the standard.

This file structure definition does not define how data is physically stored
on the recorder media but provides a standardized method for access of the
stored data at the interface. Data can be organized in any way appropriate
to the media, including multiple directories, as long as the file structure
IAW paragraph 10.5 is maintained or seen at the interface
(paragraph 10.4).
10-17

10.5.1 Data Organization. A data recording can contain a single file, which is composed
of one (1) or more types of packetized data, or multiple files, in which one (1) or more types of
data are recorded simultaneously in separate files. For a recording file to be in compliance with
this standard, it must contain as a minimum the following:
a. Computer Generated Packet(s), Setup Record Format 1 IAW paragraph 10.6.7.2
as the first packets in the recording.
b. Time Data Packet(s) IAW paragraph 10.6.3 as the first dynamic packet after the
Computer Generated Packet, Setup Record.
c. One (1) or more data format packets IAW paragraph 10.6.
Multiple recordings may reside on the media, and each recording may contain one
or more compliant files.

10.5.1.1 Data Hierarchy. The data hierarchy used to define the data stored according to this
standard shall have the following structural relationships (highest to lowest):

a. Directory. One or more directory blocks of data comprising a list of all Data
Files located under the guidance of this Standard. Also contains supporting data
that may be of interest to those manipulating the Data Files. The list of files is
made up from File Entries. The Directory shall always start at logical address
zero of each directory block.
b. Directory Block. A memory block containing file entries and other metadata.
c. Directory Block File Entry. A fixed length data structure used to describe files.
It contains the name, the starting address, the number of blocks of data assigned
to the Data File, the total number of bytes contained in the file, and the files
creation date and time. It also contains a reserved field for future growth and
file close time.
d. Data Files. Data files are comprised of user data, presented at the interface in
monotonically increasing contiguous logical addresses per file. Thus if a file
starts at logical address X, the next location containing file data must be at the
next logical address, X+1, and the next location after that must be at the next
logical address, X+2, etc.

10-18

Figure 10-6. Directory structure.

10.5.2 Directory Definition. The name and location information for all files recorded is
illustrated in Figure 10-6). The Directory is composed of one or more directory blocks as shown
in Figure 10-7. At least one Directory Block is required and it must be located at SCSI logical
block address 1. Logical block address 0 is reserved.

DIRECTORY BLOCK
Figure 10-7. Directory block.
a. Directory Fixed Fields. The fixed fields within a directory block are used to
name the volume of data, identify the number of entries, and to provide pointers
to other addresses that contain additional directory blocks. Forward and
10-19

backward links to the next address for the next Directory Block (if any) or the
preceding Directory Block (if any) allow for directory expansion beyond a
single block. This does not limit the placement of directory information.
b. Block Size. The media types used to implement this standard have varying
block lengths. Some will have blocks as small as 512 bytes; others may have
blocks as large as 64K bytes or larger. The block size used by a given media
can be determined via the SCSI Read Capacity Command (not defined here).
c. Directory to Data File Link. Each Data File on the media has a directory entry
within a Directory Block that describes the file, as shown in Table 10-2. The
directory entry for a Data File, as shown in Table 10-3, contains a link to the
starting location of the data contained in each file and the total number of blocks
assigned for the storage of data. This standard does not define the meaning of
the data recorded within these Data File blocks.

TABLE 10-2. DIRECTORY BLOCK FORMAT
FIELD NAME BYTES DESCRIPTION
DATA
TYPE
Magic Number 8 An identifier for a directory block. The value is BCS
FORTYtwo (0x464F52545974776F)
BCS
Revision Number 1 Revision number of the standard compiled by the recording
system.
0x01 = IRIG-106-03 thru IRIG-106-05
0x0F = IRIG-106-07
Unsigned
Binary
Shutdown 1 Flag, if cleared to a 0x00 indicates that the volume was not
properly dismounted, if seen on power-up is an indication
that the directory chain may be faulty.
If set = 0xFF, then the file system properly shutdown. This
field is only valid in the first directory located in logical
block 1; other directory blocks set to 0xFF.
Unsigned
Binary
Number of File
Entries
2 Defines the number of file entries that follow in this block. Unsigned
Binary
Block Size 4 Bytes per block size referenced in FileBlkCnt in
Table-10-3.
Unsigned
Binary
VolName 32 Volume name, see character set for restrictions. (Fill any
unused VolName byte positions with 0x00.)
BCS
Forward Link 8 Block address of the next block containing directory
information. Set equal to address of this block if this is the
end of the chain.
Unsigned
Binary
Reverse Link 8 Block address of the directory block pointing to this block.
Set equal to the address of this block if this is the start of
the chain.
Unsigned
Binary
(n File Entries) 112 *n One entry for each file specified in Number of File
Entries. The maximum value of n is dependent upon
media block size.
See
Table 10-3
Unused Varies
with n
& block
Size
It is possible for bytes to remain between the last byte of the
last used File Entry and the end of the Directory Block.
These bytes are defined to be Unused and should be filled
with 0xFF.
Unsigned
Binary
Note: 64 Bytes in fixed fields.
10-20

TABLE 10-3. FILE ENTRY FORMAT
FIELD NAME BYTES DESCRIPTION
DATA
TYPE
Name 56 File name (see character set for restrictions). Fill any unused
FileName Byte Positions with 0x00.
BCS
FileStartAdd 8 Zero based address of the first block reserved for data associated
with this file. Fill with 0xFF for unused directory entries.
Unsigned
Binary
FileBlkCnt 8 One based number that is the count of consecutive address blocks
reserved for data for this file including the block pointed to by the
FileStartAdd field.
Unsigned
Binary
FileSize 8 The actual number of Bytes contained in this file. This file size
will be equal to or less than the FileBlkCnt multiplied by the block
size. This is an optional entry and will be filled with 0xFF if not
used.
Unsigned
Binary
File Create Date 8 DDMMYYYY BCS Character values, with no embedded spaces or
other formatting characters, representing the numeric date on
which the file was created (e.g., BCS codes for the decimal digits
02092000 0x3032303932303030 represents 2 September 2000).
Fill with 0x2D if a value for the field is not available, or for
portions of the field where data is not available.
BCS
File Create Time 8 HHMMSSss Character values, with no embedded spaces or other
formatting characters, representing the numeric time at which the
file was created. HH is the number of the 24 hour based hour, MM
is the number of minutes after the hour, SS is the number of
seconds after the minute, and ss is the hundredths of seconds after
the second. Fill with 0x2D if a value for the field is not available,
or for portions of the field where data is not available (e.g., ss is
not available).
BCS
Time Type 1 A numeric code that qualifies the time and date values recorded in
the Create Date and Create Time and Close Time fields.
0x0 = Coordinated Universal Time (Zulu)
0x1 = System Time
0x2 0xFE Reserved
0xFF = Time Data Packet
Unsigned
Binary
Reserved 7 Bytes in this region are reserved for future growth. Fill with 0xFF. Unsigned
Binary
File Close Time 8 HHMMSSss Character values, with no embedded spaces or other
formatting characters, representing the numeric time at which the
file was closed. HH is the number of the 24 hour based hour, MM
is the number of minutes after the hour, SS is the number of
seconds after the minute, and ss is the hundredths of seconds after
the second. Fill with 0x2D if a value for the field is not available,
or for portions of the field where data is not available (e.g., ss is
not available).
BCS
Note: 112 Bytes in fixed fields.

10-21

d. File Entry Name. Each file entry in a directory shall have a unique name (See
Naming Restrictions in paragraph 10.5.3.4). Default file name is a BCS
numeric value incrementally increasing, starting at value 1.
e. File Entry Singularity. Multiple File entries are not permitted to refer to the
same regions of memory, partially or completely.
f. Directory Entries and Fields. Directory block fields and entries shall be
logically contiguous.
g. Directory and Memory Region Relationships. File Entries shall be entered
sequentially into a Directory Block as files are recorded, starting with File Entry
#1 in the Primary Directory Block (logical address 1). All File Entry positions
in the Primary Directory Block shall be filled before the first Secondary
Directory Block is used, and so on. However, there is no a priori relationship
between the memory region associated with a file entry and the place-order of
the file entry within the overall directory. For example, the very first file entry
could refer to the very last logical address region of memory, the second file
entry could refer to the beginning logical address of memory, and so on.
Similarly, there is no presumed temporal ordering of file entries; the very last
entry to be inserted could be inserted in such a fashion so as to be the first entry
encountered when traversing the directory chain of blocks.
h. Empty Memory Reads. Reads of regions of memory not containing Directory
Blocks or Data File blocks may return unpredictable data values or result in
other error conditions.
i. Contiguous Directory Entries. File entries and all fields in a directory block are
contiguous.

Deleted Files are not applicable to IRIG-106 Chapter 10 as there are no
recorder commands that allow or provide file deletion.
j. Deleted Files. In some applications, previously recorded files may be deleted in
order to recover media space for new recordings. Deleted files shall be denoted
by marking the corresponding file entrys File Block Count field with 0x00
indicating unused. If the file block count has been set to 0x00, then other
fields in that file entry are no longer meaningful.
k. Reserved Field. Reserved fields shall not be used in IRIG-106 Chapter 10
implementations and shall be filled with 0xFF. Reserved fields are intended for
future IRIG-106 Chapter 10 use.
l. Number of File Entries. The numerical value placed in the Number of File
Entries field of a Directory Block shall equal the number of active File Entries
plus any File Entries marked as deleted files within that Directory Block.
10-22

10.5.3 Data Definitions.
10.5.3.1 Directory Byte Order. The directory structures described in paragraph 10.5 of this
standard are defined to have the following bit and byte orientation. The most significant byte of
any multi-byte structure is byte 0. The most significant bit of each byte is bit 0. This ordering is
commonly referred to as Big Endian.
10.5.3.2 Data Format Byte Order. The data format structures (Packet Header, Secondary
Packet Header, Channel Specific Data Word, Intra-Packet Header, and Packet Trailer) described
in paragraph 10.6 of this standard are defined to have the following bit and byte orientation. The
least significant byte shall be transmitted first, the least significant bit of each byte shall be
transmitted first, and data is read from the lowest logical address first. This ordering is
commonly referred to as Little Endian. The Packet data shall remain in its native byte order
format.
10.5.3.3 Character Set. The character set for all character fields is based on ISO/IEC
10646-1, the Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set (UCS). The NIIA limits characters
to a subset rather than allowing all characters. The subset will be single octets, known as the
Basic Character Set (BCS).
10.5.3.4 Naming Restrictions. The following rules shall be applied when forming names in
order to assure the highest degree of interchange among other operating systems:
a. Characters. Characters from the first 127 common BCS characters
(0x00 through 0x7E) may be used in names except for specific prohibited
characters:
1) Any BCS character code value smaller than 0x20 is prohibited, except where
the 0x00 is used to terminate the name.
2) The other prohibited characters with their hexadecimal representation are
defined in Table 10-4.

TABLE 10-4. PROHIBITED CHARACTERS
(HEXADECIMAL REPRESENTATION)
Forbidden
Characters In
Names
Hexadecimal
Value
Forbidden
Characters In Names
Hexadecimal Value
0x22 = 0x3D
0x27 > 0x3E
* 0x2A ? 0x3F
/ 0x2F \ 0x5C
: 0x3A ] 0x5D
; 0x3B [ 0x5B
< 0x3C | 0x7C

b. Names. Names used for this interface will observe the following rules:
(1) Upper and lowercase characters are considered to be different within file
names.
10-23

(2) Leading and trailing spaces are not permitted.
(3) Leading periods are not permitted.
(4) Names shall fill their field starting with byte 0 per paragraph 10.5.3.1 and
be terminated with a 0x00. Unused Name characters shall be filled with
0x00. Names may utilize the full length of the field, in which case the
terminating 0x00 must be omitted. Examples of host provided and default
file names are shown in Table 10-5.

TABLE 10-5. FILE NAME EXAMPLES

10.6 Data Format Definition
10.6.1 Common Packet Elements. Data shall have three required parts, a Packet Header,
a Packet Body, a Packet Trailer, and an optional part if enabled, a Packet Secondary Header.
Single or multiple channel recordings will always conform to the structure outlined in
Figure 10-8.

a. A packet has the basic structure shown in Figure 10-9. Note that the width of
the structure is not related to any number of bytes or bits. This table is merely
to represent relative packet elements and their placement within the packet. See
Figure 10-10 for a diagram of the generic packet format. This figure does not
depict the bit lengths of each field. Word sizes of 8 bits, 16 bits, and 32 bits are
used depending on the data type.

To further clarify the packet layout, Figure 10-10 shows the generic packet
in a 32-bit, Little-endian format, and assumes 16-bit data words and data
checksum.

10-24

Figure 10-8. Data recording structure.

10-25

PACKET SYNC PATTERN
CHANNEL ID
PACKET LENGTH
DATA LENGTH
DATA TYPE VERSION Packet Header
SEQUENCE NUMBER
PACKET FLAGS
DATA TYPE
RELATIVE TIME COUNTER
HEADER CHECKSUM
TIME Packet
RESERVED Secondary Header
SECONDARY HEADER CHECKSUM (Optional)
CHANNEL SPECIFIC DATA
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP 1
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER 1
DATA 1 Packet Body
:
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP n
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER n
DATA n
DATA CHECKSUM Packet Trailer
Figure 10-9. General packet format.
10-26

msb lsb
31 16 15 0
CHANNEL ID PACKET SYNC PATTERN
PACKET LENGTH
DATA LENGTH
DATA TYPE
PACKET
FLAGS
SEQUENCE
NUMBER
DATA TYPE
VERSION
Packet Header
RELATIVE TIME COUNTER
HEADER CHECKSUM RELATIVE TIME COUNTER
TIME (LSLW) (Optional)
TIME (MSLW) Packet
SECONDARY HEADER
CHECKSUM
RESERVED
Secondary
Header
DATA 1 WORD 2 DATA 1 WORD 1
DATA 1 WORD n :
DATA 2 WORD 2 DATA 2 WORD 1 Packet
DATA 2 WORD n : Body
:
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP N
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP N
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER N
DATA N WORD 2 DATA N WORD 1
DATA N WORD n :
[FILLER]
DATA CHECKSUM
Packet Trailer
Figure 10-10. A 32-bit packet format layout.

10-27

Depending on the data type, the size of the Data Checksum can contain 16 bits, 32 bits, 8 bits, or
the checksum can be entirely left out. For a 32-bit Data Checksum, the packet trailer would be
as shown in Figure 10-11.

msb lsb
7 0
[ FILLER ]
DATA CHECKSUM (LSB)
DATA CHECKSUM Packet Trailer
DATA CHECKSUM
DATA CHECKSUM (MSB)
Figure 10-11. Packet trailer for 32-bit data checksum.

b. For an 8-bit Data Checksum, the packet trailer would be as shown in
Figure 10-12.

msb lsb
7 0
[ FILLER ]
DATA CHECKSUM
Packet Trailer
Figure 10-12. Packet trailer for 8-bit data checksum.

c. The size of a single Packet may be a maximum of 524,288 bytes as shown in
Table 10-6. This includes the Packet Header, Packet Body, Packet Trailer, and
optional Packet Secondary Header if enabled. The only exception to the packet
size limit is the Computer Generated Data Packet, Format 1 Setup Record,
which may be a maximum of 134,217,728 bytes. Any Packet that requires more
than 524,288 bytes may generate multiple packets by utilizing the packet
sequence counter. Some packet types allow a single data set to span multiple
packets if the data set size or time does not fall under packet maximums. The
specific mechanism allowing packet data spanning for each data type is
described within that data types section.
d. With the exception of Computer Generated Packets, all other Packet Generation
Times shall be equal to or less than 100 milliseconds as measured by the 10
MHz Relative Time Counter whenever data is available. This requirement
ensures that a packet shall contain equal to or less than 100 milliseconds worth
of data, and that a packet containing any data must be generated equal to or less
than 100 milliseconds from the time the first data was placed in the packet.
This strategy will assure packet granularity and save bandwidth by not forcing
or marking empty/idle packets.
e. Packets can not contain only filler or can not be idle or empty. All packets that
are generated shall contain data.
f. All reserved bit-fields in packet headers or channel specific data words shall be
set to zero (0x0).
10-28

g. With the exception of Computer Generated Data Packets, all other packets shall
have a Stream Commit Time equal to or less than 1,000 milliseconds as
measured by the 10 MHz Relative Time Counter contained in the packet header.
h. Once version bits and packet structure bits have been used to indicate a value or
setting for each data type and its associated channel, they shall not change for
that data type and its associated channel within the recording.

TABLE 10-6. PACKET REQUIREMENTS
PACKET TYPE REQUIRED
MAXIMUM
PACKET SIZE
REQUIRED PACKET
LOCATION
Computer Generated Data
Packet, Format 1 Setup
Record
Yes 134,217,728
bytes
First Packets in
Recording. A single setup
record may span across
multiple Computer
Generated Data Packets,
Format 1 Setup Record.
Time Data Packet Yes 524,288 bytes First Dynamic Data Packet
Following Setup Record
Packet(s). Reference the
Time Data Packet
Description for packet
rate.
All other data type packets
with the exception of
Packet, Format 1 Setup
Record, Time Data Packets,
and Computer Generated
Data Packet, Format 3
Recording Index (Root
Index)
No 524,288 bytes After First Time Data
Packet and before the last
Packet Format 3,
Recording Index (Root
Index) if enabled.
Packet, Format 3 Recording
Index (Root Index)
Yes, if
Recording
Events are
Enabled.
No, if
Recording
Events are
Disabled.
524,288 bytes If Recording Index
Packets are enabled, Root
Index Packet Type will be
the last packet in a
recording.

10-29

10.6.1.1 Packet Header. The length of the packet header is fixed at 24 bytes (192 bits). The
Packet Header is mandatory and shall consist of ten fields, positioned contiguously, in the
following sequence:

a. Packet Sync Pattern. (2 Bytes) contains a static sync value for the every packet.
The Packet Sync Pattern value shall be 0xEB25.
b. Channel ID. (2 Bytes) contains a value representing the Packet Channel ID.
All channels in a system must have a unique Channel ID for each data source.
(1) Multiplexer Source ID. In a distributed Multiplexer system, a Multiplexer
Source ID is used to discern each multiplexer in the system. The Setup Record
shall contain a Number of Source Bits recorder attribute (R-x\NSB) to specify
the number of most significant bits (from the Channel ID) that distinguish the
Multiplexer Source ID. The remaining least significant bits of the Channel ID
field shall be the Channel ID for each data source acquired by the multiplexer.
(2) Reserved Channel ID. Channel ID 0x0000 is reserved, and is used to insert
computer-generated messages into the composite data stream.
(3) Available Channel IDs. All values not comprising the reserved Channel ID
are available.

For single multiplexer systems: the reserved Channel ID is 0x0000;
values 0x0001 thru 0xFFFF are available Channel IDs; Computer Generated
Data Packets shall only have a Channel ID of 0x0000; and no other data type
can have a Channel ID of 0x0000.
c. Packet Length. (4 Bytes) contains a value representing the length of the entire
packet. The value shall be in bytes and is always a multiple of four (bit 1 and
bit 0 shall always be zero). This Packet Length includes the Packet Header,
Packet Secondary Header (if enabled), Channel Specific Data, Intra-Packet
Headers, Data, Filler, and Data Checksum.
d. Data Length. (4 Bytes) contains a value representing the valid data length
within the packet. This value shall be represented in bytes. Valid data length
includes Channel Specific Data, Intra-Packet Data Headers, Intra-Packet Time
Stamp(s), and Data but does not include Packet Trailer Filler and Data
Checksum.
e. Data Type Version. (1 Byte) contains a value at or below the release version of
standard applied to the data types in table 10-7. The value shall be represented
by the following bit patterns:

0x00 = Reserved
0x01 = Initial Release (IRIG-106-04)
0x02 = IRIG-106-05
0x03 = IRIG-106-07
0x04 = IRIG-106-09
0x05 thru 0xFF = Reserved

10-30

f. Sequence Number. (1 Byte) contains a value representing the packet sequence
number for each Channel ID. This is simply a counter that increments by
n + 0x01 to 0xFF for every packet transferred from a particular channel and is
not required to start at 0x00 for the first occurrence of a packet for the
Channel ID.

Sequence number counter value for each channel in a recording will repeat
(rollover to 0x00) after the sequence number counter has reached 0xFF.

Each Channel in a Recording shall have its own sequence counter
providing a unique Sequence Number for that channel.
g. Packet Flags. (1 Byte) contains bits representing information on the content and
format of the packet(s).

Bit 7: Indicates the presence or absence of the Packet Secondary Header.
0 = Packet Secondary Header is not present.
1 = Packet Secondary Header is present.

Bit 6: Indicates the Intra-Packet Time Stamp Time Source.
0 = Packet Header 48-bit Relative Time Counter.
1 = Packet Secondary Header Time (bit 7 must be 1).

Bit 5: Relative Time Counter Sync Error.
0 = No Relative Time Counter sync error.
1 = Relative Time Counter sync error has occurred.

Bit 4: Indicates the Data Overflow Error.
0 = No data overflow.
1 = Data overflow has occurred.

Bits 3-2: Indicate the Packet Secondary Header Time Format.
00 = IRIG 106 Chapter 4 binary weighted 48-bit time format. The
two LSBs of the 64-bit Packet Secondary Header Time and
Intra-Packet Time Stamp shall be zero filled.
01 = IEEE-1588 Time format. The Packet Secondary Header Time
and each Intra-Packet Time Stamp shall contain a 64-bit
timestamp represented in accordance with the Time
Representation type as specified by IEEE STD 1588-2002. The
32 bits indicating seconds shall be placed into the Most
Significant Long Word portion of the secondary header and the
10-31

32 bits indicating nanoseconds shall be placed into the Least
Significant Long Word portion.
10 = Reserved
11 = Reserved

Bits 1-0: Indicate Data Checksum existence.
00 = No data checksum present
01 = 8-bit data checksum present

h. Data Type. (1 Byte) contains a value representing the type and format of the
data. All values not used to define a data type are reserved for future data type
growth.

TABLE 10-7. DATA TYPE NAMES AND DESCRIPTIONS
PACKET
HEADER
VALUE
DATA TYPE NAME
DATA TYPE
DESCRIPTION
CURRENT
DATA
TYPE
VERSION
0x00 Computer Generated Data, Format 0 (User Defined) 0x02
0x01 Computer Generated Data, Format 1 (Setup Record) 0x03
0x02 Computer Generated Data, Format 2 (Recording Events) 0x03
0x03 Computer Generated Data, Format 3 (Recording Index) 0x03
0x04 0x07
Computer Generated Data, Format 4
Format 7
(Reserved for future use)
0x02
0x08 PCM Data, Format 0 (Reserved for future use) 0x02
0x09 PCM Data, Format 1 (IRIG 106 Chapter 4/8) 0x03
0x0A 0x0F PCM Data, Format 2 Format 7 (Reserved for future use) 0x02
0x10 Time Data, Format 0 (Reserved for future use) 0x02
0x11 Time Data, Format 1 (IRIG/GPS/RTC) 0x03
0x12 0x17 Time Data, Format 2 Format 7 (Reserved for future use) 0x02
0x18 MIL-STD-1553 Data, Format 0 (Reserved for future use) 0x02
0x19 MIL-STD-1553 Data, Format 1 (Mil-Std-1553B Data) 0x03
0x1A MIL-STD-1553 Data, Format 2 (16PP194 Bus) 0x03
0x1B 0x1F
MIL-STD-1553 Data,
Format 3 Format 7
(Reserved for future use)
0x03
0x20 Analog Data, Format 0 (Reserved for future use) 0x02
0x21 Analog Data, Format 1 (Analog Data) 0x02
0x22 0x27 Analog Data, Format 2 Format 7 (Reserved for future use) 0x02
0x28 Discrete Data, Format 0 (Reserved for future use) 0x02
0x29 Discrete Data, Format 1 (Discrete Data) 0x02
0x2A 0x2F Discrete Data, Format 2 Format 7 (Reserved for future use) 0x02
10-32

TABLE 10-7. DATA TYPE NAMES AND DESCRIPTIONS
PACKET
HEADER
VALUE
DATA TYPE NAME
DATA TYPE
DESCRIPTION
CURRENT
DATA
TYPE
VERSION
0x30 Message Data, Format 0 (Generic Message Data) 0x02
0x31 0x37 Message Data, Format 1 Format 7 (Reserved for future use) 0x02
0x38 ARINC 429 Data, Format 0 (ARINC429 Data) 0x02
0x39 0x3F ARINC 429 Data, Format 1 Format 7 (Reserved for future use) 0x02
0x40 Video Data, Format 0 (MPEG-2/H.264 Video) 0x04
0x41 Video Data, Format 1 (ISO 13818-1 MPEG-2) 0x02
0x42 Video Data, Format 2
(ISO 14496 MPEG-4
Part10) 110 AVC/H.264)
0x03
0x43 0x47 Video Data, Format 3 Format 7 (Reserved for future use) 0x03
0x48 Image Data, Format 0 (Image Data) 0x02
0x49 Image Data, Format 1 (Still Imagery) 0x03
0x4A 0x4F Image Data, Format 2 Format 7 (Reserved for future use) 0x03
0x50 UART Data, Format 0 (UART Data) 0x03
0x51 0x57 UART Data, Format 1 Format 7 (Reserved for future use) 0x02
0x58 IEEE-1394 Data, Format 0 (IEEE-1394 Transaction) 0x02
0x59 IEEE-1394 Data, Format 1
(IEEE-1394 Physical
Layer)
0x03
0x5A 0x5F IEEE-1394 Data, Format 2 Format 7 (Reserved for future use) 0x03
0x60 Parallel Data, Format 0 (Parallel Data) 0x02
0x61 0x67 Parallel Data, Format 1 Format 7 (Reserved for future use) 0x02
0x68 Ethernet Data, Format 0 (Ethernet Data) 0x03
0x69 0x6F Ethernet Data, Format 1 Format 7 (Reserved for future use) 0x03

i. Relative Time Counter. (6 Bytes) contains a value representing the 10 MHz
Relative Time Counter (RTC). This is a free-running 10 MHz binary counter
represented by 48 bits which are common to all data channels. The counter
shall be derived from a 10 MHz internal crystal oscillator and shall remain free-
running during each recording.
Note: The applicable data bit to which the 48-bit value applies shall correspond
to the first bit of the data in the packet body (unless it is defined in each data
type section).
j. Header Checksum. (2 Bytes) contains a value representing a 16-bit arithmetic
sum of all 16-bit words in the header excluding the Header Checksum Word.

10-33

10.6.1.2 Packet Secondary Header (Optional). The length of the Packet Secondary Header
is fixed at 12 bytes (96 bits). The Packet Secondary Header is optional and when enabled shall
consist of the three fields, positioned contiguously, in the following sequence:

a. Time. (8 Bytes) contain the value representing Time in the format indicated by
bits 2 and 3 of the Packet Flags in paragraph 10.6.1.1g.
b. Reserved. (2 Bytes) are reserved and shall be zero filled.
c. Secondary Header Checksum. (2 Bytes) contain a value representing a 16-bit
arithmetic sum of all Secondary Header bytes excluding the Secondary Header
Checksum Word.

10.6.1.3 Packet Body. The format of the data in the packet body is unique to each data type.
Detailed descriptions of the type-specific data formats found in packet bodies are described in
subsequent sections of this document.
a. Channel Specific Data. (Variable Bytes) contains the contents of the Channel
Specific Data field(s) depending on the Data Type field in the Packet Header.
Channel Specific Data is mandatory for each data type and channel. The
occurrence of Channel Specific Data is once per packet and precedes packet
channel data.
b. Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) contains Time in either 48-bit Relative
Time Counter format (plus 16 high-order zero bits) or 64-bit absolute format as
specified in the Packet Flags in the Packet Header. The Intra-Packet Time
Stamps are only mandatory where defined by the data formats.
c. Intra-Packet Data Header. (Variable Bytes) contains additional status and
format information pertaining to the data items that follow. The Intra-packet
Data Headers are only mandatory where defined by the data formats.
d. Data. (n Bytes) contains valid data from a particular channel as defined within
the data formats contained within this standard.

The Intra-Packet Time Stamp and the Intra-Packet Data Header are
collectively called the Intra-Packet Header. In some cases, an Intra-Packet
Header may only have a Time Stamp (zero-length Data Header), while in
other cases, the Intra-Packet Header only has a Data Header (zero-length
Time Stamp). Some data types have no Intra-Packet Header. The Intra-
Packet Header requirements are specified separately for each Data Type.

The Intra-Packet Data Header (IPDH) presence, once set, shall be the same
state for the entire recording per each channel

10-34

10.6.1.4 Packet Trailer. The packet trailer may contain filler, a data checksum, both filler
and a data checksum, or neither filler nor a data checksum. In the latter case, the packet trailer
has zero length. The reason a packet trailer would have a zero length is best explained by
understanding the reason for inserting filler. The purpose of the filler is twofold:

a. To keep all packets aligned on 32-bit boundaries (i.e., make all packet lengths a
multiple of 4 bytes), and
b. To optionally keep all packets from a particular channel the same length.

If both of the above requirements are already met without adding filler, then filler shall
not be added.

The inclusion of the data checksum is optional as well and is indicated by the Packet
Flags setting. When included, the packet trailer contains either an 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit Data
Checksum. Depending on the Packet Flags option selected, the Data Checksum is the arithmetic
sum of all of the bytes (8 bits), words (16 bits), or long words (32 bits) in the packet excluding
the 24 bytes of Packet Header, Packet Secondary Header (if enabled) and the Data Checksum.
Stated another way, the Data Checksum includes everything in the packet body plus all added
filler.
a. Filler. (variable Bytes) All filler shall be set to 0x00 or 0xFF.
b. 8-Bit Data Checksum. (1 Byte) contains a value representing an 8-bit arithmetic
sum of the bytes in the packet. Only inserted if Packet Flag bits are set (see
paragraph 10.6.1.1.g).
c. 16-Bit Data Checksum. (2 Bytes) contains a value representing a 16-bit
arithmetic sum of the words in the packet. Only inserted if Packet Flag bits are
set (paragraph 10.6.1.1.g).
d. 32-Bit Data Checksum. (4 Bytes) contains a value representing a 32-bit
arithmetic sum of the long words in the packet and is only inserted if Packet
Flag bits are set (paragraph 10.6.1.1.g).

10.6.2 PCM Data Packets.
10.6.2.1 PCM Data Packets Format 0. Reserved.
10.6.2.2 PCM Data Packets Format 1 (IRIG 106 Chapter 4 and 8). A packet with IRIG-106
Chapter 4 or IRIG-106 Chapter 8 PCM data has the basic structure as shown in Figure 10-13.
Note that the width of the structure is not related to any number of bits. This table merely
represents relative placement of data in the packet.
10-35

PACKET HEADER
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER
MINOR FRAME DATA
MINOR FRAME DATA
MINOR FRAME DATA
MINOR FRAME DATA
:
MINOR FRAME DATA
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-13. General PCM data packet, format 1.

The user may separately enable or disable word unpacking on each active PCM channel.
Word unpacking will force the least significant bit of each word to be aligned on a 16-bit
boundary. High-order filler bits are added to words as necessary to force alignment.

The user may separately enable or disable frame synchronizing on each active PCM
channel. This provides a Throughput Mode that will transfer data to the packet without frame
synchronization. Throughput Mode essentially disables all setup and packing/unpacking options
for the packet, and places data in the packet as it is received.
a. PCM Packet Channel Specific Data. The packet body portion of each PCM
packet begins with the channel specific data, which is formatted as shown in
Figure 10-14.

msb lsb
31 30 29 28 27 24 23 18 17 0
R IPH MA MI LOCKST MODE SYNCOFFSET
Figure 10-14. PCM packet channel specific data format.

10-36

- Reserved. (bit 31) is reserved.
- Intra-Packet Header (IPH). (bit 30) indicates if Intra-Packet Headers
(Intra-Packet Time Stamp and Intra-Packet Data Header) are inserted before
each minor frame. Intra-Packet Headers are only optional because of the
mode selection. This determines whether Intra-Packet Headers are included
or omitted.
0 = Intra-Packet Headers are omitted for Throughput Mode.
1 = Intra-Packet Headers are required for Packed Data and Unpacked Data
modes.
- Major Frame Indicator (MA). (bit 29) indicates if the first word in the
packet is the beginning of a major frame. Not valid for Throughput Mode.
0 = First word is not the beginning of a major frame.
1 = First word is the beginning of a major frame.
- Minor Frame Indicator (MI). (bit 28) indicates if the first word in the packet
is the beginning of a minor frame. Not valid for Throughput Mode.
0 = First word is not the beginning of a minor frame.
1 = First word is the beginning of a minor frame.
- Lock Status (LOCKST). (bits 27-24) indicates the lock status of the frame
synchronizer. Not valid for Throughput Mode.

Minor Frame Definition. The minor frame is defined as the data
structure in time sequence from the beginning of a minor frame
synchronization pattern to the beginning of the next minor frame
synchronization pattern. Please reference IRIG-106 Chapter 4,
paragraph 4.3.2 for minor/major frame definition.

Bits 27-26: Indicate Minor Frame Status.
00 = Reserved.
01 = Reserved.
10 = Minor Frame Check (after losing Lock).
11 = Minor Frame Lock.
Bits 25-24: Indicate Major Frame Status.
00 = Major Frame Not Locked.
01 = Reserved.
10 = Major Frame Check (after losing Lock).
11 = Major Frame Lock.

- Mode (MODE). (bits 23-18) indicates the data packing mode.

Bits 23-22: Reserved.
Bit 21: Alignment Mode.
0 = 16 Bit Alignment Mode enabled.
1 = 32 Bit Alignment Mode enabled.
10-37

Bit 20: Indicates Throughput Data Mode.
0 = Throughput Data Mode not enabled.
1 = Throughput Data Mode enabled.
Bit 19: Indicates Packed Data Mode.
0 = Packed Data Mode not enabled.
1 = Packed Data Mode enabled.
Bit 18: Indicates Unpacked Data Mode.
0 = Unpacked Data Mode not enabled.
1 = Unpacked Data Mode enabled.

- Sync Offset (SYNCOFFSET). (bits 17-0) contains an 18-bit binary value
representing the Word offset into the major frame for the first data word in
the packet. Not valid for Packed or Throughput Mode.
b. PCM Packet Body. After the Channel Specific Data, the Intra-Packet Headers
and the PCM data are inserted in the packet in integral numbers of minor or
major frames, unless the packet is in Throughput Mode. In Throughput Mode,
there is no frame or word alignment to the packet data and no Intra-Packet
Headers are inserted in the data. In both Packed and Unpacked Modes, minor
frame alignment is dependent on the MODE field in the Channel Specific Data.
In 16 Bit Alignment Mode, PCM minor frames begin and end on 16-bit
boundaries. In 32 Bit Alignment Mode, PCM minor frames begin and end on
32-bit boundaries. In either case, Alignment Mode does not affect the format of
PCM data words themselves. However, depending on perspective, word order
is affected and a zero-filled data word may be required to maintain alignment.
c. PCM Data in Unpacked Mode. In Unpacked Mode, packing is disabled and
each data word is padded with the number of filler bits necessary to align the
first bit of each word with the next 16-bit boundary in the packet. For example,
4 pad bits are added to 12-bit words, 6 pad bits are added to 10-bit words, etc.
In 32 Bit Alignment Mode, a zero-filled 16-bit word is required to maintain
alignment when an odd number of 16-bit words exist in the minor frame.

Minor frame sync patterns larger than 16 bits are divided into two words
of packet data. If the sync pattern has an even number of bits, then it will be
divided in half and placed in two packet words. For example, a 24-bit sync
pattern is broken into two (2) 12-bit words with 4 bits of pad in each word. If
the sync pattern has an odd number of bits, it is broken into two (2) words with
the second word having one-bit more of the sync pattern. For example, if the
minor sync pattern is 25 bits, then the first sync word is 12 bits of sync pattern
plus 4 bits of pad, and the second sync word is 13 bits of sync pattern plus 3 bits
of pad.

Minor frame sync patterns larger than 32 bits are divided into
(Number of bits+15) / 16 words in 16 Bit Alignment Mode, or
(Number of bits+31) / 32 in 32 Bit Alignment Mode. If the sync word doesnt
fill the words completely, the first word shall contain the lesser number of bits
10-38

with the later words containing one bit more (in the manner described above in
splitting frame sync pattern words into two words). For example, a 35-bit sync
word shall be split into 11+12+12-bit words in 16 Bit Alignment Mode, or
into 17+18-bit words in 32 Bit Alignment Mode.

Given PCM frames with a 24-bit minor sync pattern and n data words
where the bit-lengths of data words 1, 2, and 3 are 12, 16, and 8 respectively,
the resultant PCM packets are as shown in Figure 10-15.
d. PCM Data in Packed Mode. In Packed Mode, packing is enabled and pad is not
added to each data word. However, filler bits may be required to maintain
minor frame alignment. The number of filler bits is dependent on the
Alignment Mode, where N is either 16 or 32. If the number of bits in the minor
frame is not an integer multiple of N, then Y PAD bits will be added to the end
of each minor frame of bit-length L. Either Y = N MOD(L,N), or N minus
the integer remainder when L is divided by N. In packed mode, the PCM
stream is minor frame synchronized so the first data bit in the packet is the first
data bit of a minor frame. If X = N Y when N is 32 Bit Alignment Mode, then
the resultant PCM packets are as shown in Figure 10-16.
10-39

msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
CHANNEL SPECIFIC DATA (BITS 15-0)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP (BITS 15-0)
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER (BITS 15-0)
(32 Bit Alignment Mode ONLY)
4-BITS PAD 12-BITS SYNC (BITS 23-12)
4-BITS PAD 12-BITS SYNC (BITS 11-0)
4-BITS PAD 12-BITS WORD 1 DATA
16-BITS WORD 2 DATA
8-BITS PAD 8-BITS WORD 3 DATA
:
WORD n DATA BITS + PAD IF NEEDED
ZERO FILLED PAD WORD IF NEEDED
(32 Bit Alignment Mode ONLY)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP ( BITS 15-0)
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER ( BITS 15-0)
:
REPEAT FOR EACH MINOR FRAME
:
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-15. PCM Data unpacked mode sample packet.
10-40

msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
DATA (BITS 15 0)
DATA (BITS 31 16)
DATA (BITS 47 32)
:
Y FILLER BITS
Y FILLER BITS X DATA BITS
:
REPEAT FOR EACH MINOR FRAME
:
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-16. PCM Data packed mode sample packet.

e. PCM Data in Throughput Mode. In Throughput Mode, the PCM data are not
frame synchronized so the first data bit in the packet can be any bit in the major
frame. The resultant PCM packets are as shown in Figure 10-17. Only bit 20 of
the Channel Specific Data word is set to one (1), indicating Throughput Mode.
All other bits of the Channel Specific Data word are undefined and shall be set
to zero (0).

msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
DATA (BITS 15 0)
DATA (BITS 31 16)
DATA (BITS 47 32)
:
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-17. PCM Data Throughput Mode sample packet.
10-41

f. PCM Data Word Order in 32 Bit Alignment Mode. When recording in 32 Bit
Alignment Mode, the resultant data word ordering will differ from 16 Bit
Alignment Mode. The serial PCM data stream is shifted into 32-bit words from
right to left, with bit 31 on the left, bit 0 on the right, and addresses ascending
from top to bottom. Word order is affected depending on the readers
addressing perspective. For example, 16-bit data words when addressed as
32-bit words appear in order when read from left to right, and top to bottom.
However, when addressed as 16-bit words, each pair of data words will appear
swapped. Figure 10-18 and Figure 10-19 depict the anomaly of perspective.

msb lsb addr
31 16 15 0
byte 3 byte 2 byte 1 byte 0
DATA WORD 1 DATA WORD 2 0
DATA WORD 3 DATA WORD 4 1
:
DATA WORD N-1 DATA WORD N N/2-1
Figure 10-18. 32-bit Alignment Mode example, 16-bit data words
(32-bit word addressing).

msb lsb addr
15 0
byte 1 byte 0
DATA WORD 2 0
DATA WORD 1 1
DATA WORD 4 2
DATA WORD 3 3
: :
DATA WORD N-1 N-1
Figure 10-19. 32-bit Alignment Mode example, 16-bit data words
(16-bit word addressing).

g. PCM Intra-Packet Header. When recording in Packed or Unpacked mode, all
PCM minor frames shall include an Intra-Packet Header containing a 64-bit
Intra-Packet Time Stamp and a 16 or 32-bit Intra-Packet Data Header, as
indicated by MODE in the Channel Specific Data. This header is inserted
immediately before the minor frame sync pattern. Depending on Alignment
Mode, the length of the Intra-Packet Header is either 10 or 12 bytes
(80 or 96 bits) positioned contiguously, as depicted in Figure 10-20. In 16 Bit
Alignment Mode, the Intra-Packet Data Header length is fixed at 2 bytes. A
32 Bit Alignment Mode requires a 4 byte Intra-Packet Data Header, and the two
most significant bytes are zero-filled.
10-42

msb lsb
31 16 15 12 11 0
TIME (LSLW)
TIME (MSLW)
zero filled LOCKST RESERVED
Figure 10-20. PCM Intra-packet header.

- Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) indicates the time tag of the PCM
minor frame. Not valid for Throughput Mode. First Long Word Bits and
Second Long Word Bits indicate the following values:
o The 48-bit Relative Time Counter that corresponds to the first data bit of
the minor frame with bits 31 to 16 in the second long word zero filled; or
o Absolute Time, if enabled by bit 6 in the Packet Flags (paragraph
10.6.1.1.g). Time format corresponds to the time format indicated by
bits 2 and 3 in the Packet Flags (paragraph 10.6.1.1.g) and to the first
data bit of the minor frame.

- Intra-Packet Data Header.
o 32 Bit Alignment (32-Bit Alignment Mode ONLY). Bits 31-16 are zero
filled.
o Lock Status (LOCKST). (bits 15-12) indicates the lock status of the
frame synchronizer for each minor frame.
Bits 15-14: Indicates Minor Frame Status.
00 = Reserved.
01 = Reserved.
10 = Minor Frame Check (after losing Lock).
11 = Minor Frame Lock.
Bits 13-12: Indicates Major Frame Status.
00 = Major Frame Not Locked.
01 = Reserved.
10 = Major Frame Check (after losing Lock).
11 = Major Frame Lock.
o Reserved. (bits 11-0) are reserved.

10.6.3 Time Data Packets.
10.6.3.1 Time Data Packets, Format 0. Reserved.
10.6.3.2 Time Data Packets, Format 1 (IRIG/GPS/RTC). Time is treated like another data
channel. If a time source other than none is used (Figure 10-22), the time packet will be
generated at a minimum frequency of 1 Hz.
- IRIG Time Type Formats. The 10 MHz RTC shall be captured for insertion
into the Time Packet Data header IAW IRIG 200 Serial Time Code Formats;
On-Time Reference Marker definition.
10-43

- All Non-IRIG Time Type Formats. The 10 MHz RTC shall be captured for
insertion into the Time Packet Data header consistent with the resolution with
the Time Packet Body format (10 milliseconds as measured by the 10 MHz
RTC).

A Time Data Packet shall be the first dynamic data packet at the start of each
recording. Only static Computer Generated Data, Format 1, packets may
precede the first Time Data Packet in the recording.

If the Time Data Packet Source is None, at least one Time Data Packet is
required IAW the previous NOTE.
A packet with time data has the basic structure shown in Figure 10-21. Note
that the width of the structure is not related to any number of bits. This drawing is
merely to represent relative placement of data in the packet. Time Packets do not
have Intra-Packet Headers.

PACKET HEADER
TIME DATA
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-21. General time data packet, format 1.

a. Time Packet Channel Specific Data. The Packet Body portion of each Time
Data Packet begins with a Channel Specific Data word formatted as shown in
Figure 10-22.

msb lsb
31 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
RESERVED DATE FMT SRC
Figure 10-22. Time Packet channel specific data format.

- Reserved. (bits 31-12) are reserved.
- Date Format (DATE). (bits 11-8) indicates the Date format. All bit patterns
not used to define a date format type are reserved for future growth.

Bits 11-10: Reserved.

Bit 9: Indicates Date Format.
0 = IRIG day available (Figure 10-23)
1 = Month and Year available (Figure 10-24)

Bit 8: Indicates if this is a leap year.
0 = Not a leap year
10-44

1 = Is a leap year
- Time Format (FMT). (bits 7-4) indicates the Time Data Packet format.
0x0 = IRIG-B
0x1 = IRIG-A
0x2 = IRIG-G
0x3 = Real-Time Clock
0x4 = UTC Time from GPS
0x5 = Native GPS Time
0x6 thru 0xE = Reserved
0xF = None (time packet payload invalid)
- Time Source (SRC). (bits 3-0) indicates the source of the time in the
payload of each time packet.
0x0 = Internal (Time derived from a clock in the Recorder)
0x1 = External (Time derived from a clock not in the Recorder)
0x2 = Internal from RMM (Time derived from the clock in the RMM)
0x3 0xE = Reserved
0xF = None

If the Time Source (SRC) is External (0x1) and lock on the external source is
lost then the Time Source (SRC) shall indicate Internal (0x0). Once lock on
the external Time Source is regained, Time Source (SRC) shall once again
indicate External (0x1).

b. Time Packet Body. After the Channel Specific Data word, the time data words
are inserted in the packet in Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) format as shown in
Figure 10-23 and Figure 10-24 (units of measure presented in Table 10-8).

msb lsb
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
0 TSn Sn Hmn Tmn
0 0 THn Hn 0 TMn Mn
0 0 0 0 0 0 HDn TDn Dn
Figure 10-23. Time data - packet format, day format.

msb lsb
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
0 TSn Sn Hmn Tmn
0 0 THn Hn 0 TMn Mn
0 0 0 TOn On TDn Dn
0 0 OYn HYn TYn Yn
Figure 10-24. Time data - packet format, day, month, and year format.

10-45

TABLE 10-8. UNITS OF MEASURE
Tmn Tens of milliseconds TDn Tens of days
Hmn Hundreds of milliseconds HDn Hundreds of Days
Sn Units of seconds On Units of Months
TSn Tens of Seconds TOn Tens of Months
Mn Units of minutes Yn Units of Years
TMn Tens of minutes TYn Tens of Years
Hn Units of hours HYn Hundreds of Years
THn Tens of Hours OYn Thousands of Years
Dn Units of Days 0 Always zero

10.6.4 MIL-STD-1553.
10.6.4.1 MIL-STD-1553 Bus Data Packets, Format 0. Reserved
10.6.4.2 MIL-STD-1553 Bus Data Packets, Format 1 (MIL-STD-1553B Bus Data).
MIL-STD-1553 BUS data is packetized in Message Mode, with each 1553 bus transaction
recorded as a message. A transaction is a BC-to-RT, RT-to-BC, or RT-to-RT word sequence,
starting with the command word and including all data and status words that are part of the
transaction, or a mode code word broadcast. Multiple messages may be encoded into the data
portion of a single packet.
a. MIL-STD-1553 Packet Channel Specific Data. The Packet Body portion of
each MIL-STD-1553 data packet begins with a Channel Specific Data word
formatted as shown in Figure 10-25.
msb lsb
31 30 29 24 23 0
TTB RESERVED MSGCOUNT
Figure 10-25. MIL-STD-1553 Packet channel specific data format.

- Time Tag Bits (TTB). (bits 31-30) indicate which bit of the MIL-STD-1553
message the Intra-Packet Header time tags.
00 = Last bit of the last word of the message
01 = First bit of the first word of the message
10 = Last bit of the first (command) word of the message
11 = Reserved
- Message Count (MSGCOUNT). (bits 23-0) indicates the binary value of the
number of messages included in the packet. An integral number of
complete messages will be in each packet.
b. MIL-STD-1553 Packet Body. A packet with n MIL-STD-1553 messages has
the basic structure shown in Figure 10-26. Note that the width of the structure
10-46

is not related to any number of bits. This drawing is merely intended to
represent relative placement of data in the packet.
PACKET HEADER
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR MESSAGE 1
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR MESSAGE 1
MESSAGE 1
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR MESSAGE 2
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR MESSAGE 2
MESSAGE 2
:
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR MESSAGE n
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR MESSAGE n
MESSAGE n
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-26. MIL-STD-1553 data packet, format 1.

c. MIL-STD-1553 Intra-Packet Header. After the Channel Specific Data, the
MIL-STD-1553 data are inserted into the packet in messages. Each
MIL-STD-1553 message is preceded by an Intra-Packet Header consisting of an
Intra-Packet Time Stamp and an Intra-Packet Data Header.
(1) MIL-STD-1553 Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) indicates the time tag
of the MIL-STD-1553 message as follows.
- The 48-bit Relative Time Counter that corresponds to the data bit
indicated in the MIL-STD-1553 Channel Specific Data, Time Tag Bits
(paragraph 10.6.4.2a) with bits 31 to 16 in the second long word zero
filled; or
- The Absolute Time, if enabled by bit 6 in the Packet Flags
(paragraph 10.6.1.1.g). Time format corresponds to the time format
indicated by bits 2 and 3 in the Packet Flags (paragraph 10.6.1.1.g) and
to the data bit indicated in the MIL-STD-1553 Channel Specific Data,
Time Tag Bits (paragraph 10.6.4.2a).
(2) MIL-STD-1553 Intra-Packet Data Header. The length of the Intra-Packet
Data Header is fixed at 6 bytes (48 bits) positioned contiguously, in the
following sequence (Figure 10-27).

msb lsb
15 0
BLOCK STATUS WORD
GAP TIMES WORD
LENGTH WORD
Figure 10-27. MIL-STD-1553 intra-packet data header.
10-47

- Block Status Word (BSW). (bits 15-0) contain the Block Status Word
for both the message type and any 1553 bus protocol errors that
occurred during the message transfer. The Block Status Word bit
definitions are in Figure 10-28.

msb lsb
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 6 5 4 2 0
R BID ME RR FE TM RESERVED LE SE WE RESERVED
Figure 10-28. Block status word format.

o Reserved (R). (bits 15-14) are reserved.
o Bus ID (BID). (bit 13) indicates the bus ID for the message.
0 = Message was from Channel A
1 = Message was from Channel B
o Message Error (ME). (bit 12) indicates a message error was
encountered.
0 = No message error
1 = Message error
o RT to RT Transfer (RR). (bit 11) indicates a RT to RT transfer;
message begins with two command words.
0 = No RT to RT transfer
1 = RT to RT transfer
o Format Error (FE). (bit 10) indicates any illegal gap on the bus
other than Response Time Out.
0 = No format error
1 = Format error
o Response Time Out (TM). (bit 9) indicates a response time out
occurred. The bit is set if any of the Status Word(s) belonging to
this message didnt arrive within the response time of 14s defined
by MIL-STD-1553B.
0 = No response time out
1 = Response time out
o Word Count Error (LE). (bit 5) indicates that the number of data
words transmitted is different than identified in the command
word. A MIL-STD-1553B Status Word with the busy bit set to
true will not cause a Word Count Error. A transmit command with
a response timeout will not cause a Word Count Error.
0 = No word count error
1 = Word count error
10-48

o Sync Type Error (SE). (bit 4) indicates an incorrect sync type
occurred.
0 = No sync type error
1 = Sync type error
o Invalid Word Error (WE). (bit 3) indicates an invalid word error
occurred. This includes Manchester decoding errors in the synch
pattern or word bits, invalid number of bits in the word, or parity
error.
0 = No invalid word error
1 = Invalid word error

Gap Times (Response Time): The Gap Times Word indicates remote
terminal response times as defined by MIL-STD-1553. The resolution of the
response time shall be in tenths of microseconds. A maximum of two
Response Time Words can exist. Remote Terminal to Remote Terminal type
messages shall have two Response Time Words if both terminals respond; all
other messages will have one Response Time Word, or none for broadcast
type messages or messages with no Remote Terminal response.

- Gap Times Word (bits 15-0). The Gap Times Word indicates the
number of tenths of microseconds in length of the internal gaps within
a single transaction. For most messages, only GAP1 is meaningful. It
measures the time between the command or data word and the first
(and only) status word in the message. For RT-to-RT messages,
GAP2 measures the time between the last data word and the second
status word. The Gap Times Word bit definitions are as shown in
Figure 10-29.

msb lsb
15 8 7 0
GAP2 GAP1
Figure 10-29. Gap Times word format.

Gap measurements shall be made IAW MIL-STD-1553 response time
measurements from the mid-bit zero crossing of the parity bit of the last
word to the mid-zero crossing of the sync of the status word.

- Length Word Bits (15-0). The Length of the message is the total
number of bytes in the message. A message consists of command
words, data words, and status words.

10-49

d. Packet Format. Unless an error occurred, as indicated by one of the error flags
in the Block Status Word, the first word following the Length Word should
always be a command word. The resultant packets have the format shown in
Figure 10-30.

msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR MSG 1 (BITS 15-0)
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR MSG 1 (BITS 15-0)
COMMAND WORD
COMMAND, STATUS, OR DATA WORD
DATA OR STATUS WORD
:
DATA OR STATUS WORD
COMMAND WORD
COMMAND, STATUS, OR DATA WORD
DATA OR STATUS WORD
:
DATA OR STATUS WORD
:
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR MSG N (BITS 15-0)
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR MSG N (BITS 15-0)
COMMAND WORD
COMMAND OR DATA, WORD
DATA OR STATUS WORD
:
DATA OR STATUS WORD
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-30. MIL-STD-1553 data packet, format 1.
10-50

10.6.4.3 MIL-STD-1553 Bus Data Packets, Format 2 (Bus 16PP194 Weapons Bus Data).
This data type provides packetization for F-16 MIL-STD-1553 weapons multiplex bus as defined
in document 16PP362A (Weapons MUX (WMUX) protocols). A 16PP194 transaction consists
of 6 each 32-bit words consisting of a 16PP194 COMMAND (1), COMMAND (1) ECHO,
COMMAND (2), COMMAND (3, GO NOGO), COMMAND (4, GO NOGO), STATUS as
illustrated in Figure 10-31. Multiple transactions may be encoded into the data portion of a
single packet.

Figure 10-31. 16PP194 message transaction.

a. MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 Packet Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet
Body portion of each 16PP MIL-STD-1553 data packet begins with a Channel
Specific Data word formatted as shown in Figure 10-32.

msb lsb
31 0
MSGCOUNT
Figure 10-32. MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 packet channel specific data format.
- Message Count (MSGCOUNT). (bits 31-0) indicates the binary value of the
number of messages included in the packet. An integral number of
complete transaction messages will be in each packet.
b. MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 Packet Body. A packet with n MIL-STD-1553
16PP194 transactions has the basic structure shown in Figure 10-33 below.
This drawing is merely to represent relative placement of data in the packet.
10-51

msb lsb
31 0
PACKET HEADER
16PP194 CHANNEL SPECIFIC DATA WORD
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP (LSLW)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP (MSLW)
INTRA PACKET DATA
HEADER LENGTH WORD
INTRA PACKET DATA
HEADER STATUS WORD
DATA 1
.
.
INTRA PACKET DATA
HEADER LENGTH WORD
INTRAPACKET DATA
HEADER STATUS WORD
DATA N
.
.
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-33. MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 data packet.

c. MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 Intra-Packet Header. The intra-packet header consists
of the intra-packet data header (LENGTH and STATUS) and the intra-packet
time stamp.
- MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 Intra-Packet Data Header LENGTH. The length
word contains the length in bytes of the intra-packet data.

The Intra-packet length is fixed to 0x18, 24 bytes.
- MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 Intra-Packet Data Header STATUS. The status
word contains error and special handling information about the data. The
error indicator bits when set to a 1 reflect that such an error is present in
the data or occurred during data reception. The format of the status word is
shown in Figure 10-34.
msb lsb
15 14 13 12 7 6 5 4 3 2 0
TE RE TM RESERVED SE R EE RESERVED

Figure 10-34. MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 intra-packet data header format.
10-52

o Transaction Error (TE): (bit 15) Error condition found in 16PP194
transaction.
0 = No Errors found in current transaction
1 = ERROR Condition Found in transaction
o Reset (RE): (bit 14) Indicates a 16PP194 Bus Master Reset.
0 = No Master Reset
1 = Master reset Detected on
o Message Time Out (TM). (bit 13) Indicates a transaction time out
occurred.
0 = No message time out
1 = Message time out
o Reserved. (bits 12-7) are reserved
o Status Error (SE). (bit 6) Indicates Status Word missing in
transaction.
0 = Status word present
1 = Status word missing
o Reserved (R). (bits 5-4) are reserved.
o Echo Error (EE). (bit 3) Indicates Echo Word missing in
transaction.
0 = Echo word present
1 = Missing Echo Word

- MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 Intra-Packet Time Stamp. The intra-packet time
stamp (64 bits total) contains a 48-bit relative timestamp in the low-order
bits. The 16 high-order bits are zero.
d. Packet Format. Unless an error occurred, as indicated by one of the error flags
in the Intra-Packet Data Header, the first word following the Length should
always be the first transaction command word. The resultant packets have the
format shown in Figure 10-35.
10-53

msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
INTRA PACKET TIME STAMP (BITS 0-15)
INTRA PACKET DATA HEADER STATUS
INTRA PACKET DATA HEADER LENGTH
COMMAND (1) (BITS 31-16)
COMMAND (1)(BITS 15-0)
COMMAND (1) ECHO (BITS 31-16)
COMMAND (3) GO NOGO (BITS 31-16)
COMMAND (4) GO NOGO ECHO (BITS 31-16)
STATUS (BITS 31-16)
STATUS (BITS 15-0)
INTRA PACKET DATA HEADER STATUS
INTRA PACKET DATA HEADER LENGTH
STATUS (BITS 31-16)
STATUS (BITS 15-0)
-
-
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-35. MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 data packet.

10-54

e. MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 Data Format. Each 26-bit 16PP194 word in a
16PP194 transaction shall be formatted into two 16-bit words (Figure 10-36).
The corresponding 16PP194 Sync and Parity bits will not be formatted into the
16PP194 words.

msb lsb
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 0
BUS ID GAP W P 16PP194Data Word (bits 24-17)
16PP194 Data Word (bits 16-1)
Figure 10-36. MIL-STD-1553 26-bit 16PP194 word format.

- MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 BUS ID (BUS ID). A three-bit field shall be used
to indicate bus identification as follows.
111 CIU Left Bus A
110 CIU Left Bus B
101 CIU Right Bus A
100 CIU Right Bus B
011 Response Bus A and B
010 Response Bus A
001 Response Bus B
000 Incomplete Transaction

- MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 GAP (GAP). A three-bit field shall be used to
indicate GAP between transactions as follows.
111 GAP> 9.15us
110 7.55uS <GAP <=9.15 uS
101 5.95 uS<GAP <=7.55uS
100 4.35 uS<GAP <=5.95
011 2.75 uS<GAP <=4.35uS
010 2.75 uS<GAP <=4.35uS
001 1.15 uS<GAP <=2.75uS
000 Not Applicable

Gap time is measured from mid-crossing of parity bit from previous received
word to the mid-crossing of the sync bit of the current word in 1uS counts.

- MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 Word Bit Error (W). If the bit is set to 1, this
indicates that a Manchester Error was detected in the word.
- MIL-STD-1553 16PP194 Word Parity Error (P). If the bit is set to 1, this
indicates that a parity error occurred in the word.
- 16PP194 Data Word (bits 16-1): 16PP194 data field as in Figure 10-37.
10-55

- 16PP194 Data Word (bits 24-17): 16PP194 RIU Address and RIU Sub
Address as in Figure 10-37.

Figure 10-37. 16PP194 Word Format.

10.6.5 Analog Data Packets.
10.6.5.1 Analog Data Packets, Format 0. Reserved.

10.6.5.2 Analog Data Packets, Format 1. The generic packet structure for analog data is
illustrated in Figure 10-38.

An Analog Data Packet will contain a Channel Specific Data word for each subchannel
of analog data sampled within that packet if the SAME bit is set to 0, or it will contain a single
Channel Specific Data Word for the entire analog packet if the SAME bit is set to 1. This will be
followed by at least one complete sampling schedule of data.

A sampling schedule is defined as a sampling sequence in which each subchannel,
described by a Channel Specific Data word, is sampled at least once. In many cases, due to
simultaneous sampling rules and varied sampling rates, a particular subchannel will be sampled
more than once during a sampling schedule. In addition, multiple complete sampling schedules
may be included in a single packet. For these reasons, the number of Channel Specific Data
words will usually be less than the number of samples.

Figure 10-38 depicts the generic packet data structure for M data subchannels and a
single sampling schedule that has a length N. Note that the width of the structure is not related to
any number of bits and is merely intended to represent relative placement of words within the
packet.

10-56

PACKET HEADER
CHANNEL SPECIFIC DATA WORD, SUBCHANNEL 1
CHANNEL SPECIFIC DATA WORD, SUBCHANNEL 2
:
:
:
CHANNEL SPECIFIC DATA WORD, SUBCHANNEL M
SAMPLE 1
SAMPLE 2
:
:
:
SAMPLE N
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-38. Generic analog data packet, format 1.

The Packet Header Time in an Analog Data packet shall correspond to the
first data sample in the packet. There are no Intra-Packet Headers in Analog
Data Packets.

a. Analog Packet Channel Specific Data. The Packet Body portion of each Analog
packet begins with the Channel Specific Data word(s). Each subchannel that is
sampled with the packet sampling schedule must have a Channel Specific Data
word within the packet. Only one Channel Specific Data word is required if
subchannels are sampled at the same sampling rate (FACTOR), and have the
same bits per sample (LENGTH) and same packing mode ("MODE"). Bit 28
of the channel specific data word shall be used to indicate same sampling data rate
for subchannels.

Channel Specific Data words for Analog Data Packets are formatted as

msb lsb
31 29 28 27 24 23 16 15 8 7 2 1 0
RESERVED SAME FACTOR TOTCHAN SUBCHAN LENGTH MODE
Figure 10-39. Analog packet channel specific data word.

- Same. (bit 28) specifies if this Channel Specific Data Word applies for all
the channels included in the packet, or if each channel has its own Channel
Specific Data Word.
10-57

0 = each analog channel has its own Channel Specific Data Word
1 = The Channel Specific Data Word is valid for all analog channels
stored in this packet
- Factor. (bits 27-24) is the exponent of the power of 2 sampling rate factor
denominator for the corresponding subchannel in the range 0 to 15. (The
sampling rate factor numerator is always 1.)
0x0 = sampling rate factor denominator 2
0
= 1 => factor =
1
/
1

1
= 2 => factor =
2
= 4 => factor =
:
0xF = sampling rate factor denominator 2
15
= 32768 => factor =
1
/
32768

- Totchan. (bits 23-16) indicates the total number of analog subchannels in
the packet (and the number of Channel Specific Data words in the packet).

This Totchan field must be the same value in all Channel Specific Data
words in a single packet. The Totchan value may be less than the largest
Subchan value. This can happen when a multi-channel analog input device
has some of its subchannels disabled (turned off) for a specific recording.
For example, if an analog input device has eight subchannels and not all
eight are active, an analog data packet may have three subchannels
(Totchan=3) numbered 4, 7, and 8 (enabled Subchan = 4, 7, 8). The
number of subchannels (Totchan) and the subchannel number for each
active subchannel (Subchan) in a packet are identified in the accompanying
TMATS (Computer Generated Data, Format 1) packet.
0x00 = 256 Subchannels
0x01 = 1 Subchannel
0x02 = 2 Subchannels

- Subchan. (bits 15-8) indicates a binary value representing the number of the
analog subchannel.

When an Analog Packet contains data from more than one subchannel
and the Channel Specific Data Words are not the same for all channels (see
field Same, bit 28), the Channel Specific Data words must be inserted into
the packet in ascending subchannel number as identified by this Subchan
field. The Subchan values in these Channel Specific Data words need not
be contiguous (see Totchan), but they must be in ascending decimal
numerical order with the exception that subchannel 0 (256) is last. If the
Same bit is set, the Subchan field shall be set to zero.
0x01 = Subchannel 1
0x02 = Subchannel 2
:
0x00 = Subchannel 256
:
10-58

- Length. (bits 7-2) indicates a binary value representing the number of bits
in the Analog to Digital converter (A/D).
000000 = sixty-four bit samples
000001 = one bit samples
:
001000 = eight bit samples
:
001100 = twelve bit samples
:
- Mode. (bits 1-0) indicates alignment and packing modes of the analog data.
Bit 0 is the packing bit and bit 1 is the alignment bit. When TOTCHAN,
defined, is more than 1, the Mode must be the same for all subchannels in a
single packet.
00 = data is packed
01 = data is unpacked, lsb padded
10 = Reserved for future definition
11 = data is unpacked, msb padded

b. Analog Samples. To preserve timing relationships and allow for accurate
reconstruction of the data, a simultaneous sampling scheme shall be employed.
The highest sampling rate required shall define the primary simultaneous
sampling rate within the packet. The primary simultaneous sampling rate is
identified in the Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard (TMATS) file
describing the attributes of the analog data packet. The rate at which the other
subchannels are sampled is then defined by the sampling factor (1, , ,
1
/
8
,
1
/
16
,
1
/
32768
) for each subchannel. As an example, a sampling factor of would
yield that subchannel being sampled at one-fourth the primary simultaneous
sampling rate and a sampling factor of 1 would yield that subchannel being
sampled at the primary simultaneous sampling rate.

Directly following the Channel Specific Data word(s), at least one
complete sampling schedule shall be inserted in the packet. The samples,
within the sampling sequence, may be inserted either unpacked, MSB Packed,
or LSB Packed as described in paragraph 10.6.5.2.b(1) and 10.6.5.2.b(2). In
either case, one or more subchannels may be included in a single packet. When
multiple subchannels are encapsulated into a single packet, the subchannel with
the highest sampling rate requirement defines the primary simultaneous
sampling rate. The rate at which the other subchannels are sampled is defined
by the sampling factor (contained within the Channel Specific Data words).
Sampling factors are defined as:

X
2
1
K
-
|
.
|
\
|
; K = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

of the Primary Simultaneous Sampling Rate X.
10-59

10-60
The subchannels are then sampled and ordered such that:
- The highest sample rate X 1- subchannel(s) appear in every simultaneous
sample,
X - |
.
|
\
2
| 1
- The subchannel(s) appear in every 2nd simultaneous sample,
- The subchannel(s) appear in every 4
th
simultaneous sample,

and so on until all the subchannels are sampled, resulting in a complete
sampling schedule of all subchannels described by the Channel Specific Data
words. In doing so, the total number of simultaneous samples (not the total
number of samples) will equal the denominator of the smallest sampling factor
and all subchannels will be sampled in the last simultaneous sample.
X - |
.
|
\
|
4
1

For example, a packet with six subchannels with Sampling Factors ,
1
/
8
, 1,
, 1, and
1
/
8
respectively will yield a sampling sequence within the data packet as:

Simultaneous Sample 1: Subchannel 3








Notice that the denominator of the smallest sampling factor defines the number of
simultaneous samples within the packet (in this example, 8). However, the total
number of samples within the sampling schedule does not have to equal the number
of simultaneous samples (in this example, 26). Also notice that all subchannels are
sampled during the last Simultaneous Sample. The order of the subchannel samples
in each simultaneous sample is ascending by subchannel number.

Any number of complete sampling schedules may be placed within a packet so
that the maximum packet length is not exceeded. The TMATS file identifies the
number of samples contained within each packet.
(1) Unpacked Mode. In Unpacked Mode, packing is disabled and each sample is
padded with the number of bits necessary to align each word with the next
16-bit boundary in the packet. Four (4) pad bits are added to 12 bit words,
eight (8) pad bits are added to 8-bit words, etc. All pad bits shall equal zero.

Samples less than 8 bits go into a 16-bit word boundary.
To illustrate msb padding, given M analog subchannels mapping into N
samples for the special case of all samples having bit lengths of 12 bits, the
resultant Analog packets with msb padding have the form shown in
Figure 10-40.

msb
15
lsb
0
PACKET HEADER
CHANNEL SPECIFIC DATA WORD, SUBCHANNEL 1 (BITS 15-0)
:
:
:
CHANNEL SPECIFIC DATA WORD, SUBCHANNEL M (BITS 15-0)
4-PAD BITS SAMPLE 1, 12-DATA BITS
4-PAD BITS SAMPLE 2, 12- DATA BITS
4-PAD BITS SAMPLE 3, 12- DATA BITS
:
4-PAD BITS SAMPLE N, 12- DATA BITS
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-40. Analog data packet - unpacked mode, msb padding.
10-61

To illustrate LSB Packing, given M analog subchannels mapping into N
resultant Analog packets with LSB padding have the form shown in
Figure 10-41.

msb
15
lsb
0
PACKET HEADER
:
:
:
:
SAMPLE 1, 12- DATA BITS 4-PAD BITS

SAMPLE N, 12- DATA BITS 4-PAD BITS
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-41. Analog data packet - unpacked mode, lsb padding.

(2) Packed Mode. In Packed Mode, packing is enabled and padding is not added
to each data word. However, if the number of bits in the packet are not an
integer multiple of 16, then Y filler bits will be used to msb fill the last data
word, forcing alignment on a 16-bit boundary. The value of Y is sixteen (16)
minus the integer remainder of L, the total number of data bits in the packet,
divided by 16 and is mathematically expressed as:

Y = 16 - (MODULUS{L,16}).

To illustrate msb padding, given M Analog subchannels mapping into N
resultant Analog packets with padding bits at the end of the N
th
sample have
the form shown in Figure 10-42.
10-62

msb
15
lsb
0
PACKET HEADER
:
:
:
SAMPLE 2 (BITS 3-0) SAMPLE 1 (BITS 11-0)
SAMPLE 3 (BITS 7-0) SAMPLE 2 (BITS 11-4)
: :
: :
: :
Y PADDING BITS SAMPLE N (BITS 11-0)
:
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-42. Analog data packet - packed mode packet.

10.6.6 Discrete Data Packets.
10.6.6.1 Discrete Data Packets, Format 0. Reserved.
10.6.6.2 Discrete Data Packets, Format 1. A packet with Discrete data has the basic structure
shown in Figure 10-43. Note that the width of the structure is not related to any number of bits.
This drawing is merely intended to represent relative placement of data in the packet. One to 32
discrete states may be recorded for each event.

PACKET HEADER
INTRA-PACKET HEADER FOR EVENT 1
EVENT 1 STATES
INTRA-PACKET HEADER FOR EVENT 2
EVENT 2 STATES
:
INTRA-PACKET HEADER FOR EVENT N
EVENT N STATES
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-43. General discrete data packet, format 1.

10-63

a. Discrete Packet Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet Body portion of each
Discrete packet begins with the Channel Specific Data Word, which is

msb lsb
31 8 7 3 2 0
RESERVED LENGTH MODE
Figure 10-44. Discrete packet channel data word format.

- Reserved. (bits 31-8)
- Length (bits 7-3). Indicates a binary value representing the number of bits
in the event.
- Mode (bits 2-0). Indicates the mode of accessing the discrete data.
Bit 0: indicates the Record State.
0 = discrete data is recorded when the state changes
1 = discrete data is recorded on a time interval basis

Bit 1: indicates the alignment of the data.
0 = lsb
1 = msb

Bit 2: reserved.

b. Discrete Data. After the Channel Specific Data, Discrete data (Figure 10-45) is
inserted in the packet. Discrete data are described as Events. Each Event
includes the Event State for each discrete input and the corresponding Intra
packet Time. The Event State is a 32-bit word that provides the logical state of
each discrete input.

msb lsb
31 30 1 0
D31 D30 D1 D0
Figure 10-45. Discrete data format.

- Discrete Event Bits. (Bits 31-0) indicate the states of the discrete event bits.
Bit 31: indicates Discrete 31 (D31) State.
0 = discrete 31 is at state 0
10-64

Bit 0: indicates Discrete 0 (DO) State.

c. Discrete Event Intra-Packet Header. All discrete events shall include an Intra-
Packet Header consisting of an Intra-Packet Time Stamp only, which is inserted
immediately before the discrete event. The length of the Intra-Packet Header is
fixed at 8 bytes (64 bits) positioned contiguously, arranged in the sequence

msb lsb
31 0
TIME (LSLW)
TIME (MSLW)
Figure 10-46. Discrete event intra-packet header.

- Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) indicate the time tag of the discrete
event. First Long Word Bits 31-0 and Second Long Word Bits 31-0 indicate
the following values:
(1) The 48-bit Relative Time Counter that corresponds to the first data bit
of the discrete event with bits 31 to 16 in the second long word zero
filled or;
(2) The Absolute Time, if enabled by bit 6 in the Packet Flags
to the first data bit of the discrete event. The discrete data packet format
is presented in Figure 10-47.
10-65

msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR EVENT 1 (BITS 150)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR EVENT 1 (BITS 3116)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR EVENT 1 (BITS 47-32)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR EVENT 1 (BITS 63-48)
STATES FOR EVENT 1 (BITS 150)
STATES FOR EVENT 1 (BITS 3116)
:
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR EVENT n (BITS 150)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR EVENT n (BITS 3116)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR EVENT n (BITS 47-32)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR EVENT n (BITS 63-48)
STATES FOR EVENT n (BITS 150)
STATES FOR EVENT n (BITS 3116)
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-47. Discrete data packet format.

10.6.7 Computer Generated Data Packets. Packets with Computer Generated Data have the
basic structure shown in Figure 10-48. Formats 0, 1, 2, and 3 are used to add information
packets to recorded data. This information contains annotation data, setup records, events, or
index information for the data that has been recorded. The width of the structure is not related to
any number of bits. This drawing is merely intended to represent relative placement of data in
the packet.

Computer Generated Data is defined as non-external data or data generated
within the recorder. After the Channel Specific Data Word, the Computer
Generated Data is inserted in the packet. The organization and content of
the Computer Generated Data is determined by the specific Format type.

PACKET HEADER
COMPUTER GENERATED DATA
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-48. General computer generated data packet format.

10.6.7.1 Computer Generated Data Packets Format 0, User Defined. Format 0 enables the
insertion of user-defined Computer Generated Data. Data can not be placed in this packet if the
data type is already defined within this standard nor can data be inserted in this packet if it is
generated from an external input to the recorder.
10-66

- Computer Generated Packets Format 0 Channel Specific Data Word. The
Packet Body portion of each Format 0 Packet begins with the Channel Specific
Data word, which is formatted as shown in Figure 10-49.

msb lsb
31 0
RESERVED
Figure 10-49. Computer generated format 0 channel specific data word format.


10.6.7.2 Computer Generated Data Packets Format 1, Setup Records. Format 1 defines a
setup record that describes the hardware, software, and data channel configuration used to
produce the other data packets in the file. The organization and content of a Format 1 Setup
Record is indicated in the Channel Specific Data Word FRMT field.

It is mandatory for a setup TMATS record to be utilized to configure the recorder. A
Format 1 Computer Generated Data Packet containing the setup TMATS record utilized to
configure the recorder shall be the first packet in each data file. A single setup record may span
multiple consecutive packets. When spanning multiple packets, the sequence counter shall
increment in the order of segmentation of the setup record, n+1.
a. Format 1 - Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet Body portion of each
Format 1 Packet begins with the Channel Specific Data word, which is formatted
as shown in Figure 10-50.

msb lsb
31 10 9 8 7 0
RESERVED FRMT SRCC CH10VER
Figure 10-50. Computer generated format 1 channel specific data word format.

- FRMT (bit 9): Setup record format.
0 = Setup Record IAW IRIG-106 Chapter 9 ASCII Format
1 = Setup Record IAW IRIG-106 Chapter 9 XML Format

It is not permissible to have both ASCII and XML IRIG-106 Chapter 9
TMATS attributes in the same recording or recording sessions.

- Setup Record Configuration Change (SRCC). (bit 8) indicates if the recorder
configuration contained in the previous Setup Record packet(s) of the current
recording session (defined as .RECORD to .STOP) has changed.
10-67

0 = Setup Record Configuration has Not Changed
1 = Setup Record Configuration has Changed

When a setup record configuration change has taken place, bit 8 (SRCC)
shall be set to 1 and the new setup record packet will be committed to the
stream prior to any new or changed data packets being committed to the
stream. The next setup record packet(s) committed to the stream, if not
changed from this new setup record, shall clear the SRCC bit to 0.

Prior to the new setup record being committed to the stream, a Setup
Record Configuration Change event packet shall be inserted into the
stream.

Each new setup record packet must adhere to all applicable setup record
requirements including, but not limited to, the minimum required TMATS
attributes.
- IRIG-106 Chapter 10 Version (CH10VER). A 1-Byte indicator of which
IRIG-106 Chapter 10 release version the recorder requirements and following
recorded data are applicable to and comply with. The value shall be represented
by the following bit patterns:

0x00 thru 06 = Reserved
0x07 = IRIG-106-07
0x08 = IRIG-106-09
0x09 thru 0xFF = Reserved

Individual paragraph 10.6 Data Types and their format/content compliancy
and applicability with the IRIG-106 Chapter 10 release version are defined in
paragraph 10.6.1.1e.

10.6.7.3 Computer Generated Data Packets Format 2, Recording Event. Format 2 defines
a recording event packet that contains the occurrence and information of one or more individual
events that have been defined within the Format 1 Setup Record IAW Recording Events
attribute. If the Recording Events information is larger than the maximum packet size of 512K
bytes, the Recording Events information may be contained in multiple packets using the Major
Packet Header Sequence Number.

Events associated with the .EVENT command defined in Table 10-9 can only be directly
accessed from the recorder itself and are not contained within the recording data. This does not
preclude defining an event driven by the .EVENT command to also be defined within the
Recording Event setup record information and placed in the appropriate event entry within an
10-68

event packet. The .EVENT recorder command and the Recording Event packets will not be
directly linked in this standard and any linking between the two will be an implementation of this
standard within a recorder.

It is not the intent for the event packets within the data to be directly
coupled with recorder events per the .EVENT command in Table 10-9.

a. Event Packet Location. Recording Event packets may be placed at any location
within the recording after the first Time Data packet and before the last Root
Index Packet. This may be at the time each event occurs, after multiple events
have occurred or at an interval of time or packets. The complete event log of a
recording (defined in Event Period of Capture paragraph 10.6.7.3c) is
constituted by the contents of all event packets in a recording concatenated in
order of which the event(s) occurred in time.

Index Packets will be enabled if Recording Event Packets are enabled.

b. Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet Body portion of each Format 2
Packet begins with the Channel Specific Data word, which is formatted as

msb lsb
31 30 12 11 0
IPDH RESERVED REEC
Figure 10-51. Computer generated format 2 channel specific data word.

- Recording Event Intra-Packet Data Header (IPDH). (bit 31) indicates the
presence of the Intra-Packet Data Header.
0 = Recording Event Intra-Packet Data Header Not Present
1 = Recording Event Intra-Packet Data Header Present


- Recording Event Entry Count (REEC). (bits 11-0) are an unsigned binary
that identifies the count of recording event entries included in the packet.

c. Event Period of Capture. Denotes the period of capture (Figure 10-52), and is
defined to encompass the events occurring from the time a .RECORD command
(paragraph 10.7.9) is issued (if it is the first recording) until the time a .STOP
command (paragraph 10.7.9) is issued. If there is a previous recording, the
10-69

period of capture is described as encompassing those events that occur from the
previous recordings .STOP command until the .STOP command of the current
recording. This ensures that any events that occurred between recordings will
be captured and will include special indicators that the event occurred between
.STOP and .RECORD commands.

Priority conditions and event limit counts are defined in the setup record
attributes for each defined event. The ability to put finite limits on events
during periods of capture precludes overflowing buffers or media capacities.
These priority conditions and event limit counts are as follows:

Priority 1: Defined event will always be captured during and in between
recordings.
Priority 2: Defined event will always be captured during recordings and
up to a limit count between recordings.
Priority 3: Defined event will always be captured during recordings and
not captured between recordings.
Priority 4: Defined event will be captured up to a limit count during
recordings and between recordings.
Priority 5: Defined event will be captured up to a limit count for each
defined event during recordings and not captured between
recordings.

.
R
E
C
O
R
D
.
S
T
O
P
.
R
E
C
O
R
D
.
S
T
O
P
.
R
E
C
O
R
D
.
S
T
O
P
Recording n+1 Recording n+2 Recording n
Recording n Event
Period
Recording n+1
Event Period
Recording n+2
Event Period

Figure 10-52. Events recording period.

10-70

d. Event Condition of Capture. Event trigger mode conditions during the Event
Period of Capture are defined in the setup record attributes for each defined
event. These MEASUREMENT DISCRETE or MEASUREMENT LIMIT
trigger mode conditions are as follows:

Mode 1: Capture MEASUREMENT DISCRETE event at each
On (1) and Off (0) mode transition sampling.
On (1) mode transition sampling.
Off (0) mode transition sampling.
Mode 4: Capture MEASUREMENT LIMIT event at each
High and Low value transition sampling.
High value transition sampling.
Low value transition sampling.

If Event Type is MEASUREMENT DISCRETE or MEASUREMENT
LIMIT, the trigger measurement must be fully described using the Setup
Record attributes for PCM, Bus, Analog, or Discrete channels. The trigger
measurement source and measurement name shall be identified in the
Event Definition.

e. Event Initial Capture. Event initial capture conditions are defined in the setup
record attributes for each defined event. This determines if an event will be
captured initially prior to the transition mode set for the event if the transition
has already occurred prior to the Event Period of Capture.

f. Event Trigger Measurement Description. If Event Type is MEASUREMENT
DISCRETE or MEASUREMENT LIMIT, the trigger measurement must be
fully described using the Setup Record attributes for PCM, Bus, Analog, or
Discrete channels. This shall include at a minimum the following attributes for
the Trigger measurement:

(1) Measurement Source (via data link name).
(2) Measurement Name.
(3) Applicable Measurement Value Definition or Bit Mask.
(4) High Measurement Value (if MEASUREMENT LIMIT at or above the
high limit is used to trigger the event).
(5) Low Measurement Value (if MEASUREMENT LIMIT at or below the
low limit is used to trigger the event).
(6) Applicable Measurement Name Engineering Unit Conversion.
10-71

g. Recording Event Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) indicates the time tag of
the Recording Event Entry as follows:

(1) The 48-bit Relative Time Counter that corresponds to the Event Entry
with bits 31 to 16 in the second long word zero filled. For Event Types
that are MEASUREMENT DISCRETE or MEASUREMENT LIMIT, the
time tag will correspond to the data packet timing mechanism containing
the trigger measurement. This will either be the Packet Header Relative
Time Counter value or, if enabled, the Intra-Packet Time Stamp
whichever most accurately provides the time the event occurred; or
indicated by bits 2 and 3 in the Packet Flags (paragraph 10.6.1.1.g) and to
the Event Entry. For Event Types that are MEASUREMENT DISCRETE
or MEASUREMENT LIMIT, the time tag will correspond to the data
packet timing mechanism containing the trigger measurement. This will
either be the Packet Secondary Header (if enabled and using an absolute
time value) or, if enabled and using an absolute time value, the Intra-
Packet Time Stamp whichever most accurately provides the time the
event occurred.

The format of the recording event intra-packet header is presented in
Figure 10-53. Figure 10-54 and Figure 10-55 present the general
recording event packet format and recording event entry layout.

h. (Optional) Recording Event Intra-Packet Data Header. (8 Bytes) contains the
absolute time of the event occurrence. The time source and format shall be
derived from the Time Data Packet, Format 1. Unused high-order bits will be
zero filled as needed, depending on the time type of the Time Data Packet.

msb lsb
31 0
(OPTIONAL) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER (LSLW)
(OPTIONAL) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER (MSLW)
Figure 10-53. Recording event intra-packet header.

i. Event Packet Entry Format. Figures 10-54 and 10-55 present the general
recording event packet format and recording event entry layout.
10-72

PACKET HEADER
(Optional) PACKET SECONDARY HEADER
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR EVENT 1
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR EVENT 1
RECORDING EVENT 1
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR EVENT 2
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR EVENT 2
RECORDING EVENT 2
:
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR EVENT n
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR EVENT n
RECORDING EVENT n
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-54. General recording event packet format.

msb lsb
31 29 28 27 12 11 0
RESERVED EO EVENT COUNT NUMBER
Figure 10-55. Recording event entry layout.

- Reserved. (bits 31-29) Reserved for future growth and shall be zero filled.
- Event Occurrence (EO). (bit 28) Indicates Event Occurrence State.
0 = Indicates the event occurred after the .STOP command and before
the .RECORD command.
1 = Indicates the event occurred after the .RECORD command and
before the .STOP command.
- Event Count. (bits 27-12) An unsigned binary that identifies the count of up
to 65,535 occurrences of an individually defined event (as defined by Event
Number in the following paragraph). Event occurrence counts shall begin at
0x0 for the first occurrence of an individual event type (identified by the
Event Number). The event count can roll over to 0x0 and begin to count up
again. The event count applicability is for each Event Period of Capture as
defined in paragraph 10.6.7.3c. The Event Count shall start from 0x0 at the
beginning of each Event Period of Capture incrementing at n+0x1 to
0xFFFF for each event occurrence. If the event count reaches 0xFFFF
within the Event Period of Capture it shall roll over to 0x0.
- Event Number. (bits 11-0) An unsigned binary that identifies 4096
individual events types defined in the corresponding setup record Recording
Event Number. The Event Number shall begin at 0x0 for the first event
10-73

type defined in the setup record and increment n+1 for the next event type
defined in the setup record.

10.6.7.4 Computer Generated Data Packets Format 3, Recording Index. This defines an
index packet for an individual recording file used for direct access into the recording file.
Recording Index packets will be enabled when Recording Event packets are enabled. There are
two types of index packets:

Recording Index packets will be enabled when Recording Event packets
are enabled.
- Root Index Packets: contain zero based byte offset entries that are the beginning
of Node Index packets. The last entry will be an offset to the beginning of the
previous root index packet if there are more than one Root Index packets, or to the
beginning of the Root Index packet itself, if this root index packet is either the
first root index packet of the recording or the only root index packet. Root Index
packets will not contain Filler in the Packet Trailer and will contain a 32-bit Data
Checksum in the Packet Trailer.

Root Index packets shall not contain Filler in the Packet Trailer and shall
contain a 32-bit Data Checksum in the Packet Trailer.

Each recording file with indexes enabled shall have at a minimum one (1)
Root Index Type packet.

- Node Index Packets: contain Node Items structures containing information
about the location of data packets throughout the recording.

At a minimum, an index entry shall exist for each Time Data Packet in the
recording and, at a minimum, an index entry shall exist for each Recording
Event Packet in the recording.

If the Recording Index Type uses a Count rather than Time, the Time Data
Packets and Computer Generated Data Packets are not included in the
count interval.
If the Recording Index Type uses a Time rather than Count, the Time Data
Packets are not included in the time interval. If the Time Count value
coincides with the Time Packet rate, then one index entry shall be created.
10-74

If the Recording Indexes are enabled the Computer Generated Data Packet
Format 1 Setup Record Count or Time interval value cannot be zero.

a. Recording Index Packet Location. If indexes are enabled, a Root Index packet
(Figure 10-56) will be the last packet in any recording file. More than one (1)
Root Index Type packet may be created and may be located within the
recording. Root Index packets are not required to be contiguous. Node Index
Types may be placed at any location within the recording after the first Time
Data packet and before the last Root Index packet. This may be at an interval of
time or packets. If Indexes are based on a time interval, the time interval shall
be referenced to and based on 10MHz RTC counts. When a time-based index
time interval expiration takes place and all packet(s) are open (not generated),
the index offset and time stamp will be based on the first of the opened packets
generated. Packet generation and packet generation time shall apply per the
definitions in paragraph 10.2.

Figure 10-56. Format showing root index packet.

10-75

b. Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet Body portion of each Format 3
Packet begins with the Channel Specific Data word, which is formatted as
msb lsb
31 30 29 28 16 15 0
IT FSP IPDH RESERVED INDEX ENTRY COUNT
Figure 10-57. Channel specific data word format.
- Index Type (IT). (bit 31) indicates the type of index packet.
0 = Root Index
1 = Node Index
- File Size Present (FSP). (bit 30) indicates if the file size at the time the
index packet was created is present.
0 = File Size Not Present
1 = File Size Present
- Index Intra-Packet Data Header (IPDH). (bit 29) indicates the presence of
the Intra-Packet Data Header.
0 = Index Intra-Packet Data Header Not Present
1 = Index Intra-Packet Data Header Present
- Index Entry Count. (bits 15-0) indicates the unsigned binary value of the
number of index entries included in the packet. An integral number of
complete index entries will be in each packet.

The Intra-Packet Data Header (IPDH) presence once set by bit 29 shall be
the same state for the entire recording.
c. Recording Index Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) indicates the time tag of
the Recording Index Entry as follows:
- The 48-bit Relative Time Counter that corresponds to the Index Entry, with
bits 31 to 16 in the second long word zero filled. For Node Index Packets
this corresponds to the first bit in the packet body of the packet associated
with the Node Index Item; or
- The Absolute Time, if enabled by bit 6 in the Packet Flags
indicated by bits 2 and 3 in the Packet Flags (paragraph 10.6.1.1.g) and to
the Index Entry. For Node Index Packets this corresponds to the first bit in
the packet body of the packet associated with the Node Index Item.
d. (Optional) Recording Index Intra-Packet Data Header. (8 Bytes) contains the
absolute time of the Index Entry. The time source and format shall be derived
from the Time Data Packet, Format 1. Unused high-order bits will be zero
10-76

filled as needed, depending on the time type of the Time Data Packet.
Figure 10-58 presents the format of the recording index intra-packet header.

msb lsb
31 0
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER (LSLW)
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER (MSLW)
Figure 10-58. Recording index intra-packet header.

e. Root Index Packet Entry Format. A Root Index Packet contains a Node Index
Offset entry or entries using the format shown in Figure 10-59 and
Figure 10-60.
- (Optional) Root Index File Size. (8 Bytes) An unsigned binary that
identifies the current size in bytes of the file at the time the Root Index
Packet was created and placed into the recording. This value should be the
same as the Root Index Offset. The file size is required when a recording is
split across multiple media, individual or multiple channels are split from
the original recording file, or time slices are extracted from the original
recording. In all cases the original recording file size will allow
recalculation and/or replacement of the index offsets when required.
- Node Index Offset. (8 Bytes) An unsigned binary that identifies the zero
based byte offset from the beginning of the recording file to the point in the
file at which the Node Index Packet Sync Pattern (0xEB25) begins.
- Root Index Offset. (8 Bytes) An unsigned binary that identifies the zero
file at which the previous Root Index Packet begins, if there are more than
one (1) Root Index Packets or to itself, if it is the first or only Root Index
Packet.
10-77

PACKET HEADER
(Optional) ROOT INDEX FILE SIZE
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR NODE INDEX 1
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR NODE INDEX 1
NODE INDEX OFFSET 1
:
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR NODE INDEX n
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR NODE INDEX n
NODE INDEX OFFSET n
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR ROOT INDEX
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR ROOT INDEX
ROOT INDEX OFFSET
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-59. General recording root index packet.

msb lsb
31 0
(Optional) FILE SIZE (LSLW)
(Optional) FILE SIZE (MSLW)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR NODE INDEX 1 (LSLW)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR NODE INDEX 1 (MSLW)
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR NODE INDEX 1 (LSLW)
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR NODE INDEX 1 (MSLW)
NODE INDEX OFFSET 1 (LSLW)
NODE INDEX OFFSET 1 (MSLW)
:
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR NODE INDEX n (LSLW)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR NODE INDEX n (MSLW)
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR NODE INDEX n (LSLW)
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR NODE INDEX n (MSLW)
NODE INDEX OFFSET n (LSLW)
NODE INDEX OFFSET n (MSLW)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR ROOT INDEX (LSLW)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR ROOT INDEX (MSLW)
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR ROOT INDEX (LSLW)
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR ROOT INDEX (MSLW)
ROOT INDEX OFFSET (LSLW)
ROOT INDEX OFFSET (MSLW)
Figure 10-60. Recording root index entry layout.

10-78

f. Node Index Packet Entry Format. A Node Index Packet contains an index entry
or entries using the format shown in Figure 10-61 and Figure 10-62.

PACKET HEADER
(Optional) NODE INDEX FILE SIZE
RECORDING NODE INDEX 1
RECORDING NODE INDEX 2
:
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR NODE INDEX n
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR NODE INDEX n
RECORDING NODE INDEX n
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-61. General recording node index packet.

msb lsb
31 24 23 16 15 0
RESERVED DATA TYPE CHANNEL ID
DATA PACKET OFFSET (LSLW)
DATA PACKET OFFSET (MSLW)
Figure 10-62. Recording node index entry layout.

- (Optional) Node Index File Size. (8 Bytes) An unsigned binary that
identifies the current size in bytes of the file at the time the Node Index
Packet was created and placed into the recording. This value should be the
same as the Node Index Offset. The file size is required when a recording is
split across multiple media, individual or multiple channels are split from
the original recording file, or time slices are extracted from the original
recording. In all cases the original recording file size will allow
recalculation and/or replacement of the index offsets when required.
- Channel ID. (2 Bytes) An unsigned binary that identifies a value
representing the Packet Channel ID for the data packet associated with this
Node Index Item.
- Data Type. (1 Byte) An unsigned binary that identifies a value representing
the type and format of the data packet associated with this Node Index Item.
- Data Packet Offset. (8 Bytes) An unsigned binary that identifies the zero
10-79

file at which the Data Packet Sync Pattern (0xEB25) begins for this Node
Index Packet item.

10.6.8 ARINC-429 Data Packets.
10.6.8.1 ARINC-429 Data Packets, Format 0. Data shall be packetized in Word Mode: each
32-bit word of an ARINC-429 bus shall be preceded by an Intra-Packet Header containing an
Intra-Packet Data Header only with an identifier (ID Word) that provides type and status
information. The Intra-Packet Header does not contain an Intra-Packet Time Stamp. The Packet
Time in the Packet Header is the time of the first ARINC data word in the packet, and the time of
successive ARINC data words is determined from the first word time using the gap times in the
ID words that precede each of the data words. Multiple words of multiple ARINC-429 buses can
be inserted into a single packet. The resultant packets shall have the following format as shown
in Figure 10-63.

msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
WORD 1 INTRA PACKET DATA HEADER
ARINC-429 DATA WORD 1 (BITS 15-0)
:
WORD n INTRA PACKET DATA HEADER
WORD n INTRA PACKET DATA HEADER
ARINC-429 DATA WORD n (BITS 15-0)
ARINC-429 DATA WORD n (BITS 31-16)
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-63. ARINC-429 data packet format.

Time tagging of ARINC-429 shall correspond to the first data bit of the
packet.
10-80

a. ARINC-429 Packet Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet Body portion of
each ARINC-429 data packet shall begin with a Channel Specific Data word

msb lsb
31 16 15 0
RESERVED MSGCOUNT
Figure 10-64. ARINC-429 packet channel specific data word format.

- Reserved. (bits 31-16) are reserved
- Message Count (MSGCOUNT). (Bits 15-0) indicates the binary value of
the number of ARINC-429 words included in the packet.

b. Intra-Packet Data Header. (bits 31-0) contains the ARINC-429 ID Word. Each
ARINC-429 bus data word is preceded by an identification word and the bit
definitions are as shown in Figure 10-65.

msb lsb
31 24 23 22 21 20 19 0
BUS FE PE BS R GAP TIME
Figure 10-65. Intra-packet data header format.

- Bus. (bits 31-24) a binary value identifying the ARINC-429 bus number
associated with the following data word (0 indicates the first bus. A
maximum of 256 buses can be placed in one packet).
- Format Error (FE). (bit 23) indicates an ARINC-429 Format Error.
0 = No format error has occurred
1 = Format error has occurred
- Parity Error (PE). (bit 22) indicates an ARINC-429 Parity Error.
0 = No parity error has occurred
1 = Parity error has occurred
- Bus Speed (BS). (bit 21) indicates the ARINC-429 bus speed the data is
from.
0 = Indicates Low-Speed ARINC-429 bus (12.5 kHz)
1 = Indicates High-Speed ARINC-429 bus (100 kHz)
- Reserved (R). (bit 20) is reserved.
- Gap Time (GAP TIME). (bits 19-0) contains a binary value that represents
the gap time from the beginning of the preceding bus word (regardless of
bus) to the beginning of the current bus word in 0.1 microsecond
increments. The gap time of the first word in the packet is GAP TIME=0.
When the gap time is longer than 100 milliseconds, a new packet must be
started.

10-81

c. ARINC-429 Packet Data Words. ARINC-429 Data: The data words shall be
inserted into the packet in the original 32-bit format as acquired from the bus.

10.6.9 Message Data Packets.
10.6.9.1 Message Data Packets, Format 0. The data from one or more separate serial
communication interface channels can be placed into a Message Data Packet (Figure 10-66).

msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR MSG 1 (BITS 150)
BYTE 2 BYTE 1
: :
FILLER (IF n IS ODD) BYTE n
:
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR MSG n (BITS 150)
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR MSG n (BITS 47-32)
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER FOR MSG n (BITS 15-0)
BYTE 2 BYTE 1
: :
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-66. Message data packet format.

a. Message Packet Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet Body portion of each
Message Data Packet begins with a Channel Specific Data word. It indicates if
the Packet Body contains several short messages (Type: Complete) or one
segment of a long message (Type: Segmented).
10-82

b. Complete Message Channel Specific Data Word. The Channel Specific Data
word is formatted for the Complete type of packet body as shown in
Figure 10-67.

msb lsb
31 18 17 16 15 0
RESERVED TYPE COUNTER
Figure 10-67. Complete message channel specific data word format.

- Type. (bits 17-16) indicates the type of Serial Packet.
00 = One or more complete messages
01 = Reserved
10 = Reserved
11 = Reserved
- Counter. (bits 15-0) contains a binary value indicating the number of
messages included in the packet.

c. Segmented Message Channel Specific Data Word. The Channel Specific Data
word is formatted for the Segmented type of packet body as shown in
Figure 10-68.

msb lsb
31 18 17 16 15 0
RESERVED TYPE COUNTER
Figure 10-68. Segmented message channel specific data word format.

- Type. (bits 17-16) indicates the type of Serial Packet.
00 = Reserved
01 = Packet is a beginning of a long message from a single source
10 = Whole packet is the last part of a long message from a single
source
11 = Whole packet is a middle part of a long message from a single
source
- Counter. (bits 15-0) contains a binary value indicating the segment number
of a long message. The number must start with 1 and must be incremented
by one after each packet. The maximum length of a single long message is
4 GBytes (combined with the 16-bit Message Length field, see description
at paragraph 10.6.9.1d below).

d. Message Data Intra-Packet Header. After the Channel Specific Data, Message
Data is inserted into the packet. Each Message is preceded by an Intra-Packet
Header that has both an Intra-Packet Time Stamp and an Intra-Packet Data
Header containing a Message ID Word. The length of the Intra-Packet Header
10-83

is fixed at 12 bytes (96 bits) positioned contiguously, in the sequence shown in
Figure 10-69.

msb lsb
31 0
TIME (LSLW)
TIME (MSLW)
MESSAGE ID WORD
Figure 10-69. Message data intra-packet header.

- Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) indicate the time tag of the Message
Data. First long word bits 31-0 and second long word bits 31-0 indicate the
following values:
(1) The 48-bit Relative Time Counter that corresponds to the first data bit
in the Message with bits 31 to 16 in the second long word zero filled
or;
to the first data bit in the Message.
- Intra-Packet Data Header. The Intra-Packet Data Header is an identification
word (Message ID Word) that precedes the message and is inserted into the
packet with the format shown in Figure 10-70.

msb lsb
31 30 29 16 15 0
DE FE SUBCHANNEL MESSAGE LENGTH

- Data Error (DE). (bit 31) indicates bad data bits as determined by parity,
checksums, or CRC words received with the data.
0 = No Data error has occurred
1 = Data error has occurred
- Format Error (FE). (bit 30) indicates a protocol error, such as out-of-
sequence data or length errors.
0 = No Format Error
1 = Format Error encountered
- Subchannel. (bit 29-16) contains a binary value that represents the
subchannel number belonging to the message that follows the ID Word
when the Channel ID in the packet header defines a group of subchannels.
Zero means first and/or only subchannel.
- Message Length. (bits 15-0) contains a binary value representing the length
of the message in bytes (n) that follows the ID Word. The maximum length
of a message (complete) or a message segment (segmented) is 64K bytes.
10-84

10.6.10 Video Packets.
10.6.10.1 Video Packets, Format 0 (MPEG-2/H.264). Format 0 MPEG-2/H.264 encoding
will be IAW Department of Defense (DoD) Motion Imagery Standards Profile (MISP) Standard
9701 Standard Definition Digital Motion Imagery, Compression Systems. The MPEG-2/H.264
format will be Transport Streams (TS) per MISP Recommended Practice (RP) 0101. The TS
will be encapsulated at a Constant Bit Rate (CBR) within the limits of MPEG-2 MP@ML and
H.264 MP@L3 specifications per MISP 9720d (Motion Imagery Standards Matrix (MISM),
Standard Definition Motion Imagery) for further standardization and telemeter/transmission
requirements of the video.

These MPEG-2/H.264 algorithm features are combined to produce an encoded video
stream that will be encapsulated in Format 0 packets. H.264 can be carried over the MPEG-2
transport streams using ITU-T Rec. H.222, Amendment 3, 2004: Transport of AVC data over
ISO/IEC 13818-1/ H.222.0 for MPEG2 TS containment for MPEG4 AVC. MISP has adapted
this with 9720 and 9701.

Transport streams are limited to a single program stream using Program Elementary
Stream (PES) packets that share the same common time base. A transport stream must contain
the Program Association Table (PAT) and Program Map Table (PMT) that define the Program
ID (PID) for the Program Clock Reference (PCR) stream. Program streams also must contain at
least one packet header.

A packet with Format 0 MPEG-2/H.264 Video data has the basic structure shown in
Figure 10-71. Note that the width of the structure is not related to any number of bits. This
figure is merely intended to represent relative placement of data in the packet.

PACKET HEADER
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET HEADER
188 BYTE TS DATA
188 BYTE TS DATA
:
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET TIME HEADER
188 BYTE TS DATA
(Optional) INTRA-PACKET TIME HEADER
188 BYTE TS DATA
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-71. General MPEG-2/H.264 video packet, format 0.

10-85

a. Video Packet Audio. When recording video using Format 0, if audio is present
it will be inserted into the TS per ISO/IEC 13818-3 for MPEG-2 and ISO/IEC
14496-3 for H.264. A separate analog channel to specifically record audio will
not be required as MPEG-2/H.264 supports audio insertion into the TS. By
combining video and audio, recording bandwidth and memory capacity will be
increased.
b. Video Packet Channel Specific Data Word. The packet body portion of each
Format 0 packet begins with the Channel Specific Data word, formatted as

msb lsb
31 30 29 28 27 24 23 22 0
ET IPH SRS KLV PL BA RESERVED
Figure 10-72. Video packet channel specific data word format.

- Embedded Time (ET). (bit 31) indicates if embedded time is present in the
MPEG-2 video data.
0 = No embedded time present
1 = Embedded time is present

MPEG-2 stream embedded time if utilized will be IAW MISP Standard
9708 - Embedded Time Reference for Motion Imagery Systems and
Standard 9715 - Time Reference Synchronization. Embedded time is used
for the synchronization of core MPEG-2 data when extracted from the IRIG-
106 Chapter 10 domain (i.e., an export to MPEG-2 files).
- Intra-Packet Header (IPH). (bit 30) indicates if Intra-Packet Time Stamps
are inserted before each Transport Packet.
0 = Intra-Packet Times Not Present
1 = Intra-Packet Times Present
- SCR/RTC Sync (SRS). (bit 29) indicates if the MPEG-2 SCR is RTC.
0 = SCR is not synchronized with the 10 MHz RTC
1 = SCR is synchronized with the 10 MHz RTC

Transport streams contain their own embedded time base used to
facilitate the decoding and presentation of video and/or audio data at the
decoder. Within a Program stream, all streams are synchronized to a single
time source referred to as the System Clock Reference (SCR). Within a
Transport stream, each embedded program contains its own PCR, requiring
that each Format 0 encoded MPEG-2/H.264 Transport stream contains only
a single program allowing each format to be treated in a similar manner
using a single global clocking reference.

The 10 MHz RTC is for the purposes of synchronizing and time
stamping the data acquired from multiple input sources. For input sources
that dont define an explicit timing model for data presentation,
10-86

superimposing this timing model can be accomplished. For MPEG-
2/H.264, however, an explicit synchronization model based on a 27MHz
clock is defined for the capture, compression, decompression, and
presentation of MPEG-2/H.264 data. In order to relate the two different
timing models, the MPEG-2/H.264 SCR/PCR timestamps (if enabled) will
be derived from the 10 MHz RTC timing reference source (by generating
the 27 MHz MPEG-2/H.264 reference clock slaved to the 10 MHz RTC).

MPEG-2/H.264 defines the SCR/PCR timestamp as a 42-bit quantity,
consisting of a 33-bit base value and a 9-bit extension value. The exact
value is defined as:
SCR = SCR_base * 300 + SCR_ext
where:
SCR_base = ((system_clock_frequency * t) / 300) MOD 2
33
SCR_ext = ((system_clock_frequency * t) / 1) MOD 300

For recording periods of less than 26.5 hours, the SCR can be directly
converted into the 10 MHz RTC using the equation:
10 MHz RTC time base = SCR * 10 / 27 (rounded to nearest integer)

For recording periods longer than this, the Format 0 packet header time
stamp can be used to determine the number of times the MPEG-2/H.264
SCR has rolled over and calculate the upper 8 bits of the free-running
counters value.

- KLV. (bit 28) indicates if KLV Metadata is present in the MPEG-2 video
data.
0 = No KLV Metadata present
1 = KLV Metadata is present

MPEG-2/H.264 stream KLV Metadata, if utilized, will be IAW MISP
Standard 9711 - Intelligence Motion Imagery Index, Geospatial Metadata,
Standard 9712 - Intelligence Motion Imagery Index, Content Description
Metadata (Dynamic Metadata Dictionary Structure and Contents),
9713 - Data Encoding Using Key-Length-Value, Recommended Practice
9717 - Packing KLV Packets into MPEG-2 Systems Streams, and Standard
0107 Bit and Byte Order for Metadata in Motion Imagery Files and
Streams.

- PL. (bit 27-24) indicates the payload type within the MPEG-2 stream per
MISP Xon2:
0000 = MPEG-2 MP@ML
0001 = H.264 MP@L2.1
0010 = H.264 MP@L2.2
0011 = H.264 MP@L3
0100-1111 = Reserved.
10-87

- BA. (bit 23) Byte Alignment indicates the MPEG-2 data payload byte
alignment within 16-bit words.

0 = Little endian as referenced in Figure 10-74.
1 = Big endian as referenced in Figure 10-75.


c. Intra-Packet Header. If enabled, the Intra-Packet Header shall include a 64-bit
Intra-Packet Time Stamp, which is inserted immediately before the TS sync
pattern. The length of the Intra-Packet Header is fixed at 8 bytes (64 bits)
positioned contiguously, in Figure 10-73.

msb lsb
31 0
TIME (LSLW)
TIME (MSLW)
Figure 10-73. Intra-packet header.

- Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) indicate the time tag of the individual
Transport Stream packets. First Long Word (LSLW) bits 31-0 and Second
Long Word (MSLW) bits 31-0 indicate the following values:
(1) The 48-bit Relative Time Counter that will correspond to the first bit of
the TS. Bits 31 to 16 in the second long word (MSLW) will be zero
filled; or
(paragraph 10.6.1.1.g). Time format indicated by bits 2 and 3 in the
Packet Flags (paragraph 10.6.1.1.g) and the first bit of the TS.

d. Video Packet Data: A Format 0 packet shall contain an integral number of 188
Byte (1,504 bits) TS packets as illustrated in Figure 10-74 and Figure 10-75
depending on Byte Alignment (BA) bit. Intra-Packet Headers can be inserted in
Format 0 Video Data Packets. The 10MHz RTC Packet Header time is the time
of the first bit of the first TS in the packet.

The CBR of the encoding will be user selectable and within the MPEG-2 MP@ML and
H.264 MP@L3 specification. Per ISO/IEC 13818-1 the TS format will be fixed-length 188 byte
(1,504 bits) frames containing an 8-bit sync pattern or sync byte (starting at bit 0 and ending at
bit 7 of the TSF). The sync bytes value is 01000111 (0x47). The rest of the TS 187 data bytes
will follow (Figure 10-76).

10-88

msb
15
lsb
0
TS SYNC BYTE (BITS 0 TO 7) TS DATA (BITS 8 TO 15)
TS DATA (BITS 16 TO 23) TS DATA (BITS 24 TO 31)
:
16-bit little-endian aligned.

msb
15
lsb
0
TS DATA (BITS 8 TO 15) TS SYNC BYTE (BITS 0 TO 7)
:
16-bit big-endian (native) aligned.

msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
TS SYNC BYTE DATA (BITS 15 TO 0)
TS DATA (BITS 31 TO 16)
:
TS SYNC BYTE DATA (BITS 15 TO 0)
:
:
REPEAT FOR EACH TS
:
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-76. Format 0 MPEG-2/H.264 Video Data Packet
(Example is 16-bit Aligned).

10-89

10.6.10.2 Video Packets, Format 1 (ISO 13818-1 MPEG-2 Bit Stream). Unlike Video
Packets, Format 0 (MPEG-2) the Format 1 packets encapsulate the complete MPEG-2 ISO/IEC
13818-1:2000 bit streams for both Program and Transport with constant or variable bit rates.
Also any of the Profiles and Level combinations as set forth by MPEG-2 ISO/IEC 13818-1:2000
may be utilized in the encoding process. Transport streams are limited to a single program
stream using Program Elementary Stream (PES) packets that share the same common time base.
A transport stream must contain the Program Association Table (PAT) and Program Map Table
(PMT) that define the Program ID (PID) for the Program Clock Reference (PCR) stream.
Program streams also must contain at least one pack header.
a. MPEG-2 Stream Packet Body. The Format 1 packet with n MPEG-2 packets
has the basic structure shown in Figure 10-77. Note that the width of the
structure is not related to any number of bits. This drawing is merely intended
to represent relative placement of data in the packet.

PACKET HEADER
MPEG-2 Packet 1
MPEG-2 Packet 2
:
MPEG-2 Packet n
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-77. General MPEG-2 video packet, format 1.

b. Video Packet Audio. When recording video using Format 1, if audio is present
it will be inserted into the TS per ISO/IEC 13818-3. A separate analog channel
to specifically record audio will not be required as MPEG-2 supports audio
insertion into the TS or PS. By combining video and audio, recording
bandwidth and memory capacity will be increased.
10-90

c. MPEG-2 Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet Body portion of each
MPEG-2 bit stream begins with a Channel Specific Data word formatted as

msb lsb
31 22 21 20 19 18 15 14 13 12 11 0
RESERVED KLV SRS IPH EPL ET MD TP PC
Figure 10-78. MPEG-2 channel specific data word format.

- Reserved. (bits 31-22) are reserved for future use.

data.
1 = KLV Metadata is present.

MPEG-2 stream KLV Metadata (if utilized) will be IAW MISP Standard
9711 - Intelligence Motion Imagery Index, Geospatial Metadata, Standard
9712 - Intelligence Motion Imagery Index, Content Description Metadata
(Dynamic Metadata Dictionary Structure and Contents), 9713 - Data Encoding
Using Key-Length-Value, Recommended Practice 9717 - Packing KLV Packets
into MPEG-2 Systems Streams, and Standard 0107 - Bit and Byte Order for
Metadata in Motion Imagery Files and Streams.

- SCR/RTC Sync (SRS). (bit 20) indicates whether the MPEG-2 SCR is
RTC.
0 = SCR is not synchronized with the 10 MHz RTC.
1 = SCR is synchronized with the 10 MHz RTC.

Transport streams contain their own embedded time base used to facilitate
the decoding and presentation of video and/or audio data at the decoder. Within
a Program stream, all streams are synchronized to a single time source referred
to as the System Clock Reference (SCR). Within a Transport stream, each
embedded program contains its own PCR, requiring that each Format 1 encoded
MPEG-2 Transport stream contain only a single program allowing each format
to be treated in a similar manner using a single global clocking reference.

The 10 MHz RTC is used to synchronize and time stamp the data acquired
from multiple input sources. For input sources that dont define an explicit
timing model for data presentation, superimposing this timing model can be
accomplished. For MPEG-2, however, an explicit synchronization model based
on a 27 MHz clock is defined for the capture, compression, decompression, and
presentation of MPEG-2 data. In order to relate the two different timing
models, the MPEG-2 SCR/PCR timestamps (if enabled) will be derived from
the 10 MHz RTC timing reference source (by generating the 27 MHz MPEG-2
reference clock slaved to the 10 MHz RTC).

10-91

MPEG-2 defines the SCR/PCR timestamp as a 42-bit quantity, consisting of
a 33-bit base value and a 9-bit extension value. The exact value is defined as:


where:


converted into the 10 MHz RTC using the equation:

10 MHz RTC time base = SCR * 10 / 27 (rounded to the nearest integer)

stamp can be used to determine the number of times the MPEG-2 SCR has
rolled over and calculate the upper 8 bits of the free-running counters value.

- Intra-Packet Header (IPH). (bit 19) indicate whether Intra-Packet Time
Stamps are inserted before each Program or Transport Packet.
- Encoding Profile and Level (EPL). (bits 18-15) indicate the MPEG-2
Profile and Level of the encoded bit stream.
0000 = SimpleProfile@MainLevel
0001 = MainProfile@LowLevel
0010 = MainProfile@MainLevel
0011 = MainProfile@High-1440Level
0100 = MainProfile@HighLevel
0101 = SNRProfile@LowLevel
0110 = SNRProfile@MainLevel
0111 = SpatialProfile@High-1440Level
1000 = HighProfile@MainLevel
1001 = HighProfile@High-1440Level
1010 = HighProfile@HighLevel
1011 = 4:2:2Profile@MainLevel
1100 = Reserved
1101 = Reserved
1110 = Reserved
1111 = Reserved
- Embedded Time (ET). (bit 14) indicates whether embedded time is present
in the MPEG-2 video data.
1 = Embedded time is present

MPEG-2 stream embedded time, if utilized, will be IAW MISP Standard
9708 - Embedded Time Reference for Motion Imagery Systems and Standard
10-92

9715 - Time Reference Synchronization. Embedded time is used for the
synchronization of core MPEG-2 data when extracted from the IRIG-106
Chapter 10 domain (i.e., an export to MPEG-2 files).

- Mode (MD). (bit 13) indicates whether the MPEG-2 bit stream was
encoded using a variable or constant bit rate parameter setting.
0 = Constant Bit Rate stream
1 = Variable Bit Rate stream
- Type (TP). (bit 12) indicates the type of data the packetized MPEG-2 bit
stream contains.
0 = Transport data bit stream
1 = Program data bit stream
- Packet Count (PC). (bits 11-0) indicate the binary value of the number of
MPEG-2 packets included in the Format 1 packet.

An integral number of complete packets will be in each Format 1 packet. If
the MPEG-2 hardware implementation is unable to determine the value of this
number, the value of 0 is used by default. If TYPE=0, then this number
represents the number of Transport stream packets within the Format 1 packet.
If TYPE=1, then this number represents of the number of Program stream packs
within the Format 1 packet.

d. Intra-Packet Header. If enabled, the Intra-Packet Header shall include a 64-bit
Intra-Packet Time Stamp, which is inserted immediately before the MPEG-2
packet (transport or program). The length of the Intra-Packet Header is fixed at
8 bytes (64 bits) positioned contiguously, in the following sequence
(Figure 10-79):

msb lsb
31 0
TIME (LSLW)
TIME (MSLW)

- Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) indicate the time tag of the individual
MPEG-2 packets (transport or program). First Long Word (LSLW)
bits 31-0 and Second Long Word (MSLW) bits 31-0 indicate the following
values:
o The 48-bit Relative Time Counter that will correspond to the first bit of
the MPEG-2 packet (transport or program). Bits 31 to 16 in the second
long word (MSLW) will be zero filled; or
o The Absolute Time, if enabled by bit 6 in the Packet Flags
(paragraph 10.6.1.1.g). Time format is indicated by bits 2 and 3 in the
Packet Flags paragraph 10.6.1.1.g) and the first bit of the MPEG-2
packet (transport or program).
10-93

10.6.10.3 Video Packets, Format 2 (ISO 14496 MPEG-4 Part 10 AVC/H.264). Format 2
video encoding will be IAW ISO 14496 MPEG-4 Part 10 Advanced Video Coding (AVC). The
carrier format for Format 2 AVC/H.264 will be MPEG-2 ISO/IEC 13818-1:2000 bit streams for
both Program and Transport with constant or variable bit rates. AVC/H.264 can be carried over
the MPEG-2 streams IAW ITU-T Rec. H.222, Amendment 3, 2004: Transport of AVC data
over ITU-T Rec. / H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 streams.

Unlike Format 0 Video Packets (MPEG-2\H.264), which only support a fixed MPEG-2
transport and fixed MPEG-2/H.264 profiles and levels, the Format 2 AVC/H.264 packets
encapsulate the complete MPEG-2 transport/program streams, provide for a fixed/variable bit
rate (Format 1), and include all H.264 video encoding profiles and levels.

Format 2 AVC/H.264 streams are limited to a single program or transport stream using
Program Elementary Stream (PES) packets that share the same common time base. The
transport or program stream must contain the Program Association Table (PAT) and Program
Map Table (PMT) that define the Program ID (PID) for the Program Clock Reference (PCR)
stream. Program streams also must contain at least one pack header.

a. AVC/H.264 Stream Packet Body. The Format 2 packet with n AVC/H.264
packets has the basic structure shown in Figure 10-80. Note that the width of
the structure is not related to any number of bits. This drawing is merely
intended to represent relative placement of data in the packet.

PACKET HEADER
AVC/H.264 Packet 1
AVC/H.264 Packet 2
:
AVC/H.264 Packet n
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-80. General AVC/H.264 video packet, format 2.

b. Video Packet Audio. When recording video using Format 2 AVC/H.264, if
audio is present it will be inserted into the per ISO/IEC 13818-3 Audio or
13818-7 AAC. A separate analog channel to specifically record audio will not
be required as AVC/H.264 supports audio insertion into the AVC/H.264
transport stream. By combining video and audio, recording bandwidth and
memory capacity will be increased.

10-94

c. AVC/H.264 Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet Body portion of each
AVC/H.264 packet begins with a Channel Specific Data word formatted as

msb lsb
31 27 26 25 22 21 20 19 18 15 14 13 12 11 0
R AET EL KLV SRS IPH EP ET MD TP PC
Figure 10-81. AVC/H.264 channel specific data word format.
- Reserved (R). (bits 31-26) are reserved for future use.
- AVC/H.264 Audio Encoding Type (AET). (bit 26) indicate the AVC/H.264
audio encoding type.
0 = ISO/IEC 13818-3 Audio
1 = ISO/IEC 13818-7 AAC
- AVC/H.264 Encoding Level (EL). (bits 25-22) indicate the AVC/H.264
Level of the encoded video bit stream.
0000 = 1 0001 = 1b 0010 = 1.1 0011 = 1.2 0100 = 1.3
0101 = 2 0110 = 2.1 0111 = 2.2 1000 = 3 1001 = 3.1
1010 = 3.2 1011 = 4 1100 = 4.1 1101 = 4.2 1110 = 5
1111 = 5.1
data.
1 = KLV Metadata is present.

MPEG-2 stream KLV Metadata (if utilized) will be IAW MISP Standard
9711 - Intelligence Motion Imagery Index, Geospatial Metadata, Standard
9712 - Intelligence Motion Imagery Index, Content Description Metadata
(Dynamic Metadata Dictionary Structure and Contents), 9713 - Data
Encoding Using Key-Length-Value, Recommended Practice 9717 - Packing
KLV Packets into MPEG-2 Systems Streams, and Standard 0107 Bit and
Byte Order for Metadata in Motion Imagery Files and Streams.
- SCR/RTC Sync (SRS). (bit 20) indicates whether the AVC/H.264 MPEG-2
SCR is RTC.
0 = SCR is not synchronized with the 10 MHz RTC.
1 = SCR is synchronized with the 10 MHz RTC.

Transport streams contain their own embedded time base used to
facilitate the decoding and presentation of video and/or audio data at the
decoder. Within a Program stream, all streams are synchronized to a single
time source referred to as the System Clock Reference (SCR). Within a
Transport stream, each embedded program contains its own PCR, requiring
that each Format 0 encoded MPEG-2 Transport stream contain only a single
program allowing each format to be treated in a similar manner using a
single global clocking reference.
10-95

The 10 MHz RTC is provided to synchronize and time stamp the data
acquired from multiple input sources. For input sources that dont define an
explicit timing model for data presentation, superimposing this timing
model can be accomplished. For MPEG-2, however, an explicit
synchronization model based on a 27 MHz clock is defined for the capture,
compression, decompression, and presentation of MPEG-2 data. In order to
relate the two different timing models, the MPEG-2 SCR/PCR timestamps
(if enabled) will be derived from the 10 MHz RTC timing reference source
(by generating the 27 MHz MPEG-2 reference clock slaved to the 10 MHz
RTC).

MPEG-2 defines the SCR/PCR timestamp as a 42-bit quantity,
consisting of a 33-bit base value and a 9-bit extension value. The exact
value is defined as:


where:


converted into the 10 MHz RTC using this equation:

10 MHz RTC time base = SCR * 10 / 27 (rounded to nearest integer).

stamp can be used to determine the number of times the MPEG-2 SCR has
rolled over and calculate the upper 8 bits of the free-running counters
value.

- Intra-Packet Header (IPH). (bit 19) indicate whether Intra-Packet Time
Stamps are inserted before each Program or Transport Packet.
- AVC/H.264 Encoding Profile (EP). (bits 18-15) indicate the AVC/H.264
Profile of the encoded video bit stream.
0000 = Baseline Profile (BP) 0001 = Main Profile (MP)
0010 = Extended Profile (EP) 0011 = High Profile (HiP)
0100 = High 10 Profile (Hi10P) 0101 = High 4:2:2 Profile (Hi422P)
0110 = High 4:4:4 Profile (Hi444P) 0111 1111 = Reserved

- Embedded Time (ET). (bit 14) indicates whether embedded time is present
in the AVC/H.264 MPEG-2 video data.

1 = Embedded time is present.
10-96

AVC/H.264 MPEG-2 stream embedded time (if utilized) will be IAW MISP Standard
9708 - Embedded Time Reference for Motion Imagery Systems and Standard 9715 - Time
Reference Synchronization. Embedded time is used for the synchronization of core AVC/H.264
data when extracted from the IRIG-106 Chapter 10 domain, i.e., an export to AVC/H.264 files.
- Mode (MD). (bit 13) indicates whether the AVC/H.264 MPEG-2 bit stream
was encoded using a variable or constant bit rate parameter setting.
0 = Constant Bit Rate stream
1 = Variable Bit Rate stream
- Type (TP). (bit 12) indicates the type of data the packetized AVC/H.264
MPEG-2 bit stream contains.
0 = Transport data bit stream
1 = Program data bit stream
- Packet Count (PC). (bits 11-0) indicate the binary value of the number of
AVC/H.264 packets included in the Format 2 packet.

An integral number of complete packets will be in each Format 2 packet.
If the AVC/H.264 hardware implementation is unable to determine the
value of this number, the value of 0 is used by default. If TYPE=0, then this
number represents the number of Transport stream packets within the
Format 2 packet. If TYPE=1, then this number represents of the number of
Program stream packs within the Format 2 packet.

d. Intra-Packet Header. If enabled, the Intra-Packet Header shall include a 64-bit
Intra-Packet Time Stamp, which is inserted immediately before the AVC/H.264
packet (transport or program). The length of the Intra-Packet Header is fixed at
8 bytes (64 bits) positioned contiguously, in the following sequence
(Figure 10-82):

msb lsb
31 0
TIME (LSLW)
TIME (MSLW)

- Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) indicates the time tag of the individual
AVC/H.264 packets (transport or program). First Long Word (LSLW) bits
31-0 and Second Long Word (MSLW) bits 31-0 indicate the following
values:
o The 48-bit Relative Time Counter that will correspond to the first bit of
the AVC/H.264 packet. Bits 31 to 16 in the second long word (MSLW)
will be zero filled; or
(paragraph 10.6.1.1.g). Time format indicated by bits 2 and 3 in the
10-97

Packet Flags (paragraph 10.6.1.1.g) and the first bit of the AVC/H.264
packet.

10.6.11 Image Packets.
10.6.11.1 Image Packets, Format 0 (Image Data). A Format 0 Image Packet (Figure 10-83)
shall contain one or more fixed-length segments of one or more video images. The channel
specific data word for an image packet identifies the number of segments in the packet and the
portion of the image or images contained in the packet. If the optional Intra-Packet Header is not
included with each segment, the Relative Time Counter in the packet header is the time of the
first segment in the packet.

msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
OPTIONAL INTRA-PACKET HEADER FOR SEGMENT 1 (BITS 150)
OPTIONAL INTRA-PACKET HEADER FOR SEGMENT 1 (BITS 3116)
OPTIONAL INTRA-PACKET HEADER FOR SEGMENT 1 (BITS 47-32)
OPTIONAL INTRA-PACKET HEADER FOR SEGMENT 1 (BITS 63-48)
BYTE 2 BYTE 1
: :
:
OPTIONAL INTRA-PACKET HEADER FOR SEGMENT n (BITS 150)
OPTIONAL INTRA-PACKET HEADER FOR SEGMENT n (BITS 3116)
OPTIONAL INTRA-PACKET HEADER FOR SEGMENT n (BITS 47-32)
OPTIONAL INTRA-PACKET HEADER FOR SEGMENT n (BITS 63-48)
BYTE 2 BYTE 1
: :
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-83. Image packet, format 0.

a. Image Packet Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet Body portion of each
Image Packet begins with a Channel Specific Data word. It defines the byte
length of each segment and indicates if the Packet Body contains several
complete images or partial images, and whether or not the Intra-Packet Data
Header precedes each segment (Figure 10-84).

msb lsb
31 30 29 28 27 26 0
PARTS SUM IPH LENGTH
Figure 10-84. Image packet channel specific data word format.
10-98

- Parts. (bit 31-30) indicates which piece or pieces of the video frame are
contained in the packet.

00 = Packet does not contains first or last segment of image
01 = Packet contains first segment of image
10 = Packet contains last segment of image
11 = Packet contains both first and last segment of image

- Sum. (bit 29-28) indicates if the packet contains a partial image, one
complete image, multiple complete images, or pieces from multiple images.

00 = Packet contains less than one complete image
01 = Packet contains one complete image
10 = Packet contains multiple complete images
11 = Packet contains multiple incomplete images

- Intra-Packet Header (IPH). (bit 27) indicates whether the Intra-Packet
Header (Time Stamp) precedes each segment of the image.

0 = Intra-Packet Header not enabled
1 = Intra-Packet Header enabled
- Length. (bits 26-0) indicates a binary value that represents the byte length
of each segment.

b. Image Intra-Packet Header. After the Channel Specific Data, Format 0 Image
Data is inserted into the packet. Each block of data is optionally preceded by an
Intra-Packet Header as indicated by the IPH bit in the Channel Specific Data
word. When included, the Intra-Packet Header consists of an Intra-Packet Time
Stamp only. The length of the Intra-Packet Header is fixed at 8 bytes (64 bits)
positioned contiguously, in the following sequence (Figure 10-85).

msb lsb
31 0
TIME (LSLW)
TIME (MSLW)
Figure 10-85. Image data intra-packet header, format 0.

- Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) indicate the time tag of the Format 0
Image Data. First long word bits 31-0 and second long word bits 31-0
indicate the following values:
o The 48-bit Relative Time Counter that corresponds to the first data bit in
the first byte with bits 31 to 16 in the second long word zero filled; or
10-99

to the first data bit in the Message.

10.6.11.2 Image Packets, Format 1 (Still Imagery). A Format 1 Image Packet (Figure 10-86)
shall contain one or more fixed-length segments of a partial Still Image, one complete Still
Image, or multiple Still Images. The Still Image source can be external or internal to the
recorder. The Still Image formats will be specified in the Channel Specific Data Word and in the
Computer Generated Data, Format 1 Setup Record for each Still Imagery channel. Only one
format can be contained within each channel ID for Still Imagery.
msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
INTRA-PACKET HEADER FOR SEGMENT 1 (BITS 15-0)
BYTE 2 BYTE 1
: :
:
INTRA-PACKET HEADER FOR SEGMENT n (BITS 15-0)
BYTE 2 BYTE 1
: :
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-86. Still Imagery packet, format 1.

10-100

a. Still Imagery Packet Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet Body portion of
each Still Image Packet begins with a Channel Specific Data word. It defines
the format of the Still Imagery Format (which will coincide with the Still
Imagery format with the Setup Record), and indicates if the Packet Body
contains several complete images or partial images (Figure 10-87).

msb lsb
31 30 29 28 27 26 23 22 0
PARTS SUM IPH FORMAT RESERVED
Figure 10-87. Still Imagery packet channel specific data word format.

- Parts. (bit 31-30) indicates which piece or pieces of the image are contained
in the packet.

00 = Packet does not contains first or last segment of image
01 = Packet contains first segment of image
10 = Packet contains last segment of image
11 = Packet contains both first and last segment of image

- Sum. (bit 29-28) indicates if the packet contains a partial image, one
complete image, multiple complete images, or pieces from multiple images.

00 = Packet contains less than one complete image
01 = Packet contains one complete image
10 = Packet contains multiple complete images
11 = Packet contains multiple incomplete images
Header (Time Stamp) precedes each segment of the image.

0 = Intra-Packet Header not enabled
1 = Intra-Packet Header enabled
- Format. (bits 26-23) indicates a binary value which represents the Still
Image Format.

0000 = MIL-STD-2500 National Imagery Transmission Format
0001 = JPEG File Interchange Format
0010 = JPEG 2000 (ISO/IEC 15444-1)
0011 = Portable Network Graphics Format
0100-1111 = Reserved


b. Still Imagery Intra-Packet Header. After the Channel Specific Data, Format 1
Still Imagery Data is inserted into the packet. Each still image or segment is
preceded by an Intra-Packet Header. The Intra-Packet Header consists of an
10-101

Intra-Packet Time Stamp and Intra-Packet Data. The length of the Intra-Packet
Header is fixed at 12 bytes (96 bits) positioned contiguously, in the following
sequence (Figure 10-88).

msb. lsb
31 0
TIME (LSLW)
TIME (MSLW)
INTRA-PACKET DATA
Figure 10-88. Still Imagery intra-packet header.

- Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) indicate the time tag of the Format 1
Still Imagery Data. First long word bits 31-0 and second long word
bits 31-0 indicate the following values:
the still image or segment with bits 31 to 16 in the second long word
zero filled or;
Packet Flags (paragraph 10.6.1.1.g) and the first data bit in the still
image or segment.
- Intra-Packet Data. (4 Bytes) indicates a binary value that represents the byte
length of following still image or segment.

10.6.12 UART Data Packets.

10.6.12.1 UART Data Packets, Format 0. The data from one or more separate asynchronous
serial communication interface channels (RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, etc) can be placed into a
UART Data Packet as shown in Figure 10-89.
10-102

msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
(OPTIONAL) INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR UART 1 (BITS 150)
(OPTIONAL) INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR UART 1 (BITS 3116)
(OPTIONAL) INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR UART 1 (BITS 47-32)
(OPTIONAL) INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR UART 1 (BITS 63-48)
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER (UART ID) for UART 1 (BITS 15-0)
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER (UART ID) for UART 1 (BITS 31-16)
BYTE 2 BYTE 1
: :
:
(OPTIONAL) INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR UART n (BITS 150)
(OPTIONAL) INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR UART n (BITS 3116)
(OPTIONAL) INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR UART n (BITS 47-32)
(OPTIONAL) INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP FOR UART n (BITS 63-48)
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER (UART ID) for UART n (BITS 15-0)
INTRA-PACKET DATA HEADER (UART ID) for UART n (BITS 31-16)
BYTE 2 BYTE 1
: :
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-89. UART data packet format.

a. UART Packet Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet Body portion of each
UART Data Packet begins with a Channel Specific Data word as shown in
Figure 10-90.

msb lsb
31 30 0
IPH RESERVED
Figure 10-90. UART packet channel specific data word format.

Header Time Stamp is inserted before the UART ID words.

0 = Intra-Packet Header Time Stamp not enabled
1 = Intra-Packet Header Time Stamp enabled

b. UART Intra-Packet Header. After the Channel Specific Data, UART data is
inserted into the packet. Each block of data shall be preceded by an Intra-
Packet Header with optional Intra-Packet Time Stamp and a mandatory UART
10-103

ID WORD Intra-Packet Data Header. The length of the Intra-Packet Header is
either 4 bytes (32 bits) or 12 bytes (96 bits) positioned contiguously, in the
following sequence (Figure 10-91).

msb lsb
31 0
TIME (LSLW)
TIME (MSLW)
UART ID WORD
Figure 10-91. UART data intra-packet header.

- UART Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) indicate the time tag of the
UART Data. First long word bits 31-0 and second long word bits 31-0
indicate the following values:
the first byte with bits 31 to 16 in the second long word zero filled; or
Packet Flags (paragraph 10.6.1.1.g) and the first data bit in the Message.
- UART Intra-Packet Data Header. The Intra-Packet Data Header is an
identification word (UART ID Word) that precedes the data and is inserted
into the packet with the following format. Inclusion of the Intra-Packet Data
Header is mandatory and is not controlled by the IPH bit in the Channel
Specific Data Word. (Figure 10-92).

msb lsb
31 30 29 16 15 0
PE RESERVED SUBCHANNEL DATA LENGTH

o Parity Error (PE). (bit 31) indicates a Parity Error.
0 = No Parity Error
1 = Parity Error
o Reserved. (bit 30) is reserved.
o Subchannel. (bits 29-16) indicates a binary value defining the
subchannel number belonging to the data that follows the UART ID
Word when the Channel ID in the packet header defines a group of
subchannels. Zero means first and/or only subchannel into which the
Intra-Packet Data Header is inserted before the UART ID words.
o Data Length. (bits 15-0) indicate a binary value representing the length
of the UART data in bytes (n) that follows the UART ID word.
10-104

10.6.13 IEEE-1394 Data Packets.
10.6.13.1 IEEE-1394 Data Packets, Format 0 (IEEE-1394 Transaction). This format applies
to IEEE-1394 data as described by IEEE 1394-1995, IEEE 1394a, and IEEE 1394b. IEEE-1394
data is packetized to encapsulate completed transactions between nodes. A packet may contain 0
to 65,536 transactions, but is constrained by the common packet elements size limits prescribed
in paragraph 10.6.1. IEEE-1394 packets have the basic structure shown in Figure 10-93. Note
that the width of the structure is not related to any number of bits. The figure merely represents
relative placement of data within the packet.

PACKET HEADER
CHANNEL SPECIFIC DATA WORD
(Optional) TRANSACTION DATA
:
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-93. IEEE-1394 data packet, format 0.

a. IEEE-1394 Channel Specific Data Word. The packet body portion
(Figure 10-94) of each IEEE-1394 packet shall begin with a Channel Specific
Data Word.

msb lsb
31 29 28 25 24 16 15 0
PBT SY RESERVED TC
Figure 10-94. IEEE-1394 channel specific data word.

- Packet Body Type (PBT). (bits 31-29) indicate the packet body type as
follows:

000 = Type 0
001 = Type 1
010 = Type 2
011 = Reserved
1xx = Reserved
- Synchronization Code (SY). (bits 28-25) indicate the IEEE-1394
Synchronization Code from the transaction. This field is mandatory for
Type 1 packet bodies. Otherwise, it is reserved.
10-105

- Transaction Count (TC). (bits 15-0) indicate the binary value of the number
of transactions encapsulated in the packet. An integral number of complete
transactions shall be included in each packet. It is mandatory that
Transaction Count be 0 for Type 0 packet bodies and 1 for Type 1 packet
bodies.

b. IEEE-1394 Intra-Packet Header. Each Intra-Packet Header shall contain an 8
byte Intra-Packet Time Stamp only. The format of a IEEE-1394 Intra-Packet
Header is described by Figure 10-95.

msb lsb
31 0
INTRA-PACKET TIME STAMP
Figure 10-95. IEEE-1394 intra-packet header.

- IEEE-1394 Intra-Packet Time Stamp. This frame (8 Bytes) indicates the
time tag of the IEEE-1394 transaction that immediately follows it in the
packet. Time is coded in accordance with all other Chapter 10 packet
formats. Specifically, the first long word bits 31-0 and second long word
o The 48-bit Relative Time Counter that corresponds to the first data bit of
the transaction, with bits 31-16 in the second long word zero filled; or
Packet Flags (paragraph 10.6.1.1.g) and the first data bit of the
transaction.

c. IEEE-1394 Data Packet Body Types. Three packet body types are defined for
the encapsulation of IEEE-1394 data. Regardless of type, each packet body
shall begin with the IEEE-1394 Packet Channel Specific Data Word as
described by paragraph 10.6.13.1a above. The packet body type is indicated
within the Channel Specific Data Word. Depending on the packet body type,
the Channel Specific Data Word is followed by 0 or more transactions. Also,
dependent on packet body type, each transaction may be preceded by an Intra-
Packet Header.

- IEEE-1394 Packet Body Type 0: Bus Status. Type 0 packet bodies shall
contain zero Intra-Packet Headers and zero transactions. The Channel
Specific Data Word Transaction Count shall be zero. The packet body shall
contain the Channel Specific Data Word immediately followed by a single
32-bit word.

10-106

Bus Status events shall be encapsulated by Type 0 packet bodies. The
32-bit word in the packet body shall contain an Event Data Word as
indicated in Figure 10-96:
10-107

msb lsb
31 30 0
RE RESERVED
Figure 10-96. IEEE-1394 event data word format.

o RE. (bit 31) RESET - when set, this bit indicates that an IEEE-1394
Bus Reset has occurred.
o RESERVED. (bits 30-0) Reserved.

- IEEE-1394 Packet Body Type 1: Data streaming. Type 1 packet bodies
shall encapsulate IEEE-1394 data streaming only. Type 1 packet body data
is restricted to that from an IEEE-1394 packet with a Transaction Code of
0xA, be it from an Isochronous Channel or Asynchronous Stream. The
packet body shall contain zero Intra-Packet Headers and one transaction.
The Channel Specific Data Word Transaction Count shall be one.

The Channel Specific Data Word is immediately followed by a non-zero
number of data bytes. The data bytes shall be exactly those of a single
IEEE-1394 data block, excluding the IEEE-1394 packet header and Data
Block CRC. Data recorded from the stream shall be known to be valid,
insofar as, both the IEEE-1394 Header CRC and Data Block CRC tests have
passed. In accordance with the definition of Packet Header Data Length,
and accounting for the size of the Channel Specific Data Word, the number
of data bytes shall be exactly four less than the value indicated in Data
Length. Conversely, the value stored in the Packet Header Data Length
shall be the number of bytes in the IEEE-1394 data block plus four. The
Synchronization Code (sy) from the stream packet shall be indicated in the
Channel Specific Data Word, and the Channel Number shall be indicated in
the Packet Header Channel ID.

- IEEE-1394 Packet Body Type 2: General Purpose. Type 2 packet bodies
encapsulate complete IEEE-1394 packets, including header and data. Use
of Type 2 packet bodies is unrestricted and may encapsulate streaming, non-
streaming (IEEE-1394 packets with Transaction Codes other than 0xA),
isochronous, and asynchronous data. Multiple IEEE-1394 packets, with
differing Transaction Codes and Channel Numbers, may be carried within a
single Type 2 packet body.

The Channel Specific Data Word shall be followed by a non-zero
number of completed transactions as indicated by the Channel Specific Data
Word Transaction Count. Each transaction shall be preceded by an Intra-
Packet Header as defined above for IEEE-1394 Data Packets. Immediately
following the Intra-Packet Header, the transaction shall be recorded in its
entirety and must be a properly formed IEEE-1394 packet in accordance
10-108

with the specification in use. The revision of the specification used shall be
declared within the accompanying Setup Record packet.

All IEEE-1394 packets contain a 4-bit Transaction Code field (tcode).
This field indicates the IEEE-1394 specific format of the transaction.

10.6.13.2 IEEE-1394 Data Packets, Format 1 (IEEE-1394 Physical Layer). This format
applies to IEEE-1394 data as described by IEEE 1394-1995, IEEE 1394a, and IEEE 1394b.
IEEE-1394 data is packetized in Format 1 packets as physical Layer data transfers (IAW Annex
J of Standard 1394-1995 and Chapter 17 of Standard 1394b-2002). A packet may contain 0 to
65,536 transfers, but is constrained by the common packet elements size limits prescribed in
paragraph 10.6.1. IEEE-1394 packets have the basic structure shown in Figure 10-97 below.
Note that the width of the structure is not related to any number of bits. The drawing merely
represents relative placement of data within the packet.

PACKET HEADER
CHANNEL SPECIFIC DATA WORD
INTRA-PACKET HEADER
DATA
(Optional) DATA
:
(Optional) DATA
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-97. IEEE-1394 data packet, format 1.

a. IEEE-1394 Channel Specific Data Word. The packet body portion
(Figure 10-98) of each IEEE-1394 packet shall begin with a Channel Specific
Data Word.

msB

lsb
31 16 15 0
RESERVED IPC
Figure 10-98. IEEE-1394 channel specific data word format 1.

- Intra-Packet Count (IPC). (bits 15-0) indicate the binary value of the
number of Intra-Packets encapsulated in the packet. An integral number of
complete Intra-Packets shall be included in each packet.

10-109

b. IEEE-1394 Format 1 Intra-Packet Header. The Channel Specific Data Word is
followed by 1 or more IEEE-1394 transfers. Each transfer starts with an Intra-
Packet Header, followed by 0-32780 encapsulated data bytes. The length of the
Intra-Packet Header is fixed at 12 bytes (96 bits) positioned contiguously, in the
following sequence as shown in Figure 10-99:

msb lsb
31 0
INTRA-PACKET ID WORD
Figure 10-99. IEEE-1394 format 1 intra-packet header.

- IEEE-1394 Format 1 Intra-Packet Time Stamp. This frame (8 Bytes)
indicates the time tag of the IEEE-1394 transfer that immediately follows it
in the packet. Time is coded in accordance with all other Chapter 10 packet
formats. Specifically, the first long word bits 31-0 and second long word

o The Relative Time Counter that corresponds to the first data byte of the
transfer, with bits 15-0 in the second long word zero filled or;
o Time, if enabled by bit 6 in the Packet Flags (paragraph 10.6.1.1.g).
Time format is indicated by bits 2 and 3 in the Packet Flags
(paragraph 10.6.1.1.g) and the first data byte of the transfer.

- Message ID Word. The Message ID Word is an identification word that
precedes the message and is inserted into the packet as in Figure 10-100.

msb lsb
31 24 23 20 19 18 17 16 15 0
STATUS BYTE SPEED TRFOVF LBO RSV DATA LENGTH
Figure 10-100. Intra-packet data header - message ID word.

o Status Byte. (bits 31-24) This byte is the status byte received from the
PHY IAW IEEE-1394b Specification.
o Transmission Speed (SPEED). (bits 23-20) This field identifies the
speed of transmission of the message. (Speed codes IAW IEEE-1394b)
0000 = S100 A
0001 = S100 B
0010 = S200 A
0011 = S200 B
0100 = S400 A
0101 = S400 B
0111 = S800 B
1001 = S1600 B
1010 = S3200 B
other values are reserved
10-110

o Transfer Overflow Error (TRFOVF). (bit 19-18) This field indicates if
a transfer synchronization error occurred.

00 = IEEE1394 flow did not exceed maximum Intra-packet size
01 = IEEE1394 This IEEE1394 transfer started correctly but
longer than the standard transfer length.
10 = The previous IEEE1394 transfer was in 01 type overflow
and this IEEE1394 transfer ended correctly (did not exceed
standard transfer length).
11 = The previous IEEE1394 transfer was in 01 type overflow
and this IEEE1394 transfer did not end correctly (exceeds
standard transfer length).

Most of the time, this field shall be 00. Possible combinations are:
01intra-packet, zero or more; 11intra-packet; and finally 10intra-
packet.

o LBO. (bits 17) Local Buffer Overflow. If this bit is set, some messages
are lost before this transfer due to local buffer overflow.
o Data Length. (bits 15-0) contain a binary value that represents the
length of the transfer in bytes (n) that follows the ID Word. The
maximum length of a captured data is 4120 for transfers corresponding
to asynchronous packets, and 32780 for transfers corresponding to
isochronous packets.

If the Data Length field is not a multiple of 4 bytes, 1-3 fill
character (0) is added to maintain the packet structures in 32-bit
boundary.

If the Data Length field contains 0, the Intra-Packet Data is not
provided and this word contains only the status byte information.

c. IEEE-1394 Format 1 Packet Body. The packet body shall encapsulate IEEE-
1394 isochronous or asynchronous message data. The data bytes shall be
exactly those of a single IEEE-1394 physical transmission message, including
the IEEE-1394 packet header and Data Block CRC. The Data Length field shall
indicate the exact number of total bytes encapsulated in the Message Data.

10-111

10.6.14 Parallel Data Packets.
10.6.14.1 Parallel Data Packet, Format 0. Parallel data packets are designed to record data
from parallel interfaces (2-128 bit wide) including the industry de facto standard 8-bit DCRsi
interface. A single packet can hold data words or special data structures as currently defined for
the DCRsi scan format. The exact format selection is defined in the Channel Specific Data
Word. The data recorded from a parallel interface shall be placed into a Parallel Data Packet
Format 0 as shown in Figure 10-101.

msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
DATA WORD 1
:
DATA WORD n
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-101. Parallel data packet, format 0.

a. Parallel Packet Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet Body portion of each
Parallel Data Packet begins with a Channel Specific Data word. The Channel
Specific Data word is formatted as shown in Figure 10-102.

msb lsb
31 24 23 0
TYPE RESERVED (0) OR SCAN NUMBER
Figure 10-102. Parallel packet channel specific data word format.

- Type. (bits 31-24) indicate the data type stored
0-1: Reserved
2-128: Number of bits of recorded data (parallel data word width in bits)
129-253: Reserved
254: DCRsi scan format, contains auxiliary data, DCRsi main data
255: Reserved
- Scan Number. (bits 23-0) is reserved (0) for general purpose parallel data
packets or contains the scan number of the first scan stored in the packet for
DCRsi data.

b. General Purpose Parallel Data. General purpose parallel data packets can
contain any number of data bytes as indicated in the Data Length field in the
Packet Headers (Figure 10-103).

10-112

To get the number of data words stored in the packet, the Data Length
must be divided by the number of bytes necessary to hold one Parallel
Data word.

- If the number of data bits is less than 9 bits, the word shall be padded to
8-bit bytes.

msb lsb
15 0
PAD (0) WORD 2 PAD (0) WORD 1
: :
PAD (0)
WORD N, or
PAD (0) IF LENGTH IS ODD
PAD (0) WORD N-1
Figure 10-103. Parallel data, up to 8-bit wide words.

- If the number of data bits is between 9 and 16, the words shall be padded to
one 16-bit word, as in Figure 10-104.

msb lsb
15 0
PAD (0) DATA WORD 1
:
PAD (0) DATA WORD N
Figure 10-104. Parallel data, 9-16 bit wide words.

- If the number of data bits is greater than 16 the words shall be padded to
multiples of 16-bit data words. Figure 10-105 shows storing of 28-bit data
words.

msb lsb
15 0
DATA WORD1, LS BITS 15-0
PAD (0) DATA WORD 1, MS BITS 27-16
:
DATA WORD N, LS BITS 15-0
PAD (0) DATA WORD N, MS BITS 27-16
Figure 10-105. Parallel data, (Example: 28-bit wide words).

10-113

c. DCRsi Parallel Data Packets. The DCRsi data packets can contain any number
of complete DCRsi Scans containing nine auxiliary data and 4356 main data
bytes. The number of the scans can be calculated from the Data Length field of
the Packet Header. The structure of one DCRsi scan is in Figure 10-106.

msb lsb
15 0
AUXILIARY DATA 2 AUXILIARY DATA 1
PAD (0) AUXILIARY DATA 3
DATA BYTE 2 DATA BYTE 1
: :
Figure 10-106. DCRsi Scan, 9-auxiliary data byte +4356 bytes.

The length of the packet can be only N * (12 + 4356) + 4 bytes, including
the length of the Channel Specific data word.

DCRsi data without auxiliary data bytes can be stored also as 8-bit General
Purpose Parallel Data as described in paragraph 10.6.15.1b (General Purpose
Parallel Data).

10.6.15 Ethernet Data Packets.
10.6.15.1 Ethernet Data Packets, Format 0. Data from one or more Ethernet network
interfaces can be placed into an Ethernet Data Packet Format 0 as shown in Figure 10-107.
10-114

msb lsb
15 0
PACKET HEADER
BYTE 2 BYTE 1
: :
:
BYTE 2 BYTE 1
: :
PACKET TRAILER
Figure 10-107. Ethernet Data packet format 1.

10-115

a. Ethernet Data Packet Format 0, Channel Specific Data Word. The Packet Body
portion of each Ethernet Data Packet begins with a Channel Specific Data word.
It indicates how many Physical Ethernet messages (MAC Frame) are placed in
the Packet Body. The Channel Specific Data word is formatted for the
complete type of packet body as shown in Figure 10-108.

msb lsb
31 28 27 16 15 0
FORMAT RESERVED NUMBER OF FRAMES
Figure 10-108. Ethernet Data packet format 1 channel specific data word.

- Format. (bits 31-28) indicate the type of Ethernet Packet.

0000 = Ethernet Physical Layer IEEE-802.3
0001 - 1111 = Reserved
- Number of Frames. (bits 15-0) contain a binary value that represents the
number of frames included in the packet.

b. Ethernet Data Packet Format 0 Intra-Packet Header. After the Channel Specific
Data, Ethernet Data is inserted into the packet. Each Frame is preceded by an
Intra-Packet Header that has both an Intra-Packet Time Stamp and an Intra-
Packet Data Header containing a Frame ID Word. The length of the Intra-
Packet Header is fixed at 12 bytes (96 bits) positioned contiguously, in the
following sequence as shown in Figure 10-109.

msb lsb
31 0
TIME (LSLW)
TIME (MSLW)
FRAME ID WORD
Figure 10-109. Ethernet Data format 1 intra-packet header.

- Intra-Packet Time Stamp. (8 Bytes) indicate the time tag of the Frame Data.
First long word bits 31-0 and second long word bits 31-0 indicate the
following values:
the Frame with bits 31 to 16 in the second long word zero filled or;
Packet Flags (paragraph 10.6.1.1.g) and the first data bit in the Frame.
10-116

- Frame ID Word. The Frame ID Word is an identification word that
precedes the Ethernet frame and is inserted into the packet with the format

msb lsb
31 30 29 28 27 24 23 16 15 14 13 0
RESERVED FE CONTENT SPEED NET ID RESERVED DATA LENGTH
Figure 10-110. Intra-packet frame ID word.

o Frame Error (FE). (bit 30). The Frame Error bit is used to indicate any
error that occurred during frame transmission.
0 = No Frame Error
1 = Frame Error encountered
o Captured Data Content (CONTENT). (bits 29-28). This field specifies
the extent of the captured MAC Frame.
00 = Full MAC Frame: starting with the 6-byte Destination MAC
address and ending with the 4-byte Frame Check Sequence
01-11 = Reserved for further formats
o Ethernet Speed (SPEED). (bits 27-24). This field indicates the
negotiated bit rate for the identified NETID on which the frame was
captured.
0000 = Auto
0001 = 10 Mbit/s
0010 = 100 Mbit/s
0011 = 1 Gbit/s
0100 = 10 Gbit/s
o Network Identifier (NETID). (bits 23-16) contain a binary value which
represents the physical network identification of frame origination that
follows the ID Word. Zero means first and/or only physical network.
o Data Length. (bits 13-0) contain a binary value that represents the
length of the frame in bytes (n) that follows the ID Word.

10.7 Recorder Control and Status
10.7.1 Recorder Control. The recorder shall be controlled by either discrete control/status
lines and/or serial communication ports. The serial interface shall consist of both RS-232 and
RS-422 full duplex serial communications.

10.7.1.1 Optional Recorder Control. The recorder may be controlled over the Fibre
Channel, IEEE-1394B, or Ethernet recorder download interface ports from paragraph 10.4.
These interfaces shall support communications using SCSI (Fibre Channel) IAW paragraph
10.4.1, SCSI over SBP-2 (IEEE-1394B) IAW 10.4.2, or iSCSI(Ethernet) IAW paragraph 10.4.3
Recorder login and IRIG-106 Chapter 6 Command and Control Mnemonics shall be transmitted
10-117

and received using the SCSI ORB structures IAW paragraphs 10.9.3 (as required for IEEE-
1394B), 10.9.4, and 10.9.14.
10.7.1.2 Optional TELNET Control. The recorder may be controlled over ETHERNET/
TELNET utilizing recorder control mnemonics as defined in IRIG 106 Chapter 6.
10.7.2 Communication Ports. The RS-232 and RS-422 serial communication ports shall be
functional simultaneously without requiring selection of either port. Status requested by either
port shall be returned on both ports. Note that unexpected results may occur if commands are
issued on both ports simultaneously.

10.7.3 RS-232/422 Port. An RS-232/422 port shall be available at the Download Port.

10.7.4 Commands. Commands received through the serial communication ports shall not
override hardwire discrete controls.

10.7.5 Status Requests. Status requests received through the serial communication ports
shall not interfere with hardwire controls.

10.7.6 Serial Status. Serial status shall be provided on either serial status request or discrete
activation.

10.7.7 Default Interface. Default Interface with user equipment shall utilize the following
ASCII serial communication protocol:
a. 38400 baud.
b. One start bit.
c. 8 bit data.
d. No parity.
e. One stop bit.

10.7.8 Serial Commands. The following commands are a subset of the Recorder Command
and Control Mnemonics defined in IRIG Standard 106 Chapter 6, paragraph 8, where additional
rules regarding command syntax and recorder operation are also specified, along with examples
showing the use of each command. The commands are simple ASCII command strings
delimited by spaces. All commands begin with an ASCII period (.) and, with the single
exception of the .TMATS command, end with a carriage return and line-feed terminator
sequence.
- Case Sensitivity. Commands will not be case sensitive except for location
parameter in .PLAY and file name in .RECORD.

10-118

10.7.9 Serial Commands. Table 10-9 summarizes the required commands.

TABLE 10-9. COMMAND SUMMARY
Command Parameters
*
Description
.ASSIGN [destination-ID] [source-ID]
Assign replay (output) channels to source (input)
channels
.BIT Runs all of the built-in-tests
Specify and view masks that determine which of the
.HEALTH status bits are critical warnings
.DATE [start-date]
Specify setting or displaying date from recording
device
.DECLASSIFY Secure erases the recording media
.DISMOUNT Unloads the recording media
.DUB [location] Same as .PLAY but with internal clock
.ERASE Erases the recording media
.EVENT [text string] Display event table or add event to event table
.FILES Displays information about each recorded file
.FIND [value [mode] ] Display current locations or find new play point
.HEALTH [feature] Display detailed status of the recorder system
.HELP Displays table of "dot" commands
.IRIG-106
Returns supported version number of IRIG-106
Recorder Command and Control Mnemonics
.LOOP Starts record and play in read-after-write mode
.MEDIA Displays media usage summary
.MOUNT Powers and enables the recording media
.PAUSE Pause current replay
Reproduce recorded data of assigned output channels
starting at [location] and at [speed]
.PUBLISH [keyword] [parameter]
Configure, start and stop live data over the recorder
Ethernet interface
.RECORD [filename] Starts a recording at the current end of data
.REPLAY [endpoint [mode] ] Same as .SHUTTLE but with internal clock
.RESET Perform software initiated system reset
.RESUME Resume replay from pause condition
.SETUP [n]
Displays or selects 1 of 16 (015) pre-programmed
data recording formats
.SHUTTLE [endpoint [mode] ]
Play data repeatedly from current location to the
specified endpoint location using external clock
.STATUS Displays the current system status
.STOP [mode] Stops the current recording, playback, or both
.TMATS {mode} [n] Write, Read, Save, or Get TMATS file
* Parameters in braces {} are required. Parameters in brackets [] are optional. When optional
parameters are nested ([xxx [yy] ]), the outer parameter (xxx) must be specified in order to also specify
the inner parameter (yy).
10-119

10.7.10 Required Discrete Control Functions. Required discrete control functions are noted
in Figure 10-111.

Description
RECORD
ERASE
DECLASSIFY
ENABLE
BIT
Figure 10-111. Required discrete control functions.

a. Control and Status Lines. Five contacts for discrete control and five lines for
indicating status shall be provided. Grounding a control line (or causing the
indicator line to go to ground) referenced to the recorders ground completes
the circuit to activate a function as shown in Figure 10-112.

RECORD
BIT
ERASE
DECLASSIFY
ENABLE
DECLASSIFY INDICATION
ERASE IND
BIT IND
FAULT IND
RECORD IND
28 VDC
SSR
Figure 10-112. Discrete control and indicator functional diagram.

b. Record Command. Activated by toggle switch (Normally closed position 0.55
Volts or less), this discrete commands the recorder to start recording.
Recorder will remain in this mode until such time as the switch is set to
normally open position.
c. Erase Command. Activated by momentary switch (0.55 Volts or less,
minimum duration of 100 ms), this discrete commands the recorder to erase
its user data and file directory memory provided the enable switch is also
activated.
10-120

d. Declassify Command. Activated by momentary switch (0.55 Volts or less,
minimum duration of 100 ms), this discrete causes the recorder to start the
declassify procedure provided the enable switch is also activated.
e. Command Enable. Activated by momentary switch (0.55 volts or less) for
either ERASE or DECLASSIFY discrete to operate.
f. Bit Command. Activated by momentary switch (0.55 Volts or less), this
discrete commands the recorder to start the BIT procedure.
g. Record Status. A Record indication (ON) shall be active low 0.55 volts or
less. A Non-Record indication (OFF) will be an open circuit. Current limit of
60 milliamps required.
h. BIT Status. A BIT indication (ON) shall be 0.55 volts or less. A Non-BIT
indication (OFF) will be an open circuit. Current limit of 60 milliamps
required.
i. Fault Status. A Fault indication (ON) shall be 0.55 volts or less. A Non-Fault
indication (OFF) will be an open circuit. Current limit of 60 milliamps
required.
j. Erase Status. An Erase indication (ON) shall be 0.55 volts or less. A Non-
Erase indication (OFF) will be an open circuit. Current limit of 60 milliamps
required.
k. Declassify Status. A Declassify indication (ON) shall be 0.55 volts or less. A
Non-Declassify indication (OFF) will be an open circuit. No discrete control
line shall be available at the Download port. Current limit of 60 milliamps
required.

10.7.11 Voltage. 28-VDC auxiliary voltage output shall be provided from the
discrete/control port (250 mA max, short circuit protection).

10.7.12 Status Query. Status querying shall be limited to intervals not to exceed 2
seconds and not less than one second.

10.7.13 Erase Command. Activated by momentary switch (.55 Volts or less, minimum
duration for 100 milliseconds, if ENABLE discrete is also activated for 100 milliseconds), this
discrete commands the recorder to erase its user data and file directory memory provided the
enable switch is also activated.

10.7.14 Declassify Command. Activated by momentary switch (0.55 Volts or less,
minimum duration of 100 milliseconds, if ENABLE discrete is also activated for 100
milliseconds) this discrete commands the recorder to start the declassify procedure provided the
enable switch is also activated.

10.7.15 Command Enable. Activated by a momentary switch (0.55 Volts or less for
minimum duration of 100 milliseconds) for either ERASE or DECLASSIFY discrete to operate.
In order to activate the ERASE OR DECLASSIFY, the ENABLE and ERASE OR
10-121

DECLASSIFY must simultaneously be active for a minimum duration of 100 milliseconds.
Table 10-10 presents the Recorder LED states.

TABLE 10-10. RECORDER LED STATES
LED On Flash Off
ERASE Media erased.
Media erasing is in
progress.
Not erased media.
RECORD In recording - Not in recording
FAULT
Recorder is not ready,
or any of the critical
warning exists.
-
Recording is running
properly. No critical
warning.
BIT Built-in test running. -
Built-in test is not
running.
DECLASSIFY Media declassified.
Media declassification
is in progress.
Not declassified media.
Note: Flashing is defined as On: 500 ms, Off: 500 ms

10.8 Declassification
Associated Documents such as NSA-130-2, DOD 5200.28 (1972), and DCI-116
historically covered declassification guidelines/requirements. These documents focused on
declassification of standard disk and other conventional memory technologies. Declassification
is the determination by an authorized official that classified information no longer requires, in
the interest of national security, any degree of protection against unauthorized disclosure. This
standard provides for the minimum set of commands that may be utilized to allow for user
declassification of Solid State Media residing in an RMM. The Solid State Media may consist of
COTS Solid State Disks (SSD) or a memory configuration unique to the manufacturer. There
are several approaches for declassification. The responsibility for ensuring that a proper
declassification process has been effectively implemented will reside ultimately with the
user/customer/program manager.
10.8.1 Approach. The following approaches for declassification are currently recommended.
The risk that proper declassification has been effectively implemented will reside ultimately with
the user/customer/program manager. It is believed that the user is the most qualified to
determine the declassification procedures for any program situation. It is the users
responsibility to correctly apply the guidelines to the program in each location to optimize the
cost/effect while providing appropriate protection for the data. The guidelines are planned to be
available on the Internet at Defense Link.

10.8.2 Algorithm. The algorithm to erase secure data is described below. During the secure
erase procedure, all blocks of memory shall be processed. No block in memory shall be
excluded from secure erase processing for any reason.

a. First Erase. Every memory block on the board is erased. Any erase failures
reported by memory chips will result in the corresponding chip/block being
10-122

declared a bad block. In the event this bad block is not already in the
corresponding boards bad block table, a new bad block entry will be appended
onto the boards bad block table. Note that this new entry will not have the
Secure Erase flag set.
b. First Write (0x55). Every memory chip location is recorded with the pattern
0x55. As each location is written, the data is read back to guarantee that all bits
were written to the expected pattern. Any write failures reported by the chips,
or any data errors will result in the corresponding chip/block being declared a
bad block. In the event this bad block is not already in the corresponding
boards bad block table, a new bad block entry will be appended onto the
boards bad block table. Note that this new entry will not have the Secure Erase
flag set.
c. Second Erase. Every memory chip shall be erased. Any erase failures reported
by the memory chips will result in the corresponding chip/block being declared
a bad block. In the event this bad block is not already in the corresponding
flag set.
d. Second Write (0xAA). Every memory chip location is recorded with the pattern
0xAA. As each location is written, the data is read back to guarantee that all
bits were written to the expected pattern. Any write failures reported by the
memory chips, or any data errors will result in the corresponding chip/block
being declared a bad block. In the event this bad block is not already in the
corresponding boards bad block table, a new bad block entry will be appended
onto the boards bad block table. Note that this new entry will not have the
Secure Erase flag set.
e. Third Erase. Every memory location is erased. Any erase failures reported by
the memory chips will result in the corresponding chip/block being declared a
bad block. In the event this bad block is not already in the corresponding
flag set.
f. Usable Secure Erased Blocks. All blocks that do not have an entry in the bad
block table are now considered to be Secure Erased.
g. Unusable Secure Erased Blocks. If a bad block entry contains the flag
indicating it has already been Secure Erased, this block has already been secure
erased and requires no further processing, since it is known that this block was
skipped during the previous recording.
h. Unsecure Bad Block Processing. A boards bad block table may contain bad
block entries that have not previously been Secure Erased. If any such entries
exist, the following steps are performed on each block.
- Write Zeros Loop. For each page in the block, a pattern of all zeros is
written to the page, and the page is checked to determine if any unexpected
10-123

ones (UOs) are found. If any UOs are found, the page is re-written to all
zeros. This process is repeated up to 16 times. After all allowed re-writes,
the board, chip, and block numbers of the block containing any remaining
UOs are written to a Failed Erase Table.
- Write Ones Loop. For each page in the block, the page is erased (to all
ones) and checked to determine if any unexpected zeros (UZs) are found. If
any UZs are found, another erase command is issued to the block. This
process is repeated up to 16 times. After all allowed erase operations, the
board, chip, and block numbers of the block containing any remaining UZs
are written to the Failed Erase Table.
i. Failed Erase Table Processing. Any remaining entries in the Failed Erase Table
correspond to blocks that cannot be erased. These blocks may still contain user
data and therefore are declared to have failed the secure erase.

A count of the number of bad blocks in the Failed Erase Table that have not
been Secure Erased is returned as part of the secure erase results. A non-zero
count indicates a secure erase failure of at least one block. A command will
allow the user to retrieve the Failed Erase Table. A command will also allow a
user to retrieve the data from such blocks and manually determine if these
blocks can be designated as Secure Erased. In most cases, a single stuck bit
will not compromise any user data and the offending block can be manually
declared to be Secure Erased. If the results of manual inspection are
indeterminate, the chip containing the failed block must be removed and
destroyed, and the Secure Erase procedure must be repeated.
j. Secure Erase Completion. When all blocks are secure erased (no entries in the
Failed Erase Table), the content of the file is the ASCII string Secure Erase
repeated over and over.

10.9 IEEE 1394B Interface to Recorder Media
This interface definition specifies the interface between the removable media and the host
platform as IEEE 1394B. The selection of this protocol was adopted to facilitate a common
interface between the media and the computing platform.

This definition does not mandate the interface between the recorder and
media.

10.9.1 Media Time Synchronization. In order to allow recorders to be synchronized to the same
time without requiring platform modification or external time source provided to recorder, the
Removable Media Cartridges shall maintain time allowing for time initialization of recorder.
Removable media cartridges shall allow for a battery back-up real time clock device.
Initialization of time shall be accomplished via IEEE-1394B interface.
10-124

10.9.2 Physical and Signaling. The interface shall allow control of Vendor Specific Solid State
devices and Commercial Off The Shelf (COTS) Media as per Figure 10-113.

REMOVABLE MEDIA
NODE
UNIT UNIT
SCSI SCSI
Processor Device Vendor Device
RT SS
Link
PHY
Figure 10-113. Removable media.

10.9.3 Removable Media Communication. The fundamental method of communicating shall be
in accordance to the IEEE 1394b protocol. Packets sent and received shall be asynchronous
transmissions. IEEE-1394b packets shall encapsulate Serial Bus Protocol (SBP-2) formatted
packets for the transport of commands and data. Removable media devices are to use SCSI
command set(s) and therefore SCSI commands and status shall be encapsulated in SBP-2
Operation Request Blocks (ORB).

SBP-2 provides for the transport of 6-10- and 12-byte SCSI Common
Descriptor Blocks within a command ORB.

10.9.4 Transport of Serial Commands. Removable devices shall implement the SEND and
RECEIVE Processor Device SCSI-2 Commands. The IRIG Standard 106 Chapter 6 commands
and data will be transported using these SCSI commands and the data buffers.

10.9.5 Mandated IEEE-1394b Interface Connector. The connector type for the removable media
shall be a IEEE 1394b Bilingual Socket connector. Power for the Removable Media shall be
derived from the Bilingual interface connector.

10-125

10.9.6 Real Time Clock. Removable media configured with a real time clock shall allow for
time to be preset in the media allowing for the transfer to the recorder. SCSI command set shall
be utilized to set time on the cartridge.

a. Real Time Clock Time Format. Time format shall be in accordance with
paragraph IRIG 106 Chapter 6 paragraph 6.8.4.23. The date format shall be in
accordance with ISO 8601.
b. Real Time Clock Logic Unit Number. The standard SCSI Media devices are
using Logical Unit Number (LUN) = 0. The Real Time Clock shall be
assigned LUN =1.
10.9.7 Mandatory Commands for Processor Devices. The mandatory commands for processor
devices are listed in Table 10-11.

TABLE 10-11. MANDATORY PROCESSOR COMMANDS
Command Parameters
*
Description
.BBLIST Directs the RMM to retrieve the bad block list
.BBLIST R Retrieves the bad block list from the RMM
.BBREAD {block identifier}
Returns contents of specified block in ASCII hexadecimal byte
format
.BBREAD P {block identifier}
Directs the RMM to initiate a physical block read of the specified
physical block identifier
.BBREAD D
Retrieves the data from the physical block. See the .MEDIA P
command for information. Data is returned in binary format.
.BBSECURE {block identifier} Marks an unsecured bad block as secure
.BIT Runs all of the RMM built-in-tests
Specify and view masks that determine which of the .HEALTH
status bits are critical warnings
.DATE [start-date] Specify setting or displaying date from RMM
.DECLASSIFY
Initiates command as specified by user specification or user
CONOP overwrite procedures
.ERASE Erases the RMM media
.HEALTH [feature] Display detailed status of the RMM
.IDENTIFY
Queries the RMM for Solid State Memory identification and
firmware version
.INITIALIZE Initializes RMM internal components
.MEDIA P
Queries the RMM for information about the physical media of the
RMM and the transfer limits for the required physical I/O
commands
.PBWRITE P {block identifier}
Directs the RMM to initiate a physical block write of the specified
physical block identifier
.PBWRITE D
Write the data to the physical block in binary format. See the
.MEDIA P command for information.
.SANITIZE Initiates a memory clear and identification of bad memory blocks
.STATUS Displays the current RMM status
10-126

10.9.7.1 RMM .HEALTH Command Response. The RMM .HEALTH command response is
presented in Figure 10-114.

BIT MASK DESCRIPTION
RMM 0 01 BIT Failure
1 02 Setup Failure (unable to set the time or date properly)
2 04 Operational Failure (I/O error, media error, etc)
3 08 Low or dead battery warning
4 10 RMM Busy
Figure 10-114. RMM .HEALTH command response.

The operation of these commands is described in Chapter 6, paragraph 8,
Command and Control Mnemonics.

10.9.8 Time Setting Requirements. To set time, the .TIME commands should be used
according to Chapter 6, paragraph 8, Recorder Command and Control Mnemonics,
paragraph 6.8.4.32. To guarantee and avoid uncontrolled delay, the following algorithm shall be
used:
a. The Host device puts a .TIME command with time parameter to be set in its
SEND buffer and sends it at least 100 ms prior to the correct time to the Real
Time Clock device. The delay is necessary to allow the Processor Device to be
prepared for the exact time setting and to hold off enough in the Host to force a
doorbell with the next SCSI command. Without enough delay the Host will not
be able to chain the next SCSI command together with the previous command. If
the operating system demands it a delay greater than 100 ms can be used.
b. The Processor Device shall process this time and be prepared to set it at receipt of
the doorbell.
c. A SEND command shall be sent to the Real Time Clock with the message .TIME
without parameters to ask back the time set.

10.9.9 Set Time. To set time the .TIME commands should be used according to IRIG-106
Chapter 6, paragraph 8 Recorder Command and Control Mnemonics, paragraph 6.8.4.23.

10.9.10 Date Setting Requirements. A .DATE [start-date] command shall be utilized for
setting or displaying date of the removable memory real time clock. The date shall be set in
year-month-day format according to ISO 8601.
- Date Example.
.DATE
DATE 2002-12-31
*
10-127

10.9.11 Checking Battery Status. Verification of health of battery shall be accomplished
with .CRITICAL and .HEALTH commands IAW IRIG 106 Chapter 6, paragraph 8. Recorder
Command and Control Mnemonics, paragraph 6.8.4.2 and paragraph 6.8.4.10.
10.9.12 Declassification Supporting Commands.
10.9.12.1 .IDENTIFY: A .IDENTIFY command queries the RMM for Solid State Disk
(SSD) identification and firmware version.
Description
This command queries the RMM for SSD identification information and
SSD firmware version.

Parameters
None

Response
The RMM responds with one line containing five comma separated fields.
Characters and spaces are allowed within the comma separated fields.
Response time shall be within 100 milliseconds. A .STATUS command
request prior to 100 milliseconds shall elicit a BUSY response.

*.IDENTIFY
A, B, C, D, E
*

Where
A SSD Manufacturer
B SSD Model
C SSD Serial Number
D RMM Firmware Version
E SSD Firmware Version

10.9.12.2 .MEDIA P: The .MEDIA P command is utilized to query the RMM for information
regarding the physical block architecture of the SSD and the SCSI RECEIVE transfer limits in
effect when reading physical blocks.

Parameters
The parameter P distinguishes this command from the standard .MEDIA
command.

Response
The RMM responds with one line containing the tag PHYSICAL and
five space separated integer numbers. Response time shall be within 100
milliseconds. A .STATUS command prior to 100 msec shall return a
BUSY state.

10-128

Example

*.MEDIA P
PHYSICAL A B C D E
*

Where
A Physical block size in bytes. This value must be a multiple of item
D below.
B ... Total number of physical blocks in SSD.
C Maximum ORB transfer size that can be used when reading the
binary data from the physical block with the .BBREAD D and
.PBWRITE D commands.
D Number of valid data bytes in a physical page. Item A above must
be an integer multiple of this value.
E This field specifies the number of filler bytes appended onto each
physical page read from the RMM. Filler bytes are typically
inserted to pad the transfer to the next ATA sector boundary. If no
padding is required, this field may be 0.

10.9.12.3 .SANITIZE: A .SANITIZE command shall initiate a write/verify of all RMM
user data physical blocks. The pattern may consist of either all FFs or all 00s. The
.SANITIZE command shall identify any blocks that cannot be written or verified. Blocks that
cannot be written to or contain at least one bit that is stuck in either the 0 state or the 1 are
termed bad blocks. The user shall review the block contents and map out the bad blocks such
that they are no longer addressable. Once the address has been mapped out the blocks are no
longer addressable and are no longer identified in the bad block table (Figure 10-115).

Figure 10-115. Updating the Bad Block Table
10-129

Parameters
None

Response
The RMM responds with an asterisk. Response time shall be within 100
milliseconds. A .STATUS command prior to 100 milliseconds shall elicit
a BUSY response. During Sanitization the RMM shall respond with S 04
xx yy zz; where zz indicates percentage complete, reference the
.STATUS command. Upon completion a status response of S 11 xx yy
shall indicate that bad blocks were found. A status response upon
completion of S 12 xx yy shall indicate that no bad blocks were found.
Example
*.SANITIZE
*

10.9.12.4 .BBLIST: A .BBLIST command shall be utilized to instruct the RMM to retrieve
the list of UNSECURED bad block identifiers from Solid State Media residing in the RMM. A
BBLIST command is only valid following a SANITIZE command.

Parameters
None

Response
BUSY state.

Example
*.BBLIST
*

10.9.12.5 .BBLIST R: A .BBLIST R shall be used to retrieve bad block identifiers from
the RMM. This command may only be issued immediately following a successful .BBLIST
command.
Parameters
The parameter R distinguishes this command from the standard
.BBLIST command.

Response
The RMM must respond with a list of hexadecimal bad block identifiers.
Each identifier must be terminated with a <CR><LF> sequence. Each
identifier must be a legal hexadecimal number from 1 to 16 digits. No
embedded spaces or other special characters are allowed. Response time
shall be within 100 milliseconds. A .STATUS command prior to 100
milliseconds shall return a BUSY state.

10-130

Example
*.BBLIST R
000000E3
0000034f
FE0184C9
*

10.9.12.6 .BBREAD P {block_identifier}: A .BBREAD P {block_identifier} shall direct
the RMM to initiate a physical block read of the specified physical block identifier.

Parameters
The parameter P distinguishes this as a binary physical block read
command.
The parameter block_identifier is the physical block identifier [from the
BBLIST R response] of the block to be read.

Response
BUSY state.

Example
.BBREAD P FE0184C9
*
10.9.12.7 .BBREAD D: A .BBREAD D command shall read one binary physical block
from the RMM. This command may only be issued immediately after a successful .BBREAD P
command. The size of physical block, page size, page filler size, and maximum SCSI RECEIVE
transfer size that are required to perform the transfer are all specified in the RMMs response to
the .MEDIA P command.

Parameters
None.

Response
The RMM responds by returning the requested binary physical block data.
Multiple SCSI RECEIVE commands may be required to retrieve the entire
physical data block.

*.BBREAD D
Response is in binary.

10.9.12.8 .BBSECURE {block identifier}: A .BBSECURE command shall be utilized to
mark an unsecured bad block as being secured. A block that has been identified as secured shall
never be used for any subsequent data recording. Secured bad blocks shall be removed from the
unsecured bad block identifier list. The block identifier shall be provided for the block to be
secured.

10-131

Parameters
None.

Response
The RMM responds with an asterisk.

Example
.BBSECURE 5678
*

10.9.12.9 .PBWRITE P {block_identifier}: A .PBWRITE P {block_identifier} shall direct
the RMM to initiate a physical block write of the specified physical block identifier.

Parameters
The parameter block_identifier is the physical block identifier [from the
BBLIST R response] of the block to be written.

Response
milliseconds. A .STATUS command prior to 100 milliseconds shall
return a BUSY state.

Example
.PBWRITE P FE0184C9
*
10.9.12.10 .PBWRITE D: A PBWRITE D command shall write one binary physical block to
the RMM. This command may only be issued immediately after a successful .PBWRITE P
command. The size of physical block transfer size and the maximum SCSI SEND page size that
are required to perform the transfer are all specified in the RMMs response to the .MEDIA P
command.

Parameters
Binary data block. Multiple SCSI SEND commands may be required to
transfer the entire physical data block.

Response
The RMM responds with an asterisk after all data is successfully received.

*.PBWRITE D
<binary data> total length = physical block size.

10-132

10.9.12.11 .INITIALIZE: A .INITIALIZE command shall be utilized to configure the RMM
memory and reset of the firmware.
Parameters
None

Response
return a BUSY state. A response of S13 xx yy zz; where zz indicates
percentage complete shall be provided. Upon completion, a response of
S 14 xx yy shall be provided; where yy indicates number of seconds
required after initialization.

*.INITIALIZE
*
.STATUS
S 13 00 00 01%
.STATUS
S 13 00 00 02%

.STATUS
S 13 00 00 100%
.STATUS
S 14 00 03
.STATUS
S 01 00 00

10.9.12.12 .DECLASSIFY: A .DECLASSIFY command shall be utilized to initiate user
procedures.
Parameters
None

Response
return a BUSY state. During Sanitization the RMM shall respond with S
04 xx yy zz; where zz indicates percentage complete, reference status
command. Upon completion a status response of S 11 xx yy shall
indicate that bad blocks were found. A status response upon completion
of S 12 xx yy shall indicate that no bad blocks were found.
Example
*.DECLASSIFY
*

10-133

10.9.12.13 .IRIG106: A .IRIG106 shall be utilized to retrieve the IRIG-106 supported
version number.
Parameters
None

Response
The RMM responds with a version number which shall be a two integer
value. Response time shall be within 100 milliseconds. A .STATUS
command prior to 100 milliseconds shall return a BUSY state.

Example
*.IRIG106
9
*
10.9.12.14 .STATUS: A .STATUS shall be utilized to query the RMM for status
information (see Table 10-12).
Description
This command queries the RMM for status information.
Parameters
None
Response
The RMM response to a .STATUS command with a response of the
form
*.STATUS
S A B C [D%]
*
10-134

TABLE 10-12. RMM STATES
Description
STATE State
CODE
(A)
State
Value
(B)
State
Value
(C)
Progress
Percentage
(D)
FAIL 00
IDLE 01 00 00
BIT 02 00 00 Percent Complete
ERASE 03 00 00 Percent Complete
DECLASSIFY
SANITIZE
04 00 00 Percent Complete
BUSY 09 00 00
SANITIZE
COMPLETED
BAD BLOCKS
FOUND
11 00
Number of
bad blocks
found
(Integer)

SANITIZE
COMPLETED
NO BAD
BLOCKS
FOUND
12 00 00
INITIALIZE IN
PROGRESS
13 00 00 Percent Complete
INITIALIZE
COMPLETE
14 00
Number of
seconds
required for
initialization
(Integer)

10-135

10.9.12.15 RMM Command Error Codes. Issuing invalid commands (bad syntax) or illegal
commands (not accepted in the current system state) result in error code responses (with an
ASCII E identifier) prior to the asterisk response terminator when a command cannot be
completed. Table 10-13 shows possible error codes and the conditions under which they occur.
Example
.CLEAR
E 00
*

TABLE 10-13. COMMAND ERROR CODES
Error Description Conditions
00 INVALID COMMAND Command does not exist
01 INVALID PARAMETER Parameter is out of range, or wrong alpha-numeric type
02 INVALID MODE Command cannot be executed in the current state
05 COMMAND FAILED Command failed to execute for any reason other than those listed above

10.9.13 Vendor Specific Devices. The Mandatory SCSI Command Set for Vendor
Specific Devices is as follows:
a. For random access devices:
INQUIRY
READ
READ CAPACITY
TEST UNIT READY
REQUEST SENSE
b. For sequential access devices:
INQUIRY
READ
REWIND
TEST UNIT READY
REQUEST SENSE

COTS media shall support as a minimum the SCSI command set to
support data download in accordance with paragraph 10.4 of this standard.

10.9.14 Mandatory ORB Formats for the Processor Device.
10.9.14.1 Minimum Operational Requirements. The time setting accuracy of the Real Time
Clock device shall be better than 1 millisecond. The short time accuracy of the Real Time Clock
device must be at least 10 ppm in the temperature range 0-40C, and at least 50 ppm in the
temperature range 40C - +85C.
10-136

10.9.14.2 ORB Format.
a. Login ORB format. The login ORB format is illustrated in Figure 10-116.

most significant
password
Login_response
n
Rq_fmt
x Reserved reconnect function LUN
password_length login_response_length
Status_FIFO
least significant
Field and Bit Descriptions
Password 32 bits The password shall be RTC. The password field shall contain
the immediate data and the password_length shall be zero.
Login_response
login_response_length
64 bits
16 bits
The login_response (32 bits) field and login_response_length
(16 bits) field shall specify the address and size of a buffer
(minimum of 12 bytes) allocated by the host for the return of the
login response.
N 1 bit The notify bit n shall be one.
Rq_fmt 2 bits The rq_fmt shall be zero.
X 1 bit The exclusive bit x shall be one.
Reserved 4 bits Reserved shall be zero (0).
Reconnect 4 bits The reconnect field shall specify the reconnect time as a power
of 2 seconds. A value of zero shall mean one second.
Function 4 bits The Function shall be zero.
LUN 16 bits The logical unit number shall be one (1).
Status_FIFO 64 bits The Status_FIFO shall contain the address allocated by the host
for the return of status for the LOGIN request and for the return
of subsequent write and read buffer response(s) indicating
success/failure of the operation

Figure 10-116. Login ORB format.
10-137

b. Login Response. The Login Response format is illustrated in Figure 10-117.
Figure 10-117. Login response format.
most significant
Length login_ID
command_block_agent
reserved reconnect_hold
least significant
Length 16 bits The length, in bytes, of the login response data
login_ID 16 bits Used in all subsequent requests to the SSMCs
Management Agent.
command_block_agent 64 bits Base address of agents CSR
Reserved 16 bits Reserved shall be zero (0).
Reconnect_hold 16 bits TBD

c. Send. The Send command ORB format is illustrated in Figure 10-118, and the
Send data buffer format is illustrated in Figure 10-119. The Send data buffer
contains the send command (according to Chapter 6) with the carriage return,
line feed and binary 0 character terminated. Alternatively, a .PBWRITE D
command will send data in binary format.

10-138

most significant
next_ORB

data_descriptor
n
Rq_fmt
r d spd max_payload p
page_size
data size
0Ah LUN Res
AEN
Xfer Lng upper bits
Xfer Lng low Control 00h 00h
00h 00h 00h 00h
least significant
next_ORB 64 bits ORB pointer format shall be in accordance with SBP-2 specifications.
data_descriptor 32 bits Data_descriptor shall contain the address of the data buffer.
n 1 bits Completion notification n shall be one. The target shall store a status
block at the status_FIFO address at the address supplied in the login request.
Rq_fmt 2 bits Required format shall be zero.
r 1 bits Reserved shall be zero (0);
d 1 bits Direction bit d shall be zero.
spd 3 bits Speed spd shall have a value of two.
max_payload 4 bits The maximum data transfer length max_payload shall be nine.
p 1 bits The removable media device must be prepared to handle the Page table bit
p=0 and p=1 cases as the standard operating systems set this bit without
influence of the application programs.
page_size 3 bits Page size shall be zero if the p field is set to 0, otherwise this field shall be
set to the valid page size.
data size 16 bits The data size field should be set according to the allocated send buffer size
in bytes (N). The length must be at least 80 (50h).
Res 4 bits Reserved shall be zero (0).
AEN 1 bits AEN shall be zero.
Xfer Lng 24 bits The length must be at least 80 (50h).
Control 8 bits Control shall be 80h.
AEN
Figure 10-118. Send command ORB format.
10-139

Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Byte N-3 Byte N-2 Byte N-1 Byte NByte
-
-
-
Least significant
Most significant

Figure 10-119. Send data buffer format.

d. Receive. The Receive command block ORB format is illustrated in Figure 10-120;
the Receive data buffer can be returned in ASCII format (see Figure 10-121) or in
binary format (see Figure 10-122), if the retrieved data contains binary information.
Multiple ORBs may be used to retrieve the data required.
- The returned remote answer is an ASCII text terminated by the * (asterisk)
character IAW IRIG-106 Chapter 6-8. If the * terminator is missing, multiple
Receive commands must be used to retrieve the data until the * terminator is
received.
- If the returned remote answer can contain mixed ASCII text or binary
information until the specified length in the first 32-bit word. The first byte is a
hexadecimal 10 code to identify the binary format (codes hexadecimal 11-1F
are reserved for future extensions). The answer must be terminated by the *
(asterisk) character IAW IRIG-106 Chapter 6-8. If the * terminator is
missing, multiple Receive commands must be used to retrieve the data until
the * terminator is received.

10-140

most significant
next_ORB
data_descriptor

n
Rq_fmt
r d spd max_payload p
page_size
data size
08h LUN Res
AEN
Allocation Lng upper bits
Allo Lng low Control 00h 00h
00h 00h 00h 00h
least significant
next ORB 6 bits ORB pointer format shall be in accordance with SBP-2 specifications.
data Descriptor 64 bits Data_descriptor shall contain the address of the data buffer.
n 1 bits Completion notification n shall be one. The target shall store a status block at
the status_FIFO address at the address supplied in the login request.
Rq_fmt 2 bits Rq_fmt shall be zero.
r 1 bits Reserved: shall be zero (0).
d 1 bits Direction bit d shall be one.
spd 3 bits Speed spd shall have a value of two.
max_payload 4 bits The maximum data transfer length max_payload shall be nine.
p 1 bits The removable media device must be prepared to handle the Page table bit p=0
and p=1 cases as the standard operating systems set this bit without influence of
the application programs.
page_size 3 bits Page size shall be zero if the p field is set to 0, otherwise this field shall be set to
the valid page size.
data size 16 bits The data size field should be set according to the allocated receive buffer size in
bytes (N). The length must be at least 80 (50h).
Res 4 bits Reserved shall be zero (0).
AEN 1 bits AEN shall be zero.
Allocation Lng 16 bits Allocation_Lng = length of the Chapter 6 response string.
Control 8 bits Control shall be 80h.
AEN
Figure 10-120. Receive command block ORB format (8 quadlets).

10-141

Figure 10-121. Receive data buffer format ASCII format.

Figure 10-122. Receive data buffer binary format.

10.10 Ground Based Recorders
This section of the standard specifies the basic requirements of Ground Based Recorders
hereinafter referred to as Ground Recorders. The main functional requirements of Ground
Recorders are:

a. Recorder Interface.
b. Recorder Data Format.
c. Recorder Media.
d. Recorder Command and Control (if the Ground Recorder is to be controlled
remotely).
Optionally, Ground Recorders may support replay, reproduction, and display of
IRIG-106 Chapter 10 data recordings. Basic replay and reproduction interoperability
requirements will be defined in this section. Data display requirements are outside the scope of
this standard and will not be defined.

Most significant
-
-
Byte N-3 Byte N-2 Byte N-1 Byte N
-
Least significant
Hexadec. 10 Length High Length Middle Length Low
Most significant
-
-
Byte N-3 Byte N-2 Byte N-1 Byte N
-
Least significant
10-142

10.10.1 Interface.
a. At a minimum, the required Ground Recorders interface shall be Ethernet for
remote command and control IAW paragraph 10.4 and 10.7 of this standard.
b. Optionally, ground recorders can implement additional interfaces for remote
command and control, remote data access, and/or data streaming. If a ground
recorder uses iSCSI or contains an RS-232/422, IEEE-1394 and/or Fibre
Channel for these interfaces, it shall be IAW paragraph 10.4 and 10.7 of this
standard.
c. Data streaming.
- The recorder can optionally have the capability to stream IRIG-106
Chapter 10 format data (paragraph 10.10.2) out of its required Ethernet
Interface IAW paragraph 10.3.9.1.
- Stream commit time as defined in paragraph 10.6.1.h of this standard shall
apply to Ethernet Interface Data streaming.

10.10.2 Data Format. Ground Recorders shall format, multiplex, and record all data IAW
paragraph 10.6 of this standard.

10.10.3 Recording Media. Ground Recorders shall record data IAW paragraph 10.10.2 to
the following Recording Media:

a. COTS Media. Commercial Off-The-Shelf (COTS) is defined as any recording
media (such as hard disks, solid state drives, tape, RAID, and JBOD) that is
ready-made and available for sale to the general public.
COTS Media shall have a ready-made and available for sale to the general
public electrical interface (such as PATA, SATA, IEEE-1394, USB, SCSI,
Ethernet) to the Ground Recorders.

If Ground Recorders use COTS Media for recording of the paragraph
10.10.2 data format, the recorded data Remote Data Access at a minimum
shall be across the required Ground Recorder Ethernet interface using
iSCSI IAW paragraph 10.4.3 (Ethernet Recorder Interface) and
paragraph 10.5 (Interface File Structure) of this standard.

If Ground Recorders provide Remote Data Access across the Ground
Recorder Ethernet interface, the paragraph 10.5 (Interface File Structure) at
a minimum shall be presented at the interface. This does not dictate which
COTS media format or data organization is implemented, but does require
that the paragraph 10.5 (Interface File Structure) is presented at the
recorder Ethernet interface.

b. COTS Media Requirements. COTS Media used by Ground Recorders shall
provide the capability of recording valid IRIG-106 Chapter 10 Original
Recording File(s) IAW paragraph 10.11 (Data Interoperability). All
10-143

paragraph 10.11 Data Transfer and File Management requirements of this
standard shall apply to Ground Recorders.
10.10.4 Remote Command and Control.
a. Optionally, if a Ground Recorder is controlled remotely, it shall provide
command and control IAW paragraph 10.7.8 and 10.7.9 of this standard across
the Ethernet Interface port as defined in paragraph 10.10.1 of this standard.
b. Ground Recorders at a minimum are required to use iSCSI or TELNET as the
command and control Ethernet transport mechanism as defined in paragraph
10.4 and paragraph 10.7.
c. Ground Recorders providing remote command and control capability shall
provide the functionality for all commands defined in paragraph 10.7.9 of this
standard.
d. Optionally, if a Ground Recorder contains a RS-232/422, IEEE-1394B and/or
Fibre Channel interface as defined in paragraph 10.10.1 the recorder will
provide command and control IAW paragraph 10.7 and IRIG-106 Chapter 6.

10.10.5 Data Replay and Reproduction.
10.10.5.1 Channel Mapping.
a. Optionally, if a Ground Recorder provides data playback capability, it shall
provide for the logical assignment of recorded channels to physical channels on
the Ground Recorders.
b. Playback will not require movement of cards between slots to make assignments
for playback.

10.10.5.2 Recording/Reproduction Data Rates. Optionally, if a Ground Recorder provides a
data playback capability, it shall provide information using the IRIG-106 Chapter 6 .HEALTH
and .CRITICAL commands if the bandwidth of data to be played back exceeds the aggregate
bandwidth of the Ground Recorder.

10.10.5.3 Network Recording Playback.
a. Optionally, if a Ground Recorder provides a data playback capability, it shall
provide replay from COTS Media (paragraph 10.10.3) to the Ethernet Interface.
The Ethernet format of the network recording playback will be IAW
paragraph 10.3.9.1.
b. If the network recording playback capability is commanded remotely, Ground
Recorders shall support the functionality of the IRIG-106 Chapter 6.

10.11 Data Interoperability
10.11.1 Original Recording Files. All files contained within a recorder, RMM, COTS
Media, or that are a byte-for-byte single file downloaded to a host computing platform in
10-144

unaltered form shall be considered Original Recording Files and be in full compliance with the
Data Organization in paragraph 10.5.1 and Data Format in paragraph 10.6.
- Original Recording File Annotation. In order to provide a standardized method
of annotation for Original Recording Files, the following procedures shall be
used to ensure IRIG-106 Chapter 10 compliancy:
o The Computer Generated Data, Format 1 Setup Record shall always contain
the required attributes IAW paragraph 10.11.
o The Original Recording File Setup Record R-x\RI3 Original Tape/Storage
attribute value shall be R-x\RI3:Y;
o
10.11.2 Modified Recording Files. Modified Recording files are created from Original
Recording Files directly from a recorder, RMM, COTS Media or from Original Recording Files
that have been downloaded to a host computing platform. There are several instances of
Modified Recording Files - filtered or sanitized data, a subset of channels, a superset of channels,
a subset of time, a subset of both channels and time, or a superset of channels and subset of time.

10.11.2.1 Modified Recording File Annotation. In order to provide a standardized method
of annotation for Modified Recording Files, the following procedures shall be used to ensure
IRIG-106 Chapter 10 compliancy.
a. The Computer Generated Data, Format 1 Setup Record shall always contain the
required attributes IAW paragraph 10.11.
b. Any time a modification is made to an original recording the R-x\RI3 Original
Tape/Storage attribute value shall be changed:
From: R-x\RI3:Y;
To: R-x\RI3:N;

Also, the R-x\RI6 Date of Modification attribute will be added if not already
present, in which case if R-x\RI3 contains a Y R-x\RI6 shall be empty. The
R-x\RI8 attribute value shall contain the last date and time the Modified
Recording File was created.

c. If the Modified Recording File is not a Time Subset but either a Channel Subset
or both a Time and Channel Subset, then the step b attributes shall be changed
as defined. Also the original channels which are not included in the Recording
Subset File shall have the R-x\CHE-n Channel Enable attribute changed:
From: R-x\CHE-n:T;
To: R-x\CHE-n:F;

A comment attribute R-x\COM will be inserted directly after the changed
R-x\CHE-n attribute and shall contain the following:
original recording change - removed channel-n (where n represents the
Channel ID of the channel that was removed).
d. If the Modified Recording File is not a Time Subset but either a Channel
Superset or both a Time Subset and Channel Superset, then the step b
10-145

attributes shall be changed as defined. Also the channels added in the Modified
Recording File shall contain the required attribute IAW paragraph 10.11:
A comment attribute R-x\COM will be inserted directly after the added
channel R-x\CHE-n attribute and shall contain the following:
original recording change - additional channel-n (where n represents the
Channel ID of the channel that was added).
If the Modified Recording File contains filtered (removed packets or data)
or sanitized data (overwrite of data), then the step b attributes shall be
changed as defined. Also the channels which contain filtered or sanitized data
in the Modified Recording File shall also contain a comment attribute R-x\COM
inserted directly after the channel R-x\CHE-n attribute and shall contain the
following:
original recording change - filtered channel-n (where n represents the
Channel ID of the channel that was filtered).
10.11.2.2 Modified Recording File Restructuring. When a Modified Recording File is created
there will be alterations to original packets or possibly structure. Therefore:

a. All files shall reflect any sequence number, packet length, or checksum changes
in the appropriate Packet Header fields.
b. If enabled in the original recording Computer Generated Data, Format 3
Recording Index packets shall be recalculated to ensure correct information is
contained within the entries as they relate to the newly created Modified
Recording File.

10.11.3 Original Recording and Modified Recording File Extension. Upon data download
to a host computing platform, all Original Recording Files and/or Modified Recording Files shall
use the file extension *.ch10 (or *.c10 extension for use on systems with a 3 character extension
limit). The use of this standard extension will indicate that any Original Recording File and/or
Modified Recording File on a ground computing or storage platform shall be in compliance with
this paragraph 10.11 of this standard.

10.11.4 File Naming. Upon data download from the recorder or RMM to a host
computing platform, all Original Recording Files or Modified Recording Files shall use the
following structure and naming conventions unless host computing platform operating system
imposes naming length limits. In this case the directory and file names are to be truncated after
the last component that completely fits within the name length limit:
10-146

10.11.4.1 On-Board Recorder.

a. Data Recording Directory Name. Each directory block from a RMM to be
downloaded to a ground computing or storage platform shall use
paragraph 10.5, Table 10-2 VolName as the directory name where the Data
Files will be placed. The directory name shall use lower case alpha characters.
If the VolName is empty (0x00), a default name or user-defined name shall
be used. If used the default name shall be ch10dirnnn, where nnn is the
sequential directory block count.

b. Data File Name. Each Data File contained within a Directory Block on the
RMM to be downloaded will be placed in the Directory identified in paragraph
10.11.4.1.a and shall use the following naming convention. The data file name
shall use lower case alpha characters:
filennnn; where nnnn is the sequential RMM file count from each
Directory Block File Entry (must be 8 alpha-numeric characters).
Example: file0001, file0002, :file9999.

If available, File Create Date, File Create Time and File Close Time
from paragraph 10.5, Table 10-3, DDMMYYYY_HHMMSSss_HHMMSSss (8
numeric characters for File Create Date, 8 numeric characters for File Create
Time separated by an underscore ASCII character code 0x5F, and 8 numeric
characters for File Close Time). No spaces or other non-numeric characters
allowed). Example 02092004_21302731_21451505.

If the File Create Date, File Create Time and File Close Time from
paragraph 10.5, Table 10-3 values are not available and are filled with 0x2D,
then the system time from the host download platform will be used for File
Create Date and File Create Time (DDMMYYYY_HHMMSS). File Close
Time will not be used. File Close Time shall be replaced with sys_time.

A structure example follows:

\VolName\FileName_FileCreateDate_FileCreateTime_FileCloseTime
When VolName not empty example:
\<VolName>\file0001_02092004_21302731_21451505.ch10
When VolName empty default example:
\ch10dir001\file0001_02092004_21302731_21451505.ch10
When VolName empty user defined example:
\<User Defined>\file0001_02092004_21302731_21451505.ch10
When Date/Time not available (0x2D fill) example:
\file0001_02092004_213027_sys_time.ch10

10-147

The use of this standard recording and file naming convention will indicate
that any file on a ground computing or storage platform is in compliance with
this standard.

10.11.4.2 Ground Based Recorder.
a. Recording Directory Name. Each directory where the Data Files will be placed
shall use the naming convention \ch10dir_DDMMYYYY_nnn; where n is the
sequential number of Chapter 10 recording directories created on the
DDMMYYYY date. The directory name shall use lower case alpha characters.
b. Recording File Name. Each Data File contained within a Directory shall use the
following naming convention. The data file name shall use lower case alpha
characters:
filennnn; where nnnn is the sequential file count from each recording
(must be 8 alpha-numeric characters). Example file0001, file0002,
:file9999.
File Create Date, File Create Time and File Close Time shall use the
following naming convention DDMMYYYY_HHMMSSss_HHMMSSss (8
numeric characters for File Create Date, 8 numeric characters for File Create
Time separated by an underscore ASCII character code 0x5F, and 8 numeric
characters for File Close Time). No spaces or other non-numeric characters
allowed). Example 02092004_21302731_21451505.
A structure example follows:
\ch10dir_02092005_001\file0001_02092005_21302731_21451505.ch10
The use of this standard recording and file naming convention will indicate
that any file on a ground computing or storage platform is in compliance with
this standard.

10.11.5 Data Transfer File. In order to ensure the highest degree of interoperability for
transfer of IRIG-106 Chapter 10 Recorder or RMM contents, Original Recording Files or
Modified Recording Files between organizations the Data Transfer File Structure shall be used.
Essentially, a Data Transfer File contains all the same information and data that a recorder or
RMM would present at the interface albeit within a single binary structure on either tape or
random access devices. The Data Transfer File could also contain Original Recording Files or
Modified Recording Files from multiple recordings or dates.

Original Recording Files or Modified Recording Files downloaded to a
host computing platform and transferred as a single file shall follow
10.11.1 and 10.11.2.

10.11.5.1 Data Transfer File Structure Definition. The following describes Data Transfer File
Structure and media environments:
10-148

a. Tape Devices. A Data Transfer File on tape devices is treated essentially the
same as a recorder or RMM in that the directory structure and data contents are
as defined and organized in this standard. The Data Transfer File is a single
binary file containing a directory structure IAW 10.5 and a single or multiple
IRIG-106 Chapter 10 Original Recording Files or Modified Recording Files.
Only one Data Transfer File will be contained on a tape device media. The tape
block size shall be 32K (32,768) bytes.
- Logical Address 1 will contain a directory and file structure IAW
paragraph 10.5.2.
- The corresponding IRIG-106 Chapter 10 Original Recording Files or
Modified Recording Files will follow the directory structure in contiguous
bytes until the end of the Data Transfer File. The beginning of each IRIG-
106 Chapter 10 Original Recording File or Modified Recording File in the
Data Transfer File will begin at the byte offset contained in each File Entry
table File Start Address value.
b. Random Access Devices. A Data Transfer File on a random access device is
treated essentially the same as a recorder RMM in that the directory structure
and data contents are as defined and organized in this standard. The Data
Transfer File is a single binary file containing a directory structure IAW 10.5.2
and a single or multiple IRIG-106 Chapter 10 Original Recording Files or
Modified Recording Files. Multiple Data Transfer Files can be contained on a
random access device.
- The paragraph 10.5.2 directory structure within the Data Transfer File
begins at byte 0 and runs contiguously until the last file entry paragraph.
The next byte after the last file entry block shall be the first byte in the first
data file.
- The corresponding IRIG-106 Chapter 10 Original Recording Files or
Modified Recording Files will follow the directory structure in contiguous
bytes until the end of the Data Transfer File. The beginning of each IRIG-
106 Chapter 10 Original Recording File or Modified Recording File in the
Data Transfer File will begin at the byte offset contained in each File Entry
table File Start Address value.
-
10.11.5.2 Data Transfer File Extension. Upon creation, all IRIG 106 Chapter 10 compliant
Data Transfer Files not on Tape Devices shall use the file extension *.tf10 (or *.t10 extension
for use on systems with a 3 character extension limit). The use of this standard extension will
indicate that any Data Transfer File on a host computing or storage platform shall be in
compliance with paragraph 10.11.5 of this standard.

10.11.6 Recording Directory File. A binary recording directory file which is a byte-for-
byte copy of the RMM or Recorder directory structure presented at the interface. This file
should represent the contents of a RMM or recorder directory at the time of IRIG-106 Chapter 10
data download. The bytes in this file contain the byte-for-byte contents of the RMMs directory
blocks in the order the directory blocks are linked, using each blocks forward Link field.
10-149

10-150
10.11.6.1 Recording Directory File Extension. Upon creation, all IRIG 106 Chapter 10
compliant Recording Directory Files shall use the file extension *.df10 (or *.d10 extension for
use on systems with a 3 character extension limit). The use of this standard extension will
indicate that any Recording Directory file on a host computing or storage platform shall be in
compliance with paragraph 10.11.6 of this standard.
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix A, April 2009

APPENDIX A

FREQUENCY CONSIDERATIONS FOR TELEMETRY

Paragraph Title Page

1.0 Purpose............................................................................................................ A-1
2.0 Scope............................................................................................................... A-1
3.0 Authorization to Use a Telemetry System...................................................... A-3
4.0 Frequency Usage Guidance ............................................................................ A-4
5.0 Bandwidth....................................................................................................... A-8
6.0 Spectral Occupancy Limits........................................................................... A-15
7.0 Technical Characteristics of Digital Modulation Methods........................... A-18
8.0 FQPSK-B and FQPSK-JR Characteristics ................................................... A-19
9.0 SOQPSK-TG Characteristics........................................................................ A-22
10.0 Advanced Range Telemetry (ARTM) CPM Characteristics. ....................... A-23
11.0 PCM/FM....................................................................................................... A-24
12.0 Valid Center Frequencies Near Telemetry Band Edges ............................... A-25

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure A-1. Spectra of 10-Mb/s CPFSK, ARTM CPM, FQPSK-JR, SOQPSK-TG
signals. ............................................................................................................ A-4
Figure A-2. 5 Mb/s PCM/FM signals with 11 MHz center frequency separation. ............ A-6
Figure A-3. 10 Mb/s ARTM CPM signals with 9 MHz center frequency separation........ A-6
Figure A-4. RNRZ PCM/FM signal. ................................................................................ A-10
Figure A-5. Spectrum analyzer calibration of 0-dBc level............................................... A-11
Figure A-6. Bio PCM/PM signal...................................................................................... A-12
Figure A-7. FM/AM signal and Carsons Rule................................................................ A-12
Figure A-8. Typical receiver RLC IF filter response (-3 dB bandwidth = 1 MHz). ........ A-14
Figure A-9. RLC and SAW IF filters ............................................................................... A-15
Figure A-10. Filtered 5-Mb/s RNRZ PCM/FM signal and spectral mask. ........................ A-17
Figure A-11. Unfiltered 5-Mb/s RNRZ PCM/FM signal and spectral mask. .................. A-17
Figure A-12. Typical 5-Mb/s SOQPSK-TG signal and spectral mask. ............................. A-18
Figure A-13. Typical 5-Mb/s ARTM CPM signal and spectral mask. .............................. A-18
Figure A-14. OQPSK modulator. ....................................................................................... A-19
Figure A-15. I & Q constellation........................................................................................ A-19
Figure A-16. FQPSK wavelet eye diagram........................................................................ A-20
Figure A-17. FQPSK-B I & Q eye diagrams (at input to IQ modulator). ......................... A-20
Figure A-18. FQPSK-B vector diagram. ............................................................................ A-20
Figure A-19. 5 Mb/s FQPSK-JR spectrum with random input data and small (blue)
and large (red) modulator errors. .................................................................. A-21
Figure A-20. FQPSK-B spectrum with all 0s input and large modulator errors.............. A-21
Figure A-21. FQPSK-JR BEP vs. E
b
/N
0
. ........................................................................... A-22
Figure A-22. Measured SOQPSK-TG phase trajectory ..................................................... A-22
Figure A-23. SOQPSK-TG Power Spectrum (5 Mb/s). ..................................................... A-23

ii
Figure A-24. BEP versus E
b
/N
o
performance of 5 Mb/s SOQPSK-TG. ............................ A-23
Figure A-25. Power spectrum of 5 Mb/s ARTM CPM. ..................................................... A-23
b
/N
o
performance of 5 Mb/s ARTM CPM. ............................. A-24
Figure A-27. Power spectrum of 5 Mb/s PCM/FM signal. ................................................ A-24
b
/N
o
performance of 5 Mb/s PCM/FM with multi-symbol
bit detector and three single symbol receivers/detectors. ............................. A-25
Figure A-29. Spectral Masks at -25 dBm. .......................................................................... A-26
Figure A-30. Bit Rate vs. Band edge Back-off. ................................................................. A-27
Figure A-31. Valid center frequency, band edge back-off. ................................................ A-28

LIST OF TABLES

Table A-1. Coefficients for Minimum Frequency Separation Calculation....................... A-5
Table A-2. 99 Percent Power Bandwidths for Various Digital Modulation Methods .... A-10
Table A-3. Characteristics of Various Modulation Methods. ......................................... A-18
Table A-4. L-Band Frequency Range (10 W, 5 Mbps)................................................... A-26


APPENDIX A
FREQUENCY CONSIDERATIONS FOR TELEMETRY

1.0 Purpose
This appendix was prepared with the cooperation and assistance of the Range
Commanders Council (RCC) Frequency Management Group (FMG). This appendix provides
guidance to telemetry users for the most effective use of the ultra high frequency (UHF)
telemetry bands, 1435 to 1535 MHz, 2200 to 2290 MHz, and 2310 to 2390 MHz. Coordination
with the frequency managers of the applicable test ranges and operating areas is recommended
before a specific frequency band is selected for a given application. Government users should
coordinate with the appropriate Area Frequency Coordinator and commercial users should
coordinate with the Aerospace and Flight Test Radio Coordinating Council (AFTRCC). A list of
the points of contact can be found in the National Telecommunications and Information
Administration (NTIA) Manual of Regulations and Procedures for Federal Radio Frequency
Management. The manual is at http://www.ntia.doc.gov/osmhome/redbook/redbook.html.

2.0 Scope

This appendix is to be used as a guide by users of telemetry frequencies at Department of
Defense (DoD)-related test ranges and contractor facilities. The goal of frequency management
is to encourage maximal use and minimal interference among telemetry users and between
telemetry users and other users of the electromagnetic spectrum.

2.1 Definitions. The following terminology is used in this appendix.

Allocation (of a Frequency Band). Entry of a frequency band into the Table of Frequency
Allocations
1
for use by one or more radio communication services or the radio astronomy service
under specified conditions.

Assignment (of a Radio Frequency or Radio Frequency Channel). Authorization given by an
administration for a radio station to use a radio frequency or radio frequency channel under
specified conditions.

Authorization. Permission to use a radio frequency or radio frequency channel under specified
conditions

1
The definitions of the radio services that can be operated within certain frequency bands contained in the radio
regulations as agreed to by the member nations of the International Telecommunications Union. This table is
maintained in the United States by the Federal Communications Commission and the NTIA.
A-1

Certification. The Military Communications-Electronics Boards (MCEB) process of verifying
that a proposed system complies with the appropriate rules, regulations, and technical standards.

J/F 12 Number. The identification number assigned to a system by the MCEB after the
Application for Equipment Frequency Allocation (DD Form 1494) is approved; for example, J/F
12/6309 (sometimes called the J-12 number).

Resolution Bandwidth. The -3 dB bandwidth of the measurement device.

2.2 Modulation methods.

2.2.1 Traditional Modulation Methods. The traditional modulation methods for aeronautical
telemetry are Frequency Modulation (FM) and Phase Modulation (PM). Pulse Code Modulation
(PCM)/Frequency Modulation (FM) has been the most popular telemetry modulation since
around 1970. The PCM/FM method could also be called filtered Continuous Phase Frequency
Shift Keying (CPFSK). The RF signal is typically generated by filtering the baseband non-
return-to-zero-level (NRZ-L) signal and then frequency modulating a voltage-controlled
oscillator (VCO). The optimum peak deviation is 0.35 times the bit rate and a good choice for a
premodulation filter is a multi-pole linear phase filter with bandwidth equal to 0.7 times the bit
rate. Frequency and phase modulation have a variety of desirable features but may not provide
the required bandwidth efficiency, especially for higher bit rates.

2.2.2 Improved Bandwidth Efficiency. When better bandwidth efficiency is required, the
standard methods for digital signal transmission are the Feher Patented Quadrature Phase Shift
Keying (FQPSK-B and FQPSK-JR), the Shaped Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
(SOQPSK-TG), and the Advanced Range Telemetry (ARTM) Continuous Phase Modulation
(CPM). Each of these methods offers constant, or nearly constant, envelope characteristics and
are compatible with non-linear amplifiers with minimal spectral regrowth and minimal
degradation of detection efficiency. The first three methods (FQPSK-B, FQPSK-JR, and
SOQPSK-TG) are interoperable and require the use of the differential encoder described in
Chapter 2, paragraph 2.4.3.1.1. Additional information on this differential encoder is contained
in Appendix M. All of these bandwidth-efficient modulation methods require the data to be
randomized.

2.3 Other Notations. The following notations are used in this appendix. Other references
may define these terms slightly differently.

a. B99% -Bandwidth containing 99 percent of the total power.
b. B-25dBm -Bandwidth containing all components larger than -25 dBm.
c. B-60dBc -Bandwidth containing all components larger than the power
level that is 60 dB below the unmodulated carrier power.
d. dBc -Decibels relative to the power level of the unmodulated carrier.
e. fc -Assigned center frequency.
A-2

3.0 Authorization to Use a Telemetry System

All radio frequency (RF) emitting devices must have approval to operate in the United
States and Possessions (US&P) via a frequency assignment unless granted an exemption by the
national authority. The NTIA is the President's designated national authority and spectrum
manager. The NTIA manages and controls the use of RF spectrum by federal agencies in US&P
territory. Obtaining a frequency assignment involves the two-step process of obtaining an RF
spectrum support certification of major RF systems design, followed by an operational frequency
assignment to the RF system user. These steps are discussed below.

3.1 RF Spectrum Support Certification. All major RF systems used by federal agencies must
be submitted to the NTIA, via the Interdepartmental Radio Advisory Committee (IRAC), for
system review and spectrum support certification prior to committing funds for
acquisition/procurement. During the system review process, compliance with applicable RF
standards, and RF allocation tables, rules, and regulations is checked. For Department of
Defense (DoD) agencies, and for support of DoD contracts, this is accomplished via the
submission of a DD Form 1494 to the MCEB. Noncompliance with standards, the tables, rules,
or regulations can result in denial of support, limited support, or support on an unprotected non-
priority basis. All RF users must obtain frequency assignments for any RF system (even if not
considered major). This assignment is accomplished by submission of frequency use proposals
through the appropriate frequency management offices. Frequency assignments may not be
granted for major systems that have not obtained spectrum support certification.

3.1.1 Frequency Allocation. As stated before, telemetry systems must normally operate within
the frequency bands designated for their use in the National Table of Frequency Allocations.
With sufficient justification, use of other bands may at times be permitted, but the certification
process is much more difficult, and the outcome is uncertain. Even if certification is granted on
a noninterference basis to other users, the frequency manager is often unable to grant
assignments because of local users who will get interference.

3.1.1.1 Telemetry Bands. Air and space-to-ground telemetering is allocated in the UHF bands
1435 to 1535, 2200 to 2290, and 2310 to 2390 MHz, commonly known as the lower-L band, the
lower-S band, and the upper-S band. Other mobile bands, such as 1755-1850 MHz, can also be
used at many test ranges. Since these other bands are not considered a standard telemetry band
per this document, potential users must coordinate, in advance, with the individual range(s) and
ensure use of this band can be supported at the subject range(s) and that their technical
requirements will be met.

3.1.1.2 Very High Frequency (VHF) Telemetry. The VHF band, 216-265 MHz, was used for
telemetry operations in the past. Telemetry bands were moved to the UHF bands as of
1 January 1970 to prevent interference to critical government land mobile and military tactical
communications. Telemetry operation in this band is strongly discouraged and is considered
only on an exceptional case-by-case basis.

A-3

3.1.2 Technical Standards. The MCEB and the NTIA review proposed telemetry systems for
compliance with applicable technical standards. For the UHF telemetry bands, the current
revisions of the following standards are considered applicable:

a. RCC Document IRIG 106, Telemetry Standards.
b. MIL-STD-461, Requirements for the Control of Electromagnetic Interference
Emissions and Susceptibility.
c. Manual of Regulations and Procedures for Federal Radio Frequency Management
(NTIA).

Applications for certification are also thoroughly checked in many other ways including
necessary and occupied bandwidths, modulation characteristics, reasonableness of output power,
correlation between output power and amplifier type, and antenna type and characteristics. The
associated receiver normally must be specified or referenced. The characteristics of the receiver
are also verified.

3.2 Frequency Authorization. Spectrum certification of a telemetry system verifies that the
system meets the technical requirements for successful operation in the electromagnetic
environment. However, a user is not permitted to radiate with the telemetry system before
requesting and receiving a specific frequency assignment. The assignment process considers
when, where, and how the user plans to radiate. Use of the assignments is tightly scheduled by
and among the individual ranges to make the most efficient use of the limited telemetry radio
frequency (RF) spectrum and to ensure that one user does not interfere with other users.

4.0 Frequency Usage Guidance

Frequency usage is controlled by scheduling in the areas where the tests will be
conducted. The following recommendations are based on good engineering practice for such
usage and it is assumed that the occupied bandwidth fits within the telemetry band in all cases.

4.1 Minimum Frequency Separation.
The minimum required frequency
separation can be calculated using the
formula:

F
0
= a
s
*R
s
+ a
i
*R
i
(A-1)
where:
F
0
= the minimum required center
frequency separation in MHz
R
s
=bit rate of desired signal in Mb/s
R
i
=bit rate of interfering signal in
Mb/s
Figure A-1. Spectra of 10-Mb/s CPFSK,
ARTM CPM, FQPSK-JR, SOQPSK-TG
signals.
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
P
o
w
e
r

(
d
B
c
)
-2 -1 0 1 2
Normalized Frequency (bit rate = 1)
PCM/FM ARTM CPM FQPSK-JR SOQPSK-TG
10 Mb/s
a
s
is determined by the desired signal type
and receiving equipment (Table A-1).
A-4

TABLE A-1. COEFFICIENTS FOR MINIMUM FREQUENCY SEPARATION
CALCULATION
Modulation Type a
s
a
i

NRZ PCM/FM 1.0* for receivers with RLC final Intermediate
Frequency (IF) filters
0.7 for receivers with Surface Acoustic Wave (SAW) or
digital IF filters
0.5 with multi-symbol detectors (or equivalent devices)
1.2
FQPSK-B, FQPSK-JR,
SOQPSK-TG
0.45 0.65
ARTM CPM 0.35 0.5
*The minimum frequency separation for typical receivers with Resistor-Inductor-Capacitor (RLC) final IF filters
and NRZ-L PCM/FM signals is the larger of 1.5 times the actual IF 3 dB bandwidth and the value calculated
using the equation above.

The minimum spacing needs to be calculated for signal 1 as the desired signal and
signal 2 as the interferer and vice versa. Note that the values for a
i
match the 57 dBc points for
the four modulation methods shown in Figure A-1 quite closely. It is not surprising that the
required frequency spacing from the interferer is directly related to the power spectrum of the
interfering signal. The values for a
s
are a function of the effective detection filter bandwidths
and the co-channel interference resistance of the desired signal modulation method and detector.
The values for a
s
and a
i
are slightly conservative for most cases and assume the receiver being
used does not have spurious responses that cause additional interference. This section was
completely rewritten from previous editions of the Telemetry Standards because addition of new
modulation methods and new receiving equipment rendered the old method obsolete. The values
of a
s
and a
i
were determined empirically from the results of extensive adjacent channel
interference testing. The main assumptions are as follows:

a. The NRZ PCM/FM signals are assumed to be premodulation filtered with a multi-
pole filter with -3 dB point of 0.7 times the bit rate and the peak deviation is assumed
to be approximately 0.35 times the bit rate.
b. The receiver IF filter is assumed to be no wider than 1.5 times the bit rate and
provides at least 6 dB of attenuation of the interfering signal.
c. The interfering signal is assumed to be no more than 20 dB stronger than the desired
signal.
d. The receiver is assumed to be operating in linear mode; no significant
intermodulation products or spurious responses are present.
A-5

Examples are shown below:

5 Mb/s PCM/FM and 0.8 Mb/s PCM/FM using a receiver with 6 MHz IF bandwidth for the 5 Mb/s
signal (this receiver has RLC IF filters).
1.0*5 + 1.2*0.8 = 5.96 MHz, 1.0*.8 + 1.2*5 = 6.8 MHz, 1.5*6= 9.0 MHz;
the largest value is 9 MHz and the frequencies are assigned in 1 MHz steps so the minimum
spacing is 9 MHz

5 Mb/s PCM/FM and 5 Mb/s PCM/FM using a receiver with 6 MHz IF bandwidth
for the 5 Mb/s signals (these receivers have RLC IF filters; see Figure A-2).
1.0*5 + 1.2*5 = 11 MHz, 1.5*6= 9.0 MHz;
the larger value is 11 MHz and the frequencies are assigned in 1 MHz steps so the minimum
spacing is 11 MHz.

5 Mb/s PCM/FM and 5 Mb/s PCM/FM using a receiver with 6 MHz IF bandwidth for the 5 Mb/s
signal (this receiver has RLC IF filters but a multi-symbol detector is used)
0.5*5 + 1.2*5 = 8.5 MHz;
the frequencies are assigned in 1 MHz steps so the minimum spacing is 9 MHz.

5 Mb/s PCM/FM and 5 Mb/s SOQPSK-TG using a receiver with 6 MHz IF bandwidth for the 5 Mb/s
signals (this receiver has RLC IF filters but a multi-symbol detector is used)
0.5*5 + 0.65*5 = 5.75 MHz, 0.45*5 + 1.2*5 = 8.25 MHz;
the largest value is 8.25 MHz and the frequencies are assigned in 1 MHz steps so the minimum
spacing is 9 MHz.

5 Mb/s FQPSK-B and 5 Mb/s ARTM CPM using a receiver with 6 MHz IF bandwidth for the 5 Mb/s
signals
0.45*5 + 0.5*5 = 4.75 MHz 0.35*5 + 0.7*5 = 5.25 MHz;
the largest value is 5.25 MHz and the frequencies are assigned in 1 MHz steps so the minimum
spacing is 6 MHz.

10 Mb/s ARTM CPM and 10 Mb/s ARTM CPM (see Figure A-3)
0.35*10 + 0.5*10 = 8.5 MHz;

Figure A-2. 5 Mb/s PCM/FM signals with 11
MHz center frequency separation.

Figure A-3. 10 Mb/s ARTM CPM signals
with 9 MHz center frequency separation
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
P
o
w
e
r

(
d
B
c
)
1440.5 1450.5 1460.5 1470.5
Frequency (MHz)
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
P
o
w
e
r

(
d
B
c
)
1440.5 1450.5 1460.5 1470.5
Frequency (MHz)
A-6

4.2 Alternative method for determining frequency separation. In some cases it may be
desirable to set aside a bandwidth for each signal independent of other signals. If one uses a
bandwidth factor of 2*a
i
for each signal, then one gets a separation of F
0
= a
i
*R
s
+ a
i
*R
i
and
one gets a more conservative (wider) separation than one would using F
0
= a
s
*R
s
+ a
i
*R
i

because the value of a
i
is bigger than the value of a
s
for all of these modulation methods. One
problem with this approach is that it does not include receiver or detector characteristics and
therefore the calculated frequency separations are often different from those calculated using the
formula in section 4.1.

Examples of frequency separation are shown below:

5 Mb/s PCM/FM and 0.8 Mb/s PCM/FM using a receiver with 6 MHz IF bandwidth for the
5 Mb/s signal (this receiver has RLC IF filters)
1.2*5 + 1.2*0.8 = 6.96 MHz;

5 Mb/s PCM/FM and 5 Mb/s PCM/FM using a receiver with 6 MHz IF bandwidth for the 5
Mb/s signals (these receivers have RLC IF filters)
1.2*5 + 1.2*5 = 12 MHz;

5 Mb/s PCM/FM and 5 Mb/s PCM/FM using a receiver with 6 MHz IF bandwidth for the
5 Mb/s signal (this receiver has RLC IF filters but a multi-symbol detector is used)
1.2*5 + 1.2*5 = 12 MHz;

5 Mb/s PCM/FM and 5 Mb/s SOQPSK-TG using a receiver with 6 MHz IF bandwidth for the
5 Mb/s signals (this receiver has RLC IF filters but a multi-symbol detector is used)
1.2*5 + 0.65*5 = 9.25 MHz;

5 Mb/s FQPSK-B and 5 Mb/s ARTM CPM using a receiver with 6 MHz IF bandwidth for the
5 Mb/s signals
0.7*5 + 0.5*5 = 6 MHz;

10 Mb/s ARTM CPM and 10 Mb/s ARTM CPM
0.5*10 + 0.5*10 = 10 MHz;

4.3 Geographical Separation. Geographical separation can be used to further reduce the
probability of interference from adjacent signals.

4.4 Multicarrier Operation. If two transmitters are operated simultaneously and sent or received
through the same antenna system, interference due to intermodulation is likely at
(2f
1
- f
2
) and (2f
2
-

f
1
). Between three transmitters, the two-frequency possibilities exist, but
intermodulation products may exist as well at (f
1
+ f
2
- f
3
), (f
1
+ f
3
- f
2
), and (f
2
+ f
3
- f
1
), where f
1
, f
2
,
A-7

and f
3
represent the output frequencies of the transmitters. Intermodulation products can arise from
nonlinearities in the transmitter output circuitry that cause mixing products between a transmitter
output signal and the fundamental signal coming from nearby transmitters. Intermodulation
products also can arise from nonlinearities in the antenna systems. The generation of
intermodulation products is inevitable, but the effects are generally of concern only when such
products exceed -25 dBm. The general rule for avoiding third-order intermodulation interference is
that in any group of transmitter frequencies, the separation between any pair of frequencies should
not be equal to the separation between any other pair of frequencies. Because individual signals
have sidebands, it should be noted that intermodulation products have sidebands spectrally wider
than the sidebands of the individual signals that caused them.

4.5 Transmitter Antenna System Emission Testing. Radiated tests will be made in lieu of
transmitter output tests only when the transmitter is inaccessible. Radiated tests may still be
required if the antenna is intended to be part of the filtering of spurious products from the
transmitter or is suspected of generating spurious products by itself or in interaction with the
transmitter and feed lines. These tests should be made with normal modulation.

5.0 Bandwidth

The definitions of bandwidth in this section are universally applicable. The limits shown
here are applicable for telemetry operations in the telemetry bands 1435 to 1535, 2200 to 2290,
and 2310 to 2390 MHz. For the purposes of telemetry signal spectral occupancy, the bandwidths
used are the 99-percent power bandwidth and the -25 dBm bandwidth. A power level of
25 dBm is exactly equivalent to an attenuation of the transmitter power by 55 + 10log(P) dB
where P is the transmitter power expressed in watts. How bandwidth is actually measured and
what the limits are, expressed in terms of that measuring system, are detailed in the following
paragraphs.

5.1 Concept. The term "bandwidth" has an exact meaning in situations where an amplitude
modulation (AM), double sideband (DSB), or single sideband (SSB) signal is produced with a
band-limited modulating signal. In systems employing frequency modulation (FM) or phase
modulation (PM), or any modulation system where the modulating signal is not band limited,
bandwidth is infinite with energy extending toward zero and infinite frequency falling off from
the peak value in some exponential fashion. In this more general case, bandwidth is defined as
the band of frequencies in which most of the signal's energy is contained. The definition of
"most" is imprecise. The following terms are applied to bandwidth.

5.1.1 Authorized Bandwidth. For purposes of this document, the authorized bandwidth is the
necessary bandwidth required for transmission and reception of intelligence and does not include
allowance for transmitter drift or Doppler shift.

5.1.2 Occupied Bandwidth. The width of a frequency band such that below the lower and above
the upper frequency limits, the mean powers emitted are each equal to a specified percentage of the
total mean power of a given emission. Unless otherwise specified by the International
Telecommunication Union (ITU) for the appropriate class of emission, the specified percentage
shall be 0.5 percent. The occupied bandwidth is also called the 99-percent power bandwidth.

A-8

5.1.3 Necessary Bandwidth For a Given Class of Emission. For a given class of emission, the
width of the frequency band which is just sufficient to ensure the transmission of information at
the rate and with the quality required under specified conditions.

5.1.3.1 The NTIA Manual of Regulations and Procedures for Federal Radio Frequency
Management. This manual states that "All reasonable effort shall be made in equipment design
and operation by Government agencies to maintain the occupied bandwidth of the emission of
any authorized transmission as closely to the necessary bandwidth as is reasonably practicable."

5.1.3.2 Necessary Bandwidth (DD Form 1494). The necessary bandwidth is part of the
emission designator on the DD Form 1494. For telemetry purposes, the necessary bandwidth can
be calculated using the equations shown below. Equations for other modulation methods are
contained in the NTIA Manual of Regulations and Procedures for Federal Radio Frequency
Management. The necessary bandwidth as calculated below is a reasonable bandwidth to use
for telemetry frequency scheduling.

Filtered non-return-to-zero (NRZ) pulse code modulatiom/frequency modulation (PCM/FM)
B
n
= 2.4Xbit rate with h=0.7 and premodulation filter bandwidth = 0.7 times bit rate.
Example: PCM/FM modulation used to send 5 megabits per second using frequency
modulation with 2 signaling states and 1.75 MHz peak deviation; bit rate=5X10
6
;
necessary bandwidth (B
n
) = 12 MHz.

Constant envelope offset quadrature phase shift keying; Fehers patented quadrature phase shift
keying (FQPSK-B, FQPSK-JR) or shaped offset quadrature phase shift keying (SOQPSK-TG)
B
n
= 1.3Xbit rate. Example: SOPQSK-TG modulation used to send 5 megabits per
second using 4 signaling states; bit rate=5X10
6
; B
n
= 6.5 MHz.

Advanced Range Telemetry (ARTM) Continuous Phase Modulation (CPM)
B
n
= bit rate with h=4/16 and 5/16 on alternating symbols; Digital modulation used to
send 5 megabits per second using frequency modulation with 4 signaling states and with
alternating modulation index each symbol; bit rate=5X10
6
;B
n
= 5 MHz.

5.1.4 Received (or Receiver) Bandwidth. The received bandwidth is usually the -3 dB
bandwidth of the receiver intermediate frequency (IF) section.

5.2 Bandwidth Estimation and Measurement. Various methods are used to estimate or
measure the bandwidth of a signal that is not band limited. The bandwidth measurements are
performed using a spectrum analyzer (or equivalent device) with the following settings: 30-kHz
resolution bandwidth, 300-Hz video bandwidth, and no max hold detector or averaging. These
settings are different than those in earlier versions of the Telemetry Standards. The settings were
changed to get more consistent results across a variety of bit rates, modulation methods, and
spectrum analyzers. The most common measurement and estimation methods are described in the
following paragraphs.

5.2.1 99-Percent Power Bandwidth. This bandwidth contains 99 percent of the total power.
The 99-percent power bandwidth is typically measured using a spectrum analyzer or estimated
A-9

using equations for the modulation type and bit rate used. If the two points that define the edges
of the band are not symmetrical about the assigned center frequency, their actual frequencies and
difference should be noted. The 99-percent power band edges of randomized NRZ (RNRZ)
PCM/FM signals are shown in Figure A-4 below. Table A-2 presents the 99-percent power
bandwidth for several digital modulation methods as a function of the bit rate (R).

TABLE A-2. 99 PERCENT POWER BANDWIDTHS FOR VARIOUS DIGITAL
MODULATION METHODS
DESCRIPTION 99% POWER BANDWIDTH
NRZ PCM/FM, premod filter BW=0.7R, Af=0.35R 1.16 R
NRZ PCM/FM, no premod filter, Af=0.25R 1.18 R
NRZ PCM/FM, premod filter BW=0.7R, Af=0.40R 1.57 R
Minimum shift keying (MSK), no filter 1.18 R
FQPSK-B, FQPSK-JR or SOQPSK-TG 0.78 R
ARTM CPM 0.56 R

5.2.2 -25 dBm Bandwidth. The -25 dBm bandwidth
is the bandwidth containing all components larger than
-25 dBm. A power level of 25 dBm is exactly
equivalent to an attenuation of the transmitter power
by 55 + 10log(P) dB where P is the transmitter power
expressed in watts. The -25 dBm bandwidth limits are
shown in Figure A-4. The 25 dBm bandwidth is
primarily a function of the modulation method,
transmitter power, and bit rate. The transmitter design
and construction techniques also strongly influence the
25 dBm andwidth. With a bit rate of 5 Mb/s and a
transmitter power of 5 watts the 25 dBm bandwidth
of an NRZ PCM/FM system with near optimum
parameter settings is about 13.3 MHz, while the 25 dBm bandwidth of an equivalent FQPSK-B
system is about 7.5 MHz, and the 25 dBm bandwidth of an equivalent ARTM CPM system is
about 5.8 MHz.

Figure A-4. RNRZ PCM/FM signal.

A-10

5.2.3 Other Bandwidth Measurement Methods. The methods discussed above are the standard
methods for measuring the bandwidth of telemetry signals. The following methods are also
sometimes used to measure or to estimate the bandwidth of telemetry signals.

5.2.3.1 Below Unmodulated Carrier. This method measures the power spectrum with respect to the
unmodulated carrier power. To calibrate the measured spectrum on a spectrum analyzer, the
unmodulated carrier power must be known. This power level is the 0-dB reference (commonly set
to the top of the display). In AM systems, the carrier power never changes; in FM and PM
systems, the carrier power is a function of the modulating signal. Therefore, a method to estimate
the unmodulated carrier power is required if the modulation cannot be turned off. For most
practical angle modulated systems, the total carrier power at the spectrum analyzer input can be
found by setting the spectrum analyzer's resolution and video bandwidths to their widest settings,
setting the analyzer output to max hold, and allowing the analyzer to make several sweeps (see
Figure A-3 above). The maximum value of this trace will be a good approximation of the
unmodulated carrier level. Figure A-5 shows the spectrum of a 5-Mb/s RNRZ PCM/FM signal
measured using the standard spectrum analyzer settings discussed previously and the spectrum
measured using 3-MHz resolution, video bandwidths, and max hold. The peak of the spectrum
measured with the latter conditions is very close to 0-dBc and can be used to estimate the
unmodulated carrier power (0-dBc) in the presence of frequency or phase modulation. In practice,
the 0-dBc calibration would be performed first, and the display settings would then be adjusted to
use the peak of the curve as the reference level (0-dBc level) to calibrate the spectrum measured
using the standard spectrum analyzer settings. With the spectrum analyzer set for a specific
resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, and detector type, the bandwidth is taken as the distance
between the two points outside of which the spectrum is thereafter some number (say, 60 dB)
below the unmodulated carrier power determined above. The -60 dBc bandwidth for the 5-Mb/s
signal shown in Figure A-5 is approximately 13 MHz.

Figure A-5. Spectrum analyzer calibration
of 0-dBc level
The -60 dBc bandwidth of a random NRZ
PCM/FM signal with a peak deviation of 0.35R, a
four-pole premodulation filter with -3 dB corner
at 0.7R, and a bit rate greater than or equal to 1
Mb/s can be approximated by

B
-60dBc
= {2.78 - 0.3 x log
10
(R)} x R (A-3)

where B is in MHz and R is in Mb/s.

Thus the -60 dBc bandwidth of a 5-Mb/s
RNRZ signal under these conditions would be
approximately 12.85 MHz. The -60 dBc
bandwidth will be greater if peak deviation is
increased or the number of filter poles is
decreased.
A-11

5.2.3.2 Below Peak. This method is not recommended
for measuring the bandwidth of telemetry signals.
The modulated peak method, the least accurate
measurement method, measures between points
where the spectrum is thereafter XX dB below the
level of the highest point on the modulated
spectrum. Figure A-6 shows the radio frequency
spectrum of a 400-kb/s Bio-L PCM/PM signal
with a peak deviation of 75 and a pre-modulation
filter bandwidth of 800 kHz. The largest peak h
a power level of -7 dBc. In comparison, the
largest peak in Figure
as
A-5 had a power level of
-22 dBc. This 15-dB difference would skew a
bandwidth comparison that used the peak level in
the measured spectrum as a common reference
point. In the absence of an unmodulated carrier to use for calibration, the below peak
measurement is often (erroneously) used and described as a below unmodulated carrier
measurement. Using max hold exacerbates this effect still further. In all instances the
bandwidth is overstated, but the amount varies.

Figure A-6. Bio PCM/PM signal

5.2.3.3 Carson's Rule. Carson's Rule is a
method to estimate the bandwidth of an FM
subcarrier system. Carson's Rule states that

B = 2 x (Af + f
max
) (A-4)

where B is the bandwidth, Af is the peak
deviation of the carrier frequency, and f
max
is
the highest frequency in the modulating
signal. Figure A-7 shows the spectrum that
results when a 12-channel constant
bandwidth multiplex with 6-dB/octave
pre-emphasis frequency modulates an FM
transmitter. The 99-percent power
bandwidth and the bandwidth calculated
using Carsons Rule are also shown. Carson's Rule will estimate a value greater than the 99-
percent power bandwidth if little of the carrier deviation

Figure A-7. FM/AM signal and Carsons Rule
is due to high-frequency energy in the
modulating signal.
A-12

5.2.4 Spectral Equations. The following equations can be used to calculate the RF spectra for
several digital modulation methods with unfiltered waveforms.
2, 3,

4
These equations can be
modified to include the effects of filtering.
5,

6

- Random NRZ PCM/FM (valid when D=integer, D = 0.5 gives MSK spectrum)

( )
Q < D ,
D + X Dcos 2 - 1
X - D
)
X
-
D
(
D
R
B
4
= S(f)
2
2
2 2
2
SA
t
t t t
t t
t
cos
cos
cos
cos cos
|
|
.
|
\
|
(A-5)

- Random NRZ PSK

|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
2
X
2
X

R
B
= S(f)
2
2
SA
t
t
sin

(A-6)

- Random NRZ QPSK and OQPSK

( )
( ) X
X

R
2B
= S(f)
2
2
SA
t
t
sin
(A-7)

- Random Bio PCM/FM

} ) {(
sin
sin sin
nR f f
2
)
D
-
X
(
)
2
D
( D
+
4
D) + (X
4
D) + (X

4
D) - (X
4
D) - (X

2
D
4R
B
= S(f) c
2 2
2
2
SA

|
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
o
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
(A-8)

2
I. Korn, Digital Communications, New York, Van Nostrand, 1985.
3
M. G. Pelchat, "The Autocorrelation Function and Power Spectrum of PCM/FM with Random Binary Modulating
Waveforms," IEEE Transactions, Vol. SET-10, No. 1, pp. 39-44, March 1964.
4
W. M. Tey, and T. T. Tjhung, "Characteristics of Manchester-Coded FSK," IEEE Transactions on
Communications, Vol. COM-27, pp. 209-216, January 1979.
5
A. D. Watt, V. J. Zurick, and R. M. Coon, "Reduction of Adjacent-Channel Interference Components from
Frequency-Shift-Keyed Carriers," IRE Transactions on Communication Systems, Vol. CS-6, pp. 39-47, December
1958.
6
E. L. Law, "RF Spectral Characteristics of Random PCM/FM and PSK Signals,"International Telemetering
Conference Proceedings, pp. 71-80, 1991.
A-13

- Random Bio PCM/PM

2
, f (f ) ( +
4
X
4
X
R
) (
B
= S(f) c
2
2
4
2
SA
t
| o |
t
t
|
s
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
)
cos
sin
sin

(A-9)

where

S(f) = power spectrum (dBc) at frequency f
B
SA
= spectrum analyzer resolution bandwidth*
R = bit rate
D = 2Af/R
X = 2(f-f
c
)/R
Af = peak deviation
| = peak phase deviation in radians
f
c
= carrier frequency
o = Dirac delta function
n = 0, 1, 2, .
Q = quantity related to narrow band spectral peaking when D~1, 2, 3, ...
Q ~ 0.99 for B
SA
= 0.003 R, Q ~ 0.9 for B
SA
= 0.03 R

*The spectrum analyzer resolution bandwidth term was added to the original equations.

5.2.5 Receiver Bandwidth. Receiver
predetection bandwidth is typically defined as the
points where the response to the carrier before
demodulation is -3 dB from the center frequency
response. The carrier bandwidth response of the
receiver is, or is intended to be, symmetrical about
the carrier in most instances. Figure A-8 shows
the response of a typical older generation
telemetry receiver with RLC IF filters and a
1 MHz IF bandwidth selected. Outside the stated
bandwidth, the response usually falls fairly rapidly
with the response often 20 dB or more below the
passband response at 1.5 to 2 times the passband
response.
Figure A-8. Typical receiver RLC IF
filter response (-3 dB bandwidth =
1 MHz).
A-14

-30
-27
-24
-21
-18
-15
-12
-9
-6
-3
0
3
P
o
w
e
r

(
d
B
)
60 65 70 75 80
Frequency (MHz)
RLC SAW
Figure A-9 shows an overlay of an RLC
IF filter and a surface acoustic wave (SAW) filter.
Note that the SAW filter rolls off much more rapidly
than the RLC filter. The rapid falloff outside the
passband helps reduce interference from nearby
channels and has minimal effect on data.

Figure A-9. RLC and SAW IF filters

5.2.6 Receiver Noise Bandwidth. For the purpose of calculating noise in the receiver, the
bandwidth must be integrated over the actual shape of the IF, which, in general, is not a
square-sided function. Typically, the value used for noise power calculations is the -3 dB
bandwidth of the receiver.

5.3 Symmetry. Many modulation methods produce a spectrum that is asymmetrical with
respect to the carrier frequency. Exceptions include FM/FM systems, randomized NRZ
PCM/FM systems, and randomized FQPSK, SOQPSK-TG, and ARTM CPM systems. The most
extreme case of asymmetry is due to single-sideband transmission, which places the carrier
frequency at one edge of the occupied spectrum. If the spectrum is not symmetrical about the
band center, the bandwidth and the extent of asymmetry must be noted for frequency
management purposes.

5.4 FM Transmitters (ac coupled). The ac-coupled FM transmitters should not be used to
transmit NRZ signals unless the signals to be transmitted are randomized because changes in the
ratio of ones to zeros will increase the occupied bandwidth and may degrade the bit error
rate. When ac-coupled transmitters are used with randomized NRZ signals, it is recommended
that the lower -3 dB frequency response of the transmitter be no greater than the bit rate divided
by 4000. For example, if a randomized 1-Mb/s NRZ signal is being transmitted, the lower -3 dB
frequency response of the transmitter should be no larger than 250 Hz.

6.0 Spectral Occupancy Limits

Telemetry applications covered by this standard shall use 99-percent power bandwidth to
define occupied bandwidth and -25 dBm bandwidth as the primary measure of spectral
efficiency. The spectra are assumed symmetrical about the center frequency unless otherwise
specified. The primary reason for controlling the spectral occupancy is to control adjacent
channel interference, thereby allowing more users to be packed into a given amount of frequency
spectrum. The adjacent channel interference is determined by the spectra of the signals and the
filter characteristics of the receiver.
A-15

6.1 Spectral Mask. One common method of describing the spectral occupancy limits is a
spectral mask. The aeronautical telemetry spectral mask is described below. Note that the mask
in this standard is different than the masks contained in the earlier versions of the Telemetry
Standards. All spectral components larger than (55 + 10log(P)) dBc, (i.e. larger than
-25 dBm) at the transmitter output must be within the spectral mask calculated using the
following equation:

( )
m
R
f f f f R K f M c c > + = ; log 100 log 90
(A-10)

where

M(f) = power (dBc) at frequency f (MHz)
K = -20 for analog signals
K = -28 for binary signals
K = -61 for FQPSK-B, FQPSK-JR, SOQPSK-TG
K = -73 for ARTM CPM
f
c
= transmitter center frequency (MHz)
R = bit rate (Mb/s) for digital signals or
( for analog FM signals )(MHz f f
max
+ A )
m = number of states in modulating signal;
m = 2 for binary signals
m = 4 for quaternary signals and analog signals
A f = peak deviation
f
max
= maximum modulation frequency

These bandwidths are measured using a spectrum analyzer with settings of 30-kHz
resolution bandwidth, 300-Hz video bandwidth, and no max hold detector or averaging. Note
that these settings are different than those listed in previous editions of the Telemetry Standards.
The changes were made to get more consistent results with various bit rates and spectrum
analyzers. The spectra measured with these settings give slightly larger power levels than with
the previous settings; this is why the value of K was changed from 63 to 61 for FQPSK and
SOQPSK signals. The power levels near center frequency should be approximately J 10log(R)
dBc where J= 10 for ARTM CPM, 12 for FQPSK and SOQPSK-TG, and 15.5 for PCM/FM
signals. For a bit rate of 5 Mb/s, the levels would be approximately -17 dBc for ARTM CPM,
-19 dBc for FQPSK, and -22.5 dBc for PCM/FM. If the power levels near center frequency are
not within 3 dB of these values, then a measurement problem exists and the carrier power level
(0 dBc) and spectrum analyzer settings should be verified.

The -25 dBm bandwidth is not required to be narrower than 1 MHz. The first term K
in equation (A-10) accounts for bandwidth differences between modulation methods. Equation
(A-10) can be rewritten as M(f) = K 10logR 100log|(ff
c
)/R|. When equation (A-10) is
written this way, the 10logR term accounts for the increased spectral spreading and decreased
power per unit bandwidth as the modulation rate increases. The last term forces the spectral
mask to roll off at 30-dB/octave (100-dB/decade). Any error detection or error correction bits,
which are added to the data stream, are counted as bits for the purposes of this spectral mask.
A-16

The spectral masks are based on the power spectra of random real-world transmitter signals. For
instance, the binary signal spectral mask is based on the power spectrum of a binary NRZ
PCM/FM signal with peak deviation equal to 0.35 times the bit rate and a multipole
premodulation filter with a -3 dB frequency equal to 0.7 times the bit rate (see Figure A-4
above). This peak deviation minimizes the bit error rate (BER) with an optimum receiver
bandwidth while also providing a compact RF spectrum. The premodulation filter attenuates the
RF sidebands while only degrading the BER by the equivalent of a few tenths of a dB of RF
power. Further decreasing of the premodulation filter bandwidth will only result in a slightly
narrower RF spectrum, but the BER will increase dramatically. Increasing the premodulation
filter bandwidth will result in a wider RF spectrum, and the BER will only be decreased slightly.
The recommended premodulation filter for NRZ PCM/FM signals is a multipole linear phase
filter with a -3 dB frequency equal to 0.7 times the bit rate. The unfiltered NRZ PCM/FM signal
rolls off at 12-dB/octave so at least a three-pole filter (filters with four or more poles are
recommended) is required to achieve the 30-dB/octave slope of the spectral mask. The spectral
mask includes the effects of reasonable component variations (unit-to-unit and temperature).

6.2 Spectral Mask Examples.
Figure A-10. Filtered 5-Mb/s RNRZ PCM/FM signal
and spectral mask.
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
Po
we
r
(d
Bc)
1440.5 1450.5 1460.5
Frequency (MHz)
Figures A-10 and A-11 show the
binary spectral mask of equation
(A-10) and the RF spectra of 5-Mb/s
randomized NRZ PCM/FM signals.
The RF spectra were measured using a
spectrum analyzer with 30-kHz
resolution bandwidth, 300-Hz video
bandwidth, and no max hold detector.
The span of the frequency axis is
20 MHz. The transmitter power was
5 watts, and the peak deviation was
1750 kHz. The modulation signal for
Figure A-10 was filtered with a 4-pole
linear-phase filter with 3 dB
frequency of 3500 kHz. All spectral
components in Figure A-10 were
contained within the spectral mask.
The minimum value of the spectral
mask was 62 dBc (equivalent to
25 dBm). The peak modulated signal
power levels were about 22.5 dB
below the unmodulated carrier level
(22.5 dBc). Figure A-11 shows the
same signal with no premodulation
filtering. The signal was not contained
within the spectral mask when a pre-
modulation filter was not used.
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
P
o
w
e
r

(
d
B
c
)
1440.5 1450.5 1460.5
Frequency (MHz)
Figure A-11. Unfiltered 5-Mb/s RNRZ PCM/FM
signal and spectral mask.

A-17

Figure A-12 shows the FQPSK/SOQPSK mask of equation (A-10) and the RF spectrum
of a 5-Mb/s SOQPSK-TG signal. The transmitter power was assumed to be 5 watts in this
example. The peak value of the SOQPSK-TG signal was about 19 dBc. Figure A-13 shows a
typical 5-Mb/s ARTM CPM signal and its spectral mask. The peak value of the ARTM CPM
signal was about 17 dBc.

0

7.0 Technical Characteristics of Digital Modulation Methods

Table A-3 provides a summary of some of the technical characteristics of the modulation
methods discussed in this summary.

TABLE A-3. CHARACTERISTICS OF VARIOUS MODULATION METHODS.
Characteristic
PCM/FM with
single symbol
detection
PCM/FM with
multi-symbol
detection
FQPSK-B,
FQPSK-JR,
SOQPSK-TG
ARTM CPM
Occupied Bandwidth 1.16 bit rate 1.16 bit rate 0.78 bit rate 0.56 bit rate
Sensitivity
(E
b
/N
0
for BEP=1e-5)
11.8-15+ dB 9.5 dB 11.8-12.2 dB 12.5 dB
Synchronization time
100 to 10,000
bits
250 bits
5,000 to 30,000
bits
30,000 to
150,000 bits
Synchronization
threshold level (E
b
/N
0
)
3 to 4 dB 2 dB 4.5 to 5 dB 8.5 dB
Phase noise
susceptibility*
2 1 3 4
Co-channel
interference
susceptibility*
2 1 3 4
* 1=Best, 2=Second Best, 3=Third Best, 4=Worst
Figure A-12. Typical 5-Mb/s SOQPSK-TG
Figure A-13. Typical 5-Mb/s ARTM CPM
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
P
o
w
e
r

(
d
B
c
)
1440.5 1450.5 1460.5
Frequency (MHz)
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
P
o
w
e
r

(
d
B
c
)
1440.5 1450.5 1460.5
Frequency (MHz)
A-18

8.0 FQPSK-B and FQPSK-JR Characteristics

Figure A-14. OQPSK modulator.
Fehers-patented quadrature phase shift
keying
7
,

8
(FQPSK-B and FQPSK-JR)
modulations are a variation of offset quadrature
phase shift keying (OQPSK). OQPSK is
described in most communications textbooks. A
generic OQPSK (or quadrature or I & Q)
modulator is shown in Figure A-14. In general,
the odd bits are applied to one channel (say Q),
and the even bits are applied to the I channel.

If the values of I and Q are 1, we get the
diagram shown in Figure A-15. For example, if
I=1 and Q=1 then the phase angle is 45 degrees
{(I,Q) = (1, 1)}. A constant envelope modulation
method, such as minimum shift keying (MSK),
would follow the circle indicated by the small
dots in Figure A-15 to go between the large dots.
In general, band-limited QPSK and OQPSK
signals are not constant envelope and would not
follow the path indicated by the small dots but
rather would have a significant amount of
amplitude variation, however FQPSK-B and
FQPSK-JR are nearly constant envelope and
essentially follow the path indicated by the small
dots in Figure A-15.

Figure A-15. I & Q constellation.

7 K. Feher et. al.: US Patents 4,567,602; 4,644,565; 5,491,457; and 5,784,402, post-patent improvements and other
U.S. and international patents pending.
8 Kato, Shuzo and Kamilo Feher, XPSK: A New Cross-Correlated Phase Shift Keying Modulation Technique,
IEEE Trans. Comm., vol. COM-31, May 1983.
A-19

The typical implementation of FQPSK-B or FQPSK-JR involves the application of data
and a bit rate clock to the baseband processor of the quadrature modulator. The data are
differentially encoded and converted to I and Q signals as described in Chapter 2. The I and Q
channels are then cross-correlated, and specialized wavelets are assembled that minimize the
instantaneous variation of (I
2
(t) + Q
2
(t)). The FQPSK-B baseband wavelets are illustrated in
Figure A-16 below.

The appropriate wavelet is assembled based on the current and immediate past states of I
and Q. Q is delayed by one-half symbol (one bit) with respect to I as shown in
Figure A-17 below.

1
3
A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e
0 1
.707
-.707
1
-1
0.4
2.6
0 3
I
Q
Figure A-16. FQPSK wavelet eye diagram Figure A-17. FQPSK-B I & Q eye
diagrams (at input to IQ modulator).

A common method at looking at I-Q modulation
signals is the use of a vector diagram. One method of
generating a vector diagram is to use an oscilloscope
that has an XY mode. The vector diagram
-0.5
0
0.5

Q
-0.5 0 0.5
I
is generated by applying the I signal to the X input and
the Q signal to the Y input. A sample vector diagram of
FQPSK-B at the input terminals of an I-Q modulator is
illustrated in Figure A-18. Note that the vector diagram
values are always within a few percent of being on a
circle. Any amplitude variations may cause spectral
spreading at the output of a non-linear amplifier.
Figure A-18. FQPSK-B vector
diagram.

A-20

-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
P
o
w
e
r

(
d
B
c
)
-1 -0.5 0 0.5 1
Relative Frequency (Bit Rate=1)
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
P
o
w
e
r

(
d
B
c
)
-1 -0.5 0 0.5 1
Normalized Frequency (Bit rate=1)

Figure A-19 illustrates a nearly ideal
FQPSK-JR spectrum (blue trace) and an
FQPSK-JR spectrum with moderately large
modulator errors (red trace). These spectra
were measured at the output of a fully
saturated RF non-linear amplifier with a
random pattern of 1's and 0's applied to
the input. The bit rate for Figure A-19 was 5
Mb/s. The peak of the spectrum was
approximately 19 dBc. The 99-percent
bandwidth of FQPSK-B is typically about
0.78 times the bit rate. Note that with a
properly randomized data sequence and
proper transmitter design, FQPSK-B does
not have significant sidebands (blue trac

Figure A-19. 5 Mb/s FQPSK-JR spectrum
with random input data and small (blue) and
large (red) modulator errors.

e).

Figure A-20 illustrates an FQPSK-B
transmitter output with all 0's as the input
signal. With an all 0's input, the differential
encoder, cross-correlator, and wavelet selector
provide unity amplitude sine and cosine waves
with a frequency equal to 0.25 times the bit rate
to the I and Q modulator inputs. The resulting
signal (from an ideal modulator) would be a
single frequency component offset from the
carrier frequency by exactly +0.25 times the bit
rate. The amplitude of this component would be
equal to 0 dBc. If modulator errors exist (they
always will), additional frequencies will appear
in the spectrum as shown in Figure A-20. The spectral line at a normalized frequency of 0
(carrier frequency) is referred to as the remnant carrier. This component is largely caused by DC
imbalances in the I and Q signals. The remnant carrier power in Figure A-20 is approximately
-31 dBc. Well designed FQPSK-B transmitters will have a remnant carrier level less than
-30 dBc. The spectral component offset, 0.25 times the bit rate below the carrier frequency, is
the other sideband. This component is largely caused by unequal amplitudes in I and Q and by a
lack of quadrature between I and Q. The power in this component should be limited to 30 dBc
or less for good system performance.

Figure A-20. FQPSK-B spectrum with
all 0s input and large modulator errors.

Figure A-21 shows the measured bit error probability (BEP) versus signal energy per
bit/noise power per Hz (E
b
/N
0
) of two FQPSK-JR modulator/demodulator combinations
including non-linear amplification and differential encoding/decoding in an additive white
Gaussian noise environment (AWGN) with no fading. Other combinations of equipment may
have different performance. Phase noise levels higher than those recommended in Chapter 2 can
significantly degrade the BEP performance. Computer simulations have shown that a BEP of
A-21

10
-5
may be achievable with an E
b
/N
0
of slightly
greater than 11 dB (with differential
encoding/decoding). The purpose of the
differential encoder/decoder is to resolve the
phase detection ambiguities that are inherent in
QPSK, OQPSK, and FQPSK modulation
methods. The differential encoder/decoder used
in this standard will cause one isolated symbol
error to appear as two bits in error at the
demodulator output. However, many
aeronautical telemetry channels are dominated
by fairly long burst error events, and the effect
of the differential encoder/decoder will often be
masked by the error events.

Figure A-21. FQPSK-JR BEP vs. E
b
/N
0
.
1E-07
1E-06
1E-05
1E-04
1E-03
1E-02
1E-01
B
E
P
8 10 12 14
Eb/No (dB)
5 Mb/s FQPSK-JR

9.0 SOQPSK-TG Characteristics.

SOQPSK is a family of constant
envelope continuous phase modulation (CPM)
waveforms defined by Mr. T. Hill.
9, 10, 11, 12

The details of SOQPSK-TG are described in
Chapter 2, paragraphs 2.4.3.2 and 2.4.3.2.1. The
SOQPSK-TG signal amplitude is constant and
the phase trajectory is determined by the
coefficients in Chapter 2, Table 2-4. Therefore,
SOQPSK-TG can be implemented using a
precision phase or frequency modulator with
proper control of the phase trajectory.
Figure A-22 illustrates the measured phase
trajectory of an SOQPSK-TG signal. The
vertical lines correspond approximately to the
bit decision times.
180
-270
-180
-90
0
90
P
h
a
s
e

(
d
e
g
)
0 4 8 12 16
Bit number

Figure A-22. Measured SOQPSK-TG
phase trajectory

9 Hill T., An Enhanced, Constant Envelope, Interoperable Shaped Offset QPSK (SOQPSK) Waveform for
Improved Spectral Efficiency, Proceedings of the International Telemetering Conference, San Diego, California,
October 2000.
10 Younes B., Brase J., Patel C., Wesdock J., An Assessment of Shaped Offset QPSK for Use in NASA Space
Network and Ground Network Systems, Meetings of Consultative Committee for Space Data Systems, Toulouse,
France, October, 2000.
11 Geoghegan, M., Implementation and Performance Results for Trellis Detection of SOQPSK, Proceedings of
the International Telemetering Conference, Las Vegas, Nevada, October 2001.
12 Simon, M., Bandwidth-Efficient Digital Modulation with Application to Deep Space Communications,
Monograph number 3, DESCANSO Monograph Series, JPL Publication 00-17, Jet Propulsion Laboratory,
California Institute of Technology, 2001. This publication is available free via the Internet:
http://descanso.jpl.nasa.gov/Monograph/series3/complete1.pdf (note: do not use WWW prefix for this URL).
A-22

The power spectrum of a random 5 Mb/s
SOQPSK-TG signal is shown in Figure A-23.
The 60 dBc bandwidth of this 5 Mb/s signal
was about 7.34 MHz. Note that the maximum
power level is about -19 dBc.

Figure A-23. SOQPSK-TG Power
Spectrum (5 Mb/s).
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
P
o
w
e
r

(
d
B
c
)
-1 -0.5 0 0.5 1

Figure A-24 shows the measured bit error
probability (BEP) versus signal energy per
bit/noise power per Hz (E
b
/N
0
) of two SOQPSK-
TG modulator/demodulator combinations
including non-linear amplification and differential
encoding/decoding in an additive white Gaussian
noise environment (AWGN) with no fading. Other
combinations of equipment may have different
performance. Phase noise levels higher than those
recommended in Chapter 2 can significantly
degrade the BEP performance.

b
/N
o

performance of 5 Mb/s SOQPSK-TG.

1E-07
1E-06
1E-05
1E-04
1E-03
1E-02
1E-01
B
E
P

8 10 12 14
Eb/No (dB)
5Mb/s SOQPSK-TG

10.0 Advanced Range Telemetry (ARTM) CPM Characteristics.

ARTM CPM is a quaternary signaling
scheme in which the instantaneous frequency
of the modulated signal is a function of the
source data stream. The frequency pulses are
shaped for spectral containment purposes. As
defined for this standard, the modulation index
alternates at the symbol rate between h=4/16
and h=5/16. The purpose of alternating
between two modulation indices is to
maximize the minimum distance between data
symbols, which results in minimizing the bit
error probability. These particular modulation
indices were selected as a good tradeoff between spectral efficiency and data-detection ability.
Figure A-25 shows the power spectrum of a 5 Mb/s ARTM CPM signal and Figure A-26 shows
the measured BEP versus E
b
/N
o
. The maximum power level was about 19 dBc. The -60 dBc

Figure A-25. Power spectrum of 5 Mb/s
ARTM CPM.
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
P
o
w
e
r

(
d
B
c
)
-1 -0.5 0 0.5 1
A-23

bandwidth of this 5 Mb/s signal was
about 5.54 MHz. Note that the power
spectrum of ARTM CPM is about 25%
narrower than that of SOQPSK-TG but
the BEP performance is worse. ARTM
CPM is also more susceptible to phase
noise than SOQPSK-TG.

b
/N
o
performance of
5 Mb/s ARTM CPM.

1E-07
1E-06
1E-05
1E-04
1E-03
1E-02
1E-01
B
E
P
8 10 12 14
Eb/No (dB)
5 Mb/s multi-h CPM

11.0 PCM/FM

Pulse code modulation
(PCM)/frequency modulation (FM) has
been the most popular telemetry
modulation since about 1970. This
method could also be called filtered
continuous phase frequency shift keying
(CPFSK). The RF signal is typically
generated by filtering the baseband non-
return-to-zero-level (NRZ-L) signal and
then frequency modulating a voltage
controlled oscillator (VCO). The
optimum peak deviation is 0.35 times
the bit rate (h=0.7) and a good choice for
a premodulation filter is a multi-pole
linear phase filter with bandwidth equal
to 0.7 times the bit rate. Figure A-27 shows the power spectrum of a pseudo-random 5 Mb/s
PCM/FM signal with peak deviation of 1.75 MHz and a 3.5 MHz linear phase low-pass filter.
Note that the spectrum is nearly flat from a frequency equal to 0.5 times the bit rate to a
frequency equal to +0.5 times the bit rate. The power level near the center frequency is about
22.5 dBc for a bit rate of 5 Mb/s and the standard spectrum analyzer settings.

Figure A-27. Power spectrum of 5 Mb/s PCM/FM
signal.
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
P
o
w
e
r

(
d
B
c
)
-2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2
A-24

Figure A-28 shows the BEP versus
E
b
/N
o
performance of 5 Mb/s PCM/FM
with a multi-symbol bit detector and
with 3 different receivers/detectors.
Note that an E
b
/N
o
of about 9.5 dB is
required to achieve a BEP of about 10
-5

with the multi-symbol detector
13,

14

while an E
b
/N
o
of about 12 to 14 dB is
typically required to achieve a BEP of
about 10
-5
with typical FM
demodulators and single symbol
detectors. The PCM/FM modulation
method is fairly insensitive to phase
noise.

b
/N
o
performance of
5 Mb/s PCM/FM with multi-symbol bit detector and
three single symbol receivers/detectors.

1E-07
1E-06
1E-05
1E-04
1E-03
1E-02
B
E
P
6 8 10 12 14 16
Eb/No (dB)
R1 Multi-symbol R2 R3

12.0 Valid Center Frequencies Near Telemetry Band Edges

The telemetry bands and associated frequency ranges identified in Table 2-1 identify the
frequency limits for each band. Telemetry transmitters can not be centered at the band edges due
to obvious out of band emissions. Bit rate to the transmitter and modulation scheme drive the
amount of separation required between the center frequency and the band edge. To determine
the amount of back-off required, the distance from the center of the spectral masks for each
modulation scheme (see Chapter 2, paragraph 2.4.6) to the intersection of the mask and the
absolute limit of -25 dBm must be calculated. To illustrate this, see Figure A-29. Using these
calculations will assure that outside the specified telemetry bands no part of the modulated
spectrum is over the absolute limit of -25 dBm.

13 Osborne W. P., Luntz M. B., Coherent and Noncoherent Detection of CPFSK, IEEE Transactions on
Communications, August 1974.
14 Geoghegan M. S., Improving the Detection Efficiency of Conventional PCM/FM Telemetry by using a Multi-
Symbol Demodulator, Proceedings of the 2000 International Telemetry Conference, Volume XXXVI, 675-682,
San Diego CA, October 2000.
A-25

Power Spectral Density Masks
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
-15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15
Frequency Offset from Carrier (MHz)
d
B
c

(
i
n

3
0

k
H
z

B
W
)
ARTM CPM
SOQPSK/FQPSK
PCM/FM

Figure A-29. Spectral Masks at -25 dBm.

The mask is calculated for all the modulation schemes at a bit rate of 5 Mbps with
transmitter output power assumed to be 10 W. This transmitter operating with PCM/FM as its
modulation scheme requires a back-off from band edge of 9.98 MHz; since channelization in
these bands is limited to 0.5 MHz steps, this value is rounded up to 10 MHz. This same
transmitter operating with SOQPSK/FQPSK will require 4.67 MHz, rounded up to 5 MHz, of
back-off from band edge. Likewise, for ARTM-CPM the back-off is 3.54 MHz or 4 Mbps when
rounded up. To further this example, if this was an L-Band transmitter, viable carrier
frequencies would be as specified in Table A-4.

TABLE A-4. L-BAND FREQUENCY RANGE (10 W, 5 MBPS)
Modulation Type Viable L-Band Frequency Range
PCM/FM 1445-1515 MHz
SOQPSK/FQPSK 1440-1520 MHz
ARTM CPM 1439-1521 MHz

A-26

A-27
For a given modulation scheme and transmitter output power, as the bit rate increases, the
amount of back-off from the band edge also increases. Figure A-30 illustrates this point.

Required Band-Edge Backoff
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
0 5 10 15 20 25
Bit Rate (Mbps)
B
a
c
k
o
f
f

f
r
o
m

B
a
n
d

E
d
g
e

(
M
H
z
)
PCM/FM
SOQPSK/FQPSK
ARTM CPM
Carrier Power (dBm):
40

Figure A-30. Bit Rate vs. Band edge Back-off.

For ease in making calculations as was done to create Figure A-30, an
Excel spreadsheet application can be used. Figure A-31 provides a view
of how the calculations are made using the formulas in the spreadsheet.
The Excel file that created Figure A-31 (BandEdgeBackoff.xls) can be
downloaded and used for interactive calculations.

The input values for transmitter output power and bit rate are in the cells
highlighted in yellow. The amount of back-off will be displayed in the
cells highlighted in light blue. Additionally, each telemetry band is
displayed with the useable carrier frequency range for each modulation
scheme given in blue.
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix A, April, 2009
Valid Center Frequency, Band Edge Back-Off

Carrier Power or EIRP (dBm): 40 Input Number
Mask floor (at this nominal TX power): -65 dBc
Bit Rate (Mbps): 1.00 1.00 1.00
Input
Number
PCM/FM SOQPSK/FQPSK ARTM CPM

K = -28 -61 -73
m = 2 4 4
Bit Rate (bps) 1.00E+06 1.00E+06 1.00E+06
Mask hits floor at offset of (MHz) 2.34 1.10 0.83

Band-edge backoff (MHz, rounded to nearest 0.5
MHz) 2.5 1.5 1 Result

Band Edge, Lower (MHz) 1435
Band Edge, Upper (MHz) 1525
Lower center freq. at this bit rate (MHz) 1437.5 1436.5 1436.0

L-
Band
Upper center freq. at this bit rate (MHz) 1522.5 1523.5 1524.0


L-
Band


S-
Band


S-
Band

A
-
2
8
Figure A-31. Valid center frequency, band edge back-off.

Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix A, April, 2009

**** END OF APPENDIX A ****

A-29
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix B, April 2009

APPENDIX B

USE CRITERIA FOR FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING


1.0 General ..............................................................................................................B-1
2.0 FM Subcarrier Performance ..............................................................................B-1
3.0 FM Subcarrier Performance Tradeoffs..............................................................B-2
4.0 FM System Component Considerations............................................................B-3
5.0 Range Capability for FM Subcarrier Systems...................................................B-4


ii

APPENDIX B
USE CRITERIA FOR FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING
1.0 General
Successful application of frequency division multiplexing telemetry standards depends on
recognition of performance limits and performance tradeoffs, which may be required in
implementation of a system. The use criteria included in this Appendix are offered in this
context as a guide for orderly application of the standards, which are presented in Chapter 3. It is
the responsibility of the telemetry system designer to select the range of performance that will
meet data measurement requirements and at the same time permit operation within the limits of
the standards. A designer or user must also recognize the fact that even though the standards for
FM/FM multiplexing encompass a broad range of performance limits, tradeoffs such as data
accuracy for data bandwidth may be necessary. Nominal values for such parameters as
frequency response and rise time are listed to indicate the majority of expected use and should
not be interpreted as inflexible operational limits. It must be remembered that system
performance is influenced by other considerations such as hardware performance capabilities. In
summary, the scope of the standards together with the use criteria is intended to offer flexibility
of operation and yet provide realistic limits.

2.0 FM Subcarrier Performance
The nominal and maximum frequency response of the subcarrier channels listed in
Chapter 3 (Table 3-1A, Table 3-1B, Table 3-1C and Table 3-2) is 10 and 50 percent of the
maximum allowable deviation bandwidth. The nominal frequency response of the channels
employs a deviation ratio of five. The deviation ratio of a channel is one-half the defined
deviation bandwidth divided by the cutoff frequency of the discriminator output filter.

2.1 The use of other deviation ratios for any of the subcarrier channels listed may be selected
by the range users to conform with the specific data response requirements for the channel. As a
rule, the rms signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of a specific channel varies as the three-halves power of
that subcarrier deviation ratio.

2.2 The nominal and minimum channel rise times indicated in Chapter 3 (Table 3-1A,
Table 3-1B, Table 3-1C and Table 3-2) have been determined from the equation which states that
rise time is equal to 0.35 divided by the frequency response for the nominal and maximum
frequency response. The equation is normally employed to define 10 to 90 percent rise time for a
step function of the channel input signal. However, deviations from these values may be
encountered because of variations in subcarrier components in the system.
B-1

3.0 FM Subcarrier Performance Tradeoffs
The number of subcarrier channels that may be used simultaneously to modulate an RF
carrier is limited by the RF channel bandwidth and by the output SNR that is acceptable for the
application at hand. As channels are added, it is necessary to reduce the transmitter deviation
allowed for each individual channel to keep the overall multiplex with the RF channel
assignment. This reduction lowers the subcarrier-to-noise performance at the discriminator
inputs. Thus, the system designer's problem is to determine acceptable tradeoffs between the
number of subcarrier channels and acceptable subcarrier-to-noise ratios.

3.1 Background information relating to the level of performance and the tradeoffs that may
be made is included in Telemetry FM/FM Baseband Structure Study, volumes I and II; which
were completed under a contract administered by the Telemetry Working Group of the IRIG in
1965. The results of the study show that proportional bandwidth channels with center
frequencies up to 165 kHz and constant bandwidth channels with center frequencies up to
176 kHz may be used within the constraints of these standards. The test criteria included the
adjustment of the system components for approximately equal SNRs at all of the discriminator
outputs with the receiver input near RF threshold. Intermodulation, caused by the radio-link
components carrying the composite multiplex signal, limits the channel's performance under
large signal conditions.

3.2 With subcarrier deviation ratios of four, channel data errors on the order of 2 percent rms
were observed. Data channel errors on the order of 5 percent rms of full-scale bandwidth were
observed when subcarrier deviation ratios of two were employed. When deviation ratios of one
were used, it was observed that channel-data errors exceeded 5 percent. Some channels showed
peak-to-peak errors as high as 30 percent. It must be emphasized, however, that the results of the
tests performed in this study are based on specific methods of measurement on one system
sample and that this system sample represents a unique configuration of components. Systems
having different performance characteristics may not yield the same system performance.

3.3 System performance may be improved, in terms of better data accuracy, by sacrificing
system data bandwidth; that is, if the user is willing to limit the number of subcarrier channels in
the multiplex, particularly the higher frequency channels, the input level to the transmitter can be
increased. The SNR of each subcarrier is then improved through the increased per-channel
transmitter deviation. For example, the baseband structure study indicated that when the
165-kHz channel and the 93-kHz channel were not included in the proportional-bandwidth
multiplex, performance improvement can be expected in the remaining channels equivalent to
approximately 12 dB increased transmitter power.

3.4 Likewise, elimination of the five highest frequency channels in the constant bandwidth
multiplex allowed a 6-dB increase in performance.

3.5 A general formula,
1
which can be used to estimate the thermal noise performance of an
FM/FM channel above threshold, is as follows:

1
K.M. Uglow,. Noise and Bandwidth in FM/FM Radio Telemetry, IRE Transaction on Telemetry and Remote
Control, (May 1957) pp 19-22.
B-2

|
|
.
|
\
|
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
= |
.
|
\
|
ud
ds
s
dc
ud
c
c d
F
f
f
f
F
B
N
S
N
S
2 / 1
2 / 1
4
3
(B-1)

where:

d
N
S
|
.
|
\
|
= discriminator output signal-to-noise ratio (rms voltage ratio)

S
N
c
|
\
|
.
|
= receiver carrier-to-noise ratio (rms voltage ratio)
B
c
= carrier bandwidth (receiver IF bandwidth)
F
ud
= subcarrier discriminator output filter: 3-dB frequency
f
s
= subcarrier center frequency
f
dc
= carrier peak deviation of the particular subcarrier of interest
f
ds
= subcarrier peak deviation

If the RF carrier power is such that the thermal noise is greater than the intermodulation
noise, the above relation provides estimates accurate to within a few decibels. Additional
information is contained in RCC Document 119, Telemetry Applications Handbook.

3.6 The FM/FM composite-multiplex signal used to modulate the RF carrier may be a
proportional-bandwidth format, a constant-bandwidth format, or a combination of the two types
provided only that guard bands allowed for channels used in a mixed format be equal to or
greater than the guard band allowed for the same channel in an unmixed format.

4.0 FM System Component Considerations
System performance is dependent on all components in the system. Neglecting the
effects of the RF and recording system, data channel accuracy is primarily a function of the
linearity and frequency response of the subcarrier oscillators and discriminators employed.
Systems designed to transmit data frequencies up to the nominal frequency responses shown in
Chapter 3 (Table 3-1A, Table 3-1B, Table 3-1C and Table 3-2) have generally well-known
response capabilities, and reasonable data accuracy estimates can be easily made. For data-
channel requirements approaching the maximum frequency response shown in Chapter 3
(Table 3-1A, Table 3-1B, Table 3-1C and Table 3-2), oscillator and discriminator characteristics
are less consistent and less well-defined, making data accuracy estimates less dependable.

4.1 The effect of the RF system on data accuracy is primarily in the form of noise because of
intermodulation at high RF signal conditions well above threshold. Under low RF signal
conditions, noise on the data channels is increased because of the degraded SNR existing in the
receiver.

B-3

B-4
4.2 Intermodulation of the subcarriers in a system is caused by characteristics such as amplitude
and phase nonlinearities of the transmitter, receiver, magnetic tape recorder/reproducer, or other
system components required to handle the multiplex signal under the modulation conditions
employed. In systems employing pre-emphasis of the upper subcarriers, the lower subcarriers may
experience intermodulation interference because of the difference frequencies of the high-
frequency and high-amplitude channels.

4.3 The use of magnetic tape recorders for recording a subcarrier multiplex may degrade the
data channel accuracy because of the tape speed differences or variations between record and
playback. These speed errors can normally be compensated for in present discriminator systems
when the nominal response rating of the channels is employed and a reference frequency is
recorded with the subcarrier multiplex.

5.0 Range Capability for FM Subcarrier Systems
The following subparagraphs outline additional range capabilities:

5.1 Receivers and Tape Recorders. The use of subcarrier frequencies greater than 2 MHz may
require tape recorders of a greater capability than are in current use at some ranges. It is
recommended that users, who anticipate employing any of the above channels at a range, check
the range's capability at a sufficiently early date to allow procurement of necessary equipment.

5.2 Discriminator Channel Selection Filters. Inclusion of the higher frequency proportional-
bandwidth channels and the constant-bandwidth channels may require the ranges to acquire
additional band selection filters. In addition to referencing Chapter 3 (Table 3-1A, Table 3-1B,
Table 3-1C and Table 3-2) for acquiring channel-selector filters, consideration should also be
given to acquiring discriminators corresponding to the predetection carrier frequencies shown in
Appendix D, Table D-9. In applications where minimum time delay variation within the filter is
important, such as tape speed compensation or high-rate PAM or PCM, constant-delay filter
designs are recommended.

**** END OF APPENDIX B ****
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix C, April 2009

APPENDIX C

PCM STANDARDS (ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS)

1.0 Bit Rate Versus Receiver Intermediate-Frequency Bandwidth.........................C-1
2.0 Recommended PCM Synchronization Patterns.................................................C-2
3.0 Spectral and BEP Comparisons for NRZ and Bi ............................................C-2
4.0 PCM Frame Structure Examples .......................................................................C-5

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure C-1. BEP vs IF SNR in bandwidth = bit rate for NRZ-L PCM/FM. .......................C-1
Figure C-2. Spectral densities of random NRZ and Bi codes. ..........................................C-4
Figure C-3. Theoretical bit error probability performance for various baseband PCM
signaling techniques (perfect bit synchronization assumed). .........................C-4
Figure C-4. Major Frame Length = Minor Frame Maximum Length.................................C-6
Figure C-5. Major Frame Length = Minor Frame Maximum Length multiplied by Z.......C-7
Figure C-6. Major Frame Length = Minor Frame Maximum Length multiplied by Z.......C-8

LIST OF TABLES

Table C-1. Optimum Frame Synchronization Patterns For PCM Telemetry ....................C-3


ii

APPENDIX C
PCM STANDARDS (ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS)
1.0 Bit Rate Versus Receiver Intermediate-Frequency Bandwidth
The following subparagraphs contain information about selection of receiver
intermediate-frequency (IF) bandwidths. Additional information is contained in RCC document
119, Telemetry Applications Handbook.

1.1 The standard receiver IF bandwidth values are listed in Table 2-1. Not all bandwidths are
available on all receivers or at all test ranges. Additional bandwidths may be available at some
test ranges. The IF bandwidth, for data receivers, should typically be selected so that 90 to 99
percent of the transmitted power spectrum is within the receiver 3-dB bandwidth.

1.2 For reference purposes, in a well-designed PCM/FM system (NRZ-L data code) with
peak deviation equal to 0.35 times the bit rate and an IF bandwidth (3 dB) equal to the bit rate, a
receiver IF signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of approximately 13 dB will result in a bit error
probability (BEP) of 10
-6
. A 1-dB change in this SNR will result in approximately an order of
magnitude change in the BEP. The relationship between BEP and IF SNR in a bandwidth equal
to the bit rate is illustrated in Figure C-1 for IF bandwidths equal to the bit rate and 1.5 times the
bit rate. An approximate expression for the BEP is

BEP = 0.5 e
(kSNR)
(C-1)

where:
k 0.7 for IF bandwidth equal to bit
rate
k 0.65 for IF bandwidth equal to 1.2
times bit rate
k 0.55 for IF bandwidth equal to 1.5
times bit rate
SNR = IF SNRIF bandwidth/bit rate.

Other data codes and modulation
techniques have different BEP versus SNR
performance characteristics.

1.3 It is recommended that the maximum
period between bit transitions be 64-bit
intervals to ensure adequate bit synchronization.
Table C-1 contains recommended frame
synchronization patterns for general use in PCM telemetry.
Figure C-1. BEP vs IF SNR in bandwidth
= bit rate for NRZ-L PCM/FM.

C-1
C-2
2.0 Recommended PCM Synchronization Patterns
Table C-1 contains recommended frame synchronization patterns for general use in PCM
telemetry. Patterns are shown in the preferred order of transmission with "111" being the first bit
sequence transmitted. This order is independent of data being LSB or MSB aligned. The
technique used in the determination of the patterns for lengths 16 through 30 was essentially that
of the patterns of 2
n
binary patterns off a given length, n, for that pattern with the smallest total
probability of false synchronization over the entire pattern overlap portion of the ground station
frame synchronization.
1
The patterns for lengths 31 through 33 were obtained from a second
source.
2

3.0 Spectral and BEP Comparisons for NRZ and Bi
3

Figure C-2 shows the power spectral densities of baseband NRZ and Bi codes with
random data. These curves were calculated using the equations presented below. Figure C-3
presents the theoretical bit error probabilities versus signal-to-noise ratio for the level, mark, and
space versions of baseband NRZ and Bi codes and also for RNRZ-L. The noise is assumed to
be additive white gaussian noise.

2
2
sin
fT
fT
DENSITY SPECTRAL NRZ

(C-2)

2
4
2 /
2 / sin
fT
fT
DENSITY SPECTRAL Bi

(C-3)

where T is the bit period.

1
A more detailed account of this investigation can be found in a paper by J. L. Maury, Jr. and J. Styles,
"Development of Optimum Frame Synchronization Codes for Goddard Space Flight Center PCM Telemetry
Standards," in Proceedings of the National Telemetering Conference, June 1964.
2
The recommended synchronization patterns for lengths 31 through 33 are discussed more fully in a paper by E. R.
Hill, "Techniques for Synchronizing Pulse-Code Modulated Telemetry," in Proceedings of the National
Telemetering Conference, May 1963.
3
Material presented in paragraph 3.0 is taken from a study by W. C. Lindsey (University of Southern California),
Bit Synchronization System Performance Characterization, Modeling and Tradeoff Study, Naval Missile Center
Technical Publication.

Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix C, April, 2009

C
-
3

TABLE C-1. OPTIMUM FRAME SYNCHRONIZATION PATTERNS FOR PCM TELEMETRY
Pattern
Length
Patterns
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
111
010
100
100
110
011
011
100
101
110
110
110
110
101
101
110
111
111
110
111
110
110
011
011
101
110
011
101
010
100
101
011
011
101
100
100
111
001
101
101
001
110
001
110
100
111
110
110
101
110
110
111
110
110
010
000
000
000
010
001
011
101
110
001
111
101
001
010
011
001
111
101
011
0
00
000
000
000
000
000
100
100
000
100
100
110
001
100
110
100
101

0
00
000
000
000
100
100
110
110
011
101
110
101
101
001

0
00
000
000
000
000
000
000
100
000
000
010

0
00
000
000
000
000
010
010
010

0
00
000
000
000
011

0
00
000

Figure C-2. Spectral densities of random NRZ and Bi codes.

Figure C-3. Theoretical bit error probability performance
for various baseband PCM signaling techniques
(perfect bit synchronization assumed).

C-4
C-5
4.0 PCM Frame Structure Examples
Figures C-4, C-5, and C-6 show examples of allowable PCM frame structures. In each
example, the Minor Frame Sync Pattern is counted as one word in the minor frame. The first word
after the Minor Frame Sync Pattern is word 1.

Figures C-5 and C-6 show the preferred method of placing the subframe ID counter in the
minor frame. The counter is placed before the parameters that are referenced to it.

Major Frame Length is as follows:

Figure C-4: Major Frame Length = Minor Frame Maximum
Length.
Length multiplied by Z.
Length multiplied by Z.


Minor Frame Maximum Length, N Words or B Bits

Class I: Shall not exceed 8192 bits nor exceed 1024 words
Class II: 16 384 Bits

Word
1
Word
2
Word
3
Word
4
Word
5
Word
6
Word
7
Word
8
Word
9
Word
10
... ... ...
Word
N-2
Word
N-1

...

Minor
Frame
Sync
Pattern
Param
A0
Param
A1
Param
A2
Param
A3
Param
A4
Param
A2
Param
A5
Param
A6
Param
A2
Param
A7
... ... ...
Param
A2
Param
A(X)

Parameters A0, A1, A3, A4, A5, A6, ... A(X) are sampled once each Minor Frame.
Parameter A2 is supercommutated on the Minor Frame.
The rate of A2 is equal to the number of samples multiplied by the Minor Frame Rate.
C
-
6

Figure C-4. Major Frame Length = Minor Frame Maximum Length.


C
-
7

Class II: 16 384 bits
Word
1
Word
2
Word
3
Word
4
Word
5
Word
6
Word
7
Word
8
Word
9
Word
10

Word
N-2
Word
N-1

Minor Frame
Sync Pattern
SFID
=1
FFI Param
A2
Param
B1
Param
A4
Param
A2
Param
A5
Param
A6
Param
A2
Param
C1

Param
A2
Param
A(X)
SFID
=2
Param
B2
Par
C2
am
SFID
=3
Param
B3
Par am
C3

SFID
=4
Param
B4
Par am
C4

SFID
=5
Param
B2
Par
C5
am
SFID
=6
Param
B5
Par
C6
am
SFID
=7
Param
B6
Par am
C7

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

Param
B2

Param
C(Z-1)

Minor Frame
Sync Pattern
SFID
=Z
FFI Param
A2
Param
BZ
Param
A4
Param
A2
Param
A5
Param
A6
Param
A2
Param
CZ

Param
A2
Param
A(X)

The Frame Format Identifier (Word 2) is shown in the preferred position as the first word following the ID counter.
Parameters B1, B3, B4, B5, . . . BZ, and C1, C2, C3, . . . CZ are sampled once each Subframe, at 1/Z multiplied by the Minor Frame rate.
Parameter B2 is supercommutated on the Subframe and is sampled at less than the Minor Frame rate, but greater than the Subframe rate
Figure C-5. Major Frame Length = Minor Frame Maximum Length multiplied by Z.

C
-
8
Class II: 16 384 bits
Word
1
Word
2
Word
3
Word
4
Word
5
Word
6
Word
7
Word
8
Word
9
Word
10

Word
N-2
Word
N-1

Minor Frame
Sync Pattern
SFID1
=1
FFI Param
A2
SFID2
=1
Param
B1
Param
A2
Param
A5
Param
E1
Param
A2
Param
C1

Param
A2
Param
A(X)

SFID1
=2
SFID2
=2
Param
B2
Param
E2
Param
C2

SFID1
=3
SFID2
=3
Param
B3
Param
E3
Param
C3

SFID1
=4
SFID2
=4
Param
B4
Param
E4
Param
C4

SFID1
=5
SFID2
=5
Param
B2
Param
E5
Param
C5

SFID1
=6

.
.
.
Param
B5

.
.
.
Param
C6

SFID1
=7
SFID2
=D
Param
B6
Param
ED
Param
C7

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
. Param
B2

.
.
.

Param
C(Z-1)

Minor Frame
Sync Pattern
SFID1
=Z
FFI Param
A2
SFID2
=N
Param
BZ
Param
A2
Param
A5
Param
EN
Param
A2
Param
CZ

Param
A2
Param
A(X)

SFID1 and SFID2 and subframe counters.
SFID1 has a depth Z 256; SFID2 has a depth D which is <Z. Z divided by D is not an integer.
Location of the B and C parameters are given by the Minor Frame word number and the SFID1 counter.
Location of the E parameters are given by the Minor Frame word number and the SFID2 counter.
Figure C-6. Major Frame Length = Minor Frame Maximum Length multiplied by Z.

**** END OF APPENDIX C ****

Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix D, April 2009

APPENDIX D

MAGNETIC TAPE RECORDER AND REPRODUCER INFORMATION AND USE
CRITERIA

1.0 Other Instrumentation Magnetic Tape Recorder Standards ........................... D-1
2.0 Double-Density Longitudinal Recording........................................................ D-1
3.0 Serial High-Density Digital Recording (HDDR)............................................ D-8
4.0 Head Parameters ........................................................................................... D-15
5.0 Record Level................................................................................................. D-15
6.0 Tape Crossplay Considerations .................................................................... D-16
7.0 Standard Tape Signature Procedures ............................................................ D-16
8.0 Equipment Required for Swept-Frequency Procedures................................ D-19
9.0 Fixed-Frequency Plus White Noise Procedure............................................. D-19
10.0 Signature Playback and Analysis.................................................................. D-20
11.0 Recording and Playback Alignment Procedures .......................................... D-21
12.0 General Considerations for Longitudinal Recording.................................... D-23
13.0 Recorded Tape Format.................................................................................. D-23
14.0 Head and Head Segment Mechanical Parameters ........................................ D-33
15.0 Head Polarity ................................................................................................ D-33
16.0 Magnetic Tape and Reel Characteristics ...................................................... D-34
17.0 Direct Record and Reproduce Systems ........................................................ D-34
18.0 Timing, Predetection, and Tape Signature Recording.................................. D-36
19.0 FM Record Systems...................................................................................... D-38
20.0 PCM Recording ............................................................................................ D-40
21.0 Preamble Recording for Automatic or Manual Recorder Alignment........... D-45
22.0 Magnetic Tape Standards: General............................................................... D-45
23.0 Definitions .................................................................................................... D-48
24.0 General Requirements for Standard Instrumentation Tapes and Reels ........ D-51
25.0 General Characteristics of Instrumentation Tapes and Reels ....................... D-52
26.0 Physical Characteristics of Instrumentation Tapes and Reels ...................... D-55
27.0 Instrumentation Tape Magnetic and Electrical Characteristics .................... D-55

ii
LIST OF FIGURES

Figure D-1. Record and reproduce head and head segment identification and
location (7-track interlaced system)................................................................ D-3
Figure D-2. Randomizer block diagram. .......................................................................... D-10
Figure D-3. Randomized NRZ-L decoder block diagram................................................ D-12
Figure D-4. Random PCM power spectra. ....................................................................... D-13
Figure D-5a. Bi-L at bit packing density of 15 kb/in. ...................................................... D-14
Figure D-5b. RNRZ-L at bit packing density of 25 kb/in. ................................................. D-14
Figure D-6. Tape crossplay. ............................................................................................. D-17
Figure D-7. Square wave responses. ................................................................................ D-22
Figure D-7a. Recorded tape format.................................................................................... D-29
Figure D-7b. Head and head segment mechanical parameters........................................... D-30
Figure D-7c. Record and reproduce head and head segment identification
and location (N-track interlaced system). ..................................................... D-31
Figure D-8. PCM record and reproduce configuration. ................................................... D-32
Figure D-9. Serial high-density digital record and reproduce. ......................................... D-43

LIST OF TABLES

Table D-1. Dimensions - Recorded Tape Format 7 Tracks Interlaced
On 12.7-Mm (1/2 In.) Wide Tape................................................................... D-4
On 12.7-Mm (1/2 In.) Wide Tape................................................................... D-5
On 25.4-Mm (1-In.) Wide Tape...................................................................... D-6
Table D-4. Record And Reproduce Parameters.............................................................. D-25
Table D-5. Dimensions Recorded Tape Format 14 Tracks Interlaced
On 25.4 Mm (1 In.) Wide Tape .................................................................... D-26
Table D-6. Dimensions Recorded Tape Format 14 Tracks In-Line
On 25.4 Mm (1 In.) Wide Tape .................................................................... D-27
Table D-7. Dimensions Recorded Tape Format 14 Tracks Interlaced
On 25.4 Mm (1 In.) Wide Tape(1)................................................................ D-28
Table D-8. Constant-Amplitude Speed-Control Signals................................................. D-37
Table D-9. Predetection Carrier Parameters ................................................................... D-38
Table D-10. Wide Band And Double Density Fm Record Parameters............................. D-39
Table D-11. Maximum Recommended Bit Rates, Post-Detection Recording................. D-41
Table D-12. Maximum Recommended Bit Rates............................................................. D-42
Table D-13. Suggested Tape Requirement Limits............................................................ D-46
Table D-13a. Suggested Wavelength Response Requirements .......................................... D-47
Table D-14. Durability Signal Losses............................................................................... D-48
Table D-15. Tape Dimensions .......................................................................................... D-53
Table D-16. Measurement Wavelengths........................................................................... D-56

APPENDIX D
MAGNETIC TAPE RECORDER AND REPRODUCER INFORMATION AND USE
CRITERIA
1.0 Other Instrumentation Magnetic Tape Recorder Standards
The X3B6 Committee of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) have prepared several standards for
magnetic tape recording of instrumentation data. Documents may be obtained by contacting the
ANSI web site (http://webstore.ansi.org).

1.1 Documentation applicable to this Appendix is identified in the following subparagraphs.

1.1.1 ISO 1860 (1986), Information Processing - Precision reels for magnetic tape used in
interchange instrumentation applications.

1.1.2 ISO 6068 (1985), Information Processing - Recording characteristics of instrumentation
magnetic tape (including telemetry systems) - interchange requirements.

1.1.3 ISO/IEC TR 6371:1989, Information Processing - Interchange practices and test methods
for unrecorded instrumentation magnetic tape.

1.1.4 ISO/IEC 8441/1:1991, Information technology - High Density Digital Recording
(HDDR) - Part 1: Unrecorded magnetic tape for HDDR applications.

1.1.5 ISO/IEC 8441/2:1991, Information technology - High Density Digital Recording
(HDDR) - Part 2: Guide for interchange practice.

1.1.6 ANSI INCITS 175-1999, 19 mm Type ID-1 Recorded Instrumentation - Digital Cassette
Tape Format (formerly ANSI X3.175-1990).

2.0 Double-Density Longitudinal Recording
Wide band double-density analog recording standards allowing recording of up to 4 MHz
signals at 3048 mm/s (120 in./s) are included in these standards. For interchange purposes, either
narrow track widths 0.635 mm (25 mils) must be employed, or other special heads must be used.
These requirements are necessary because of the difficulty in maintaining individual head-
segment gap-azimuth alignment across a head close enough to keep each track's response within
the 2-dB variation allowed by the standards. Moreover, at the lower tape speeds employed in
double-density recording, the 38-mm (1.5-in.) spacing employed in interlaced head assemblies
results in interchannel time displacement variations between odd and even tracks that may be
unacceptable for some applications. Therefore, it was decided that a 14-track in-line
configuration on 25.4-mm (1-in.) tape should be adopted as a standard. This configuration
results in essentially the same format as head number one of the 28-track interlaced configuration
in the standards.

D-1
D-2
2.1 The 14-track interlaced heads are not compatible with tapes produced on an in-line
standard configuration. If tapes must be interchanged, either a cross-configuration dubbing may
be required or a change of head assemblies on the reproducing machine is necessary.

2.2 High energy magnetic tape is required for double-density systems. Such tapes are
available but may require special testing for applications requiring a low number of dropouts per
track.

2.2.1 Other Track Configurations. The previously referenced standards in paragraph 1.0
include configurations resulting in 7, 14, and 21 tracks in addition to the 14-track and 28-track
configurations listed in this Appendix. The high-density digital recording (HDDR) standards
also reference an 84-track configuration on 50.8-mm (2in.) tape. Figure D-1 and Table D-1
show the 7-track on 12.7-mm (1/2-in.) tape, Table D-2 shows the 14-track on 12.7-mm (1/2-in.)
tape, and Table D-3 shows the 42-track on 25.4-mm (1in.) tape configurations.

2.2.2 High-Density PCM Recording. High-density digital recording systems are available
from most instrumentation recorder manufacturers. Such systems will record at linear packing
densities of 33 000-bits-per-inch or more per track. Special systems are available for error
detection and correction with overhead penalties depending on the type and the sophistication of
the system employed. The HDDR documents listed in paragraph 1.0 of this Appendix reference
six different systems that have been produced; others are available.


D
-
3

Figure D-1. Record and reproduce head and head segment identification and location (7-track interlaced system).

TABLE D-1. DIMENSIONS - RECORDED TAPE FORMAT
7 TRACKS INTERLACED ON 12.7-MM (1/2 IN.) WIDE TAPE
(Refer to Figure D-7a)
Parameters Millimeters Inches
Maximum Minimum
Track Width 1.397 1.143 0.050 0.005
Track Spacing 1.778 0.070
Head Spacing:
Fixed Heads 38.125 38.075 1.500 0.001
Adjustable Heads 38.151 38.049 1.500 0.002
Edge Margin, Minimum 0.127 0.005
Reference Track
Location 1.067 0.965 0.040 0.002
Track Location
Tolerance 0.051 0.051 0.002
Location of nth track
Track Number Millimeters Inches
Maximum Minimum
1 (Reference) 0.000 0.000 0.000
2 1.829 1.727 0.070
3 3.607 3.505 0.140
4 5.385 5.283 0.210
5 7.163 7.061 0.280
6 8.941 8.839 0.350
7 10.719 10.617 0.420

D-4

14 TRACKS INTERLACED ON 12.7-MM (1/2 IN.) WIDE TAPE
Maximum Minimum
Track Width 0.660 0.610 0.025 0.001
Head Spacing:
Fixed Heads 38.125 38.075 1.500 0.001
Reference Track
Location 0.546 0.470 0.0200
0.001
Track Location
Tolerance 0.038 0.038 0.0015
Location of n
th
track
Maximum Minimum
1 (Reference) 0.000 0.000 0.000
2 0.927 0.851 0.035
3 1.816 1.740 0.070
4 2.705 2.629 0.105
5 3.594 3.518 0.140
6 4.483 4.407 0.175
7 5.372 5.292 0.210
8 6.261 6.185 0.245
9 7.150 7.074 0.280
10 8.039 7.963 0.315
11 8.928 8.852 0.350
12 9.817 9.741 0.385
13 10.706 10.630 0.420
14 11.595 11.519 0.455
D-5

42 TRACKS INTERLACED ON 25.4-MM (1-IN.) WIDE TAPE
Maximum Minimum
Track Width 0.483 0.432 0.018 0.001
Head Spacing:
Fixed Heads 38.125 38.075 1.500 0.001
Reference Track
Location 0.737 0.660 0.0275
0.015
Track Location
Tolerance 0.025 0.025 0.0000
Maximum Minimum
1 (Reference) 0.000 0.000 0.000
2 0.610 0.559 0.023
3 1.194 1.143 0.046
4 1.778 1.727 0.069
5 2.362 2.311 0.092
6 2.946 2.896 0.115
7 3.531 3.480 0.138
8 4.115 4.064 0.161
9 4.699 4.648 0.184
10 5.283 5.232 0.207
11 5.867 5.817 0.230
12 6.452 6.401 0.253
13 7.036 6.985 0.276
14 7.620 7.569 0.299
15 8.204 8.153 0.322
16 8.788 8.738 0.345
(Continued on next page)
D-6

TABLE D-3 (contd.) DIMENSIONS - RECORDED TAPE FORMAT
42 Tracks Interlaced on 25.4-mm (1-in.) Wide Tape
Track Number
Millimeters
Inches
Maximum Minimum
17 9.373 9.322 0.368
18 9.957 9.906 0.391
19 10.541 10.490 0.414
20 11.125 11.074 0.437
21 11.709 11.659 0.460
22 12.294 12.243 0.483
23 12.878 12.827 0.506
24 13.462 13.411 0.529
25 14.046 13.995 0.552
26 14.630 14.580 0.575
27 15.215 15.164 0.598
28 15.799 15.748 0.621
29 16.383 16.332 0.664
30 16.967 16.916 0.667
31 17.551 17.501 0.690
32 18.136 18.085 0.713
33 18.720 18.660 0.736
34 19.304 19.253 0.759
35 19.888 19.837 0.782
36 20.472 20.422 0.805
37 21.057 21.006 0.828
38 21.641 21.590 0.851
39 22.225 22.174 0.874
40 22.809 22.758 0.897
41 23.393 23.343 0.920
42 23.978 23.927 0.943
D-7
3.0 Serial High-Density Digital Recording (HDDR)
The following subparagraphs give some background for selecting the bi-phase and
randomized non-return-to-zero-level (RNRZ-L) systems specified in subparagraph 20.3, of this
document.

3.1 Serial HDDR is a method of recording digital data on a magnetic tape where the digital
data is applied to one track of the recording system as a bi-level signal. The codes recommended
for serial HDDR recording of telemetry data are Bi-L and randomized NRZ-L (RNRZ-L) (refer
to paragraph 20.0).

3.2 In preparing paragraph 20.0, the following codes were considered: Delay Modulation
(Miller Code), Miller Squared, Enhanced NRZ, NRZ Level, NRZ Mark, and NRZ Space. These
codes are not recommended for interchange applications at the bit rates given in paragraph 20.0.

3.3 The properties of the Bi-L and RNRZ-L codes relevant to serial HDDR and the methods
for generating and decoding RNRZ-L are described next. Recording with bias is required for
interchange applications because reproduce amplifier phase and amplitude equalization
adjustments for tapes recorded without bias usually differ from those required for tapes recorded
with bias.

3.4 The Bi-L and RNRZ-L codes were selected for this standard because the "level"
versions are easier to generate and are usually available as outputs from bit synchronizers.
"Mark" and "Space" codes also have about twice as many errors as the level codes for the same
signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). If polarity insensitivity is a major consideration, agreement between
interchange parties should be obtained before these codes are used.

3.5 Some characteristics of the Bi-L code favorable to serial HDDR are listed in the
following subparagraphs.

3.5.1 Only a small proportion of the total signal energy occurs near dc.

3.5.2 The maximum time between transitions is a 1-bit period.

3.5.3 The symbols for one and zero are antipodal, meaning that the symbols are exact
opposites of each other. Therefore, the bit error probability versus SNR performance is
optimum.

3.5.4 The Bi-L can be decoded using existing bit synchronizers.

3.5.5 The Bi-L is less sensitive to misadjustments of bias and reproducer equalizers than most
other codes.

3.5.6 The Bi-L performs well at low tape speeds and low bit rates.

D-8
3.6 The most unfavorable characteristic of the Bi-L code is that it requires approximately
twice the bandwidth of NRZ. Consequently, the maximum bit packing density that can be
recorded on magnetic tape is relatively low.

3.7 Characteristics of the RNRZ-L code which favor its use for serial HDDR are included in
the following subparagraphs.

3.7.1 The RNRZ-L requires approximately one-half the bandwidth of Bi-L.

3.7.2 The symbols for one and zero are antipodal; therefore, the bit error probability versus
SNR performance is optimum.

3.7.3 The RNRZ-L decoder is self-synchronizing.

3.7.4 The RNRZ-L data can be bit synchronized and signal conditioned using existing bit
synchronizers with the input code selector set to NRZ-L.

3.7.5 The RNRZ-L code is easily generated and decoded.

3.7.6 The RNRZ-L data can be easily decoded in the reverse mode of tape playback.

3.7.7 The RNRZ-L data are bit detected and decoded using a clock at the bit rate. Therefore,
the phase margin is much larger than that of codes that require a clock at twice the bit rate for bit
detection.

3.7.8 The RNRZ-L code does not require overhead bits.

3.8 Unfavorable characteristics of the RNRZ-L code for serial HDDR are described in the
following subparagraphs.

3.8.1 Long runs of bits without a transition are possible, although the probability of occurrence
is low, and the maximum run length can be limited by providing transitions in each data word.

3.8.2 Each isolated bit error that occurs after the data has been randomized causes three bit
errors in the derandomized output data.

3.8.3 The decoder requires 15 consecutive error-free bits to establish and reestablish error-free
operation.

3.8.4 The RNRZ-L bit stream can have a large low frequency content. Consequently,
reproducing data at tape speeds which produce PCM bit rates less than 200 kb/s is not
recommended unless a bit synchronizer with specially designed dc and low frequency restoration
circuitry is available.

D-9
3.9 Randomizer for RNRZ-L. the randomizer is implemented with a network of shift
registers and modulo-2 adders (exclusive-OR gates). The RNRZ-L bit stream is generated by
adding (modulo-2) the reconstructed NRZ-L PCM data to the modulo-2 sum of the outputs of the
14th and 15th stages of a shift register. The output RNRZ-L stream is also the input to the shift
register (see Figure D-2).

Figure D-2. Randomizer block diagram.

1 2 3
15 Stage
Shift Register
13 14 15
NRZ-L Input
+

A

Boolean Expression:
D = A

B

C
Output
D
+

B

C
Bit Rate Clock
Input

RNRZ-L

3.9.1 The properties of an RNRZ-L bit stream are similar to the properties of a pseudo-random
sequence. A 15-stage RNRZ-L encoder will generate a maximal length pseudo-random
sequence of 2
15
1 (32,767) bits if the input data consists only of zeros and there is at least a
single one in the shift register. A maximal length pseudo-random sequence is also generated
when the input data consists only of ones and the shift register contains at least a single zero.
However, if the shift register contains all zeros at the moment that the input bit stream is all
zeros, the RNRZ-L output bit stream will also be all zeros. The converse is also true, meaning
that when the shift register is filled with ones and the input bit stream is all ones, the RNRZ-L
output bit stream will also be all ones. In these two cases, the contents of the shift register does
not change and the output data is not randomized.

However, the randomizer is not permanently locked-up in this state because a change in
the input data will again produce a randomized output. In general, if the input bit stream
D-10
contains runs of X bits without a transition with a probability of occurrence of p(X), the output
will contain runs having a length of up to (X+15) bits with a probability equal to (2
-15
p(X)).
Therefore, the output can contain long runs of bits without a transition, but the probability of
occurrence is low.

3.9.2 The RNRZ-L bit stream is decoded (derandomized) by adding (modulo-2) the
reconstructed RNRZ-L bit stream to the modulo-2 sum of the outputs of the 14th and 15th stages
of the shift register. The reconstructed RNRZ-L bit stream is the input to the shift register (see
Figure D-3). The RNRZ-L data that is reproduced using the reverse playback mode of operation
is decoded by adding (modulo-2) the reconstructed RNRZ-L bit stream to the modulo-2 sum of
the outputs of the 1st and 15th stages of the shift register (see Figure D-3). The net effect is that
the decoding shift register runs "backwards" with respect to the randomizing shift register.

3.9.3 Although the RNRZ-L decoder is self-synchronizing, 15 consecutive error-free bits must
be loaded into the shift register before the output data will be valid. A bit slip will cause the
decoder to lose synchronization, and 15 consecutive error-free data bits must again be loaded
into the shift register before the output data is valid. The decoded output data, although correct,
will contain the bit slip causing a shift in the data with respect to the frame synchronization
pattern. Therefore, frame synchronization must be reacquired before the output provides
meaningful data.

3.9.4 The RNRZ-L decoding system has an error multiplication factor of 3 for isolated bit
errors (separated from adjacent bit errors by at least 15 bits). An isolated bit error introduced
after randomization will produce 3 errors in the output data; the original bit in error, plus two
additional errors 14 and 15 bits later. In addition, a burst of errors occurring after the data has
been randomized will produce a burst of errors in the derandomized output. The number of
errors in the output depends on the distribution of errors in the burst and can be greater than,
equal to, or less than the number of errors in the input to the derandomizer. However, the
derandomization process always increases the number of bits between the first and last error in
the burst by 15. Errors introduced prior to randomization are not affected by either the
randomizer or the derandomizer. The reverse decoder has the same bit error properties as the
forward decoder.

3.9.5 Input data containing frequent long runs of bits without transitions creates potential dc
and low frequency restoration problems in PCM bit synchronizers because of the low frequency
cutoff of direct recorder and reproducer systems. The restoration problem can be minimized by
reproducing the data at tape speeds that produce a bit rate for which the maximum time between
transitions is less than 100 microseconds. Additional methods of minimizing these effects
include selecting bit synchronizers containing special dc and low frequency restoration circuitry
or recording data using Bi-L code.
D-11
D-12
Bit Rate Clock Input
15 - Stage
Shift Register
1 2 3
13 14 15
Reverse
RNRZ-L Data
Input From
Bit Sync
Playback
Forward
Playback

D B
C
A
1

Decoded Data
Output (NRZ-L)
Boolean Expression:

With input data A into randomizer,

Error-Free RNRZ-L Data, D = A B C (see Figure D-2)

A
1
= D B C = A B C B C

= A B B C C But B B = 0
C C = 0

Therefore:
A
1
= A 0 0 = A

Figure D-3. Randomized NRZ-L decoder block diagram.
3.9.6 The power spectra of the RNRZ-L and Bi-L codes are shown below in Figure D-4. The
power spectral density of RNRZ-L is concentrated at frequencies that are less than one-half the
bit rate. The power spectral density of Bi-L is concentrated at frequencies in a region around
0.75 times the bit rate. The concentration of energy in the low-frequency region (when using the
RNRZ-L code) has the effect of reducing the SNR as well as creating baseline wander, which the
bit synchronizer must follow. Therefore, reproducing data at tape speeds which produce PCM
bit rates of less than 200 kb/s is not recommended when using RNRZ-L unless a bit synchronizer
with specially designed dc and low frequency restoration circuitry is available.

3.9.7 Alignment of the reproducer system is very important to reproducing high quality PCM
data (i.e. data with the lowest possible bit error probability). A PCM signature using the
standard 2047-bit pseudo-random pattern, recorded on the leader or the trailer tape, provides a
good method for reproducer alignment. When a pseudo-random bit error detection system is not
available or when a PCM signature signal is not recorded, the recommended procedure for
reproducer alignment involves the use of the eye pattern technique. The eye pattern is the result
of superpositioning the zeros and ones in the PCM bit stream. The eye pattern is displayed on an
oscilloscope by inserting the raw reproduced bit stream into the vertical input and the
reconstructed bit-rate clock into the external synchronization input of the oscilloscope. The
reproducer head azimuth, amplitude equalizers, and phase equalizers are then adjusted to
produce the eye pattern with the maximum height and width opening.

Figure D-4. Random PCM power spectra.
D-13
3.9.8 Sample eye patterns are shown in Figure D-5a and Figure D-5b. Figure D-5a shows a
Bi-L eye pattern at a recorded bit packing density of 15 kb/in (450 kb/s at 30 in./s).
Figure D-5b shows an RNRZ-L eye pattern at a recorded bit packing density of 25 kb/in
(750 kb/s at 30 in/s).

Figure D-5a. Bi-L at bit packing density of 15 kb/in.

Figure D-5b. RNRZ-L at bit packing density of 25 kb/in.
D-14
4.0 Head Parameters
The following subparagraphs describe the head parameters.

4.1 Gap Scatter. Refer to the definitions in paragraph 6.2 in Chapter 6. Gap scatter contains
components of azimuth misalignment and deviations from the average line defining the azimuth.
Since both components affect data simultaneity from record to reproduce, the gap scatter
measurement is the inclusive distance containing the combined errors. Because azimuth
adjustment affects the output of wide band systems, a 5.08-m (0.0002-in.) gap scatter is
allowed for such recorders and reproducers. A 2.54-m (0.0001-in.) gap scatter is recommended
for fixed-head systems (see Figure D-7c).

4.2 Head Polarity. The requirement that a positive pulse at a record amplifier input generate
a south-north-north-south magnetic sequence and that a south-north-north-south magnetic
sequence on tape produce a positive pulse at the reproduce amplifier output, still leaves two
interdependent parameters unspecified. These parameters are (1) polarity inversion or non-
inversion in record and playback amplifiers and (2) record or playback head winding sense. For
the purpose of head replacement, it is necessary that these parameters be determined by the user
so that an unsuspected polarity inversion, on tape or off tape, will not occur after heads are
replaced.

5.0 Record Level
The standard record level is established as the input level of a sinusoidal signal set at the
record level set frequency which, when recorded, produces a signal containing 1 percent third
harmonic distortion at the output of a properly terminated reproduce amplifier (see sub-
paragraph 5.3.8.2 of Volume III, RCC Document 118). A one percent harmonic distortion
content is achieved when the level of the third harmonic component of the record level set
frequency is 40 1 dB below the level of a sinusoidal signal of 0.3 upper band edge (UBE)
which is recorded at the standard record level. Standard test and operating practice is to record
and reproduce sinusoidal signals at 0.1 and 0.3 UBE and adjust the equalizers as necessary to
establish the reproduced output at 0.3 UBE to within 1.0 dB of the output at 0.1 UBE. Then a
1-V rms signal at the record level set frequency is applied to the record amplifier input and the
record and reproduce level controls are adjusted until the reproduced output contains 1 percent
third harmonic distortion at a level of 1 V rms.

The optimum level for recording data will seldom be equal to the standard record level.
Signals having noise-like spectral distribution such as baseband multiplexes of FM subcarriers
contain high crest factors so that it may be necessary (as determined in paragraph 1.1, Noise
Power Ratio (NPR) Test, Volume IV, RCC Document 118, Test Methods for Data Multiplex
Equipment) to record at levels below the standard record level. On the other hand, for
predetection and HDDR recording, signals may have to be recorded above the standard record
level to give optimum performance in the data system.
D-15
6.0 Tape Crossplay Considerations
Figure D-6 illustrates the typical departure from optimum frequency response that may
result when crossplaying wide band tapes that were recorded with heads employing different
record-head gap lengths. Line AA is the idealized output-versus-frequency plot of a machine
with record bias and record level, set upper IRIG standards, using a 3.05-m (120-microinch)
record-head gap length and a 1.02-m (40-microinch) reproduce-head gap length. Lines BB and
CC represent the output response curves of the same tapes recorded on machines with 5.08-m
(200-microinch) and 1.27-m (50-microinch) record-head gap lengths. Each of these recorders
was set up individually per IRIG requirements. The tapes were then reproduced on the machine
having a 1.02-m (40-microinch) reproduce-head gap length without readjusting its reproduce
equalization.

6.1 The output curves have been normalized to 0 dB at the 0.1 UBE frequency for the
purpose of clarity. The normalized curves may be expected to exhibit a 2.0 dB variance in
relative output over the passband. The tape recorded with the shortest head segment gap length
will provide the greatest relative output at the UBE.

6.2 While the examples shown are from older equipment with record gap lengths outside the
limits recommended in subparagraph 13.4.4, they illustrate the importance of the record gap
length in tape interchange applications.

7.0 Standard Tape Signature Procedures
The following subparagraphs describe the recording and playback procedures for the
PCM signature and the swept-frequency signature.

7.1 PCM Signature Recording Procedure. Test equipment should be configured as described
in paragraph 2.1, Volume IV, RCC Document 118. The configuration should simulate the
operational link as closely as possible to include the same RF frequency, deviation, bit rate, code
type, predetection frequency, receiver bandwidth, and recorder speed.

7.1.1 While recording the pseudo-random data at standard record level, adjust the signal
generator output level until approximately one error per 10
5
bits is obtained on the error counter.

7.1.2 Record 30 seconds of the pseudo-random data at the beginning or end of the tape for each
data track. A separate 30-second tape signature is recommended for each different data format.

7.1.3 The content, track assignments, and location on the tape leader and trailer of signature
signals should be noted on the tape label.
D-16
D-17
Gap Length

+4 Record Head = 1.27m
(50 in.)

Reproduce Head + 1.02 m
Figure D-6. Tape crossplay.

7.2 PCM Signature Playback Procedure. The following subparagraphs explain the playback
procedure.

7.2.1 Optimize playback equipment such as receiver tuning and bit synchronizer setup for data
being reproduced.

7.2.2 Reproduce the tape signature and observe the error rate on the error counter.

7.2.3 Optimize head azimuth for maximum signal output and minimum errors.

7.2.4 Initiate corrective action if more than one error per 10
4
bits is obtained.

7.2.5 Repeat for each data track.
+2 (40in.)
x C

0 0 Record Head = 3.05 m
(120 in.)
Reproduce Head = 1.02 m
(40in.)
2

4
Record Head = 5.08 m
(200 in.)
6 Reproduce Head = 1.02 m
(40 in.)

10K 20K 50K 100K 200K 500K 1000K 2000K

Frequency (Hz)

B

A A

B
Cx
O
u
t
p
u
t

(
d
B
)

7.3 Swept Frequency Signature Recording Procedure. The following subparagraphs describe
the recording procedure for the swept-frequency signature.

7.3.1 Patch a sweep-frequency oscillator output to all prime data tracks up to 6 on 7-track
recorders or up to 13 on 14-track recorders (see Appendix A, Volume III of RCC
Document 118). As a minimum, patch the sweep oscillator to one odd and one even track.

7.3.2 Connect the sync output of the sweep oscillator to a track not used for sweep signals,
preferably an outside track.

7.3.3 Record the signature signals for a minimum of 30 seconds at standard record level.

Record levels may be either preadjusted or quickly adjusted in all tracks
during the first few seconds of the signature recording.

7.3.4 Note the content, track assignments, and location on the leader or trailer tape of signature
signals on the tape label.

7.4 Swept-Frequency Signature Playback Procedure. The following subparagraphs define
the steps for the playback procedure.

7.4.1 Connect the sync track output of the reproducer to the sync input of the scope.

7.4.2 Select an odd-numbered sweep-signal track and connect the output of the reproducer to
the vertical input of the scope. Playback the sweep signal and adjust the scope gain for an
amplitude of approximately 10 minor vertical divisions about the center baseline. Adjust the
odd-track azimuth for maximum amplitude of the highest frequency segment (extreme right of
the sweep pattern).

7.4.3 Observe amplitude variations through the sweep pattern and adjust the equalization, if
necessary, to maintain the amplitude within the required tolerance over the required frequency
range.

A decrease of sweep signal amplitude to about 0.7 represents a
3-dB loss.

7.4.4 Repeat the playback procedure in the preceding paragraphs paragraph 7.4.2 and
paragraph 7.4.3 for azimuth and equalization adjustments of an even-numbered tape track.

7.4.5 Repeat the procedure in paragraph 7.4.3 for equalization only of other selected prime
data tracks, as required.
D-18

8.0 Equipment Required for Swept-Frequency Procedures
Equipment required at the recording site consists of a sweep-frequency oscillator having
a constant amplitude sweep range of approximately 400 Hz through 4.4 MHz with frequency
markers at 62.5, 125, 250, and 500 kHz and 1.0, 2.0, and 4.0 MHz. The sweep range to 4.4 MHz
may be used for all tape speeds because the bandwidth of the recorder and reproducer will
attenuate those signal frequencies beyond its range. The sweep rate should be approximately
25 Hz. Care should be exercised in the installation of the sweep generator to ensure a flat
response of the sweep signal at the input terminals of the recorder. Appropriate line-driver
amplifiers may be required for long cable runs or the low impedance of paralleled inputs.

8.1 A stepped-frequency oscillator could be substituted for the sweep-frequency generator at
the recording location. Recommended oscillator wavelengths at the mission tape speed are
7.62 mm (300 mils), 3.81 mm (150 mils), 0.254 mm (10 mils), 0.0254 mm (1 mil), 0.0127 mm
(0.5 mil), 0.0064 mm (0.25 mil), 0.0032 mm (0.125 mil), 0.0025 mm (0.1 mil), 0.0020 mm
(0.08 mil), and 0.0015 mm (0.06 mil).

8.2 Equipment required at the playback site consists of an ordinary oscilloscope having a flat
frequency response from 400 Hz through 4.4 MHz.

9.0 Fixed-Frequency Plus White Noise Procedure
The signature used in this method is the same for all applications. For direct recording of
subcarrier multiplexes, only static nonlinearity (nonlinearity which is independent of frequency)
is important for crosstalk control. Subparagraph 17.2 provides a reference level for static
nonlinearity. All formats of data recording are sensitive to signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).
Predetection recording and HDDR are sensitive to equalization. The following signature
procedure satisfies all the above requirements.

9.1 Record a sine-wave frequency of 0.1 UBE (see Table D-6) with the following
amplitudes.

9.1.1 Equal to the standard record level for direct recording of subcarrier multiplexes and
HDDR (see subparagraph 17.2).

9.1.2 Equal to the carrier amplitude to be recorded for pre-detection recording of PCM/FM,
PCM/PM, FM/FM, and PAM/FM.

9.2 Record flat band-limited white noise of amplitude 0.7 of the true rms value of the 0-dB
standard record level as described in subparagraph 17.2. Noise must be limited by a low-pass
filter just above the UBE.

9.3 Record with zero input (input terminated in 75 ohms). The three record steps previously
described can consist of 10 seconds each. The spectra can be obtained with three manually
initiated sweeps of less than a second each, because no great frequency resolution is required.
D-19
All of the spectrum analyzer parameters can be standardized and set in (inputted) prior to
running the mission tape.

10.0 Signature Playback and Analysis
Before analyzing the signature, the reproducer azimuth should be adjusted. With the
short signature, it is probably more convenient to use the data part of the recording for this
purpose. If predetection recording is used, the azimuth can be adjusted to maximize the output
as observed on the spectrum analyzer or on a voltmeter connected to the output. If baseband
recording is used, the azimuth can be adjusted to maximize the spectrum at the upper end of the
band. A spectrum analyzer should be used to reproduce, store, and photograph the spectra
obtained from paragraphs 9.1, 9.2, and 9.3 above. The spectrum analyzer input level of zero
should be stored and photographed.

10.1 It is evident that any maladjustment of the recorder and reproducer or magnetization of
the heads will result in the decrease of SNR across the band and will be seen from the stored
spectra or photograph.

10.2 By having a photograph of the spectra, amplitude equalization can be accomplished
without shuttling the mission tape as follows.

10.2.1 Use an auxiliary tape (not the mission tape, but preferably the same type tape). With a
white-noise input signal band limited, adjust the amplitude equalization of the recorder and
reproducer at the tape dubbing or data reduction site and photograph the output spectrum (see
paragraph 9.0 of this appendix).

10.2.2 Compare this photo with the photo made from the signature. Note the difference at
several points across the band.

10.2.3 Using the auxiliary tape, adjust the amplitude equalization to compensate for the
differences noted.

10.2.4 Recheck with the mission tape to verify that the desired amplitude equalization has been
achieved.

10.3 If the phase equalization is to be checked, a square wave signal can be added to the
signature in accordance with the manufacturer's specification (see Volume III, RCC
Document 118). The same procedure that is recommended for amplitude equalization can be
used, except the procedure is based on oscillograms.
D-20
11.0 Recording and Playback Alignment Procedures
When using standard preamble (or postamble), see paragraph 21.0.

11.1 Recording of Preamble for Direct Electronics Alignment.

11.1.1 Patch a square wave generator output set to 1/11 band edge to all tracks having direct
electronics or initiate procedure for recording internally generated 1/11 band edge square wave
according to manufacturer's instructions.

11.1.2 If the preamble will be used for a manual adjustment, record for a minimum of 30
seconds at the standard record level and tape speed to be used for data recording.

If the preamble will be used only for automatic alignment, record at the standard record level
and tape speed to be used for data recording for a sufficient time as specified by the
manufacturer of the playback recorder reproducer or as agreed by the interchange parties.

11.2 Playback of Preamble for Direct Electronics Alignment. For systems so equipped,
initiate automatic alignment procedure per manufacturer's instructions. The procedure for
manual adjustment is described in the following subparagraphs.

11.2.1 Display fundamental and odd harmonics of the square wave (third through eleventh) of
selected odd numbered direct track near center of head stack on the spectrum analyzer. Adjust
azimuth by peaking output amplitude of the third through eleventh harmonic. Final adjustment
should peak the eleventh harmonic.

11.2.2 Repeat the above subparagraph for even numbered direct track. (Only one track is
necessary for a double density, 14-track, in-line system.)

11.2.3 Observe frequency response across the band pass on selected track and correct if
necessary. For a flat response, the third harmonic will be 1/3 of the amplitude of the
fundamental, fifth harmonic 1/5 the amplitude, and so on. A convenient method is to compare
the recorder/reproducer output with that of a square wave generator patched directly to the
spectrum analyzer.

An alternate, but less accurate, method is to optimize the square wave as
displayed on an oscilloscope rather than a spectrum analyzer.

11.2.4 Repeat the previous subparagraph for each direct track.

11.2.5 Display square wave on an oscilloscope. Adjust phase for best square wave response as
shown in Figure D-7.

11.2.6 Repeat the previous subparagraph for each direct track.
D-21

Equal
Amplitude
BAD GOOD BAD
Figure D-7. Square wave responses.

11.3 Recording of Preamble for FM Electronics Alignment. If available, initiate procedure for
recording internally generated 1/11 band edge square wave and 1.414 Vdc per manufacturer's
instructions. Otherwise, patch a square wave generator output to all tracks having FM
electronics. A near dc signal may be obtained by setting the square wave generator to 0.05 Hz
and 1.414 V or by using a separate dc source.

11.3.1 If the preamble will be used for manual alignment, record at least one cycle of
the 0.05 Hz square wave at 1.414 V or a positive and negative 1.414 Vdc for a minimum of
10 seconds each at the tape speed to be used for data recording. Next, record a 1/11 band edge
square wave for a minimum of 20 seconds.

11.3.2 If the preamble will be used only for automatic alignment, record the above sequence for
a sufficient time as specified by the manufacturer of the playback recorder/reproducer or as
agreed by the interchange parties.

11.4 Playback of Preamble for FM Electronics Alignment. For systems so equipped, initiate
automatic alignment procedure per manufacturer's instructions. The procedure for manual
adjustment is described in the next subparagraphs.

11.4.1 Check and adjust for 0-V output at center frequency per RCC Document 118, Test
Methods for Telemetry Systems and Subsystems, Volume III, Test Methods for
Recorder/Reproducer Systems and Magnetic Tape.

11.4.2 Use dc voltmeter to verify a full positive and negative output voltage on the selected
track and correct if necessary.

11.4.3 Display fundamental and odd harmonics of the square wave (third through eleventh) on
the spectrum analyzer.

11.4.4 Observe frequency response per subparagraph 11.2.3.

D-22
11.4.5 Repeat subparagraphs 11.4.1 through 11.4.3 for each FM track.

12.0 General Considerations for Longitudinal Recording
Standard recording techniques, tape speeds, and tape configurations are required to
provide maximum interchange of recorded telemetry magnetic tapes between the test ranges.
Any one of the following methods of information storage or any compatible combination may be
used simultaneously: direct recording, predetection recording, FM recording, or PCM recording.
Double-density recording may be used when the length of recording time is critical; however, it
must be used realizing that performance parameters such as signal-to-noise ratio (SNR),
crosstalk, and dropouts may be degraded (see paragraph 2.0).

12.1 Tape Speeds. The standard tape speeds for instrumentation magnetic tape recorders are
shown in Table D-4.

12.2 Tape Width. The standard nominal tape width is 25.4 mm (1 in.). (see Table D-15, Tape
Dimensions).

12.3 Record and Reproduce Bandwidths. For the purpose of these standards, two system
bandwidth classes are designated: wide band and double density (see Table D-4). Interchange of
tapes between the bandwidth classes is NOT recommended.

13.0 Recorded Tape Format
The parameters related to recorded tape format and record and reproduce head
configurations determine compatibility between systems that are vital to interchangeability
(crossplay) of recorded magnetic tapes. The reader is referred to the definitions in Chapter 6,
paragraph 6.2, Figure D-7a, Figure D-7b, and Figure D-7c. The reader is also referred to, Table
D-5, Table D-6, Table D-7, and Figure D-8

13.1 Track Width and Spacing. Refer to Figure 6-1, Table D-5, Table D-6, and Table D-7.

13.2 Track Numbering. The tracks on a tape are numbered consecutively from track 1
through track n with track 1 located nearest the tape reference edge as shown in Figure D-7a.

13.3 Data Spacing. For interlaced formats, the spacing on tape between simultaneous events
on odd and even tracks is nominally 38.1 mm (1.5 in.). See paragraph 13.4.1.

13.4 Head Placement. The standard technique for wide band and 28-track double density is
to interlace the heads, both the record and the reproduce, and to provide alternate tracks in
separate heads. Thus, to record on all tracks of a standard width tape, two interlaced record
heads are used. To reproduce all tracks of a standard width tape, two interlaced reproduce heads
are used. For 14-track double density, the standard technique uses one in-line record head and
one in-line reproduce head.

13.4.1 Head Placement, Interlaced. Two heads comprise the record-head pair or the reproduce-
head pair. Mounting of either head pair is done in such a manner that the center lines drawn
D-23
through the head gaps are parallel and spaced 38.10 mm 0.05 (1.500 in. 0.002) apart, as shown
in Tables D-5 and D-7, for systems that include head azimuth adjustment. The dimension
between gap centerlines includes the maximum azimuth adjustment required to meet system
performance requirements. For systems with fixed heads (i.e., heads without an azimuth
adjustment), the spacing between gap centerlines shall be 38.10 mm 0.03 (1.500 in. 0.001)
(see Figure D-7b).

13.4.2 Head Identification and Location. A head segment is numbered to correspond to the
track number that segment records or reproduces. Tracks 1, 3, 5, . . . are referred to as the "odd"
head segments. Tracks 2, 4, 6, . . . are referred to as the even head segments. For interlaced
heads, the head containing the odd numbered segments (odd head) is the first head in a pair of
heads (record or reproduce) over which an element of tape passes when moving in the forward
record or reproduce direction (see Chapter 6, Figure 6-2).

13.4.3 In-Line Head Placement. An in-line head shall occupy the position of head number 1 in
an interlaced system.

13.4.4 Head Segment Location. Any head segment within a head shall be located within 0.05
mm (0.002 in.) of the nominal (dimension from table without tolerances) position required to
match the track location as shown in Figure 6-1, Table D-5, Table D-6, and Table D-7.

D-24

TABLE D-4. RECORD AND REPRODUCE PARAMETERS

Tape Speed
{mm/s (ips)}
3 dB Reproduce
Passband
KHz
(1)

Direct Record Bias
Set Frequency
{(UBE) kHz
(2)
}
Level Set Frequency
{10% of UBE (kHz)}
Wide Band (Overbias 2dB)
6096.0 (240 ) 0.8-4000 4000 400
3048.0 (120 ) 0.4-2000 2000 200
1524.0 ( 60 ) 0.4-1000 1000 100
762.0 ( 30 ) 0.4- 500 500 50
381.0 ( 15 ) 0.4- 250 250 25
190.5 ( 7-1/2) 0.4- 125 125 12.5
95.2 ( 3-3/4) 0.4- 62.5 62.5 6.25
47.6 ( 1-7/8) 0.4- 31.25 31.25 3.12

Double Density (Overbias 2 dB)

3048.0 (120 ) 2 -4000 4000 400
1524.0 ( 60 ) 2 -2000 2000 200
762.0 ( 30 ) 2 -1000 1000 100
381.0 ( 15 ) 2 - 500 500 50
190.0 ( 7-1/2) 1 - 250 250 25
95.2 ( 3-3/4) 0.5- 125 125 12.5
Notes:
1. Passband response reference is the output amplitude of a sinusoidal signal at the record
level set frequency recorded at standard record level. The record level set frequency is
ten percent of the upper band edge frequency (0.1 UBE).
2.

When setting record bias level, a UBE frequency input signal is employed. The signal
input level is set 5 to 6 dB below standard record level to avoid saturation effects
which could result in erroneous bias level settings. The record bias current is adjusted
for maximum reproduce output level and then increased until the output level decreases
by the number of dB indicated in the table (see paragraph 5.3.8.1 of Volume III, RCC
Document 118).

D-25

TABLE D-5. DIMENSIONS RECORDED TAPE FORMAT
14 TRACKS INTERLACED ON 25.4 MM (1 IN.) WIDE TAPE
(1)

Millimeters
Maximum Minimum
Inches Parameters
Track Width 1.397 1.143 0.050 0.005
Head Spacing
38.075 38.125 1.500 0.001 Fixed Heads
38.151 38.049 1.500 0.002 Adjustable Heads
0.279 1.011 Edge Margin, Minimum
Reference Track
1.168 1.067 0.044 0.002 Location
Track Location
0.051 0.051 0.002 Tolerance

Location of n
th
track
Maximum Minimum
1 (Reference) 0.000 0.000 0.000
2 1.829 1.727 0.070
3 3.607 3.505 0.140
4 5.385 5.283 0.210
5 7.163 7.061 0.280
6 8.941 8.839 0.350
7 10.719 10.617 0.420
8 12.497 12.395 0.490
9 14.275 14.173 0.560
10 16.053 15.951 0.630
11 17.831 17.729 0.700
12 19.609 19.507 0.770
13 21.387 21.285 0.840
14 23.165 23.063 0.910
Note 1. Refer to Figure D-7a.

D-26

14 TRACKS IN-LINE ON 25.4 MM (1 IN.) WIDE TAPE
(1)

Millimeters
Parameters
Maximum Minimum
Inches
Track Width 0.660 0.610 0.25 0.001
Head Spacing
Edge Margin, Minimum
(2)
1.118
0.044

Reference Track
Location 0.698 0.622 0.0260 0.0015
Track Location
Tolerance 0.038 0.038 0.0015
Maximum Minimum
1 (Reference) 0.000 0.000 0.000
2 1.816 1.740 0.070
3 3.594 3.518 0.140
4 5.372 5.296 0.210
5 7.150 7.074 0.280
6 8.928 8.852 0.350
7 10.706 10.630 0.420
8 12.484 12.408 0.490
9 14.262 14.186 0.560
10 16.040 15.964 0.630
11 17.818 17.742 0.700
12 19.596 19.520 0.770
13 21.374 21.298 0.840
14 23.152 23.076 0.910
Notes:
1. Refer to Figure D-7a.
2. Track location and spacing are the same as the odd tracks of the 28-track interlaced
format (see Table D-7). The minimum edge margin for track 1 is only 0.044 mm
(0.009 in.).

D-27
D-28

14 TRACKS INTERLACED ON 25.4 MM (1 IN.) WIDE TAPE
(1)

Parameters
Millimeters
Maximum Minimum
Inches
Track Width 0.660 0.610 0.25 0.001
Head Spacing
Fixed Heads 38.125 38.075 1.500 0.001
Edge Margin, Minimum
(2)
0.229 1.009
Reference Track
Location 0.699 0.622 0.0260 0.0015
Track Location
Tolerance 0.038 0.038 0.0015
Location of n
th
track
Track Number
Millimeters
Maximum Minimum
Inches
1 (Reference) 0.000 0.000 0.000
2 0.927 0.851 0.035
3 1.816 1.740 0.170
4 2.705 2.629 0.105
5 3.594 3.518 0.140
6 4.483 4.407 0.175
7 5.372 5.296 0.210
8 6.261 6.185 0.245
9 7.150 7.074 0.280
10 8.039 7.963 0.315
11 8.928 8.852 0.350
12 9.817 9.741 0.385
13 10.706 10.630 0.420
14 11.595 11.519 0.455
15 12.484 12.408 0.490
16 13.373 13.297 0.525
17 14.262 14.186 0.560
18 15.151 15.075 0.595
19 16.040 15.964 0.630
20 16.929 16.853 0.665
21 17.818 17.742 0.700
22 18.707 18.631 0.735
23 19.596 19.520 0.770
24 20.485 20.409 0.805
25 21.374 21.298 0.840
26 22.263 22.187 0.875
27 23.152 23.076 0.910
28 24.041 23.965 0.945
Notes:
1. Refer to Figure D-7a.
2. Track location and spacing for the odd tracks are same as the tracks of the 14-track inline format (see
Table D-6). Edge margin for track 1 is only 0.229 mm (0.009 in.).

D
-
2
9

Figure D-7a. Recorded tape format.


Figure D-7b. Head and head segment mechanical parameters.

D-30

D
-
3
1

Figure D-7c. Record and reproduce head and head segment identification and location (N-track interlaced system).

Figure D-8. PCM record and reproduce configuration.

D-32
14.0 Head and Head Segment Mechanical Parameters
The following describes the mechanical parameters of the head and head segments.

14.1 Gap Scatter. Gap scatter shall be 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) or less for 25.4 mm (1 in.) tape
(see Figure D-7c and paragraph 4.1 of this Appendix).

14.2 Head Segment Gap Azimuth Alignment. The head segment gap azimuth shall be
perpendicular to the head reference plane to within 0.29 mrad (1 minute of arc).

14.3 Head Tilt. The plane tangent to the front surface of the head at the center line of the head
segment gaps shall be perpendicular to the head reference plane within 0.29 mrad (1 minute of
arc) for wide band and double density recorders (see Figure D-7c).

14.4 Record-Head Segment Gap Parameters. The parameters for the length and azimuth
alignment are described in the following subparagraphs.

14.4.1 Record-Head Segment Gap Length. The record gap length (the perpendicular dimension
from the leading edge to the trailing edge of the gap) shall be 2.16 m 0.5 (85 microinch 20)
for wide band recorders and 0.89 m 0.12 (35 microinch 5) for double density recorders (see
Chapter 6, Figure 6-3 and paragraph 6.0 of this Appendix).

14.4.2 Record-Head Stack Gap Azimuth Alignment. The record-head stack azimuth shall be
perpendicular to the head reference surface to within 0.29 mrad (1 minute of arc). See
paragraph 1.2, Volume III, RCC Document 118 for suggested test procedure.

14.4.3 Reproduce-Head Segment Gap Azimuth Alignment. The reproduce-head segment
azimuth alignment shall match that of the record-head segment as indicated by reproducing a
UBE frequency signal on a selected track and setting the reproduce head azimuth for the
maximum output. At this azimuth setting, the output of any other track in the reproduce head
shall be within 2 dB of the output at its own optimum azimuth setting (see paragraph 1.3,
Volume III, RCC Document 118).

15.0 Head Polarity
Also refer to Chapter 1, Volume III, RCC Document 118 and paragraph 4.2 herein.

15.1 Record-Head Segment. Each record-head winding shall be connected to its respective
amplifier in such a manner that a positive going pulse referenced to system ground at the record
amplifier input will result in the generation of a specific magnetic pattern on a segment of tape
passing the record head in the normal direction of tape motion. The resulting magnetic pattern
shall consist of a polarity sequence of south-north-north-south.

15.2 Reproduce-Head Segment. Each reproduce-head segment winding shall be connected to
its respective amplifier in such a manner that an area of a tape track exhibiting a south-north-
north-south magnetic pattern will produce a positive going pulse with respect to system ground
at the output of the reproducer amplifier.

D-33

16.0 Magnetic Tape and Reel Characteristics
It is recommended that all recorder and reproducer systems at a particular test range be
calibrated for operational use against a reference tape of the type used by the range for each
bandwidth class of recorder and reproducer system. Additional supplementary procurement
specifications may be required to meet a particular operational requirement of the ranges.

16.1 Tape Width. The standard nominal tape width is 25.4 mm (1 in.) (see paragraph 25.0
(General Characteristics of Instrumentation Tapes and Reels), and Table D-15, Tape
Dimensions).

16.2 Tape Guiding. The tape guidance system restricts the tape angular motion to 0.15 mrad
(30 seconds of arc) as measured by the interchannel time displacement error (ITDE) of outer
tracks on the same head stack. Make sure the guidance system does not damage the tape.

17.0 Direct Record and Reproduce Systems
Direct recording is a method of recording information signals on magnetic tape using
high-frequency ac bias recording (see definitions at Chapter 6, paragraph 6.2). Two classes of
systems, wide band and double density, are included in these standards (see Table D-4).

17.1 Direct Record Parameters. The following subparagraphs describe the direct record
parameters.

17.1.1 The input impedance for wide band and double density recorders shall be 75 ohms
nominal across the specified band.

17.1.2 Input gain adjustment shall be provided to permit sine-wave signals of 0.35 to 3.5 V rms
to be adjusted to produce standard record level.

17.1.3 Ideally, the recorded flux level on tape versus frequency should be constant. To approach
this ideal, the record amplifier transfer characteristic is basically a constant current versus
frequency with a superimposed compensation characteristic to correct only for loss of recording
efficiency with frequency. Results of the test described in paragraph 1.8 Volume III, RCC
Document 118, with the output amplitude at the 2 percent upper band edge (UBE) frequency used
as the 0 dB reference, shall be no greater than the following:

Percent of UBE Frequency dB Difference

10 0.5
50 1.0
80 1.6
100 2.0

D-34
17.1.4 Record bias setting information is contained in Table D-4. The bias frequency shall be
greater than 3.5 times the highest direct record frequency for which the recorder and reproducer
system is designed.

17.2 Standard Record Level. The standard record level for direct record systems is the input
level of the record level set frequency, which produces an output signal containing one percent
third harmonic distortion. The conditions necessary to establish the standard record level include
appropriate selection of the sinusoidal reference frequency (record level set frequency) as
indicated in Table D-4 and proper reproduce amplifier termination as defined in Figure 1-10
Volume III, RCC Document 118. A one percent third-harmonic distortion content is achieved
when the level of the third harmonic of the record level set frequency is 40 dB 1 below the level
of a sinusoidal signal of 30 percent of UBE frequency which is recorded at the standard record
level (see paragraph 5.0, of this Appendix for information regarding standard test and operating
practices).

17.3 Reproduce Parameters. The following subparagraphs describe the reproduce parameters.

17.3.1 For wide band and double density recorders, the output impedance shall be 75 ohms
nominal across the specified passband.

17.3.2 When reproducing a signal at the record level set frequency (recorded at the standard
record level), the output level shall be a minimum of 1 V rms with a third harmonic distortion of
1 percent and a maximum second harmonic distortion of 0.5 percent when measured across a
resistive load of 75 ohms. Lack of proper output termination will not cause the reproduce
amplifier to oscillate.

17.4 Tape Speed and Flutter Compensation. The average or long-term tape speed must be the
same during record and reproduce to avoid frequency offsets, which may result in erroneous
data. To minimize this problem, a reference signal may be applied to the tape during record and
the signal used to servo-control the tape speed upon reproduce. However, because servo-control
systems have limited correction capabilities and to minimize the amount of equipment required
at the ranges, tape speeds and servo-control signals shall conform to the following standards.

17.4.1 The effective tape speed throughout the reel or any portion of the reel (in absence of
tape-derived servo-speed control) shall be within 0.2 percent of the standard speed as measured
by the procedures described in Chapter 1, Volume III, RCC Document 118.

17.4.2 Sinusoidal or square wave speed-control signals are recorded on the tape for the purpose
of servo-control of tape speed during playback. The operating level for speed-control signals
shall be 10 dB 5 below standard record level when mixed with other signals or standard record
level when recorded on a separate track.

17.4.3 The constant-amplitude speed-control signal shall be used on a separate track for
optimum servo-speed correction. The speed-control signal may be mixed with other signals if
recording requirements so demand and system performance permits. Mixing of the
speed-control signal with certain types of signals may degrade system performance for tapes

D-35
which are to be reproduced on tape transports with low time-base error capstan drive systems
(refer to manufacturer). Table D-8 lists speed-control signal frequencies. The speed-control
signal may also be used as a flutter correction signal.

17.4.4 Signals to be used for discriminator flutter correction systems are listed in Chapter 3,
Table 3-3 and Table D-8 of this Appendix. See subparagraph 17.4.3 of this appendix and
Chapter 3, Table 33 for restrictions on use of flutter correction signals.

18.0 Timing, Predetection, and Tape Signature Recording
Described in the following subparagraphs are timing signal, predetection, and tape
signature recording.

18.1 Timing Signal Recording. Modulated-carrier, time-code signals (IRIG A, IRIG B, and
IRIG G) are widely used and other formats are available. When recording IRIG B time-code
signals, care must be taken to ensure that low-frequency response to 100 Hz is provided. The
direct record, low frequency cutoff of most wide band recorders is 400 to 800 Hz. For these
systems, IRIG B time code signals should be recorded on an FM track or on an FM subcarrier.
The widest bandwidth subcarrier available should be employed to minimize time delay.
1
For
double density systems, all time code signals should be recorded on an FM track or an FM
subcarrier.

18.2 Predetection Recording. Predetection signals have been translated in frequency but not
demodulated. These signals will be recorded by direct (high frequency bias) recording.
Parameters for these signals are in Table D-9.

18.3 Tape Signature Recording. For data processing using wide band and double-density
recorders and reproducers, a tape signature recorded before or after the data, or both before and
after the data, provides a method of adjusting the reproducer head azimuth and reproduce
equalization. A means is also provided for verifying the proper operation of equipment such as
playback receivers and bit synchronizers used to retrieve the recorded data.

A pulse code modulation (PCM) signature is recommended where primarily PCM data is
recorded. A swept-frequency or white-noise signature may be used for other data such as
frequency division multiplexing (FDM) or wide band FM. The procedures for recording and
using these signatures are given in paragraph 22.0. A recommended preamble/ postamble signal
for recorder/reproducer alignment is included in paragraph 21.0.

1
Timing code formats are found in IRIG standard 200-98, IRIG Serial Time Formats and IRIG standard 205-87,
Parallel Binary and Parallel Binary Coded Decimal Time Code Formats.

D-36

TABLE D-8. CONSTANT-AMPLITUDE SPEED-CONTROL SIGNALS
(1)

Frequency
(2)
Tape Speed
(mm/s) (in./s) (kHz)
6096 (240 ) 400 0.01% 800 0.01%
3048 (120 ) 200 0.01% 400 0.01%
1524 ( 60 ) 100 0.01% 200 0.01%
762 ( 30 ) 50 0.01% 100 0.01%
381 ( 15 ) 25 0.01% 50 0.01%
190.5 ( 7-1/2) 12.5 0.01% 25 0.01%
95.5 ( 3-3/4) 6.5 0.01% 12.5 0.01%
47.6 ( 1-7/8) 3.125 0.01% 6.25 0.01%
Notes:
1. May also serve as discriminator flutter-correction reference signal (see Chapter 3, Table 33).

2. Either set of speed-control signals may be used primarily with wideband systems, but only the
higher set of frequencies is recommended for double density systems. When interchanging tapes,
care should be taken to ensure that the recorded speed-control signal is compatible with the
reproduce systems speed-control electronics.

Caution should be used when multiplexing other signals with the
speed-control signal. In the vicinity of the frequency of the
speed-control signal (fsc 10 percent), the level of individual extraneous
signals including spurious, harmonics, and noise must be 40 dB or more
below the level of the speed-control signal. A better procedure is to
leave one octave on either side of the speed-control signal free of other
signals.

D-37

TABLE D-9. PREDETECTION CARRIER PARAMETERS
Predetection Carrier
Tape Speed
Center Frequency
(1,2)

Wide Band Double Density A B
(mm/s) (in./s) mm/s (in./s)
(kHz) (kHz)
6096 (240) 3048.0 ( 120 ) 1800 2400
3048 (120) 1524.0 ( 60 ) 900 1200
1524 ( 60) 762.0 ( 30 ) 450.0 600
762 ( 30) 381.0 ( 15 ) 225.0 300
381 ( 15) 109.5 ( 7.5) 112.5 150
Notes:
1. The predetection record/playback passband is the carrier center frequency 66.7 percent.
2. Use center frequencies in column B when data bandwidth exceeds the capabilities of those
in column A.

19.0 FM Record Systems
For these FM record systems, the input signal modulates a voltage-controlled oscillator,
and the output is delivered to the recording head. High frequency bias may be used but is not
required. These standards shall apply.

19.1 Tape and Reel Characteristics. Paragraph 22.0 and all related subparagraphs shall apply.

19.2 Tape Speeds and Corresponding FM Carrier Frequencies. See Table D-10.

19.3 FM Record/Reproduce Parameters. See Table D-10.

D-38

TABLE D-10. WIDE BAND AND DOUBLE DENSITY FM RECORD PARAMETERS
Carrier
Deviation Limits
(1)
Tape Speed
Wide Band FM
Carrier
Center
Frequency
Plus Minus
Deviation Deviation
Modulation
Frequency
Response
Band
Limits
(mm/s) (in/s) (kHz) (kHz) (kHz) (kHz) (dB
(2)
)
Group I
47.6 (1-7/8) 6.750 9.450 4.050 dc to 1.250 1
95.2 ( 33/4) 13.500 18.900 8.100 dc to 2.500 1
190.5 ( 71/2)

27.000 37.800 16.200 dc to 5.000 1
381.0 ( 15 ) 54.000 75.600 32.400 dc to 10.000 1
762.0 ( 30 ) 108.000 151.200 64.800 dc to 20.000 1
1524.0 ( 60 ) 216.000 302.400 129.600 dc to 40.000 1
3048.0 ( 120 ) 432.000 604.800 259.200 dc to 80.000 1

Double
Density
Group II
47.6 (1-7/8) 14.062 18.281 9.844 dc to 7.810 1, 3
95.2 (3-3/4) 28.125 36.562 19.688 dc to 15.620 1, 3
95.2 (33/4) 190.5 (7-1/2) 56.250 73.125 39.375 dc to 31.250 1, 3
190.5 (71/2) 381.0 ( 15 ) 112.500 146.250 78.750 dc to 62.500 1, 3
381.0 (15 ) 62.0 ( 30 ) 225.000 292.500 157.500 dc to 125.000 1, 3
762.0 (30 ) 1524.0 ( 60 ) 450.000 585.000 315.000 dc to 250.000 1, 3
1524.0 (60 ) 3048.0 (120 ) 900.000 1170.000 630.000 dc to 500.000 1, 3
3048.0 (120 ) 6096.0 (240 ) 1800.000 2340.000 1260.000 dc to 1000.000 1, 3
Notes:
1. Input voltage levels per subparagraph 19.5.
2. Frequency response referred to 1-kHz output for FM channels 13.5 kHz and above, and
100 Hz for channels below 13.5 kHz.

D-39
19.4 Speed Control and Compensation. Paragraph 17.4 shall apply. Note that a separate
track is always required for speed control and flutter compensation signals with a single-carrier
FM system.

19.5 FM Record Parameters. For FM record systems, an input voltage of 1 to 10V peak-to-
peak shall be adjustable to produce full frequency deviation.

19.5.1 Deviation Direction. Increasing positive voltage gives increasing frequency.
Predetection recorded tapes may be recorded with reverse deviation direction because of the
frequency translation techniques employed.

19.6 FM Reproduce Systems. Output levels are for signals recorded at full deviation. In wide
band and double density FM systems, the output is 2 V peak-to-peak minimum across a load
impedance of 75 ohms 10 percent. Increasing input frequency gives a positive going output
voltage.

20.0 PCM Recording
The PCM signals may be successfully recorded using several different methods.
Methods included in these standards are predetection recording, post-detection recording, and
serial high-density digital recording (HDDR). Parallel HDDR methods are not included.

20.1 Predetection PCM Recording. This method employs direct recording of the signal
obtained by heterodyning the receiver IF signal to one of the center frequencies listed in
Table D-9 without demodulating the serial PCM signal (see Figure D-8. The maximum
recommended bit rate for predetection recording of NRZ data is equal to the predetection carrier
frequency, for example, 900 kb/s for a 900 kHz predetection carrier. The maximum
recommended bit rate for predetection recording of bi-phase (Bi) data is equal to one-half the
predetection carrier frequency. For bit rates greater than one-half the maximum recommended
rates, the preferred method of detection is to convert the signal to a higher frequency before
demodulation.

20.2 Post-Detection PCM Recording. The serial PCM signal (plus noise) at the video output
of the receiver demodulator is recorded by direct or wide band FM recording methods without
first converting the PCM signal to bi-level form (see Figure D-8). Table D-11 lists maximum bit
rates versus tape speed for these recording methods. The minimum recommended reproduce bit
rates are 10 kb/s for post-detection direct Bi and 10 bits per second for post-detection FM (see
Chapter 4, paragraph 4.2.2.3).

D-40

TABLE D-11. MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED BIT RATES, POST-DETECTION
RECORDING
(1)

Tape Speed Post-FM

Wide Band

Double Density

(mm/s) (in./s) (mm/s)

Post-D
Direct
(in./s) Bi (kb/s)
Bi (kb/s) NRZ (kb/s)
6096.0 (240 ) 3048.0 (120 ) 1800 900 1800
3048.0 (120 ) 1524.0 ( 60 ) 900 450 900
1524.0 ( 60 ) 762.0 ( 30 ) 450.0 225 450
762.0 ( 30 ) 381.0 ( 15 ) 225.0 112 225
381.0 ( 15 ) 109.5 ( 7-1/2) 112.5 56 112
190.5 ( 7-1/2 ) 95.2 ( 3-3/4) 56 28 56
95.2 ( 3-3/4 ) --- 28 14 28
47.6 ( 1-7/8 ) --- 14 7 14
Note:
1.

Direct recording of NRZ signals is NOT recommended unless the signal format is carefully
designed to eliminate low-frequency components for any data expected.

20.3 Serial High-Density Digital Recording. Serial HDDR is a method of recording PCM data
on a magnetic tape that involves applying the data to one track of the recorder as a bi-level
signal.

20.4 The following subparagraphs deal with standards for direct recording of PCM telemetry
data using a wide band analog instrumentation recorder or reproducer system. Direct recording
is described in paragraph 17.0. The recommended PCM codes, maximum bit rates, record and
reproduce parameters, and the magnetic tape requirements are also described.

20.4.1 PCM Codes. The recommended codes for serial high-density PCM recording are
bi-phase level (Bi-L) and randomized non-return-to-zero-level (RNRZ-L). The maximum
recommended bit packing densities (for wide band recording) re 590 b/mm (15 kb/in.) for Bi-L
and 980 b/mm (25 kb/in.) for RNRZ-L. Refer to Table D-12 for maximum recommended bit
rates versus standard tape speeds. The minimum recommended reproduce bit rates are 5 kb/s for
Bi-L and 200 kb/s for RNRZ-L. Details of the implementation are discussed in paragraph 3.0,
of this Appendix.

D-41

TABLE D-12. MAXIMUM RECOMMENDED BIT RATES
Tape Speed

Wide Band

Double Density

Bi-L
(kb/s)
(mm/s) (in./s) (mm/s) (in./s)

RNRZ-L
(kb/s)

6096.0 (240 ) 3048.0 (120 ) 3600 6000
3048.0 (120 ) 1524.0 ( 60 ) 1800 3000
1524.0 ( 60 ) 762.0 ( 30 ) 900 1500
762.0 ( 30 ) 381.0 ( 15 ) 450 750
381.0 ( 15 ) 109.5 ( 7-1/2) 225 375
190.5 ( 7-1/2 ) 95.2 ( 3-3/4) 112 187
(1)
95.2 ( 3-3/4 ) --- 56 93
(1)

47.6 ( 1-7/8 ) --- 28 46
(1)

Note:
1.

Reproducing data at bit rates less than 200 kb/s is not recommended when using RNRZ-L.

20.4.2 Bi-L Code. The Bi-L code is recommended for direct recording under the following
conditions: The bit rate of the data to be recorded does not exceed the maximum bit rates for
Bi-L (see Table D-12), and the amount of tape required for mission recording by this method is
not a severe operational constraint.

20.4.3 RNRZ-L Code. The RNRZ-L code is recommended for direct recording under any of
the following conditions: the bit rate of the data to be recorded exceeds the maximum
recommended bit rates for Bi-L (see Table D-12) or maximum tape recording time is needed.

20.4.3.1 To minimize baseline wander anomalies, RNRZ-L is NOT recommended if the
reproduced bit rate is less than 200 kb/s.

20.4.3.2 The RNRZ-L shall be implemented using a 15-stage shift register and modulo-2
adders (see Figure D-9). The randomized bit stream to be recorded is generated by adding
(modulo-2) the input bit stream to the modulo-2 sum of the outputs of the 14th and 15th stages of
the shift register. In the decoder, the randomized bit stream is the input to the shift register (see
Figure D-9).

D-42

Figure D-9. Serial high-density digital record and reproduce.

D-43
20.4.4 Record Parameters. The record parameters are explained in the following
subparagraphs.

20.4.4.1 High-density PCM data shall be recorded in compliance with the direct record
parameters detailed in subparagraph 17.1 including the use of an ac bias signal level that
produces the required 2 dB over-bias condition.

20.4.4.2 The peak-to-peak level of the PCM input signal shall be equal to twice the rms value
of the signal amplitude used to establish the standard record level with a tolerance of 25 percent
(see subparagraph 17.2).

20.4.4.3 The signal to be recorded must be bi-level. Bi-level signals are signals where only two
levels are present. Therefore, signals containing noise must be converted to bi-level signals
before they are recorded.

20.4.4.4 To minimize the effects of tape dropouts, serial high-density digital data should not be
recorded on the edge tracks of the tape.

20.4.5 Reproduce Parameters. All reproduce parameters in subparagraph 17.3 shall apply.

20.4.5.1 PCM Signature. A PCM signature should be recorded before or after or both before
and after the data to provide a method for adjusting the reproduce head azimuth and the
reproducer equalizers. The data rate of the PCM signature should be the same as the rate of the
data to be recorded (see paragraph 7.0 for tape signature recording).

20.4.5.2 Phase Equalizer. Correct phase equalization is very important to the reconstruction of
the serial high-density digital data. Adjustable phase equalizers are desirable but not mandatory.

20.4.6 Magnetic Tape. High-density digital (HDD) magnetic tapes are recommended;
however, wide band instrumentation tapes can be used on recorder and reproducer systems with
1.27 mm (0.050 in.) track widths (see paragraphs 22.0 through 27.0 below).

20.4.7 Tape Copying. The following practices are recommended when making copies of
original data tapes.

20.4.7.1 Convert data reproduced from the original tape to a bi-level signal prior to recording a
copy.

20.4.7.2 Align reproduce head azimuth to original tape.

20.4.7.3 Adjust reproducer equalizers correctly.

20.4.7.4 Prior to recording the copy, use the recorded PCM signature to optimize the quality of
the reproduced data.

D-44
20.4.8 PCM Bit Synchronizer. The PCM bit synchronizer should contain circuitry to
reestablish the baseline reference PCM signal (a dc restorer circuit). This circuit is essential
when reproducing RNRZ-L at reproduced bit rates less than 1 Mb/s. The PCM bit synchronizer
loop bandwidth should be selected for optimum performance between 0.1 and 3 percent of the bit
rate.

If an appropriate PCM bit synchronizer is not available, the tape can be
copied directly; however, the SNR will be decreased.

21.0 Preamble Recording for Automatic or Manual Recorder Alignment
A preamble (or postamble) may be recorded on the same tape as the data signal with
known frequency and amplitude elements which will allow automatic or manual alignment of the
signal electronics to optimize the performance of the playback system. Reproduce azimuth,
equalization, and FM demodulator sensitivity may be adjusted at all available tape speeds. The
preamble may be used for manual adjustment of any instrumentation magnetic tape recorder/
reproducer (wide band and double density). Automatic adjustment requires a recorder/
reproducer specifically designed with the capability to automatically adjust one or more of the
following: reproduce-head azimuth, amplitude equalization, phase equalization, and FM
demodulator sensitivity. The signal source may be internal to the recorder or may be externally
generated.

21.1 Alignment, Direct Electronics. Direct electronics shall use a 1/11 band edge square wave
for both manual and automatic alignment as given in this Appendix.

21.2 Alignment, FM Electronics. The FM electronics shall use a 1/11 band edge square wave
and 1.414 Vdc or 0.05 Hz square wave for both manual and automatic alignment as given in
this Appendix.

22.0 Magnetic Tape Standards: General
The following standards define terminology, establish key performance criteria, and
reference test procedures for longitudinally-oriented oxide, unrecorded magnetic tape designed
for instrumentation recording,
2
and reference specifications for 19 mm (0.75 in) cassettes
designed for digital helical scan recording and S-VHS cassettes designed for 12.65 mm (1/2 in)
digital helical scan recording. Classes of instrumentation recording tapes include high-resolution
(HR) tapes used for wide band recording, high-density digital (HDD) tapes used for high-density
digital PCM recording, and high energy (HE) tapes used for double density recording.

2
Federal Specifications may be used to replace paragraphs contained in this chapter where applicable. High output
and HDD tapes re not included in the Federal Specificaions. Other standards are referenced in paragraph 1.0,
Appendix D.

D-45
Coercivities of HR and HDD tapes are in the range of 275 to 350 oersteds. High-energy
tapes have coercivities of 600 to 800 oersteds. Nominal base thickness is 25.4 m (1.0 mil) and
nominal coating thickness is 5 m (200 microinches) for all tapes. Where required, limits are
specified to standardize configurations and to establish the basic handling characteristics of the
tape. Limits placed on the remaining requirements must be determined by the tape user in light
of the intended application and interchangeability requirements imposed on the tape (see
Table D-13 for examples of suggested requirement limits).

TABLE D-13. SUGGESTED TAPE REQUIREMENT LIMITS
Paragraph
No.
Tape Requirement Suggested Limits
27.1 Bias Level 2.0 dB from MCT
27.2 Record Level 2.0 dB from MCT
27.3 Wavelength Response (Table D-13A)
27.4 Output at 0.1 UBE Wavelength 1.5 dB from MCT
27.5 Short Wavelength Output Uniformity
HR Tape HE Tape
2.5 dB 2.5 dB
27.6 Dropouts per 30 m (100 ft) (average) Center Tracks Edge Tracks

5
1
20
HR Tape
HDD Tape
HE Tape
10
1
30
27.7 Durability (See Table D-14.)
27.8 Modulation Noise 1 dB maximum

D-46

TABLE D-13A. SUGGESTED WAVELENGTH RESPONSE REQUIREMENTS
HR AND HDD TAPE
Measurement Wavelength HR Response HDD Response
(m) (mils) (dB) (dB)
3810.00 (150.000) 1.00 2.00
254.00 (10.000) 1.00 1.00
15.14 (0.600) 0.00 0.00
6.35 (0.250) 1.50 1.50
3.18 (0.125) 2.00 2.00
2.54 (0.100) 2.50 2.50
2.03 (0.080) 2.50 2.50
1.52 (0.060) 3.00 3.00
HIGH-ENERGY TAPE
Measurement Wavelength HE Wavelength Response
(m) (mils) (dB)
25.40 (1.000) 2.00
12.70 (0.500) 2.00
7.62 (0.300) 0.00
3.18 (0.125) 2.50
1.52 (0.060) 2.50
1.02 (0.040) 3.00
0.76 (0.030) 3.50

D-47

TABLE D-14. DURABILITY SIGNAL LOSSES
Designated Tape Length
Number of Allowable Signal Losses (per pass)
Meters Feet
762 (2,500) 2
1,097 (3,600) 2
1,402 (4,600) 2
1,524 (5,000) 2
2,195 (7,200) 3
2,804 (9,200) 3
3,292 (10,800) 4

23.0 Definitions
Underlined terms appearing within definitions indicate that these terms are defined
elsewhere in paragraph 23.0. For the purpose of this standard, the following definitions apply.

23.1 Back Coating. A thin coating of conductive material (for example, carbon) bonded to the
surface of a magnetic tape opposite the magnetic-coated surface for reducing electrostatic charge
accumulation and for enhancing high-speed winding uniformity. Resistivity of the back coating
should be 1 megohm per square or less, whereas the oxide-coated magnetic surface resistivity is
much higher (also see magnetic oxide coating).

23.2 Base. The material on which the magnetic oxide coating (and back coating, if employed)
is applied in the manufacture of magnetic tapes. For most applications, polyester-base materials
are currently employed.

23.3 Bias Level. The level of high frequency ac bias current or voltage in a direct record
system needed to produce a specified level of an upper band edge (UBE) frequency sine-wave
signal at a particular tape speed. Bias level is usually adjusted to produce maximum output or
increased beyond maximum to depress the output 2 dB.

23.4 Bi-Directional. Ability of a magnetic tape to record and to reproduce a specified range of
signals within specified tolerances of various characteristics when either end of the tape on the
reel is used as the leading end.

23.5 Binder. Material in which the magnetic oxide particles or back-coating particles are
mixed to bond them to the base material.

23.6 Blocking. Failure of the magnetic coating to adhere to the base material because of
layer-to-layer adhesion in a wound tape pack.

D-48
23.7 Center Tracks. On a recorded tape, center tracks are those that are more than one-track
distance from either edge of the tape, for example, tracks 2 through 13 of a 14-track tape or
tracks 2 through 27 of a 28-track tape.

23.8 Dropout. A reproduced signal of abnormally low amplitude caused by tape
imperfections severe enough to produce a data error. In digital systems, dropouts produce bit
errors.

23.9 Edge Tracks. The data tracks nearest the two edges of a recorded magnetic tape, for
example, tracks 1 and 14 of a 14-track tape.

23.10 Erasure. Removal of signals recorded on a magnetic tape to allow reuse of the tape or to
prevent access to sensitive or classified data. Instrumentation recorders and reproducers do not
usually have erase heads, so bulk erasers or degaussers must be employed.

23.11 E-Value. The radial distance by which the reel flanges extend beyond the outermost
layer of tape wound on a reel under a tape tension of 3.33 to 5.56 newtons (12 to 20 ounces of
force) per inch of tape width. Inadequate E-value may prohibit the use of protective reel bands.

23.12 High-Density Digital Magnetic Tape. Instrumentation magnetic tape with nominal base
thickness of 25.40 m (1 mil) and coercivity of 275 to 350 oersteds used to record and reproduce
high-density digital (PCM) signals with per-track bit densities of 590 b/mm (15 kb/in.) or
greater.

23.13 High-Energy Magnetic Tape. Magnetic tapes having coercivity of 600 to 800 oersteds
and nominal base thickness of 25.4 m (1 mil) used for double density analog recording and
high-density digital recording above 980 b/mm (25 kb/in.).

23.14 High-Resolution Magnetic Tape. Instrumentation magnetic tape used for recording on
wide band recorder and reproducer systems. The HR and HDD tapes may have identical
coatings and coercivities (275 to 350 oersteds) but differ in the extent and type of testing
conducted by the manufacturer.

23.15 Layer-to-Layer Signal Transfer (Print Through). Transfer of a signal to a layer of a
wound magnetic tape originating from a signal recorded on an adjacent layer of tape on the same
reel. Saturation-level recorded signals and tape storage at elevated temperatures are likely
contributors to this effect.

23.16 Magnetic Oxide Coating. Material applied to a base material to form a magnetic tape.
The magnetic oxide coating contains the oxide particles, the binder, and other plasticizing and
lubricating materials necessary for satisfactory operation of the magnetic tape system (also see
back coating).

23.17 Manufacturer's Centerline Tape (MCT). A tape selected by the manufacturer from his
production, where the electrical and physical characteristics are employed as reference standards
for all production tapes to be delivered during a particular contractual period. Electrical

D-49
characteristics include, but are not limited to, bias level, record level, output at 0.1 UBE, and
wavelength response. The MCTs are not usually available for procuring agency use.

23.18 Manufacturer's Secondary Centerline Tape (MSCT). A tape selected by a manufacturer
from his production and provided in lieu of an MCT. On the MSCT, the electrical characteristics
may depart from the MCT characteristics, but calibration data referenced in the MCT are
provided. All other characteristics of the MSCT are representative of the manufacturer's product.

23.19 Modulation Noise. Noise riding on a reproduced signal that is proportional to the
amplitude of the recorded signal (below saturation) and results from tape-coating irregularities in
particle size, orientation, coercivity, and dispersion.

23.20 Record Level. The level of record current or voltage required to achieve a specified
reproduce output level with bias level previously set to the correct value. In direct record
systems, standard record level is the level of a 0.1 UBE frequency signal required to produce 1
percent third harmonic distortion in the reproduced output signal because of tape saturation.

23.21 Scatterwind. Lateral displacements of tape wound on a reel which gives an irregular
appearance to the side surfaces of a tape pack. Scatterwind can result from such things as poorly
controlled tape tension, guiding, static electrical charge, and poor tape slitting.

23.22 Shedding. Loss of magnetic coating from tape during operation on a tape transport.
Excessive shedding causes excessive dropout.

23.23 Short Wavelength Output Uniformity. A measure of high-frequency reproduce signal
amplitude uniformity caused by oxide coating variations.

23.24 Upper Band Edge. The highest frequency that can be recorded and reproduced at a
particular tape speed in the direct record mode. The UBE signals are used in setting bias level;
0.1 UBE signals are used to set record level.

23.25 Wavelength Response. The record and reproduce characteristic of a magnetic tape which
depends on tape formulation, coating thickness, and other tape physical parameters and is a
function of the wavelength recorded on the tape (tape speed divided by signal frequency) rather
than the actual frequency recorded.

23.26 Working Length. Length of tape usable for reliable recording and reproduction of data.
Actual tape length on a reel exceeds the working length to provide for tape start and stop at each
end of the reel without loss of data.

23.27 Working Reference Tape (WRT). A tape or tapes of the same type as an MCT or MSCT
selected by the user and calibrated to the MCT or MSCT. The WRTs are employed in
conducting tests on tape types during a procurement activity and for aligning and testing recorder
and reproducer systems to minimize running the MCT or MSCT.

D-50
24.0 General Requirements for Standard Instrumentation Tapes and Reels
The following subparagraphs describe the requirements for tapes and reels.

24.1 Reference Tape System. To establish a set of test procedures which can be performed
independently and repeatedly on different manufacturers' tape transports, a centerline reference
tape system employing MCT, MSCT, or WRTs as required, should be used. The reference tape
system provides a centerline tape against which tape or tape recorder specifications may be
tested or standard tapes for aligning operational recorders.

24.1.1 Manufacturer's Centerline Tape. The electrical characteristics provided for a
manufacturer's centerline tape include, but are not limited to, bias level, record level, wavelength
response, and output at 0.1 UBE wavelength. The physical characteristics of the MCT shall also
represent the manufacturer's production and shall be representative of all production tape
delivered during any resultant contractual period (see MCT definition in paragraph 23.17)

24.1.2 Manufacturer's Secondary Centerline Tape. On the MSCT, the electrical characteristics
are calibrated to the manufacturer's reference tape, and calibration data are supplied with the
MSCT. The physical characteristics of the MSCT shall represent the manufacturer's production
(see secondary MCT definition in paragraph 23.18).

24.1.3 Working Reference Tape (WRT). Working reference tapes shall be of the same type as
those under procurement or test and shall be used in place of a MCT or MSCT for all applicable
test procedures (see WRT definition in paragraph 23.27).

The MCT or MSCT shall be a full-length tape of 25.4 mm (1 in.) width,
wound on a 266.7 mm (10 1/2 in.) or 355.6 mm (14 in.) reel or as
designated by the tape user. The center one-third of the working tape
length shall be used as the calibrated working area.

24.1.4 Test Recorder and Reproducer. A laboratory quality test recorder shall be designated for
use with the reference tape system during any magnetic tape procurement and test program. The
recorder selected shall meet the requirements specified in this Appendix.

24.1.5 MCT/MSCT/WRT Use. Using MCT or MSCT as a reference, the tape user performs all
tests necessary to determine if the manufacturer's centerline performance values meet operational
and recorder requirements. All acceptable centerline tapes are retained by the tape user as
references in subsequent acceptance test procedures performed in support of resultant contracts
or contractual periods. A working reference tape, which has been calibrated to an MCT or
MSCT, is used as the actual working reference in the applicable testing procedures outlined in
Volume III, RCC Document 118. Dropout tests should use a tape other than the MSCT or WRT.

24.2 Marking and Identifying. See Federal Specification W-T-1553B.
3

3
There are four W-T-1553 specifications relating to different coercivity and dropout rates.

D-51

24.3 Packaging. Specified by user.

24.4 Winding. The tape shall be wound on the reel or hub with the oxide surface facing
toward the hub ("A" wind). The front of the wound reel is defined as that flange visible when
viewing the tape reel with the loose end of the tape hanging from the viewer's right.

24.5 Reels and Hubs. Reels and hubs shall conform to the tape user specified requirements of
Federal Specification W-R-175.

24.6 Radial Clearance (E-Value). For all tape lengths, use 3.175 mm (0.125 in., (See E-Value
definition in paragraph 23.11).

24.7 Flammable Materials. Flammable materials shall not be a part of the magnetic tape.
Flammable materials will ignite from a match flame and will continue to burn in a still carbon
dioxide atmosphere.

24.8 Toxic Compounds. Compounds which produce toxic effects in the environmental
conditions normally encountered under operating and storing conditions as defined in
subparagraph 25.2 shall not be part of the magnetic tape. Toxicity is defined as the property of
the material that has the ability to do chemical damage to the human body. Highly toxic or
corrosive compounds produced under conditions of extreme heat shall be identified and
described by the manufacturer.

25.0 General Characteristics of Instrumentation Tapes and Reels
The following subparagraphs describe the general characteristics for tapes and reels.

25.1 Dimensional Specifications. Magnetic tape shall be supplied on flanged reels in the
standard lengths, widths, and base thicknesses outlined in Table D-15. Reel and hub diameters
are taken from Federal Specification W-R-175.

D-52

TABLE D-15. TAPE DIMENSIONS
Dimension Millimeters Inches

Tape Width 25.4 +0 0.10 1.000 +0 0.004

Tape Thickness
Base Material 0.025 0.0010 Nominal
(1)
Oxide Thickness 0.005 0.0002 Nominal
Tape Length by Reel Diameters (reels with 76 mm (3 in.) center hole)
Nominal Tape Length
(2)
Minimum True Length
(3)
Reel Diameter
266 mm (10.5 in.) 1100 m (3600 ft) 1105 m (3625 ft)
" " " " 1400 m (4600 ft) 1410 m (4625 ft)

356 mm (14.0 in.) 2200 m (7200 ft) 2204 m (7230 ft)
" " " " 2800 m (9200 ft) 2815 m (9235 ft)

381 mm (15.0 in.) 3290 m (10 800 ft) 3303 m (10 835 ft)

408 mm (16.0 in.) 3800 m (12 500 ft) 3822 m (12 540 ft)
Notes:
1. Actual tape base material thickness slightly less because of manufacturing
conventions.
2. Original dimensions are in feet. Metric conversions are rounded for convenience.
3. Tape-to-flange radial clearance (E-value) is 3.18 mm (0.125 in.).

D-53

25.2 Environmental Conditions. The tape shall be able to withstand, with no physical damage
or performance degradation, any natural combination of operating or non-operating conditions as
defined in subparagraphs 25.2.1 and 25.2.2 immediately below.

25.2.1 Tape Storing Conditions. Magnetic tape is subject to deterioration at temperature and
humidity extremes. In some cases, the damage is reversible, but irreversible damage may occur,
especially with long-term storage in unfavorable conditions.

25.2.2 Operating Environment. Recommended limits:

Condition Range

Temperature: 4 to 30
o
C (40 to 85
o
F)

Humidity: 20 to 60 percent relative humidity (RH) non-condensing

Pressure: Normal ground or aircraft operating altitude pressures.
For very high altitudes, tape users should consult with
manufacturers to determine if tape and recorder
compatibility is affected by low atmospheric pressure.

1. Binder/oxide system tends to become sticky and unusable above
50
o
C (125
o
F).

2. In low humidity, tape binder and oxide system tends to dry out, and
oxide and binder adhesion can be unsatisfactory. Brown stains on
heads may appear below 40 percent RH.
3. In high humidity, abrasivity is increased and other performance
problems may arise.

25.2.3 Non-operating Environment. Temperature and Relative Humidity.

Short Term: 0 to 45 C (32 to 115 F) and 10 to 70 percent RH non-condensing
Long Term: 1 to 30
o
C (33 to 85
o
F) and 30 to 60 percent RH non-condensing

Experience has shown that with long exposure to temperatures below
freezing, lubricants and plasticizers tend to migrate out of the oxide
coating thereby resulting in poor lubrication and gummy surface
deposits.

D-54
25.3 Other Characteristics. Storage life, bi-directional performance, frictional vibration, and
scatterwind characteristics shall conform to Federal Specification W-T-1553 [SH] unless
otherwise specified by the tape user at the time of purchase.

26.0 Physical Characteristics of Instrumentation Tapes and Reels
As specified in Federal Specifications W-T-1553B, W-T-1553/1-4 and W-R-175.

27.0 Instrumentation Tape Magnetic and Electrical Characteristics
The following subparagraphs describe required magnetic and electrical tape
characteristics.

27.1 Bias Level. The bias level (see bias level definition in paragraph 23.3) required by the
magnetic tape shall not differ from the bias level requirements of the reference tape by more than
the amount specified by the tape user. The test procedure outlined in subparagraph 5.3.8.1, Bias
Level, Volume III of RCC Document 118 shall be used to determine compliance with this
requirement.

27.2 Record Level. The record level (see record level definition in paragraph 23.20) required
by the magnetic tape shall not differ from the record level requirements of the reference tape by
more than the amount specified by the tape user. The test procedure outlined in subparagraph
5.3.8.2, Record Level, Volume III of RCC Document 118 shall be used to determine compliance
with this requirement.

27.3 Wavelength Response. The output of the magnetic tape, measured at the wavelength
values listed in Table D-16, Measurement Wavelengths, shall not differ from the output of the
reference tape by more than the amounts specified by the tape user. Wavelength response
requirements shall be specified in terms of output after having normalized the output to zero
decibels at the 0.1 UBE wavelength. The test procedure outlined in subparagraph 5.3.9
Wavelength Response and Output at 0.1 Upper Band Edge Wavelength, Volume III of RCC
Document 118 shall be used to determine compliance with this requirement (see Table D-13A,
Suggested Wavelength Response Requirements).

D-55

TABLE D-16. MEASUREMENT WAVELENGTHS
High-Resolution and HDD Tape High-Energy Tape
(m) (mils) (m) (mils)
3810.00 (150.000) 254.00 (10.000)
254.00 (10.000) 25.40 (1.000)
25.40 (1.000) 12.70 (0.500)
6.35 (0.250) 6.35 (0.250)
3.18 (0.125) 3.18 (0.125)
2.54 (0.100) 2.54 (0.100)
2.03 (0.080) 1.52 (0.060)
1.52 (0.060) 1.02 (0.040)
0.76 (0.030)

27.4 Output at 0.1 UBE Wavelength. The wavelength output of the magnetic tape shall not
differ from the 0.1 UBE wavelength of the reference tape by more than the amount specified by
the tape user. The test procedure outlined in subparagraph 5.3.9, Wavelength Response and
Output at 0.1 Upper Band Edge Wavelength, Volume III of RCC Document 118 shall be used to
determine compliance with this requirement.

27.5 Short Wavelength Output Uniformity. The short wavelength output of the magnetic tape
shall be consistently uniform so that a signal recorded and reproduced throughout the working
tape length in either direction of longitudinal tape motion shall remain free from long-term
amplitude variation to the extent specified by the tape user. The test procedure outlined in
subparagraph 5.3.10, Short Wavelength Output Uniformity, Volume III of RCC Document 118
shall be used to determine compliance with this requirement.

27.6 Dropouts. The instantaneous non-uniformity (dropout) output of a recorded signal,
caused by the magnetic tape, shall not exceed the center-track and edge-track limits specified by
the tape user on the basis of dropouts per 30.48 m (100 ft.) of nominal working tape length. The
nominal dropout count shall be determined by totaling all the dropouts per track over the
working tape length and dividing by the total number of 30.48 m (100 ft.) intervals tested.

A second method of specifying the allowable dropout count is to specify the maximum
number per track for each 30.48 m (100 ft.) interval tested. This method may be preferred if
critical data is recorded in specific areas of the working tape length, but a specified number of
dropouts per hundred feet greater than the average values may be expected.

D-56
Dropout test results are very dependent on the tape transport used for the
test and will vary from run to run on a given transport. Edge tracks tend
to contain more dropouts than the center tracks, and more dropouts are
allowed on the edge tracks. Refer to Table D-13.

27.6.1 For High Resolution (HR) tapes, a dropout is defined as a 6 dB reduction in amplitude
for a period of 5 microseconds or more of a 1 MHz sine-wave signal recorded and reproduced at
a tape speed of 3048 mm/s (120). Signal losses of 6 dB or more which exceed the 5 microsecond
time period shall constitute a dropout count for each 5 microsecond time period occurring in the
given signal loss. The definition for center tracks is at paragraph 23.7, and the definition for
edge tracks is at paragraph 23.9. The test procedure outlined in subparagraph 5.3.11, Volume III
of RCC Document 118 shall be used to determine compliance with this requirement.

27.6.2 For High Density Digital (HDD) tapes, a dropout is defined as a 10 dB or greater
reduction in amplitude for a period of 1 microsecond or more of a square-wave test signal of
maximum density recorded and reproduced at 3048 mm/s or 1524 mm/s (120 in/s or 60 in/s). On
at least every other track (7 tracks of the odd head on a 28-track head assembly (alternatively,
every other track of the even head) record and reproduce a square-wave test signal of 2 MHz at
3048 mm/s (120 in/s) or 1 MHz at 1524 mm/s (60 in./s). The record level shall be set slightly
above saturation by adjusting the record current to produce maximum reproduce output and
increasing the record current until the output signal is reduced to 90 percent of maximum. For
playback, a reproduce amplifier and a threshold detector shall be used. The signal-to-noise ratio
of the test signal at the input to the threshold detector shall be at least 25 dB, and the detector
shall detect any signal loss of 10 dB or more below reference level. The reference level shall be
established by averaging the test signal output level over a 10 m (30.8 ft.) nominal tape length in
the vicinity of a dropout.

27.6.3 For each of the seven tracks tested, the accumulated duration in microseconds of
detected dropout events shall be displayed and used to directly display the dropout rate for each
track scaled appropriately for the tape working length. Signal losses of 10 dB or more which
exceed the 1 microsecond time period shall constitute a dropout count for each microsecond time
period occurring in the given signal loss.

27.6.4 For high-energy tapes, a dropout is defined as for high-resolution tapes except that a 2
MHz signal is used.

27.7 Durability. The magnetic tape shall resist deterioration in magnetic and electrical
performance because of wear to the coating surface. Signal losses, as defined below, caused by
surface wear shall not occur in excess of the per-pass limits specified in Table D-14 for the first
35 passes.

Signal losses in excess of those limits specified above shall not occur during either a
record, record and reproduce or uninterrupted reproduce pass of the working tape length. Signal
loss is a reduction in signal amplitude of 3 dB or greater for a period of 3 through 10 seconds of
a recorded and reproduced short wavelength signal. Where a continuous loss of signal of 3 dB or

D-57

D-58
greater exceeds the 10-second period, a signal loss count shall be required for every sequential
10-second time period occurring in the given signal loss. The test procedure outlined in
subparagraph 5.3.12, Durability, Volume III of RCC Document 118 shall be used to determine
compliance with this requirement.

27.8 Modulation Noise. The amplitude modulation superimposed upon a recorded and
reproduced signal by the magnetic tape shall not exceed the limits specified by the tape user.
The test procedure outlined in subparagraph 5.3.13, Modulation Noise, Volume III of RCC
Document 118 shall be used to determine compliance with this requirement.

27.9 Layer-to-Layer Signal Transfer. A signal resulting from layer-to-layer signal transfer
shall be reduced in amplitude from the original signal a minimum of 40 dB for 25.4 m (1.0 mil)
tape and 46 dB for 38.1 m (1.5 mils) tape. The test procedure outlined in subparagraph 5.3.14,
Layer-to-Layer Signal Transfer, Volume III of RCC Document 118 shall be used to determine
compliance with this requirement.

27.10 Erasure Ease. For HR and HDDR tapes, an erase field of 79.58 kA/M (1000 oersteds)
shall effect at least a 60 dB reduction in output amplitude of a previously recorded 25.4 m (1.0
mil) wavelength signal. For HE tapes, an erase field of 160 kA/m (2000 oersteds) shall effect at
least a 60 dB reduction of a previously recorded 25.4 m (1.0 mil) wavelength signal. The test
procedure outlined in subparagraph 5.3.15, Ease of Erasure, volume III of RCC Document 118
shall be used to determine compliance with this requirement.

27.11 Suggested Tape Requirement Limits. Table D-13 lists some suggested limits to be used
for instrumentation tape.

**** END OF APPENDIX D ****
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix E, April 2009

APPENDIX E

DELETED

AVAILABLE TRANSDUCER DOCUMENTATION

(This Appendix has been intentionally deleted)

Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix F, April 2009

APPENDIX F

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE SLOPE DELTA MODULATION

1.0 General............................................................................................................. F-1
2.0 General Descriptions........................................................................................ F-1
3.0 Detailed Descriptions....................................................................................... F-3
4.0 Reference Level ............................................................................................... F-5
5.0 CVSD Characteristics...................................................................................... F-5

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure F-1a. Typical CVSD encoder...................................................................................... F-2
Figure F-1b. Typical CVSD decoder...................................................................................... F-2
Figure F-2. Typical envelope characteristics of the decoder output signal for CVSD......... F-4
Figure F-3. Interface diagram for CVSD converter. ............................................................ F-7
Figure F-4a. Insertion loss versus frequency for CVSD (16 kbps). ....................................... F-8
Figure F-4b. Insertion loss versus frequency for CVSD (32 kbps). ....................................... F-8
Figure F-5a. Variation of gain with input level for CVSD (16 kbps). ................................... F-9
Figure F-5b. Variation of gain with input level for CVSD (32 kbps). ................................... F-9
Figure F-6a. Signal to quantizing noise ratio vs input level for CVSD (16 kbps). ............. F-10
Figure F-6b. Signal to quantizing noise ratio vs. input level for CVSD (32 kbps). ............ F-10
Figure F-7a. Signal to quantizing noise ratio versus frequency for CVSD (16 kbps). ....... F-11
Figure F-7b. Signal to quantizing noise ratio versus frequency for CVSD (32 kbps). ....... F-11

LIST OF TABLES

Table F-1. Decoder Reference Digital Patterns for CVSD................................................. F-6
Table F-2. Insertion Loss Limits for CVSD........................................................................ F-7
Table F-3. Idle Channel Noise Limits for CVSD ............................................................. F-10

ii

APPENDIX F

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE SLOPE DELTA MODULATION
1.0 General
The continuously variable slope delta (CVSD) modulation is a nonlinear, sampled data,
feedback system which accepts a band-limited analog signal and encodes it into binary form for
transmission through a digital channel. At the receiver, the binary signal is decoded into a close
approximation of the original analog signal. A typical CVSD converter consisting of an encoder
and decoder is shown in Figure F-1a and Figure F-1b.

2.0 General Descriptions
A general description of the delta modulation and the CVSD converter can be found in the
succeeding subparagraphs.

2.1 Delta Modulation. Delta modulation is an A-D conversion technique resulting in a form of
digital pulse modulation. A delta modulator periodically samples the amplitude of a
band-limited analog signal, and the amplitude differences of two adjacent samples are coded into
n-bit code words. This nonlinear, sampled-data, feedback system then transmits the encoded bit
stream through a digital channel. At the receiving end, an integrating network converts the
delta-modulated bit stream through a decoding process into a close approximation of the original
analog signal.

2.1.2 CVSD Converter. A typical CVSD converter consists of an encoder and a decoder (see
Figure F-1a and Figure F-1b). The analog input signal of the CVSD encoder is band-limited by
the input band, pass filter. The CVSD encoder compares the band-limited analog input signal
with an analog feedback approximation signal generated at the reconstruction integrator output.
The digital output signal of the encoder is the output of the first register in the "run-of-three"
counter. The digital output signal is transmitted at the clock (sample) rate and will equal "1" if
the analog input signal is greater than or equal to the analog feedback signal at the instant of
sampling. For this value of the digital output signal, the pulse amplitude modulator (PAM)
applies a positive feedback pulse to the reconstruction integrator; otherwise, a negative pulse is
applied. This function is accomplished by the polarity control signal, which is equal to the
digital encoder output signal. The amplitude of the feedback pulse is derived by means of a 3-bit
shift register, logic sensing for overload, and a syllabic lowpass filter. When a string of three
consecutive ONES or ZEROS appears at the digital output, a discrete voltage level is applied to
the syllabic filter, and the positive feedback pulse amplitude increases until the overload string is
broken. In such an event, ground potential is fed to the filter by the overload algorithm, forcing a
decrease in the amplitude of the slope voltage out of the syllabic filter. The encoder and decoder
have identical characteristics except for the comparator and filter functions.
F-1

PULSE

AMPLITUDE

MODULATOR

SYLLABIC

FILTER

OVERLOAD ALGORITHM

(XYZ + XYZ)
OUTPUT =
POLARITY CONTROL

DIGITAL OUTPUT

S

IGNAL

3

-

BIT SHIFT

REGISTER

X Y Z

CLOCK SIGNAL

COMPARATOR

INPUT

BANDPASS

FILTER

RECONSTRUCTION
INTEGRATOR

ANALOG INPUT

SIGNAL

Figure F-1a. Typical CVSD encoder.

SYLLABIC

FILTER

PULSE
AMPLITUDE
MODULATOR
RECONSTRUCTION
INTEGRATOR
OUTPUT

LOWPASS

FILTER

OVERLOAD ALGORITHM
3 - BIT SHIFT

REGISTER

X Y Z

CLOCK SIGNAL
OUTPUT = (XYZ + XYZ)

DIGITAL

INPUT SIGNAL

POLARITY CONTROL
ANALOG
OUTPUT
SIGNAL
Figure F-1b. Typical CVSD decoder.

The CVSD decoder consists of the input band pass filter, shift register, overload
algorithm, syllabic filter, PAM and reconstruction integrator used in the encoder, and an output
low-pass filter. The decoder performs the inverse function of the encoder and regenerates speech
by passing the analog output signal of the reconstruction integrator through the low-pass filter.
Other characteristics optimize the CVSD modulation technique for voice signals. These
characteristics include:

a. Changes in the slope of the analog input signal determine the step-size changes of
the digital output signal.
b. The feedback loop is adaptive to the extent that the loop provides continuous or
smoothly incremental changes in step size.
c. Companding is performed at a syllabic rate to extend the dynamic range of the
analog input signal.
d. The reconstruction integrator is of the exponential (leaky) type to reduce the effects
of digital errors.
F-2

3.0 Detailed Descriptions
The characteristics described in subparagraphs 3.1 through 3.9 are in addition to those
specified in paragraph 5.0 of this standard and are for guidance only.

3.1 Input Band Pass Filter. The input filter provides band-limiting and is typically a second-
or higher-order filter (see Figure F-1a).

3.2 Comparator. The comparator compares the band-limited analog input signal from the
filter with the output signal of the reconstruction integrator (see Figure F-1a). This comparison
produces the digital error signal input to the 3-bit shift register. The transfer characteristic of the
comparator is such that the difference between the two input signals causes the output signal to
be driven to saturation in the direction of the sign of the difference.

3.3 3-Bit Shift Register. The 3-bit shift register acts as a sampler which clocks the digital
error signal from the comparator at the specified data signaling rate and stores the current
samples and two previous samples of the error signal (see Figure F-1a and Figure F-1b). The
digital output signal is a binary signal having the same polarity as the input signal from the
comparator at the time of the clock signal. The digital output signal is also the digital output of
the encoder and is referred to as the baseband signal. Further processing for transmission such as
conditioned diphase modulation may be applied to the baseband signal. It is necessary that the
inverse of any such processing be accomplished and the baseband signal restored before the
CVSD decoding process is attempted.

3.4 Overload Algorithm. The overload algorithm operates on the output of the 3-bit shift
register (X, Y, Z) using the run-of-threes coincidence algorithm so that the algorithm output
equals ( XYZ XYZ ) (see Figure F-1a and Figure F-1b). The output signal is a binary signal at the
clock signaling rate and is true for one clock period following the detection of three like bits and
false at all other times.

3.5 Syllabic Filter. The syllabic filter acts as a low-pass filter for the output signal from the
overload algorithm (see Figures F-1a and Figure F-1b). The slope-voltage output of the syllabic
filter is the modulating input to the PAM. The step-function response of the syllabic filter is
related to the syllabic rate of speech, is independent of the sampling rate, and is exponential in
nature. When the overload algorithm output is true, a charging curve is applicable. When this
output is false, a discharging curve is applicable.

3.6 Pulse Amplitude Modulator (PAM). The PAM operates with two input signals: the output
signal from the syllabic filter, and the digital signal from the 3-bit shift register (see Figures F-1a
and b). The syllabic filter output signal determines the amplitude of the PAM output signal and
the signal from the 3-bit shift register is the polarity control that determines the direction, plus or
minus, of the PAM output signal. The phrase "continuously variable" in CVSD is derived from
the way the PAM output signal varies almost continuously.

F-3
3.7 Reconstruction Integrator. The reconstruction integrator operates on the output signal of
the PAM to produce an analog feedback signal to the comparator (or an output signal to the
output low-pass filter in the receiver) that is an approximation of the analog input signal (see
Figures F-1a and b).

3.8 Output Low-Pass Filter. The output filter is a low-pass filter having a frequency response
that typically has an asymptotic rolloff with a minimum slope of 40 dB per octave, and a
stopband rejection that is 45 dB or greater (see Figure F-1b). The same output filter
characteristic is used for encoder digital output signals of either 16 or 32 kbps.

3.9 Typical CVSD Decoder Output Envelope Characteristics. For a resistance/ capacitance
circuit in the syllabic filter with time constants of 5 ms for both charging and discharging, the
envelope characteristics of the signal at the decoder output are shown in Figure F-2. For the case
of switching the signal at the decoder input from the 0-percent run-of-threes digital pattern to the
30-percent run-of-threes digital pattern, the characteristic of the decoder output signal follows
the resistance/capacitance charge curve. Note that the number of time constants required to
reach the 90-percent charge point is 2.3, which gives a nominal charge time of 11.5 ms.

When switching the other way (from the 30-percent pattern to the 0-percent pattern), the
amplitude at the beginning of discharging is, at the first moment of switching, higher (by a factor
of 16) than the final value which is reached asymptotically. The final value equals 24 dBm0,
that is, 0.03. Therefore, the amplitude at the beginning of discharging is 0.48 (percent run-of-
threes = 0). Note that the number of time constants required to reach the 10-percent point on the
discharge curve is 1.57, which gives a nominal discharge time of 7.8 ms.
1.0
(C
d
=0.3)

ENVELOPE
0.9

0.48
BEGINNING OF
DISCHARGING (C
d
=0)

0.1
0.03 (C
d
=0)
6.2 to 9.2 to
13.8 ms 9.4 ms
TIME, ms
NOTES:
1. C
d
is duty cycle.
2. Figure is half of the envelope.
Figure F-2. Typical envelope characteristics of the decoder output signal for
CVSD.

F-4
4.0 Reference Level
The decoder analog output level with the 16 and 32 kbps, 30-percent run-of-threes
reference digital pattern applied to the decoder input shall be the reference level for the CVSD
requirements of this standard and shall be designated 0 dBm0 (see subparagraph 5.9.1).

5.0 CVSD Characteristics
The characteristics of CVSD are described in the following subparagraphs.

5.1 Input and Output Impedances. The analog input and output impedances for CVSD
converters are not standardized. These impedances depend upon the application of the converters.

5.2 Data Signaling Rates. The CVSD converter shall be capable of operating at 16 and 32
kbps.

5.3 Input and Output Filters. The analog input shall be band pass filtered. The analog output
shall be low pass filtered.

Details of input and output filers, consistent with the CVSD performance
requirements of this standard, will be determined in applicable equipment
specifications based on validated requirements

5.4 Overload Algorithm. A 3-bit shift register shall be used for the CVSD encoder and decoder
(see Figure F-1a and Figure F-1b). The overload logic shall operate on the output of this shift
register using the run-of-threes coincidence algorithm. The algorithm output signal shall be a
binary signal at the data-signaling rate. This signal shall be true for one clock period following
the detection of three like bits (all ZEROS or all ONES) and false at all other times.

5.5 Compression Ratio. The compression ratio shall be nominally 16:1 with a maximum of 21:1
and a minimum of 12:1. The maximum slope voltage shall be measured at the output of the
syllabic filter for a 30-percent run-of-threes digital pattern. The minimum slope voltage shall be
measured at the output of the syllabic filter for a 0-percent run-of-threes digital pattern.

5.6 Syllabic Filter. The syllabic filter shall have a time constant of 5 ms 1. The step function
response of the syllabic filter shall be exponential in nature. When the output of the overload
algorithm is true, a charge curve shall be applicable. When the output of the overload algorithm
is false, a discharge curve shall be applicable.

5.7 Reconstruction Integrator Time Constant. The reconstruction integrator shall have a time
constant of 1 ms 0.25.

F-5
5.8 Analog-to-Digital Conversion. An 800-Hz 10 signal at a 0 dBm0 level applied to the input
of the encoder shall give a duty cycle (C
d
) of 0.30 at the algorithm output of the encoder shown in
Figure F-la.

5.9 Digital-to-Analog Conversion. The characteristics of a digital-to-analog conversion are
described in the following subparagraphs.

5.9.1 Relation of Output to Input. With the applicable reference digital patterns of Table F-1
applied to the digital input of the decoder as shown in Figure F-3, the analog output signal shall
be 800 Hz 10 at the levels shown in Table F-1, measured at the decoder output. These digital
patterns, shown in hexadecimal form, shall be repeating sequences.

5.9.2 Conversion Speed. When the decoder input is switched from the 0-percent run-of-threes
digital pattern to the 30-percent run-of-threes digital pattern, the decoder output shall reach 90
percent of its final value within 9 to 14 ms. When the decoder input is switched from the 30-percent
run-of-threes digital pattern to the 0-percent run-of-threes digital pattern, the decoder output shall
reach 10 percent of the 30-percent run-of-threes value within 6 to 9 ms. These values shall apply to
both the 16 and 32-kbps data signaling rates.

5.10 CVSD Converter Performance. The characteristics specified in subparagraphs 5.10.1 through
5.10.7 apply to one CVSD conversion process obtained by connecting the output of an encoder to the
input of a decoder (see Figure F-3).

Test signal frequencies that are submultiples of the data signaling rate shall
be avoided by offsetting the nominal test frequency slightly; for example,
an 800-Hz test frequency could be offset to 804 Hz. This test frequency
offset will avoid nonlinear distortion, which can cause measurement
difficulties when CVSD is in tandem with PCM.

TABLE F-1. DECODER REFERENCE DIGITAL PATTERNS FOR CVSD
Data Signaling Rate
(kpbs)
Digital
Pattern
Run-of-threes,
(percent)
Output
(dBm0)
16 DB492 0 241
32 DB54924AB6 0 241
16 FB412 30 01
32 FDAA10255E 30 01

F-6

INTERFACE POINTS

ENCODER ENCODER DECODER DECODER
INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT

REFERENCE DIGITAL ANALOG SIGNAL
PATTERN INPUT OUTPUT

ANALOG SIGNAL ENCODER DIGITAL TRANSMISSION DECODER ANALOG SIGNAL
INPUT 16 kbps OR 32 kbps OUTPUT
DECODER

Figure F-3. Interface diagram for CVSD converter.

5.10.1 Companding Speed. When an 800-Hz 10 sine wave signal at the encoder input is
switched from 24 dBm0 to 0 dBm0, the decoder output signal shall reach 90 percent of its final
value within 9 to 14 ms.

5.10.2 Insertion Loss. The insertion loss between the encoder input and the decoder output shall
be 0 dB 2 dB with an 800 Hz 10, 0 dBm0 input to the encoder.

5.10.3 Insertion Loss Versus Frequency Characteristics. The insertion loss between the encoder
input and decoder output, relative to 800 Hz 10 measured with an input level of 15 dBm0
applied to the converter input, shall not exceed the limits indicated in Table F-2 and shown in
Figure F-4a and Figure F-4b.

TABLE F-2. INSERTION LOSS LIMITS FOR CVSD
Rate
(kpbs)
Frequency (f)
(Hz)
Insertion Loss (dB)
(Referenced to 800 Hz)
16 f 300
300 f 1000
1000 f 2600
2600 f 4200
4200 f
1.5
1.5 to 1.5
5 to 1.5
5
25
32 f 300
300 f 1400
1400 f 2600
2600 f 3400
3400 f 4200
4200 f
1
1 to 1
3 to 1
3 to 2
3
25
F-7
Figure F-4a. Insertion loss versus frequency for CVSD (16 kbps).

Figure F-4b. Insertion loss versus frequency for CVSD (32 kbps).

5.10.4 Variation of Gain With Input Level. The variation in output level, relative to the value at
15 dBm0 input, shall be within the limits of Figure F-5a and Figure F-5b for an input frequency of
800 Hz 10.

5.10.5 Idle Channel Noise. The idle channel noise shall not exceed the limits shown in Table F-3
when measured at the CVSD decoder output.

5.10.6 Variation of Quantizing Noise With Input Level. The minimum signal to quantizing
noise ratio over the input signal level range shall be above the limits of Figure F-6a and Figure
F-6b. The noise ratio shall be measured with flat weighting (unweighted) at the decoder output
with a nominal 800-Hz 10 sine wave test signal at the encoder input.
F-8

5.10.7 Variation of Quantizing Noise With Frequency. The minimum signal to quantizing noise
ratio over the input frequency range shall be above the limits of Figure F-7a and Figure F-7b.
The noise ratio shall be measured with flat weighting (unweighted) at the decoder output with a
sine wave test signal of 15 dBm0.

Figure F-5a. Variation of gain with input level for CVSD (16 kbps).

Figure F-5b. Variation of gain with input level for CVSD (32 kbps).
F-9

TABLE F-3. IDLE CHANNEL NOISE LIMITS FOR CVSD
Data Signaling Rate (kbps) Idle Channel Noise (dBm0)
16 40
32 50

Figure F-6a. Signal to quantizing noise ratio vs input level for
CVSD (16 kbps).

Figure F-6b. Signal to quantizing noise ratio vs. input level for
CVSD (32 kbps).
F-10
F-11

Figure F-7a. Signal to quantizing noise ratio versus frequency for
CVSD (16 kbps).

Figure F-7b. Signal to quantizing noise ratio versus frequency for
CVSD (32 kbps).

**** END OF APPENDIX F ****
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix G, April 2009
APPENDIX G

ADARIO DATA BLOCK FIELD DEFINITIONS

1.0 Data Block Format and Timing........................................................................ G-1
2.0 ADARIO Data Format Field Definitions Summary......................................... G-4
3.0 Submux Data Format Field Definitions ......................................................... G-10
4.0 SubMux Data Format Field Definitions Summary ........................................ G-11

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure G-1. ADARIO data format...................................................................................... G-2
Figure G-2. ADARIO data blocks...................................................................................... G-3
Figure G-3. ADARIO timing. ............................................................................................ G-4
Figure G-4a. Submux data format...................................................................................... G-18
Figure G-4b. Submux data format...................................................................................... G-19
Figure G-5. Submux aggregate format. ............................................................................ G-20


ii

APPENDIX G
ADARIO DATA BLOCK FIELD DEFINITIONS
1.0 Data Block Format and Timing
The details of the ADARIO data block format are provided in Figure G-1 and in the
ADARIO data format field summary. As shown in Figure G-1, the eight session header words are
the first eight words of the block. The channel packet for the highest priority (priority 1) channel
is next, followed by the next lower priority channel packet (priority 2). Following the lowest
priority channel, fill data consisting of all ones are inserted as required to complete the 2048-word
data block.

Within the channel packet, the first five words are the channel header words including the
partial word (PW). Following the channel header is the variable size channel data field. The
channel data are organized in a last-in-first-out (LIFO) fashion. The first samples acquired in the
block time interval appear in the last data word of the channel packet. The sample data are
formatted into the 24-bit data word such that the first sample occupies the MSBs of the word. The
next sample is formatted into the next available MSBs and so on until the word is full. As an
example, data formatted into 8-bit samples is shown in Figure G-2.

In cases where the 24-bit data word is not a multiple of the sample size, the sample
boundaries do not align with the data words. In these cases, the samples at the word boundaries
are divided into two words. The MSBs of the sample appear in LSBs of the first buffered word
and the LSBs of the sample appear in the MSBs of the next buffered word. Since the channel
data appears in a LIFO fashion in the ADARIO data block, the MSBs of the divided sample will
occur in the data word following the word containing LSBs of the sample. Figure G-3 depicts
ADARIO timings.
G-1

Figure G-1. ADARIO data format.

G-2

G-3

Figure G-2. ADARIO data blocks.


Figure G-3. ADARIO timing.

2.0 ADARIO Data Format Field Definitions Summary
2.1 Block Length - (2048 words, 24-bit words, fixed length)

2.2 Session Header - (8 words, fixed format)

SHW0 (bits 23 to 0) SYNC Field, bits 0-23 of the 29-bit block sync. The LSBs
of the block sync are 36E19C and are contained here.

SHW1 (bits 23 to 19) SYNC Field, bits 24-28 of the 29-bit block sync. The
MSBs of the block sync are 01001 and are contained here.
The 29-bit block sync is fixed for all ADARIO
configurations and chosen for minimal data cross
correlation.

(bits 18 to 0) MC, Master Clock, a 19-bit binary value in units of 250 Hz.
MC is the clock frequency used to derive session and per
channel parameters.

SHW2 (bits 23 to 0) BLK#, ADARIO Data Block Number, a 24-bit binary
value. BLK# is to zero at the start of each session and
counts up consecutively. Rollover is allowed.
G-4

SHW3 (bits 23 to 0) YYMMDD, Time Code Field, a BCD representation of the
year (YY), month (MM), and day (DD). YYMMDD Time
Code Field is updated during the record process once per
second.

SHW4 (bits 23 to 0) HHMMSS, Time Code Field, a BCD representation of the
hour (HH), minute (MM), and second (SS). The
HHMMSS Time Code Field is updated during the record
process once per second.

SHW5 (bits 23 to 0) BMD, Block Marker Divisor, a 24-bit binary value. BMD
is established so that the block marker frequency, BM, may
be derived from MC by BM = MC/BMD
SHW6 (bit 23) MCS, Master Clock Source, a 1-bit flag.
1 = MC was generated internally.
0 = MC was provided from an external source.

(bits 22 to 19) Q, Number of active channels minus one, a 4-bit binary
value. For example, 0 indicates that one channel is active.

(bits 17 to 18) SP1, Spare field 1, a 2-bit field. It is set to zero.

(bits 16 to 0) SST, Session Start Time, a 17-bit binary value in units of
seconds. The integer number of seconds represents the
session start time of day in seconds, where midnight starts
with zero.

SHW7 (bits 23 to 16) User Defined, an 8-bit field. May be input by the user at
any time during a recording session. The interpretation of
this bit field is left to the user.


(bits 5 to 0) VR, Version number, a 6-bit binary value. Each update of
the ADARIO format will be identified by a unique version
number.

2.3 Channel n Header All channel headers contain five 24-bit ADARIO words
with the following fixed format. The first logical channel,
n=1, has the highest priority and its channel packet starts in
the ninth word of the data block. Each active channel is
represented by a channel packet that is present in the data
block. The logical channel number, n, represents the
relative priority of the channel and the order in which it
appears in the data block.

G-5

CnHW0 (bits 23 to 20) CH#, Physical Channel Number, a 4-bit binary value. 0 to
15 represents the physical location of the channel
electronics in the ADARIO hardware. The user sees those
locations labeled from 1 to 16.

(bits 19 to 16) FMT, Format code for the channel data word, a 4-bit binary
value. The format code is used to define the size of the
user data word by means of the following table:

15 = 24 bits 7 = 8 bits
14 = 22 bits 6 = 7 bits
13 = 20 bits 5 = 6 bits
12 = 18 bits 4 = 5 bits
11 = 16 bits 3 = 4 bits
10 = 14 bits 2 = 3 bits
9 = 12 bits 1 = 2 bits
8 = 10 bits 0 = 1 bit

(bits 15 to 5) WC, Word Count, an 11-bit binary value. WC is the
number of full channel data words that should be in the nth
channel packet. WC may range from 0 to 2040. A WC
greater than the number of actual words in channel packet
indicates a data rate overflow, which would occur when a
low-priority channel is not provided sufficient space in the
fixed length data block as a result of an uncontrolled data
rate in a higher priority channel.

(bits 4 to 0) PWS, Partial Word Status, a 5-bit binary value. PWS is
related to the number of samples in the partial word and
may range from 0 to 23. PWS shall be computed as
follows:
If the number of full samples in the partial word
equals zero, then PWS = 0.
If the number of full samples in the partial word
does not equal zero, then PWS = Round Up [Unused bits In
PW/Channel Sample Size].
G-6

CnHW1 (bit 23) IE, Channel Clock Source, a 1-bit flag.
1 = The channel clock was generated internally.
0 = The channel clock was provided from an external
source.

(bit 22) DA, Data type, a 1-bit flag.
1 = The channel is operated as a digital channel.
0 = The channel is operated as an analog channel.

(bit 21) ROVR, Rate overrun in previous block, a 1-bit flag.
1 = The nth channel packet in the previous data block
experienced an overrun.
0 = The nth channel packet in the previous data block
did not experience an overrun.

(bit 20) AOVR, Analog A/D Overrange in current block a 1-bit
flag.
1 = The nth channel in the current data block
experienced an analog-to-digital conversion overrange
condition.
0 = The nth channel in the current data block did not
experience an analog-to-digital conversion overrange
condition.

(bit 19) NSIB, No samples in current block, a 1-bit flag.
1 = TRUE, there are no samples for the nth channel in
the current block.
0 = False, there are samples for the nth channel in the
current block.

(bits 18 to 0) RATE, Channel sample rate indicator, 19-bit binary value.
The interpretation of the rate value depends on the
condition of IE, the channel clock source flag.
If IE = 1, then the value of rate is carried by the 16
LSBs of the rate field. Using rate, the frequency of the
internal channel clock can be found by internal sample
clock = (MC/RATE) -1.
IF IE = 0, then rate is a 19-bit binary value in units of
250 Hz which equals the frequency of the external channel
clock as provided by the user at the time of the setup.
G-7

The definitions that are marked with an asterisk apply to analog channels
and to particular hardware implementations of ADARIO. For the purposes
of this standard, these fields are not used.

* CnWD2 (bits 23 to 16) FB, Filter Bandwidth, an 8-bit binary value. The formula
for the bandwidth, BW, of the anti-aliasing filter used in an
analog channel incorporates FB as BW = (FB/2) 10
3+FR

(bits 15 to 0) TD, Time Delay to first sample, a 16-bit binary value. TD
is a measure of the time delay from the block marker, BM,
to the first sample arriving at the nth channel during the
current data block interval. TD is expressed as the number
of master clock, MC, periods minus one.

* CnWD3 (bits 23 to 22) FR, Filter Range, a 2-bit binary value. The formula for the
bandwidth, BW, of the anti-aliasing filter used in an analog
channel corporates FR as BW = (FB/2) 10
3+FR

(bits 21 to 17) ATTEN, Attenuation, a 5-bit binary value. ATTEN
represents the setting of the input attenuator (or gain) on the
nth channel at the time that the record was formed 0 =
15dB and 31 = +16dB with intermediate settings
expressed in one dB steps.

(bit 16) DCAC, Analog signal coupling, a 1-bit flag.
1 = The channel is operated with dc coupling at the input.
0 = The channel is operated with ac coupling at the input.

(bits 15 to 8) CHP, Channel Parameter field, an 8-bit field. The
interpretation of the CHP field depends upon the card type
with which it is associated, as defined by the CHT field.
Each card type established by the CHT field, as part of its
definition, shall specify the form and interpretation of the
CHP field. To date, four input card types have been
established. The CHP fields are defined as follows:

G-8

* For CHT=0
(bits 15 to 8) remain undefined for the present analog single channel
implementation except that the present hardware implementation
expects an all zero field. Would be subject to future definition as
long as all the zero fill is set aside.

* For CHT=1
(bits 15 to 8) remain unused for the present digital single channel
implementations except that the present hardware implementation
long as the all zero fill is set aside.

* For CHT=2
(bits 15 to 8) remain unused for the present dual-purpose channel
implementations except that the present hardware implementation
long as the all zero fill is set aside.

For CHT=3
(bits 15 to 12) establish the number of subchannels that are multiplexed into the
multichannel data carried by the nth channel.

(bits 11 to 8) identify the subchannel number of the first sample contained in the
nth channel packet of the data block.


(bits 5 to 0) CHT, Channel Type, a 6-bit field. Defines the type of channel
through which input data was acquired. Additional channel types
to be defined by future users and developers.

* CHT=0 Single channel analog input
* CHT=1 Single channel digital input
* CHT=2 Single channel, dual-purpose, analog or digital input
* CHT=3 Multichannel analog input capable of multiplexing
up to 16 analog inputs
* CHT=4 Single channel digital input, dual channel analog
input (stereo)
L channel on bits 15 to 8 of the sample word,
R channel on bits 7 to 0 of the sample word
CHT=5 Single channel, triple-purpose, analog, digital, submux,
formatted input

CnWD4 (bits 23 to 0) PW, Partial Word, A 24-bit field. PW contains the last
samples of the data block. The most significant bits of
G-9

word contain the first sample, followed by the next sample
in the next most significant bits. The number of samples in
the PW is defined in the PWS field. The unused bits are
not intentionally set and so contain random data.

Fill (bits 23 to 0) Fill, Fill Words consisting of all ones binary, used for fixed
rate aggregate. Fill words may be omitted when variable
rate aggregate can be accommodated resulting in variable
length blocks of up to 2048, 24-bit words.

3.0 Submux Data Format Field Definitions
The details of the submux data format are shown in Figures G-4a and b and defined in the
Submux Data Format Field Definitions Summary. Figure G-5 shows a typical primary channel
aggregate data content for fixed and variable rate channel. Submux data format is based on the
sequential collection of the individual channel data blocks. Each channel data block is the
sequential collection of presented input samples in a fixed period of time. This sequential
collection results in a variable length, fixed rate, and channel data blocks. To accommodate
fixed rate channels, fill is also defined. The aggregate data stream is composed of a block sync
timing channel, followed by sequential channel data blocks, if enabled, followed by fill, if
required, at fixed block rate.

The channel data blocks are the sequential collection of input samples bit packed into
sequential 16-bit words over the block period of time. The data block is preceded by a three-
word header that identifies the source (channel ID) of data, channel type of processing, packing
format in the data block, bit count length of the valid data, and the time delay between the first
sample and the block period. If data were internally sampled, the sample period is defined with
the first sample being coincident with the start of block period. Channel type is used to define
specific types of channels that provide timing, annotation, and synchronization functions that
may be required by the specific primary channel or may be redundant and not required. Specific
implementation of the required channels may provide only the required channels with specific
implementation constraints that limit the aggregate rate or the range of any specific field.

The submux format is based on a 16-MHz clock defining all timing. The derived clock is
the 16-MHz clock divided in binary steps as defined by 2
BRC
that defines all timing and internal
sampling. Block period is 20 160 derived clock periods which limits the submux aggregate to
256 Mbps, limits the maximum block rate to 793.65 blocks per second, and in conjunction with a
16-bit bit count field, limits the subchannel maximum data rate to 52 Mbps.
G-10

4.0 SubMux Data Format Field Definitions Summary
4.1 Frame length. Variable or fixed with fill. Minimum is 3-word block sync plus one
channel block, maximum is 20 160x16-bit words.

4.2 Block length: Variable from 3x16-bit words to 4099x16-bit words per channel data
block. Specified by CHT0 and integer of (Bit_Count+15/16). May be
limited by implementation.

4.3 Block sync: Defined by Channel ID = 31, 3-word block, 2-word sync. Defines a
period of 20 160 derived clocks.

4.4 General form: All Channel data blocks contain this information in the 3-word header.

HW1 (bits 15 to 11) CHN ID, Channel ID number, from 0 to 30 binary number
represents normal channel of any type. CHN ID = 31 reserved for
Block Sync.

(bits 10 to 8) CHT, Channel Type, from 0 to 7 defines type of processing
performed on the data and the format of header word fields.

CHT = 0 Timing channel, block sync or time tag, 3-word
only
CHT = 1 Annotation text or block count, variable length
CHT = 2 Digital serial external or internal clock, variable
CHT = 3 Digital parallel external clock, variable
CHT = 4 Analog wide band, variable
CHT = 5 Analog stereo, variable
CHT = 6 TBD (to be defined by future implementation)
CHT = 7 TBD

Variable length: General form with variable data block length

represents normal channel of any type.

(bits 10 to 8) CHT, Channel Type, from 1 to 7 defines type of processing
performed on the data and the format of header word fields.

(bits 7 to 4) FMT, Format, defines the number of bits minus one in each
sample. Data block sample size (bits) = (FMT+1). Range 0 to
15, binary format.

(bits 3 to 0) ST1 to ST4, status bits, define dynamic conditions within this
block period such as over range.

G-11

HW2 (bits 15 to 0) Bit_Count defines the number of valid data bits in the data block
starting with the most significant bit of the first data word DW1.
Variable word length of the data block is the Integer of
{(Bit_Count + 15)/16}. Range 0 to 65 535, binary format.

HW3 (bit 15) I/E, Internal/External clock

(bits 15 to 0) Depends on CHT field, defines block count, time delay, or sample
period.

4.5 Block Sync: Defines the start of channel data blocks and start of block period that lasts for
20 160 derived clocks.

HW1 (bits 15 to 0) SYNC 1 = F8C7 hex, defines the first sync word.

HW2 (bits 15 to 0) SYNC 2 = BF1E hex, defines the second sync word.

HW3 (bits 15 to 13) BRC, Block Rate Clock, defines the binary divisor for the 16 MHz
system clock. Derived CLK = 16 MHz / 2
BRC
MHz. Block rate =
Derived CLK / 20 160 Hz. Period = 1 / Derived CLK.

(bit 12) FILL, indicates if the primary channel requires fill for constant
rate.

(bits 11 to 4) TBD

(bit 3) AOE, Aggregate Overrun Error if set indicates that the aggregate
of the enabled channels exceeds the submux aggregate (data
truncated to 20 160 words between sync).

(bit 2) PCRE, Primary Channel Rate Error if set indicates that primary
channel is unable to maintain the aggregate rate of the submux.
Excess blocks are truncated.

(bits 1 to 0) ST3, ST4, Status reserved.

4.6 Time Tag: Defines the time tag channel for time stamping the frame.

represents normal channel.

(bits 10 to 8) CHT = 0, Channel Type = 0, Time Tag IRIG Time code
processing and 3-word format.

HW (bits 7 to 0) DAYS, Most significant 8 bits of Time Code Days field. BCD
format.
G-12

(bits 15 to 14) DAYS, Least significant 2 bits of Time Code Days field. BCD
format.

(bits 13 to 8) HOURS, Time Code Hours 6 bit field. BCD format.

HW (bits 7 to 0) MINUTES, Time Code Minutes 7 bit field. BCD format.

(bits 15 to 8) SECONDS, Time Code Seconds 7 bit field. BCD format.

(bits 7 to 0) FRACTIONAL SECONDS, Time Code Fractional Seconds 8 bit
field. BCD format.

4.7 Annotation Text: Defines block count and annotation text that pertains to the subchannels
at this time.


(bits 10 to 8) CHT = 1, Channel Type = 1, Block Count and Annotation Text if
any.

(bits 7 to 4) FMT = 7, Format = 7, defines 8 bit ASCII character in text.

(bit 3 ) NC, No Characters (Bit_Count = 0) Block count only.

(bits 2 to 0) OVR, PE, OE, Overrun Parity and async framing error.

HW (bits 15 to 0) Bit_Count defines the number of valid data bits in the data block
starting with the MSB of the first data word DW1. Variable word
length of the data block is the Integer of {(Bit_Count + 15)/16}.
Range 0 to 65 535, binary format.

HW (bits 15 to 0) Block_Count sequential block numbering with rollover at
maximum. Range 0 to 65 535, binary format.

DW1 (bits 15 to 8) 1st CHARACTER, first text character.

DW (bits 8 or 0) Last CHARACTER, LSB is defined by the Bit Count.

4.8 Digital Serial External CLK: Defines digital serial data such as PCM externally clocked.


G-13

(bits 10 to 8) CHT = 2, Channel Type = 2, digital serial or data and clock over
sampled data.

(bits 7 to 4) FMT = 0 Format = 0, defines 1-bit data samples.

(bit 3 ) NSIB, No Samples In Block (Bit_Count=0) header only.
(bit 2 ) OVR, Overrun indicates that input is clocking at faster than
specified rate. Data is truncated at specified bit rate (Bit Count per
Block).

HW (bits 15 to 0) Bit_Count, defines the number of valid data bits in the data block
Limited by set maximum rate.

HW (bit 15 ) I/E = 0, Internal / External clock flag indicates that external
clocking was used with relative phasing to block as specified in
next field.

(bits 14 to 0) Time Delay provides the measure of time between start of block
period and the first external clock in derived clock periods. Range
0 to 20 160, binary format.

DW1 (bit 15) DS
1
, first data sample at the first clock time in the block.

Dw
n
(bit L) DS
L
, last data sample in this block period.

4.9 Digital Serial Internal CLK: Defines digital serial data low rate (> 2 samples per block
period) internally oversampled.


(bits 10 to 8) CHT = 2, Channel Type = 2, Digital serial or data and clock over
sampled data.

(bits 7 to 4) FMT = 0 Format = 0, defines 1-bits data samples.
(bits 3 to 0) 0, reserved.

Limited by set maximum rate.

G-14

HW3 (bit 15 ) I/E = 1, Internal Sampling flag indicates that internal sampling was
used as specified in next field.

(bits 14 to 9) TBD

(bits 8 to 0) SAMPLE PERIOD, defines the period of the over-sampling clock
that samples data and clock, in derived clock periods. Range 0 to 4
mega samples per second, binary format.

DW1 (bit 15) DS
1
, first data sample at block time.

(bit 7) CS
1
, first clock sample at block time.

DWn (bit 8 ) DS
L
, last data sample in this block period.

(bit 0) CS
L
, last clock sample in this block period.

4.10 Digital Parallel External CLK: Defines digital data including serial externally clocked.


(bits 10 to 8) CHT = 3, Channel Type = 3, Digital parallel or serial data.

sample. Data block sample size (bits) = (FMT+1). Range 0 to
15, binary format.

(bit 3 ) NSIB, No Samples In Block (Bit_Count = 0) Header only.

(bit 2 ) OVR, Overrun indicates that input is clocking at faster than specified
rate. Data is truncated at specified bit rate (Bit Count per Block).

((Bit_Count + 15)/16). Range 0 to 65 535, binary format. Limited
by set maximum rate.

HW3 (bit 15 ) I/E = 0, Internal / External clock flag indicates that external
clocking was used with relative phasing to block as specified in
next field.

G-15

(bits 14 to 0) Time delay provides the measure of time between start of block
period and the first external clock in derived clock periods. Range
0 to 20 160, binary format.

DW1 (bit 15) DS
1
, MSB of the first data sample at the first clock time in the block.

DW
n
(bit L) DS
L
, LSB of the last data sample in this block period.

4.11 Analog Wide Band: Defines analog wide band data using a sampling A/D and internal
block synchronous clock.


(bits 10 to 8) CHT = 4, Channel Type = 4, analog wide band sampled data.

sample. Data block Sample Size (bits) = (FMT+1). Range 0 to
15, binary format. Limited by the A/D resolution.

(bit 3 ) AOR, Analog over range (A/D 4-msb = F).

(bits 2 to 0) ST2 to ST4, reserved status

length of the data block is the Integer of ((Bit_Count + 15)/16).
Range 0 to 65 535, binary format. Limited by set maximum rate.


(bits 14 to 12) TBD

(bits 11 to 0) Sample Period defines the period of the over-sampling clock that
samples data and clock, in derived clock periods. Range 0 to 4m
samples per second, binary format.

DW1 (bit 15) DS
1
, MSB of the first data sample at the first clock time in the
block.

DW
n
(bit L) DS
L
,
LSB of the last data sample in this block period.

4.12 Analog Stereo "L" & "R": Defines analog stereo data using a sigma-delta A/D and
internal block synchronous clock with tracking Finite Impulse Response (FIR) filter.

G-16

G-17

(bits 10 to 8) CHT = 5, Channel Type = 5, Analog stereo voice band data.
(bits 7 to 4) FMT, Format defines the number of bits minus one in each sample.
Data block sample size (bits) = (FMT+1). Range 0 to 15, binary
format. Limited by the A/D resolution.

(bit 3 ) LAOR, left subchannel over range.

(bit 2 ) RAOR, right subchannel over range.

(bits 1 to 0) ST2 to ST4, reserved status.

length of the data block is the Integer of {(Bit_Count + 15)/16}.
Range 0 to 65 535, binary format. Limited by set maximum rate.


(bit 14) ENL, Enable Left subchannel.

(bit 13) ENR, Enable Right subchannel.

(bit 12) TBD

(bits 11 to 0) Sample period defines the period of the over-sampling clock that
samples data and clock, in derived clock periods. Range 3.76 to
40K samples per second, binary format.

DW1 (bit 15) DS
1
, MSB of the first data sample left subchannel if enabled.

(bit 15- DS
1
,
MSB of the first data sample right subchannel if enabled,
(FMT-1) else second sample.

DWn (bit L) DS
L
, LSB of the last data sample in this block period.

4.13 Fill: Defines fill word that can be inserted at the end of all channel data blocks if required
by the constant rate primary channel.

Fwx (bits 15 to 0) FILL, defined as FFFF hex word.

16 BI TS
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

General Form HW1 CHN ID CHT FMT ST1 ST2 ST3 ST4
H W2
HW3 I/E TIME DELAY or SAMPLE PERIOD

Frame Sync HW1 CHN ID = 1F CHT = 0 SYNC 1 = F8C7 hex (full word)
G
-
1
8
HW2 SYNC 2 = BF1E hex
HW3 BRC FILL AOE PCR ST3 ST4

Time Tag HW1 CHN ID = 0 to 30 CHT = 0 MSB DAYS (BCD)
HW2 DAYS lsb HOURS (BCD) lsb MINUTES (BCD) lsb
HW3 SECONDS (BCD) lsb FRACTIONAL SECONDS lsb

Annotation HW1 CHN ID = 0 to 30 CHT = 1 FMT = 7 NC OVR PE OE
Text HW2 BIT_COUNT
HW3 BLOCK COUNT
DW1 msb 1
ST
CHARACTER lsb msb 2
ND
CHARACTER 1sb
:
DWn msb Last CHARACTER lsb UNDEFINED if not last

Digital Srl. HW1 CHN ID = 0 to 30 CHT = 2 FMT = 0 NSIB OVR ST3 ST4
Ext. CLK HW2 BIT_COUNT = L
H W3
I/E=0
TIME DELAY
D W S 1 D
1
DS
2
DS
3
DS
4
DS
5
DS
6
DS
7
DS
8
DS
9
DS
1
DS
1
DS
1
DS
1
DS
1
DS
1
DS
1

:
D Wn DS
L-1
DS
L
UNDEFINED if not last

Figure G-4a. Submux data format.


15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

HW1 CHN ID = 0 to 30 CHT = 2 FMT = 0 0 0 ST3
G
-
1
9
ST4 Digital Serial
Int. CLK HW2 BIT_COUNT = L
HW3
I/E=1
SAMPLE PERIOD
DW1 DS
1
DS
2
DS
3
DS
4
DS
5
DS
6
DS
7
DS
8
CS
1
CS
2
CS
3
CS
4
CS
5
CS
6
CS
7
CS
8

:
DWn
DS
L-7
DS
L-6
DS
L-5
DS
L-4
DS
L-3
DS
L-2
DS
L-1
DS
L
CS
L-7
CS
L-6
CS
L-5
CS
L-4
CS
L-3
CS
L-2
CS
L-1
CS
L

HW1 CHN ID = 0 to 30 CHT = 3 FMT=0 to 15 (shown =6) NSIB OVR ST3 ST4 Digital Parallel
Ext. CLK HW2 BIT_COUNT = L
HW3
I/E=0
TIME DELAY
DW1 MSB 1
ST
SAMPLE MSB 2
ND
SAMPLE 3
RD
SAMPLE
:
DWn MSB Last SAMPLE LSB=bit L UNDEFINED if not last

HW1 CHN ID = 0 to 30 CHT = 4 FMT=0 to 15 (shown =7) AOR ST2 ST3 ST Analog
Wide Band HW2 BIT_COUNT = L
HW3
I/E=1
SAMPLE PERIOD
DW1 MSB 1
ST
SAMPLE MSB 2
nd
SAMPLE
:
DWn MSB Last SAMPLE LSB=bit L UNDEFINED if not last

HW1 CHN ID = 0 to 30 CHT = 5 FMT=0 to 15 (shown =7) LAOR RAOR ST3 ST4
HW2 BIT_COUNT = L
Analog
Stereo
"L" & "R"
HW3
I/E=1
ENL ENR SAMPLE PERIOD
DW1 MSB 1
ST
SAMPLE L MSB 1
ST
SAMPLE R
:
DWn MSB Last SAMPLE UNDEFINED if not last

Fill FW Fill Word = FFFF hex

Figure G-4b. Submux data format.


Fixed Rate
Channel
Variable Rate
Channel

Frame 1 Block
Sync
Frame 1 Block
Sync

CHN #0

CHN #0

CHN #1

CHN #1

CHN #3

CHN #3

CHN #17

CHN #17

CHN #18

CHN #18

FILL
Frame 2 Block
Sync
Frame 2 Block
Sync

CHN #0

CHN #0

CHN #1

CHN #1

CHN #3

CHN #3

CHN #17

CHN #17

CHN #18

CHN #18

FILL

Figure G-5. Submux aggregate format.

**** END OF APPENDIX G ****
G-20
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix H, April 2009

APPENDIX H

APPLICATION OF THE TELEMETRY ATTRIBUTES TRANSFER STANDARD


1.0 Elements of the Telemetry Attributes Transfer Process ................................. H-1

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure H-1. Typical elements of the telemetry attributes transfer process......................... H-2
ii

APPENDIX H
APPLICATION OF THE TELEMETRY ATTRIBUTES TRANSFER STANDARD
1.0 Elements of the Telemetry Attributes Transfer Process
Interchange of telemetry attributes occurs between vehicle instrumentation organizations
(the source) and the telemetry ground stations (the destination). Interchange may also take place
between ranges. The following are typical elements of this process:

a. data entry system
b. source database
c. export program
d. interchange medium [this standard]
e. import program
f. destination data base
g. telemetry setup system
h. telemetry processing equipment.

These elements are depicted in Figure H-1 and are defined as follows:

1.1 Data entry system. The data entry system is the source organization's human interface
where telemetry attributes are entered into a computer-based system (not affected by this
standard).

1.2 Source database. The source database is where telemetry attributes are maintained in a
form appropriate to the local organization's needs (not affected by this standard).

1.3 Export program. The export program converts the telemetry attributes from the source
database format to the format defined by this standard and stores them on the interchange
medium.

1.4 Interchange medium. The interchange medium contains the telemetry attributes being
transferred from the source organization to the destination organization. Format and contents are
defined by this standard.

1.5 Import program. The import program reads the standardized interchange medium and
converts the attributes to the destination data base format in accordance with local needs, system
characteristics, and limitations.

1.6 Destination data base. The destination data base is where telemetry attributes are
maintained in a form suitable to the local ground station's needs (not affected by this standard).
H-1
Human
Interface
Data Entry
System A
Source A
Database
Export
Program A
Export
Program B
Source B
Database
Data Entry
System B
Human
Interface
Source Organization A
Source Organization B
Standardized
Interchange
Medium
Standardized
Interchange
Medium
Destination Organization X
Telemetry
Equipment X
Telemetry
Setup X
Destination
Database X
Import
Program X
Import
Program Y
Destination
Database Y
Telemetry
Setup Y
Telemetry
Equipment Y
Destination Organization Y
Figure H-1. Typical elements of the telemetry attributes transfer process.

H-2
H-3

1.7 Telemetry setup system. The telemetry setup system accesses the destination database to
load the telemetry processing equipment. (Not affected by this standard.)

1.8 Telemetry processing equipment. The telemetry processing equipment is where the
attributes will ultimately be used to properly handle the data being transmitted. (Not affected by
this standard.)

The interchange medium is intended as a standard means of information exchange. The
source and destination organizations are not constrained by this standard as to how the attributes
are stored, viewed, used, or maintained.

To use the attribute transfer standard, import and export software must be developed.
Once in place, these programs should eliminate the need for test item or project-specific software
at either the supplying (source) organizations or the processing (destination) organizations.

**** END OF APPENDIX H ****
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix I, April 2009

APPENDIX I
TELEMETRY ATTRIBUTES TRANSFER STANDARD COVER SHEET

1.0 Cover Sheet

Each attribute transfer file (disk or tape) should be accompanied by a cover sheet
describing the originating agency's computer system used to construct the attribute file. The
recommended format for this cover sheet is given below as Figure I-1.

Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard

Date: MM\DD\YY

From: Name

Address

Telephone

To: Name

Address

Telephone

Originating computer system:

Computer make and model:

Medium characteristics:

Description:

Comments:
Figure I-1. Sample cover sheet for attribute transfer files.

**** END OF APPENDIX I ****
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix J, April 2009

APPENDIX J

TELEMETRY ATTRIBUTES TRANSFER STANDARD FORMAT EXAMPLE

1.0 Introduction ........................................................................................................J-1
2.0 Overview of Example.........................................................................................J-1

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure J-1. Group linkages....................................................................................................J-2
Figure J-2. PCM format for PCM w/async...........................................................................J-5
Figure J-3. PCM format for PCM1. ......................................................................................J-6
Figure J-4. PCM format for async. .......................................................................................J-7

ii
APPENDIX J
TELEMETRY ATTRIBUTES TRANSFER STANDARD FORMAT EXAMPLE
1.0 Introduction
The following example is for illustrative purposes and is by no means a complete
attributes file; it is representative of the types of information likely to be transferred. Many
attributes are purposely omitted to simplify the example. In some of the groups, only those
entries necessary to link to other groups are provided. Attributes, which link the various groups
together, are indicated in boldface.

2.0 Overview of Example
Selected attributes are described in text form as an aid to following the example. All text,
which describes the example, is printed in italics. All text, which is part of the example file, is
printed in plain text.

The example file being transferred consists of the attributes of a single RF data source
and an analog tape containing two data sources. The RF data source is a PCM signal, which
contains an embedded asynchronous wave train. The two recorded data sources are PCM
signals: one is an aircraft telemetry stream, and the other is a radar data telemetry stream.
Figure J-1 shows the example file in terms of the attribute groups and their interrelationships.
Refer to the attribute tables while reviewing the example.

J-1

Data Link
Name
General
Information
Group
(G)
Transmission
Attributes
Group
(T-1)
Multiplex/
Modulation
Group
(M-1)
PCM Format
Group
(P-1)
Multiplex/
Modulation
Group
(M-3)
PCM Format
Group
(P-3)
PCM
Measurement
Description
Group
(D-2)
PCM
Measurement
Description
Group
(D-1)
Data
Conversion
Group
(1)
Data
Conversion
Group
(2)
Data
Conversion
Group
(3)
Data
Conversion
Group
(4)
Data
Conversion
Group
(5)
Data
Conversion
Group
(6)
Data
Conversion
Group
E1250T;
Data Link
Name
PCM w/
async;
J896D; J951V; J971V; W862P; J966X;
Measurement Names
Data Link
Name
ASYNC;
PCM
Measurement
Description
Group
(D-4)
PCM
Measurement
Description
Group
PCM Format
Group
(P-4)
PCM Format
Group
(P-2)
Data Link
Name
SPI;
Data Link
Name
PCM1;
PCM w/
async;
Data Link
Name
SPI; Data Link
Name
PCM1;
Data Link
Name
ASYNC;
(D-3)
82AJ01;
(7)
Multiplex/
Modulation
Group
(M-2)
Tape
Source
Group
(R-1)
Data Source
ID
PCM
w/embedded;
Data Source
ID
Two PCM
links - TM
and TSPI;
Data Source
Data Source
ID
Data Source
ID
PCM
w/subframe
fragmented
Space
Position;
PCM
w/embedded; ID
Figure J-1. Group linkages.
J-2
General Information Group (G)

Program name, test name, origination date, revision number: 0,
test number: 13.

G\PN: TMATS example; G\TA: Wright Flyer; G\OD: 07-12-41; G\RN:0; G\TN:13; G\POC1-1:
Wilbur; G\POC2-1: Bikes,LTD; G\POC3-1: Dayton;
G\POC4-1: 555-1212;

Live data source.

G\DSI-1:PCM w/embedded; G\DST-1:RF;

Tape source.

G\DSI-2:Two PCM links - TM & TSPI; G\DST-2:TAP;
G\COM: I hope this flies.; G\POC1-2: Orville;
G\POC2-2:Bikes,LTD; G\POC3-2: Dayton; G\POC4-2: 555-1212;

Transmission Attributes Group (T-1)

Frequency: 1489.5, RF bandwidth: 100, data bandwidth: 100;
not encrypted, modulation type: FM, total carrier modulation: 500,
no subcarriers, transmit polarization: linear.

T-1\ID:PCM w/embedded; T-1\RF1:1489.5; T-1\RF2:100; T-1\RF3:100;
T-1\RF4:FM; T-1\RF5:500; T-1\SCO\N:NO; T-1\AN2:LIN; T-1\AP\POC1:
Pat Tern; T-1\AP\POC2:Transmissions,Inc.;
T-1\AP\POC3:Amityville,NY; T-1\AP\POC4:800-555-1212;

Tape Source Attributes Group (R-1)

R-1\ID:Two PCM links - TM & TSPI;
R-1\R1:Reel #1; R-1\TC1:ANAL; R-1\TC2:ACME; R-1\TC3:795;

Tape width: 1 inch, reel diameter: 14 inches, 14 tracks,
record speed: 7.5 inches/second.

R-1\TC4:1.0; R-1\TC5:14.0; R-1\N:14; R-1\TC6:7.5;
J-3

Rewound: Yes, manufacturer: ZZ; model: 13, original: yes.

R-1\TC8:Y; R-1\RI1:ZZ; R-1\RI2:13; R-1\RI3:Y;
R-1\RI4:07-12-91-07-55-59; R-1\POC1:Mr. Reel; R-1\POC2:Tape Creations; R-
1\POC3:Anywhere,Ttown; R-1\POC4:555-1212;

Track Number 2 contains aircraft telemetry PCM (w/subframe
fragmented)

R-1\TK1-1:2; R-1\TK2-1:FM/FM;
R-1\DSI-1:PCM w/subframe fragmented; R-1\TK3-1:FWD;

Track Number 4 contains Space Position Information via PCM link

R-1\TK1-2:4; R-1\DSI-2:Space Position Information;

Multiplex/Modulation Groups (M-1, M-2, M-3)

Baseband type: PCM, modulation sense: POS, baseband data: PCM,
low pass filter type: constant amplitude

M-1\ID:PCM w/embedded; M-1\BB1:PCM; M-1\BB2:POS; M-1\BSG1:PCM;
M-1\BSF2:CA;
M-1\BB\DLN:PCM w/async;

M-2\ID:PCM w/subframe fragmented; M-2\BB\DLN:PCM1;

M-3\ID:Space Position; M-3\BB\DLN:SPI;

_________________________________________________________________

PCM Format Attributes Groups (P)

P-1 is a live PCM signal and contains the asynchronous wave
train (see Figure J-2).

P-2 is a recorded signal (see Figure J-3).

P-3 is the asynchronous wave train (see Figure J-4).

P-4 is a recorded signal.
J-4

Sync 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 39 40 41 42

20
bits

Embedded
Format
(Words
6-10)
8
B
i
t
s

S
U
B
4
2
b
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

16

ID

C
o
u
n
t
e
r

12
B
i
t
s

S
U
B
1
5

a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a

a

Major frame characteristics:
One major frame = 16 minor frames
Word lengths = 10 bits (default value) except Word 10 has 8 bits
and Word 11 has 12 bits

a = measurement E1250T at minor frame position 39
b = measurement W862P in subframe SUB42, position 8.

PCM Format Group = P-1
PCM Measurement Description Group = D-2
Data Link Name = PCM w/async

Figure J-2. PCM format for PCM w/async.

J-5

Sync 1 2 3 12 13 14 113 114 120 121 122 276

30
bits

SUB
113

SUB
121

M L

6
Bits
4
Bits

M

L

1
2
3
4
5

32

37

64

ID

C
o
u
n
t
e
r

Subframes SUB113 and SUB121 are 32 deep
ID counter counts 0 - 63
Word lengths = 10 (default value) except Word 121 has 6 bits
and Word 122 has 4 bits

Measurement 82AJ01 is 16 bits, which is fragmented with the 10 most
significant bits indicated as M and the 6 least significant bits as L.
The measurement is located in position 5 of subframes SUB113 and SUB121
(minor frames 5 and 37 of the major frame).

Data Link Name = PCM1

Figure J-3. PCM format for PCM1.

J-6

Sync 1 2 3 11 14 20 29 33 39 45 46 47 48 49
1 a b a c a a

a
a

2 a a a a a
A
S
U
B
2
a
3
16
B
i
t
s
ID
C
o
u
n
t
e
r
a
A
S
U
B
1
a
A
S
U
B
3
a a a
c
A
S
U
B
3
d a

Word lengths = 16 bits (default value)

a = measurement J971U, supercommutated at positions 2, 11, 20, 29, 33, and 47
b = measurement J951V in subframe ASUB1, position 1
c = measurement J896D in supercommutated subframe ASUB3, positions 1 and 4
d = measurement J966X in subframe ASUB2, position 3

Data Link Name = ASYNC
Figure J-4. PCM format for async.

_______________________________________________________________________________

(Start of P-1)

Live PCM signal (host wave train) : Class I

P-1\DLN:PCM w/async; P-1\D1:NRZ-L; P-1\D2:44000; P-1\D3:U;
P-1\D4:N; P-1\D6:N; P-1\D7:N; P-1\TF:ONE;

10 bits default word length, 16 minor frames/major frame, 43 words/frame

P-1\F1:10; P-1\F2:M; P-1\F3:NO; P-1\MF\N:16; P-1\MF1:43;
P-1\MF2:440; P-1\MF3:FPT; P-1\MF4:20;
P-1\MF5: 01111010011010110001; P-1\SYNC1:1; P-1\SYNC2:0;
P-1\SYNC3:1;P-1\SYNC4:0;

Word position #10, 8 bits,
Word position #11, 12 bits

P-1\MFW1-1:10; P-1\MFW2-1:8; P-1\MFW1-2:11; P-1\MFW2-2:12;
J-7

One subframe ID counter

P-1\ISF\N:1; P-1\ISF1-1:1; P-1\ISF2-1:ID; P-1\IDC1-1:1;

ID counter word length : 10 bits,
MSB starting bit location : 7,
ID counter length : 4

P-1\IDC2-1:10; P-1\IDC3-1:7; P-1\IDC4-1:4; P-1\IDC5-1:M;
P-1\IDC6-1:0; P-1\IDC7-1:1; P-1\IDC8-1:15; P-1\IDC9-1:16;
P-1\IDC10-1:INC;

Subframe definition
SUB42 is located at 42, SUB15 at 15.
All have depth 16.

P-1\SF\N-1:2;

P-1\SF1-1-1:SUB42; P-1\SF2-1-1:NO;
P-1\SF4-1-1-1:42; P-1\SF6-1-1:16;
P-1\SF1-1-2:SUB15; P-1\SF2-1-2:NO;
P-1\SF4-1-2-1:15; P-1\SF6-1-2:16;

Asynchronous embedded wave train information

Data Link Name (to be referenced in the format definition of the
asynchronous wave train) is ASYNC.

Five contiguous minor frame word positions starting at location 6.

P-1\AEF\N:1; P-1\AEF\DLN-1:ASYNC; P-1\AEF1-1:5; P-1\AEF2-1:CW;
P-1\AEF3-1-1:6;

(End of P-1)
______________________________________________________________________________

(Start of P-2)

Recorded PCM signal format attributes.

Data Link Name is PCM1, Data Format is NRZ-L, Bit rate is 2 Mbit/sec,
Unencrypted, Normal polarity, class I, Common word length is 10, MSB first, No
parity, 64 minor frames per major frame, 277 words per minor frame, Sync pattern
length is 30. Word position 121 is 6 bits. Word position 122 is 4 bits.

J-8
P-2\DLN:PCM1;P-2\D1:NRZ-L; P-2\D2:2000000; P-2\D3:U; P-2\D4:N;
P-2\TF:ONE; P-2\F1:10; P-2\F2:M; P-2\F3:NO; P-2\MF\N:64;
P-2\MF1:277; P-2\MF4:30; P-2\MF5:101110000001100111110101101011; P-2\SYNC1:1; P-
2\MFW1-1:121; P-2\MFW2-1:6; P-2\MFW1-2:122;
P-2\MFW2-2:4;

Subframe characteristics:

One subframe ID counter named 1. Sync type is ID counter. ID counter location is
13. ID counter word length is 10. ID counter MSB location is 5. ID counter length
is 6. ID counter transfer order is MSB first. ID counter initial value is 0. ID
counter initial subframe is 1. ID counter end value is 63. ID counter end subframe
is 64. ID counter is increasing.

Two subframes. First subframe name is SUB121. Not supercommutated, subframe
location = word position 121, depth = 32. Second subframe name is SUB113. Not
supercommutated, location = 113, depth = 32.

P-2\IDC2-1:10; P-2\IDC3-1:5; P-2\IDC4-1:6; P-2\IDC5-1:M;
P-2\IDC10-1:INC; P-2\SF\N-1:2; P-2\SF1-1-1:SUB121;
P-2\SF2-1-1:NO; P-2\SF4-1-1-1:121; P-2\SF6-1-1:32;
P-2\SF1-1-2:SUB113; P-2\SF2-1-2:NO; P-2\SF4-1-2-1:113;
P-2\SF6-1-2:32;

(End of P-2)
______________________________________________________________________________

(Start of P-3)

Asynchronous wave train PCM format attributes.

Data Link Name: ASYNC
Class I, Common word length: 16, LSB transfer order, no parity, 3 minor frames per major
frame, 50 words/minor frame, 800 bits per minor frame, fixed pattern synchronization, 16
bit sync pattern.

P-3\DLN:ASYNC; P-3\TF:ONE; P-3\F1:16; P-3\F2:L; P-3\F3:NO;
P-3\MF\N:3; P-3\MF1:50; P-3\MF2:800; P-3\MF3:FPT; P-3\MF4:16;
P-3\MF5: 1111100110110001; P-3\SYNC1:1;

Subframe definition.

Three subframes with ID counter word length 16 at word position 1.
J-9

P-3\IDC2-1:16; P-3\IDC3-1:15; P-3\IDC4-1:2; P-3\IDC5-1:L;
P-3\IDC10-1:INC;

ASUB1 is at word position 3.
ASUB2 is at word position 45.
ASUB3 is supercommutated at word positions 14 and 39.

P-3\SF\N-1:3; P-3\SF1-1-1:ASUB1; P-3\SF2-1-1:NO; P-3\SF3-1-1:NA;
P-3\SF4-1-1-1:3; P-3\SF6-1-1:3; P-3\SF1-1-2:ASUB2;
P-3\SF2-1-2:NO; P-3\SF3-1-2:NA; P-3\SF4-1-2-1:45; P-3\SF6-1-2:3;
P-3\SF1-1-3:ASUB3; P-3\SF2-1-3:2; P-3\SF3-1-3:EL;
P-3\SF4-1-3-1:14; P-3\SF4-1-3-2:39; P-3\SF6-1-3:3;

(End of P-3)

(Start of P-4)

P-4\DLN:SPI;

(End of P-4)
______________________________________________________________________________

PCM Measurement Description (D)

D-1 contains the measurements which make up the asynchronous wave train,

D-2 contains the measurements which make up the live PCM signal (which hosts the
asynchronous wave train),

D-3 contains the measurements which make up one of the recorded PCM signals, and

D-4 contains the measurements which make up the other recorded PCM signal.

______________________________________________________________________________

(Start of D-1)

Asynchronous Wave Train: One measurement list, 4 measurements

D-1\DLN:ASYNC; D-1\ML\N:1; D-1\MLN-1:JUST ONE; D-1\MN\N-1:4;

Measurement Name : J896D, LSB first,
J-10
Subframe supercommutated, 2 locations: 1 and 4 of ASUB3.

D-1\MN-1-1:J896D; D-1\MN3-1-1:L; D-1\LT-1-1:SFSC;
D-1\SFS1-1-1:ASUB3; D-1\SFS\N-1-1:2; D-1\SFS2-1-1:E;
D-1\SFS6-1-1-1:1; D-1\SFS6-1-1-2:4; D-1\SFS7-1-1-1:FW;
D-1\SFS7-1-1-2:FW;

Measurement Name: J951V, LSB first, default parity, subframe ASUB1, location 1.

D-1\MN-1-2:J951V; D-1\MN1-1-2:DE; D-1\MN2-1-2:D; D-1\MN3-1-2:L; D-1\LT-1-2:SF;
D-1\SF2-1-2:1; D-1\SFM-1-2:1111111100000000;
D-1\SF1-1-2:ASUB1;

Measurement Name : J971U, LSB first,
supercommutated at positions 2, 11, 20, 29, 33, and 47.

D-1\MN-1-3:J971U; D-1\MN1-1-3:DE; D-1\MN2-1-3:D; D-1\MN3-1-3:L;
D-1\LT-1-3:MFSC; D-1\MFS\N-1-3:6; D-1\MFS1-1-3:E;
D-1\MFSW-1-3-1:2; D-1\MFSW-1-3-2:11; D-1\MFSW-1-3-3:20;
D-1\MFSW-1-3-4:29; D-1\MFSW-1-3-5:33; D-1\MFSW-1-3-6:47;

Measurement Name : J966X, LSB first, subframe ASUB2, location 3.

D-1\MN-1-4:J966X; D-1\MN1-1-4:DE; D-1\MN2-1-4:D;
D-1\MN3-1-4:L; D-1\LT-1-4:SF; D-1\SF1-1-4:ASUB2;
D-1\SF2-1-4:3; D-1\SFM-1-4:FW;

(End of D-1)
_____________________________________________________________________________

(Start of D-2)

Live PCM signal: single measurement list, 2 measurements.

D-2\DLN:PCM w/async; D-2\MLN-1:JUST ONE; D-2\MN\N-1:2;

Measurement name: E1250T, unclassified, unsigned, MSB first.

D-2\MN-1-1:E1250T; D-2\MN1-1-1:DE; D-2\MN2-1-1:D;
D-2\MN3-1-1:M; D-2\LT-1-1:MF; D-2\MF-1-1:39; D-2\MFM-1-1:FW;

Measurement name: W862P, unclassified, MSB first,
subframe name: SUB42, location 8 in subframe, full word.

J-11
D-2\MN-1-2:W862P; D-2\MN1-1-2:DE; D-2\MN2-1-2:D; D-2\MN3-1-2:M; D-2\LT-1-2:SF;
D-2\SF1-1-2:SUB42; D-2\SF2-1-2:8; D-2\SFM-1-2:FW;

(End of D-2)
______________________________________________________________________________

(Start of D-3)

Recorded PCM signal: single measurement list: 1 measurement.

D-3\DLN:PCM1; D-3\MLN-1:ONLY ONE; D-3\MN\N-1:1;

Measurement name: 82AJ01, subframe fragmented, 2 fragments,
subframes: SUB113 and SUB121, subframe location: 5.

D-3\MN-1-1:82AJ01; D-3\LT-1-1:SFFR; D-3\FSF\N-1-1:2;
D-3\FSF1-1-1:16; D-3\FSF2\N-1-1:2; D-3\FSF3-1-1-1:SUB113;
D-3\FSF3-1-1-2:SUB121; D-3\FSF4-1-1-1:E; D-3\FSF8-1-1-1-1:5;

(End of D-3)
______________________________________________________________________________

(Start of D-4)

Recorded PCM signal

D-4\DLN:SPI;

(End of D-4)
______________________________________________________________________________

Data Conversion Groups (C)

C-1 and C-2 are measurements which are part of the live PCM signal (see also D-
2).

C-3, C-4, C-5, and C-6 are from the asynchronous wave train (see also D-1).

C-7 is from the recorded PCM signal (see also D-3).

Measurement: E1250T, description: Inlet Temp Bellmouth, units: Deg C, binary
format: unsigned; high value: 128, low value: 0.4, conversion type: pair sets,
number of pair sets: 2, application (polynomial) : Yes; order of fit: 1, telemetry
value #1: 0, engineering unit value #1: 0.4, telemetry value #2: 1023,
engineering unit value #2: 128.
J-12

C-1\DCN:E1250T; C-1\MN1:Inlet Temp Bellmouth; C-1\MN3:DEGC;
C-1\BFM:UNS; C-1\MOT1:128; C-1\MOT2:-0.4; C-1\DCT:PRS;
C-1\PS\N:2; C-1\PS1:Y; C-1\PS2:1; C-1\PS3-1:0; C-1\PS4-1:-0.4;
C-1\PS3-2:1023; C-1\PS4-2:128;

Measurement: W862P, description: Fuel Pump Inlet, binary format: unsigned; conversion
type: pair sets, number of pair sets: 2, application (polynomial): Yes; order of fit: 1,
telemetry value #1: 0, engineering unit value #1: 0.1 telemetry value #2: 1023,
engineering unit value #2: 76.7

C-2\DCN:W862P; C-2\MN1:Fuel Pump Inlet; C-2\BFM:UNS;
C-2\DCT:PRS; C-2\PS\N:2; C-2\PS1:Y; C-2\PS2:1; C-2\PS3-1:0;
C-2\PS4-1:-0.1; C-2\PS3-2:1023; C-2\PS4-2:76.7;

Measurement: J896D, description: Terrian Altitude, units: Feet, binary format:
twos complement; high value: 32768, low value: -32768, conversion type: pair
sets; number of pair sets: 2, application (polynomial): Yes, order of fit: 1, telemetry
value #1: -32768, engineering unit value #1: -32768, telemetry value #2: 32767,
engineering unit value #2: 32767

C-3\DCN:J896D; C-3\MN1:Terrian Altitude; C-3\MN3:FEET;
C-3\BFM:TWO; C-3\MOT1:32768; C-3\MOT2:-32768; C-3\DCT:PRS;
C-3\PS\N:2; C-3\PS1:Y; C-3\PS2:1; C-3\PS3-1:-32768;
C-3\PS4-1:-32768; C-3\PS3-2:32767; C-3\PS4-2:32767;

Measurement: J951V, description: Throttle Command, units: VDC, high value:
10.164, low value: -10.164, conversion type: pair sets, number of pair sets: 2,
application(polynomial): Yes, order of fit: 1, telemetry value #1: -128,
engineering unit value #1: -10.164, telemetry value #2: 127, engineering unit
value #2: 10.164, binary format: two's complement

C-4\DCN:J951V; C-4\MN1:Throttle Command; C-4\MN3:VDC;
C-4\MOT1:10.164; C-4\MOT2:-10.164; C-4\DCT:PRS; C-4\PS\N:2;
C-4\PS1:Y; C-4\PS2:1; C-4\PS3-1:-128; C-4\PS4-1:-10.164;
C-4\PS3-2:127; C-4\PS4-2:10.164; C-4\BFM:TWO;

Measurement: J971U; description: DISC, conversion type: discrete, binary format:
unsigned.

C-5\DCN:J971U; C-5\MN1:DISC; C-5\DCT:DIS; C-5\BFM:UNS;

Measurement: J966X; description: Discrete, conversion type: discrete, binary
format: unsigned.

C-6\DCN:J966X; C-6\MN1:Discrete; C-6\DCT:DIS; C-6\BFM: UNS;
J-13
J-14

Measurement: 82AJ01, description: LANTZ Norm acceleration,
units: MTR/S/S, High value: 1023.97, Low value: -1023.97,
conversion type: Coefficients
Order of curve fit: 1, derived from pair sets: No,
Coefficient (0): 0, Coefficient(1): 0.03125, binary format: two's complement

C-7\DCN:82AJ01; C-7\MN1:LANTZ Norm acceleration; C-7\MN3:MTR/S/S;
C-7\MOT1:1023.97; C-7\MOT2:-1023.97; C-7\DCT:COE; C-7\CO\N:1;
C-7\CO1:N; C-7\CO:0; C-7\CO-1:.03125; C-7\BFM:TWO;

**** END OF APPENDIX J ****
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix K, April 2009
APPENDIX K

PULSE AMPLITUDE MODULATION STANDARDS

1.0 General ............................................................................................................. K-1
2.0 Frame and Pulse Structure................................................................................ K-1
3.0 Frame and Pulse Rate ....................................................................................... K-3
4.0 Frequency Modulation...................................................................................... K-4
5.0 Premodulation Filtering.................................................................................... K-4

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure K-1. 50-percent duty cycle PAM with amplitude synchronization. ......................... K-2
Figure K-2. 100-percent duty cycle PAM with amplitude synchronization. ....................... K-2
ii

APPENDIX K
PULSE AMPLITUDE MODULATION STANDARDS
1.0 General
This standard defines the recommended pulse train structure and design characteristics
for the implementation of PAM telemetry systems. The PAM data are transmitted as time
division multiplexed analog pulses with the amplitude of the information channel pulse being the
analog-variable parameter.

2.0 Frame and Pulse Structure
Each frame consists of a constant number of time-sequenced channel intervals. The
maximum shall be 128 channel time intervals per frame, including the intervals devoted to
synchronization and calibration. The pulse and frame structure shall conform to either
Figure K-1 or Figure K-2.

2.1 Commutation Pattern. The information channels are allocated equal and constant time
intervals within the PAM frame. Each interval ("T" in Figures K-1 and K-2) contains a sample
pulse beginning at the start of the interval and having amplitude determined by the amplitude of
the measurand of the corresponding information channel according to a fixed relationship
(usually linear) between the minimum level (zero amplitude) and the maximum level (full-scale
amplitude). For a 50-percent duty cycle (RZ-PAM), the zero level shall be 20 to 25 percent of
the full amplitude level as shown in Figure K-1. The pulse width shall be the same in all time
intervals except for the intervals devoted to synchronization. The duration shall be either 0.5T
0.05, as shown in Figure K-1, or T 0.05, as shown in Figure K-2.

2.2 In-Flight Calibration. It is recommended that in-flight calibration be used and channels 1
and 2, immediately following the frame synchronization interval, be used for zero and full-scale
calibration. For RZ-PAM, channel 3 may be used for an optional half-scale calibration, and for
NRZ-PAM, the channel interval preceding channel 1 may be used for half-scale calibration if set
to 50 percent.

2.3 Frame Synchronization Interval. Each frame is identified by the presence within it of a
synchronization interval.

2.3.1 Fifty Percent Duty Cycle (RZ-PAM). The synchronization pattern interval shall have a
duration equal to two information channel intervals (2T) and shall be full-scale amplitude for
1.5T followed by the reference level or zero baseline for 0.5T (see Figure K-1).

K-1

MIN. SIGNAL
(See Note)

TIME

CHANNEL 3

2.OT

HALF SCALE
CALIBRATION (Optional)

FRAME

MAX. SIG

SYNC
INTERVAL

CENTER
FREQUENCY

T T
T 1.5T
2 2
CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL
INTERVAL

FULL SCALE
CALIBRATION (Optional)

ZERO BASELIN E
(Reference Level)

CHANNEL 1
ZERO CALIBRATION
(Optional)

Figure K-1. 50-percent duty cycle PAM with amplitude synchronization.

A 20-25 percent deviation reserved for pulse synchronization is
recommended.

5.0 T

T T

TIME

FRAME SYNC
INTERVAL

CENTER
FREQUENCY

CHANNEL 2

T

3.0 T

FULL SCALE
CALIBRATION

(Optional)

CHANNEL
INTERVAL

THIS LEVEL TO BE 50% LESS

CHANNEL 1
ZERO CA IBRATION L
(Optional)

HALF SCALE CALIBRATION
(0ptional) IF SET AT 50%

Figure K-2. 100-percent duty cycle PAM with amplitude synchronization.
K-2
2.3.2 One Hundred Percent Duty Cycle (NRZ-PAM). The synchronization pattern is in the
order given: zero level for a period of T, full-scale amplitude for a period of 3T, and a level not
exceeding 50-percent full-scale amplitude for a period T (see Figure K-2).

2.4 Maximum Pulse Rate. The maximum pulse rate should not be greater than that permitted
by the following subparagraphs.

2.4.1 PAM/FM/FM. The reciprocal of the shortest interval between transitions in the PAM
pulse train shall not be greater than one-fifth of the total (peak-to-peak) deviation specified in
Chapter 3 (Table 3-1A, Table 3-1B, and Table 3-1C) for the FM subcarrier selected.

2.4.2 PAM/FM. The reciprocal of the shortest interval between transitions in the PAM pulse
train shall be limited by whichever is the narrower of the following:

2.4.2.1 One-half of the 3-dB frequency of the premodulation filter when employed.

2.4.2.2 One-fifth of the intermediate frequency (IF) bandwidth (3 dB points) selected from the
IF bandwidths listed in Chapter 2, Table 2-2.

3.0 Frame and Pulse Rate
The frame and pulse parameters listed below may be used in any combination:

a minimum rate of 0.125 frames per second, and

a maximum pulse rate as specified in subparagraph 2.1.4.

3.1 Long Term Accuracy and Stability. During a measured period of desired data, the time
between the occurrence of corresponding points in any two successive frame synchronization
intervals should not differ from the reciprocal of the specified nominal frame rate by more than 5
percent of the nominal period.

3.2 Short Term Stability. During a measured period (P), containing 1000-channel intervals,
the time between the start of any two successive channel intervals (synchronization intervals
excepted) should not differ from the average channel interval established by the formula

1000
P
T
avg

by more than 1 percent of the average interval.

3.3 Multiple and Submultiple Sampling Rates. Data multiplexing at sampling rates which are
multiples and submultiples of the frame rate is permissible.

K-3
K-4
3.3.1 Submultiple Frame Synchronization. The beginning of the longest submultiple frame
interval is identified by the transmission of a synchronization pattern. All other submultiple
frames have a fixed and known relationship to the identified submultiple frames.

3.3.1.1 Fifty Percent Duty Cycle (RZ). The synchronization pattern has a full-scale amplitude
pulse in two successive occurrences of channel intervals allocated to data channels of the
identified submultiple frame. The first such pulse has a duration equal to the channel interval;
the second pulse immediately follows the first pulse and has a duration nominally one-half the
channel interval. There is no return to zero between the two pulses.

3.3.1.2 One Hundred Percent Duty Cycle (NRZ). The synchronization pattern has information
in five successive occurrences of a channel interval allocated to data channels of the identified
submultiple frame. The amplitude of the data channels assigned for synchronization is shown in
the following subparagraphs.

3.3.1.2.1 First occurrence - zero amplitude.

3.3.1.2.2 Second, third, and fourth occurrences - full-scale amplitude.

3.3.1.2.3 Fifth occurrence - not more than 50 percent of full-scale amplitude.

3.3.2 Maximum Submultiple Frame Length. The interval of any submultiple frame, including
the time devoted to synchronizing information, shall not exceed 128 times the interval of the
frame in which it occupies a recurring position.

4.0 Frequency Modulation
The frequency deviation of an FM carrier or subcarrier, which represents the maximum
and minimum amplitude of a PAM waveform, should be equal and opposite with respect to the
assigned carrier or subcarrier frequency. The deviation should be the same for all occurrences of
the same level.

5.0 Premodulation Filtering
A maximally linear phase response, premodulation filter, is recommended to restrict the
radiated spectrum (see Appendix A).

**** END OF APPENDIX K ****
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix L, April 2009

APPENDIX L

ASYNCHRONOUS RECORDER MULTIPLEXER OUTPUT RE-CONSTRUCTOR
(ARMOR)

1.0 General.............................................................................................................L-1
2.0 Setup Organization ..........................................................................................L-2

LIST OF TABLES

Table L-1. Armor Setup Preamble.....................................................................................L-1
Table L-2. Setup Organization ..........................................................................................L-2
Table L-3. Header Section Format ....................................................................................L-3
Table L-4. Channel Entry Lengths ....................................................................................L-4
Table L-5. Pcm Input Channels.........................................................................................L-6
Table L-6. Analog Input And Output Channels ................................................................L-7
Table L-7. Analog Input And Output Channels ................................................................L-8
Table L-8. Parallel Input Channels....................................................................................L-9
Table L-9. Parallel Output Channels ...............................................................................L-10
Table L-10. Time Code Input Channels ............................................................................L-12
Table L-11. Time Code Output Channels..........................................................................L-13
Table L-12. Voice Input Channel ......................................................................................L-14
Table L-13. Voice Output Channels..................................................................................L-15
Table L-14. Bit Sync Input Channels ................................................................................L-16
Table L-15. Trailer Section Format ...................................................................................L-17

ii

APPENDIX L
ASYNCHRONOUS RECORDER MULTIPLEXER OUTPUT RE-CONSTRUCTOR
(ARMOR)
1.0 General
This standard defines the recommended multiplexer format for single channel data
recording on small format (1/2 in.) media (Chapter 6, Section 6.7). This format is recognized as
the Asynchronous Recorder Multiplexer Output Re-constructor (ARMOR). This format is
software-reconfigurable for each data acquisition or reproduction. The ARMOR format
configuration information is stored in a data structure called a setup that contains all the
information necessary to define a particular record or play configuration. This appendix
describes the format and content of the ARMOR setup.

1.1 Setup on Tape. When the ARMOR setup is written to tape, it is preceded by a preamble
with a unique setup sync pattern that allows the identification of the setup. Three duplicate setup
records, each with its own preamble, are written at the beginning of each recording. The format
of the preamble is defined in Table L-1.

TABLE L-1. ARMOR SETUP PREAMBLE
FIELD LENGTH DESCRIPTION
SETUP SYNC 4 TAPE BLOCKS THE SYNC PATTERN CONSISTS OF TWO
BYTES. THE HIGH BYTE IS 0XE7; THE
LOW BYTE IS 0X3D. THE SYNC PATTERN
IS WRITTEN HIGH BYTE FIRST. FOR THE
DCRSI, A TAPE BLOCK IS A SINGLE SCAN
(4356 BYTES). FOR THE VLDS, A TAPE
BLOCK IS A PRINCIPLE BLOCK (65536
BYTES).
END OF SYNC 3 BYTES THE THREE BYTES IMMEDIATELY
FOLLOWING THE SYNC PATTERN ARE:
0X45, 0X4F, 0X53 (ASCII E, O, S FOR
END OF SYNC).

L-1
2.0 Setup Organization
An ARMOR setup is divided into three sections: the header section, the channel section,
and the trailer section. The overall organization of a setup is summarized in Table L-2.

TABLE L-2. SETUP ORGANIZATION
CONTENT NUMBER OF BYTES
HEADER SECTION 70
CHANNEL 1 INFORMATION 51 - 61
CHANNEL 2 INFORMATION 51 - 61

TRAILER SECTION 0 - 44 + SAVED SCANLIST SIZE

2.1 Header Section. The header section is the first 70 bytes of a setup. It contains
information about the setup as a whole, including clock parameters, frame parameters, and the
numbers of input and output channels (see Table L-3).

In Tables L-3 through L-12, fields noted with an asterisk (*) require user
input per section 2.5.

L-2

TABLE L-3. HEADER SECTION FORMAT
FIELD BYTES FORMAT DESCRIPTION
*SETUP
LENGTH
2 BINARY TOTAL BYTES IN SETUP, INCLUDING THIS FIELD
SOFTWARE
VERSION
12 ASCII VERSION OF THE ARMOR SETUP AND CONTROL
SOFTWARE THAT WROTE THE SETUP
PRE-SCALERS 1 BINARY THE BOTTOM FOUR BITS CONTAIN THE BIT RATE
CLOCK PRE-SCALER; THE TOP FOUR BITS
CONTAIN THE PACER CLOCK PRE-SCALER.
RESERVED 26 N/A N/A
*SETUP KEYS
(BIT 0)
IF BIT 0 (LSB) SET, SETUP CONTAINS SETUP
DESCRIPTION IN TRAILER.
*SETUP KEYS
(BITS 1, 2, & 3)
1 BINARY IF BIT 1 SET, SETUP CONTAINS CHECKSUM IN
TRAILER. IF BIT 2 SET, SETUP IS SCAN-ALIGNED.
IF BIT THREE SET THEN A SCAN LIST IS SAVED.
PACER DIVIDER 2 BINARY PACER DIVIDER VALUE
BIT RATE 4 BINARY AGGREGATE BIT RATE FOR ALL ENABLED
CHANNELS
BRC DIVIDER 2 BINARY BIT RATE CLOCK DIVIDER VALUE
MASTER
OSCILLATOR
4 BINARY FREQUENCY OF THE MASTER OSCILLATOR IN
BITS PER SECOND
BYTES
OVERHEAD
4 BINARY TOTAL SYNC BYTES PLUS FILLER BYTES PER
FRAME.
PACER 4 BINARY FREQUENCY OF THE PACER CLOCK IN CYCLES
PER SECOND
FRAME RATE 4 BINARY NUMBER OF FRAMES PER SECOND
*INPUT COUNT 2 BINARY NUMBER OF INPUT CHANNELS IN SETUP
OUTPUT COUNT 2 BINARY NUMBER OF OUTPUT CHANNELS IN SETUP

L-3
2.2 Channel Section. The channel section contains one channel entry for every channel in
the multiplexer chassis configuration, including those channels that are not enabled or recorded.
The content and length of the channel information vary depending on the channel type. The
lengths of the channel entries for each channel type are presented in Table L-4. Tables L-5
through L-14 describe the channel entry fields for each module type. Links to the tables are
provided below.

TABLE L-4. CHANNEL ENTRY LENGTHS
TABLE L-5. PCM INPUT CHANNELS
TABLE L-6. ANALOG INPUT AND OUTPUT CHANNELS
TABLE L-8. PARALLEL INPUT CHANNELS
TABLE L-9. PARALLEL OUTPUT CHANNELS
TABLE L-10. TIME CODE INPUT CHANNELS
TABLE L-11. TIME CODE OUTPUT CHANNELS
TABLE L-12. VOICE INPUT CHANNEL
TABLE L-13. VOICE OUTPUT CHANNELS
TABLE L-14. BIT SYNC INPUT CHANNELS

L-4

TABLE L-4. CHANNEL ENTRY LENGTHS
CHANNEL TYPE BYTES
PCM INPUT AND OUTPUT 51
ANALOG INPUT AND OUTPUT 53
PARALLEL INPUT 53
PARALLEL OUTPUT 56
TIMECODE INPUT AND OUTPUT 61
VOICE INPUT AND OUTPUT 61
BIT SYNC INPUT 61

L-5

TABLE L-5. PCM INPUT CHANNELS
*CHANNEL TYPE 2 BINARY 1 = 8 BIT PCM INPUT
8 = 20 MBIT PCM INPUT
MAPPED CHANNEL 2 BINARY INDEX OF THE CHANNEL THIS CHANNEL
IS MAPPED TO. IF THE CHANNEL IS NOT
MAPPED, THE INDEX IS 1.
*ENABLED 1 ASCII IF ENABLED, THE CHANNEL IS RECORDED
(Y OR N)
ACTUAL RATE 4 BINARY ACTUAL WORD RATE IN WORDS PER
SECOND
WORDS PER FRAME 4 BINARY NUMBER OF WORDS PER FRAME
INPUT MODES 1 BINARY IF BIT 0 (LSB) SET, SOURCE B DATA; ELSE
SOURCE A. IF BIT 1 SET, NRZ-L; ELSE BI-
PHASE-L. IF BIT 2 SET, 0 DEGREE CLOCK;
ELSE 90 DEGREE CLOCK.
RESERVED 3 N/A N/A
BITS PER WORD 2 BINARY 16 BITS
BITS PRECEDING 4 BINARY NUMBER OF BITS IN THE FRAME THAT
MUST PRECEDE THIS CHANNEL
*CHANNEL NUMBER 2 BINARY CHANNEL ON MODULE (0-3)
*MODULE ID 1 BINARY MODULE ID = HEX 11
RESERVED 1 N/A N/A
*REQUESTED RATE 4 BINARY REQUESTED BITS PER SECOND (INTEGER)
DESCRIPTION 20 ASCII CHANNEL DESCRIPTION

L-6

CHANNEL TYPE 2 BINARY 2 = 8 MBIT PCM OUTPUT
9 = 20 MBIT PCM OUTPUT
ENABLED 1 ASCII IF ENABLED, THE CHANNEL IS
RECORDED (Y OR N).
SECOND
OUTPUT MODES 1 BINARY IF BIT 0 (LSB) SET, BURST MODE. IF BIT 1
SET, BI-PHASE; ELSE NRZ-L.
RESERVED 3 N/A N/A
BITS PER WORD 2 BINARY NUMBER OF BITS PER WORD
BITS PRECEDING 4 BINARY NUMBER OF BITS IN THE FRAME THAT
MUST PRECEDE THIS CHANNEL
CHANNEL NUMBER 2 BINARY CHANNEL ON MODULE (0-3)
MODULE ID 1 BINARY MODULE ID = HEX 21
RESERVED 1 N/A N/A
REQUESTED RATE 4 BINARY REQUESTED BITS PER SECOND

L-7

*CHANNEL TYPE 2 BINARY 5 = LF ANALOG INPUT
6 = HF ANALOG INPUT
7 = ANALOG OUTPUT
*ENABLED 1 ASCII IF ENABLED, THE CHANNEL IS
RECORDED (Y OR N).
ACTUAL RATE 4 BINARY ACTUAL SAMPLE RATE IN SAMPLES PER
SECOND
SAMPLES PER FRAME 4 BINARY NUMBER OR SAMPLES PER FRAME
FILTER NUMBER 1 BINARY 0 = FILTER 1
1 = FILTER 2
2 = FILTER 3
3 = FILTER 4
RESERVED 3 N/A N/A
*BITS PER SAMPLE 2 BINARY NUMBER OF BITS PER SAMPLE (8 OR 12)
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
*MODULE ID 1 BINARY MODULE ID = 34 HEX (LF) OR 33 HEX (HF)
RESERVED 1 N/A N/A
*REQUESTED RATE 4 BINARY REQUESTED SAMPLES PER SECOND
RESERVED 2 N/A N/A

L-8
TABLE L-8. PARALLEL INPUT CHANNELS
*CHANNEL TYPE 2 BINARY 13 = NEW PARALLEL INPUT
*ENABLED 1 ASCII IF ENABLED, THE CHANNEL IS
RECORDED (Y OR N).
ACTUAL RATE 4 BINARY ACTUAL WORDS PER SECOND
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
WORDS PRECEDING 4 BINARY NUMBER OF WORDS IN THE FRAME
THAT MUST PRECEDE THIS CHANNEL
*MODULE ID 1 BINARY MODULE ID = HEX 92
RESERVED 1 N/A N/A
*REQUESTED RATE 4 BINARY REQUESTED WORDS PER SECOND.
INPUT MODE 1 BINARY 0 = FOUR 8-BIT CHANNELS
1 = ONE 16-BIT, TWO 8-BIT (CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE)
2 = TWO 16-BIT (CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE)
3 = ONE 32-BIT (CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE)
4 = ONE 24-BIT, ONE 8-BIT (CURRENTLY
UNAVAILABLE)
RESERVED 1 N/A N/A

L-9
CHANNEL TYPE 2 BINARY 14 = NEW PARALLEL OUTPUT
ENABLED 1 ASCII IF ENABLED, THE CHANNEL IS
RECORDED (Y OR N).
SECOND
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
WORDS PRECEDING 4 BINARY NUMBER OF WORDS IN THE FRAME
THAT MUST PRECEDE THIS CHANNEL
MODULE ID 1 BINARY MODULE ID = HEX A2
RESERVED 1 N/A N/A
REQUESTED RATE 4 BINARY REQUESTED WORDS PER SECOND
OUTPUT MODE 1 BINARY 0 = FOUR 8-BIT CHANNELS
1 = ONE 16-BIT, TWO 8-BIT
2 = TWO 16-BIT CHANNELS
3 = ONE 32-BIT CHANNEL
4 = ONE 24-BIT, ONE 8-BIT
7 = TWO 8-BIT DCRSI MODE
RECONSTRUCT MODE 1 BINARY 0 = DATA IS FROM MODULE OTHER
THAN PARALLEL INPUT.
1 = DATA IS FROM PARALLEL INPUT.
VALID ONLY FOR OUTPUT MODE.
DCRSI OUTPUT 1 BINARY 0 = HEADER AND DATA
1 = HEADER ONLY
3 = DATA VALID ONLY FOR OUTPUT
MODE 7.
L-10
(Continued)
BURST SELECT 1 BINARY 0 = CONSTANT
1 = BURST
HANDSHAKE SELECT 1 BINARY 0 = DISABLE HANDSHAKING
1 = ENABLE HANDSHAKING

L-11

TABLE L-10. TIME CODE INPUT CHANNELS
*CHANNEL TYPE 2 BINARY TIME CODE MUST APPEAR AS A GROUP
OF 3 CHANNELS, EVEN THOUGH THE
USER INTERFACE ONLY DISPLAYS A
SINGLE CHANNEL. THE RESPECTIVE
TYPES ARE 15, 19, AND 20.
*ENABLED 1 ASCII Y OR N
ACTUAL RATE 4 BINARY 1
SAMPLES PER FRAME 4 BINARY 1
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
*BITS PER WORD 2 BINARY 24 FOR CHANNEL TYPE 15
24 FOR CHANNEL TYPE 19
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
*CHANNEL NUMBER 2 BINARY 0 FOR CHANNEL TYPE 15
*MODULE ID 1 BINARY MODULE ID = HEX B1
RESERVED 1 N/A N/A
*REQUEST SAMPLE
RATE
4 BINARY 1
*BITS PER SAMPLE 2 BINARY 24 FOR CHANNEL TYPE 15
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
TCI MODE 1 BINARY 0 = GENERATE TIME
1 = USE EXTERNAL IRIG SOURCE
RESERVED 3 N/A N/A

L-12

TABLE L-11. TIME CODE OUTPUT CHANNELS
CHANNEL TYPE 2 BINARY TIME CODE MUST APPEAR AS A GROUP
OF 3 CHANNELS, EVEN THOUGH THE
USER INTERFACE ONLY DISPLAYS A
SINGLE CHANNEL. THE RESPECTIVE
TYPES ARE 17, 21 AND 22.
ENABLED 1 ASCII Y - ENABLED, OR N - DISABLED
ACTUAL RATE 4 BINARY 1
SAMPLES PER FRAME 4 BINARY 1
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
BITS PER WORD 2 BINARY 24 FOR CHANNEL TYPE 17
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
CHANNEL NUMBER 2 BINARY 0 FOR CHANNEL TYPE 17
MODULE ID 1 BINARY MODULE ID = HEX B1
RESERVED 1 N/A N/A
REQUESTED SAMPLE
RATE
4 BINARY 1
BITS PER SAMPLE 2 BINARY 24 FOR CHANNEL TYPE 17
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
TCO MODE 1 BINARY 0 - GENERATE TIME
1 - USE TIME FROM RECORDED TAPE
RESERVED 3 N/A N/A

L-13
TABLE L-12. VOICE INPUT CHANNEL
*CHANNEL TYPE 2 BINARY 16
*ENABLED 1 ASCII Y - ENABLED, OR N - DISABLED
SECOND
SAMPLES PER
FRAME
4 BINARY NUMBER OF SAMPLES PER FRAME
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
*BITS PER WORD 2 BINARY 8
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
*CHANNEL NUMBER 2 BINARY 3
*MODULE ID 1 BINARY MODULE ID = HEX B1
RESERVED 1 N/A N/A
*REQUESTED
SAMPLE RATE
4 BINARY 2K, 5K, 10K, 20K, 50K, OR 100K
*BITS PER SAMPLE 2 BINARY 8
RESERVED 1 N/A N/A
VOLTAGE GAIN 2 BINARY 0 - GAIN OF 1
1 - GAIN OF 2
2 - GAIN OF 4
3 - GAIN OF 8
RESERVED 5 N/A N/A

L-14

TABLE L-13. VOICE OUTPUT CHANNELS
CHANNEL TYPE 2 BINARY 18
MAPPED, THE INDEX IS 1
SECOND
SAMPLES PER
FRAME
4 BINARY NUMBER OF SAMPLES PER FRAME
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
BITS PER WORD 2 BINARY 8
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
CHANNEL NUMBER 2 BINARY 3
MODULE ID 1 BINARY MODULE ID = HEX B1
RESERVED 1 N/A N/A
REQUEST SAMPLE
RATE
4 BINARY NUMBER OF SAMPLES PER SECOND
BITS PER SAMPLE 2 BINARY 8
RESERVED 8 N/A N/A

L-15

TABLE L-14. BIT SYNC INPUT CHANNELS
CHANNEL TYPE 2 BINARY 23
RESERVED 2 N/A N/A
SECOND
WORDS PER FRAME 4 BINARY NUMBER OR WORDS PER FRAME
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
BITS PER WORD 2 BINARY 16
RESERVED 4 N/A N/A
MODULE ID 1 BINARY MODULE ID = HEXADECIMAL 13
RESERVED 1 N/A N/A
REQUESTED RATE 4 BINARY BITS PER SECOND
INSTALLED 1 BINARY 0 = DAUGHTER BOARD NOT INSTALLED
1 = DAUGHTER BOARD INSTALLED
PCM
GEOGRAPHICAL.
ADDRESS
1 BINARY GEOGRAPHICAL ADDRESS OF THE
ASSOCIATED PCM INPUT CHANNEL
SOURCE CLOCK 1 BINARY 0 = SOURCE A
1 = SOURCE B
RESERVED 7 N/A N/A

L-16
2.3 Trailer Section. The trailer section contains the setup description and the checksum
(see Table L-15). Early versions of the setup do not contain this information. The Setup
Keys field in the header indicates the content of the trailer section.

TABLE L-15. TRAILER SECTION FORMAT
SETUP
DESCRIPTION
40 ASCII DESCRIPTION OF THE SETUP
SAVED SCANLIST VARIES BINARY NUMBER OF BYTES DEPENDS ON THE
NUMBER OF CHANNELS BEING
RECORDED.
CHECKSUM 4 BINARY SUM OF ALL SETUP BYTES

2.4 Saved Scan-list Structure. This is an array of enabled input channels that make up the
calculated scan-list. Each element of the array is made up of two fields, an index field and a
count field. The length of the index field is one byte, and the length of the count field is two
bytes.

a. The index field, which is 1-based, is determined by the position of the channels
module in the ARMOR system. The first input channel found in the ARMOR system
is assigned an index of one (1), the next input channel is assigned a two (2), and so
on. The search for input modules starts at slot 1. Filler bytes are assigned an index
value of 255.

b. The count field is the number of words/samples per frame that is assigned to that
input channel.

2.5 Creating a Setup Block. Creating a Setup Block involves two steps. In the first step, the
user creates an input setup block file as described below in this section. Most of the fields in
the input setup block file are unspecified (filled with zeros). In the second step, the input setup
block file is read by the ARMOR compiler program that produces a new setup block file with all
the unspecified fields initialized to the appropriate values. In other words, a setup block has two
types of fields, user specified and compiler generated. Note that all compiler-generated fields
must be provided in the input setup block file and initialized with zeros prior to executing the
ARMOR compiler program.

The rules presented in this section must be explicitly followed to create an ARMOR input
setup block. Values for fields identified in the previous tables with an asterisk preceding the
field name must be provided. In some cases, the values for these required fields are constant and
are specified in the tables above. In other cases, the user must provide the desired value. All
L-17
fields with names not identified with asterisks must be initialized to binary zero. This includes
both unused and reserved fields.

Only input channel information entries are required. Output channel information entries
are ignored by the ARMOR compiler program.

2.5.1 Header Section.

Setup Length: Count the total numbers of bytes in the created setup block and put the
value here.
Setup Keys: Set bit 0 = 1 if the trailer contains a description. Leave other bits = 0.
Input Count: Enter the total number of input channel information entries, including
both enabled and disabled entries.

2.5.2 Channel Section. PCM, low frequency (LF) analog, and parallel input channel information
entries must be included in the setup block in groups of four entries per type. High frequency (HF)
analog input channel information entries must be included in the setup block in groups of two
entries per type. Time code/voice input channel information entries must be included in groups of
three time code entries and one voice entry. Specifying an ASCII N in the enabled field must
disable all unused input channel information entries. For each channel information entry group, the
channel number field of the first entry in the group is zero (0), the second entry is one (1), the third
is two (2), and the fourth is three (3). For the time code/voice group, the time code entry channel
number fields are 0, 1, and 2, respectively, while the voice entry channel number field is 3. HF
analog entry channel number fields are 0 and 1, respectively.

Description fields are not required and are not specified below. However, it is advisable
to include an ASCII description of each channel for future reference.

2.5.2.1 PCM Input Channels

Channel Type: Binary 8
Enabled: ASCII Y if enabled, N if disabled
Channel Number: Binary 0, 1, 2, or 3 as described in 2.5.2 above
Module ID: Hexadecimal 11
Requested Rate: Binary integer rate in bits per second
L-18
2.5.2.2 Analog Input Channels

Channel Type: Binary 5 for LF (up to 1 megasample/sec), 6 for HF (up to
10 megasamples/sec)
Enabled: Y if enabled, N if disabled
Bits per Sample: 8 or 12
Channel Number: 0, 1, 2, or 3 as described in 2.5.2 above
Module ID: Hexadecimal 34 (LF) or 33 (HF)
Requested Rate: Binary integer 2K, 5K, 10K, 20K, 50K, 100K,
200K, 500K, 1M (LF, HF) 2.5M, 5M, 10M (HF only)
2.5.2.3 Parallel Input Channels.

Channel Type: Decimal 13
Channel Number: 0, 1, 2, or 3 as described in 2.5.2 above
Module ID: Hexadecimal 92
Requested Rate: Binary integer 8-bit words (bytes) per second
2.5.2.4 Time Code Input Channels.

Channel Type: Decimal 15 (1
st
entry), 19 (2
nd
entry), 20 (3
rd
entry)
Enabled: Y if enabled, N if disabled, all three entries must be the
same
Bits per Word: Decimal 24 (1
st
entry), 24 (2
nd
entry), 16 (3
rd
entry)
Channel Number: 0, 1, or 2 as described in 2.5.2 above
Module ID: Hexadecimal B1
Requested Rate: 1
Bits per Sample: Decimal 24 (1
st
entry), 24 (2
nd
entry), 16 (3
rd
entry)
2.5.2.5 Voice Input Channels.

Channel Type: Decimal 16
Bits per Word: 8
Channel Number: 3 as described in 2.5.2 above
Requested Rate: Integer 2K, 5K, 10K, 50K, 100K
Bits per Sample: 8
L-19
L-20
2.5.3 Trailer Section. The trailer section of the input setup block is not required. The user
may include an ASCII text setup description in the trailer section by setting the setup keys bit 0 =
1 in the header section (see paragraph 2.5.1 above) and adding the setup description field only in
the trailer section.

2.5.4 ARMOR Compiler Program. Operational instructions for the ARMOR compiler
program are provided in the readme.txt file provided with the compiler (see Chapter 6,
paragraph 6.7.3.1).

**** END OF APPENDIX L ****
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix M, April 2009

APPENDIX M

PROPERTIES OF THE DIFFERENTIAL ENCODER SPECIFIED IN
IRIG STANDARD 106 FOR OQPSK MODULATIONS


1.0 Introduction.....................................................................................................M-1
2.0 The Need For Differential Encoding ..............................................................M-1
3.0 A Simple Solution To The Carrier Phase Ambiguity Problem......................M-4
4.0 Immunity to Carrier Phase Rotation ...............................................................M-7
5.0 Initial Values...................................................................................................M-9
6.0 Error Propagation..........................................................................................M-10
7.0 Recursive Processing and Code Memory .....................................................M-11
8.0 Frequency Impulse Sequence Mapping for SOQPSK..................................M-12
9.0 Summary.......................................................................................................M-14

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure M-1. Transmission System. .....................................................................................M-2
Figure M-2. OFFSET QPSK 106 Symbol to Phase Mapping Convention.........................M-3
Figure M-3. Detection ambiguity........................................................................................M-3
Figure M-4. QPSK State Timing ........................................................................................M-4
Figure M-5. OFFSET QPSK State Timing. ........................................................................M-5
Figure M-6. Basic SOQPSK Transmitter..........................................................................M-13
Figure M-7. OQPSK Transmitter (with precoder). ...........................................................M-13

LIST OF TABLES

Table M-1. Constellation Axis Rotations ..........................................................................M-4
Table M-2. Response To Run of 1s ...................................................................................M-7
Table M-3. SOQPSK Pre-Coding Table For IRIG-106 Compatibility ...........................M-13

ANNEX 1 TO APPENDIX M: SYSTEM LEVEL SOFTWARE REFERENCE
IMPLEMENTATION OF DIFFERENTIAL ENCODER DEFINED IN IRIG
STANDARD 106 FOR FQPSK AND SOQPSK MODULATIONS

1.0 Introduction...................................................................................................M-15
2.0 Matlab Workspace Operation.......................................................................M-15
3.0 Script For Modules .......................................................................................M-16

REFERENCES

ii

APPENDIX M
PROPERTIES OF THE DIFFERENTIAL ENCODER SPECIFIED IN IRIG STANDARD
106 FOR OQPSK MODULATIONS

1.0 Introduction
This appendix summarizes a study of the differential encoder originally adopted by the
U.S. Department of Defense (DoD) Advanced Range Telemetry (ARTM) project and the Range
Commanders Council (RCC) and incorporated into the Interrange Instrumentation Group
(IRIG) Standard 106 (IRIG-106) (reference [M-1]) for Fehers Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
(FQPSK-B)
1
modulation. The study, performed by Mr. Robert Jefferis of the TYBRIN
Corporation, was prompted by inquiries from industry representatives who were concerned that
this particular differential code was not associated with commercial telecommunication standards
and the fact that manufacturers had experienced confusion over correct implementation. The
study results shown in this appendix prove the code to be robust, reliable, and applicable to
Shaped Offset QPSK (SOQPSK-TG)
2
as well as FQPSK-B and FQPSK-JR.
3

This appendix is organized along the following structure. Paragraph 2 describes the need
for differential encoding. Paragraph 3 explains the IRIG-106 differential code for OQPSKs.
Paragraph 4 demonstrates differential codes invariance with respect to constellation rotation.
Paragraph 5 shows the differential decoder to be self-synchronizing. Paragraph 6 reviews the
differential decoders error propagation characteristics. Paragraph 7 analyzes a recursive
implementation of the differential code and Paragraph 8 describes use of this code with
frequency modulator based SOQPSK transmitters. A description of the implementation of the
entire coding and decoding process can be seen at Annex 1 to this appendix.

2.0 The Need For Differential Encoding
Practical carrier recovery techniques like Costas loops and squaring loops exhibit a
troublesome M-fold carrier phase ambiguity. A description of ambiguity problems and how to
overcome them are shown in the following paragraphs of this appendix.

Shown below at Figure M-1 is a simplified quadriphase transmission system that is one
of the methods recommended for transparent point-to-point transport of a serial binary data
stream. Transparent means that only revenue bearing data is transmitted. There is no in-line
channel coding nor is special bit pattern insertion allowed. The assumption is made for a non-
return-to-zero-level (NRZ-L) data stream containing the bit sequence b(nTb) transmitted at rate
r
b
= 1/T
b
bits per second. For QPSK and OQPSK modulations, the bit stream is divided into
subsets e containing even numbered bits and o containing odd numbered bits. The
transmission rate associated with the split symbol streams is r
s
= r
b
/2 symbols per second.

1
FQPSK-B is a proprietary variation of Offset QPSK (OQPSK), Digcom Inc., El Macero, California.
2
See Chapter 2 and Appendix-A for details on SOQPSK-TG (formerly SOQPSK-A*).
3
FQPSK-JR is an FQPSK variant developed by Mr. Robert Jefferis, TYBRIN Corporation,and Mr. Rich Formeister,
RF Networks, Inc.

M-1
Symbol values are converted to code symbols by the differential encoder described in section 3.0
below. A baseband waveform generator converts the digital symbol time series into continuous
time signals suitable for driving the vector modulator as prescribed for the particular modulation
in use. Thus, each subset modulates one of two orthogonal subcarriers, the in-phase (I)
channel, and the quadrature (Q) channel. The modulator combines these subcarriers, creating
a phase modulated RF signal S(t). On the receive side, demodulation separates the subcarriers,
translates them back to baseband, and constructs replicas of the code symbol series E(nT
s
) and
O(nT
s
). Decoding reverses the encoding process and a multiplexer (MUX) recreates a replica of
the bit stream b(nT
b
).

Figure M-1. Transmission System.

Most QPSK and OQPSK systems employ coherent demodulation. Figure M-2 is a
simplified diagram of commonly used modulation and demodulation structures. Note the
optional single bit delay shown in the odd symbol path. This creates the significant difference
between QPSK and OQPSK, the delay being inserted to create OQPSK.
4
Practical carrier
recovery techniques like Costas loops and squaring loops exhibit a troublesome M-fold phase
ambiguity (M=4 for QPSK and OQPSK) (see reference [M-2]). Each time the demodulator
carrier synchronizer phase locks to the modulator local oscillator(LO) its absolute phase
relationship to the LO contains the offset term | which can take on values of 0, t /2, or t
radians.
5

4
The delay can be inserted into either channel. The IRIG-106 convention and most published literature regarding
FQPSK and SOQPSK indicate the delay in the odd (or Q) channel.
5
The initial offset angle o is generally unknown and uncontrolled; it is tracked by the carrier recovery circuitry and
the symbol timing circuits automatically ignore.
M-2

Figure M-2. OFFSET QPSK 106 Symbol to Phase Mapping Convention.

The symbol detectors have insufficient information to determine which phase offset
exists. They always interpret demodulator output with the assumption that |=0. The resulting
constellation axis rotations and their impact on demodulator output are shown at Figure M-3 and
Table M-1. The 180-degree rotation is symmetric. The Axis (subcarrier) assignment is
unchanged but the sense (polarity) of both axes gets reversed. The 90-degree and 270-degree
rotations are asymmetric. Axis assignment is swapped and one axis polarity is reversed in each
case.

Figure M-3. Detection ambiguity.
M-3

TABLE M-1. CONSTELLATION AXIS ROTATIONS
Rotation +I +Q
0 I Q
t/2 -Q I
t -I -Q
3t/2 Q -I

3.0 A Simple Solution To The Carrier Phase Ambiguity Problem
Differential encoding has been used to work around the carrier ambiguity for many years.
For phase modulations, source data is coded such that phase differences rather than absolute
phase coordinates become the information-bearing attribute of the signal. The QPSK and
OQPSK modulations use I and Q independently, with each channel transporting one symbol
stream. Starting with the first binary digit, bit 0, even numbered bits form the sequence {e
k
} and
odd numbered bits form the sequence {o
k+1
} where the counting index is changed from the bit
index n to the symbol pair index

1) - (M ,...} 6 , 4 , 2 , 0 { 2 e = k n k

Figure M-4 illustrates how QPSK modulators process bits in pairs (dibits), mapping and
asserting time coincident symbol phase coordinates (I
k
,Q
k
)
6
. Phase state changes commence and
end on symbol interval timing boundaries, each state taking on one of four possible values at
detector decision instants. However, the case of interest is shown in Figure M-5.

Figure M-4. QPSK State Timing

6
Rectangular I and Q baseband waveforms are used only for illustration.
M-4

Figure M-5. OFFSET QPSK State Timing.

The Q channel half-symbol delay causes OQPSK phase trajectories to evolve on a half-
symbol (bit) rate basis. For the particular cases of FQPSK and SOQPSK-TG, carrier phase
either remains unchanged or changes by t/4 or t/2 radians over the pending bit interval.

The OQPSK inter-channel delay might at first seem a difficult complication because it
creates additional ambiguity; in other words, the receiver must resolve relative inter-channel
delay. However, as shown below, this is not a problem.

The differential encoding rule adopted in IRIG-106 for OQPSK appears in reference
[M-4] and is therein attributed to Clewer in reference [M-5] and Weber in reference [M-6]. Bit
by bit, the code symbol sets {E
k
} and {O
k+1
) are formed with the Boolean expressions:

Two bits are coded for each value of k in a two-step process. First, the even symbol E
k
is
coded with current bit e
k
. Then the next bit, o
k+1
becomes current and the odd symbol O
k+1
is
computed. In each code set the exclusive-or operator is applied to the state defining variables
just like BPSK differential encoding. Unlike BPSK however, the current source bit and the most
recent code symbol from the other channel determine adjacent phase transitions. Also note the
asymmetry of these equations introduced by the inverted code symbol in equation (M-2a). Its
significance will become evident in the next section.

2) - (M
2b) - (M
2a) - (M

1 ) 1 (
1

+ +
k k k
k k k
E o O
O e E

The code symbol sets {E} and {O} are applied to the I and Q channels of the OQPSK
modulator. The initial assignment of {E} to either I or Q can be made arbitrarily. However,
with this code definition, once the choice is made at the modulator, decoding will fail if channel
assignment conventions change anywhere during the transmission or decoding processes. Thus,
the assignment convention must extend to the physical modulator and demodulator. IRIG -06
assigns I to the physical I subcarrier (also known as the real or cosine subcarrier) and Q is
M-5
applied to the physical Q subcarrier (also known as the imaginary or sine subcarrier). In
order to stress this assignment convention, IRIG-106 expresses equation (M-2) explicitly in
terms of the I and Q channel variables:

{ } 3) - (M ... 6 , 4 , 2 , 0
3b) - (M
3a) - (M

) 1 ( ) 1 (
) 1 (
e

+ +
k
I o Q
Q e I
k k k
k k k

Decoding is straightforward. When |=0, I=I, and Q=Q, inspection of the following
truth tables reveals simple decoding instructions:

: equation decoding
0 1 1
1 1 0
1 0 1
0 0 0

0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
0 0 0
3b) - (M Equation 3a) - (M Equation
) 1 ( ) 1 ( ) 1 (
+ + k k k k k k
o I Q e Q I

{ } 4) - (M ... , 6 , 4 , 2 , 0
4b) - (M ' ' '
4a) - (M ' ' '
1 1
1
e
=
=
+ +
k
I Q o
Q I e
k k k
k k k

The equations at (M-3) may not convey an intuitive sense of the shift from absolute phase
states to phase differences. Extending (M-3a) backwards in time by substituting (M-3b) into
(M-3a) results in:

( ) ( ) 5) - (M
1 2 2 1
= =
k k k k k k k
o e I I o e I

Similarly, for the next bit interval the results are:

( ) ( ) 6) - (M
1 1 1 1 1 k k k k k k k
e o Q Q e o Q = =
+ + +

This recursive form clearly shows that on a bit by bit basis, the current and most recent
bits control phase trajectory motion, not absolute phase. Note that (M-5) and (M-6) do not define
the sign of a phase change. Predictable decoder output requires that two additional conventions
be established and maintained. Boolean logic polarity conventions used throughout the system
must be consistent. IRIG-106 assumes positive true logic. Finally, sign conventions and channel
M-6
assignment used within the transmitter (baseband signal generator and modulator) and the
receiver (demodulator) must be constrained to produce a consistent code symbol to phase
mapping convention. The IRIG-106 convention is shown in Figure M-2. For example, if {b}
were to consist entirely of logic one values, i.e., a run of 1s, the differential encoding process and
mapping convention will produce the phase trajectory shown in Table M-2.

TABLE M-2. RESPONSE TO RUN OF 1S
n b(n) k I
k
Q
k-1
Q
k+1
Phase (deg) Phase A
0 1 0 0 0* 225*
1 1 1 135 -t/2
2 1 1 1 1 45 -t/2
3 1 0 315 -t/2
4 1 2 0 0 225 -t/2
5 1 1 135 -t/2
* denotes assumed initial conditions

The trajectory spins clockwise, and the phase is retarded by 90 degrees during each bit
interval.
7
Obviously, any single (unbalanced) sign change and any change to the mapping
convention will alter the trajectory.

4.0 Immunity to Carrier Phase Rotation
The equations at (M-3) and (M-4) are invariant with respect to cardinal constellation
rotation as shown in the following:

Proof:

The |=0 case is decoded correctly by definition according to equations (M-5) and (M-6).
At Table M- 1, when | = t there is no axis swap but the decoder is presented with

1 1
'
'
+ +
=
=
k k
k k
Q Q
I I

7
FQPSK-B, FQPSK -JR and SOQPSK-TG modulations respond to a run of 1s with an S(t) that is ideally, a pure
tone at frequency f
c
-r
b
/4 Hz. This is referred as lower sideband mode. Similarly, a run of zeroes will produce a
constant anti-clockwise trajectory spin and a tone at f
c
+r
b
/4 Hz (upper sideband mode).
M-7
Decoding will progress as follows:

Step 1. Even channel; apply equation (M-4a);

' '
1 1 1 k k k k k k k k
e Q I Q I Q I' e = = = =

Step 2. Odd channel; apply equation (M-4b);

1 1 1 1 1
' ' '
+ + + + +
= = = =
k k k k k k k k
o I Q I Q I Q o

Thus, symmetric rotation is transparent to the code. When |=t/2 the decoder sees

k k
k k
I Q
Q I
=
=
+
1
1
'
'

Decoding takes place in the same sequence:

Step 1, even channel, apply equation (M-4a);

' '
1 1 1 1
= = = =
k k k k k k k k
o Q I I Q Q I' e

Step 2, odd channel, apply equation (M-4b);

' ' '
1 1 1 k k k k k k
e Q I I Q o = = =
+ +

In this case the bit sequence is recovered correctly and the code definition coupled with
consistent sign conventions automatically compensates for the asymmetric rotation by reversing
the application order of (4a) and (4b). It is noted that the output indexes are shifted back in time
one bit period. Asymmetric rotation causes a one-bit delay in the decoding process. Finally, the
same result is seen when |=3t/2:

k k
k k
I Q
Q I
=
=
+
1
1
'
'

Step 1. Even channel; apply equation (M-4a);

1 1 1 1
' '

= = = =
k k k k k k k k
o Q I I Q Q I' e

Step 2. Odd channel; apply equation (M-4b);

k k k k k k k k
e Q I Q I I Q o = = = =
+ + 1 1 1 1
' ' '
M-8
In all cases the decoder correctly reproduces the original bit sequence. Decoding is
instantaneous for symmetric rotations but it is delayed by one bit in 2 out of 4 possible
asymmetric rotation startup scenarios.

The need for consistent function assignment now becomes clear. Application of (4b) to a
code symbol formed with (3a) produces the complement of the original bit. Likewise,
application of (4a) to a symbol coded with (3b) inverts the result.

At this point, the OQPSK inter-channel delay ambiguity mentioned in section 2 has not
been resolved. The roles of I and Q reverse with asymmetric rotations and there is no way to
determine when this occurs. However, as long as the code symbol time sequence is preserved at
the decoder and the roles of I and Q do not get reversed in terms of the application of (6a) and
(6b), inter-channel delay is transparent to the code with respect to reconstruction of the original
data sequence.
8

5.0 Initial Values

Equations at (M-3) and (M-4) do not impose any implementation constraints on initial
values when encoding or decoding starts. To confirm this it is assumed that hardware power-up
(or initial data presentation) may cause encoding to commence with either channel. It is further
assumed that no provisions for specific initial values in encoder and decoder state memories have
been made. If coding starts with I (see equation M-3a), the first code symbol will be computed:

1 0 0
= Q e I

where (., denotes an unknown initial value and double vertical bars denote computed values
influenced by initial values. Encoding equations M-3a and M-3b will progress as follows:

0 1 1
I o Q =

1 2 2
Q e I =

As can be seen, the initial values do establish the absolute sense of code symbols for the
duration of transmission. But, on both ends of the process, two of three terms in every equation
are affected consistently by the initial value, which by symmetry has no effect on the outcome of
exclusive-or operations. Obviously, identical results occur if the encoder starts with Q.
Independent of starting channel and initial value then, the first and all subsequent adjacent code
symbol pairs contain valid state change information.

8
If for some reason the system application requires that one can determine whether a specific symbol was originally
transmitted via I or Q, then this code is not appropriate.

M-9
Initial decoder values can produce errors. Again starting with I, and using equations
(M-4a) and (4b), decoding will progress as follows:

1 0 0
' '

' = Q I e

0 1 1
' ' ' I Q o =

It is seen that on the second cycle the initial value of the decoder has been flushed out.
At most, one bit will be decoded in error. Similarly, if decoding starts with Q, output will
progress:

0 1 1
' ' ' I Q o =

1 2 2
' ' ' Q I e =

Again, only the first decoded bit may be incorrect. The conclusion, then, is that initial
values can produce at most, one decoded bit error. However, there is another source of startup
errors that is seen as an initial value problem. Section 4.0 showed that odd phase rotations (t/2
and 3t/2) cause a single bit delay in the decoder. Examining this further, the first symbol index
value will be k = 0. If the decoder starts with equation (M-4a), the first decoded bit will be:

1 1 0 1 0 0
= = ' ' = ' o Q I Q I e

If the decoder starts with equation (M-4b) the first result will be:

0 1 0 0 1 1
e Q I I Q o = = ' ' = '

The first case produces the aforementioned delay. The decoder emits an extra bit. The
second bit emitted is actually the first bit of the sequence reconstruction and is still subject to the
single initial value error probability of startup processing. The latter case does not produce a
delay; it only presents the possibility of a first bit decoding error.

6.0 Error Propagation
Differential encoding incurs a bit error penalty because received code symbols influence
more than one decoded bit. First consider a single symbol detection error in current symbol E
which is labeled c
k
. The following sequence of decoding steps shows how the error propagates.
Since the E channel was chosen as current, decoding starts with equation (M-4a). The single
detection error creates two sequential decoding errors. By symmetry we can state that the same
result occurs if a single error occurs in O.

correct ' ' '
error '
error '
2 1 2 2
1 1 1
1
= =
= =
= =
+ + + +
+ + +
k k k k
k k k k
k k k k
b Q E b
b Q b
b Q b
c
c
M-10
Next is the case of two symbol detection errors occurring consecutively on E and O,
i.e., detectors emit error symbols E
k
=c
k
and O
k+1
=c
k+1
. Starting again with equation (M-4a)
yields:

correct ' ' '
error ' '
correct ' '
error '
) 3 ( ) 2 ( ) 3 ( ) 3 (
) 2 ( ) 1 ( ) 2 ( ) 2 (
) 1 ( ) 1 ( ) 1 ( ) 1 (
) 1 (
= =
= =
= = =
= =
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
k k k k
k k k k
k k k k k k
k k k k
b E O b
b E b
b E O b
b Q b
c
c c
c

Two consecutive symbol errors produce two decoding errors but the errors are not
adjacent. The conclusion from this is that symbol detection errors influence no more than two
decoding cycles, i.e., the maximum error multiplication factor is 2.

7.0 Recursive Processing and Code Memory
Most systems reconstruct the original bit rate clock and {b} by merging {e} and {o}.
For a variety of reasons, designers might be tempted to multiplex {I} and {Q} into a bit rate
code symbol sequence {B
n
} prior to decoding. However, the same considerations that foster
desire for post-multiplex decoding are likely to be accompanied by loss of transmitted code
symbol order, i.e., loss of knowledge whether a given code symbol came from I or Q. The
question arises as to whether {B
n
} alone contains enough information for unique decoding. The
answer is no, and the proof is shown below.

Proof:

An alluring decoding function can be derived by inspection of equations (M-5) and (M-6).
Equation (M-5) can be rearranged as follows:

7) - (M
2 1
=
k k k k
I o e I

Similarly, from equation (M-6) we can write

8) - (M
1 1 1 + +
=
k k k k
Q e o Q

Here are two instances of a seemingly identical recursive relationship, i.e., the current code
symbol is the difference between the current bit, the previous bit, and the inverse of the most
recent code symbol from the current channel. We can consolidate these equations by converting
to post-multiplex bit rate indexing, i.e.,
9) - (M
) 2 ( ) 1 (
=
n n n n
B b b B

from which we can immediately write the decoding function

10) - (M ' ' ' '
) 2 ( ) 1 (
=
n n n n
B B b b
M-11
On the surface it seems that equation (M-10) will work.
9
However, these relations
involve two differences, rather than one, and therefore introduce superfluous initial condition
dependence. For brevity, only the pitfalls of (M-10) are examined herein, assuming that a non-
recursive encoder is used. From startup, decoding will progress as follows:

0 2 1 2
1 1 0 1
2 0 1 0
' ' ' '
' ' ' '
' ' ' '
B B b b
B B b b
B B b b
=
=
=

1 3 2 3
' ' ' ' B B b b =
.
.
.
As seen, absolute polarity of the first and all subsequent decoded bits is determined by
three (3) initial values. Absent appropriate a priori side information for selecting initial values,
the post-multiplex decoder offers a 50-50 chance of decoding with correct polarity. The code
sequence defined by equations at (M-3) has a two-symbol memory. Additional symbols do not
provide new information regarding the trajectory history. Another way to view this problem is to
note that this recursive decoder does not guarantee preservation of symbol order, which is a
prerequisite to reliable decoding.

8.0 Frequency Impulse Sequence Mapping for SOQPSK
The SOQPSKs first described by Hill and Geohegan in references [M-7] and [M-8] are
defined as special cases of continuous phase modulation (CPM). Since 1998, at least two
manufacturers have exploited the fact that modern digital waveform synthesis techniques enable
direct implementation of the CPM equations with virtually ideal frequency modulators and filter
impulse responses. A generic model of these implementations is at Figure M-6. The I and Q
channels, per se, do not exist in this transmitter. At the beginning of each bit interval, impulses
from the bit to impulse alphabet mapper direct the impulse filter/frequency modulator to advance
the carrier phase by 90, retard it by or 90, or leave the phase unchanged. This is accomplished
with a ternary alphabet of frequency impulses having normalized amplitudes of {-1,0,1}.
10

Obviously, this structure cannot be mapped directly into the constellation convention of a
quadriphase implementation because there is no way to control absolute phase. The equations at
(M-3) can be applied to this non-quadrature architecture via pre-coding. A general treatment
SOQPSK pre-coding is contained in reference [M-9]. It is easily shown that the pre-coding truth
table given in Table M-3 applied to the model in Figure M-7 will yield a phase trajectory history
identical to one generated by the quadriphase counterpart of Figure M-2 using the equations at
(M-3). However, one more constraint is necessary to establish compatibility with the IRIG-106
quadriphase convention. Table M-3 assumes the stipulation that positive sign impulse values
will cause the modulator to increase carrier frequency.

9
The interested reader is left to confirm that equation (10) is indeed rotation invariant.
10
The so-called ternary alphabet is actually 2 binary alphabets {-1,0} and {0,1}, the appropriate one chosen on a bit-
by-bit basis according to certain state transition rules.
M-12

Figure M-6. Basic SOQPSK Transmitter.

TABLE M-3. SOQPSK PRE-CODING TABLE FOR IRIG-106 COMPATIBILITY
MAP o
K
FROM I
K
MAP o
K+1
FROM Q
K+1

I
k
Q
k-1
I
k-2
Au o
k
Q
k+1
I
k
Q
k-1
Au o
k+1

-1 X* -1 0 0 -1 X* -1 0 0
+1 X* +1 0 0 +1 X* +1 0 0
-1 -1 +1 -t/2 -1 -1 -1 +1 +t/2 +1
-1 +1 +1 +t/2 +1 -1 +1 +1 -t/2 -1
+1 -1 -1 +t/2 +1 +1 -1 -1 -t/2 -1
+1 +1 -1 -t/2 -1 +1 +1 -1 +t/2 +1
* Note: Does not matter if X is a +1 or a -1

Figure M-7. OQPSK Transmitter (with precoder).
I
k

Q
k+1

PRE-
CODER
FREQUENCY
IMPULSE
FILTER
FREQUENCY
MODULATOR
106
A
ENCODER
{b(nT
b
)}
Impulse Series
{b(nT
b
)}
S(t)
M-13
9.0 Summary
11

This investigation confirmed that the differential encoder defined in the equations at
(M-3) is entirely satisfactory for SOQPSK, FQPSK-JR and FQPSK-B systems where
conventional coherent demodulation and single symbol detection is used. In addition, a method
of extending this code to SOQPSK is presented without proof.

Specifically, the following has been shown:

a. When accompanied by consistent sign conventions, a consistent symbol to phase
mapping rule, and preservation of symbol order, the OQPSK differential code defined
in (M-3) and the decoding rule defined in (M-4) is rotation invariant and
unambiguously reconstructs the original data bit sequence.

b. Decoding is instantaneous.

c. Equations (M-3) and (M-4) do not require attention to initial values.

d. At most, two consecutive output bits will be in error after carrier and symbol
synchronization is acquired.

e. The recursive relations in (M-9) and (M-10) are ambiguous and therefore unreliable.

f. The code exhibits a detection error multiplication factor of at most two.

11
There is no doubt in the authors mind that well trodden ground has been traveled in this investigation. These
characteristics were probably validated in reference [5] and by RF Networks Inc. before it incorporated the
encoder in its model 5450F FQPSK demodulator product. Unfortunately, none of this work is in the public
domain.
M-14
ANNEX 1 TO APPENDIX M
SYSTEM LEVEL SOFTWARE REFERENCE IMPLEMENTATION OF
DIFFERENTIAL ENCODER DEFINED IN IRIG STANDARD 106 FOR FQPSK AND
SOQPSK MODULATIONS
1.0 Introduction
The Matlab program listings below provide a Matlab function Desysdemo and an
execution control script runDEdemo. In the context of differential encoding, the function
provides a complete system simulation including a differential encoder, an ideal vector
modulator, channel phase rotation, demodulation, the functional equivalent of an ideal single
symbol sample and hold detector, and a decoder. The user can create sample data vectors or use
the example data provided. In addition, by manipulating the initial value vectors, all possible
initial value and demodulator phase rotation combinations of the quadriphase implementation
model can be explored.

By setting the variable style to zero, the function will also emulate the pre-coded
frequency modulator architecture required for SOQPSKs. However, the initial value of
transmitter carrier phase is hard coded at 45 degrees. This was done to avoid proliferation of
initial value options and is thought to be an insignificant omission because it does not affect
generality of the phase rotation options.

It is assumed that the user is familiar with Matlab workspace operation. The program
relies only on basic Matlab license libraries. There are no special toolboxes or blocksets are
required.

2.0 Matlab Workspace Operation
The user should place the script (shown below in paragraph 3.0 of this Annex) in the
directory of choice and make that directory current in the workspace. In order to execute the
canned example, the user needs to create the variable example in the workspace and set its
value to 1.
M-15
Executing the script runDEdemo should produce the following output:

results =

Model: Quadriphase Vector Modulator
Demodulator Phase Rotation = 0 degrees

Initial States: Encoder
Memory
Encoder
Channel
Decoder
Memory
Decoder
Channel
(0,0) 0 (0,0) 0

Input
Bit
TX
Phase
RX
Phase
Output
Bit
Decoding
Error
1 225 225 1 0
1 135 135 1 0
1 45 45 1 0
0 45 45 0 0
0 135 135 0 0
1 135 135 1 0
0 135 135 0 0
1 135 135 1 0
1 45 45 1 0
1 315 315 1 0
0 315 315 0 0
0 45 45 0 0
1 45 45 1 0
0 45 45 0 0

The first column of the results shown above is a replica of the input data vector. The
second column shows the initial value dependent evolution of transmitted phase. The third
column shows the effect of any non-zero phase rotation chosen. The fourth column shows the
decoded output bit stream and the fifth column flags decoding errors with values of 1. Certain
combinations of phase rotation and initial values will produce values of 9 in the fourth and fifth
columns; results of this nature are associated with cases that delay the output decoding process
by one bit.

Variable definitions and implied instructions for manipulating the runtime options can be
obtained by using the normal Matlab help command for these specific programs.

3.0 Script For Modules
Electronic copies of these programs have been provided to the DoD Range Commanders
Council, Telemetry Group. The script for the modules discussed above is shown on the
following pages.
M-16
% Control Script runDEdemo, for running system demonstration
% of differential encoder and phase mapping convention
% defined in RCC standard IRIG-106 for FQPSK-B modulation.
% This version extends demonstration options to the pre-coder
% required for implementing SOQPSK with frequency modulators.
%
% Each example run requires input variables in the Matlab workspace:
%
% "example" - a flag to run with user supplied data vector or run
% the example data set that consists of two repetitions of a
% a 7-bit pseudo random sequence(0=user, 1=example)
% "data" - optional user supplied binary bit sequence (arbitrary length)
% "rotation_choice" - pointer to demodulator phase rotation options:
% 1=0, 2=pi/2, 3= pi, 4=3*pi/2
% "initTX" - vector of binary encoder startup values:
% initTX(1)= 1st of two encoder code symbol memory values(binary, arbitrary)
% initTX(2)= 2nd encoder code symbol memory value(binary, arbitrary)
% initTX(3)= starting channel for encoder(binary, 0=I, 1=Q)
% "initRX" - vector of binary decoding startup values
% initRX(1)= 1st of two decoder state memory values(binary, arbitrary)
% initRX(2)= 2nd decoder state memory value(binary, arbitrary)
% initRX(3)= starting channel for decoder(binary, 0=I, 1=Q)
% "style" - 1=quadriphase transmitter architecture (FQPSK)
% 0=frequency modulator transmitter architecture (SOQPSK)
% The example values are:
% data=[1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0]
% rotation_choice=1
% initTX=[0 0 0]
% initRX=[0 0 0]
% style=1

% R.P.Jefferis, TYBRIN Corp., JULY, 2002
% SOQPSK model added 14JUL03
% This version has been tested with Matlab versions:5.2,6.1

% *** Sample Input Setup ***
if example
data=[1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0];
rotation_choice=1;
initTX=[0 0 0];
initRX=[0 0 0];
style=1;
end

% *** Run the Reference Implementation ***

M-17
[test,delay]=DEsysdemo(data,rotation_choice,initTX,initRX,style);

% *** Prepare Screen Output ***

ROTATION=[0 90 180 270];
if style
results=sprintf('Model: Quadriphase Vector Modulator\n')
else
results=sprintf('Model: Frequency modulator (SOQPSK) model\n')
end
results=[results sprintf('Demodulator Phase Rotation = %3.0f
degrees\n',ROTATION(rotation_choice))];
results=[results sprintf('Initial States: Encoder Encoder Decoder Decoder\n')];
results=[results sprintf(' Memory Channel Memory Channel\n')];
results=[results sprintf('------------------------------------------------\n')];
results=[results sprintf(' (%d,%d) %d (%d,%d) %d\n\n',...
initTX(1:2),initTX(3),initRX(1:2),initRX(3))];
results=[results sprintf(' Input TX RX Output Decoding\n')];
results=[results sprintf(' Bit Phase Phase Bit Error\n')];
results=[results sprintf('-------------------------------------\n')];
for n=1:length(data)
results=[results sprintf(' %d %3.0f %3.0f %d %d\n',...
test(n,:))];
end
results

% ___________END OF CONTROL SCRIPT_____________

function [result,delay]= DEsysdemo(inbits,rotation_choice,initTX,initRX,style)
% Reference simulation for Range Commanders Council standard IRIG 106-2000
% FQPSK-B differential encoding and phase mapping convention.
%
% Input arguments: see "help" for "runDEdemo" script
% Output arguments:
% "result" - Mx5 matrix,M=number of input bits,columns contain:
% (:,1)input bit,(:,2)TX phase,(:,3)RX phase,(:,4)output bit,(:,5)status
% "delay" - overall encode/decode process delay in bits

% "TX" prefixes refer to transmitter/encoder variables, "RX" prefixes
% refer to receiver/decoder variables
% Robert P. Jefferis, TYBRIN Corp., July,2002.
% SOQPSK model added 14JUL03
% This version has been tested with Matlab versions: 5.2,6.1
numbits=length(inbits)

% *******************
M-18
% * Transmitter *
% *******************

% *** differential encoder (also SOQPSK pre-coder)****

% encoder memory initial values:
% [(last I ch. code symbol) (last Q ch. code symbol)]
TXlastSYM=initTX(1:2);
% point encoder to either I or Q starting channel(0=I)
TXpoint=initTX(3);
for n=1:numbits
switch TXpoint
case 0
%TXlastSYM
% compute "current" I channel code symbol
TXnewISYM=xor(inbits(n),~TXlastSYM(2));
TXcodeSYM(n,:)=[TXnewISYM TXlastSYM(2)]; % new phase coordinates(I,Q)
TXlastSYM(1)=TXnewISYM; % update encoder memory state
TXpoint = ~TXpoint; % point to Q channel eq. for next bit
case 1
% compute "current" Q channel code symbol
TXnewQSYM=xor(inbits(n),TXlastSYM(1));
TXcodeSYM(n,:)=[TXlastSYM(1) TXnewQSYM]; % new phase coordinates(I,Q)
TXlastSYM(2)=TXnewQSYM;% update encoder memory state
TXpoint= ~TXpoint; % point to I channel eq. for next bit
otherwise
disp('Invalid Specification of Encoder starting channel');
end
end

% *** modulate ***

switch style
case 1 % ** Quadriphase vector modulator **

% RCC IRIG 106 FQPSK-B phase mapping convention: (I,Q)
for n=1:numbits
index=floor(2*TXcodeSYM(n,1)+TXcodeSYM(n,2));
switch index
case 3 % [1 1]
TXphase(n)=45; % TX phase angle, degrees
case 1 % [0 1]
TXphase(n)=135;
case 0 % [0 0]
TXphase(n)=225;
case 2 % [1 0]
M-19
TXphase(n)=315;
otherwise, disp('map error')
end
end
case 0 % ** Frequency modulator w/pre-coder **

% * pre-coder *
% map code symbol sequence to frequency impulse series, alpha(n)
alpha=zeros(1,numbits);
TXpoint=initTX(3); % in this mode, points to start index
for n=3:numbits
if TXpoint % Q(k+1) map
if TXcodeSYM(n,2)==TXcodeSYM(n-2,2)
elseif xor(TXcodeSYM(n,2),TXcodeSYM(n-1,1))
alpha(n)=-1;
else
alpha(n)=1;
end
else % I(k) map
if TXcodeSYM(n,1)==TXcodeSYM(n-2,1)
elseif xor(TXcodeSYM(n,1),TXcodeSYM(n-1,2))
alpha(n)=1;
else
alpha(n)=-1;
end
end
TXpoint=~TXpoint; % switch to complement function for next bit
end

% convert alpha to phase trajectory
lastTXphase=45; % initial phase of S(t)
for n=1:numbits
TXphase(n)=mod(lastTXphase+alpha(n)*90,360);
lastTXphase=TXphase(n);
end
otherwise
end

% ************
% * Receiver *
% ************

% *** Demodulator Phase Rotation ***
ROTATE=[0 pi/2 pi 3*pi/2];
rotate=ROTATE(rotation_choice);
for n=1:numbits
M-20
switch rotate
case 0
RXphase(n)=TXphase(n);
case pi/2
RXphase(n)=mod(TXphase(n)+90,360);
case pi
case 3*pi/2
otherwise
end
end

% *** detector ***
for n=1:numbits
switch RXphase(n)
case 45
RXcodeSYM(n,:)=[1 1];
case 135
case 225
case 315
otherwise
end
end

% *** decode and reconstruct data bit sequence ***

% decoder memory initial values:
% [(last decoded I channel bit) (last decoded Q channel bit)]
RXlastSYM=initRX(1:2);
% point decoder channel to either I or Q starting channel (0=I)
RXpoint=initRX(3);
for n=1:numbits
switch RXpoint
case 0
% compute "current" decoded I channel bit
RXbits(n)=xor(RXcodeSYM(n,1),~RXlastSYM(2));
RXlastSYM=RXcodeSYM(n,:); % update decoder state
RXpoint = ~RXpoint; % point to Q channel eq. for next bit
case 1
% compute "current" decoded Q channel bit
RXbits(n)=xor(RXcodeSYM(n,2),RXlastSYM(1));
RXlastSYM=RXcodeSYM(n,:); % update decoder state
M-21
RXpoint= ~RXpoint; % point to I channel eq. for next bit

otherwise
end
end

% ____________ END OF TX and RX Processing ______________

% *******************
% * Assemble Output *
% *******************

% identify delay incurred in overall process
offset=xcorr(inbits,RXbits);
offset(1:numbits-1)=[];
[offset,delay]=max(offset(1:min(length(offset),10)));
delay=delay-1;

% adjust RX output bit vector to compensate for delay,
% inserting values of 9 at beginning of vector to represent
% artifact bits associated with asymmetric rotation cases
checkbits=inbits;
if delay
newfront=ones(1,delay)*9;
checkbits=[newfront inbits];
checkbits(end-delay+1:end)=[];
RXbits(1:delay)=9;
end
% identify decoding errors in reconstructed bit stream
xmsn_error=checkbits~=RXbits;
xmsn_error(1:delay)=9;
% assemble output matrix
result(:,1)=inbits';
result(:,2)=TXphase';
result(:,3)=RXphase';
result(:,4)=RXbits';
result(:,5)=xmsn_error';

% _____END OF FUNCTION DEsysdemo__________

M-22
M-23
REFERENCES
[1] Telemetry Standards, IRIG STANDARD 106, Secretariat, Range Commanders Council,
White Sands Missile Range, Mew Mexico.

[2] Proakis, J.G., Digital Communications, 5
th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Inc., New York, 1989.

[3] Cacciamani, E.R and Wolejsza Jr., C.J, Phase-Ambiguity Resolution in a Four-Phase PSK
Communications System, IEEE Transactions on Communications, Vol. COM-19, No.6,
December 1971.

[4] Feher, K., Digital Communications: Satellite/Earth Station Engineering, Prentice-Hall Inc.,
New Jersey, 1983,pp. 168-170.

H[5] Cited from bibliography of reference 4 for completeness only. Not available: Clewer, R.
Report on the Status of Development of the High Speed Digital Satellite modem, RML-009-
79-24, Spar Aerospace Limited, St. Anne de Bellevue, P.Q., Canada, November 1979.
,

[6] Weber, W.J. III, Differential Encoding for Multiple Amplitude and Phase Shift Keying
Systems, IEEE Transactions on Communications, Vol. COM-26, No. 3, March 1978.

[7] Hill T., An Enhanced, Constant Envelope, Interoperable Shaped Offset QPSK(SOQPSK)
Waveform for Improved Spectral Efficiency, Proceedings of the International Telemetering
Conference, San Diego, California, October 2000.

[8] Geoghegan, M., Implementation and Performance Results for Trellis Detection of
SOQPSK, Proceedings of the International Telemetering Conference, Las Vegas, Nevada,
October 2001.

[9] Simon, M.K., Multiple-Bit Differential Detection of Offset Quadriphase Modulations, IPN
Progress Report 42-151, November 15, 2002, Jet Propulsion Laboratory, Pasadena, California.

**** END OF APPENDIX M ****
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix N, April 2009

APPENDIX N

TELEMETRY TRANSMITTER COMMAND AND CONTROL PROTOCOL

TABLE OF CONTENTS


1.0 Introduction..................................................................................................... N-1
2.0 Command Line Interface ................................................................................ N-1
3.0 Initialization.................................................................................................... N-2
4.0 Basic Command Set........................................................................................ N-2
5.0 Extended Command Set.................................................................................. N-7
6.0 Transmitter Communication Example.......................................................... N-13
7.0 Non-standard Commands ............................................................................. N-14
8.0 Physical Layer(s) .......................................................................................... N-14

LIST OF TABLES

Table N-1. Basic Command Set........................................................................................ N-2
Table N-2. Extended Command Set.................................................................................. N-7

CHANGES TO THIS EDITION OF APPENDIX N

item.

Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix N, May 2009

ii


APPENDIX N

TELEMETRY TRANSMITTER COMMAND AND CONTROL PROTOCOL

1.0 Introduction
This Appendix provides standards for commands, queries, and status information when
communicating with telemetry transmitters configured with communication ports. The
commands are divided into two categories of command sets as follows:

a. Basic. The basic command set contains the minimum (required) commands for
transmitter control, query, and status.
b. Extended. The extended command set contains optional commands that may or may
not be implemented and may be shown as references.

2.0 Command Line Interface
2.1 User Command Line Interface. This interface is the default upon power up of the
transmitter. Each command or query is ended by a carriage return <CR>. Information returned
from the transmitter will be followed by a carriage return <CR> and the > will be displayed to
indicate the transmitter is ready to receive commands or queries.

With regard to this standard, it is assumed that a carriage return <CR> is
followed by a line feed. The transmitter will return the OK mnemonic
for each command that is accepted. The transmitter will return ERR for
a command or query that was interpreted as an error. Verification that a
query was either accepted or found to be in error will be the response to the
query. All commands are case insensitive. The transmitter will operate in
half duplex mode and will echo typed characters to the command terminal.

2.1.1 Options. In addition to the required user command line interface items, the following list
contains options that may or may not be implemented.

a. Backspacing to correct typed errors.
b. A character input to recall the last command line. The ^ character followed by a
<CR> is recommended.

2.2 Optional Programming Interface. If the transmitter is not commanded or queried though
a terminal program (human interface), there may be an option to operate in half duplex mode so
that concatenated commands can be sent directly to the transmitter (bulk transmitter set-up). If
this option is used, the transmitter will only return a single accepted OK response if the entire
string was interpreted and accepted. When concatenating commands, the semicolon ; is used
as the delimiter for each command. If this optional programming interface is implemented, the
transmitter will identify the semicolon delimiter, recognize the character string as a bulk
command, and recognize the start of a new command after each delimiter.
N-1

3.0 Initialization
Upon successful communication initialization, the transmitter will provide the controlling
terminal with (as a minimum) the manufacturers name, model number, serial number, and
supported IRIG-106 (RCC-106) release number. Other information (such as information on
firmware and temperature) deemed appropriate by the manufacture is allowed. This information
will be displayed only upon a successful power up and communication initialization of the
transmitter. Should an unsuccessful power up occur, based upon criteria of the transmitter
manufacturer, the transmitter shall return ERR and allow only the RE(RES) command to reset
the transmitter (see Table N-1 and paragraph 4.2.10).

Upon successful communication, after a power up, a communication connection, a
command, or a query, the transmitter will send a carriage return followed by a > to signify the
transmitter is ready to accept commands and queries.

4.0 Basic Command Set
4.1 Basic Command Set Summary. The basic command fields use a minimum two
characters with the optional capability of using a maximum of four characters. If possible, the
longer four character field should be used to add intuitiveness to the basic command set. The
commands in the basic command set are shown in Table N-1.

TABLE N-1. BASIC COMMAND SET
Command Function
FR(FREQ) Sets or queries the carrier frequency.
MO(MOD) Sets or queries the modulation mode.
DE Sets or queries the setting of differential encoding (ON or OFF).
RA(RAND) Sets or queries the setting of data randomization (ON or OFF).
RF Sets or queries the RF output (ON or OFF).
QA(QALL) Queries the status of all basic commands.
VE(VERS) Queries, at a minimum, the manufacturers name, model number, and serial
number of the transmitter.
SV(SAVE) Saves the current set-up of the transmitter to on-board nonvolatile RAM.
RL(RCLL) Retrieves a transmitter set-up from on-board nonvolatile RAM.
RE(RES) Resets the transmitter to a known configuration, restarts the internal power-
up sequence.

N-2

4.2 Commands: Basic Command Set.

4.2.1 Carrier Frequency. Carrier frequency is set or queried with the FR(FREQ) mnemonic
as described below.

a. Set Frequency. Use FR(FREQ) XXXX.X <CR> where XXXX.X is the
commanded frequency in MHz in 0.5 MHz steps. If the command is accepted, an
OK <CR> is issued as a response.

In the event of an incorrect commanded carrier frequency (for example the
commanded frequency is out of the tuning range of the transmitter), the transmitter
will default to the currently set carrier frequency before the command was issued. The
transmitter will then return ERR FR(FREQ) XXXX.X <CR> where XXXX.X is
the prior frequency set in the transmitter.

b. Query Frequency. FR(FREQ) <CR> queries the currently set carrier frequency and
returns FR(FREQ) XXXX.X <CR> where XXXX.X is the current set frequency
in MHz.

4.2.2 Modulation Mode. Modulation mode is set or queried with the MO(MOD) mnemonic.

a. Set Modulation Mode. Use MO(MOD) X <CR> where X corresponds to the
modulation mode. If the command is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a
response.

Command Modulation Type
MO(MOD) 0 PCM/FM
MO(MOD) 1 SOQPSK-TG
MO(MOD) 2 ARTM-CPM
MO(MOD) 6 Modulation off (carrier only)

In the event of an incorrect commanded modulation mode, the transmitter will
default to the previous modulation mode and return ERR MO(MOD) X <CR> to
indicate the error and the current modulation mode. The MO(MOD) 6 command
turns off the modulation for carrier only mode. Modulation will return upon a new
commanded modulation mode. If the transmitter is in single mode, only single mode
commands are valid and the above error response will be sent should an invalid
modulation mode command be sent. The same logic apples when the transmitter is in
dual mode.

b. Query Modulation Mode. MO(MOD) <CR> queries the currently set modulation
mode and returns MO(MOD) X <CR> where the integer X is represented in the
above table.

N-3

4.2.3 Differential Encoding. Differential encoding is set or queried with the DE mnemonic.
For additional information, the reader is referred to Chapter 2 (paragraph 4.3.1.1) and
Appendix M.

a. Set Differential Encoding. Use DE X <CR> where X corresponds to a 1 or 0. If
the command is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a response.

Command Differential Encoding
DE 1 On
DE 0 Off

In the event of an incorrect differential encoding command, the transmitter will
return ERR DE X<CR> to indicate the error and return the current differential
encoding setting.

b. Query Differential Encoding. DE <CR> queries the currently set differential
encoding status and returns DE X <CR> where integer X is represented in the
above table.

c. Default. When switching modulation modes the differential encoding shall be
switched appropriately. For example when switching from SOQPSK-TG to
PCM/FM, the differential encoding will be set to off, DE 0.

d. Manual Control. For the PCM/FM and ARTM-CPM modulation modes differential
encoding will always be disabled (off). However, the user can be given manual
control of differential encoding when using SOQPSK-TG modulation.

4.2.4 Data Randomization. Data randomization is set or queried with the RA(RAND)
mnemonic. For additional information, see Chapter 2, paragraph 2.4.3.4, and Appendix D,
Figure D-2.

a. Set Data Randomization. Use RA(RAND) X <CR> where X corresponds to a 1 or
0. If the command is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a response.

Command Randomization
RA(RAND) 1 On
RA(RAND) 0 Off

In the event of an incorrect data randomization command, the transmitter will
default to its current setting and return ERR RA(RAND) X <CR> to indicate the
error and the currently set state.

b. Query Randomization Mode. RA(RAND) <CR> queries the currently set
randomization and returns RA(RAND) X <CR> where integer X is represented in
the above table.

N-4

4.2.5 RF Output. RF output is set or queried with the RF mnemonic.

a. Set RF Output. Use RF X <CR> where X corresponds to a 1 or 0. If the command
is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a response.

Command RF Output
RF 1 On
RF 0 Off

In the event of an incorrect RF output command, the transmitter will maintain its
current state and return ERR RF X <CR> to indicate the error and return the current
RF output setting for the transmitter.

b. Query RF Output. RF <CR> queries the currently set RF output and returns
RF X <CR> where X corresponds to the numbers in the above table.

4.2.6 Query all. The query all command is executed with the QA(QALL) mnemonic.

a. Query Transmitter Configuration. The command QA(QALL) <CR> requests the
current setting of all basic commands. The transmitter response will contain, as a
minimum, the following, in this order:
(1) Carrier Frequency. [FR(FREQ) XXXX.X]<CR>
(2) Modulation Mode. [MO(MOD) X] <CR>
(3) Differential Encoding setting. [DE X] <CR>
(4) Randomization setting. [RA(RAND) X] <CR>
(5) RF Output setting. [RF X] <CR>
OK<CR>
>

b. Status of Other Commands. If other commands are implemented in the transmitter
beyond the basic set, a complete status should be given for each implemented
command.

4.2.7 Version. The version command is executed with the VE(VERS) <CR> mnemonic.

a. Query Transmitter Version. VE(VERS) <CR> requests the current version of the
transmitter. The response will contain (at a minimum) the following information
about the transmitter and in this order:
(1) Manufacturer Name
(2) Model Number
(3) Serial Number
(4) IRIG 106, Appendix N Release supported

b. Formatting and Delimiting the Fields. It is left up to the transmitter manufacturer to
format and delimit the above fields and, if chosen, add additional information to the
response.
N-5

4.2.8 Save. The save command is executed with the SV(SAVE) mnemonic.

For Save Transmitter Set-Up, SV(SAVE) X<CR> saves the current settings of the
transmitter to register X in nonvolatile memory within the transmitter. If only one location is
available, the value of X is 0 (zero). There is no limit to the number of storage registers within
the transmitter.

The command SV(SAVE) <CR> will save to the default location 0 (zero).

In the event of an unsuccessful save command, the transmitter will return ERR
SV(SAVE) X<CR> to indicate the error and no save function will be performed.

4.2.8.1 Operational Fail Safe. In order to avoid the situation of fielding a flight test item that has
been inadvertently programmed to use internal clock and data sources the transmitter will always
save the clock and data source as external.

4.2.9 Recall. The recall command is executed with the RL(RCLL) mnemonic.

For Recall Transmitter Set-up, RL(RCLL) X<CR> retrieves and restores the
transmitter set-up from register X in nonvolatile memory within the transmitter. Values of
X start at 0 (zero). The 0 (zero) register location should be used exclusively for the default set-
up. The default set-up is the memory location that is loaded during power-up.

The command RL(RCLL) <CR> will recall from the default location 0 (zero).

In the event of an unsuccessful recall command, the transmitter will return ERR
RL(RCLL) X<CR> to indicate the error and no recall function will be performed.

4.2.9.1 Operational Fail Safe. During a recall operation the transmitter will always set the clock
and data sources to external. (See section 4.2.8.1.).

N-6

4.2.10 Reset. The transmitter can be reset with the RE(RES) mnemonic.

a. Reset Transmitter. RE(RES) <CR> resets the transmitter by reinitializing the
transmitter. The transmitter will use the following basic settings as a base
configuration.

Transmitter Setting Command Result
Carrier frequency [FR(FREQ)] Lowest valid frequency within the tuning range
Modulation mode [MO(MOD)] MO(MOD) 0, PCM/FM
Differential encoding [DE X] DE 0, Differential encoding off
Randomization [RA(RAND) X] RA(RAND) 0, Randomization off
RF output [RF X] RF 0, RF output off

b. Example Command use. The Reset Transmitter command would be used if
communication to the transmitter could not be established, if commands were not
being recognized, or if some other unknown transmitter state was experienced.

5.0 Extended Command Set
5.1 Extended Command Set Summary. The extended command set includes commands and
queries not in the basic commands set. Although the extended set does not include all possible
commands, its use provides a standard way of implementing known features of transmitters.
This standard will be updated at appropriate intervals should new capabilities arise. Commands
in the extended command set are shown in Table M-2.

TABLE N-2. EXTENDED COMMAND SET
Command Function
DP(DPOL) Sets or queries data polarity (NORM or INV).
DS(DSRC) Sets or queries the data source (INT or EXT).
ID(IDP) Sets or queries the internal data pattern (one of five possible settings).
CS(CLKS) Sets or queries the clock source (INT or EXT).
IC(ICR) Sets or queries the internal clock rate.
FC(FEC) Sets or queries forward error correction (ON or OFF).
FC(FEC) YYYY Set specific forward error correction (ON or OFF).
RP(RPWR) Sets or queries the output RF power (HI or LO).
TE(TEMP) Queries the internal temperature (in Celsius).
DV(DVS) Deviation sensitivity for PCM/FM mode.
SP(SLP) Low power consumption mode, sleep mode.
VP() Variable RF power command.

N-7

5.2 Commands: Extended Command Set.

5.2.1 Data Polarity. Data polarity is set or queried with the DP(DPOL) mnemonic.

a. Set Data Polarity. Use DP(DPOL) X <CR> where X corresponds to a 1 or 0.
Actual data polarity, when referenced to the input clock, does not need to be known,
this command either inverts the incoming data or does not. If the command is
accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a response.

Command Polarity
DP(DPOL) 0 Normal
DP(DPOL) 1 Inverted

In the event of an incorrect data polarity command, the transmitter will maintain
its current setting and return ERR DP(DPOL) X <CR> to indicate the error and
return the current data polarity setting for the transmitter.

b. Query Data Polarity. DP(DPOL) <CR> queries the current data polarity and
returns DP(DPOL) X <CR> where integer X is represented in the above table.

5.2.2 Data Source. Data source is set or queried with the DS(DSRC) mnemonic.

a. Set Data Source. Use DS(DSRC) X <CR> where X corresponds to a 1 or 0. If the
command is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a response.

Command Source
DS(DSRC) 0 External
DS(DSRC) 1 Internal

In the event of an incorrect data source command, the transmitter will return
ERR DS(DSRC) X <CR> to indicate the error and return the currently set data
source state.

b. Query Data Source. DS(DSRC) <CR> queries the currently set data source and
returns DS(DSRC) X <CR> where integer X is represented in the above table.

c. Saving Data Source. See section 4.2.8.1 regarding saving the data source setting.

N-8

5.2.3 Internal Data Pattern. The internal data pattern is set or queried with the ID(IDP)
mnemonic.

a. Set Internal Data Pattern. Use ID(IDP) X where X corresponds to the internal data
pattern. If the command is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a response.

b. Example Internal Data Patterns. Example patterns are shown below.

Command Pattern
ID(IDP) 9 2
9
-1 (511 bits)
ID(IDP) 11 2
11
-1 (2047 bits)
ID(IDP) 15 2
15
-1 (32767 bits)
ID(IDP) 20 2
20
-1 (1048575 bits)
ID(IDP) 23 2
23
-1 (8388607 bits)
ID(IDP) 0 0x00 Fixed repeating
ID(IDP) A 0xAA Fixed repeating
ID(IDP) F 0xFF Fixed repeating
ID(IDP) XXXX 0xXXXX Fixed repeating

Selection of which patterns to implement is left up to the manufacturer. If an
error occurs, the transmitter will return ERR ID(IDP) X <CR> to indicate the error
and return the current data source setting for the transmitter.

c. Query Internal Data Pattern. ID(IDP) <CR> queries the currently set internal data
pattern and returns ID(IDP) X <CR> where integer X is represented in the above
table.

d. Example Command Use. This feature can be used for system characterization and
troubleshooting. A known bit pattern can be used to test and characterize telemetry
systems end-to-end or isolate baseband signal problems to the transmitter.

5.2.4 Clock Source. The clock source is set or queried with the CS(CLKS) mnemonic.

a. Set Clock Source. Use CS(CLKS) X <CR> where X corresponds to a 1 or 0. If the
command is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a response.

Command Source
CS(CLKS) 0 External
CS(CLKS) 1 Internal

In the event of an incorrect command, the transmitter will return ERR
CS(CLKS) X <CR> to indicate the error and the current clock source setting for the
transmitter.

b. Query Clock Source. CS(CLKS) <CR> queries the currently set clock source and
returns CS(CLKS) X <CR> where integer X is represented in the above table.
N-9

c. Example Command Use. Internal data can be clocked either with an external or
internal clock. This command allows the user to clock the known data with an
existing external clock or select the internal clock for more flexibility.

d. Saving Clock Source. See section 4.2.8.1 regarding saving the clock source setting.

5.2.5 Internal Clock Rate. The internal clock rate is set or queried with the IC(ICR)
mnemonic.

a. Set Internal Clock Rate. Use IC(ICR) XX.XXX <CR> where XX.XXX
corresponds to the clock frequency in MHz. Actual range for the clock frequency is
left to the manufacturer but should correspond to the specified useable input clock
frequency range. Resolution should be +/-1 kHz. Accuracy for the internal clock is
left to the manufacturer but should correspond to internal values for the transmitter.
If the command is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a response.

In the event of an incorrect command, the transmitter will identify the error,
default to its current state, and return ERR IC(ICR) XX.XXX <CR> where
XX.XXX indicates indicate the current clock source for the transmitter.

b. Query Internal Clock Rate. IC(ICR) <CR> queries the currently set internal clock
rate and returns IC(ICR) XX.XXX where XX.XXX is the current set internal clock
rate in MHz.

5.2.6 Forward Error Correction. Forward error correction is set or queried with the FC(FEC)
mnemonic. If a type of forward error correction is implemented in the transmitter, this command
will enable or disable or query the current setting.

a. Set Forward Error Correction. Use FC(FEC) X <CR> where X corresponds
to a 1 or 0. If the command is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a response.

Command Source
FC(FEC) 0 Disable
FC(FEC) 1 Enable

In the event of an incorrect Forward Error Correction command, the transmitter
will return ERR FC(FEC) X <CR> to indicate the error and return the current
forward error correction setting for the transmitter.

b. Query Forward Error Correction Setting. FC(FEC) <CR> queries whether or not
FEC is set. The current setting is returned with FC(FEC) X <CR> where integer X
is represented in the above table.

N-10

5.2.7 Multiple Forward Error Correction Codes. In the event that more than one version of
FEC is implemented in the transmitter, a second mnemonic FC(FEC) YYYY will be added,
where YYYY refers to the type of FEC implemented.

a. Set Specific Forward Error Correction. Use FEC YYYY X <CR> where X
corresponds to 0 through 9 for 10 different types, if required, of that specific forward
error correction. If the command is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a response.

b. Examples of FEC codes. The following table is provided for reference only.

Command Type
TPC Turbo Product Code
RS Reed-Solomon Code
LDPC Low Density Parity Check Code

Error reporting and querying will be done in the same fashion as paragraph 5.2.6.
To turn off multiple forward error correction, the FC(FEC) 0 <CR> will be issued.

5.2.8 RF Power (Hi/Low). High output power or low output power is set or queried with the
RP(RPWR) mnemonic. Low output power is determined to be the lower of two output power
settings.

a. Set RF Output Power. Use RP(RPWR) X <CR> where X corresponds to a 1 or a 0.
If the command is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a response.

Command Output RF Power Level
RP(RPWR) 0 Low
RP(RPWR) 1 High

b. Query RF Output Power Level. RP(RPWR) <CR> queries the currently set output
RF power level and returns RP(RPWR) X <CR> where integer X is represented in
the above table.

In the event of an incorrect RF Power command, the transmitter will return
ERR RP(RPWR) X <CR> to indicate the error and return the current RF Power
setting for the transmitter.

c. Example use. The low setting could be used for lab testing or ground checks when
transmitter and receive antennas are co-located. The high power setting is for normal,
over-the-air telemetry transmission.

N-11

5.2.9 Internal Temperature. Internal temperature is only a query with the TE(TEMP)
mnemonic.

Using the Query Internal Temperature TE(TEMP) will query the current internal
temperature of the transmitter and returns TE(TEMP) XXX where XXX is the current internal
Celsius temperature of the transmitter.

5.2.10 Deviation Sensitivity. The sensitivity to an analog input can be set or queried with the
DV(DVS) mnemonic.

a. Set Deviation Sensitivity. Use DV(DVS) X.XX <CR> where X.XX corresponds to
the deviation sensitivity in MHz/V. Range of the sensitivity adjustment is left up to
the transmitter manufacturer. If the command is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued
as a response.

PCM/FM mode must be selected first in order for this command to be valid. If
this is not done prior to the command and/or an incorrect value would constitute an
incorrect deviation sensitivity command. In the event of an incorrect command, the
transmitter will return ERR DV(DVS) X.XX <CR> to indicate the error and the
current deviation sensitivity setting for the transmitter.

b. Query Deviation Sensitivity. DV(DVS) <CR> queries the deviation sensitivity and
returns DV(DVS) X.XX <CR> where X.XX corresponds to the deviation
sensitivity in MHz/V.

5.2.11 Low Power Consumption, Sleep Mode. The transmitter can be placed into a mode of
low input power consumption with the SP(SLP) mnemonic.

a. Set Low Power Mode. Use SP(SLP) X where X corresponds to a 1 or 0 as shown in
the following table. If the command is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a
response.

Command Source
SP(SLP) 0 Full Operation Mode
SP(SLP) 1 Sleep Mode

Sleep mode powers down all nonessential circuitry within the transmitter to
reduce input power consumption. Note, in order to return from sleep mode, the
transmitter must monitor and recognize the SP(SLP) 0 command. In the event of an
incorrect command, the transmitter will return ERR SP(SLP) X <CR> to indicate
the error and the current power mode setting for the transmitter.

c. Query Power Mode. SP(SLP) <CR> queries the power mode setting and returns
SP(SLP) X <CR> where integer X is represented in the above table.

N-12

5.2.12 Variable Power Mode. The transmitter can support user selectable output power levels
using the VP XX<CR> mnemonic.

a. Set Variable Power Level. Use VP XX<CR> or VP X<CR> to set a range of RF output
power levels available in discrete predefined steps. If the command is accepted, an
OK<CR> is issued as a response. In the event of an incorrect command, the
transmitter will return ERR VP XX<CR> to indicate the error and the current variable
power level for the transmitter.

b. Query Variable Power Level. VP<CR> queries the power mode setting and returns
VP XX<CR> where integer XX is represented in the table below.

c. Look Up Table. The actual value of output power that corresponds to XX is undefined.
Each manufacturer will provide an equation or lookup table that defines the output power
as a function of XX.

Command RF Power Level
VPP XX Full Power (equivalent to RP 1)
VP (XX 1) Less then full power
VPP 1 (or VPP 01) More then low power
VPP 0 (or VPP 00) Low Power (equivalent to RP 0)

6.0 Transmitter Communication Example
A typical terminal window is shown below for clarity. Transmitter communication
initialization is assumed.

>FR 1435.5
>OK
>FR
>FR 1435.5
>MO 0
>OK
>DE 1
>ERR DE 0
>MO 7
>ERR MOD 0
>RGDW
>ERR
>TE
>TE 085
>QA
>FR 1435.5
>MO 0
>DE 0
>RA 1
>RF 1
>
N-13

7.0 Non-standard Commands

This paragraph is reserved for transmitter commands that fall outside of the
commands and command structure discussed above. Additions to this
section will be made as non-standard commands are derived and found
applicable to this standard.

8.0 Physical Layer(s)
The above command sets are independent of the physical layer over which the commands
are transferred. The command set should be implemented in such a way that it can be translated
over any physical layer interfacing with the transmitter.

8.1 Serial Interface. Should a three-wire serial interface be chosen, it should be implemented
via a three wire serial interface compatible with EIA232 (http://www.eia.org/). The intent of this
standard is not to force complete EIA-232 compliance; Rather, the intent is to establish a serial
communication interface with the transmitter so that any terminal program, such as Windows
HyperTerminal, or Linux Minicom, can be used to communicate with the transmitter. A transmit
(Tx) and receive (Rx) line will be supplied with an associated ground return; the choice of
connector pin-out being left up to the manufacturer. The serial interface will operate at one of
the common transfer rates. Typical baud rates are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, and 115200 baud. The default shall be 9600 baud. Should operation at another
baud rate be desired, a command must be implemented to accommodate this capability. The
command shall have the form BD(BAUD) as described below.

a. Baud Rate. Serial communication baud rate shall be set or queried with the
BD(BAUD) mnemonic.

N-14

N-15
b. Set Baud Rate. Use BD(BAUD) X <CR> where X corresponds to a number (0-9)
in the following table. If the command is accepted, an OK <CR> is issued as a
response.

Command Rate
BD(BAUD) 0 300
BD(BAUD) 1 600
BD(BAUD) 2 1200
BD(BAUD) 3 2400
BD(BAUD) 4 4800
BD(BAUD) 5 9600
BD(BAUD) 6 19200
BD(BAUD) 7 38400
BD(BAUD) 8 57600
BD(BAUD) 9 115200

c. Query Baud Rate. BD(BAUD) <CR> queries the set baud rate of the transmitter
and returns BD(BAUD) X <CR> where integer X is represented in the above table.

In the event of an incorrect baud rate command, the transmitter will return ERR
BD(BAUD) X<CR> to indicate the error and return the current baud rate setting for
the transmitter.

Communication should be compatible with a terminal set-up consisting of one of
the above baud rates with 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, 1 start bit, and no parity. ASCII
characters will be transmitted and received. No hardware or software handshaking
should be implemented and connector pin-out is left to the manufacturer.

**** END OF APPENDIX N ****
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix O, April 2009

APPENDIX O

FLOATING POINT FORMATS


1.0 Introduction..................................................................................................... O-1
2.0 IEEE 754 32 Bit Single Precision Floating Point ........................................... O-2
3.0 IEEE 754 64 Bit Double Precision Floating Point ......................................... O-2
4.0 MIL STD 1750A 32 Bit Single Precision Floating Point ............................... O-2
5.0 MIL STD 1750A 48 Bit Double Precision Floating Point ............................. O-3
6.0 DEC 32 Bit Single Precision Floating Point................................................... O-3
7.0 DEC 64 Bit Double Precision Floating Point ................................................. O-3
8.0 DEC 64 Bit G Double Precision Floating Point.......................................... O-4
9.0 IBM 32 Bit Single Precision Floating Point ................................................... O-4
10.0 IBM 64 Bit Double Precision Floating Point.................................................. O-4
11.0 TI (Texas Instruments) 32 Bit Single Precision Floating Point...................... O-5
12.0 TI (Texas Instruments) 40 Bit Extended Precision Floating Point ................. O-5

LIST OF TABLES

Table O-1. Floating Point Formats.................................................................................... O-1

CHANGES TO THIS EDITION OF APPENDIX O

item. Paragraph 8.0 is entirely new.


ii


APPENDIX O
FLOATING POINT FORMATS

1.0 Introduction
Table O-1 provides a summary of floating point formats. Details of each format are
shown on the pages following the table.

TABLE O-1. FLOATING POINT FORMATS
Type Size Radix Sign Exponent Fraction Bias Formula
IEEE_32 32 2 1 8 23 127 (-1
S
)(1.F)(2
(E-127)
)
IEEE_64 64 2 1 11 52 1023 (-1
S
)(1.F)(2
(E-1023)
)
1750A_32 32 2 0 8 24 0 (0.F)(2
E
)
1750A_48 48 2 0 8 40 0 (0.F)(2
E
)
DEC_32 32 2 1 8 23 128 (-1
S
)(0.1F)(2
(E-128)
)
DEC_64 64 2 1 8 55 128 (-1
S
)(0.1F)(2
(E-128)
)
DEC_64G 64 2 1 11 52 1024 (-1
S
)(0.1F)(2
(E-1024)
)
IBM_32 32 16 1 7 24 64 (-1
S
)(0.F)(16
(E-64)
)
IBM_64 64 16 1 7 56 64 (-1
S
)(0.F)(16
(E-64)
)
TI_32 32 2 1 8 24 0 ((-2)
S
+ (0.F))(2
E
)
TI_40 40 2 1 8 32 0 ((-2)
S
+ (0.F))(2
E
)

O-1

2.0 IEEE 754 32 Bit Single Precision Floating Point
S Exponent Fraction
1 2 9 10 32
2
-1
2
-23

Value = (-1
S
)(1.F)(2
(E-127)
)

S = sign: 0 = Positive, 1 = Negative
Exponent = power of 2 with bias of 127
Fraction = F portion of 23 bit fraction 1.F
0: E = 0, F = 0

3.0 IEEE 754 64 Bit Double Precision Floating Point
S Exponent Fraction
1 2 12 13 64
2
-1
2
-52

Value = (-1
S
)(1.F)(2
(E-1023)
)

Fraction = F portion of 52 bit fraction 1.F
0: E = 0, F = 0

4.0 MIL STD 1750A 32 Bit Single Precision Floating Point
S Fraction Exponent
1 2 24 25 32
2
-1
2
-23

Value = (0.F)(2
E
)

Exponent = 2's complement power of 2
S + Fraction = Normalized, 2's complement F portion of 24 bit fraction 0.F
(Bit 2 MUST be set for positive, clear for negative)
0: F = 0

O-2

5.0 MIL STD 1750A 48 Bit Double Precision Floating Point
S Fraction (MSW) Exponent Fraction
1 2 24 25 32 33 48
2
-1
2
-23
2
-24
2
-31

Value = (0.F)(2
E
)

S + Fraction = Normalized, 2's complement F portion of 40 bit fraction 0.F
(Bit 2 MUST be set for positive, clear for negative)
0: F = 0

6.0 DEC 32 Bit Single Precision Floating Point
S Exponent Fraction
1 2 9 10 32
2
-2
2
-24

Value = (-1
S
)(0.1F)(2
(E-128)
)

Fraction = F portion of 23 bit fraction 0.1F
0: S = 0 & F = 0 & E = 0

7.0 DEC 64 Bit Double Precision Floating Point
S Exponent Fraction
1 2 9 10 64
2
-2
2
-56

Value = (-1
S
)(0.1F)(2
(E-128)
)

0: S = 0 & F = 0 & E = 0

O-3

8.0 DEC 64 Bit G Double Precision Floating Point
S Exponent Fraction
1 2 12 13 64
2
-2
2
-53

Value = (-1
S
)(0.1F)(2
(E-1024)
)

0: S = 0 & F = 0 & E = 0

9.0 IBM 32 Bit Single Precision Floating Point
S Exponent Fraction
1 2 8 9 32
2
-1
2
-24

Value = (-1
S
)(0.F)(16
(E-64)
)

Fraction = Normalized F portion of 24 bit fraction 0.F
(Bits 9-12 cannot be all zero)
0: F = 0

10.0 IBM 64 Bit Double Precision Floating Point
S Exponent Fraction
1 2 8 9 64
2
-1
2
-56

Value = (-1
S
)(0.F)(16
(E-64)
)

Fraction = Normalized F portion of 56 bit fraction 0.F
(Bits 9-12 cannot be all zero)
0: F = 0
O-4

O-5

11.0 TI (Texas Instruments) 32 Bit Single Precision Floating Point
Exponent S Fraction
1 8 9 10 32
2
-1
2
-23

Value = ((-2)
S
+(0.F))(2
E
)

Fraction = 2's complement F portion of 24 bit fraction 1.F
0: E = -128

12.0 TI (Texas Instruments) 40 Bit Extended Precision Floating Point
Exponent S Fraction
1 8 9 10 40
2
-1
2
-31

Value = ((-2)
S
+(0.F))(2
E
)

Fraction = 2's complement F portion of 32 bit fraction 1.F
0: E = -128

**** END OF APPENDIX O ****
Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Appendix P, April 2009

APPENDIX P

DERIVED PARAMETER SPECIFICATION


1.0 Derived Parameter Definition.......................................................................... P-1
2.0 Derived Algorithm Grammar: Components ................................................... P-1
3.0 Operators.......................................................................................................... P-2
4.0 Numeric Constants........................................................................................... P-4
5.0 Measurements .................................................................................................. P-5
6.0 Mathematical Functions................................................................................... P-5
7.0 Derived Grammar Syntax Overview............................................................... P-7
8.0 Grammar Examples ......................................................................................... P-8
9.0 Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard (TMATS) Examples ...................... P-13
10.0 Glossary of Terms.......................................................................................... P-17

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure P-1. Grammar syntax............................................................................................... P-7
Figure P-2. Yacc Grammar example. ................................................................................. P-9
Figure P-3. Lex Grammar example. ................................................................................. P-11
Figure P-4. Example program (main). .............................................................................. P-12

LIST OF TABLES

Table P-1. Arithmetic Operators ....................................................................................... P-2
Table P-2. Bit Manipulation Operators ............................................................................. P-2
Table P-3. Relational Operators ........................................................................................ P-3
Table P-4. Ternary (If Then Else) Operator ...................................................................... P-3
Table P-5. Associativity Operator ..................................................................................... P-3
Table P-6. Precedence and Associativity of Operators From Highest to Lowest ............. P-4
Table P-7. Numeric Constants (Examples) ....................................................................... P-4
Table P-8. Measurements (Examples)............................................................................... P-5
Table P-9. Table of Selected Mathematical Functions...................................................... P-6

APPENDIX P IS A NEW APPENDIX
(APRIL 2009)

ii


APPENDIX P
DERIVED PARAMETER SPECIFICATION

1.0 Derived Parameter Definition
Derived parameters are measurements that do not appear in any data stream; instead, they
are calculated from telemetry measurements in a data stream, numeric constants, and/or other
derived measurements. In a Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard (TMATS) file, derived
measurements will only have entries in the C group; the other TMATS groups containing
measurement names that link to C group entries only include telemetry measurements.

Derived parameters are defined using the Algorithm Type (C-d\DPAT) and Algorithm
(C-d\DPA) attributes in the Derived Parameter section of the TMATS C group. They can be
defined in one of two methods. The first method to specify the name of an algorithm (function
style) and the second method is to specify a text string of the algorithm itself (formula style).
Both of these methods are currently used in telemetry processing systems.

In function style, Algorithm Type is set to N and Algorithm contains the name of a
function, which will be one of the mathematical functions or operators as defined in the derived
algorithm grammar shown in this appendix. The Input Measurand attributes (C-d\DP\N and
C-d\DP-n) and Input Constant attributes (C-d\DPC\N and C-d\DPC-n) are used to specify the
arguments needed by the named function (measurements and numeric constants, respectively, as
defined in the derived algorithm grammar in this appendix). The Trigger Measurand and
Number of Occurrences attributes are used to specify when and how often the derived parameter
will be calculated.

In formula style, Algorithm Type is set to A and Algorithm contains the actual
function, given according to the derived algorithm grammar defined in this appendix. The Input
Measurand attributes and Input Constant attributes are not used. The Trigger Measurand and
Number of Occurrences attributes are used to specify when and how often the derived parameter
will be calculated.

2.0 Derived Algorithm Grammar: Components
Derived algorithm grammar is from the four components listed below. The derived
algorithm may be any combination of operators, functions, measurements, and numeric constants
strung together using the guidelines in this document to create complex mathematical
expressions (see paragraph 6.0.2). Sample syntaxes for the Yet Another Compiler Compiler
(Yacc) grammar and Lexicon (Lex) grammar are provided in paragraph 8.0.

a. Operators. (paragraph 3.0)
b. Numeric Constants. (paragraph 4.0)
c. Measurements. (paragraph 5.0)
d. Mathematical Functions. (paragraph 6.0).

P-1

3.0 Operators
Operators are simply mathematical functions that have a special syntax in the grammar.
They have operator symbol(s) that have well-defined arguments and return a value as a result.
Logical operators are merely functions that return a value of 0 and non-zero for false and true
respectively.

3.1 Arithmetic Operators.

TABLE P-1. ARITHMETIC OPERATORS
Operator Description Example
+ Addition (Sum) A + B
- Subtraction (Difference) A B
* Multiplication (Product) A * B
/ Division (Quotient) A / B
% Modulus (Remainder) A % B
** Exponentiation A ** B

3.2 Bit Manipulation Operators.

TABLE P-2. BIT MANIPULATION OPERATORS
| Bit-wise OR A | B
& Bit-wise AND A & B
^ Bit-wise XOR A ^ B
~ Bit-wise NOT ~A
<< Bit-wise Left Shift A << B
>> Bit-wise Right Shift A >> B

P-2

3.3 Relational Operators.

TABLE P-3. RELATIONAL OPERATORS
= = Equal To A = = B
!= Not Equal To A != B
<= Less Than or Equal To A <= B
>= Greater Than or Equal To A >= B
< Less Than A < B
> Greater Than A > B
|| Logical OR A || B
&& Logical AND A && B
! Logical NOT (Negation) !A

3.4 Ternary (if then else) Operator.

TABLE P-4. TERNARY (IF THEN ELSE) OPERATOR
?: Ternary Operator (if-then-else) A ? B : C

3.5 Associativity Operator.

TABLE P-5. ASSOCIATIVITY OPERATOR
( ) Associativity (A + B) * C

P-3

3.6 Precedence and Associativity of Operators From Highest to Lowest.

TABLE P-6. PRECEDENCE AND ASSOCIATIVITY OF
OPERATORS FROM HIGHEST TO LOWEST
Operators Associativity
( ) Left to right
-(UNARY) Right to left
! ~ Right to left
** Left to right
& Left to right
^ Left to right
| Left to right
* / % Left to right
+ - Left to right
<< >> Left to right
< > <= >= Left to right
= = != Left to right
&& Left to right
|| Left to right
?: Right to left
, Left to right

4.0 Numeric Constants
Numeric constants are simply numbers used in the calculations.

TABLE P-7. NUMERIC CONSTANTS (EXAMPLES)
Description Examples
Any string of characters that contains only numerals

1234
0
Any string of characters that contains only numerals and a-f
preceded by "0x" (hex)
0x12ab
0x1
Any string of characters that contains only numerals and a
single ".".

1.2
1.
.2
Any string of characters that contains only numerals, in
scientific notation.

1.0E+10
10E-10
.1e6
Note: As in the TMATS standard itself, alphanumeric data items are case
insensitive; either upper or lower case characters are allowed.

P-4

5.0 Measurements
Measurements may be telemetry measurements or other derived measurements.

TABLE P-8. MEASUREMENTS (EXAMPLES)
Description Examples
Any string of characters beginning with an alphabetic charac
and containing only alphanumerics and "$_"
A00.1
A$1
Any string of characters that is quoted with " and does not
contain ".

"0001"
measurement quoted,
though this is insane - it
is legal
Any string of characters quoted with ' and does not contain '. 'Air Speed'
Any string of characters that contains only numerals and at
least one alphabetic character. This differs from hex
because it does not begin with 0x.

00A1
0X (this is ok, because it
does not have a number
after 0X)
Note: As in the TMATS standard itself, alphanumeric data items are case insensitive;
either upper or lower case characters are allowed.

6.0 Mathematical Functions
6.1 Mathematical Function Format. Mathematical functions are numerical functions that
take some input, perform a specific calculation, and return a value as the result. Each
mathematical function has the form name(arg1,arg2,...) which identifies a well-defined name
and contains argument(s) that are separated by commas and surrounded by parentheses. A list of
selected mathematical functions is provided at Table P-9.

6.2 Complex Use of Functions. Examples of how functions can be used in mathematical
expressions are:

a. A*(SIN(B/C)+D)
b. A*3.0
c. "0001"*A+~B
d. A<B || B<<C ? D : E
P-5

TABLE P-9. TABLE OF SELECTED MATHEMATICAL FUNCTIONS
Name Description
acos(x) cos
-1
(x) in range [0,], x [-1,1].
asin(x) sin
-1
(x) in range [-/2, /2], x [-1,1].
atan(x) tan
-1
(x) in range [-/2, /2]
atan2(y,x) tan
-1
(y/x) in range [-, ]
ceil(x) smallest integer not less than x
cos(x) cosine of x
cosh(x) hyperbolic cosine of x
exp(x) exponential function, computes e
x

fabs(x) absolute value |x|
floor(x) largest integer not greater than x
fmod(x) floating point remainder
frexpx(d) Find x in [.5,1] and y so that d = x*pow(2,y), return x
frexpy(d) Find x in [.5,1] and y so that d = x*pow(2,y), return y
ldexp(d,i) returns d*pow(2,i)
log(x) natural logarithm ln(x), x > 0
log10(x) base-10 logarithm log
10
(x), x > 0
max(x,y) if x>y, then return x, else return y
min(x,y) if x<y, then return x, else return y
modfd(d) returns integral part of d
modfp(d) returns fractional part of d
pow(x,y) compute a value taken to an exponent, x
y
. An error occurs
when x<=0 and y <= 0 or x < 0 and y is not an integer
sin(x) sine of x
sinh(x) hyperbolic sine of x
sqrt(x) square root x, x>= 0
tan(x) tangent of x
tanh(x) hyperbolic tangent of x
P-6

7.0 Derived Grammar Syntax Overview
The following grammar, strictly speaking, does not match the C language. Although
loosely based on C, the grammar attempts to follow the spirit of the C language. The grammar
contains three terminal symbols (MEASUREMENT, NUMERIC_CONSTANT and
FUNCTION_NAME) not defined here, but easily understood by their names. The grammar
contains two non-terminals, expression and expression-list, which define the entire grammar.
The | operator used in the grammar denotes a choice meaning this or that or Quoted
strings are literal tokens of the grammar.

expression:
expression '+' expression
| expression '-' expression
| expression '*' expression
| expression '/' expression
| expression '|' expression
| expression '&' expression
| expression '%' expression
| expression '**' expression
| expression '?' expression ':' expression
| expression '<' expression
| expression '>' expression
| expression '<=' expression
| expression '>=' expression
| expression '!=' expression
| expression '==' expression
| expression '&&' expression
| expression '||' expression
| '-' expression
| '!' expression
| '~' expression
| ' (' expression ') '
| MEASUREMENT
| NUMERIC_CONSTANT
| FUNCTION_NAME '(' expression_list ')'
| FUNCTION_NAME ' (' ')'

expression-list:
expression
| expression-list ',' expression

Figure P-1. Grammar syntax.

P-7

8.0 Grammar Examples
Examples of Yacc and Lex grammar are shown in Figure P-2 and Figure P-3,
respectively. The grammar will recognize the derived syntax; that is, they will report whether or
not a given text string is valid syntax. However, the examples are not intended to be complete;
in other words, they will not compile or perform the calculation. However, the user needs only
to build a program around them in order to use them; a simple example main is shown in
Figure P-4.
.
The Yacc is a parser generator developed by Stephen C. Johnson at American Telephone
and Telegraph (AT&T) for the Unix operating system. It generates a parser, in C language code,
based on an analytic grammar written in a notation similar to Backus-Naur Form (BNF). The
Lex, a program that generates lexical analyzers, is commonly used along with the Yacc parser
generator. Originally written by Eric Schmidt and Mike Lesk, Lex is the standard lexical
analyzer generator on many Unix systems. A tool exhibiting its behavior is specified as part of
the Portable Operating System Interface (POSIX) standard.

P-8

%{

%}

%token ERR
%token NAME
%token CONSTANT

// Operator Precedence Rules (Lowest First, Highest Last)

%left ','
%right COND '?'
%left OR
%left AND
%left EQUAL NOTEQUAL
%left '<' '>' LESSEQUAL GREATEREQUAL
%left LSHIFT RSHIFT
%left '-' '+'
%left '*' '/' '%'
%left '|'
%left '^'
%left '&'
%left POWER
%right '!' '~'
%right UMINUS

// Definition of Rules

%%
expression:
expression '+' expression
| expression '-' expression
| expression '*' expression
| expression '^' expression
| expression '&' expression
| expression '%' expression
| expression LSHIFT expression
| expression RSHIFT expression
| expression POWER expression
| expression '?' expression ':' expression %prec COND

Figure P-2. Yacc Grammar example. Page 1 x 2
P-9

| '-' expression %prec UMINUS
| '!' expression
| '~' expression
| '(' expression ')'
| NAME
| CONSTANT
| NAME '(' expression_list ')'
| NAME '(' ')'
| expression '<' expression
| expression '>' expression
| expression LESSEQUAL expression
| expression GREATEREQUAL expression
| expression NOTEQUAL expression
| expression EQUAL expression
| expression OR expression
| expression AND expression
;

expression_list:
expression
| expression_list ',' expression
;

%%

Figure P-2. Yacc Grammar example. Page 2 x 2

P-10

%{
#include y.tab.h
%}

%%

[\t\n ] {}

\=\= { return(EQUAL); } // Equal To
\!\= { return(NOTEQUAL); } // Not Equal To
\<\= { return(LESSEQUAL); } // Less Than or Equal To
\>\= { return(GREATEREQUAL); } // Greater Than or Equal To
(\*\*) { return(POWER); } // Power (FORTRANish)
\|\| { return(OR); } // Logical OR
\&\& { return(AND); } // Logical AND
\<\< { return(LSHIFT); } // Bitwise Left Shift
\>\> { return(RSHIFT); } // Bitwise Right Shift

\> | // Greather Than
\< | // Less Than
\! | // Logical Negation
\? | // Ternary Operator ?
\: | // Ternary Operator :
\% | // Modulus (Remainder)
\, | // Comma Operator (function)
\* | // Multiplication (Product)
\/ | // Division (Quotient)
\+ | // Addition (Sum)
\- | // Subtraction (Difference)
\| | // Bitwise OR
\& | // Bitwise AND
\^ | // Bitwise XOR
\~ | // Bitwise NOT
$ |
$ { return(yytext[0]); }

Figure P-3. Lex Grammar example. Page 1 x 2
P-11

([0][xX][0-9a-fA-F]+)|([0-9]+) {
return(CONSTANT);
}

(([0-9]+\.?[0-9]*)|([0-9]*\.[0-9]+))([eE][-+]?[0-9]+)? {
return(CONSTANT);
}

\"[^\"\n]*\" |
\'[^'\n]*\' {
return(NAME);
}
([0-9]+[a-zA-Z])?[a-zA-Z0-9$_\.]+ {
return(NAME);
}

. { return(ERR); } // Catchall Error

%%

Figure P-3. Lex Grammar. Page 2 x 2

yywrap()
{
return 1;
}
yyerror(char *s)
{
printf("error: %s\n",s);
}
main()
{
yyparse();
}

Figure P-4. Example program (main).

P-12

9.0 Telemetry Attributes Transfer Standard (TMATS) Examples
In the following examples, input measurement names are in the form of MA, MB, and
MC. Derived parameter names are in the form of DMA, DMB, and DMC.

9.1 TMATS Example 1:

DMA = MA + MB

Function style

C-1\DCN:DMA; Derived parameter
C-1\DCT:DER; Derived conversion type
C-1\DPAT:N; Name of algorithm will be given
C-1\DPA:+; Addition operator
C-1\DPTM:MB; Measurement MB triggers the calculation
C-1\DPNO:1; Every sample of MB triggers the calculation
C-1\DP\N:2; Two input measurements
C-1\DP-1:MA;
C-1\DP-2:MB;

Formula style

C-2\DCN:DMA;
C-2\DCT:DER;
C-2\DPAT:A; Algorithm will be given
C-2\DPA:MA + MB; Algorithm syntax
C-2\DPTM:MB;
C-2\DPNO:1;

9.2 TMATS Example 2.

DMB = MC / MD

Function style

C-3\DCN:DMB; Derived parameter
C-3\DPA:/; Division operator
C-3\DPTM:MD; Measurement MD triggers the calculation
C-3\DPNO:1; Every sample of MD triggers the calculation
C-3\DP-1:MC;
C-3\DP-2:MD;

P-13

Note : In function style, the algorithm determines the meaning of the input
measurements. In this example, the division algorithm assigns the first input
measurement as the dividend and the second input measurement as the divisor.

Formula style

C-4\DCN:DMB;
C-4\DCT:DER;
C-4\DPA:MC / MD; Algorithm syntax
C-4\DPTM:MD;
C-4\DPNO:1;


DMC = square root of ME

Function style

C-5\DCN:DMC; Derived parameter
C-5\DPA:SQRT; Square root function
C-5\DP\N:1; One input measurement
C-5\DP-1:ME;

Formula style

C-6\DCN :DMC;
C-6\DCT :DER;
C-6\DPA:SQRT(ME); Algorithm syntax

Note : The trigger measurand is not given ; there is only one input, which must
trigger the calculation.


DMD = MF*(SIN(MG/MH)+MJ)

Function style

C-7\DCN:XA; Derived parameter
C-7\DPA:/; Division operator
P-14

C-7\DP-1:MG;
C-7\DP-2:MH;
C-8\DCN:XB; Derived parameter
C-8\DPA:SIN; Sine function
C-8\DP\N:1; One input measurement
C-8\DP-1:XA;
C-9\DCN:XC; Derived parameter
C-9\DPA:+; Addition operator
C-9\DP-1:XB;
C-9\DP-2:MJ;
C-10\DCN:DMD; Derived parameter
C-10\DPA:*; Multiplication operator
C-10\DP-1:MF;
C-10\DP-2:XC;

Note: In this example, several steps are needed, each generating an intermediate
result (XA, XB, and XC), before the derived parameter is obtained. This method
is shown only for illustrative purposes and is not recommended. If this function is
needed, a custom algorithm should be written to implement it. Then the function
style could be used, as follows:

C-11\DCN:DMD; Derived parameter
C-11\DPA:NEWALG; Name of custom algorithm
C-11\DPTM:MJ;
C-11\DPNO:1;
C-11\DP\N:4; Four input measurements
C-11\DP-1:MF;
C-11\DP-2:MG;
C-11\DP-3:MH;
C-11\DP-4:MJ;

P-15

Formula style

C-12\DCN:DMD;
C-12\DCT:DER;
C-12\DPA:MF*(SIN(MG/MH)+MJ);
C-12\DPTM:MJ;
C-12\DPNO:1;

P-16

P-17
10.0 Glossary of Terms
Backus-Naur Form (BNF): A metasyntax used to express context-free grammar; that is, a
formal way to describe formal languages. John Backus and Peter Naur developed a context free
grammar to define the syntax of a programming language by using two sets of rules: i.e., lexical
rules and syntactic rules

Compiler: A computer program (or set of programs) that transforms source code written in a
computer language (the source language) into another computer language (the target language,
often having a binary form known as object code).

Compiler Compiler (Compiler Generator): A tool that creates a parser, interpreter, or
compiler from some form of formal description. The earliest and still most common form of
compiler-compiler is a parser generator, whose input is a grammar (usually in BNF) of a
programming language, and whose generated output is the source code of a parser.

Computer Programs: Also called software programs, or just programs, are instructions for a
computer.

Grammar: A set of formation rules that describe which strings formed from the alphabet of a
formal language are syntactically valid within the language.

Interpreter: Normally means a computer program that executes instructions written in a
programming language.

Parser Generator: See Compiler Compiler.

Parsing: The process of analyzing a sequence of tokens (for example, words) to determine their
grammatical structure with respect to a given (more or less) formal grammar.

Programming Language: A machine-readable artificial language designed to express
computations that can be performed by a machine, particularly a computer.

Source Code: Any collection of statements or declarations written in some human-readable
computer programming language.

Unix: A computer operating system originally developed in 1969 by a group of AT&T
employees at Bell Labs.

Yet Another: In hacker jargon, the use of yet another as a way of padding out an acronym is
fairly common. It was first used by Stephen C. Johnson in the late 1970s in naming Yacc as a
humorous reference to the proliferation of such compiler-compilers at the time.

Yet Another Compiler Compiler (Yacc ): Supplied with Unix and Unix-like systems.

Irig 106 2009

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Irig 106 2009

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Telemetry Standard RCC Document 106-09, Table of Contents, April 2009

56' 7.4" basic dimension

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi